Fed STD 191a

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.
com
FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

July 20, 1978
SUPERSEDING
Fed. Test Method. No. 191
December 31, 1968
FEDERAL STANDARD
FOR
TEXTILE TEST METHODS
This standard was approved by the

Commissioner, Federal Supply Service,
General Services Administration, for
the use of all Federal agencies.
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1978 - 261-423/1108

Orders for this publication are to be placed with General Services Ministration,
acting as an agent for the Superintendent of Documents. Single copies of this
standard are available, without charge at the GSA Business Service Centers in
Boston, New York, Philadelphia, Atlanta, Chicago, Kansas City, MO, Fort Worth,
Houston, Denver, San Francisco, Los Angeles, and Seattle, WA. Additional copies
may be purchased for 11.25 from the General Services Administration, Specifica-
tions Activity, printed Materials Supply Division, Building 197, Naval Weapons
Plant, Washington, DC 20407.
FSC 83GP
Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
INFORMATION SHEET
ON
FEDERAL TEST METHOD STANDARDS
This Federal Test Method Standard is issued in looseleaf form to permit the
insertion or removal of new or revised sections and test methods.
All users of Federal Test Method Standards should keep them up to date by
inserting revised or new test methods as issued, and removing superseded and
cancelled pages.
New and revised material and cancellations will be issued under Change
Notices which will be numbered consecutively and will bear the date of issuance.
Change Notices should be retained and filed in front of the Alphabetical Index
of the Standard until such time as they are superseded by a reissue of the
entire Standard.

July 20, 1978
FEDERAL TEST METHOD STANDARD
TEXTILE TEST METHODS

AUTHORITY . This standard is issued pursuant to the Federal Property and
Administrative Service Act of 1949, as ammended, and its application to the
purchase of commodities referred to herein is mandatory on all Federal agencies.
SECTION 1 - SCOPE AND CONTENTS
1.1 Scope. This standard describes the general physical, chemical and
biological methods for testing textile fibers, yarn, thread, rope, other
cordage, cloth and fabricated textile products for conformance with the require-
ments of Federal and Military Specifications. It does not include certain
methods which are described in the specifications for the materials to which
they apply. This standard was prepared in order to eliminate unnecessary or
undesirable variations in the general procedures. In the event that conflict
should occur between the requirements of this standard and those contained in a
specification or other type of procurement document on date of invitation for
bid, the procurement document or specification shall govern.
1.2 Contents. The contents of this standard are as follows:
Section 1. Scope and Contents
Section 2. Definitions
Section 3. Sampling and Number of Specimens

Section 4. Atmospheric Conditions for Testing
Section 5. General Notes
Section 6. Numerical Index of Test Methods

Section 7. Alphabetical Index of Test Methods
Section 8. Conversion Equivalents

Section 9. Test Methods
Section 10. Supersession Data, Source Information, and Interested Agencies.


July 20, 1978
SECTION 2 - DEFINITIONS
2.1 Scope. For the purpose of this Standard and all procurement documents
referring hereto, the following definitions shall apply:
2.2 General Definitions.
2.2.1 Acceptance of a lot. The approval of a lot conforming to contract or

specification requirements.
2.2.2 Rejection of a lot. The disapproval of a lot as not conforming to the

contract or specification requirements.
2.2.3 Standard sample. A standard sample is a sample of material selected

or designated by the Government to meet material requirements and furnished by
the Government for testing purposes. The standard sample is used in evaluating
the quality of the test specimen for specific characteristics or properties by
direct comparison of the test specimen and standard sample under identical
conditions. Its purpose is to render a definite description of one or more
properties being evaluated.
2.2.4 Test method. A test method is a detailed description of the required
way for conducting a test; it is the act of evaluating or determining a required
property or characteristic of a single sample unit by taking one or more measurement
according to prescribed procedure.
2.2.5 Test result. A test result is the recorded measurement of a required

property or characteristic for a single sample unit when such measurement is
carried out in conformance with prescribed procedure.
2.3 Definitions applicable to sampling.

2.3.1 Random sampling. Random sampling is the procedure used to select items
from the inspection lot so that each item in the lot has an equal chance of being
included in the sample. There are many ways of drawing a random sample, perhaps
the best one is the use of a table of random numbers. Such a table facilitates
the selection of a valid random sample representative of the lot.
2.3.2 Sample. A sample consists of one or more units of a product drawn from
a lot, the units being selected at random without regard for quality.
2.3.3 Sample size. The sample size is the number of units of a product in
the sample selected for inspection.
2.3.4 Sample for test. A specified number of sample units (units of a

product) taken from a lot for the purpose of testing for all physical and chemical
properties for which requirements are specified.
2.3.5 Sample unit (for test purposes). The sample unit is the total quantity
of material necessary to obtain one test result for each of the properties and
characteristics specified in the procurement document. In testing of small
package units, the sample unit may be a package unit randomly selected from the
material representing the lot. In testing commodities in which the units are
individually too small to provide sufficient material for evaluating all the
properties specified in the procurement document, the sample unit may be a
sufficient number of units of the material, taken as an aggregate, to provide
the quantity of material required.

July 20, 1978
SECTION 3 - SAMPLING AND NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
3.1 Sampling. The material to be tested shall be sampled as required in

the applicable procurement document.
3.2 Number of specimens. The number of specimens to be tested for each

property and each sample unit shall be as required by the test method unless
specifically excepted in the procurement document.

July 20, 1978
SECTION 4 - ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS FOR TESTING
4.1 Humidity and temperature conditions for testing. Unless otherwise

specified in the applicable test method or procurement document, physical
tests of textiles and textile products shall be performed under standard
atmospheric conditions and performed on specimens in moisture equilibrium
under standard atmospheric conditions.
4.1.1 Standard atmospheric conditions. Standard atmospheric conditions

for textiles and textile products testing are 65 percent ± 2 percent relative
humidity at a temperature of 70°F ±2°F (21°C ± 1°C).
4.1.2 Moisture equilibrium. Moisture equilibrium is considered to have

been reached when, after free exposure of the material to air in motion,
controlled at standard atmospheric conditions as defined above, and change
in weight in successive weighings made at intervals of one hour is no greater
than 0.25 percent.
4.2 Preconditioning. In the event of dispute concerning the results of

tests that may be affected by the moisture content, the material shall be
preconditioned by being brought to moisture equilibrium with an atmosphere
having a relative humidity of not over 10 percent and a temperature not over
.25°F (52°C). The material shall then be brought to moisture equilibrium
under standard atmospheric conditions as defined above and then tested.

July 20, 1978
SECTION 5 - GENERAL NOTES

5.1 Content of Methods.
5.1.1 Principal subdivisions. The methods are organized under the following
headings: 1. Scope, 2. Test Specimen, 3. Number of Determinations, 4. Apparatus,
Reagents and Method Cited, 5. Procedure, 6. Report and 7. Notes.
5.1.1.1 Scope. A statement of what the test method is intended to do, the
property to be measured or evaluated, the material to which the method is
applicable, and the limitations of the method.
5.1.1.2 Test specimen. This specifies that portion of a sample unit, its
dimensions, and the way in which it is to be taken for a single measurement of
a given property or characteristic, and any special preparation the specimen
may require.
5.1.1.3 Number of determinations. A statement of the number of test specimens

required from each sample unit to be tested.
5.1.1.4 Apparatus, reagents and method(s) cited. A description of the apparatus

and reagents required to carry out the test and any other test method(s) forming
an integral part of the overall procedure.
5.1.1.5 Procedure. Description of the step-by-step directions for carrying

out the test.
5.1.1.5.1 Calculation of results. Description of the techniques required to

insure that the required end result of the characteristic being tested is reached.
5.1.1.6 Report. Specific instructions for expressing the results to insure

uniformity of expression and recording of the results.
5.1.1.7 Notes. Additional, but not mandatory information (eg. addresses of

companies supplying specific apparatus and equipment) which may be used in the
performance of a specific test method.
5.2 Significance of Dimensional Statements in Methods.
5.2.1 Forms used. Numerical requirements are given in any of three forms
illustrated by the following examples: “approximately 2 grams”, “2 grams” and
“2.000 ± 0.002 grams”.
5.2.1.1 Approximately 2 grams”. This form of expression implies that the

numerical requirement is not critical and may vary within reason. The permissable
variation is usually dictated by obvious practical considerations and the nearest
readily obtained approximation to the weight and dimensions may be considered
satisfactory.
FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191.A
5.2.1.2 “2 grams”. This form of expression implies that the numerical

requirement is to be as close to “2 grams” as can be readily measured on the
stated material with the usual, ordinary engineering tools.
5.2.1.3 “2.000 ± 0.002 grams”. This form of expression implies that the
numerical requirement in question must be between 1.998 and 2.002 grams.
5.3 Supplemental Documents.
5.3.1 The Department of Defense has issued two documents supplementing the
provisions of this Standard which are intended to further the achievement of
standardization of testing techniques and improve obtainment of comparability
of test results between Laboratories. These documents are Military Handbook
737, Handbook for Textile Laboratory Personnel, and Military Standard 1157,
Calibration and Calibration Verification Procedures for Textile Test Methods.
Copies of the Handbook and Standard may be obtained by addressing the procurement
activity issuing the invitation for bids.
5.4 Activities outside the Federal Government may obtain copies of Federal
Specifications, Standards, and Handbooks as outlined under General Information
in the Index of Federal Specifications and Standards and at the prices indicated
in the Index. The Index, which includes cumulative monthly supplements as
issued, is for sale on a subscription basis by the Superintendent of Documents,
U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
5.5 Single copies of this standard and other product specifications required
by activities outside the Federal Government for bidding purposes are available
without charge from Business Service Centers, at the General Services Administration
Regional Offices in Boston, New York, Washington, DC, Atlanta, Chicago, Kansas
City, MO, Fort Worth, Denver, San Francisco, Los Angeles and Seattle, WA.
5.6 Federal Government activities may obtain copies of Federal Specifications,

Standards and Handbooks and the Index of Federal Specifications and Standards
from established distribution points In their agencies.

July 20, 1978
SECTION 6 - NUMERICAL INDEX OF TEST METHODS

METHOD NO. TITLE
Identification - Qualitative Analysis
1100 Identification of Wool, Mohair, Alpaca and Silk

1200 Identification of Cotton, Flax, Hemp, Ramie and Jute
1240 Identification of Manila (Abaca’), Sisal and Coir
1400 Identification of Asbestos
1410 Identification of Glass
1500 Identification of Rayon, Viscose
1510 Identification of Rayon, Acetate
1520 Identification of Rayon, Cuprammonium
1530 Identification of Nylon
1534 Melting Point of Synthetic Fibers
1540 Identification of Vinylidene Chloride Fibers
1550 Identification of Vinyl Chloride-Acetate Copolymer Fibers
1600 Identification of Synthetic Fibers by Generic Class
1700 Identification of Dyes on Animal Fibers
Quantitative Analysis
2011 Dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl Methane Content, Calorimetric Method
2012 Dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl Methane Content, Parr Chloride Method
2013 Fluorine Content of Textile Materials
2015 Sodium Salt of 5-Chloro -2- [4 Chloro -2- [3- (3,4 Dichloro-
phenyl) -Ureido] -Phenoxy] Benzenesulfonate Content
2016 Sodium Salt of [(4, 5-Dichloro, 2-Chloromethane Sulfonamide)
3’, 4’, 6’, Trichloro] Diphenyl Ether Content
2020 Presence of Labile Sulfur in Textile Materials
2050 Copper Content of Textiles, Electrolytic Method
2051 Copper Content of Textiles, Polarographic Method
2053 Small Amounts of Copper and Manganese in Textiles
2060 Copper-8-Quinolinolate Content of Textiles, Spectrophoto-
metric Method
2100 Wool Content, Acid Method
2101 Wool Content, Alkali Method
2102 Wool Content, Hypochlorite Method
2110 Silk Content of Fiber Mixtures
2111 Silk Fiber Content of Silk Textiles (Especially Weighted Silk)
2510 Cellulose Acetate Content of Fiber Mixtures, Acetic Acid Method
2511 Cellulose Acetate Content of Fiber Mixtures, Acetone Method
2530 Nylon Content of Fiber Mixtures
2535 Polyester Content of Fiber Mixtures
Numerical Index (cont’d)

2600 Moisture Content, Oven Method
2601 Moisture Content, Oven-Balance Method
2610 Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Acid Method
2611 Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Enzyme Method
2620 Nonfibrous Materials in Linen Textiles
2800 Wool Fiber Damage, Alkali Volubility Method
2810 Acidity (pH) of Textiles, Calorimetric Method
2811 pH of Textiles, Electrometric Method
2820 Chitin Content of Textiles, as a Measure of Fungal Contamination
Fibers
3810 Becker Value of Cordage Fiber
Yarn, Thread, Cordage
4010 Length-Weight Relation; Thread; Yards Per Pound (m/kg)
4021 Yarn Number (Linear Density) of Yarn from Package
4050 Direction of Twist: Yarn, Thread, Cordage
4052 Twist in Single Yarns
4054 Twist and Twist Contraction; Ply Yarns
4100 Strength and Elongation, Breaking; and Tenacity; of Thread and
Yarn; Single Strand
4104 Strength, Breaking of Thread and Yam; Skein Method
4108 Strength and Elongation, Breaking; Textile Webbing, Tape
and Braided Items
4110 Crimp in Yarns from Cloth; Dead-Load Method
4112 Crimp in Yams from Cloth; Load-Elongation Method
4308 Abrasion Resistance of Yarn, Thread, and Light Cordage;
Uniform-Abrasion (Schiefer) Method
4500 Water Absorption, Dynamic; Tumble Jar Method
4502 Water Absorption: Thread, Cord, Braid, Tape, Webbing;
Immersion Method
4504 Water Resistance, Vertical Rise Wicking, Thread
4800 Weathering Resistance; Yarn, Cordage; Natural Weathering
Method
4804 Weathering Resistance; Yam, Thread, Cordage; Accelerated
Weathering Method
4830 Leaching Resistance; Cordage; Standard Method
4832 Leaching Resistance; Cordage; Prewet Specimen Method
Fabrics
5010 Length of Textile Materials; Determination of
5020 Width of Textile Materials; Determination of
5030 Thickness of Textile Materials; Determination of
5040 Weight of Cloth; Cut, Roll, or Bolt Method; Determination of
5041 Weight of Textile Materials, Small Specimen Method; Determination
of
5050 Yams Per Unit Length (Inch or Centimeter) in Woven Cloth
5052 Stitches per Unit Length in Seams and Stitchings; Determination of
5060 Bow of Yarns in Woven Cloth

5070 Wales and Courses in Knit Cloth

5100 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Grab Method
5102 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Cut Strip
Method
5104 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Ravel Strip
Method
5106 Tension of Elastic Textile Materials
5110 Sewability of Woven Cloth; Seam Efficiency Method
5120 Strength of Cloth; Ball Bursting Method
5122 Strength of Cloth; Diaphragm Bursting Method
5132 Strength of Cloth, Tearing; Falling-Pendulum Method
5134 Strength of Cloth, Tearing; Tongue Method
5200 Stiffness of Cloth, Directional; Hanging Heart Loop Method
5202 Stiffness of Cloth, Directional; Cantilever Bending Method
5204 Stiffness of Cloth, Directional: Self-Weighted Cantilever
Method
5206 Stiffness of Cloth, Drape and Flex; Cantilever Bending
Method
5210 Crease Resistance of Cloth; Cold Press Recovery Method
5212 Crease Resistance of Cloth; Angle of Recovery Method
5214 Wrinkle Recovery of Fabrics; Appearance Method
5216 Durable Press on Fabrics, Shirts and Trousers: Evaluation of:
Cloth Appearance, Seam Appearance, Fly Appearance, Crease
Appearance and Soil Release
5220 Flexibility of Cloth After Leaching
5230 Flexing Resistance of Coated Cloth
5300 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Flexing, Folding Bar (Stoll)
Method
5302 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Inflated Diaphragm (Stoll) Method
5303 Color Change of Cloth Due to Flat Abrasion (Frosting); Wire
Screen Method
5304 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Oscillatory Cylinder (Wyzenbeek)
Method
5306 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Rotary Platform, Double-Head
(Taber) Method
5308 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Uniform Abrasion (Schiefer)
Method
5309 Abrasion Resistance of Textile Webbing
5310 Appearance-Retention of Cloth; pilling and Surface Wear
5320 Pilling Resistance of Textile Fabrics; Brush and Sponge Method
5400 Sewability of Woven Cloth; Yarn Severance Method
5404 Sewability of Cloths Containing Thermoplastic Synthetic
Fibers or Yarns
5410 Slippage Resistance of Yarns in Cloth; Yarn Distortion Method
5420 Slippage Resistance of Yarns in Cloth; Seam Method
5450 Permeability to Air; Cloth; Calibrated Orifice Method
5452 Permeability to Air; Cloth; Falling Cylinder Method
FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO, 191A

5500 Water Resistance of Cloth; Dynamic Absorption Method

5502 Water Resistance of Cloth; Immersion Absorption Method
5504 Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; Spray Absorption Method
5506 Dry Cleaning Test, Accelerated: for Labels
5508 Dry Cleaning Solvent Resistance of Cloth With Water-Resistant
Finish; Tumble Jar Method
Finish: Launder-Ometer Method
5510 Dry Cleaning Resistance of Cloth With Water-Resistant Finish;
Rotating Wheel Method
5512 Water Resistance of Coated Cloth: High Range, Hydrostatic
Pressure Method
5514 Water Resistance of Cloth; Low Range, Hydrostatic Pressure
Method
5516 Water Resistance of Cloth; Water Permeability, Hydrostatic
Pressure Method
5518 Laundering Resistance of Cloth With Water-Resistant Finish;
Wash Wheel (Wet Mechanical Action) Method
5519 Laundering Test, Accelerated; for Labels
5520 Water Resistance of Cloth; Drop Penetration Method
5522 Water Resistance of Cloth; Water Impact Penetration Method
5524 Water Resistance of Cloth; Rain Penetration Method
5526 Water Resistance of Cloth With Hydrophobic Finish; Spray
Method
5528 Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; Spray Method
5530 Penetration Resistance of Cloth To Passage of Feathers and Down;
Tumbling Method
5550 Shrinkage in Laundering; Cotton, Linen, and Blended Cotton and
Linen Cloth
5552 Shrinkage in Laundering; Cloth Other Than Cotton and Linen
5554 Shrinkage in Laundering; Wool Cloth; Accelerated Method
5556 Mobile Laundry Evaluation For Textile Materials
5558 Shrinkage, Relaxation; Wool Cloth
5580 Shrinkage in Dry Cleaning; Cloth
5590 Shrinkage in Sponging; Wool Cloth
5600 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Chlorine Bleaching
5605 Colorfastness to Combined Laundering and Bleaching of Textile
Materials; Launder-Ometer Method
5610 Colorfastness to Laundering of Cotton and Linen Textile Materials;
Launder-Ometer Method
5612 Colorfastness to Laundering of Cotton and Linen Cloth; Wash
Wheel Method
5614 Colorfastness to Laundering of Wool, Silk, Rayon and Other
Textile Materials; Launder-Ometer Method
5616 Colorfastness to Laundering of Wool, Silk and Rayon Cloth;
Wash Wheel Method


5620 Colorfastness to Dry Cleaning of Textile Materials; Petroleum
Solvent
5621 Colorfastness to Wet Cleaning of Textile Materials; Perchloroethy-
lene Solvent (Associated with Dry Cleaning)
5622 Colorfastness to Wet Dry Cleaning of Textile Materials: Petroleum
Solvent
5630 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Water
5632 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Salt Water and Soap
5640 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Dry and Wet Heat (Hot
Pressing)
5642 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Dry Heat (Sublimation)
5651 Crocking of Woven and Knitted Cloth; Standard Sample; Munsell
Scale Method
5660 Colorfastness to Light of Textile Materials; Accelerated Method
5662 Colorfastness to Light of Textile Materials; Natural Light
Method
5671 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Weather: Accelerated
Weathering Method
5672 Colorfastness to Weather of Textile Materials; Natural Weathering
Method
5675 Colorfastness of Cloth to Oxides of Nitrogen in the Atmosphere
5680 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Perspiration; Perspiro-
meter Method
5750 Mildew Resistance of Textile Materials; Single Culture Method
5760 Mildew Resistance of Textile Materials; Mixed Culture Method
5762 Mildew Resistance of Textile Materials; Soil Burial Method
5764 Insect Resistance of Textile Materials
5800 Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Natural Weathering Method
5804 Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Accelerated Weathering Method
5830 Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Standard Method
5831 Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Minimum Exposure Method
5832 Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Prewet Specimen Method
5850 Accelerated Ageing of Cloth; Oven Method
5851 Accelerated Ageing of Cloth; Closed Container Method
5852 Accelerated Ageing of Cloth; Oxygen Method
5870 Temperature, High; Effect on Cloth Flexibility
5872 Temperature, High; Effect on Cloth Blocking
5874 Temperature, Low: Effect on Coated Cloth
5900 Flame Resistance of Cloth; Horizontal
5903 Flame Resistance of Cloth; Vertical
5904 Flame Resistance of Cloth; Vertical, Field
5905 Flame Resistance of Material; High Heat Flux Flame Contact
5906 Flammability, Burning Rate of Cloth; Horizontal
5907 Flammability Test for Sleeping Bag Cloths:
-
Tablet Method
5908 Flammability, Burning Rate of Cloth 45° Angle


5920 Heating (Spontaneous) of Cloth
5930 Electrical Resistivity of Fabrics; Determination of
5950 Adhesion of Plied (Double Texture) Fabric
5951 Bond Strength of Bonded and Laminated Apparel Cloths
5960 Adhesion of Cemented Seams
5962 Adhesion of Strapped Seams
5964 Adhesion of Wet Seams
5970 Adhesion of Coating; Adhesive Method
5972 Adhesion of Coating; Water Resistance Method
Cordage (Rope)
6000 Length of Ten Turns; Cordage
6001 Picks Per Inch (Picks/cm); Braided Cordage
6002 Diameter of Cordage
6003 Circumference of Cordage
6004 Length Per Unit Weight; Cordage
6010 Shrinkage of Cordage, Boiling Water Method; Determination of
6011 Water Absorption; Cordage
6015 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Spliced Specimen
Method
6016 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Non-Spliced Specimen
Method
6020 Hardness; Cordage
Garments and Ready-Made Articles
7102 Gripping Strength of Shoe Lace Tips
7308 Abrasion Resistance; Socks, Hosiery, and Knitted Cloth; Uniform-
Abrasion (Schiefer) Method
7540 Stretched Width of Knit Items
7550 Shrinkage in Laundering of Cotton and Linen Garments and
Ready-Made Articles
7552 Shrinkage in Laundering of Garments and Ready-Made Articles Other
Than Cotton and Linen
7554 Shrinkage in Laundering of Wool Garments and Ready-Made Articles;
Accelerated Method
7556 Shrinkage in Laundering of Garments and Ready-Made Articles;
Mobile Laundry Method
7558 Shrinkage Relaxation; Wool Garments and Ready-Made Articles
7560 Shrinkage in Laundering of Shrink-Resistant Wool Socks
7561 Shrinkage in Laundering of Shrink-Resistant Treated Wool Socks;
Accelerated Method
7580 Shrinkage in Dry Cleaning; Garments and Ready-Made Articles
7590 Shrinkage in Sponging; Garments and Ready-Made Articles
9010 Shade Matching of Textile Materials; Visual Method

FED. TEST METHOD STD NO. 191A

July 20, 1978
SECTION 7 - ALPHABETICAL INDEX OF TEST METHODS

METHOD NO. TITLE
5300 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Flexing, Folding Bar (Stoll)
Method
5302 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Inflated Diaphragm (Stoll)
Method
5304 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Oscillatory Cylinder (Wyzenbeek)
Method
5306 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Rotary Platform, Double-Head (Taber)
Method
5308 Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Uniform Abrasion (Schiefer) Method
5309 Abrasion Resistance of Textile Webbing
4308 Abrasion Resistance of Yarn, Thread, and Light Cordage; Uniform-
7308 Abrasion Resistance; Socks, Hosiery, and Knitted Cloth; Uniform-
5851 Accelerated Ageing of Cloth; Closed Container Method
5850 Accelerated Ageing of Cloth; Oven Method
5852 Accelerated Ageing of Cloth; Oxygen Method
2810 Acidity (pH) of Textiles, Calorimetric Method
5960 Adhesion of Cemented Seams
5970 Adhesion of Coating; Adhesive Method
5972 Adhesion of Coating; Water Resistance Method
5950 Adhesion of Plied (Double Texture) Fabric
5962 Adhesion of Strapped Seams
5964 Adhesion of Wet Seams
5310 Appearance-Retention of Cloth; Pilling and Surface Wear
3810 Becker Value of Cordage Fiber
5951 Bond Strength of Bonded and Laminated Apparel Cloths
5060 BOW of Yams in Woven Cloth
2510 Cellulose Acetate Content of Fiber Mixtures, Acetic Acid

Method
2511 Cellulose Acetate Content of Fiber Mixtures, Acetone Method
2820 Chitin Content of Textiles, as a Measure of Fungal Contamination
6003 Circumference of Cordage
5303 Color Change of Cloth Due to Flat Abrasion (Frosting); Wire
Screen Method
5675 Colorfastness of Cloth to Oxides of Nitrogen in the Atmosphere
5600 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Chlorine Bleaching
5640 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Dry and Wet Heat (Hot
Pressing)
5642 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Dry Heat (Sublimation)
5680 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Perspiration; Perspiro-
meter Method
5632 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Salt Water and Soap
Alphabetical Index (cont’d)

5630 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Water
5671 Colorfastness of Textile Materials to Weather; Accelerated
Weathering Method
5605 Colorfastness to Combined Laundering and Bleaching of Textile
Materials; Launder-Ometer Method
5620 Colorfastness to Dry Cleaning of Textile Materials; Petroleum
Solvent
5612 Colorfastness to Laundering of Cotton and Linen Cloth; Wash
Wheel Method
5610 Colorfastness to Laundering of Cotton and Linen Textile Materials;
Launder-Ometer Method
5614 Colorfastness to Laundering of Wool, Silk, Rayon and Other
Textile Materials; Launder-Ometer Method
5616 Colorfastness to Laundering of Wool, Silk and Rayon Cloth;
Wash Wheel Method
5660 Colorfastness to Light of Textile Materials; Accelerated
Method
5662 Colorfastness to Light of Textile Materials; Natural Light
Method
5672 Colorfastness to Weather of Textile Materials; Natural
Weathering Method
5621 Colorfastness to Wet Cleaning of Textile Materials; Perchloroe-
thylene Solvent (Associated with Dry Cleaning)
5622 Colorfastness to Wet Dry Cleaning of Textile Materials; Petroleum
Solvent
2050 Copper Content of Textiles, Electrolytic Method
2051 Copper Content of Textiles, Polarographic Method
2060 Copper-8-Quinolinolate Content of Textiles, Spectrophotometric
Method
5212 Crease Resistance of Cloth; Angle of Recovery Method
5210 Crease Resistance of Cloth; Cold Press Recovery Method
4110 Crimp in Yarns From Cloth; Dead-Load Method
4112 Crimp in Yarns From Cloth; Load-Elongation Method
5651 Crocking of Woven and Knitted Cloth; Standard Sample;
Munsell Scale Method
6002 Diameter of Cordage
2011 Dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl Methane Content Calorimetric
Method
2012 Dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl Methane Content, Parr Chloride
Method
4050 Direction of Twist: Yarn, Thread, Cordage
5510 Dry Cleaning Resistance of Cloth With Water-Resistant Finish;
Rotating Wheel Method
Finish; Launder-Ometer Method


Finish; Tumble Jar Method
5506 Dry Cleaning Test, Accelerated; for Labels
5216 Durable Press on Fabrics, Shirts and Trousers; Evaluation of:
5930 Electrical Resistivity of Fabrics; Determination of
5908 Flammability, Burning Rate of Cloth; 45° Angle
5906 Flammability, Burning Rate of Cloth; Horizontal
5907 Flammability Test for Sleeping Bag Cloths; Tablet Method
5900 Flame Resistance of Cloth; Horizontal
5903 Flame Resistance of Cloth; Vertical
5904 Flare Resistance of Cloth; Vertical, Field
5905 Flame Resistance of Material; High Heat Flux Flame Contact
5220 Flexibility of Cloth After Leaching
5230 Flexing Resistance of Coated Cloth
2013 Fluorine Content of Textile Materials
7102 Gripping Strength of Shoe Lace Tips
6020 Hardness; Cordage
5920 Heating (Spontaneous) of Cloth
1400 Identification of Asbestos
1200 Identification of Cotton, Flax, Hemp, Ramie and Jute
1700 Identification of Dyes on Animal Fibers
1410 Identification of Glass
1240 Identification of Manila (Abaca’), Sisal and Coir
1530 Identification of Nylon
1510 Identification of Rayon, Acetate
1520 Identification of Rayon, Cuprammonium
1500 Identification of Rayon, Viscose
1600 Identification of Synthetic Fibers by Generic Class
1550 Identification of Vinyl Chloride-Acetate Copolymer Fibers
1540 Identification of Vinylidene Chloride Fibers
1100 Identification of Wool, Mohair, Alpaca and Silk
5764 Insect Resistance of Textile Materials
5518 Laundering Resistance of Cloth With Water-Resistant Finish;
Wash Wheel (Wet Mechanical Action) Method
5519 Laundering Test, Accelerated; for Labels
4832 Leaching Resistance; Cordage; Prewet Specimen Method
4830 Leaching Resistance; Cordage; Standard Method
5831 Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Minimum Exposure Method
5832 Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Prewet Specimen Method
5830 Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Standard Method
6000 Length of Ten Turns; Cordage
5010 Length of Textile Materials; Determination of
6004 Length Per Unit Weight; Cordage
4010 Length-Weight Relation; Thread; Yards Per Pound (m/kg)
FED. TEST METHOD STD.NO. 191A


1534 Melting Point of Synthetic Fibers
5760 Mildew Resistance of Textile Materials; Mixed Culture
Method
5750 Mildew Resistance of Textile Materials; Single Culture Method
5762 Mildew Resistance of Textile Materials; Soil Burial Method
5556 Mobile Laundry Evaluation for Textile Materials
2601 Moisture Content, Oven-Balance Method
2600 Moisture Content, Oven Method
2610 Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Acid Method
2611 Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Enzyme Method
2620 Nonfibrous Materials in Linen Textiles
2530 Nylon Content of Fiber Mixtures
5530 Penetration Resistance of Cloth To Passage of Feathers and Down;
Tumbling Method
5450 Permeability to Air; Cloth; Calibrated Orifice Method
5452 Permeability to Air; Cloth; Falling Cylinder Method
2811 pH of Textiles, Electrometric Method
6001 Picks Per Inch (Picks/cm); Braided Cordage
5320 Pilling Resistance of Textile Fabrics; Brush and Sponge
Method
2535 Polyester Content of Fiber Mixtures
2020 Presence of Labile Sulfur in Textile Materials
5404 Sewability of Cloths Containing Thermoplastic Synthetic Fibers
or Yarns
5110 Sewability of Woven Cloth; Seam Efficiency Method
5400 Sewability of Woven Cloth; Yarn Severance Method
9010 Shade Matching of Textile Materials; Visual Method
5580 Shrinkage in Dry Cleaning; Cloth
7580 Shrinkage in Dry Cleaning; Garments and Ready-Made Articles
5552 Shrinkage in Laundering; Cloth Other Than Cotton and Linen
5550 Shrinkage in Laundering; Cotton, Linen, and Blended Cotton and
Linen Cloth
7550 Shrinkage in Laundering of Cotton and Linen Garments and
Ready-Made Articles
7556 Shrinkage in Laundering of Garments and Ready-Made Articles;
7552 Shrinkage in Laundering of Garments and Ready-Made Articles
Other Than Cotton and Linen
7561 Shrinkage in Laundering of Shrink-Resistant Treated Wool
Socks; Accelerated Method
7560 Shrinkage in Laundering of Shrink-Resistant Wool Socks
7554 Shrinkage in Laundering of Wool Garments and Ready-Made
Articles; Accelerated Method
5554 Shrinkage in Laundering; Wool Cloth; Accelerated Method

7590 Shrinkage in Sponging; Garments and Ready-Made Articles

5590 Shrinkage in Sponging; Wool Cloth
6010 Shrinkage of Cordage, Boiling Water Method; Determination of
5558 Shrinkage, Relaxation; Wool Cloth
7558 Shrinkage Relaxation; Wool Garments and Ready-Made Articles
2110 Silk Content of Fiber Mixtures
2111 Silk Fiber Content of Silk Textiles (Especially Weighted Silk)
5420 Slippage Resistance of Yarns in Cloth; Seam Method
5410 Slippage Resistance of Yarns in Cloth; Yam Distortion Method
2053 Small Amounts of Copper and Manganese in Textiles
2015 Sodium Salt of 5-Chloro -2- [4 Chloro -2- [3- (3, 4 Dichloro-
phenyl) -Ureido] -Phenoxy] Benzenesulfonate Content
2016 Sodium Salt of [(4, 5-Dichloro, 2-Chloromethane Sulfonamide)
3’, 4’, 6’, Trichloro] Diphenyl Ether Content
5202 Stiffness of Cloth, Directional; Cantilever Binding Method
5200 Stiffness of Cloth, Directional; Hanging Heart Loop Method
5204 Stiffness of Cloth, Directional; Self-weighted Cantilever
Method
5206 Stiffness of Cloth, Drape and Flex; Cantilever Bending Method
5052 Stitches per Unit Length in Seams and Stitchings; Determination of
6016 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Non-Spliced
Specimen Method
6015 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Spliced Specimen
Method
5102 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Cut Strip
Method
5100 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Grab Method
5104 Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Ravel Strip
Method
4108 Strength and Elongation, Breaking; Textile Webbing, Tape and
Braided I terns
4100 Strength and Elongation, Breaking; and Tenacity; of Thread and
Yarn; Single Strand
4104 Strength, Breaking of Thread and Yarn: Skein Method
5120 Strength of Cloth; Ball Bursting Method
5122 Strength of Cloth; Diaphragm Bursting Method
5132 Strength of Cloth, Tearing; Falling-Pendulum Method
5134 Strength of Cloth, Tearing; Tongue Method
7540 Stretched Width of Knit Items
5872 Temperature, High; Effect on Cloth Blocking
5870 Temperature, High; Effect on Cloth Flexibility
5874 Temperature, Low; Effect on Coated Cloth
5106 Tension of Elastic Textile Materials
5030 Thickness of Textile Materials; Determination of

Alphabetical Index (cont‘d)
4054 Twist and Twist Contraction; Ply Yarns

4052 Twist in Single Yarns
5070 Wales and Courses in Knit Cloth

6011 Water Absorption; Cordage
4500 Water Absorption, Dynamic; Tumble Jar Method
4502 Water Absorption: Thread, Cord, Braid, Tape, Webbing; Immersion
Method
5520 Water Resistance of Cloth; Drop Penetration Method
5500 Water Resistance of Cloth; Dynamic Absorption Method
5502 Water Resistance of Cloth; Immersion Absorption Method
5514 Water Resistance of Cloth; Low Range, Hydrostatic Pressure
Method
5524 Water Resistance of Cloth; Rain Penetration Method
5522 Water Resistance of Cloth; Water Impact Penetration Method
5516 Water Resistance of Cloth; Water Permeability, Hydrostatic
Pressure Method
5526 Water Resistance of Cloth with Hydrophobic Finish; Spray
Method
5512 Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; High Range, Hydrostatic
Pressure Method
5504 Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; Spray Absorption Method
5528 Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; Spray Method
4504 Water Resistance, Vertical Rise Wicking, Thread
5804 Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Accelerated Weathering Method
5800 Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Natural Weathering Method
4800 Weathering Resistance; Yarn, Cordage; Natural Weathering
Method
4804 Weathering Resistance; Yarn, Thread, Cordage; Accelerated
Weathering Method
5040 Weight of Cloth; Cut, Roll, or Bolt Method; Determination of
5041 Weight of Textile Materials, Small Specimen Method; Determination of
5020 Width of Textile Materials; Determination of
2100 Wool Content, Acid Method
2101 Wool Content, Alkali Method
2102 Wool Content, Hypochlorite Method
2800 Wool Fiber Damage, Alkali Volubility Method
5214 Wrinkle Recovery of Fabrics; Appearance Method
4021 Yarn Number (Linear Density) of Yarn From Package

5050 Yarns Per Unit Length (Inch or Centimeter) in Woven Cloth


July 20, 1978
SECTION 8 - CONVERSION EQUIVALENTS
8.1 Temperature conversion.
8.1.1 Celsius to Fahrenheit scales:

9 °C + 32 = °F
5
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
-20 -4.0 9 48.2 38 100.4 67 152.6 96 204.8

-19 -2.2 10 50. 39 102.2 68 154.4 97 206.6
-18 -0.4 11 51.8 40 104. 69 156.2 98 208.4
-17 1.4 12 53.6 41 105.8 70 158. 99 210.2
-16 3.2 13 55.4 42 107.6 71 159.8 100 212.
-15 5. 14 57.2 43 109.4 72 161.6 101 213.8
-14 6.8 15 59. 44 111.2 73 163.4 102 215.6
-13 8.6 16 60.8 45 113. 74 165.2 103 217.4
-12 10.4 17 62.6 46 114.8 75 167. 104 219.2
-11 12.2 18 64.4 47 116.6 76 168.8 105 221.
-10 14. 19 66.2 48 118.4 77 170.6 106 222.8
-9 15.8 20 68. 49 120.2 78 172.4 107 224.6
-8 17.6 21 69.8 50 122. 79 174.2 108 226.4
-7 19.4 22 71.6 51 123.8 80 176. 109 228.2
-6 21.2 23 73.4 52 125.6 81 177.8 110 230.
-5 23. 24 75.2 53 127.4 82 179.6 111 231.8
-4 24.8 25 77. 54 129.2 83 181.4 112 233.6
-3 26.6 26 78.8 55 131. 84 183.2 113 235.4
-2 28.4 27 80.6 56 132.8 85 185. 114 237.2
-1 30.2 28 82.4 57 134.6 86 186.8 115 239.
0 32. 29 84.2 58 136.4 87 188.6 116 240.8
1 33.8 30 86. 59 138.2 88 190.4 117 242.6
2 35.6 31 87.8 60 140. 89 192.2 118 244.4
3 37.4 32 89.6 61 141.8 90 194. 119 246.2
4 39.2 33 91.4 62 143.6 91 195.8 120 248.
5 41. 34 93.2 63 145.4 92 197.6 121 249.8
6 42.8 35 95. 64 147.2 93 199.4 122 251.6
7 44.6 36 96.8 65 149. 94 201.2 123 253.4
8 46.4 37 98.6 66 150.8 95 203. 124 255.2
8.1.1 Celsius to Fahrenheit scales: (cont ‘d)
9 °C + 32 = F°
5
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
125 257. 136 276.8 147 296.6 158 316.4 169 336.2
126 258.8 137 278.6 148 298.4 159 318.2 170 338.
127 260.6 138 280.4 149 300.2 160 320. 171 339.8
128 262.4 139 282.2 150 302. 161 321.8 172 341.6
129 264.2 140 284. 151 303.8 162 323.6 173 343.4
130 266. 141 285.8 152 305.6 163 325.4 174 345.2
131 267.8 142 287.6 153 307.4 164 327.2 175 347.
132 269.6 143 289.4 154 309.2 165 329. 176 348.8
133 271.4 144 291.2 155 311. 166 330.8 177 350.6
134 273.2 145 293. 156 312.8 167 332.6 178 352.4
135 275. 146 294.8 157 314.6 168 334.4 179 354.2
180 356.
8.1.2 Fahrenheit to Celsius scales:
(°F - 32) X 5 = °C
9
°F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C
0 -17.78 15 -9.44 30 -1.11 45 7.22 60 15.56

1 -17.22 16 -8.89 31 -0.56 46 7.78 61 16.11
2 -16.67 17 -8.33 32 0. 47 8.33 62 16.67
3 -16.11 18 -7.78 33 0.56 48 8.89 63 17.22
4 -15.56 19 -7.22 34 1.11 49 9.44 64 17.78
5 -15. 20 -6.67 35 1.67 50 10. 65 18.33
6 -14.44 21 -6.11 36 2.22 51 10.56 66 18.89
7 -13.89 22 -5.56 37 2.78 52 11.11 67 19.44
8 -13.33 23 -5 . 38 3.33 53 11.67 68 20.
9 -12.78 24 -4.44 39 3.89 54 12.22 69 20.56
10 -12.22 25 -3.89 40 4.44 55 12.78 70 21.11
11 -11.67 26 -3.33 41 5. 56 13.33 71 21.67
12 -11.11 27 -2.78 42 5.56 57 13.89 72 22.22
13 -10.56 28 -2.22 43 6.11 58 14.44 73 22.78
14 -10. 29 -1.67 44 6.67 59 15. 74 23.33
8.1.2 Fahrenheit to Celsius scales: (cont‘d)
(°F - 32) X 5 = °C
9
°F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C
75 23.89 111 43.89 147 63.89 183 83.89 219 103.89

76 24.44 112 44.44 148 64.44 184 84.44 220 104.44
77 25. 113 45. 149 65. 185 85. 221 105.
78 25.56 114 45.56 150 65.56 186 85.56 222 105.56
79 26.11 115 46.11 151 66.11 187 86. 11 223 106.11
80 26.67 116 46.67 152 66.67 188 86.67 224 106.67
81 27.22 117 47.22 153 67.22 189 87.22 225 107.22
82 27.78 118 47.78 154 67.78 190 87.78 226 107.78
83 28.33 119 48.33 155 68.33 191 88.33 227 108.33
84 28.89 120 48.89 156 68.89 192 88.89 228 108.89
85 29.44 121 49.44 157 69.44 193 89.44 229 109.44
86 30. 122 50. 158 70. 194 90. 230 110.
87 30.56 123 50.56 159 70.56 195 90.56 231 110.56
88 31.11 124 51.11 160 71.11 196 91.11 232 111.11
89 31.67 125 51.67 161 71.67 197 91.67 233 111.67
90 32.22 126 52.22 162 72.22 198 92.22 234 112.22
91 32.78 127 52.78 163 72.78 199 92.78 235 112.78
92 33.33 128 53.33 164 73.33 200 93.33 236 113.33
93 33.89 129 53.89 165 73.89 201 93.89 237 113.89
94 34.44 130 54.44 166 74.44 202 94.44 238 114.44
95 35. 131 55. 167 75. 203 95. 239 115.
96 35.56 132 55.56 168 75.56 204 95.56 240 115.56
97 36.11 133 56.11 169 76.11 205 96.11 241 116.11
98 36.67 134 56.67 170 76.67 206 96.67 242 116.67
99 37.22 135 57.22 171 77.22 207 97.22 243 117.22
100 37.78 136 57.78 172 77.78 208 97.78 244 117.78
101 38.33 137 58.33 173 78.33 209 98.33 245 118.33
102 38.89 138 58.89 174 78.89 210 98.89 246 118.89
103 39.44 139 59.44 175 79.44 211 99.44 247 119.44
104 40. 140 60. 176 80. 212 100. 248 120.
105 40.56 141 60.56 177 80.56 213 100.56 249 120.56
106 41.11 142 61.11 178 81.11 214 101.11 250 121.11
107 41.67 143 61.67 179 81.67 215 101.67
108 42.22 144 62.22 180 82.22 216 102.22
109 42.78 145 62.78 181 82.78 217 102.78
11O 43.33 146 63.33 182 83.33 218 103.33


8.3 Metric equivalents. Metric equivalents, indicated in parentheses

throughout the test methods, are based on practices, conversion factors,
and symbols specified in ASTM E 380 Standard for Metric Practice, and are
for information only.
FED TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

SECTION 9 - TEST METHODS

METHOD 1100
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF WOOL, MOHAIR, ALPACA AND SILK
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing sheep’s wool, mohair, alpaca
and silk from vegetable, man-made, and mineral fibers. This method is not
intended for quantitative determination of these fibers in a blend of fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be representative of the sample unit. If there is
any evidence of nonhomogeneity, the specimen shall be composed of each variable
portion.
3. NUMBER OF DETERMINATIONS
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, one specimen shall
be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yarns dyed different colors are
in the lot, at least two specimens of each color shall be taken for test.
4. APPARATUS AND REAGENTS
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Reference standard. At least one authentic sample of each of sheep’s

wool, mohair, alpaca and silk shall be kept as a reference standard.
4.1.2 Microscope and accessories. The apparatus for microscopic examination

shall consist of a compound microscope, dissecting needles, glass slides, cover
glasses and a cross-sectioning device. The microscope shall be equipped to
permit examination of magnifications ranging from 100X to 500X.
4.1.3 Mounting medium. The umounting medium for microscopic examination shall
be a colorless immersion oil with a refractive index of 1.480 ± 0.005 at 20°C
and a viscosity of 78.81 sec. Saybolt Universal at 38°C (see 7.1).
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Millon’s reagent. Millon’s reagent shall be prepared by dissolving

1 ml of mercury in 9 ml of concentrated nitric acid (94 percent) and diluted
with 10 ml of distilled water. This preparation shall be made under a hood.
Since this reagent is unstable, it shall be freshly prepared.
FED. TEST METHODS STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 1100
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The specimen shall be washed in or extracted

with 1,1,1-trichloroethane, ether or alcohol to remove oils, waxes, dirt or
any other material that may obscure the fiber characteristics. If it is
necessary to remove the dyes from the specimen which may interfere with the
identification, they may be removed by any procedure that does not damage
the fiber or change any of its characteristics. The specimen shall then be
dried.
5.2 Mounting of specimen.
5.2.1 Longitudinal examination. At least a dozen fibers shall be placed

on each of two separate slides. On one slide, the fibers shall be immersed
in two or three drops of mounting medium and covered with a cover glass. On
the second slide, the fibers shall be immersed in two or three drops of
Millon’s reagent and gently warmed after covering with a cover glass.
5.2.2 Cross-sectional examination. Using the cross-sectioning device a

cross-section of at least a dozen fibers shall be prepared and placed on a
slide. The cross-section shall be immersed in two or three drops of umounting
medium and covered with a cover glass.
5.3 Microscopic examination. The microscopic examination of the prepared

slides shall be made with transmitted light at a magnification of 100X. If
this magnification is not sufficient for positive identification, a higher
magnification shall be used. The microscopic appearance of the specimen shall
be compared with that of reference standard prepared in the same manner as the
specimen.
5.4 Identification.
5.4.1 All protein fibers are colored red to red-brown by Millon’s reagent.
5.4.2 The microscopic appearance readily distinguishes wool, mohair and

alpaca from silk, vegetable, man-made and mineral fibers by the epidermis in
the form of surface scales.
5.4.3 Wool fibers. Wool fibers are characterized by pronounced overlapping

scales and have individual fiber diameters ranging from 10 to 70 micrometers.
The smaller fibers are nearly circular in cross-section, but the larger fibers
are often oval or elliptical (Figure 1100A). Wool fibers are seldom pigmented
or medullated.

METHOD 1100
5.4.4 Mohair fibers. Mohair fibers are characterized by a faint epidermis

and uniformity of fiber diameter. The individual fiber diameters range from
10 to 90 micrometers. Majority of fibers are nearly circular in cross-section
(Figure 1100B). Mohair fibers are seldom pigmented or medullated.
5.4.5 Alpaca fibers. Alpaca fibers are characterized by a faint epidermis

with serrated edge and by the presence of fragmental, interrupted or continuous
medulla in majority of the fibers. The individual fiber diameters range from
10 to 50 micrometers. The smaller fibers are nearly circular in cross-section
but the larger fibers tend to be elongated oval shaped (Figure 1100C). Streaky
pigmentation is occasionally present in alpaca fibers.
5.4.6 Silk fibers. The microscopic appearance readily distinguishes silk
fibers from other animal, vegetable, man-made and mineral fibers. Longitudinally
the fibers look like non-uniform glass rods with individual diameters ranging
from 10 to 15 micrometers. Cross-sections of fibers vary front triangular with
rounded corners to elliptical shape (Figure 1100D). The fibers Show diagonal
markings but no longitudinal markings.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of wool, mohair, alpaca or silk shall be reported.
6.2 If fibers other than the fiber being identified are present, the
presence of other fibers shall also be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Immersion oil suitable for microscopic examination may be obtained from
Wool Associated of New York Cotton Exchange, Inc., 286 Summer Street, Boston,
MA 02210.

METHOD 1100
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (250X)
FIGURE 1100A Wool Fibers

METHOD 1100
Cross-Sectional
View (500x)
Longitudinal
View (250X)
FIGURE 1100B Mohair Fibers

METHOD 1100
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (240X)
FIGURE 1100C Alpaca Fibers

METHOD 1100
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (250X)
FIGURE 1100D Silk Fibers

METHOD 1200
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF COTTON, FLAX, HEMP, RAMIE AND JUTE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing cotton, flax.. hemp, ramie
and jute from other vegetable, animal, man-made and mineral fibers. This
method is not applicable for determining whether cotton has been subjected
to a mercerization process or for distinguishing different species and varieties
of cotton. This method is not intended for quantitative determination of these
fibers in a blend of fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

portion.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, one specimen

shall be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yarns dyed different
colors are in the lot, at least two specimens of each color shall be taken for
test.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Reference standard. At least one authentic sample of each of the

following shall be kept as a reference standard.
Average American Cotton

Unbleached and bleached flax
Unbleached and bleached hemp
Unbleached and bleached ramie
Commercial jute
glasses, and a cross-sectioning device. The microscope shall be equipped to

METHOD 1200
4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagentso
4.2.1 Herzberg’s stain. The Herzberg’s stain shall be prepared as follows:

4.2.1.1 Solution A. Zinc chloride solution at 1.80 specific gravity at
28°C made by adding 25 ml of distilled water to 50 g of dry CP Zinc chloride
(fused sticks in sealed bottles, or crystals).
4.2.1.2 Solution B. 0.25 g of CP iodine and 5.25 g of CP potassium iodine

dissolved in 12.5 ml of distilled water.
4.2.1.3 Stain. Mix 25 ml of solution A, measured at 20°C with solution B.

Pour into a narrow cylinder and let stand until clear (12 to 24 hours). Decant
the supernatant liquid into an amber-colored glass-stoppered bottle and add a
piece of iodine to the solution. Avoid undue exposure to light and air.
4.2.2 Solution of one gram of phloroglucinol in 80 ml of 95 percent alcohol.
4.2.3 Concentrated hydrochloric acid.
5. PROCEDURE

any other material that may obscure the fiber characteristics. It may also
be-necessary to treat vegetable fibers with 0.5 percent sodium hydroxide
solution, as this aids in breaking up fiber bundles. If it is necessary to
remove dyes from the specimen which may interfere with the identification,
they may be removed by any procedure that does not damage the fiber or change
any of its characteristics. The specimen shall then be dried.
5.2 Mounting of specimen. At least a dozen fibers shall be placed on a

slide. The fibers shall be immersed in three or four drops of Herzberg’s
stain, covered with a cover glass in such a manner as to avoid air bubbles,
allowed to stand for 1 or 2 minutes, and the surplus stain then drained off
by tipping the slide edgewise on a blotter.

slide shall be made with transmitted light at a magnification of 100X. If
magnification shall be used. The microscopic appearance of the specimen shall
be compared with the reference standard prepared in the same manner as the
specimen. .
METHOD 1200
5.4 In the preliminary examination and preparation of jute, a small bundle

of the clean fibers shall be immersed for 30 seconds in a freshly prepared
solution made by combining equal parts by volume of the reagents phloroglucinol
and concentrated hydrochloric acid.
5.5 Identification.
5.5.1 Cotton fibers. Microscopically, cotton fibers appear like a collapsed

rubber tube twisted in an irregular spiral. They have no longitudinal or
cross markings. The lumens vary from very narrow to over two-thirds the
diameter of the fibers (Figure 1200A). Diameters of individual fibers vary
from 9 to 25 micrometers and the average from 16 to 20 micrometers. Undyed
cotton fibers are stained pink to dark red in color by Herzberg’s stain.
5.5.2 Flax or linen fibers. Flax or linen fibers range in individual

diameters from 12 to 25 micrometers. When mounted in Herzberg’s stain and
viewed through a microscope, the fibers exhibit numerous cross markings known
as “nodes” which occur frequently along the length of the fiber (Figure 1200B).
Unbleached flax fibers are stained reddish gray to purple in color by Herzberg’s
stain and bleached flax fibers are stained reddish blue.
5.5.3 Hemp fibers. Hemp fibers range in individual diameters from 15 to 50

micrometers. When mounted in Herzberg’s stain and viewed through a microscope,
the fibers exhibit numerous cross markings known as “nodes” which occur
frequently along the length of the fiber. Fibers also exhibit longitudinal
cracks (Figure 1200C). Unbleached hemp fibers are stained a greenish-purple
color by Herzberg’s stain and bleached hemp fibers are stained reddish-blue.
5.5.4 Ramie fibers. Ramie fibers range in individual diameters from 20 to

80 micrometers. When mounted in Herzberg’s stain and viewed through a
microscope, the fibers exhibit cross-markings known as “nodes”. Ramie fibers
are stained a pink to a bluish-red or reddish-purple color by Herzberg’s stain.
Young fully bleached fibers may stain blue. Fiber cross-sections show
characteristic cracks in cell walls and the unusually large periphery which
distinguishes ramie from hemp and flax (Figure 1200D).
5.5.5 When a single fiber (flax, hemp, or ramie) is wetted with water and
held with the free end toward the observer, flax and ramie fibers rotate in
a clockwise direction, while hemp fiber rotates in a counter-clockwise direction.
5.5.6 Jute fibers. Jute fibers range in individual diameters from 20 to

25 micrometers. Jute fibers do not exhibit cross-markings and are stained bright
yellow by Herzberg’s stain. The fibers are stained a dark violet red when
immersed in a phloroglucinol-hydrochloric acid solution. The fiber cross-
sections are sharply polygonal in shape (Figure 1200E).
METHOD 1200
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of cotton, flax, hemp, ramie, or jute shall be
reported.
6.2 If fibers other than the fiber being identified are present, the presence
of other fibers shall also be reported.

METHOD 1200
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (500X)
FIGURE 1200A Cotton Fibers
-1
METHOD 1200
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (500X)
FIGURE 1200B Flax Fibers

METHOD 1200
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (500X)
cell end
FIGURE 1200C Hemp Fibers

METHOD 1200
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (115X)
FIGURE 1200D Ramie Fibers

METHOD 1200
Cross-Sectional
View (550K)
Longitudinal
View (500X)
FIGURE 1200E Jute Fibers

METHOD 1240
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF MANILA (ABACA’), SISAL AND COIR
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing manila, sisal and coir from
other vegetable, animal, man-made and mineral fibers. This method is not
intended for quantitative determination of these fibers in a blend of fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

any evidence of nonhomogeneity the specimen shall be composed of each variable
portion. The specimen shall not be less than 2 g of the fiber.

shall be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yarns dyed different colors
are in the lot, at least two specimens of each color shall be taken for test.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Reference standard. At least one authentic sample of each of manila,

sisal, and coir shall be kept as a reference standard.

glasses and a cross-sectioning device. The microscope shall be equipped to
4.1.3 Muffle furnace.
4.1.4 Porcelain crucible.

4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Nitric acid. Five percent solution of nitric acid prepared by diluting
5 ml of concentrated nitric acid, specific gravity 1.42, to a volume of 70 ml
with distilled water.
4.2.2 Sodium hydroxide. Five percent solution of sodium hydroxide.

METHOD 1240
5. PROCEDURE

with 1, 1, 1-trichloroethane, ether or alcohol to remove oils, waxes, dirt
or any other material that may obscure the fiber characteristics. It may also
be necessary to treat the fibers with 0.5 percent sodium hydroxide solution,
as this aids in breaking up fiber bundles. Coir fibers shall be slowly boiled
in 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 2 to 4 hours and then washed. If
it is necessary to remove dyes from the specimen which may interfere with the
identification, they may be removed by any procedure that does not damage the
fiber or change any of its characteristics. The specimen shall then be dried.
5.2 Manila and sisal. In the preparation of manila and sisal, a small portion
of the cleaned fiber shall be further prepared as follows: One end of a bundle
containing two or three dozen of the cleaned fibers shall be immersed in a
gently boiling 5 percent solution of nitric acid for 7 minutes. The heated
end of the fiber bundle shall then be washed under the cold water tap for about
30 seconds.
5.3 Coir. In the preparation of coir, a small portion of the cleaned fiber
after being boiled in 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide and washed, shall
be macerated in the mortar until the fiber cells are well separated. These
cells shall be mounted on a microscope slide and examined under the microscope.
5.4 The remaining portion of the specimen shall be placed in a porcelain

crucible and ashed in the muffle furnace at 932°F (500°C). Temperatures higher
than 932°F (500°C) shall not be used. When the ash is free of carbon, the
crucible shall be removed from the furnace, cooled and a portion of the ash
shall be placed on a slide, dispersed in water, and examined under the microscope.
5.5 Identification.
—— —
5.5.1 Manila fibers. Manila fibers are colored bright orange when heated with
boiling 5 percent solution of nitric acid. The microscopic appearance of manila
ash is-characterized by the presence of siliceous stigmata, flat rectangular
glass-like inclusions with a dimple in one surface. Although often found singly,
they develop as strings in the fibers (Figure 1240A).
5.5.2 Sisal fibers. Sisal fibers are colored a pale yellow when heated with
boiling 5 percent solution of nitric acid. The microscopic appearance of sisal
ash is characterized by the presence of slightly curved calcium oxalate crystals.
These crystals are often broken in the dispersal into rod-shaped pieces and
curved, pointed particles (Figure 1240B).
METHOD 1240
5.5.3 Coir fibers. Coir fiber cells are short and stiff, being from 0.4 to
1 mm in length and from 12 to 14 micrometers in diameter. The cell wall is
thick and the lumen has an irregularly indented outline. The cell ends
terminate suddenly and are not sharp. Cross sections help to confirm the
identification of coir. The fiber ash consists of small rounded siliceous
bodies, often described as “yeast-shaped” (Figure 1240C).
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of manila, sisal or coir shall be reported.

METHOD 1240
Figure 1240A- MANILA

METHOD 1240
Figure 1240B - SISAL
FED-STD-191A
METHOD 1240
Figure 1240C - COIR FIBER CELLS

METHOD 1400
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF ASBESTOS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing asbestos from other

fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

any evidence of nonhomogeneity, the specimen shall be composed of each vari-
able portion.
be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yams dyed different colors are
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Reference standard. At least one authentic sample of commercial
asbestos fiber shall be kept on hand as a reference standard.
4.1.2 Microscope and accessories. The apparatus for microscopic exam-
ination shall consist of a compound microscope, dissecting needles, glass
slides, cover glasses, and a cross-sectioning device. The microscope shall
be equipped to permit examination of magnifications ranging from 100x to 500X.
4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagents.

4.2.1.2 Solution B. 0.25 g of CP iodine and 5.25 g of CP potassium iodide


METHOD 1400

the supernatant liquid into an amber-colored-glass-stoppered bottle and add a
5. PROCEDURE

any other material that may obscure the fiber characteristics. If it is neces-
sary to remove dyes from the specimen which may interfere with the identifica-
tion, they may be removed by any procedure that does not damage the fiber or
change any of its characteristics. The specimen shall then be dried.


slide shall be made with transmitted light at a magnification of 100X. If this
magnification is not sufficient for positive identification, a higher magnification
shall be used. The microscopic appearance of the specimen shall be compared
with the reference standard prepared in the same manner as the specimen.
5.4 Identification. Asbestos is a fibrous silicate of magnesium and calcium,

often in combination with aluminum and iron. In the vein or in large masses, the
color is light gray, light green, gray, light yellow, or dark blue or brown if
much iron is present. But in the fibrous condition it is usually white and the
individual fibers, no matter how fine, seem to be composed of fine threads which
are below the limit of microscopic resolution. Fiber bundles will break if bent
at a sharp angle. Most asbestos fibers are stained a yellowish color by Herzberg’s
stain.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of asbestos fiber shall be reported.

METHOD 1410
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF GLASS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing glass fibers from asbestos
and from organic fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

portion.
be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yams dyed different colors are
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Reference standard. At least one authentic sample of commercial glass

fiber shall be kept on hand as a reference standard.
glasses, and a cross-sectioning device. The microscope shall be equipped to
4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagents.

1 ml of mercury in 9 ml concentrated nitric acid (94 percent) and diluted with
10 ml of distilled water. This preparation shall be made under a hood. Since
this reagent is unstable, it shall be freshly prepared.

METHOD 1410
4.2.2.1 Solution A. Zinc chloride solution at 1.80 specific gravity at 28°C

made by adding 25 ml of distilled water to 50 g of dry CP Zinc chloride (fused
sticks in sealed bottles, or crystals).


the supernatant liquid into an amber-colored glass-stoppered bottle and add
a piece of iodine to the solution. Avoid undue exposure to light and air.
4.2.3 Solution of hydrofluoric acid.
5. PROCEDURE

with 1, 1, 1-trichloroethane, ether or alcohol to remove oils, waxes, dirt
or any other material that may obscure the fiber characteristics. If it is
necessary to remove dyes from the specimen which may interfere with the
identification, they may be removed by any procedure that does not damage
the fiber or any of its characteristics. The specimen shall then be dried.

magnification shall be used. The microscopic appearance of the specimen
shall be compared with the reference standard prepared in the same reamer as
the specimen.
5.4 Identification. Glass fibers are usually white or clear but may be any
color. They break with a smooth fracture when bent sharply upon themselves.
Microscopically, they are perfectly regular in diameter throughout their
length. They have absolutely no smooth surface and are not affected by stains
or ordinary reagents. Glass filaments are soluble in hydrofluoric acid. If
there is evidence of the presence of other fibers or organic matter, the nature
of these fibers may be determined by mounting in Millon’s reagent or in Herzberg’s
stain.

METHOD 1410
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of glass fiber shall be reported.

METHOD 1500
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF RAYON, VISCOSE

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing viscose rayon from other
man-made fibers and from animal, vegetable, and mineral fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
portion.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Reference standard. At least one authentic sample of commercial rayon

shall be kept on hand as a reference standard.
. glasses, and a cross-sectioning device. The microscope shall be equipped to
4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagents.


METHOD 1500

5. PROCEDURE

sary to remove dyes from the specimen which may interfere with the identification,
they may be removed by any procedure that does not damage the fiber or change
any of its characteristics. The specimen shall then be dried.


magnification shall be used. The microscopic appearance of the specimen
shall be compared with the reference standard prepared in the same manner as
the specimen.
5.4 Identification. Viscose rayon is identified under the microscope by the

many longitudinal striations (Figure 1500). When mounted in Herzberg’s stain,
the viscose rayon filaments react to the stain slowly, first becoming pink or
light purple in color and gradually becoming darker. Cut ends and bruised spots
on the fibers take up the color much more rapidly, giving the fibers a mottled
appearance at times.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of viscose rayon fiber shall be reported.


METHOD 1500
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (250X)
FIGURE 1500 - Rayon Fibers, Viscose

METHOD 1510
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF RAYON, ACETATE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing acetate rayon from other
2. TEST SPECIMEN

portion.
be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yarns dyed different colors are
4.1 Apparatus.

cellulose acetate shall be kept on hand as a reference standard.
4.1.2 Microscope and accessories. The apparatus for microscopic examin-

ation shall consist of a compound microscope, dissecting needles, glass
be equipped to permit examination of magnifications ranging from 100X to 500X.
4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagents.

4.2.1.1 Solution A. Zinc chloride solution at 1.80 specific gravity at 28°C
made by adding 25 ml of distilled water to 50 g of dry CP Zinc chloride (fused
sticks in sealed bottles, or crystals).

METHOD 1510
4.2.2 Glacial acetic acid.
5. PROCEDURE

sary to remove dyes from the specimen which may interfere with the identification,
they may be removed by any procedure that does not damage the fiber or change any
of its characteristics. The specimen shall then be dried.
5.2 Mounting of specimen. At least a dozen fibers shall be placed on a slide.

The fibers shall be immersed in three or four drops of Herzberg’s stain, covered
with a cover glass in such a manner as to avoid air bubbles, allowed to stand for
1 or 2 minutes, and the surplus stain then drained off by tipping the slide edge-
wise on a blotter.

magnification is not sufficient for positive identification, a higher magnifica-
tion shall be used. The microscopic appearance of the specimen shall be compared
5.4 Identification. Acetate rayon filaments have a few longitudinal striations,

but they are not so numerous and usually not so conspicuous as those of viscose
rayon. Sometimes the filaments have dumbbell-shaped cross sections, giving them the
appearance, when viewed longitudinally, of having well-defined canals. Acetate
rayon is quickly colored a bright yellow, swells rapidly, and is gradually dissolved
in Herzberg’s stain. Acetate rayon dissolves quickly in cold glacial acetic acid
but does not dissolve in cuprammonium solution.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence of absence of acetate rayon fiber shall be reported.

METHOD 1520
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF RAYON, CUPRAMMONIUM

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing cuprammonium rayon from other
2. TEST SPECIMEN

able portion.
30 NUMBER OF DETERMINATIONS
be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yarns dyed different colors are in
the lot, at least two specimens of each color shall be taken for test.
4.1 Apparatus.

cuprammonium rayon shall be kept on hand as a reference standard.

4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagents.


FED-STD-191A
METHOD 1520

5. PROCEDURE



5.4 Identification. Cuprammonium rayon is smooth, without longitudinal

striations, and the cross sections are almost circular. The filaments of
cuprammonium rayon are usually smaller in diameter than viscose rayon (Figure
1520). The filaments react quickly with Herzberg’s stain and are colored purple;
the purple soon becomes so dense as to make the filaments nontransparent.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of cuprammonium rayon filaments shall be reported.

METHOD 1520
Cross-Sectional
View (500x)
Longitudinal
View (250X)
FIGURE 1520 - Rayon Fibers, Cuprammonium

METHOD 1530
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF NYLON
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing nylon filaments from other
man-made filaments and from animal, vegetable, and mineral fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
able portion.

shall be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yams dyed different
test.
4.1 Apparatus.

nylon shall be kept on hand as a reference standard.

4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagents.


METHOD 1530

4.2.1.4 Solution of 88 percent formic acid.
5. PROCEDURE



5.4 Identification. Nylon filaments have smooth surfaces with no longitudinal
or cross-markings. The diameter of each filament is very uniform and the cross
section is circular, or nearly so, for all filaments (Figure 1530). The fila-
ments are colored canary yellow to a dark yellow by Herzberg’s stain. Nylon
filaments dissolve rapidly in cold 88 percent formic acid.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of nylon filaments shall be reported.

METHOD 1530
Cross-Sectional
View (500X)
Longitudinal
View (250X)
FIGURE 1530 - Nylon Fibers

METHOD 1534
July 20, 1978
MELTING POINT OF SYNTHETIC FIBERS

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the melting point of

thermoplastic fibers, threads, or yarns containing a single type of
fiber.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the test specimen
shall be 3 to 4 mg of the material prepared as specified in 5.1.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, two specimens

shall be tested from each sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 An electrically heated stage, having a circular depression large

enough to insert a micro cover glass.
4.1.1.1 A variable transformer controlling the rate of heat input

into the stage.
4.1.1.2 Armored stem thermometers. One thermometer with a range of

20° to 160°C, accurate to 1/2°C. One thermometer with a range from
150° to 300°C, accurate to 1°C.
4.1.2 Low-powered magnifying glass.
4.1.3 Two micro cover glasses.
4.1.4 Spatula, pick needle, or other instrument for applying pressure

to the cover glasses.

METHOD 1534
4.1.5 Soxhlet extraction apparatus.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Chloroform, U. S. P.
4.2.2 U. S. Pharmacopoeia reference standards for melting point or other

pure materials for calibrating the apparatus.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The specimen shall be extracted with

chloroform for a minimum of 20 extractions in a Soxhlet extractor and
dried. The specimen shall then be cut into lengths of 1/16 inch (2 mm)
or less.
5.2 Preparation of apparatus. The apparatus shall be calibrated by

determining the melting point of a pure material of known melting point
(see 7.2). The melting point of the pure material shall be in the
range or the melting point of the fiber being tested. The value obtained
shall agree within —
+ 1°C of the known value.
5.3 If the approximate melting point of the specimen is not known

before testing, it shall be determined by a trial run.
5.4 In subsequent determinations immediately following the trial run or

initial determination, the stage in each case shall be cooled to approximately
50°C below the expected melting point, before the specimen is placed
for testing.
5.5 The specimen shall be placed in a small mound on a cover glass

and covered with another cover glass. The 2 cover glasses shall be
pressed together gently but firmly, and placed in the circular de-
pression on the stage. The temperature of the stage shall be raised with
some rapidity to within 15°C of the expected melting point, and there-
after at a rate of 3° to 4°C per minute. At this rate of temperature
rise, a slight pressure shall be applied on the upper glass cover by
pressing with a spatula, pick needle, or other instrument, so that the
complete fiber is in contact with the cover glass.

METHOD 1534
5.6 The specimen shall be observed with the aid of a magnifying
glass, and the melting point taken as the temperature at which flow of
the specimen is observed. At the observed melting point, the tempera-
ture shall be read to the nearest degree C.
6. REPORT
6.1 The melting point of the sample unit shall be the average of the
results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported to the
nearest degree C.
6.2 Each individual value utilized in expressing the final result

shall be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Apparatus of the type described in this method may be obtained

from:
(1) The Fisher Scientific Company, 711 Forbes Avenue,

Pittsburgh, PA 15219, and is known as the Fisher-
Jones Melting Point Apparatus
(2) Arthur H. Thomas Company, Vine St. at Third, P.O. Box

779, Philadelphia, PA 19105
(3) Will Scientific Instruments, Inc., Rochester, NY 14603
7.2 Six standards for use in calibrating melting point apparatus may be
obtained from the U. S. Pharmacopoeia Reference Standards, 46 Park Avenue,
New York, NY 10016.
FED. TEST. METHOD STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 1540
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF VINYLIDENE CHLORIDE FIBERS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing vinylidene chloride from

other man-made filaments and from animal, vegetable, and mineral fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

able portion.

shall be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yarns dyed different
test.
4.1 Apparatus.
vinylidene chloride shall be kept on hand as a reference standard.

4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagents.
—



METHOD 1540

the supernatant liquid Into an amber-colored-glass-stoppered bottle and add a
4.2.2 Solution of tetrachlorethylene.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimeno The specimen shall be washed in or extracted



magnification Is not sufficient for positive identification, a higher magnification
5.4 Identification. Vinylidene chloride filaments are smooth rod shaped

filaments similar to nylon and without striations or transverse markings.
The diameter of each filament is uniform and the cross section circular.
The filaments are unaffected by organic acids and alkalies but are dissolved
by polychlorinated hydrocarbons such as tetrachlorethylene.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of vinylidene chloride filaments shall be

reported.
6.2 If fibers other than the fiber being Identified are present, the
presence of other fibers shall also be reported.

METHOD 1550
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF VINYL CHLORIDE-ACETATE COPOLYMER FIBERS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for distinguishing vinyl chloride-acetate

copolymers from the natural fibers and from other man-made fibers but not
other types of vinyl fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

able portion.

4.1 Apparatus.

vinyl chloride-acetate copolymer shall be kept on hand as a reference stan-
dard.

4.1.3 Blotter.
4.2 Reagents.



METHOD 1550

4.2.2 Acetone.
5. PROCEDURE


magnification is not sufficient for positive identification, a higher magnifi-
cation shall be used. The microscopic appearance of the specimen shall be com-
pared with the reference standard prepared in the same manner as the specimen.
5.4 Identification. Vinyl chloride-acetate copolymer filaments have smooth

surfaces without striations or transverse markings but have a false lumen. The
cross sectional area is dumbbell to slipper shape in form. Vinyl chloride-
acetate copolymers dissolve rapidly in cold acetone but not in cold glacial
acetic acid.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence or absence of vinyl chloride-acetate copolymers shall be
reported.
of other fibers also be reported.

METHOD 1600
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF SYNTHETIC FIBERS BY GENERIC CLASS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the identification of synthetic
fibers as a generic class. It is not intended for use on blends of fibers
that cannot be separated before identification, nor is it intended for the
Identification of-the various fibers within the same generic class. In the
interests of standardization of testing requirements, it is recommended that
this method not be used in procurement documents.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a representative portion of fibers from the

sample unit.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 (a) A compound microscope with an eyepiece and substage condenser

for the attachment of polarizing discs, or (b) a polarizing microscope.
4.1.2 Microscope illuminator.
4.1.3 Hydrometer.
4.1.4 Glass slides

4.1.5 Cover slips.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Anthrone (9, 10-dihydro-9-oxoanthracene).
4.2.2 Methylene chloride/ethanol (90/10 by volume).

METHOD 1600
4.2.3 Mineral oil.
4.2.4 Monochlorobenzene.
4.2.5 Cassia oil.
4.2.6 Benzyl alcohol.
4.2.7 Sulfuric acid (cone. 98 percent).

4.2.8 Toluene.
4.2.9 Methylene chloride.
4.2.10 Density liquids. Four liquids of known density, 1.0, 1.2, 1.4, and
1.7, are required. For 1.0, water with a few drops of wetting agent added to
reduce surface tension, so that fibers with water-resistant finishes will be
wetted, is satisfactory. For 1.2, 1,1,1-trichloroethane and benzene are mixed
to the specified density In a graduated cylinder using a hydrometer. For 1.4
and 1.7, bromoform and 1,1,1-trichloroethane are mixed in the same manner. It
is convenient to keep the solutions in glass cylinders suitable for accepting
a hydrometer, so that the density can be easily rechecked.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Anthrone test. The specimen of fiber shall be placed in a few mini-
liters of the concentrated sulfuric acid in which several crystals of anthrone
have been dissolved, and several drops of water shall be added. The presence
of cellulosic fibers is indicated by an intense opaque blue color. If
cellulosic finishes are present on synthetic fibers, the solution may develop
a blue tint. This color, however, is easily distinguished from the intense
opaque blue color of the positive test. If the test is positive, separate
portions of the test specimen shall be placed in a few milliliters of benzyl
alcohol at 122°F (50°C) and a few milliliters of the methylene chloride-ethanol
solution at room temperature. If the fiber is insoluble in benzyl alcohol
but not in the methylene chloride-ethanol solution, the fiber is triacetate.
If the fiber is soluble in both solvents, the fiber is acetate. If the fiber
is insoluble in both solvents, the fiber is rayon. (It should be noted that
cotton, which is readily recognized under the microscope, is also insoluble
in both.)

METHOD 1600
5.2 Density range of fibers. If the anthrone test is negative, i.e., an

intense opaque blue color does not develop, the density range of the fiber
shall be determined. The specimen of fiber, from which any finish has been
removed, shall be tied in a knot if the form of the specimen permits. The
excess fiber shall be cut off close to the knot, and the knot placed in boiling
benzene to remove any entrapped air. By means of tweezers, it shall then be
placed below the surface of the liquid of density 1.0 and released. Whether
the fiber floats or sinks shall be recorded. This procedure shall be repeated
until the fiber specimen floats in one of the liquids or sinks in all. The
density range of the specimen shall be recorded as less than 1.0 if it floats
on the surface of that liquid; between 1.0 and 1.2 if it sinks to the bottom
of the 1.0 density liquid and floats on the surface of the 1.2 density liquid;
etc.
5.3 Fibers in the density range less than 1.0 are olefins.
5.4 Examination for polar colors. When examining the fibers for polar colors,
one disc shall be placed in the eyepiece of the microscope and the other in
the substage condenser. Examination shall be made at an angle of 45 degrees
to the plane of vibration of the crossed polarizers, which is the angle at
which the fibers exhibit the highest color.
5.5 Parallel examination. Those fibers which exhibit no polar color except
low order gray or silver shall be examined parallel, i.e., under the microscope
equipped with the eyepiece analyzer only and with the long axis of the fibers
parallel to the plane of vibration. The direction of movement of the Becke
line, i.e., the bright line caused by the reflection and refraction of light at
the margin between the fiber and immersion liquid, shall be noted as the
microscope is focused up.
5.6 Nylon, acrylic, and nitryl fibers. Fibers in the density range of 1.0
to 1.2 are nylon, acrylic, and nitryl. Fibers in this density range shall be
mounted in mineral oil and examined for polar colors as described in 5.4.
Those exhibiting no polar colors except low order gray or silver shall be
mounted in toluene and examined parallel as described in 5.5. If the Becke
line moves toward the liquid, the specimen is nitryl. If it moves toward the
fiber, it is an acrylic.
5.7 Polyester, modacrylic, vinal, and vinyon fibers. Fibers in the density
range 1.2 to 1.4 are polyester, modacrylic, vinal, or vinyon. The specimen of
fiber shall be mounted in mineral oil and examined for polar colors as described
in 5.4. Those exhibiting no polar colors except low order gray or silver are
modacrylic and vinyon. The specimen of fiber shall be placed in methylene
chloride at room temperature. If the fiber is soluble, it is vinyon. If the
fiber is insoluble, it is modacrylic.

METHOD 1600
5.8 Fibers in the density range 1.4 to 1.7 are saran.
5.9 Glass and fluorocarbons. Fibers in a density range greater than 1.7
are glass and fluorocarbons. The specimen shall be mounted in toluene and
examined as described in 5.5. If the Becke moves toward the fiber it is
glass. If it moves toward the liquid it is fluorocarbon.
6. REPORT
6.1 The presence of absence of the specified synthetic fiber shall be

reported by generic class.

METHOD 1600
OUTLINE OF IDENTIFICATION METHOD
Anthrone Positive
benzyl alcohol methylene chloride

ethanol
soluble soluble ACETATE
Cellulosics soluble insoluble TRIACETATE
insoluble insoluble RAYON
Anthrone Negative
check density range
DENSITY RANGE
OLEFIN
less than 1.0
Polar Colors Present
1.0 to 1.2 Polar Colors Absent

fiber ACRYLIC
mount in toluene Becke line to
liquid NYTRIL
Polar Colors Present

fiber POLYESTER
mount in cassia Becke line to
oil liquid VINAL
1.2 to 1.4
Polar Colors Absent
soluble in methylene chloride VINYON
insoluble in methylene chloride MODACRYLIC
1.4 to 1.7 SARAN

fiber GLASS
higher than mount in toluene Becke line to
1.7 liquid FLUOROCARBON

METHOD 1700
July 20, 1978
IDENTIFICATION OF DYES ON ANIMAL FIBERS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the type of dyestuff on wool or
silk fibers. It may also be used to determine the type of dye applied to
blends of animal and vegetable fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be about 5 g of the textile material, cut into 1/4
inch (6 mm) squares, if a cloth.
be tested from each sample unit. If fibers or yams dyed different colors are in
the lot, at least two specimens of each color shall be taken for test.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Filter paper Whatman No. 42.
4.1.2 Funnel.
4.1.3 Silica crucible.
4.1.4 Test tubes.
4.1.5 Bunsen burner.
4.1.6 Sand bath.
4.1.7 Beaker 200 ml.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Bleached and mercerized cotton cloth.
4.2.2 Chrome-mordanted wool cloth.
4.2.3 Scoured wool cloth.

METHOD 1700
4.2.4 Ethyl alcohol (70 percent).
4.2.5 Fusion mixture. Equal parts of potassium nitrate CP and anhydrous

sodium carbonate.
4.2.6 Ammonium hydroxide solution. Ammonium hydroxide solution consisting

of 2 ml NH30H, specific gravity 0.899 per 1,000 ml of solution.
4.2.7 Ethylene diamine (60 to 70 percent).
4.2.8 Acetic acid, glacial.
4.2.9 Sodium chloride.
4.2.10 Potassium persulfate (1 percent solution).
4.2.11 Sodium sulfate.
4.2.12 Sodium hydroxide (10 percent solution).
4.2.13 Sodium acetate (10 percent solution).
4.2.14 Nitric-hydrochloric acid solution. 1 part by volume of concentrated

nitric acid to 3 parts of concentrated hydrochloric acid.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The entire specimen shall be washed free of

loose dyestuff with hot water. The solution shall be saved for further testing
if the specimen is materially changed in shade. The solution shall be
concentrated and the dyestuff applied to a 1 inch (25 mm) piece of scoured wool
by standard dyeing procedures.
5.2 Test for presence of basic dye. A few pieces of the original dyed
material shall be placed in a test tubes covered with the 10 Percent sodium
hydroxide solution, and boiled for 1 minute. The solution shall then be
cooled to room temperature and extracted by shaking with 5 ml of ethyl ether.
The ether extract shall be decanted into a clean test tube and an equal
volume of cold water added, followed by acidification with acetic acid. The
basic color is shown by visible color-bleeding from the ether layer to the
acidified water.
5.3 Test for presence of direct cotton dye. A few pieces of the original
specimen shall be placed in a test tube, covered with a 2 percent ammonium
hydroxide solution and boiled for 2 minutes. If the solution is colored, a
few crystals of sodium chloride and a piece of mercerized cotton and scoured
METHOD 1700
wool approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) square shall be added, the solution boiled
for 1 minute, and allowed to cool to room temperature. If the cotton is
deeply stained, the dye is of the direct cotton type. If the cotton is only
slightly stained or not stained, and the wool is stained, the dyestuff is
of the acid or mordant-acid type.
5.4 Test for presence of acid and mordant-acid dyes. The acid and mordant-
acid dyes shall be differentiated by warming a piece of the original specimen
in nitric-hydrochloric acid solution on a sand bath with constant stirring,
until a dry residue is obtained. Tin, chromium, iron, and aluminum shall be
identified if present by standard qualitative analytical procedures. If a
mordant is present, the dye is of the mordant-acid type.
5.5 Test for presence of azoic (insoluble azo) dye. If the results of the
previous tests were negative, four pieces of the original specimen shall be
placed in 10 ml of ethylene diamine, heated for 2 minutes at 122°F (50°C),
and allowed to cool to room temperature. The solution shall be decanted and
separated into two portions. One portion shall be diluted with 15 ml of
distilled water, acidified with acetic acid, allowed to cool to room temperature
and filtered. The filtrate shall be removed (except for use in 5.6) and the
filter paper washed with hot water. The presence of azoic dyes (insoluble azo)
is indicated by a colored precipitate on the filter.
5.6 Test for presence of vat-type dye. The filtrate from 5.5 shall be
oxidized with 5 ml of the potassium persulfate solution if azoic dyes are not
present. The solution shall be allowed to set for 20 minutes, filtered, and
washed with hot water. The presence of a colored precipitate indicates a vat-
type dye.
5.7 Test for presence of mordant dye. If azoic dyes are not found (see 5.5)
a few crystals of sodium sulfate and a piece of chrome-mordanted wool shall
be added to the filtrate from 5.5. The solution and wool shall be boiled for
a few minutes and allowed to cool to room temperature. The presence of mordant
dyes is indicated by the color formed on the mordanted wool. This shall be
confirmed by ashing a few pieces of the original specimen in the crucible and
then fusing with the fusion mixture. This melt shall then be analyzed for
aluminum, chromium, tin, and iron by standard qualitative analytical procedures.
6. REPORT
6.1 The type of dye shall be reported as basic, direct cotton, acid, mordant-
acid, azoic (insoluble azo), vat or mordant. Whenever a mordant is present, the
type of mordant shall be reported.

METHOD 2011
July 20, 1978
DIHYDROXYDICHLORODIPHENYL METHANE CONTENT,

CALORIMETRIC METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl

methane (2, 2’ methylene bis - 4 - chlorophenol) content of textile materials
that have been treated with this compound-to prevent the formation of mildew.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a 1 g composite of the material cut into pieces
approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) square, and thoroughly mixed .

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Spectrophotometer and accessories.
4.1.2 Volumetric flasks.
4.1.3 Microburette.
4.1.4 Beakers.
4.1.5 Pipettes.
4.1.6 Air oven.
4.1.7 Weighing bottle.

4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Crystallized 4-aminoantipyrine solution. A crystallized 4-aminoantipyrine

solution, freshly prepared. The solution shall be prepared by dissolving
2 ± 0.001 g of 4-aminoantipyrine, m.p. 108° - 109°C in 100 ml of distilled
water.

METHOD 2011
4.2.2 Potassium ferricyanide solution. A potassium ferricyanide solution,

freshly prepared. The solution shall be prepared by dissolving 8 ± 0.001 g
of reagent grade potassium ferricyanide in 100 ml of distilled water.
4.2.3 Sodium carbonate solution. A sodium carbonate solution, approximately

0.03 percent, pH between 10.4 and 10.6. Distilled water shall be used. The
pH should be rechecked just prior to using.
4.2.4 Dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane (2, 2’ methylene bis-4-chlorophenol)

“G-4 Technical” or equal (see 7.1).
4.2.5 Buffer solution (distilled water), 2.47 percent boric acid, 0.4 percent
sodium hydroxide, pH of 9.1 to 9.2 (adjust with additional sodium hydroxide, if
necessary).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. Three samples not less than two g each shall
be cut from the sample unit. One sample shall be cut from each edge of the sample
unit but will not include the selvage except for narrow fabrics such as braid, tape
or webbing when it is not practical or possible. The third sample shall be taken
from the middle of the sample unit. No two samples shall contain the same warp
or filling yams except narrow fabrics such as braid, tape or webbing when it is
not practical or possible.
5.1.1 The three samples taken from the sample unit shall be cut in small
pieces approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) square and thoroughly mixed to form a
composite sample. A one g test specimen shall be taken from the composite
sample.
5.1.2 Weight of dry specimen. A specimen approximately 1 g taken from the

composite sample shall be placed in a tared weighing bottle and dried in a
circulating air oven at 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C). The specimen shall be
dried to a weight which is constant to ± 0.001 g.
5.2 Testing of specimen. The dried specimen shall be placed in a 200 ml

beaker. Add to the beaker 50 ml of the 0.03 percent sodium carbonate solution
and heat the contents to boiling. The solution shall be boiled gently for
5 minutes. The hot solution shall be decanted into a 200 ml volumetric flask.
The extraction and boiling with sodium carbonate described above shall be repeated
two more times and the extracts combined with the first extract in the 200 ml
flask. The solution in the flask shall be diluted almost to the mark with the
0.03 percent sodium carbonate solution, using the diluent to wash the specimen
two times. The flask and contents shall be permitted to cool to room temperature.
The contents shall be diluted to the mark with the 0.03 percent sodium carbonate
solution.
METHOD 2011
5.2.1 About 20 ml of the solution from 5.2 shall be filtered through a dry
filter. A proper aliquot of this solution to provide a concentration that will
rail within the points on the standard curve. The aliquot shall be placed in
a 25 ml volumetric flask. A 0.5 ml of a 4-aminoantipyrine solution shall be added
from a microburette or pipette and the solution diluted to the mark with the 0.03
percent sodium carbonate solution. (A buffered solution (see 4.2.5) maybe
used for the dilution. In this case the standard curve would be prepared using
the same buffered solution). Add from a microburette or pipette 0.25 ml of
the potassium ferricyanide solution. The solution shall be shaken vigorously,
allowed to stand 5 minutes, poured into a cuvette and the percent transmission
measured within 30 minutes at 505 nanometers with the spectrophotometer which
has been adjusted to zero and 100 percent transmission with a blank. The blank
shall be prepared in a 25 ml volumetric flask. 0.5 ml of the 4-aminoantipyrine
solution shall be added from a microburette or pipette, and the solution diluted
to the mark with the 0.03 percent sodium carbonate solution or the buffered
solution (whichever was used for the sample). Add from a microburette or pipette
0.25 ml of the potassium ferricyanide solution. The solution shall be shaken
vigorously, allowed to stand 5 minutes, poured into a cuvette and the percent
transmission adjusted to zero and 100 percent. The blank gives about the same
transmission (98-100 percent) as that of distilled water.
5.3 Preparation of standard curve. 0.2 of a g of dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl

methane shall be weighed to the nearest ml, dissolved in a few ml of acetone,
transferred to a 200 ml volumetric flask, and filled to the mark with acetone.
One ml of this solution shall be pipetted into a 100 ml volumetric flask and diluted
to the mark with the 0.03 percent sodium carbonate solution. This solution which
contains 10 micrograms of dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane per ml shall be used
for suitable aliquots covering the range of 20 to 60 micrograms. (2 ml equals
20 micrograms, etc.). Each aliquot shall be placed in a 25 ml volumetric flask.
The color shall be developed and the percent transmission determined as in 5.2.1.
The standard tune shall be plotted on linear graph paper, plotting percent trans-
mission versus micrograms of dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane in 25 ml of solution.
The standard curve shall be drawn by connecting consecutive points between 20 and
60 micrograms by straight lines.
5.4 Calculations.
5.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, the dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane content
of the specimen shall be calculated as follows:
dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane, percent = 0.02A

B x S
Where: A = Dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane concentration
from the standard curve in micrograms.
B = Aliquot of 200 ml test solution taken, milliliters.
S = Weight of oven dried specimen, g.

METHOD 2011
6. REPORT
6.1 The dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane content of the sample unit shall be

the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported
to the nearest 0.1 percent.
6.1.1 The individual values for each individual specimen used to calculate the
average shall also be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Samples of “G-4 Technical” can be obtained from Sindar Corp., a Division of
Givaudan Corporation, 125 Delawanna Avenue, Clifton, NJ 07014.

METHOD 2012
July 20, 1978
DIHYDROXYDICHLORODIPHENYL METHANE CONTENT,
PARR CHLORIDE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl

-
methane (2,2’ methylene bis-4-chlorophenol) content of cotton and woolen
textiles. Although the Parr oxidation method is lengthy, it is well suited
to the determination of the inhibitor in textiles following extraction. Errors
are a function of the inorganic chloride content of the material being analyzed,
becoming considerable when the concentrations of inorganic and organic chlorides
approach each other.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be a 20 g composite of the material cut into
pieces approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) square, and thoroughly mixed.

shall be tested from the composite sample (see 5.1.1).
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Crucible. Small iron crucible with cover, or 22 ml Parr peroxide
bomb crucible.
4.1.3 600 ml beaker.

401.5 Burettes.
4.1.6 Desiccator.
4.1.7 Blast burner.
4.1.8 Buchner funnel.

METHOD 2012
4.1.9 Crucible tongs.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Sodium peroxide, chloride free.
4.2.2 Ferric alum indicator. Saturated solution of ferric ammonium sulfate.

4.2.3 Standard silver nitrate solution, 0.1 N.
4.2.4 Ethyl alcohol, 95 percent.
4.2.5 Standard potassium thiocyanate solution, 0.1 N.
4.2.6 Nitric acid, specific gravity 1.42 to 1.43.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. Three samples not less than twenty grams each
shall be cut from the sample unit. One sample shall be cut from each edge of
the sample unit, but will not include the selvage. The third sample shall be
taken from the middle of the sample unit. No two samples shall contain the
same warp or filling yarns.
composite sample. A 20 g test specimen shall be taken from the composite
sample.
5.2 Weight of dry specimen. The material to be tested shall be weighed to

the nearest 0.001 g.
— The specimen shall be placed in the thimble of a Soxhlet
extraction apparatus and extracted with ethyl alcohol for eight hours. When
extraction is complete, the extract shall be transferred to a tared evaporating
dish, evaporated to dryness, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to a constant
weight (± 0.001 g). The residue shall be crushed with a small metal spatula
and intimately mixed by kneading.
5.3 Determination of total chlorine. Three-tenths of a g of the residue

shall be weighed to the nearest 0.001 g and transferred into the iron crucible
or bomb crucible. The weighed residue shall be mixed with 10 g of sodium
peroxide. The crucible shall be covered and heated by directing the tip of a
narrow flame from a blast burner against any part of the crucible bottom. The
heating shall be continued for 1-1/2 minutes after the combustion begins. The
crucible shall be shaken holding it with tongs until the melt mixes thoroughly.
If a Parr crucible is used, it shall be ignited according to procedures recommended
by the manufacturer. The crucible shall be cooled and the crucible and contents

METHOD 2012
introduced into a 600 ml beaker containing 75 ml of distilled water. After the
melt has dissolved, the crucible shall be raised to the upper inside edge of
the beaker with a stirring rod and the outside of the crucible washed with a
stream of distilled water from a wash bottle. The crucible shall be held with
the thumb and forefinger on the washed outside surface, and the washings of
the inside of the crucible added to the beaker. The beaker contents shall be
boiled for 5 minutes, cooled to room temperature, neutralized slowly with pure
nitric acid, and, allowed to cool to room temperature. Add from a burette
0.5 ml of the standard potassium thiocyanate solution. If the crucible is
nonferrous, alum indicator shall be added. The standard silver nitrate solution
shall be added from a burette until the reddish brown color of the thiocyanate
disappears, and 2 ml added in excess. The precipitate shall be filtered
through a Buchner funnel, washed with cool distilled water, and the filtrate
titrated with potassium thiocyanate to a permanent reddish endpoint. A blank
determination shall be made using the same amounts of peroxide, acid, and water.
The volume of silver nitrate shall be corrected for the blank.
5.4 Determination of inorganic chlorides. The remainder of the residue (see
5.2) shall be weighed to the nearest 0.001 g and transferred to a 200ml
beaker. The residue shall be extracted with about 50 ml of hot water, mixing
well with a glass rod. The mixture shall be cooled, decanted through filter
paper, and the residue washed with warm distilled water. The filtrate shall be
diluted to about 300 ml and acidified with 3 ml of colorless nitric acid, and
2 ml of ferric alum indicator added. Add from a burette 0.5 ml of the standard
potassium thiocyanate solution. The procedure for the determination of total
chlorine (see 5.3) shall be followed beginning with “The standard silver nitrate
solution shall be added from a burette until the reddish brown color of the
thiocyanate disappears, and 2 ml added in excess.”
5.5 Calculations.
5.5.1 The total chlorine content of the test specimen shall be calculated
as follows:
Total chlorine, Percent = 3.55F (AB-CD)
E x G
Where: A = Volume of silver nitrate solution in ml.
B = Normality of silver nitrate solution.
C = Volume of potassium thiocyanate solution in ml.
D = Normality of potassium thiocyanate solution.
E = Weight of residue used for total chlorine determination in g.
F = Weight of total residue in g.
G = Weight of original specimen in g.

METHOD 2012
5.5.2 The chlorine in the inorganic chlorides in the test specimen shall
be calculated as follows:
Chlorine in the inorganic chlorides, percent = 3.55F (HB-ID)

J X G
Where: H = Volume of silver nitrate solution in ml.

I = Volume of potassium thiocyanate solution in ml.
J = Weight of residue used for inorganic chlorides determination in g.
F, B, D, and G = same as in 5.5.1.
5.5.3 The dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane, percent = 3.79 (R-S).
Where: R= Total chlorine, percent (see 5.5.1).
S = Chlorine from inorganic chlorides, percent (see 5.5.2).
6. REPORT
6.1 The dihydroxydichlorodiphenyl methane content of the sample unit shall
be the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be
reported to the nearest 0.1 percent.
6.1.1 The individual values for each individual specimen used to calculate
the average shall also be reported.

METHOD 2013
July 20, 1978
FLUORINE CONTENT OF TEXTILE MATERIALS

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the fluorine content of materials
which have fluorine compounds for moth repellency.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be 0.5 ± 0.05 g composite of the material cut
into pieces approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) square, and thoroughly mixed.


4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Fluorine determination apparatus. Fluorine determination apparatus

having a 300 ml flask with a no. 40/50 joint (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Burette.
4.1.3 Beakers.
4.1.4 200 ml volumetric flask.
4.1.5 Bunsen burner or electric heater.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Sulfuric acid. 50 percent sulfuric acid (H2SO4) by volume in distilled

water.
4.2.2 Thorium nitrate. 0.01N thorium nitrate Th (NO3)4 standardized against

a standard sodium fluoride (NaF) solution.
4.2.3 Hydrochloric acid. 0.1N hydrochloric acid (HCl) solution.
4.2.4 Sodium hydroxide. 10 percent sodium hydroxide (NaOH) solution.

METHOD 2013
4.2.5 Indicator. 0.05 percent aqueous solution sodium alizarin sulfonate.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. Three samples not less than two g each shall
be cut from the sample unit. One specimen shall be cut from each edge of the
sample unit but will not include the selvage. The third sample shall be taken
from the middle of the sample unit. No two samples shall contain the same warp
or filling yarns.
composite sample. A 0.5 g test specimen shall be taken from the composite
sample.
5.2 Transfer specimen to the 300 ml flask of the fluorine apparatus (see
figure 2013) and add 40 ml of 50 percent sulfuric acid. Connect the flask to
the fluorine apparatus. Immerse the lower end of condenser in 20 ml of distilled
water in the receiving beaker to insure the solution of gases.
5.3 Heat gradually to dissolve specimen and then start distillations with a
high heat (Bunsen burner or electric heater). Avoid localized overheating when
using Bunsen burner by protecting the flask with asbestos sheeting placed directly
under the bottom of the flask.
5.4 Maintain liquor temperature between 277° and 284°F (136° and 140°C) by
dropping distilled water from a separator funnel inserted in the neck of the
flask. Collect 200 ml but not less than 176 ml of distillate. Collect 185 ± 5
ml of distillate. Transfer the distillate to 200 ml volumetric flask, and
fill to the mark with distilled water. Remove any of the fats or waxes that
are present and again make up volume with distilled water.
5.5 Titrate two 20 ml aliquots of the distillate. To each aliquot add two
drops sodium alizarin sulfonate indicator and one drop of 10 percent sodium
hydroxide. The addition of the sodium hydroxide will produce a light violet
color (see 7.2, 7.3). Titrate the distillate with 0.1N hydrochloric acid to
a yellow coloration then add five drops in excess (see 7.4). Titrate the resultant
solution to a faint but definite pink coloration with 0.01N thorium nitrate
solution.
5.6 In cases where an alternate calculation formula is necessary because

the weight is more or less than 0.5 g the percent fluorine (F) shall be
calculated as follows:
Percent fluorine = ml of Th(NO3)4 x N of Th(NO3)4 x 0.19 x 100

Sample weight (g)
FED. TEST METHOD ST. NO. 191A

METHOD 2013
6. REPORT
6.1 The percent fluorine shall be the average of specimens tested from
a sample unit and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 percent.
6.2 Individual results used to calculate the average shall also be

reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The apparatus for fluorine determination used in this method may be
purchased from Ace Glass Inc., Vineland, NJ 08360 as No. 6430.
7.2 Twenty ml aliquot of distillate should never require more than one
drop of 10 percent sodium hydroxide solution. When more is required,
contamination of the distillate is indicated. The distillate shall be
discarded and a new specimen tested.
7.3 Sodium ion concentration in the distillate should be kept to a

minimum since these ions cause erroneous (high) results.
7.4 The pH of the solution taken for titration is important. The pH

provided by the addition of five drops excess 0.1N HCl is ideal (i.e.
3.2). The use of buffers is not recommended because the end point is not
well defined even in the absence of a buffer.

METHOD 2013
FIGURE 2013 - Test apparatus for fluorine content of textile materials.

METHOD 2015
July 20, 1978
SODIUM SALT OF 5-CHLORO-2- [4CHL0R0-2- [3-(3,4 DICHLOROPHENYL)-
UREIDO] -PHENOXY ] BENZENSULFONATE CONTENT
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the sodium-5-chloro-2- [4 chloro-

2- [3-(3,4 dichlorophenyl)-ureido] -phenoxy] benzenesulfonate content of
woolen textile materials that have been treated with this compound as a
mothproofing agent (see 7.1 and 7.2).
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 All wool. When the material to be tested is 100 percent wool, the
specimen shall be 500 ± 50 mg.
2.2 Polyester and wool blend. When the material to be tested is a blend
of polyester and wool, the specimen shall be 1000 ± 100 mg.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Electric heater with variable control.
4.1.2 Heat-resistant glass flask. A 250 ml, round bottom, single neck,
alkali resistant, heat-resistant glass flask.
4.1.3 250 ml trap bulb and connecting arm (see 7.3).
4.1.4 Graham condenser (jacket 300 mm long).
4.1.5 Funnel.
4.1.6 500 ml volumetric flasks.
4.1.8 Pipettes.

METHOD 2015
4.1.9 Boiling chips.
4.1.10 Spectrophotometer or filter photometer. Spectrophotometer or filter

photometer with a green filter having a maximum transmission at approximately
500 nanometers.
4.1.11 Silicone stopcock lubricant.
4.1.12 Potassium Iodide-Starch test paper.
4.1.13 Congo Red test paper.
4.1.14 Red and blue litmus paper.
4.1.15 Analytical balance.
4.1.16 Air oven.
4.1.17 Soxhlet extractor.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 2.0 N potassium hydroxide (KOH), 112 g of potassium hydroxide pellets
ACS, per 1000 ml of solution.
4.2.2 1.0 N hydrochloric acid (HCl), 85 ml of hydrochloric acid, 37.5 percent

concentrated, ACS per 1000 ml of solution.
4.2.3 37.5 percent concentrated hydrochloric acid, ACS.
4.2.4 0.1 N sodium nitrite (NaNO2), 6.9 g sodium nitrite ACS, Per 1000 ml
of solution. Sodium nitrite is subject to decomposition and should be made
up fresh.
4.2.5 0.01 molar benzoyl-H-acid (monosodium salt of 1-napthol-3,6-disulfonic

acid, 8-benzamido), 8.9 g 50 percent benzoyl-H-acid per 1000 ml of solution.
Store protected from light, (see 7.3).
4.2.6 1.0 N sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3), 42 g sodium bicarbonate ACS, per

1000 ml solution.
4.2.7 3,4 dichloroaniline (distilled and pure, melting point 71°-72°C),

(see 7.3).
4.2.8 Antifoam agent (polysiloxane derivative) (see 7.4).

METHOD 2015
4.2.9 Chloroform, ACS.
4.2.10 Distilled water.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of standard reference solution.
5.1.1 Dichloroaniline-hydrochloride stock solution. On an analytical balance,

weigh 162.0 ± 0.1 mg of 3,4 dichloroaniline. Place in a 1000 ml volumetric
flask. Add 10 ml of 37.5 percent concentrated hydrochloric acid and 10 ml
of distilled water. Heat the flask in a water bath with boiling water and keep
shaking the flask until the dichloroaniline is completely dissolved. Dilute
to volume with distilled water 65° to 81°F (18° to 27°C).
5.1.2 Standard reference solution. Pipette 20 ml of dichloroaniline-

hydrochloride stock solution (5.1.1) into a 1000 ml volumetric flask. Add
30 ml. of distilled water 45° to 50°F (7° to 10°C). Cool the solution to 45°
to 50°F (7° to 10°C), add 8 ml 1.0 N hydrochloric acid and 2 to 3 ml of 0.1 N
sodium nitrite. Test with Congo Red test paper and the paper should turn dark
blue instantly. Also test with Potassium Iodide-Starch test paper and the paper
should turn black instantly. Agitate the solution thoroughly and keep at 45° to
50°F (7° to 10°C) for exactly 20 minutes out of direct light. Add 30 ml of
0.1 N sodium bicarbonate solution to effect neutrality while maintaining the
cold temperature. Check for neutrality with both red and blue litmus paper.
Immediately add 3 ml of 0.01 M benzoyl-H-acid and agitate for two minutes to
effect good coupling. Dilute to volume with distilled water. Determine
absorbance of this standard reference solution using a filter photometer or
spectrophotometer. Maximum absorbance occurs at approximately 505 nanometers.
When using a filter photometer, a green filter having a maximum transmission
at approximately 500 nanometers should be used.
5.2 Weight of dry specimen. The specimen shall be placed in a weighing

bottle, dried in a circulating air oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F
(105° to 110°C), cooled in a desiccator, and weighed. Repeat this cycle until
a weight is obtained that is constant to ± 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of
the dry specimen” and in the calculation of results is indicated as “O”.
5.3 Testing of specimens containing 100 percent wool.
5.3.1 Cut specimen into small pieces and place in a 250 ml round bottom
distillation flask with a few boiling chips. Add 130 ml of 2.0 N potassium
hydroxide and the antifoam agent. Grease all ground glass connecting joints
of distilling apparatus with silicone grease. Assemble the complete distilling
apparatus as shown in Figure 2015 so that the distillate is collected through
a funnel into a 500 ml volumetric flask. Heat the distilling flask gently,
using an electric heater with variable control, until the liquid boils and boil

METHOD 2015
gently for 10 minutes. Increase the heating until vapor passes through 250 ml
trap bulb and connecting arm and into the condenser. Continue distillation
until a minimum of 100 ml of distillate has been collected. The distillate
must not be contaminated by any carry-over of the liquid being distilled. Cool
distillate to 45° to 50°F (7° to 10°C). Add 8 ml of 1.0 N hydrochloric acid
and 2-3 ml of 0.1 N sodium nitrite. Agitate and test with Congo Red test
paper; paper turns dark blue instantly. Test with Potassium Iodide-Starch
test paper; paper turns black instantly. Agitate solution thoroughly and keep
at 45° to 50°F (7° to 10°C) for 20 minutes while protecting from direct light.
Add 30 ml of 1.0 N sodium bicarbonate solution and check solution for neutrality
with red and blue litmus paper. Add 3 ml of 0.01 M benzoyl-H-acid and agitate
2 minutes to effect good coupling. Dilute to volume with distilled water and
measure the absorbance using a filter photometer or spectrophotometer. Maximum
absorbance occurs at approximately 505 nanometers. When using a filter photo-
meter, a green filter having a maximum transmission at approximately 500
nanometers should be used.
5.4 Testing specimens of polyester/wool blend.
5.4.1 The specimen shall be extracted with chloroform for ten (10) cycles
in a Soxhlet extractor. Dry the specimen and continue with the procedure
described in 5.3.1.
5.5 Calculations.
5.5.1 Specimens containing 100 percent wool. The percent mothproofing agent
on the wool fiber shall be calculated from the absorbance measurements as
follows:
Percent Mothproofing Agent = 544 x At
As x O x P
Where: A s = Absorbance of standard reference solution (see 5.5.3).

At = Absorbance of test solution.
O = Original dry weight of specimen in mg (5.2).
P = Proportion of wool in the sample, expressed as a decimal to the
nearest 0.01.
5.5.2 Specimens containing polyester/wool blend. The percent mothproofing

agent on the wool fiber shall be calculated from absorbance measurements as
follows:

METHOD 2015
Percent Mothproofing Agent = 544 x At x 1.09
As x O x P
Where: As = Absorbance of standard reference solution (see 5.5.3).
At = Absorbance of test solution.
O = Original dry weight of specimen in mg (5.2).
P = Proportion of wool in the sample, expressed as a decimal to
the nearest 0.01.
5.5.3 Where spectrometric measurements are taken from a transmission scale

the absorbance shall be calculated as follows:
A = Log10 1/T.
Where: T = transmission measurement.

A = absorbance.
6. REPORT
6.1 The percent mothproofing agent content of a sample unit shall be reported
as the average of the values obtained for the specimens tested and shall be
the average shall be reported to the nearest 0.01 percent.
7. NOTES
7.1 This method determines the content as a 100 percent active (pure) material.
7.2 This mothproofing formulation may be obtained under the trade name of
Mitin FF High Cone. from Ciba-Geigy Corp., Dyestuffs and Chemicals Division,
Swing Road, Greensboro, NC 27409 or under the name of Intracide M from Dyes
and Chemicals Division, Crompton and Knowles Corp., Route 208, Fair Lawn, NJ
07410.
7.3 Materials required for testing. The 3,4 dichloroaniline, the benzoyl-
H-acid, and the 250 ml trap bulb and connecting arm may be obtained from CIBA-
GEIGY Corporation, Dyestuffs and Chemical Division, Swing Road, Greensboro, NC
27409.
7.4 Antiform A from Dow Corning Corporation was found to be suitable for use
in this test method.

METHOD 2015
FIG 2015 DISTILLING APPARATUS

METHOD 2016
July 20, 1978
SODIUM SALT OF [(4, 5-DICHLORO, 2-CHLOROMETHANE
SULFONAMIDO) 3’, 4’, 6', TRICHLORO] DIPHENYL ETHER CONTENT
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the sodium- [(4, 5-dichloro,
2-chloromethane sulfonamide) 3', 4’, 6’, trichloro] diphenyl ether (see 7.4)
content of woolen textile materials that have been treated with this compound
as a moth-proofing agent (see 7.1 and 7.2).
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 All wool. When the material to be tested is 100 percent wool, the
specimen shall weigh 1.000 ± 0.100 g.
2.2 Polyester and wool blend. When the material to be tested is a blend
of polyester and wool, the specimen shall weigh 2.000 ± 0.200 g.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Bunsen burner with adjustable gas flow.
4.1.2 Heat-resistant glass flask. A 250 ml, round bottom, single neck,
alkali resistant, heat-resistant glass flask.
4.1.3 Connecting arm with 50 ml dropping funnel (see 7.3.1).
4.1.4 Graham condenser. A Graham condenser with a jacket 300 mm long.
4.1.5 Spiral spring, stainless steel (see 7.3.1).
4.1.6 Water bath. A water bath of suitable size to accommodate a 250 ml

round bottom flask.

METHOD 2016
4.1.8 Pipettes.
4.1.9 Boiling chips or glass beads.
4.1.10 Spectrophotometer or filter photometer. Spectrophotometer or filter

photometer with a filter hating a maximum tranmission at approximately 490
nanometers.
4.1.11 Silicone stopcork lubricant.
4.1.12 pH paper.
4.1.14 Laboratory drying oven.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Sodium hydroxide solution. A 20 percent sodium hydroxide solution

(NaOH), [200 grams of ACS grade sodium hydroxide pellets per 1000 ml of solution].
4.2.2 Hydrochloric acid. A 15 percent hydrochloric acid (HCL), [400 ml of ACS
grade cone. hydrochloric acid (37.5 percent HCL) per 1000 ml of solution].
4.2.3 Methanol. (CH3OH) ACS grade.
4.2.4 2-propanol. (CH3CHOHCH3) ACS grade.
4.2.5 Sodium nitrite solution. A one percent sodium nitrite solution (NaNO2),
[10 grams of ACS grade sodium nitrite per 1000 ml of solution]. Sodium nitrite
is subject to decomposition and should be made up fresh.
4.2.6 350.0 mg/liter solution of sodium [(4, 5-dichloro, 2-chloromethane

sulfonamido) 3', 4', 6’ trichloro] diphenyl ether (DCSTD) in methanol. This
solution represents the standard (see 7.3.1).
4.2.7 one percent ethylchromtropic acid (1-hydroxy, 8-ethoxy naphthalene, 3,

6 disulfonic acid), [1.0 gram of ethylchromotropic acid in 100 ml of distilled
water]. Ethylchromotropic acid is subject to decomposition and should be made
up fresh daily. Store protected from light (see 7.3.1).

METHOD 2016
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of standard solution. Pipette 10.0 ml of the standard solu-

tion of DCSTD prepared as described in 4.2.6 into a 250 ml round bottom, single
neck flask. Add 15 ml methanol, 40 ml of 20 percent sodium hydroxide and glass
beads or boiling chips. Mix by swirling. Attach the connecting arm with the
dropping funnel and condenser after lubricating the connecting ground joints
with silicone grease (see figure 2016). Heat flask with a gas flame. Distill
over into a 250 ml volumetric flask containing 6 ml of 15 percent hydrochloric
acid, until about 20 ml are left in the flask. Without interrupting the heating,
allow 50 ml of distilled water to drop from the dropping funnel during 10 min-
utes in such a manner that the level of the liquid in the round bottom flask
will not be raised. The end point of the distillation is reached when the
steam bubbles that are visible in the flask have become small and creamy (2 to
5 ml diameter). The gas burner is turned off and additional 30 ml of distilled
water are introduced dropwise (0.5 ml/s) into the flask from the dropping
funnel during 1 minute. This will cause a short, violent boiling of the solu-
tion. The dropping funnel is disconnected and the condenser is rinsed with
10 ml 2-propanol and then with 5 ml of distilled water. Both rinsing fluids
are allowed to flow into the volumetric flask. Cool the solution in the flask
to a temperature within 0° to 9°F (0° to 5°C) (see 7.3.2). Add 2.0 ml of a
chilled 1 percent sodium nitrite solution while mixing by gentle swirling
action. Diazotization is allowed to proceed in subdued light for exactly 3
minutes while mixing is continued. 1.5 ml of 1 percent ethylchromotropic acid
is added and the solution is again mixed by swirling action. While adding 8 ml
of 20 percent sodium hydroxide and mixing, the solution turns red. It is filled
to volume with distilled water and the absorbance of the solution at 490 nm is
determined on a spectrophotometer within 30 minutes of preparation.

bottle, dried in a circulating air oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105°
to 110°C), cooled in a desiccator, and weighed. Repeat this cycle until a
weight is obtained that is constant to ± 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the
dry specimen” and in the calculation is indicated as “W”.
5.3 Testing of specimens fabricated from 100 percent wool. Place the speci-
men into the spiral spring and place it into a 250 ml round bottom flask (see
figure 2016). Add 20-ml methanol and glass beads or boiling chips. Attach a
reflux condenser and extract the active ingredient by refluxing on a water
bath for 20 minutes. The spiral spring should be placed in such a manner that
the condensed methanol is dripping on the test specimen during the extraction
process. After extraction, lift the spiral spring and rinse by pouring 2 times
5 ml methanol over the test specimen. Remove the spiral spring with the test
sample. Add 40 ml of 20 percent sodium hydroxide solution to the extract. Mix
by swirling and continue with distillation, diazotization and development as
specified in 5.1.

METHOD 2016
5.4 Testing of specimens fabricated from polyester/wool blends. The speci-

men is treated in the same manner as described in 5.3.
5.5 Calculations.
5.5.1 Specimens fabricated from 100 percent wool. The percent moth-proofing
compound on the wool fiber shall be calculated from the absorbance value as
follows:
Percent moth-proofing compound = 0.35 X AT

AS X W
Where:
AS = the absorbance of the standard reference solution (see 5.5.3).

AT = the absorbance of the test solution.
W = the original dry weight of specimen in grams (see 5.2).
5.5.2 Specimens fabricated from polyester/wool blends. The percent moth-
proofing compound on the wool shall be calculated from absorbance values as
follows :
Percent moth-proofing compound = 0.35 X AT

AS X W X P
Where:
AS = the absorbance of the standard reference solution (see 5.3).

AT = the absorbance of the test solution.
W = the original dry weight of the specimen in grams (see 5.2).
P = the proportion of wool in the sample, expressed to the nearest
0.5 percent.
5.5.3 Where spectrophotometric transmittance measurements are taken, the

absorbance shall be calculated as follows:
Where:
A = Absorbance.
T = Transmittance.

METHOD 2016
6. REPORT
6.1 The percent moth-proofing compound content of a sample unit shall be

reported as the average of the values obtained for the specimens tested and
shall be Mreposted to the nearest 0.1 percent.
the average shall be reported to the nearest 0.01 percent.
7. NOTES
7.1 This method determines the content as a 100 percent active (pure)
material.
7.2 This moth-proofing formulation may be obtained under the trade name of
Edolan U Highly Cone. from the Verona Dyestuff Division of Mobay Chemical
Corporation, Union, NJ 07083.
7.3 Materials and reagents required for testing.
7.3.1 Materials required for testing, extracting and distillation glass

apparatus and stainless steel spiral spring; reagent of DCSTD compound, and
ethylchromotropic acid used for the alternating moth-proofing compound may be
obtained from Verona Dyestuff Division of Mobay Chemical Corp., Union, NJ
07083.
7.3.2 A salt-ice mixture is useful for this purpose (see 5.1).
7.4 Suggested chemical name. Another chemical name for this moth-proofing
compound registered by the Environmental Protection Agency is as follows:
Sodium salt of 1, 4’, 5’ -trichloro-2’-(2, 4, 5-thrichlorophenoxy)
methane sulfonanilide (see 1.1)

METHOD 2016
FIGURE 2016- EXTRACTION APPARATUS

METHOD 2020
July 20, 1978
PRESENCE OF LABILE SULFUR IN TEXTILE MATERIALS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the presence of labile sulfur in
dyed cellulosic textiles and its propensity for producing acid damage through
oxidative degradation of dyes and sulfur-bearing compounds present on the material.
It may also be used to determine the effect of sulfur inherent in the fiber,
as in the case of viscose rayon. It is also applicable to functionally finished
materials.
1.2 This method may also be applied indirectly in the determination of labile
sulfur on fibers which contain sulfur in their chemical structure.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Cloth. The test specimen shall be 9 inches (229 mm) full width of the
material to be tested.
2.2 Narrow cloths, tapes, webbings, and braid. The test specimen shall be
approximately 20 yards (18 m) full width of the material to be tested.
2.3 Threads and light cordage. The test specimen shall be approximately
200 yards (183 m) of the material to be tested.

4. APPARATUS, REAGENTS AND METHOD CITED
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Analytical balance. Analytical balance capable of weighing to an

accuracy of at least 0.001 g.
4.1.2 Circulating air oven. Circulating air oven thermostatically controlled,

capable of maintaining the required temperature within ± 2°F (± 1°C).

METHOD 2020
4.1.3 One-pint jar. One pint spring-sealed Mason Jar or equivalent, fitted
with a plastic sulfur-free gasket.
4.1.4 Turbidimeter (see 7.1 and 7.2).
4.1.5 Filter paper.
4.1.6 Cotton lawn cloth. Bleached, unstarched, desized 96 by 100 combed

yam cotton lawn cloth, weighing 4 yards to the pound (3.66 m per 453.6 g).
No blueing or optical brightener shall be used on the cloth.
4.1.7 Water bath - temperature controlled.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.2 Lead acetate solution. Five percent lead acetate solution prepared by
adding 5 g of lead acetate CP reagent grade to distilled water and making up to
100 ml. If the solution is not clear, add a few drops of glacial acetic acid.
4.2.3 Acid stannous chloride solution. Acid stannous chloride solution

prepared by dissolving 100 g of stannous chloride crystals ACS in 100 ml of
hydrochloric acid ACS (35 percent concentration) and adding 50 ml of distilled
water.
4.2.4 Sodium Chloride CP.
4.2.5 Caustic solution. Ten percent caustic solution prepared by dissolving

10 g of sodium hydroxide CP in distilled water and making up to 100 ml.
4.2.6 Sodium carbonate solution. Sodium carbonate solution prepared by

dissolving 10 g of sodium carbonate CP anhydrous in distilled water and making
up to 100 ml in a volumetric flask.
4.2.7 Sodium sulfide chips U.S.P. or crystals ACS.
4.2.8 Barium chloride solution. Barium chloride solution prepared by dissolving

2 g barium chloride ACS in distilled water and diluting to 100 ml in a volumetric
flask.
4.2.9 Concentrated nitric acid CP.
4.2.10 Sulfuric acid (0.001N). 0.001N sulfuric acid prepared by diluting

10 ml of 0.1N sulfuric acid and making up to 1000 ml with distilled water. The
0.1N sulfuric acid is made by diluting 5.10 g of sulfuric acid concentrated
(96 percent) to 1000 ml.

METHOD 2020
4.2.11 Buffer solution. Buffer solution, pH 7.5, prepared by adding 75 ml of

0.1 molar citric acid CP solution to 925 ml of 0.2 molar disodium acid phosphate
CP solution.
4.2.12 Sodium perborate solution. Sodium perforate solution prepared by

dissolving 2.5 g of sodium perborate in distilled water and diluting to 100 ml..
4.3 Method cited.
4.3.1 Method 2811, pH of Textiles, Electrometric.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the specimens

tested shall be conditioned under standard conditions in accordance with Section
4 of this Standard.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the procedure

for cellulosic textiles shall be followed. When specified, the procedure for
textiles containing sulfur in their structure shall be followed.
5.3 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established and is
to be utilized for comparative testing purposes, a specimen of the standard
sample shall be tested at the same time and under the same conditions as the
specimen undergoing test.
5.4 No standard sample. When no standard sample in the specific shade has
been established, the specimen shall be compared with a vat-dyed cotton cloth
comparable in depth of shade or thread, cord, yarn or narrow cloth for
determination of comparative loss in strength, tested at the same time and
under the same conditions as the specimen undergoing test.
5.5 Cellulosic textiles.
5.5.1 Determination of presence of sulfur with lead acetate. 1.50 ± 0.01 g

of the material to be tested shall be cut into small pieces or shredded and
placed in a test tube. The material shall be covered with stannous chloride
solution. A filter paper wet out in lead acetate solution shall be placed over
the mouth of the test tube. The test tube shall then be heated over a low flame
until the solution is boiling. The solution should not be boiled for more than
15 seconds. A brown to black stain appearing on the paper indicates the presence
of sulfur. If a negative test is obtained by the lead acetate determination,
the test shall be terminated.

METHOD 2020
5.5.2 pH determination. If a positive test is obtained by the lead acetate

determination, the pH of the original material shall be determined in
accordance with Method 2811 and the value recorded.
5.5.3 Adjustment of pH. If a positive test is obtained by the lead acetate

determination, six specimens 6 inches by 8 inches (152 by 203 mm) with the
long dimension in the warp direction for cloths, or ten full width specimens
14 inches (356 mm) in length for tapes, webbing, threads, and light cordage
shall be taken. Three specimens for cloths or five specimens for narrow
materials shall then be Immersed In a buffer solution at pH 7.5 for 1 hour
at a temperature of 77° ± 4°F (25° ± 2°C). The specimens shall then be
rinsed in distilled water and dried at a temperature not exceeding 160°F (71°C).
5.5.4 Aging. The dried specimens adjusted for pH shall be placed on a

stainless steel wire mesh platform in a Mason Jar or equivalent, capable of
being spring-sealed, to reduce the rate of evaporation of moisture. A
sulfur-free plastic gasket shall be used, and the spring shall engage the
cover lightly but shall not be sealed in place. Twenty percent by weight of
distilled water on the weight of the fiber shall be added to the jar without
wetting the specimens, and, after sealing, the jar shall be placed in a
circulating air oven at 211° ± 2°F (99° ± 1°C) for 24 hours.
5.5.5 Breaking strength determination. The aged specimen shall be taken
from the jar and allowed to reach moisture equilibrium under standard
textile conditions. The solution shall be kept sealed and retained for
use in 5.5.7. The unaged specimens from 5.5.3 shall also be conditioned.
Specimens shall then be tested under standard textile conditions for breaking
strength in accordance with the method cited in the material specification
or procurement document. Breaking strength of the aged specimen shall be
reported as percent change from the breaking strength of the unaged specimens.
A decided lowering in breaking strength will occur if labile sulfur is present
(see 5.7) .
5.5.6 Change in pH. The aged specimens from the breaking strength test
shall be tested for pH in accordance with Method 2811 and the value recorded.
A drop in pH from the value obtained in 5.5.2 will occur if labile sulfur
is present (see 5.7).
5.5.6.1 If a drop in pH is not recorded, the absence of labile sulfur shall

be recorded and the test shall be terminated.

METHOD 2020
5.5.7 Turbidity of the water extract. A 50 ml aliquot of the water extracted

from the pH test (see 5.5.6) shall be added to 10 ml of 20 percent barium
chloride solution and 1 ml of concentrated nitric acid. The solution shall
be placed in a turbidimeter cell. The maximum level of turbidity shall be
determined. (It should be cautioned that the total turbidity level may fall
after reaching a maximum due to crystal growth). The value shall be recorded
at a point which represents the maximum level of turbidity. To qualify the
results, a series of standards containing 5, 25, 50, 75, 125, and 150 ml of
0.001N sulfuric acid solution and 2 ml of nitric acid shall be made up to
250 ml. Fifty ml aliquots of these various standards shall be treated with
barium chloride in exactly the same reamer as the extract from the aged
specimens. The quantities of barium sulfate formed by the various standards
represent a slight trace, trace, medium, medium heavy, heavy, and very heavy
concentrations of labile sulfur in the specimens. The adjective rating so
applied shall be based on the turbidity of the specimen solution which comes
closest to the appropriate standard. That is, if the turbidity of the test
solution were slightly less or slightly more than that of the standard containing
25 ml of the 0.001N sulfuric acid, it would be recorded as containing a “trace”.
5.6 Textiles containing sulfur in their structure.
5.6.1 When labile sulfur compounds, such as sulfur dyes, are suspected on
fibers containing sulfur in their structure, as wool, 1.5 ± 0.1 g of the
specimen shall be placed in a test tube, and 3 to 5 ml of water, 2 ml of
10 percent sodium carbonate solution, and 400 mg of sodium sulfide chips shall
be added. The contents of the test tube shall be raised to a boil and boiled
for 2 minutes. The solution shall then be transferred to a second test tube.
A 1.5 ± 0.1 g sample of the cotton lawn cloth shall be placed in the solution,
20 mg of sodium chloride added, and the contents raised to a boil and boiled
for 2 minutes. The cotton lawn cloth shall be removed from the test tube,
rinsed lightly in distilled water, and oxidized by exposure to air or in a
solution containing 2.5 g of sodium perborate in 100 ml of water. The cloth
shall then be thoroughly rinsed in water and dried.
5.6.2 Determination of presence of sulfur with lead acetate. The cotton

lawn cloth shall be tested for the presence of sulfur as specified in 5.5.1.
5.6.3 Transference of sulfur to cotton lawn cloth. If a negative test

is obtained by the lead acetate determination, the test shall be terminated.
If a positive-test is obtained by the lead acetate determination, a 1.5 ±
0.5 g sample of the material undergoing test and a 1.5 ± 0.5 g sample of cotton
lawn cloth shall be used and the sulfur dye of compound transferred following
the procedure of 5.6.1.

METHOD 2020
5.6.4 Determination of pH and turbidity of the modified lawn cloth after aging.
Specimens of the lawn cloth containing the transferred dye or compound shall be
buffered in accordance with 5.5.3 and then aged in accordance with 5.5.4. The
specimens shall then be dried and the pH determined in accordance with Method
2811. The sulfate ion concentration of the water solution after specimen
aging shall be determined as specified in 5.5.7.
5.7 Evaluation.
5.7.1 The formation of a tan to black stain in the lead acetate test shall
indicate the presence of sulfur dyes or compounds. A drop in pH to a more
acid condition, followed by a loss in breaking strength on aging, or the
demonstration of the formation of sulfate ion in the barium sulfate test, or
both shall be considered as definite evidence of the presence of labile sulfur
that may cause damage by oxidation in storage.
5.7.2 Standard sample.
5.7.2.1 When a standard or comparison sample has been established, the test
specimen and the standard or comparison sample shall be compared and rated as
follows:
Pass. Equal to or lighter than the standard sample in degree of staining

by the lead acetate test. Equal to or less than the standard sample in breaking
strength loss after aging. Equal to or less than the standard sample in amount
of sulfate ion produced.
Fail. Degree of staining by the lead acetate test greater than that
of the standard sample. Breaking strength loss after aging greater than the
standard sample. Amount of sulfate ion produced greater than the standard
sample.
5.7.3 No standard sample.
5.7.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, when no

standard or comparison sample has been established, the test specimen shall be
rated as follows:
Free. Not more than a slight discoloration in the lead acetate test,
:
and not more than a “slight trace’ of turbidity in the barium sulfate test
with no loss in breaking strength above that of a vat dyed cotton specimen
of comparable weight.
Slight. Tan to light brown color in the lead acetate test and a “trace”
of turbidity in the barium sulfate test, and not more than 7 percent loss in
breaking strength above that of vat dyed cotton specimen of comparable weight.

METHOD 2020
Moderate. Dark brown color in the lead acetate test, and a "medium”
turbidity in the barium sulfate test, and not more than 20 percent loss in
breaking strength above that of a vat dyed cotton specimen of comparable
weight.
Severe. Black color in the lead acetate test and “medium heavy”
turbidity in the barium sulfate test, and more than a 20 percent loss in
breaking strength above that of a vat dyed cotton specimen of comparable
weight.
6. REPORT
6.1 The procurement document shall specify that the evaluation shall be
made against a standard sample; or when no standard sample has been established,
it shall specify the minimum acceptable rating for the amount of labile sulfur
present.
6.2 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, the amount
of labile sulfur shall be reported as “pass” (satisfactory) or “fail”
(unsatisfactory) .
6.3 No standard sample. When no standard sample has been established the
amount of labile sulfur shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure
is reported, the adjective rating, i.e., “free”, “slight”, “moderate”, or
“severe” shall also be recorded.
7. NOTES
7.1 A Parr Turbidimeter has been tested and found satisfactory for the
described use. However, other devices or means for determining turbidity
are equally applicable.
7.2 A Parr Turbidimeter may be obtained from the Arthur H. Thomas Company,
Vine St. at Third, P.O. Box 779, Philadelphia, PA 19105 and the Fisher
Scientific Company, 711 Forbes Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA 15219.

METHOD 2050
July 20, 1978
COPPER CONTENT OF TEXTILES, ELECTROLYTIC METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the total copper content
of textiles which have been treated with copper compounds. Since some
flame retardant finishes contain antimony (the presence of tin, arsenic,
antimony, bismuth, or silver interfere with the deposition of copper),
the method includes a means of separating antimony before the solution
is electrolyzed.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the specimen

shall be 2 to 3 g of the material. The material shall be well shredded or
cut into small pieces prior to weighing the specimen.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.3 Air oven.
4.1.4 Desiccator.
4.1.5 Pyrex beakers.
4.1.6 Watch glass.
4.1.7 Hot plate.
4.1.8 Beaker tongs.

METHOD 2050
4.1.9 Medicine dropper.
4.1.10 Funnel.
4.1.11 Filter paper.
4.1.12 Electroanalyzer. Any commercial electroanalyzer that gives

accurate results with solutions of known copper content may be used.
The most satisfactory cathode is a cylinder of platinum gauze made of
sufficiently heavy wire to prevent breaking under normal operating
conditions. The anode may be a cylinder of platinum gauze which can
be rotated to stir the solution or a stationary spiral of platinum
wire with stirring accomplished by means of a mechanically driven glass
stirring rod. Higher currents can be used with effective stirring and
the time required for the electrolysis correspondingly reduced.
4.2 Reagents. Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents shall be ACS

grade.
4.2.1 Oxidant. One part by volume of 70 percent perchloric acid shall

be mixed with two parts by volume of 80 percent sulfuric acid. The mixture
is available commercially (see 7.1 for safety precautions).
4.2.2 Nitric acid, specific gravity 1.42 to 1.43.
4.2.3 Ammonium hydroxide, specific gravity 0.89 to 0.90.
4.2.4 Ten percent ferric nitrate

-- solution.
4.2.5 Sulfuric acid. specific gravity 1.83 to 1.84.
4.2.6 Ethyl alcohol, 95 percent.
5 PROCEDURE
shall be placed in a tared weighing bottle, dried in an oven for 2 hours at a
temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C), cooled to room temperature in
a desiccator, weighed to the nearest mg, and the dry weight of the specimen
calculated.
5.2 Standard oxidation procedure.

METHOD 2050
5.2.1 The specimen from 5.1 shall be placed in a 400 ml beaker (see
7.2). Twenty to 25 ml of oxidant shall be added. The beaker shall be
covered with a footed watch glass, placed on the hot plate in a hood,
warmed, and then removed from the hot plate with the beaker tongs.
Without removing the watch glass, a few drops of nitric acid shall be
added to the contents of the beaker by means of a medicine dropper.
Upon completion of any reaction, the beaker shall be gently shaken using
the beaker tongs. When any further reaction subsides, a few more drops
of nitric acid shall be added and this procedure repeated until the
addition of a few drops of nitric acid produces no further reaction.
The beaker shall be replaced on the hot plate and the digestion continued
until the solution begins to reflux on the sides of the beaker. After a
few minutes of refluxing, the beaker shall be removed using the beaker
tongs. The contents shall be cooled, cautiously diluted with distilled
water to 50 ml., neutralized with ammonium hydroxide, and a slight excess
added. If a precipitate forms, the solution shall be filtered into a 250 ml
beaker to remove the precipitates of iron, antimony, and other hydroxides.
The precipitation of antimony will be complete if there is at least as much
iron present as antimony. Should this not be the case, the precipitation
may be facilitated by the addition of several drops of 10 percent ferric
nitrate solution followed by ammonium hydroxide, in slight excess. The
filter paper shall be washed several times using with each wash 5 to 10 ml
quantities of distilled water containing 1 or 2 drops of ammonium hydroxide.
To the combined filtrate and washings, 5 ml of sulfuric acid and 1 ml of
nitric acid shall be added and the contents diluted to approximately 120 ml
with distilled water. At this point, the solution shall be acid. The
purpose of the above procedures is to destroy the organic matter, remove
the interfering ions, and leave the copper in a form suitable for analysis.
5.3 The cleaned cathode shall be dried at a temperature of 221° to 230°F

(105° to 110°C), cooled, and weighed to the nearest 0.1 mg. The cathode and
anode shall be inserted in their respective holders and the beaker containing
the copper solution placed under the electrodes so that the cathode is almost
completely immersed. The stirrer shall be rotated at a moderate speed. If
necessary to prevent loss of solution during rotation, the beaker may be covered
with a split watch glass. A current of approximately 0.5 A shall be applied
for about 10 minutes and then increased to 1.5 A. When the solution becomes
colorless, without interrupting the current, the sides of the beaker, and the
watch glass if used, shall be washed with a stream of water from a wash bottle.
The electrolysis shall be continued for 15 minutes. If the portion of the
cathode covered by the added wash water shows no copper deposit, the electrolysis
has been completed. Otherwise the washing procedure shall be repeated and the
electrolytic action continued until no more copper is deposited. With the
current still on and the stirrer stopped, the beaker shall be lowered while
a stream of distilled water is sprayed over the cathode to wash it free from

METHOD 2050
electrolyte. The cathode shall be removed, dipped in distilled water and then
in 95 percent alcohol. The cathode shall be flipped to remove the excess
alcohol, dried in the oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C)
for 20 to 30 minutes, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest
0.1 mg. The increase in weight of the cathode represents the weight of copper
in the specimen. The cathode may be cleaned by dipping in dilute nitric acid,
1 volume of concentrated nitric to 3 volumes of water, washing with distilled
water, then dipping in 95 percent alcohol, and drying in the oven at 221° to
230°F (105° to 110°C).
5.4 Calculation of results.
5.4.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the copper

content shall be based on the weight of the oven-dried specimen and shall be
Copper content, percent =
Weight of copper deposit, g x 100

Weight of specimen, g
6. REPORT
6.1 The copper content of the sample unit shall be the average of the
results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the
nearest 0.01 percent.
6.1.1 The individual values for each specimen used to calculate the
average shall be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Safety precautions. Seventy percent perchloric acid (72 percent

perchloric acid constant boiling at 397°F (203°C)) is stable on storage and
may be boiled with safety as long as organic matter is absent. At room
temperature it may be mixed with organic matter safely, but such a mixture
should never be heated. The oxidant used is a mixture of perchloric acid
and sulfuric acid so that the easily oxidized material is destroyed before
the temperatures at which perchloric acid is a powerful oxidizing agent
are reached. Procedures in which perchloric acid is boiled away should
be carried out in hoods made entirely of stone or Transite since it is
dangerous to allow perchloric acid fumes to collect on wooden hoods where
organic dusts are present. It is not always necessary to boil away the
acid, and a cover glass on a beaker is usually sufficient to condense the
acid and prevent its escape.

METHOD 2050
7.2 Ashing. Alternatively, the specimen from 5.1 shall be placed in a

porcelain crucible and the crucible placed in a cold muffle furnace. The
temperature of the furnace shall gradually be raised to 1112° ± 77°F (600° ±
25°C) and maintained at this temperature for 2 hours. The crucible and contents
shall be removed from the furnace and cooled. The contents of the crucible
shall be carefully placed in a 250 ml beaker. The oxidant shall be added to
the crucible in three aliquot portions to wash any remaining ash into the
250 ml beaker. Ashing is not required in the primary procedure because it
requires more time than the oxidation method.

METHOD 2051
July 20, 1978
COPPER CONTENT OF TEXTILES, POLAROGRAPHIC METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the copper content of textile
materials. It is well suited for the routine determination of copper from
such compounds as copper naphthenate, copper hydroxynaphthenate, copper-8-
quinolinate, or a mixture of these compounds in textiles and retreating
compounds. This method is particular applicable to textiles and retreating
compounds containing less than one percent of copper. In materials containing
higher copper concentrations, the dilution factor in analysis becomes large
enough to introduce appreciable error.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be approximately 2 to 3 g of the material. The

material shall be well shredded or cut into small pieces prior to weighing
the specimen.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Polarographic apparatus. The Polarographic apparatus shall consist

of a suitable dropping mercury cathode arranged to yield one drop every 3 to
5 seconds, with a cell of approximately 25 ml capacity containing a small
pool of mercury as the anode. A source of voltage which may be varied from
O to minus 1 volt in steps of 50 mv shall be applied across the cell. The
current shall be measured with a sensitive galvanometers capable of measuring
currents as low as 0.01 microampere and equipped with a series of shunts to
vary its sensitivity. Any commercial equipment that gives accurate results
with solutions of known copper content may be used.
4.1.4 Air oven.

METHOD 2051
4.1.5 Beaker tongs.
4.1.6 Pyrex beakers.
4.1.7 Hot plate.

4.1.8 Pipette, 1-ml.
4.1.9 Volumetric flasks, 25-ml and 250-ml.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Copper solution. Standard copper solution 0.0005 g Cu per ml. The
standard solution shall be prepared by weighing accurately approximately 0.5 g
of pure bright electrolytic sheet copper and dissolving in the minimum amount
of dilute, 1 to 1, nitric acid. The solution shall be boiled to remove oxides
of nitrogen, cooled and diluted with distilled water to one liter.
4.2.2 Cadmium pilot-ion solution. The cadmium pilot-ion solution shall

be prepared by dissolving 1 g of reagent-grade cadmium chloride dihydrate in
distilled water, and diluting to 1,000 ml with distilled water.
4.2.3 Saturated sodium sulfite solution.

4.2.4 Gelatin solution (0.2 percent). The gelatin solution shall be
prepared by dissolving 2 g of pure gelatin in 100 ml of distilled water,
warming on a steam bath if necessary. The solution shall be cooled and
diluted with distilled water to 1,000 ml. This solution acts as a maximum
suppressor, The solution is not stable and a fresh solution should be
prepared prior to testing.
4.2.5 Ammonium chloride - ammonium hydroxide solution. Supporting

electrolyte, 2.5 N. The solution shall be prepared by dissolving 134 g
of ammonium chloride in distilled water, and adding 325 ml of concentrated
ammonium hydroxide. The resulting solution shall be diluted to 1,000 ml
with distilled water.
4.2.6 Oxidant. One part by volume of 70 percent perchloric acid shall
be mixed with two parts by volume of 80 percent sulfuric acid. The mixture
is available commercially.
4.2.7 Nitric acid, specific gravity 1.42 to 1..43.
4.2.8 Ammonium hydroxide, specific gravity 0.90 to 0.91.

4.2.9 Sulfuric acid, specific gravity 1.83 to 1.84.

METHOD 2051
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The specimen shall be placed in a tared weighing bottle and dried in
the oven for 2 hours at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C),
cooled to room temperature in a desiccator, weighed to the nearest milligram,
and the dry weight of the specimen calculated. If the copper content based
on the air-dry weight of the specimen is specified, the drying procedure
shall be omitted.
5.2 Standard procedure.

5.2.1 The specimen from 5.1 shall be placed in a 250-ml beaker. Twenty to
25 ml of oxidant shall be added. The beaker shall be covered with a footed
watch glass, placed on the hot plate in a hood, warmed, and then removed from
the hot plate with the beaker tongs. Without removing the watch glass cover,
a few drops of nitric acid shall be added to the contents of the beaker by
means of a medicine dropper. Upon completion of any reaction, the beaker shall
be gently shaken using the beaker tongs. When any further reaction subsides,
a few more drops of nitric acid shall be added and this procedure repeated
until the addition of a few drops of nitric acid produces no further reaction.
The beaker shall be replaced on the hot plate and the digestion continued until
the solution begins to reflux on the sides of the beaker. After a few minutes
of refluxing, the beaker shall be removed using the beaker tongs, cooled, and the
contents cautiously diluted with distilled water and neutralized with ammonium
hydroxide. If antimony is present, the hydroxide may precipitate: however,
it need not be filtered. The solution shall be cooled and diluted to 250 ml
in a volumetric flask. The purpose of the above procedure is to destroy the
organic matter, and leave the copper in a form suitable for analysis.
5.3 Obtaining the ratio R1 for standard copper solution. One ml (pipette)
of the standard copper solution, 1 ml (pipette) of the cadmium solution, 5 ml
of the ammonium-chloride solution, 1 ml of the gelatin solution, and 3 ml of the
saturated sodium-sulfite solution shall be added to a 25-ml volumetric flask
and diluted to the mark with distilled water. This solution shall be added to
the cell so that the capillary containing the mercury extends into the liquid,
1 to 2 cm. The potential shall be applied and corresponding galvanometers reading
taken at -0.20, -0.45, -0.50, and -0.75 volts. These readings correspond
to galvanometers currents A, B, C, and D, respectively, used in the calculation
of results in 5.5.
5.4 Obtaining the ratio R2 for the test copper solution. The procedure
in 5.3 shall be repeated, using 10 ml of the solution of the specimen, in
lieu of 1 ml of the standard copper solution.

METHOD 2051
5.5.1 The ratio R of the height of the second copper wave to the height
of the cadmium wave shall be obtained as follows:
B - A = Height of copper curve between -0.20 and -0.45 volt.

D - C = Height of cadmium curve between -0.50 and -0.75 volt.
R 1 - B - A (for standard copper solution).
D-C
R2 = B - A (for test copper solution).
D-C
S = Milligrams of copper contained in the aliquot of standard solution
in 4.3.
The milligrams of copper, E, in the aliquot of the solution of the

specimens used, is obtained as follows:
E = S X R2
R1
5.5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the copper

content shall be based on the weight of the oven-dried specimen and shall be
Copper, percent = 2.5 E
6. REPORT
6.1 The copper content of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.01
percent.
6.1.1 The individual values for each specimen used to calculate the average
shall be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Safety precautions. Seventy percent perchloric acid (72 percent per-
chloric acid is a constant boiling mixture at 397°F (203°C)) is stable on storage
and may be boiled with safety as long as organic matter is absent. At room
temperature it may be mixed with organic matter safely, but such a mixture should

METHOD 2051
never be heated. The oxidant used is a mixture of perchloric acid and sulfuric
acid so that the easily oxidized material is destroyed before the temperatures
at which perchloric acid is a powerful oxidizing agent are reached. Procedures
In which perchloric acid is boiled away should be carried out in hoods made
entirely of stone or Transite since it is dangerous to allow perchloric acid
fumes to collect on wooden hoods where organic dusts are present. It is not
always necessary to boil away the acid, and a cover glass on a beaker is
usually sufficient to condense the acid and prevent its escape.

METHOD 2053
July 20, 1978
SMALL AMOUNTS OF COPPER AND MANGANESE IN TEXTILES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended to quantitatively determine the amount of copper

and manganese present in textile materials, calorimetrically.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be approximately 10 g of the material under test.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Crucible, Coors #3 porcelain, low form, 90 ml capacity.
4.1.2 Tared weighing bottle with cover.
4.1.3 Desiccator.
4.1.4 Nickel-chromium alloy triangle (80:20).
4.1.5 Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) gas generator.
4.1.6 Porous filtering crucibles. Suitable for retaining fine precipitates.
4.1.7 Colorimetric apparatus.
4.1.7.1 Spectrophotometer or calorimeter (filter photometer) (see Note 1).
4.1.8 Volumetric pipets.
4.1.9 Volumetric flasks with glass stoppers.
4.1.10 Beakers.

METHOD 2053
4.1.11 Analytical balance, accurate to 0.001 g.
4.1.12 Water bath.
4.1.13 Hot plate.

4.1.14 Wide mouth, high-form distillation flask.
4.1.15 Bunsen burner.
4.1.16 Iodine flask.
4.2 Reagents (see Note 2).
4.2.1 Standard solutions (see Appendix 1).
4.2.2 Distilled water (copper free) (see Note 3).
4.2.3 Nitric acid. (HNO3), specific gravity 1.42.

4.2.4 Sulfuric acid. (H2SO4), specific gravity 1.84.
4.2.5 Ammonium hydroxide. (NH4OH), specific gravity 0.90.
4.2.6 Phosphoric acid. (H3PO4), 85 percent.

4.2.7 Copper sulfate. (CuSO4 . 5H2O).
4.2.8 Sodium thiosulfate. (Na 2S 2O 3 . 5H2O).
4.2.9 Potassium permanganate. (KMnO 4).
4.2.10 Gum arabic.
4.2.11 Potassium periodate. (KIO4).
4.2.12 Sodium diethyldithiocarbamate.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen.
FED. TEST EMTHOD STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 2053
5.1.1 Place weighing bottle with cover in an oven for 1 hour at 221° to 230°F
(105° to 110°C). Remove and place in a desiccator until cooled to room tempera-
ture. Weigh the bottle and cover. Continue this procedure until a constant
weight (± 0.001 g) is reached.
5.1.2 Weight of dry specimen. Cut the specimen (see 2.1) into small pieces
and place specimen in the tared weighing bottle and place with the cover in an
oven and dry at 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) for 2 hours. Cool in a desiccator
and weigh. Continue this procedure until a constant weight is attained. Determine
the weight of the specimen to the nearest 0.001 g.
5.1.3 Place the weighed specimen in the 90 ml crucible. Heat gently over
a low flame from the bunsen burner and continue the heating until the specimen
is completely charred. Protect from any strong air currents. Allow to cool
and then add 1 ml sulfuric acid and heat again until white fumes stop and only
a gray ash remains.
5.1.4 Allow the crucible to cool and then add 20 ml water and 5 ml sulfuric
acid. Heat to near boiling for 5 minutes.
5.1.5 Transfer the contents to a 150 ml beaker with repeated rinsing of the
crucible with water until a volume of 50 ml is collected.
5.1.6 Warm the 50 ml of solution and pass hydrogen sulfide through the
warm solution for 15 minutes. Allow the solution to stand for 1 hour, then
filter through a porous filtering crucible. Wash the precipitate with hydrogen
sulfide solution (hydrogen sulfide passed through warm water for 15 minutes).
Filter as before. Reserve the precipitate for the copper determination. Boil
off the hydrogen sulfide from the filtrate and reserve the solution for the
manganese determination.
5.2 Prepare a blank.
5.2.1 Add 1 ml of sulfuric acid to a clean, dry crucible. Heat over a low
flare until white fumes are no longer given off. Continue the preparation of
the blank, repeating steps 5.1.4 through 5.1.6, using the same amount of all
reagents.
5.3 Prepare the calibration curves for the determination of copper and
manganese (see Appendices 2 and 3).
5.4 Determination of copper.
5.4.1 Dissolve the precipitate (5.1.6) by washing with 30 ml of warm nitric

acid (1:2). Cool and make barely alkaline to litmus paper with ammonium
hydroxide, cool and transfer the solution to a 50 ml volumetric flask, filtering
if necessary, add 10 ml of ammonium hydroxide to the flask, pouring it over
the filtrate if filtration is necessary. Dilute the solution to the 50 ml mark
with water.

METHOD 2053
5.4.2 Transfer 25 ml of the solution to another 50 ml volumetric flask, add

1 ml gum arabic solution and 10 ml of sodium diethyldithiocarbamate solution.
Dilute to volume with water and mix thoroughly.
5.4.3 Transfer a suitable portion of the solution to an absorption cell

and measure the transmittance or absorbance at 440 nm or with the same blue
filter used to prepare the calibration curve.
5.4.4 To determine the copper in the blank use the precipitate of 5.2.1
and repeat the procedures of 5.4.1 through 5.4.3 using the same amounts of
all reagents.
5.5 Calculation for percent copper.
5.5.1 Calculation is made as follows:

Copper percent = A - B x 100
C x 0.5
Where: A = Grams copper found in test solution (5.4.3).
B = Grams copper found in blank (5.4.4).
C = Weight of oven-dry specimen in g (5.1.2).
5.6 Determination of manganese.
5.6.1 Transfer filtrate (5.1.6), to 250 ml iodine flask, add 5 ml phosphoric

acid and 0.5 g potassium periodate to the solution (see Note 4) and heat to
boiling on a hot plate. Remove and place on a steam bath for 30 seconds. Cool
to room temperature and transfer to 100 ml volumetric flask, and adjust to volume
with treated sulfuric acid (Appendix 1). Measure transmittance or absorbance
immediately at 525 nm (spectrophotometer) or with the green filter which ever
was used for the preparation of the calibration curve (calorimeter).
5.6.2 To determine the manganese in the blank, use the filtrate of 5.2.1
and repeat the procedure of 5.6.1 using the same amounts of all reagents.
5.7 Calculation for percent manganese.
5.7.1 The calculation is made as follows:

Manganese percent = A - B x 100
C

METHOD 2053
Where: A = Manganese found in test solution in g (5.6.1).
B = Manganese found in blank in g (5.6.2).
C = Weight of oven-dry specimen in g (5.1.2).
6. REPORT
6.1 Results for each sample unit shall be reported as the average of
the specimens tested to the nearest 0.001 percent for copper and to the
nearest 0.0001 percent for manganese.
NOTE 1: Calorimetric apparatus for use in this method may be purchased

from Bausch and Lomb, 77466 Bausch St., Rochester, NY 14602;
Beckman Instruments, 2500 Harbor Boulevard, Fullerton, CA 42634;
Fisher Scientific, 711 Forbes Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA 15219.
NOTE 2: Unless otherwise specified, all reagents shall conform to the

specifications recommended by the committee on analytical
reagents of the American Chemical Society. When acids and
ammonium hydroxide are specified by name or chemical formula
only, it shall be understood that concentrated reagents of the
specific gravities or concentrations as listed are intended.
Any dilution of these reagents shall be expressed as a ratio
of reagent to water by volume, example: (1:5) means 1 volume
of reagent to 5 volumes of water.
NOTE 3: Where water is used throughout this method, it is understood

that it will be copper-free distilled water.
NOTE 4: When the expected concentration of manganese is greater than

55 ppm, use an aliquot portion of the filtrate, so that an
estimated 0.4 mg is contained in the aliquot portion before
adding phosphoric acid and proceeding with the testing.

METHOD 2053
APPENDIX 1
Preparation of Standard Solutions
1. Copper Standard Solution (1 ml = 0.01 mg Cu). Dissolve 0.3928 g

copper sulfate in about 100 ml of water. Transfer to a 250 ml volumetric flask
and dilute to the mark with water. Pipet 25 ml of this solution into a 1 liter
volumetric flask and dilute to volume. The strength of this solution may be
checked by titration with a standard sodium thiosulfate solution.
2. Sodium diethyldithiocarbamate solution (1 g per liter). Dissolve 1 g
of the salt in 1 liter of water and store in a brown-glass stoppered bottle.
Do not use if over 30 days old.
3. Manganese Standard solution (1 ml = 0.01 mg Mn). Prepare a dilute

solution of potassium permanganate by diluting to 1 liter in a volumetric flask
a quantity of standard KMnO4 of known normality, the amount to be determined
as follows:
A = 4.551
5N
Where: A = amount (ml) of standard KMnO4 solution required.
N = normality of the standard KMnO4 solution used.
Do not keep this solution for more than a week.
4. Sodium Thiosulfate Standard Solution (1 ml = 0.01 mg Cu). Dissolve

0.392 g of sodium thiosulfate in about 50 ml of water. Transfer to a 100 ml
volumetric flask and dilute to volume with water. Mix thoroughly, then pipet
10 ml of this solution into a 1 liter volumetric flask and dilute to the mark.
5. Gum Arabic Solution (50 g per liter). Dissolve 5 g of gum arabic in

100 ml of water. Filter through copper-free glass wool if necessary. Do not
use this solution if over 30 days old.
6. Treated sulfuric acid. Add 30 ml H2SO4 to 1 liter of water.
Add 1 g of KIO4 and boil 3 minutes. Cool to room temperature before
using.

METHOD 2053
APPENDIX 2
Preparation of Calibration Curve for
the Determination of Copper (See Note 1)
Take 150 ml of HNO3 (1:2). Make barely alkaline to litmus paper with
NH4OH and cool. Transfer to a 250 ml volumetric flask and add 50 ml NH4OH
and dilute to volume with water. Pipet 25 ml portions of this solution
into each of nine 50 ml volumetric flasks. Add 1 ml of gum arabic solution
and 10 ml of sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate solution to each flask. Pipet
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14 ml portions of copper standard solution
(1 ml = 0.01 mg Cu) into eight of the flasks and carry the ninth through
as a blank. Dilute the solution in each of the flasks to 50 ml with water.
Transfer a suitable portion of each solution to the absorption cell of

the spectrophotometer or colorimeter and measure the transmittance or
absorbance at 440 nm or with a blue filter; as appropriate; compensate
or correct for the blank. Plot the values obtained against mg of copper
per 50 ml of solution.
NOTE 1: With a spectrophotometer, use a narrow band centered about the
wavelength specified. With a calorimeter, use a filter that
transmits a band of wavelength having a maximum transmittance
approximately equal to the specified wavelength. New curves must
be prepared whenever a new filter is used, and it is recommended
that calibration curves be restandardized at least once every six
months.

METHOD 2053
APPENDIX 3
Preparation of Calibration Curve for
the Determination of Manganese

Transfer 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40 and 50 ml portions of manganese
standard solution (1 ml = 0.01 mg Mn) into seven 100 ml volumetric flasks
and dilute to volume with water. Fill an eighth flask with water and carry
through as a blank. Transfer a suitable portion of each solution to the
absorption cell of the spectrophotometer or calorimeter and determine the
transmittance or absorbance at 525 nm or with a green filter. Compensate
or correct for the blank. Plot the values obtained against mg of 100 ml of
solution (see Note 1, Appendix 2).

METHOD 2060
July 20, 1978
COPPER-8-QUINOLINOLATE CONTENT OF TEXTILES,
SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the copper-8-quinolinolate or

copper as copper-8-quinolinolate content of textiles. The method is suitable
for use on textiles treated for fire, water, weather, and mildew resistance.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be a 1 g composite of the material cut into
pieces approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) square, and thoroughly mixed.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Analytical balance. Analytical balance capable of weighing accurately

to ±0.001 g.
4.1.2 Potentiometric pH apparatus. Potentiometric pH apparatus capable of

measuring pH to the nearest 0.1 unit.
4.1.3 Separatory funnel. 250 ml.
4.1.4 Spectrophotometer. Spectrophotometer capable of making measurements

at 410 nanometers.
4.1.5 Beakers.
4.1.6 Erlenmeyer flasks. 100 ml.
4.1.7 Volumetric flasks. 100 ml.

METHOD 2060
4.1.8 Air oven.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Sulfuric acid. 10 percent solution, prepared from concentrated sulfuric

acid, specific gravity 1.84.
4.2.2 Redistilled chloroform.
4.2.3 Ammoniumhydroxide solution. Concentrated, 25 to 30 percent.

4.2.4 Anhydrous sodium sulfate.
4.2.5 Copper-8-quinolinolate. Reagent grade.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Reparation of specimen. Three samples not less than two g each shall
be cut from the sample unit. One sample shall be cut from each edge of the
sample unit, but will not include the selvage. The third sample shall be
taken from the middle of the sample unit. No two samples shall contain the
same warp or filling yarns.
composite sample. A one g test specimen shall be taken from the composite
sample.
5.2 Weight of dry specimen. The specimen shall be placed in a tared weighing
bottle, dried in an oven for 2 hours at a temperature of 212° ±4°F (100° ±2°C),
cooled to room temperature in a desiccator, weighed to the nearest mg, and the
dry weight of the specimen calculated.
5.3 Determination of copper-8-quinolinolate content.
5.3.1 The weighed specimens shall be immersed in 25 ml of 10 percent sulfuric

acid solution contained in a 100 ml Erlenmeyer flask and the solution heated
cautiously to 194° to 203°F (90° to 95°C) with shaking. The acid extract shall
be decanted into a 250 ml beaker and the extraction repeated twice more with
15 ml portions of the 10 percent sulfuric acid solution, each time heating the
solution cautiously to 194° to 203°F (90° to 95°C) with shaking. The solution
shall be cooled to room temperature and a sufficient quantity of ammonium
hydroxide solution added to the combined acid extracts to adjust the pH of the
solution to 6.2 —
+ 0.2 as measured by a potentiometric pH-meter.

METHOD 2060
5.3.2 The neutralized solution shall be transferred to a 250 ml separator
funnel, 5 to 10 ml of redistilled chloroform added, and the separator funnel
shaken vigorously for at least 1 minute. The solutions shall be allowed to
separate into two distinct layers and the lower layer which is the chloroform
layer collected in a 100 ml beaker. Several extractions are necessary for
complete separation. The extraction shall be repeated at least twice until
the chloroform layer is colorless. Approximately 10 g of anhydrous sodium
sulfate shall be added to the combined chloroform extracts, stirred thoroughly,
and the solution allowed to stand 5 minutes.
5.3.3 The chloroform solution shall then be carefully decanted into a 100
ml calibrated volumetric flask, washing the sodium sulfate thoroughly with
several portions of chloroform. The solution shall then be diluted to the
mark with chloroform.
5.3.4 The percent transmittance at 410 nanometers of the above solution shall
be read on the spectrophotometer, using as the solvent blank redistilled chloro-
form. Dilute to an accurately measured volume, if necessary, and base copper-
8-quinolinolate content on the adjusted volume.
5.4 Preparation of standard curve. One hundred mg of reagent grade copper-8-

quinolinolate which has been dried to a constant weight in an oven at 212° +
4°F (100° ± 2°C) and cooled to room temperature in a desiccator shall be weighed
to the nearest 0.1 mg and dissolved in a 10 percent sulfuric acid solution. The
solution shall be transferred to a 100 ml volumetric flask and the volume adjusted
to the mark with the 10 percent sulfuric acid. Aliquots of 1 ml and whole multiples
thereof shall be taken from the points of the curve representing different
concentrations of copper-8-quinolinolate. Each aliquot shall be pipetted to a
250 ml beaker and diluted with distilled water to 55 ml. The ammonium hydroxide
solution (see 4.2.3) shall be added until the pH of the solution is 6.2 ± 0.2
as measured by a potentiometric pH meter. The procedure from this point shall
be as described in 5.3.2. The standard curve should cover a range of 1 mg of
copper-8-quinolinolate per 100 ml of chloroform, to 7 mg of copper-8-quinolinolate
per 100 ml of chloroform. The curve should be plotted with the two ordinates being
percent transmittance and concentration of copper-8-quinolinolate.
5.5 Calculations. Using the calibration curve, read the number of g of copper-
8-quinolinolate in the specimen taken. The copper content shall be based on the
weight of the oven-dried specimen and shall be calculated as follows:
Copper-8-quinolinolate, percent = Copper-8-quinolinolate, g

Weight of specimen, g x 100
Copper in copper-8-quinolinolate
percent = Copper-8-quinolinolate (18.06), g

METHOD 2060
6. REPORT
6.1 The percent of copper-8-quinolinolate or copper as copper-8-quinolinolate

of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens
tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.01 percent.
6.1.1 The individual. values for each individual specimen used to calculate the
average shall also be reported.

METHOD 2100
July 20, 1978
WOOL CONTENT, ACID METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the wool content in cellulosic-
wool combinations and blends, when a mechanical separation is impractical.
This method is preferred to Method 2101 for cellulosic-wool determinations,
to preclude the necessity of a cellulosic correction factor.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be approximately 2 g of the material. Tightly

woven, knitted, or felted material shall be cut into pieces not larger than
1/4 inch (6 mm) squares. Highly twisted yarns shall be untwisted.

4. APPARATUS, REAGENTS AND METHODS CITED
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Apparatus as described in Method 2611, and as follows:
4.1.2 Sintered glass filter crucible of coarse porosity.

4.1.4 Suction flask.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Sulfuric acid. 1 percent solution, by weight, prepared by adding

slowly 5.7 ml of 96 percent sulfuric acid (specific gravity 1.84) to 900 ml
of distilled water and diluting to 1 liter.
4.2.2 Sulfuric acid. 70 ±1 percent solution, by weight, prepared by
adding very slowly 640 ml of 96 percent sulfuric acid (specific gravity 1.84)
to 400 ml of distilled water. Cool the mixture to 68°F (20°C), transfer to a
1 liter volumetric flask, and dilute to the mark. The specific gravity of this
solution at 60°F (15.5°C) should be between 1.604 and 1.627.
4.2.3 Sodium bicarbonate, NaHCO3, 2 percent solution.

METHOD 2100
4.2.4 Reagents as described in Methods 2610 or 2611 as applicable.
4.3 Methods cited.
Method 2610, Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Acid Method.

Method 2611, Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Enzyme Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Weight of dry specimen. The test specimen shall be placed in a circulating
air oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) to a weight which
is constant to ± 0.001 g, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest
0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the original dry specimen” and in the calculation
of results is designated as “O”.
5.2 Weight of dry desized specimen. The specimen shall then be desized and
extracted to remove starch and protein content, including chloroform-soluble
and water-soluble materials, as described in Method 2611 or 2610, if acid-
hydrolyzable materials are present. The specimen shall then be dried in a
circulating air oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) to a
weight which is constant to ± 0.001 g, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to
the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “weight of the dry desized specimen”, and
in the calculation of results is designated as “S”.
5.3 Weight of dry wool. The specimen shall be immersed for 7 to 10 minutes
in 200 ml of a boiling 1 percent sulfuric acid solution. The solution shall
then be filtered through a sintered glass crucible and the excess acid solution
removed by suction. The specimen shall then be immersed in 200 ml of a
70 percent sulfuric acid solution at 100°F (38°C) and worked in this solution
for 15 minutes, preferable with a mechanical stirring device. The solution
shall again be filtered through a sintered glass crucible and the excess
acid solution removed by suction. The undissolved fibers in the crucible
shall then be washed thoroughly with cold water. The specimen fibers
shall then be immersed in a 2 percent solution of sodium bicarbonate at
room temperature for 5 minutes to neutralize any acid. The solution shall
again be filtered through a crucible and washed thoroughly with water.
The residue shall be dried in a circulating air oven at a temperature of 221°
to 230°F (105° to 110°C) to a weight which is constant to ± 0.001 g, cooled in
a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the
dry wool”, and in the calculation of results is designated as “W”.

METHOD 2100
5.4.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the wool

content of the specimen shall be based on the weight of the original dry
specimen and shall be calculated as follows:
Wool, percent = W x 100
O
Where: O = Weight of the original dry specimen, g (5.1).
W = Weight of the dry wool, g (5.3).
5.4.2 When wool content on the basis of the dry desized specimen is
specified in the procurement document, the wool content of the specimen
shall be calculated as follows:
Wool, percent = W x 100
S
Where: S = Weight of the dry desized specimen, g (5.2).

W = Weight of the dry wool, g (5.3).
6. REPORT
6.1 The wool content of the sample unit shall be the average of the
6.2 Each individual value used in expressing the final result shall also
be reported.

METHOD 2101
July 20, 1978
WOOL CONTENT, ALKALI METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the wool content of cloths
and felts of wool fibers and wool-nylon fiber blends, when mechanical
separation is impractical. It may be used for cellulosic-wool determinations;
however, Method 2100 is preferred, to preclude the necessity of including a
correction factor in the calculation of results.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be 2 to 5 g of the material cut into pieces
not larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) squares.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Apparatus as described in Method 2611.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Reagents as described in Methods 2610 or 2611 as applicable.
4.2.2 Sodium hydroxide solution. Sodium hydroxide, 5 percent aqueous

solution prepared by dissolving 5.3 g of sodium hydroxide, reagent grade
pellets, in water and diluting to 100 ml.
4.2.3 Acetic acid. Acetic acid, 5 percent solution prepared by dissolving

5 ml of glacial acetic acid in water and diluting to 100 ml.
4.3 Methods cited.
Method 2610, Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Acid Method.

Method 2611, Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Enzyme Method.

METHOD 2101
5. PROCEDURE

container and dried in a circulating air oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F
(105° to 110°C) to a weight which is constant to + 0.001 g, cooled in a
desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the
original dry specimen”, and in the calculation of results shall be designated
as “O”.
5.2 Weight of dry desized specimen. The specimen shall then be desized
and extracted to remove starch and protein content, including chloroform-soluble
and water-soluble materials as described in Method 2611 or 2610, if acid-
hydrolyzable materials are present. The specimen shall then be dried in a
circulating air oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) to a
weight which is constant to ± 0.001 g, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed
to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the dry desized specimen”,
and in the calculation of results is designated as “S”.
5.3 Weight of the fiber residue. The specimen shall then be immersed for
10 minutes in a boiling solution of sodium hydroxide containing 100 ml of
solution to each gram of specimen. The solution shall then be filtered through
the stainless-steel sieve and washed with three 500 ml portions of hot water,
followed by 100 ml portions of a 5 percent acetic acid. Care shall be exercised
in washing the fiber residue and removing from the sieve, in order to minimize
any loss of fibers. The residue shall be dried in a circulating air oven at a
temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) to a weight which is constant to
± 0.001 g, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This
is the “Weight of the fiber residue”, and in the calculation of results is
designated as “R”. The loss in weight due to this treatment is the weight of
the wool.

content of the specimen shall be based on the weight of the original dry
specimen, and shall be calculated as follows:
Wool, percent = S-R x 100

O
Where: O = Weight of the original dry specimen, g (5.1).

s = Weight of the dry desized specimen, g (5.2).
R = Weight of the fiber residue, g (5.3).

METHOD 2101
5.4.2 When wool content on the basis of the dry desized specimen is specified
in the procurement document, the wool content of the specimen shall be calculated
as follows:
Wool, percent = S-R x 100
S
Where: S = Weight of the dry desized specimen, g (5.2).
R = Weight of the fiber residue, g (5.3).
6. REPORT
6.1 The wool content of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1
percent.
be reported.

METHOD 2102
July 20, 1978
WOOL CONTENT, HYPOCHLORITE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the wool content in wool-acrylic,
wool-polyester, and other wool-synthetic fiber blends as applicable. The
synthetic fiber content may also be determined by this method provided that
the blend contains only wool and one synthetic fiber. Methods 2530 or 2101 are
preferred for determining the wool content of wool - nylon fiber blends.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be 3 to 4 g of the material cut into pieces not
larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) squares.

4.1 Apparatus.

to 0.001 g.
4.1.2 Circulating air oven maintained between 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C).
4.1.4 Erlenmeyer flask.
4.1.5 Funnel. Buchner type

. . funnel with sintered filter disk of coarse
porosity l
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Chloroform, U.S.P.
4.2.3 Sodium hypochlorite solution. Any commercial preparation of sodium

hypochlorite, NaOCl, diluted to an available chlorine content of 5 to 6 percent
by weight.

METHOD 2102
4.2.3.1 Since sodium hypochlorite solutions lose strength in storage or

on exposure to light, the available chlorine content in the solution shall
be determined immediately before using as follows:
4.2.3.1.1 Available chlorine content. A 10 ml aliquot of the sodium-
hypochlorite solution, expressed as weight “W” in grams in the calculation,
shall be diluted to 250 ml with distilled water in a volumetric flask. Twenty-
five ml of this solution shall be added to an Erlenmeyer flask, together with
3 to 5 ml of a 10 percent solution of potassium iodide and 2 to 3 ml of acetic
acid. This solution shall then be titrated with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate until
the yellow color of the iodine is nearly destroyed. Five ml of a starch
solution shall be added and the mixture titrated until the blue color entirely
disappears. The percentage of available chlorine by weight shall be calculated
as follows:
Available chlorine, percent = M x 3.546

W
Where: M = Milliliters of 0.1N sodium thiosulfate required

for titration.
W = Weight of 10 ml aliquot of sodium-hypochlorite

solution, g
4.2.4 Sodium bisulfate solution (antichlor). 5 g C.P. sodium bisulfite

NaHSO3, anhydrous, made up to 1000 ml with distilled water.
5. PROCEDURE

container and dried in a circulating air oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F
(105° to 110°C) to a weight which is constant to + 0.001 g, cooled in a desiccator,
and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the original dry
specimen” and in the calculation of results is designated as “D”.
5.2 Weight of dry, chloroform-extracted specimen. The specimen shall be

extracted with chloroform for a minimum of 20 extractions in a Soxhlet extractor.
The specimen shall then be dried in a circulating air oven at a temperature of
221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) to a weight which is constant to ±0.001 g, cooled
in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This i S the “Weight of the
dry, chloroform-extracted specimen” and in the calculation of results is designated
as “S”.
5.3 Weight of fiber residue. The specimen shall then be immersed for a
minimum of 20 minutes in 250 ml of the sodium-hypochlorite solution at 68° to
77°F (20° to 25°C) with frequent stirring. The mixture shall then be filtered

METHOD 2102
through the Buchner funnel and undissolved fibers washed free of sodium-
hypochlorite with two 250 ml portions of sodium bisulfite solution at a
temperature of 90° ± 2°F (32° ± 1°C) and three 500 ml portions of distilled
water. The residue shall then be dried in a circulating air oven at a
temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) to a weight which is constant
to ± 0.001 g, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This
is the “Weight of the fiber residue” and in calculation of results is designated
as “R”. The loss in weight due to this treatment is the weight of the wool.
content or synthetic fiber content of the specimen shall be based on the
weight of the original dry specimen and shall be calculated as follows:
Wool, percent = S - R x 100
D
Synthetic fiber, percent =
Where: D = Weight of the original dry specimen, g (see 5.1).

S = Weight of the dry, chloroform-extracted specimen, g (see 5.2).
R = Weight of the fiber residue, g (see 5.3).
5.4.2 When fiber content on the basis of the dry, chloroform-extracted
specimen is specified in the procurement document, the wool content or synthetic
fiber content of the specimen shall be calculated as follows:
Wool, percent = S - R x 100
S
Synthetic fiber, percent =
Where: S = Weight of the dry, chloroform-extracted specimen, g (see 5.2).

R = Weight of the fiber residue, g (see 5.3).
6. REPORT
6.1 The wool content and/or synthetic fiber content of the sample unit shall
be the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be
6.2 Each individual value used in expressing the final result shall also be
reported.

METHOD 2110
July 20, 1978
SILK CONTENT OF FIBER MIXTURES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the silk content in mixtures with
such fibers as casein fibers, cellulose acetate, nylon, wool, cotton, and other
vegetable fibers, when mechanical separation is impractical. The method is not
intended for determining the silk content of weighted silk.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be 2 to 5 g of the material cut into pieces not
larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) squares.

4.1 Apparatus.

to ± 0.001 g.
4.1.2 Water bath. Water bath equipped with heater and a container with
mechanical stirrer.
4.1.3 Hydrometer, range 1.20 to 1.40.
4.1.4 Sintered glass Gooch crucible of coarse porosity.
4.1.5 Weighing bottle with ground glass cover.
4.1.7 Stainless steel sieve. 80 to 100 mesh or equivalent.
4.1.8 Desiccator with suitable desiccant. Anyhydrous calcium sulfate or

anhydrous calcium chloride have been found suitable.
4.2 Reagents.

METHOD 2110
4.2.1 Calcium thiocyanate. (Specific gravity 1.20 to 1.21 at 70°C).

4.2.2 Acetic acid C.P.
4.2.3 Iodine solution. An approximate 0.01N stock solution of iodine (0.13 g

of iodine and 2.6 g of potassium iodide in 100 ml of distilled water) may be
prepared, and a portion of this diluted to a pale yellow color (about 0.001N)
each time a test for starch is made.
4.2.4 Amylolytic and proteolytic enzyme mixture. (see 7.1)

4.2.6 Acetone. Acetone conforming to O-A-51, Acetone, Technical.
4.2.7 Chloroform. U.S.P.
4.2.8 Acidified ferric sulfate solution.
5. PROCEDURE

bottle and dried in an oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C),
cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight
of the dry specimen,” and in the calculation of results is indicated as “D”.
5.2 Weight of chloroform-soluble material. The dried specimen (see 5.2)

shall be extracted with chloroform for a minimum of twenty extractions in a
Soxhlet extractor. If the weight of the chloroform-extractable matter is
required, the extract shall be dried to constant weight in a tared container
at a temperature of 174° to 178°F (79° to 81°C), cooled in a desiccator, and
weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of chloroform-soluble
material,” and in the calculation of results is indicated as “C”.
5.3 Weight of water-soluble material. The specimen (see 5.2) shall be

placed
. in a Soxhlet extractor with distilled water and subjected to a minimum
of ten extractions. If the weight of the water-soluble material is required
the extract shall be dried to constant weight in a tared container at a
temperature of 212° to 216°F (100° to 102°C), cooled in a desiccator, and
weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the water-soluble
material” and in the calculation of results is indicated as “W”.

METHOD 2110
5.4 Chloroform and water extractions must be performed in determining starch

and protein content. However, the determination for weight of extract, and
calculations involved may be omitted when the exact amounts of water and
chloroform-soluble material are not required.
5.5 Weight of desized specimen. The specimen (see 5.3) shall be immersed
in a suitable aqueous enzyme solution containing both amylolytic and proteolytic
components at the concentrations, liquid to fabric ratio, temperature, and
length of time required to remove the finish as recommended by the manufacturer
of the enzymes. The specimen shall be removed from the enzyme solution on a
sieve, squeezed and rinsed, to remove the enzyme solution. This shall be done
by alternately squeezing and rinsing the specimen in a minimum of twelve
successive baths of distilled water at 154° to 165°F (68° to 74°C). After
rinsing, the specimen shall be spot-tested for the presence of starch with
iodine solution and for protein with Millon’s reagent. The presence of starch
is indicated by a blue coloration and the presence of protein by a red coloration.
If either test is positive, repeat the enzyme treatment with the required rinsing
until the spot-tests are negative. If additional treatments are required, the
specimen shall be thoroughly rinsed before repeating the enzyme treatment.
After the enzyme solutions have been completely removed from the specimen, the
specimen shall be dried to constant weight (± 0.001 g) as described in paragraph
5.2. This is the “Weight of the desized specimen”, and in the calculation of
results is indicated at “S”.
5.6 Removal of cellulose acetate. The specimen shall be placed in a Soxhlet

extractor and extracted for at least 3 hours with acetone. The extraction shall
be conducted at such a rate that the solvent in the specimen shall change at least
three times per hour. The specimen shall be removed from the extractor, squeezed
to remove excess acetone, and immersed in warm distilled water for a few minutes.
The residual fibers shall be squeezed to remove excess water and dried to
constant weight (± 0.001 g) as described in paragraph 5.2. This is known as
“Weight of specimen after removal of cellulose acetate” and in the calculation
of results is indicated as “A”.
5.7 Removal of silk to determine weight of residual fibers. The residue

(see 5.6) shall be agitated vigorously for 1 hour in 500 ml of a clear solution
of calcium thiocyanate of specific gravity 1.20 to 1.21 at 154° to 162°F (68°
to 72°C) made just acid to litmus with acetic acid. Precautions shall be
taken to prevent evaporation with consequent concentration of the thiocyanate
solution during the treatment. The liquid shall be filtered through a Gooch
crucible. After a pad has been formed, the portions of the solution shall be
combined, heated to approximately 158°F (70°C), and filtered through the pad
with the aid of suction. The fibers shall be removed from the filter and
agitated well for 5 minutes in 200 ml of fresh thiocyanate solution at 158°F
(70°C), and filtered as before. The fibers shall be washed with hot distilled
water until free of thiocyanate, as indicated by a negative test when a drop of

METHOD 2110
acidified ferric sulfate solution is added to a portion of the filtrate (red

color indicates the presence of thiocyanate). The fibers shall then be dried
to a constant weight (± 0.001 g) at 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C), cooled in
a desiccator and again weighed. This is known as “Weight of residual fibers”
and in the calculation of results is known as “R”.
5.8 Calculations.
5.8.1 Chloroform-soluble material =
5.8.2 Water-soluble material =
5.8.3 If the silk content of the specimen is required, the silk content shall
be based on the dry weight of the specimen and shall be calculated as follows:
5.8.3.1 If cellulose acetate is not present:

Silk, percent = S - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)
D
5.8.3.2 If cellulose acetate is present:

Silk, percent = A - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)
D
5.8.4 If the silk content of the specimen exclusive of the sizing and
finishing material is required, the silk content shall be based on the
dry weight of the desized specimen and shall be calculated as follows:

Silk, desized specimen, percent = S - R X 100 (see 5.8.5)
S

Silk, desized specimen, percent = A - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)
S
5.8.5 Symbols Used in Formulas:

D = weight of original dry specimen, g (see 5.1).
S = weight of dry desized specimen, g (see 5.5).

METHOD 2110
A = weight of specimen after removal of cellulose acetate, g (see 5.6).
R = weight of residual fibers, g (see 5.7).
C = weight of chloroform-soluble material, g (see 5.2).
W = weight of water-soluble material, g (see 5.3).
6. REPORT
6.1 The silk content of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 1.0
percent.
7. NOTES
7.1 The proteolytic and amylolytic enzymes used for removal of starch and
protein compounds can be obtained from most chemical supply houses, including
the following:
Rohm and Haas Company Wallerstein Company

Independence Mall West 125 Lake Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19105 Staten Island, NY 10303

METHOD 2111
July 20, 1978
SILK FIBER CONTENT OF SILK TEXTILES (ESPECIALLY WEIGHTED SILK)
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the silk fiber (fibroin) content
of silk textiles, particularly weighted silk.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be approximately 3 to 5 g of the material cut into
pieces not larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) squares.

4.1 Apparatus.

to ± 0.0001 g.
4.1.4 Stainless steel sieve. 80 to 100 mesh or equivalent.
4.1.5 Desiccator with suitable desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate or

4.1.6 Water bath. Water bath equipped with heater and a container with
mechanical stirrer.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Diethyl ether.
4.2.2 Ethyl alcohol. 95 percent.

METHOD 2111
4.2.3 Acid solution. Hydrochloric and hydrofluoric acid solution containing

2 percent HCl and 2 percent HF (actual) by weight. This solution contains
approximately 45 ml of hydrochloric acid, specific gravity 1.19; and 35 ml
of hydrofluoric acid, specific gravity 1.19 in 1000 ml of solution.
4.2.4 Sodium carbonate. 2 percent solution.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The material to be tested shall be cut into

pieces approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) square. Care shall be taken to remove
loose filaments and yarns from the edge of the squares to prevent loss of
filaments due to mechanical action during the treatments.

cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight
of the dry specimen,” and in the calculation of results is indicated as “D”.
5.3 Determination of silk fiber content.
5.3.1 The dry specimen shall be immersed for about 2 minutes successively
in two 30 ml portions of diethyl ether at room temperature and squeezed by
hand after each immersion. It shall then be treated similarly with two 30 ml
portions of ethyl alcohol at 122° to 140°F (50° to 60°C). It shall then be
immersed for 20 minutes in 300 to 500 ml of distilled water at 149° to 158°F
(65° to 70°C), squeezed by hand, and then rinsed by immersion for about 1/2
minute each in three fresh portions of distilled water at the same temperature,
squeezing after each immersion. A sieve shall be used to collect any loose
filaments.
5.3.2 After the specimen has been freed of excess water by squeezing, it
shall be immersed for 20 minutes in 300 to 500 ml of a solution containing
2 percent hydrofluoric acid and 2 percent hydrochloric acid at a temperature
of 129° to 133°F (54° to 56°C). The acid liquid shall be decanted through
the sieve and the specimen shall be rinsed with two portions of distilled
water at 131° to 140°F (55° to 60°C), squeezing by hand after each rinse.
5.3.3 The treatment described in 5.3.2 shall be repeated, except that a

2 percent solution of sodium carbonate shall be used in lieu of the acid
solution.
5.3.4 Weight of extracted specimen. The treatment described in 5.3.2

shall be applied two more times. Finally, the specimen shall be rinsed free
of acid with several portions of distilled water and dried to constant weight

METHOD 2111
in a tared container at a temperature of 174° to 178°F (79° to 81°C), cooled in

a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the
extracted specimen” and in the calculation of the results is indicated as “E”.
5.3.5 Weight of residual ash. The extracted specimen (see 5.3.4) shall be
ashed in a porcelain crucible, heating gently at first, gradually increasing
the temperature to dull redness and continuing until the ash is free of carbon.
The crucible and contents shall be cooled in a desiccator and weighed to the
nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of residual ash” and in the calculation
of results is indicated as “R”.
5.4 Calculations.
5.4.1 The silk content of the finished fabric shall be based on the dry
weight of the specimen and shall be calculated as follows:
Silk (fibroin) percent = E - R X 100
D
Where: D = Weight of original dry specimen, g (see 5.2).
E = Weight of extracted specimen, g (see 5.3.4).
R = Weight of residual ash, g (see 5.3.5).
5.4.2 When silk fiber (fibroin) content on dry extracted specimen basis is
specified in the procurement document, the silk fiber content of the specimen
Silk (fibroin) percent = E - R X 100

E
6. REPORT
6.1 The silk fiber (fibroin) content of the sample unit shall be the average
of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the

METHOD 2510
July 20, 1978
CELLULOSE ACETATE CONTENT OF FIBER MIXTURES, ACETIC ACID METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the acetic acid soluble cellulose
esters in textiles that do not contain nylon. If nylon is present, the
cellulose ester’s shall be determined by Method 2511.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be approximately 5 g of the material cut into pieces
not larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) squares.

4.1 Apparatus.

to ± 0.001 g.
4.1.4 Stainless steel sieve, 80 to 100 mesh or equivalent.

4.2 Reagents.

of iodine and 2.6 g of potassium iodide in 100 ml of distilled water) may be
prepared, and a portion of this diluted to a pale yellow color (about 0.001N)
each time a test for starch is made.

METHOD 2510
4.2.2 Amylolytic and proteolytic enzyme mixture (see 7.1)

4.2.5 Ammonium hydroxide.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The material to be tested shall be cut into

approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) squares.

cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “weight
of the dry specimen”, and in the calculation of results is indicated as “D”.
shall be extracted with chloroform for a minimum of 20 extractions in a Soxhlet
extractor. If the weight of the chloroform-extractable matter is required,
the extract shall be dried to constant weight in a tared container at a temperature
of 174° to 178°F (79° to 81°C), cooled in a desiccator and weighed to the
nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of chloroform-soluble material” and in
the calculation of results is indicated as “C”.

placed in a Soxhlet extractor with distilled water and subjected to a minimum
of ten extractions. If the weight of the water-soluble material is required,
temperature of 212° to 216°F (100° to 102°C), cooled in a desiccator and
weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the water-soluble
material,” and in the calculation of results is indicated as “W”.

calculations involved, may be omitted when the exact amounts of water and

METHOD 2510
5.6 Weight of desized specimen. The specimen (see 5.4) shall be immersed
in a suitable aqueous enzyme solution containing both amylolytic and proteolytic
components at the concentrations, liquid to fabric ratio, temperature, and
length of time required to remove the finish as recommended by the manufacturer
of the enzymes. The specimen shall be removed from the enzyme solution on a
sieve, squeezed and rinsed to remove the enzyme solution. This shall be done
by alternately squeezing and rinsing the specimen in a minimum of twelve
successive baths of distilled water at 154° to 165°F (68° to 74°C). After
rinsing, the specimen shall be spot-tested for the presence of starch with
the iodine solution and for protein with Millon’s reagent. The presence of
starch is indicated by a blue coloration and the presence of protein by a
red coloration. If either test is positive, repeat the enzyme treatment with
the required rinsing until the spot-tests are negative. If additional treatments
are required, the specimen shall be thoroughly rinsed before repeating the
enzyme treatment. After the enzyme solutions have been completely removed
from the specimen, the specimen shall be dried to constant weight (± 0.001 g)
as described in para. 5.2. This is the “Weight of the desized specimen”, and
in the calculation of results is indicated as “S”.
5.7 Weight of residual fiber. The desized material shall be extracted three
times with glacial acetic acid in a beaker using 200 ml portions with constant
agitation for 15 minutes and neutralize with ammonium hydroxide at room
temperature. The residue shall be washed in the sieve with hot distilled water
at 158°F (70°C) until free of ammonium salts. The residue shall be squeezed
to remove excess water and dried to a constant weight (± 0.001 g) as described
in para. 5.2. This is the “Weight of residual fiber”, and in the calculation
5.8.1 Chloroform-soluble material =
5.8.2 Water-soluble material = W x 100

D
5.8.3 If the cellulose acetate content of the finished fabric is required,

the cellulose acetate content shall be based on the dry weight of the specimen
and shall be calculated as follows:
Cellulose acetate, percent = S - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)

D
5.8.4 If the cellulose acetate content of the fabric, exclusive of sizing

and finishing material is required, the cellulose acetate content shall be
based on the dry weight of the desized specimen and shall be calculated as
follows:

METHOD 2510
Cellulose acetate, percent = S - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)
S
5.8.5 Symbols in formulas:

W = weight of water-soluble material, g (see 5.4).
R = weight of residual fiber, g (see 5.7).
60 REPORT
6.1 The cellulose acetate content of the sample unit shall be the average
of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the
7. NOTES
the following:
Wallerstein Company Rohm & Haas Company
125 Lake Ave. Independence Mall West
Staten Island, NY 10303 Philadelphia, PA 19105

METHOD 2511
July 20, 1978
CELLULOSE ACETATE CONTENT OF FIBER MIXTURES, ACETONE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the acetone soluble cellulose
esters in textiles. It is not applicable to all cellulose esters but can be
used to separate most cellulose esters in the presence of nylon.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be 2 to 5 g of the fabric with the edges fringed
to prevent loss of the material.

4.1 Apparatus.

to ± 0.001 g.
4.1.5 Desiccator with suitable desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate or anhydrous

calcium chloride have been found suitable.
4.2 Reagents.

of iodine and 2.6 g of KI in 100 ml of water) may be prepared, and a portion of
this diluted to a pale yellow color (about 0.001N) each time a test for starch
is made.

METHOD 2511
4.2.3 Amlolytic and proteolytic enzyme mixture (see 7.1)
4.2.4 Acetone. Acetone, grade A, conforming to O-A-51, Acetone, Technical.
4.2.5 Millon’s reagent. Millon’s reagent shall be prepared by adding 25

g (17.6 ml) concentrated nitric acid (specific gravity 1.42) to 25 g (1.84 ml)
of mercury under a hood. Upon completion of the reaction, the solution shall
be diluted by adding an equal volume of distilled water.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Weight of dry specimen. The specimen shall be placed in a weighing bottle
and dried in an oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C), cooled
in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the
dry specimen”, and in the calculation of results is indicated as “D”.
5.2 Weight of chloroform-soluble material. The dried specimen from 5.1 shall
be extracted with chloroform for a minimum of 20 extractions in Soxhlet extractor.
If the weight of the chloroform-extractable matter is required, the extract
shall be dried to constant weight in a tared container at a temperature of 174°
to 178°F (79° to 81°C), cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest
0.001 g. This is the “Weight of chloroform-soluble material”, and in the
calculation of results is indicated as “C”.
5.3 Weight of water-soluble material. The specimen from 5.2 shall be placed
in a Soxhlet extractor with distilled water and subjected to a minimum of 10
extractions. If the weight of the water-soluble material is required, the
extract shall be dried to constant weight in a tared container at a temperature
of 212° to 216°F (100° to 102°C), cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the
nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the water-soluble material”, and in
the calculation of results is indicated as “W”. Chloroform and water extractions
must be performed in determining starch and protein content. However, the
determination for weight of extract, and calculations involved may be omitted
when the exact amounts of water- and chloroform-soluble material are not required.
5.4 Weight of desized specimen. The specimen from 5.3 shall then be
immersed in a suitable aqueous enzyme solution containing both amylolytic
and proteolytic components at the concentrations, liquid to fabric ratio
temperature, and length of time required to remove the finish as recommended
by the manufacturer of the enzymes. The specimen shall be removed from the
enzyme solution on a sieve, squeezed and rinsed to remove the enzyme solution.
This shall be done by alternately squeezing and rinsing the specimen in a mini-
mum of 12 successive baths of distilled water at 154° to 165°F (68°C to 74°C).
After rinsing, the specimen shall be spot-tested for the presence of starch
with the iodine solution and for protein with Millon’s reagent. The presence of
starch is indicated by a blue coloration and the presence of protein by a red

METHOD 2511
coloration. If either test is positive, repeat the enzyme treatment with the
required rinsing until the spot-tests are negative. If additional treatments
are required, the specimen shall be thoroughly rinsed before repeating the
enzyme treatment. After the enzyme solutions have been completely removed
from the specimen, the specimen shall be dried to constant weight (see 5.2)
and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the desized
specimen’, and in the calculation of results is indicated as “S”.
5.5 Weight of residual fiber. The desized material shall be placed in a

Soxhlet extractor and extracted for at least 3 hours with acetone. The ex-
traction shall be conducted at such a rate that the solvent in the specimen
shall change at least three times per hour. The specimen shall be removed
from the extractor, squeezed to remove excess acetone, and immersed in warm
distilled water for a-few minutes. The residual fibers shall be squeezed to
remove excess water and dried to constant weight (0.001 g) as described in
paragraph 5.2. This is the “Weight of residual fiber”, and in the calculation
5.6.1 Chloroform-soluble material = C x 100

D

D
5.6.3 If the cellulose acetate content of the finished fabric is required, the
cellulose acetate content shall be based on the dry weight of the specimen and
Cellulose acetate, percent = S-R x 100 (see 5.6.5)

T
5.6.4 If the cellulose acetate content of the fabric, exclusive of sizing and
finishing material is required, the cellulose acetate content shall be based on
the dry weight of the desized specimen and shall be calculated as follows:
Cellulose acetate , percent = S-R x 100 (see 5.6.5).

T

w = weight of water-soluble material, g (see 5.3).

METHOD 2511

R = weight of residual fiber, g (see 5.5).
6. REPORT
6.1 The cellulose acetate content of the sample unit shall be the average of
results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest
1.0 percent.
7. NOTES
the following:
Wallerstein Company Rohm & Haas Company
125 Lake Avenue Independence Mall West

METHOD 2530
July 20, 1978
NYLON CONTENT OF FIBER MIXTURES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the nylon content of fiber
mixtures. It is applicable to the determination of nylon when mixed with
the following fibers: cotton, wool, viscose rayon, cellulose acetate, and
vinyon.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be 2 to 5 g of the material cut into pieces

approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) square.
4.1 Apparatus.

to ± 0.001 g.

4.1.6 Buchner funnel. Buchner funnel with sintered glass filter disk of
coarse porosity.
4.1.7 Beaker, 400 ml.
4.2 Reagents.

METHOD 2530
4.2.1 Iodine solution. An approximate 0.01N stock solution of iodine

(0.13 g of iodine and 2.6 g of potassium iodide in 100 ml of distilled water)
may be prepared, and a portion of this diluted to a pale yellow color (about
0.001N) each time a test for starch is made.
4.2.2 Amylolytic and proteolytic enzyme mixture (see 7.1).

4.2.4 Acetone. Acetone conforming to O-A-51, Acetone, Technical.
4.2.5 Ninety percent formic acid solution.
5. PROCEDURE

cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the
“Weight of the dry specimen,” and in the calculation of results is indicated
as “D”.

shall be extracted with chloroform for a minimum of 20 extractions in a Soxhlet
extractor. If the weight of the chloroform-extractable matter is required,
temperature of 174° to 178°F (79° to 81°C), cooled in a desiccator, and weighed
to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of chloroform-soluble material”
and in the calculation of results is indicated as “C”.

placed in a Soxhlet extractor with distilled water and subjected to a minimum
of ten extractions. If the weight of the material is required, the extract
shall be dried to constant weight in a tared container at a temperature of
212° to 216°F (100° to 102°C), cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the
nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the water-soluble material”, and
in the calculation of results is indicated as “W”.

calculations involved, may be omitted when the exact amounts of water and

METHOD 2530
5.5 Weight of desized specimen. The specimen (see 5.3) shall then be
and proteolytic components at the concentrations, liquid to fabric ratio,
by the manufacturer of the enzymes. The specimen shall be removed from the
enzyme solution on a sieve, squeezed and rinsed to remove the enzyme solution.
This shall be done by alternately squeezing and rinsing the specimen in a
minimum of twelve successive baths of distilled water at 154° to 165°F (68°
to 74°C). After rinsing, the specimen shall be spot-tested for the presence
of starch with the iodine solution and for protein with Millon's reagent.
The presence of starch is indicated by a blue coloration and the presence of
protein by a red coloration. If either test is positive, repeat the enzyme
treatment with the required rinsing until the spot-tests are negative. If
additional treatments are required, the specimen shall be thoroughly rinsed
before repeating the enzyme treatment. After the enzyme solutions have been
completely removed from the specimen, the specimen shall be dried to constant
weight (±0.001 g) as described in 5.2. This is the “Weight of the desized
specimen, and in the calculation of results is indicated as “S”.
5.6 Weight of specimen after removal of cellulose acetate. The specimen

shall be placed in a Soxhlet extractor and extracted for at least 3 hours with
acetone. The extractions shall be conducted at such a rate that the solvent in
the specimen shall change at least three times per hour. The specimen shall
be removed from the extractor, squeezed to remove excess acetone, and immersed
in warm distilled water for a few minutes. The residual fibers shall be squeezed
to remove excess water and dried to constant weight (± 0.001 g) as described
in para. 5.2. This is the “Weight of specimen after removal of cellulose
acetate” and in the calculation of results is indicated as “E”.
5.7 Weight of residual fibers. The residual fiber shall be immersed in

400 ml of 90 percent formic acid solution and shaken or stirred for 30 minutes
at room temperature not over 90°F (32°C). The remaining fibers and solution
shall be poured into the funnel and washed with two portions of 100 ml of
90 percent formic acid solution. The second wash shall be tested for presence
of nylon by placing a drop in water. If it clouds up, the fibers shall be
washed free of nylon with successive portions of 90 percent formic acid. The
fibers shall be washed free of acid with two portions of 100 ml hot water. The
residue shall be squeezed to remove excess water and dried to a constant weight,
(± 0.001 g) as described in para. 5.2. This is the “Weight of residual fibers”
and in the calculation of results is indicated as “R”.

5.8.1 Chloroform soluble material =

METHOD 2530

D
5.8.3 If the nylon content of the finished fabric is required, the nylon
content shall be based on the dry weight of the specimen and shall be
Nylon, percent = S - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)

D

Nylon, percent = E - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)
D
5.8.4 If the nylon content of the fabric, exclusive of sizings and finishing
materials is required, the nylon content shall be based on the dry weight of
the desized specimen and shall be calculated as follows:

Nylon, percent = S - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)
S
Nylon, percent = E - R x 100 (see 5.8.5)

S
D = weight of original dry specimen, g (see 5.1)
C = weight of chloroform-soluble material, g (see 5.2)

W = weight of water-soluble material, g (see 5.3)
S = weight of dry desized specimen, g (see 5.5)
E = weight of specimen after removal of cellulose acetate, g (see 5.6)
R = weight of residual fibers, g (see 5.7)

METHOD 2530
6. REPORT
6.1 The nylon content of the sample unit shall be the average of the
7. NOTES
the following:
Wallerstein Company Rohm and Haas Company

METHOD 2535
July 20, 1978
POLYESTER CONTENT OF FIBER MIXTURES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the polyester content of fiber
mixtures. It is applicable to the determination of polyester when mixed with
the following fibers: cotton, and viscose rayon.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be approximately 2 g of the material cut into 1/4 inch
(6 mm) squares.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.2 Sintered glass filter crucible of coarse porosity.
4.1.3 Hydrometer.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Sulfuric acid, 70 percent. (Density 1.5989 to 1.6221 g/ml) prepared
by first pouring 434 ml of water in a round-bottom flask, then adding 566 ml of
concentrated sulfuric acid slowly, with cooling under the tap. The density of
the solution is adjusted to 1.5989 to 1.6221 g/ml using a hydrometer at 68°F
(20°C).
4.2.2 Sulfuric acid, diluted. 100 ml of concentrated sulfuric acid added

to 1900 ml of water.
4.2.3 Ammonia solution, diluted.

METHOD 2535
4.3 Method cited.
Method 2611, Nonfibrous Materials in Cotton, Enzyme Method

5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Weight of dry desized specimen. The nonfibrous material shall be

removed as specified in Method 2611, then the desized specimen shall be dried
to constant weight, cooled in a desiccator and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g.
This is the “Weight of the dry desized specimen”.
5.2 Weight of dry polyester fiber. The specimen shall then be immersed in
200 ml of 75 Percent solution of sulfuric acid for 1 hour with intermittent
stirring. The residual fibers shall be transferred to the glass crucible and
the excess acid solution removed by suction. The residual fibers shall be washed
on the fiber filter successively with dilute sulfuric acid, water, dilute ammonia
solution (soak for 10 minutes) and again
— with water (soak for 10 minutes). After
each separate washing, the crucible is drained by suction. The residue shall be
dried to a constant weight in the air oven at 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) and
weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the dry polyester fiber”
in the specimen.
5.3.1 The percent polyester shall be calculated as follows:
Polyester fiber, percent = Weight of dry polyester fiber x 100

Weight of dry desized specimen
6. REPORT
6.1 The polyester fiber content of the sample unit shall be the average of
the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the

METHOD 2600
July 20, 1978
MOISTURE CONTENT, OVEN METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the moisture content present in
textiles. It is applicable to textiles that are not injured by heating
to 230°F (110°C), but is not applicable to textiles that have been finished
with resins and wax water-repellents applied by a solvent method.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

shall be at least 10 g of the material.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Analytical balance. Analytical balance capable of weighing accurately

to ± 0.001 g.
4.2 Weighing bottle or can. Glass weighing bottle of approximately 100 ml

capacity fitted with a ground glass cover or an aluminum weighing can of the
same capacity with a tight-fitting cover.
4.3 Air oven. Circulating air oven thermostatically controlled, capable

of maintaining temperature at 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C).
4.4 Pair of tongs.
4.5 Desiccator with suitable desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate or

5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Weight of conditioned specimen. When the moisture content of the

conditioned material is required, the specimen shall be conditioned in
accordance with Section 4 of this Standard and then weighed to the nearest
0.001 go The weight found shall be the conditioned “Original weight of
the specimen”.

METHOD 2600
5.2 Weight of specimen. When the moisture content is required of the material
is submitted, the specimen shall be delivered to the testing laboratory in a
sealed, moisture-proof receptacle of the smallest possible volume. The maximum
weight of the receptacle and specimen shall be approximately 100 g. The sealed
receptacle with the specimen shall be weighed to the nearest 0.003 g as received,
the specimen removed, and the receptacle reweighed. The difference between the
weight of the unopened receptacle and of the receptacle alone shall be the
submitted “Original weight of the specimen”.
5.2.1 Weight of weighing container. The glass weighing-bottle and cover,

or the aluminum weighing can and cover, shall be dried at 221° to 230°F (105° to
110°C), to constant-weight. The container and cover shall be placed separately
in the oven. After drying for 1 hour, the container and cover shall be transferred,
using clean tongs, to a desiccator and allowed to cool to room temperature over a
suitable desiccating agent. The container and cover shall then be weighed.
The heating, cooling, and weighing cycle shall be repeated until the weight
is constant within ± 0.003 g. This is the “Weight of the weighing container”.
The container shall be kept in a desiccator when not in use.
5.2.2 Dry weight of specimen. The uncovered container with specimen shall
be placed in the oven for not less than 1.5 hours at a temperature 221° to 230°F
(105° to 110°c). The container shall be covered and quickly transferred to
a desiccator. After cooling to room temperature, the container and specimen
shall be weighed. The specimen and container shall be returned to the oven and
the drying, cooling, and-weighing cycle repeated until the weight is constant
within ± 0.003 g. The weight of the container (see 5.2.1), shall be subtracted
from this weight to obtain the “Dry weight of the specimen.”
5.3.1 The moisture content shall be calculated as follows:
Moisture content of specimen, percent = O-D x 100

O
Where:
O = original weight of specimen, g (see 5.1 or 5.2)

D = dry weight of specimen, g (see 5.2.2)
6. REPORT
6.1 The moisture content of the sample unit shall be the average of the
6.2 The individual values used to calculate the average shall also be re-
ported.

METHOD 2601
July 20, 1978
MOISTURE CONTENT, OVEN-BALANCE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the moisture content, present
in textiles. It is applicable to textiles that are not injured by heating to
230°F (110°C), but is not applicable to textiles that have been finished with
resins and wax water-repellents applied by a solvent method. This method is
considered adequate for normal inspection purposes. However, in case of dis-
pute or disagreement, Method 2600 should be used.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

shall be at least 10 g of the material.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Analytical balance. Analytical balance capable of weighing accurately

to ± 0.001 g.
4.2 Air oven. Circulating air oven thermostatically controlled, capable

of maintaining temperature at 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C), with a balance
mounted over it and having a basket for the specimen suspended in the oven
from one arm of the balance.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Weight of conditioned specimen. When the moisture content of the

conditioned material is required, the specimen shall be conditioned in ac-
cordance with section 4 of this Standard and then weighed to the nearest
0.01 g. The weight found shall be the conditioned “Original weight of the
specimen”.
5.2 Weight of specimen. When the moisture content is required of the

material as submitted, the specimen shall be delivered to the testing lab-
oratory in a sealed, moisture--proof receptacle of the smallest possible
volume. The maximum weight of the receptacle and specimen shall be approx-
imately 100 g. The sealed receptacle with the specimen shall be weighed

METHOD 2601
to the nearest 0.02 g as received, the specimen removed, and the receptacle
reweighed. The difference between the weight of the unopened receptacle and
of the receptacle alone shall be the submitted “Original weight of the spec-
imen”.
5.2.1 The weighing basket shall be placed in the drying oven and dried at
a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C), to a constant weight ± 0.02
g. The fans and drafts shall be cut off during all weighing periods.
5.2.2 Dry weight of specimen. The weighed specimen shall be placed in the
basket and dried at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C) for not
less than 1.5 hours and weighed in the oven with fans and drafts cut off.
The drying and weighing cycle shall be repeated until the weight is constant
within ± 0.02 g. The weight of the basket (see 5.2.1), shall be subtracted
from this weight to obtain the “Dry weight of the specimen”.
5.3.1 The moisture content shall be calculated as follows:
Moisture content, percent = O-D x 100

O
Where:
O = original weight of specimen, g (see 5.1 or 5.2)
D = Dry weight of specimen, g (see 5.2.2)
6. REPORT
6.1 The moisture content of the sample unit shall be the average of the
6.2 The individual values used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.

METHOD 2610
July 20, 1978
NONFIBROUS MATERIALS IN COTTON, ACID METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for use in determining the amount of acid-
hydrolyzable materials such as urea formaldehyde condensates which are not
removed by Method 2611. It may also be used for determining sizing and other
finishing on textile materials when check results with Method 2611 indicate
that there is not a significant difference in the two methods. This method
is not applicable for determining small amounts of starches in cellulosic
textile materials because the loss of cellulose may be large in comparison
with the amount of starch present in the fabric.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be approximately 10 g of the material. It shall
be cut on the bias, have the edges unraveled, or otherwise prepared to prevent
loss of fibers in the mechanical action during treatments.

4.1 Apparatus.

to + 0.001 g.


4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Chloroform, U. S. P.
4.2.2 Hydrochloric acid solution. Hydrochloric acid solution containing

5 ml of hydrochloric acid, specific gravity 1.19 per 1,000 ml of solution.

METHOD 2610
4.2.3 Water solution of iodine.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Weight of original dry specimen. The specimen shall be placed in a

weighing bottle and dried in an oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°1? (105°
to 110°C), cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g.
This is the “Weight of original dry specimen”, and in the calculation of
results is indicated as “O”.
5.2 Weight of acid desized sp ecimen. The dried specimen from 5.1 shall
be extracted with chloroform for a minimum of 20 extractions in Soxhlet
extractor. The extracted specimen shall then be immersed in approximately
300 ml of the solution of 0.5 percent hydrochloric acid by volume and squeezed
until wet-out. The solution shall then be heated to boiling and boiled for 30
minutes with constant agitation. The specimen shall then be rinsed free of
acid by squeezing in warm distilled water. The specimen shall be spot tested
with iodine solution for the presence of starch. If the starch is not completely
removed, the acid treatment shall be retested until the iodine test is negative.
The specimen shall then be dried to a constant weight as described in 5.1, and
weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of dry desized specimen”,
and in the calculation of results is indicated as “S”.
5.3.1 The acid-hydrolyzable material shall be based upon the dry weight of
the specimen and shall be calculated as follows:
Acid-hydrolyzable material in specimen, dry

basis, percent = O-S x 100
O
Where:
O = weight of original dry specimen, g (see 5.1)
S = weight of dry desized specimen, g (see 5.2)
6. REPORT
6.1 The acid-hydrolyzable material of the sample unit shall be the average
of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to
the nearest 0.1 percent.
reported.
FED. TEST METHOD ST. NO. 191A

METHOD 2611
July 20, 1978
NONFIBROUS MATERIALS IN COTTON, ENZYME METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining, in cotton or cellulosic mix-

ture yarns or cloths, the amount of sizing, finishing, and other nonfibrous
materials, such as oils, fats, waxes, minerals, and other materials which
will be removed or determined by chloroform and/or water extraction, hydro-
lized by enzyme action, or remain as inorganic material after exposure to
high temperatures. Although this method is intended for the determination
of nonfibrous materials in cellulosic textiles, it may be used for deter-
mining the extractable and nonfibrous materials content of certain non-
cellulosic textiles, as specified in the applicable end item specification
or procurement document.
1.2 This method is not applicable to the determination of the amount of

permanent types of finishes, such as urea condensates, melamine condensates,
and substantive or organic finished, or to finishes that are volatile at
230°F (110°C).
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be approximately 10 g of the material undergoing

test. Care should be taken in the preparation and subsequent handling of the
specimen, so that loss of material will not occur during test. If the material
undergoing test is woven or knitted cloth, the specimen should be cut on the
bias and have loose fibers and yarns removed.
2.1.1 When total ash is required, an additional 10 g specimen is required

for evaluation.

4.1 Apparatus.

to 0.001 g.

METHOD 2611
4.1.4 Muffle furnace.

4.2 Reagents.
4.2.2 Iodine solution. An approximate 0.01N stock solution of iodine

(0.13 g of iodine and 2.6 g of KI in 100 ml of water) may be prepared, and
a portion of this diluted to a pale yellow color (about 0.001N) each time
a test for starch is made.
4.2.3 Amylolytic and proteolytic enzyme mixture (see 7.1).
4.2.4 Millon's reagent. Millon's reagent shall be prepared by adding

25 g (17.6 ml) concentrated nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.42) to 25 g (1.84 ml) of
mercury under a hood. Upon completion of the reaction, the solution shall
be diluted by adding in equal volumes of distilled water.
5. PROCEDURE

cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the
“Weight of the dry specimen”, and in the calculation of results is indicated
as “O”.
5.2 Chloroform-soluble material. The dried specimen from 5.1 shall be

extracted with chloroform for a mininum of 20 extractions in Soxhlet ex-
tractor. If the weight of the chloroform-extractable matter is required,
temperature of 174° to 178°F (79° to 81°C), cooled in a desiccator, and
weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of chloroform-soluble
material”, and in the calculation of results is indicated as “C”.

METHOD 2611
5.3 Water-soluble material. The specimen from 5.2 shall be placed in a
Soxhlet extractor with distilled water and subjected to a minimum of 10
extractions. if the weight of the material is required, the extract shall
be dried to constant weight in a tared container at a temperature of 212°
to 215°F (100° to 102°C), cooled in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest
0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the water soluble material , and in the
calculation of results is indicated as “W”. Chloroform and water extraction
must be performed in determining starch and protein content. However, the
determination for weight of extract, and calculations involved may be omitted
when the exact amounts of water and chloroform-soluble material are not
required.
5.4 Weight of desized specimen. The specimen from 5.3 shall then be
and proteolytic components at the concentrations, liquid to fabric ratio,
by the manufacturer of the enymes. The specimen shall be removed from the
enzyme solution on a sieve, squeezed and rinsed to remove the enzyme solu-
tion. This shall be done by alternately squeezing and rinsing the specimen
in a minimum of 12 successive baths of distilled water at 154° to 165° F
(68° to 74°C) After rinsing, the specimen shall be spot-tested for the
presence of starch with the iodine solution and for protein with Millon’s
reagent. The presence of starch is indicated by a blue coloration and the
presence of protein by a red coloration. If either test is positive, repeat
the enzyme treatment with the required rinsing until the spot-tests are
negative. If additional treatments are required, the specimen shall be
thoroughly rinsed before repeating the enzyme treatment. After the enzyme
solutions have been completely removed from the specimen, the specimen shall
be dried to constant weight (± 0.001 g) as described in 5.2. This is the
“Weight of the desized specimen”, and in the calculation of results is
indicated as “S”.
5.5 Residual ash. The desized specimen from 5.4 shall be ashed to
constant weight at a temperature of 1112° to 1202°F (600° to 650°C) in
a tared porcelain crucible employing a muffle furnace. After ashing, the
ashed specimen and the crucible shall be placed in a desiccator, cooled,
then removed and” weighed immediately to the nearest 0.001 g. The weight
of the tared crucible shall be subtracted from the total weight to give
the “Weight of residual ash”, which in the calculation of results is in-
dicated as “R”.
5.6 Total ash (inorganic material). The specimen from 5.1 shall be
ashed to constant weight at a temperature of 1112° to 1202°F (600° to 650°C)
in a tared porcelain crucible employing a muffle furnace. After ashing,
the specimen shall be cooled in a desiccator and weighed to the nearest
0.001 g. This is the “Weight of the total ash”, and in the calculation of
results is indicated as “A”.

METHOD 2611
5.7.1 The results shall be based on the weight of the dry speciments and
shall be calculated to the nearest 0.1 percent using the following formulas:
Chloroform-soluble material only
Chloroform-soluble and water-soluble

material only
Water-soluble material
Starch and protein content excluding

chloroform-soluble and water-soluble
material
Starch and protein content including

chloroform-soluble and water-soluble
material

chloroform-soluble material

water-soluble material
Residual ash only
Total ash only
Total sizing, finishing, and other non-

fibrous material content
Where: O = Weight of original dry specimen, g (5.1).

C = Weight of chloroform-soluble material, g (5.2).
W = Weight of water-soluble material, g (5.3).
S = Weight of desized specimen, g (5.4).
R = Weight of residual ash, g (5.5).
A= Weight of total ash, g (5.6).

METHOD 2611
6. REPORT
6.1 The chloroform-soluble material, water-soluble material, starch and

protein content, total ash, residual ash, and total sizing, finishing, and
other nonfibrous material of the sample unit shall be the average of the
7. NOTES
the following:
Wallerstein Company Rohm and Haas Company


METHOD 2620
July 20, 1978
NONFIBROUS MATERIALS IN LINEN TEXTILES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the nonfibrous materials added
by the manufacturer and natural nonfibrous constituents in linen textiles.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be approximately 10 g of material. Care should be
taken in the preparation and subsequent handling of the specimen, so that
loos of material will not occur during test. If the material under-going
test is woven or knitted cloth, the specimen should be cut on the bias and
have loose fibers and yarns removed.

4.1 Apparatus.

to ± 0.001 g.
4.1.3 Reflux condenser.


4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Sodium hydroxide, 2 percent aqueous solution, by weight.
4.2.2 Acetic acid, 1 percent solution, by volume.
FED. TEXT METHOD STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 2620
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Weight of dry specimen. The specimen shall be placed in a weighing bottle
and dried in an oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C), cooled
in a desiccator, and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is the “Weight of
original dry specimen”, and in the calculation of results is indicated as “O”.
5.2 Weight of extracted specimen. The specimen from 5.2 shall then be
refluxed for 1 hour in a boiling 2 percent aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide.
The specimen shall then be rinsed in warm water and then in a 1 percent aqueous
solution of acetic acid followed with several rinses in water to remove the
acetic acid using the sieve to collect any loose fibers. The residue shall
then be dried to constant weight and weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. This is
the “Weight of the extracted specimen”, and in the calculation of results is
indicated as “S”.
5.3.1 The nonfibrous material shall be based upon the dry weight of the
specimen and shall be calculated as follows:
Nonfibrous material in specimen, dry

basis, percent = O-S x 100
O
Where:
O = weight of original dry specimen, g (see 5.1)

S = weight of dry extracted specimen, g (see 5.2)
6. REPORT
6.1 The nonfibrous material in the sample unit shall be the average of the
0.5 percent.
6.2 The individual values used to calculate the average shall also be reported.

METHOD 2800
July 20, 1978
WOOL FIBER DAMAGE, ALKALI VOLUBILITY METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the alkali volubility and
the change in alkali volubility of wool which has been subjected to
chemical treatment.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be 1.0 ± 0.1 g of the material.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, four specimens

4. APPARATUS AND REAGENT
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Glass tubes. 125 to 150 ml capacity, with stoppers.
4.1.2 Constant temperature bath. Temperature maintained at 149° ± 2°F (65°

± 1°C).

to ± 0.001 g.
4.1.4 Weighing bottles.
4.1.5 Air oven. Circulating air oven thermostatically controlled, capable of

maintaining a temperature between 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C).
4.1.6 Sieves. Approximately 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) in diameter, with 100-
mesh copper screening.
4.1.8 Pair of tongs.
4.2 Reagent.

METHOD 2800
4.2.1 Sodium hydroxide solution. (0.1N)
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 If substantial quantities of grease, soap, or other extractable are

present in the material, as may be the case in wools where the chemical
treatment is applied at intermediate stages of manufacture (raw stock, top,
or yarn), a preliminary extraction with an appropriate solvent shall be made.

cooled in a desiccator, and weighed. The heating, cooling, and weighing
cycle shall be repeated until the weight is constant within ± 0.003 g. This
is the “Weight of the dry specimen”, and in the calculation of results is
indicated as “O”.
5.3 A loosely stoppered test tube containing 100 ml of sodium hydroxide

solution shall be placed in a constant temperature water bath and main-
tained at 149° ± 2°F (65° ±1°C). The specimen from 5.2 shall be immersed
in the tube of alkali solution, stirred once as soon as it is placed in the
tube, and again 10 minutes later to insure complete wetting out.
5.4 Weight of alkali-treated specimen. After a total period of 1 hour from

the time of immersion of the specimen in the alkali solution, the tube shall be
removed from the water bath anD its contents poured as rapidly as possible through
a sieve. The tube shall then be rinsed twice with water to remove any adhering
particles which shall then be deposited on the sieve. The specimen on the sieve
shall be rinsed for 5 minutes by means of a stream of running tap water,
approximately 3,000 ml per minute. The sieve shall then be placed on blotting
paper to absorb the excess water. The specimen shall be returned to its weighing
bottle, placed in the oven, and dried to constant weight as described in 5.2.
This is the “Weight of the alkali-treated specimen”, and in the calculation
of results is indicated as “A”.
5.5 The same tests shall be conducted on treated and untreated specimens for
the purpose of comparison in determining the change in alkali volubility of the
treated material.
5.6.1 The alkali volubility of the treated and the untreated specimens
Alkali volubility, percent = O-A x 100

O

METHOD 2800
Where:
O = weight of dry specimen, g (see 5.2)

A = weight of alkali-treated specimen, g (see 5.4)
5.6.1.1 When testing blends of cotton and wool, an adjustment shall be

made in the above formula so that the alkali volubility value shall be based
on the weight of the wool alone.
5.6.1.2 The change in alkali volubility of wool which has been subjected
to a chemical treatment shall be calculated as follows:
Change in alkali volubility, percent = T-U
Where:
T = percent alkali volubility of treated wool

U = percent alkali volubility of untreated wool
6. REPORT
6.1 The alkali volubility of the sample unit shall be the average of the
6.2 The change in alkali volubility of the sample unit shall be the
average of the results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be
reported.

METHOD 2810
July 20, 1978
ACIDITY (pH) OF TEXTILES, COLORIMETRIC METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the pH value of the water
extract from textile materials. This procedure is limited in accuracy but
may be used to determine the pH value of materials that are easily wetted.
In case of a dispute involving the results obtained by this method, Method
2811 shall be used instead.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be 10.0 ± 0.1 g of the material to be tested

and shall be cut up into 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) pieces.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Balance. Balance capable of weighing accurately to ± 0.01 g.
4.1.2 Erlenmeyer flask. 500 ml with a joint to fit the condensor and a glass
stopper.
4.1.3 Reflux condenser.
4.1.4 Calorimetric pH comparator with standard tubes.
4.1.5 Color comparison standards.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Distilled water. Distilled water having a pH of 6.2 to 7.0, prepared

immediately before use by boiling for about 10 minutes and cooling to room
temperature.
4.2.2 Potassium acid tartrate. Saturated solution pH 3.57.

METHOD 2810
4.2.3 Sodium borate solution. Buffered to a pH of 10.00.
4.2.4 Indicators as follows:
4.2.4.1 Universal indicator.
4.2.4.2 Meta cresol purple. Having a pH of 1.2 to 2.8.
4.2.4.3 Thymol blue. Having a pH of 1.2 to 2.8.
4.2.4.4 Bromophenol blue. Having a pH of 2.0 to 4.6.
4.2.4.5 Methyl red. Having a pH of 4.4 to 6.0.
4.2.4.6 Bromocresol purple. Having a pH of 5.2 to 6.8.
4.2.4.7 Bromothymol blue. Having a pH of 6.0 to 7.6.
4.2.4.8 Cresol red. Having a pH of 7.2 to 8.8.
4.2.4.9 Thymol blue. Having a pH of 8.0 to 9.6.
4.2.4.10 Thymolphthalein. Having a pH of 9.3 to 10.5.
4.2.4.11 Alizarine yellow R. Having a pH of 10.1 to 12.0.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Place the specimen to be tested in the 500 ml flask and add 200 ml of
water and boil for 30 minutes under the reflux condenser. Remove and stopper .
the flask, allow the extract to cool to room temperature.
5.2 Ten ml of the solution shall be transferred to a calorimeter comparison

tube, 0.5 ml of the universal indicator added, and well shaken. The color of
the solution shall be compared with the color comparison standards to obtain
the pH range of the solution.
5.3 An indicator solution of the proper range shall be selected, 0.5 ml

added to a fresh 10 ml portion of the solution to be tested and well shaken.
The color of the solution shall be matched with the standard color comparator.
6. REPORT
6.1 The pH of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.2 pH.

METHOD 2811
July 20, 1978
pH OF TEXTILES, ELECTROMETRIC METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for the determination of the pH, acidity
or alkalinity of aqueous solutions extracted from textiles (fibers,
yarns or fabric samples). This method is applicable to either finished
or unfinished textiles.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen to be tested shall be 10.0 ± 0.25 g that has been cut up
into 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) pieces.

will be tested from each sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Balance. Balance capable of weighing accurately to ± 0.01 g.
4.1.2 pH meter. The meter shall include a glass electrode and a saturated
calomel reference electrode (see 7.1 and 7.2).
4.1.2.1 Accuracy of pH meter. The pH meter shall be of a type that will

read directly to an accuracy of 0.1 pH unit.
4.1.3 Erlenmeyer Flask. 500 ml.
4.1.4 1000 ml volumetric flask.

4.1.5 Drying tube (see 7.3).
4.2 Reagents (see 7.4 and 7.5).
4.2.1 Water (see 7.6). Distilled water that is to be used to make up

the standardizing solutions and to be used for the extraction of the test
specimen shall be boiled for 30 minutes. The water shall be boiled in a
container that can be sealed while cooling to prevent contamination with
carbon dioxide (see 7.7).

METHOD 2811
4.2.2 Standard Hydrochloric Acid Solution. (0.1M, pH = 1.10 at 25°C). Dilute

50 ml of hydrochloric acid, 36.5 percent, ACS reagent grade to 500 ml with
distilled water and standardize to 0.10M, (see 7.8).
4.2.3 Standard Tartrate Solution. (saturated near 25°C, pH = 3.56 at
25°C). Shake vigorously an excess of potassium hydrogen tartrate
(KHC4H4O6) analytical grade with 100 to 300 ml of water in a glass stoppered
flask. Filter, if necessary, to remove suspended salt. Add about 0.1 g
of thymol as a preservative.
4.2.4 Standard Phthalate Solution. (0.05M, pH = 4.01 at 25°C). Dissolve
in water 10.21 g of potassium hydrogen phthalate (KHC8H4O4), analytical
grade previously dried at 230°F (110°C) for 1 hour, dilute to 1 liter.
4.2.5 Standard Phosphate Solution. (0.025M, pH = 6.86 at 25°C). Dissolve

3.40 g of potassium dihydrogen phosphate (KH2PO4) and 3.55 g of anhydrous
disodium hydrogen phosphate (Na 2HPO4) in water and dilute to 1 liter. The
two phosphates shall have been dried at 230°F (110°C) for 1 hour before use.
4.2.6 Standard Borax Solution. (0.01M, pH = 9.18 at 25°C). Dissolve 3.81 g

of sodium tetraborate decahydrate (Na2B4O7. 10 H2O), analytical grade in water
and dilute to 1 liter.
4.2.7 Standard Alkaline Phosphate Solution. (0.01M, pH = 11.72 at 25°C).

Dissolve 1.42 g of anhydrous disodium hydrogen phosphate (Na2HPO4) in 100 ml
of 0.1M, carbonate-free, solution of sodium hydroxide and dilute to 1 liter
with water.
4.2.7.1 Sodium hydroxide. (0.1M, carbonate-free pH = 12.8 at 25°C). Dissolve

40.01 g sodium hydroxide (NaOH) pellets ACS reagent grade in 1000 ml of
water. This solution shall be prepared long before using to allow time for any
carbonates present to precipitate out of solution. Pipet 100 ml of this solution
to a 1 liter volumetric flask and dilute to volume. Care should be taken not
to disturb the carbonate precipitate at the bottom of the flask.
4.2.8 Sodium hydroxide. 0.1N Volumetric Standard Solution.
4.2.9 Phenolphthalein Solution. 1 percent Volumetric, Indicator.

4.3 Soda lime.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Place the specimen (2.1) to be tested in a 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask
and then pour 200 ml of boiling water over the specimen. Immediately close
the flask by inserting a stopper equipped with a drying tube containing
soda lime. Allow to cool to room temperature for one hour with occasional
swirling. If the solution has not reached room temperature in one hour, the
flask may be adjusted to room temperature under flowing water.

METHOD 2811
5.2 Allow the pH meter to warm up thoroughly and bring to electrical
balance in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The glass and
calomel electrodes shall be washed three times with distilled water and
dried gently with clean absorbent tissue. The temperature of the test
solution shall be noted and the temperature dial of the meter adjusted to
the proper setting.
5.3 If the anticipated pH of the test solution is less than 9.2, two
standard solutions shall be selected one above and the one below this pH.
These standards shall be warmed or cooled as necessary to match the
temperature of the unknown within 2°F (1°C). A number of readings are made of
the first standard solution until the meter remains in balance within
± 0.05 pH units for two successive portions.
5.4 The electrodes shall be washed three times with distilled water and
immersed in the second standard buffer solution. The meter is adjusted to
the new balance point and the pH value read from the meter. Additional
portions of the second buffer solution are used until successive readings
are in close agreement. The instrument shall be judged to be operating
satisfactorily if the readings agree with the assigned value of the second
standard buffer solution within 0.1 pH unit.
5.5 Wash the electrodes and sample container with distilled water after
the meter has been standardized with the second standard pH solution. Immerse
the electrodes in sufficient sample solution decanted from the 500 ml flask
and take the pH reading promptly. Three portions of the solution shall be
tested and two of the three readings must agree within 0.1 pH unit. When
two readings do not agree within 0.1 pH unit, the meter shall be restandardized.
6. REPORT
6.1 The pH of each sample shall be reported as the average for the
specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 pH.
7. NOTES
7.1 pH meters of the type required in this method may be purchased from
Beckman Instruments, Inc., 2500-TR Harbor Blvd., Fullerton, CA 92632; Leeds
and Northrup Co., 4901 Stenton Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19144; and National
Technical Laboratories, South Pasadena, CA 91030.
7.2 If the expected pH is 10 or higher, the high alkalinity type glass

electrode shall be used.
7.3 Drying tube with overflow cup suitable for this method may be
purchased from Ace Glass Incorporated, P.O. Box 688, Vineland, NJ 08360.

METHOD 2811
7.4 Packets containing the required amount to make up standard solutions

may be purchased from laboratory chemical supply houses. With these packets
it is only necessary to dissolve and dilute to 1 liter.
7.5 The stored standard solution shall not be older than 3 months, and
should be stored in chemical resistant glass or polyethylene closed con-
tainers.
7.6 Wherever water is mentioned throughout this method, it will be understood

that previously boiled and cooled distilled (carbon dioxide free) water is
intended.
7.7 In case of dispute, distilled water having a pH of not less than 6.2
nor more than 7.0 and maximum residue of 5 parts per million when evaporated
to dryness shall be used. Test for the presence of alkaline Impurities by
boiling two specimens of approximately 100 ml for 15 minutes. Stopper and
cool to room temperature. Wash the electrodes properly with water. Measure
the pH of both specimens. If these readings are not between 6.2 and 7.0
re-distill the water from a solution containing 1 g potassium permanganate
and 4 g of sodium hydroxide per liter to remove acid or organic material,
or from a dilute solution of sulfuric acid to remove any volatile alkalinity.
7.8 The standard hydrochloric solution shall be standardized using 0.1N

sodium hydroxide solution. A 10 ml portion of the hydrochloric acid solution
is titrated to the end point with the standard sodium hydroxide using phenol-
phthalein as the indicator.
FED.TEST METHODXC STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 2820
July 20, 1978
CHITIN CONTENT OF TEXTILES, AS A
MEASURE OF FUNGAL CONTAMINATION
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the chitin content of textiles as
a measure of low-level fungal infiltration (not visible at 36X magnification).
Chitin is present in the cell walls of most fungi and thus the amount of chitin
found may serve as an indicator of fungal contamination. Since this technique
is designed to eliminate interference caused by the cellulosic matrix, it is
possible to “concentrate” fungal growth from relatively large surface areas.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall consist of at least ten 2 inches by 2 inches (51 by
51 mm) pieces of the material under consideration. A control sample, utilizing
the same area parameters as the test specimen shall be analyzed simultaneously.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.2 Spectrophotometer or calorimeter (wavelength: 530 rim).

4.1.3 Hot plates (preferably 6-unit extraction heater pack).
4.1.4 Refluxing apparatus (preferably with ground-glass joints).
4.1.5 10 ml test tubes (graduated in 0.2 ml divisions with ground-glass stoppers).
4.1.6 Ultrasonic dismembrator.

—
4.2 Reagents.

METHOD 2820
4.2.1 10N sodium hydroxide.
4.2.2 1N sodium hydroxide.
4.2.3 12N hydrochloric acid.
4.2.4 2N hydrochloric acid.
4.2.5 0.5N hydrochloric acid.
4.2.6 Phenolphthalein solution (1 percent w/v).
4.2.7 2,4 - pentanedione (acetylacetone). This reagent must be redistilled

every two weeks.
4.2.8 0.5N sodium carbonate.
4.2.9 Ethanol (absolute).
4.2.10 Ehrlich’s reagent (1.336 g of p - dimethylaminobenzaldehyde is dissolved

in 50 ml of ethanol followed by the addition of 50 ml of 12N hydrochloric acid).
Store at 14°F (-10°C).
4.2.11 Glucosamine hydrochloride (1 ml = 8.6 mg glucosamine). Store frozen at

14°F (-1O°C).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen for testing.
5.1.1 Take at least ten 2 inches by 2 inches (51 by 51 mm) specimens of the
material under consideration for each test sample (a material control must be
analyzed simultaneously with each test sample).
5.1.2 Each square shall be placed in a dish that is at least 51 mm wide, 25

mm high and contains 20 to 25 ml of distilled water.
5.1.3 The surface of the square shall be treated with an ultrasonic dismembra-
tor, such as a Branson high-intensity sonic processor, so as to dislodge the
fungi from the material. This can be accomplished by thoroughly sweeping the
fabric surface (at least three times) with the probe-like sonic converter. Dis-
card the specimen and pour the liquid into a graduated 400-ml beaker. Repeat
the ultrasonic technique for the remainder of the specimens, combining the dis-
lodged material (in suspension) from each sonified specimen.

METHOD 2820
5.1.4 The 400-ml beaker containing the combined dislodged material shall be
placed on a preheated hot plate and warmed until the fibers have agglomerated.
The beaker shall be removed from the hot plate and the fibers allowed to settle.
The volume shall be reduced (with a water aspirator) to approximately 40 ml,
taking care that all the fibers are left behind. Two hundred milliliters of
distilled water shall be added to the beaker and the fiber agglomeration step
(described above) shall be repeated.
5.1.5 Forty ml of 12N hydrochloric acid shall be added to the 40 ml volume

which shall be transferred to the refluxing apparatus, and refluxed for 6
hours. The contents shall be cooled and then transferred quantitatively
through a Whatman 41H filter paper or equivalent into a 100-ml volumetric
flask, and made up to volume.
5.2 Prepare a reagent blank.
5.2.1 Proceed as described in steps 5.4.1 through 5.4.4 except that 1 ml

of distilled water shall be substituted for the 1.0 ml aliquot of test
solution.
5.3 Prepare a calibration curve for the determination of chitin (see

appendixes 1 and 2).
5.4 Determination of chitin.
5.4.1 A 1.0 ml aliquot shall be taken from the test solution and shall
be pipetted into a 10 ml graduated test tube. One drop of phenolphthalein
solution shall be added and the contents titrated with 10N NaOH until a pink
color appears, and then back-titrated with 2N HCl until the pink color is
discharged. The contents shall then be titrated with 1N NaOH until the pink
color reappears, and then back-titrated with 0.5N HCl until the pink color is
discharged. One milliliter of acetylacetone (dissolved in 50 ml of 0.5N sodium
carbonate, prepared daily) shall then be added and the volume adjusted to 3.0
ml ± 0.2 ml.
5.4.2 Each test tube, containing a condenser (an elongated test tube with
one sealed end and filled with water will act as a condenser and as a loose
stopper to prevent the loss of acetylacetone - condenser should not come in
contact with contents of the test tube) shall be placed in a vigorously boiling
water bath for 20 minutes, and then shall be cooled to room temperature.
Ethanol (absolute) shall be added to each tube up to the 9.0 ml mark. One
milliliter of Ehrlich’s reagent shall then be added (by pipet) to each tube and
the contents thoroughly mixed. Each test tube shall be placed in a 149°F (65°C)
water bath for 10 minutes (to accelerate the liberation of carbon dioxide) and shall

METHOD 2820
then be cooled at room temperature. Ethanol (absolute) shall be added to

each tube up to the 10 ml mark and the contents thoroughly mixed.
5.4.3 After 10 minutes a sufficient volume from each tube shall be trans-
ferred to a spectrophotometer cell and a reading obtained (color is stable
for 3 hours). The spectrophotometer is set to 100 percent T with the reagent
blank at a wavelength of 530 nm.
5.4.4 Obtain chitin content, in micrograms, from a working curve.
6. REPORT
6.1 Results shall be reported in micrograms of chitin per total fabric

area (square centimeters) and shall be the difference between fabric blank
and fabric sample X 100.
NOTE 1: Do not freeze glucosamine stock solution in volumetric flask (frozen

solution will crack the flask).
NOTE 2: Ultrasonic dismembrator apparatus for use in this method may be

purchased from Heat Systems-Ultrasonics, Inc., 38 East Mall,
Plainview, L.I., NY 11803; VWR Scientific, P.O. BOX 2002,
Rochester, NY 14603; Sonic Instruments Inc., 1018 Whitehead
Road Ext., Trenton, NJ 08638.
NOTE 3: Ultrasonic dislodgement technique may be applied to the surface

of any material that will retain its structural integrity.

METHOD 2820
APPENDIX 1
Preparation of Standard Solution
1. Chitin (glucosamine) Standard Stock Solution (1 ml. = 8.6 mg glucosamine).

Dissolve 0.2589 g of glucosamine hydrochloride (equivalent to 0.2151 g) of
glucosamine) to a 25 ml volumetric flask and dilute to the mark with dis-
tilled water. The concentration of this solution is 8.6 mg glucosamine per
milliliter (stock solution may be kept indefinitely if stored frozen at 14°F
(-10°C)).
2. A working solution may be prepared by pipetting 1.0 ml of the stock

solution (ambient temperature) into a 100-ml volumetric flask diluting to
the mark with distilled water. The concentration of this solution is
(86.0 µg) glucosamine per milliliter.

METHOD 2820
APPENDIX 2
Preparation of Calibration Curve for the
Determination of Chitin (Glucosamine)
Pipet 0.1 (8.6 µg), 0.3 (25.8 µg), 0.5 (43 µg), 0.7 (60.2 µg) and 1.0 (86 µg)
ml portions of the working solution (1 ml = 86.0 ug of glucosamine) into each
of five 10.0 ml calibrated test tubes. A 6th 10.0 ml calibrated test tube
shall contain 1.0 ml of distilled water and shall be carried as a blank.
Proceed as described in step 5.4.1 (Determination of Chitin) beginning with
“one drop of phenolphthalein solution shall be added” and concluding with
step 5.4.3. Plot the values obtained (transmittance or absorbance) against
micrograms of glucosamine per 10 ml of solution.

METHOD 3810
July 20, 1978
BECKER VALUE OF CORDAGE FIBER
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for evaluating the reflectance of abaca’ (Manila
“Hemp”) fiber. It is applicable to raw fiber and to fiber from cordage.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be 24 g of a composite sample. When cordage i S

to be tested, the composite sample iS prepared from 3 pieces, 12 inches (305 mm)
long taken from a sample unit not less than 24 inches (610 mm) from each other.
If rope, yarn or fiber is to be tested, take enough 12 inch (305 mm) lengths
of the yarn or fiber, well distributed over the sample unit, to give a bundle
1 inch (25 mm) in diameter.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Reflectometer. A reflectometer shall be used whose geometrical and

spectral characteristics conform to requirements for the measurement of
Becker Value (see 7.4).
4.1.2 Reflectance standards. Reflectance standards of porcelain enamel which

have been calibrated relative to magnesium oxide on a reflectometer known to
conform to the geometric and spectral requirements of the definition for
Becker Value (see 7.1) shall be used, (see 7.2). For accurate results,
a reference standard must have the same spectral character and approximately
the same Becker Value as that of the fiber being tested (see 7.3).
4.1.3 Cuvette. A specimen holder at least 5/8 inch (16 mm) deep with clear
glass or optical grade plastic window in the bottom, large enough to receive
the entire beam of the reflectometer. (See Appendix II)

METHOD 3810
4.1.4 Glass or plastic sheet. Glass or plastic sheet shall have the same
thickness and spectral transmission as the bottom of the cuvette (see 4.1.3)
and having the length and width of the reflectance standard (see 4.1.2)
preferably cut from the same piece as the bottom window of the cuvette for
calibrating equipment. The glass or plastic sheet is inserted between the
standard and receptor in reflectometers sensitive to geometric and optical
changes caused by its emission.
4.2 Reagent.
4.2.1 Petroleum ether, technical.
50 PROCEDURE

5.1.1 Cut 3 pieces, each 12 inches (305 mm) in length, from a sample unit
of rope to be tested. Open up a piece of rope and remove the paper marker if
present. Untwist the strands and the yarns and make a cylindrical bundle
including all the fibers in the cross-section of the rope. Compress the bundle
as much as possible. It may be helpful to wrap the bundle in heavy kraft paper.
The fibers must be cut to a length of 1/8 inch (3 mm) by slicing the bundle
perpendicular to its long axis. Take care to avoid overheating and discoloration
by too rapid cutting or a dull knife. Remove particles of paper, if used,
from the cut fiber. Repeat this procedure for the 3 pieces cut from the
sample unit.
5.1.2 Combine 8 g portions of the cut fibers from each of the 3 pieces
of rope and mix thoroughly.
5.1.3 Place approximately 10 g of this composite sample in the thim-

ble of the Soxhlet apparatus and extract by refluxing with petroleum ether
for 2 hours. The solvent should be recycled approximately 15 times per hour.
5.1.4 Spread the extracted fibers out on a clean sheet of quantitative

filter paper and allow them to dry completely at room temperature, pre-
ferably overnight.
5.2 Forming specimen in cuvette.
5.2.1 Carefully sprinkle the prepared specimen evenly into the cuvette
from a spatula or folded sheet of paper. Do not handle the fibers with
the fingers. When the window in the cuvette is evenly covered to a depth

METHOD 3810
of about 1/16 inch (2 mm) add additional fibers more rapidly to a depth of
1/2 inch (13 mm). Do not tamp or pack the fibers. The fiber surface
against the window of the cuvette constitutes the specimen measurement.
5.3 Becker Value.
5.3.1 Turn on the reflectometer and allow the equipment to warm up for
about 1/2 hour to bring the response to a steady rate.
5.3.2 Calibrate the reflectometer as follows: Cover the reflectance standard,

(see 4.1.2), with the glass or plastic sheet where necessary, (see 4.1.4), and
place the combination over the specimen aperture of the reflectometer. Read
the instrument. If the indicated reflectance differs from that of the
reflectance standard, adjust the apparatus to give the correct reading.
5.3.3 If a Gardner Photometric Unit is being used (see 7.4), place the back
(fig. 3810B) on the filled cuvette and place the cuvette with the window
on the center of the specimen aperture of the reflectometer; completely
covering it. Read the reflectance. Rotate the cuvette through 90 degrees
and read the reflectance again. A large difference noted in rotating the
cuvette indicates that the fibers are not arranged at random and the cuvette
should be emptied and refilled. If the two readings agree within 0.3 Becker
Value, check the calibration as in 5.3.2. If the calibration has not
changed more than 0.3 Becker Value during the measurements, the two readings
are acceptable. Average them to obtain a single value for the specimen.
If the calibration has changed more than 0.3 Becker Value, the reflectance
measurements must be repeated.
5.3.4 If a Photovolt Reflection Meter is being used (see 7.4), place the
filled cuvette carefully on the center of the specimen aperture completely
covering it, and take a reading. Raise the cuvette 1/4 inch (6 mm) above the
surface of the reflectometer and allow it to drop back into place to settle
the fiber. Take a second reading. Repeat this procedure until successive
readings agree. Check the calibration with the reflectance standard as
before and if it has not changed more than 0.3 Becker Value during the measure-
ments, take the last reflectance reading to be the value for the specimen.
Repeat the measurements if the calibration has changed more than 0.3 Becker Value.
6. REPORT
6.1 The Becker Value for the sample unit is the average of the values
for the specimens measured.
6.2 Each individual value used to calculate the average value shall also
be reported.

METHOD 3810
6.3 Report the Becker Value to the nearest whole number.
7. NOTES
7.1 Becker Value. The reflectance of a specimen relative to magnesium

oxide when illuminated at 45° by CIE Source A passing through a Wratten-75
filter and viewed perpendicularly by a receptor whose spectral response is
equivalent to that of the CIE Standard observer.
7.2 Reference standards may be obtained from the National Bureau of

Standards, Washington, DC 20234 and Photovolt Corporation, 1115 Broadway,
New York, NY 10010.
7.3 A likely source of error in Becker Value measurements may be the

departure of the spectral response of the reflectometer from the require-
ments of this method. A practical test for the conformance to spectral
requirements may be made by adjusting the instrument to read correctly
the Becker Value of a white reference standard then reading the value of
a tan-colored standard that has nearly the same value as the fiber to be
measured. The reading for the latter standard should be within a few
tenths of the assigned values.
7.4 Gardner Photometric Unit when equipped with 45 degree exposure head
and with Corning-403 and Wratten-75 filters between photocell and specimen
is suitable. It may be obtained from Gardner Laboratories, Inc., Bethesda,
MD 20014. The Photovolt Reflection Meter, when equipped with Coming
4010 and Coming 4308 filters, is suitable. It may be obtained from the
Photovolt Corporation, 1115 Broadway, New York, NY 10010. The Martens
(visual) photometer with Wratten 75 filter over the eyepiece and Standard
Light Source A of the CIE may be used as in the past, but measurement with
this equipment is less precise and more time consuming than with the photo-
electric equipment. Any photometer conforming to the general requirements may
be used provided it is shown to yield Becker Values in close agreement with
the values obtained with the equipment referred to above. (See Appendix I).

METHOD 3810
APPENDIX I
PHOTOMETRIC EQUIPMENT
To qualify photometric equipment for the Becker Value test, test at least
25 fiber specimens representing a range of Becker Values from 35 to 55 with
it and with one of the photometers referred to in 7.4, of the test method
without disturbing the surface measured. Plot the results as shown in Figure
3810A and fit a straight line to the data using the method of least squares.
In the Becker Value range from 35 to 55, the discrepancy between this “least
squares line” and a unit slope line through the zero intercept should not exceed
0.5 Becker Value.
Suggestions for the operation of photoelectric reflectometers follow. Locate

the instrument on a bench or table free from vibration. Turn on the current
at least 1/2 hour before measurement to allow the instrument to warm up, with
the resulting steadier readings and less frequent calibration. If the current
is not steady the reflectometer should be operated with a special voltage reg-
ulator or from a storage battery. Check the zero setting before each use and
reset if necessary. Cover the sample aperture completely so that no outside
light can reach the photocell. Calibrate with the reflectance standard before
and after measurements. Frequent rechecking of calibration is essential.
Clean the optical system from time to time to remove dust and dirt and clean
the filter before each use. If the component parts of the filter separate
they should be recemented. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer of
the reflectometer.

METHOD 3810
APPENDIX II
CUVETTE OR SPECIMEN HOLDER
A suitable cuvette for use with the Gardner Photometric Unit is shown in
Figure 3810B. The surface measured is that of the fiber against the window
in the bottom of the cell shown in cross-section in the upper part of “a”.
The fiber is held against the window by the back of the cell shown in “b”.
A cell for use with the Photovolt Reflection Meter may be made from a one-inch
(25 mm) length of 35 mm (outside diameter) Pyrex glass tubing, 2 mm wall
thickness. The window is made from ophthalmic crown glass, Code #8361 (Corning)
or equivalent, 1.6 mm plus or minus 0.1 mm thick cemented to one end of the
Pyrex tube. Clean cuvettes periodically with a detergent and water followed
by rinsing with alcohol and ether and drying in a stream of air. After each
use, blow out with air to remove all fibers and dust. Do not wipe with cloth
or soft paper as this will generate static electrical charges, and result in
non-random distribution of cut fibers, and cause incorrect reflectance values.

METHOD 3810
FIGURE 3810A Photoelectric Becker values plotted

against visual values.
Broken line represents the least-square line.
a. Body of cell. FIGURE 3810B - Cuvette used with Gardner photometric unit.
b. Back of cell.
*The back is held in place by the tension of rubber bands which are looped over the protruding studs in “a” and
contact back on the rectangular raised portion.

METHOD 4010
July 20, 1978
LENGTH-WEIGHT RELATION; THREAD; YARDS PER POUND (m/kg)
10 SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the length per pound (length
per kg) of sewing thread taken from such packages as spools or cones.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a skein of thread. Unless otherwise specified

in the procurement document, each skein of heavy thread shall contain not
less than 30 yards (28 m); each skein of machine or basting thread shall
contain not less than 120 yards (110 m).
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,. five specimens

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Reel. Reel, accurate to 0.1 percent, equipped with means for recording
length, applying tension, and spreading the thread evenly on the reel.
4.2 Analytical balance. Analytical balance or a grain-yam scale, accurate

to —+ 0.25 percent.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document.. the specimens

tested shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Conditions in accordance
with Section 4 of this Standard.
5.2 Preparation of skeins.

5.2.1 Threads wound on spools, cones or similar put-up. For threads wound
on spools, cones, or similar put-up, the thread shall be drawn from the top of
the package at a speed of 100 to 300 revolutions per minute of the reel. The
thread shall be passed through the guides in such a way that the tension in the
running yarn is sufficient to straighten it, but not high enough to cause serious
stretching. If the reel has only one pigtail guide per skein, tension shall be
applied by taking one full wrap around the guide. If the reel has two or more
guides, the thread shall pass straight through the guides onto the reel, the
angle of the guides supplying necessary tension.

METHOD 4010
5.2.2 Thread wound on parallel tubes, large flanged spools, large tubes or
similar put-up. For threads on parallel tubes and large flanged spools, large
tubes, certain warp wound bobbins or similar put-up, the thread shall be
drawn from the side at a speed of 20 to 30 revolutions per minute of the
reel. Judgement must be used in applying tension on threads having a small
or large amount of twist.
5.3 The finishing end of the skein shall be tied to the starting end of the
skein in such a reamer that the knot will not add additional length to the reel
skein.
5.4 Weight of skein. The prepared skein shall be weighed, using an analytical
balance or a grain-yarn scale, and the weight recorded.
5.5 Calculations. The yards per pound (m/kg) shall be calculated as follows:
Yards per pound = 7000 x number of yards in specimen
Weight of specimen in grains
OR
Yards per pound = 453.6 x number of yards in specimen

Weight of specimen in g
OR
m/kg
Meters per kilogram = Number of m in specimen
Weight of specimen in kg
OR
m/kg = (yds/lb) x 2.02
6. REPORT
6.1 The yards per-pound (m/kg) of a sample unit shall be the average of
the specimens tested from the sample unit and shall be reported to the nearest
yard (m).
6.2 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.

METHOD 4021
July 20, 1978
YARN NUMBER (LINEAR DENSITY) OF YARN FROM PACKAGE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the yarn number (linear
density) of yarn taken from such packages as cones, cops, bobbins,
tubes, and similar put-up. It is applicable to single and plied yarns.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be a skein of yarn. The specimen size shall
be as follows:
2.1.1 Indirect system of units (length-weight ratio).
2.1.1.1 Skein length for single yarns. Skein length for all singles yarns
shall be 120 yards, (110 m).
2.1.1.2 Skein length for plied yarns. Skein length for plied yarns shall
be as follows:
Plied Yarn Equivalent Singles Numbers
Cotton and Linen and Length to

Spun Rayon wool cut Worsted Wool Run Reel for Teat
Yards Meters
20 and above 56 and above 30 and above 11 and above 60 55
3 to 20 8.4 to 56 4.5 to 30 1.6 to 11 24 22
Below 3 Below 8.4 Below 4.5 Below 1.6 12 11
Direct System of Units (Weight per Unit Length)

Filament Length to
yarns Reel for Test
Yards Meters
Below 1.30 denier (14 tex) 300 275
130 to 650 denier (14 to 72 tex) 120 110

650 denier (72 tex) and above 15 14

METHOD 4021

4. APPARATUS AND METHOD CITED
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Yarn reel. Yarn reel accurate to ± 0.1 percent, equipped with means
to record length, applying tension, and spreading the yarn evenly on the reel.
4.1.2 Analytical balance. Analytical balance or grain-yam scale, accurate

to ± 0.25 percent.
4.2 Method cited.
4.2.1 Method 4054, Twist and Twist Contraction; Ply Yarns.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the specimens for
testing shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Conditions in accordance
5.2 Preparation of skeins.
5.2.1 Yarn wound on cones, bobbins, cops or small flange spools or tubes. For
yarn wound on cones, filling wound bobbins and cops, and small flange spools or
tubes, the yarn shall be drawn from the top of the package at a speed of 100 to
300 revolutions per minute of the reel. The yarn shall be passed through the
guides in such a way that the tension in the running yarn is sufficient to
straighten it, but not high enough to cause serious stretching. If the reel has
only one pigtail guide per skein, tension shall be applied by taking one full
wrap around the guide. If the reel has two or more guides, the yarn shall pass
straight through the guides onto the reel, the angle of the guides supplying the
necessary tension.
5.2.2 Yarn wound on large flanged spools, large tubes or warp wound bobbins.
For packages such as large flanged spools, large tubes, certain warp wound
bobbins or similar put-up, the yarn shall be drawn from the side at a speed
of 20 to 30 revolutions per minute of the reel. If the reel has two or more
guides, the yarn shall pass straight through the guides onto the reel. Judge-
ment must be used in applying tension on yarns having a small or large amount
of twist.

METHOD 4021
5.3 The finishing end of the skein shall be tied to the starting end of
the skein in such a manner that the knot will not add additional length to
the reeled skein.
5.4 Weight of skein. The prepared skein shall be weighed using an analytical
balance or grain-yam scale, and the weight recorded.
5.5 Calculations. The yarn number, using the weight and length of the
skein, shall be calculated using the following formulas:
Indirect system:
Yarn Number N =
Yarn Number N1 =
Direct system - Denier:
Denier N =
Denier N1 =
Yarn number in tex units = 310.034

woolen run number
= 590.541
cotton hank number
= 885.812
worsted hank number
= 1653.5
linen lea number
= 1653.5
wool cut number
= denier (synthetics)
9

METHOD 4021
Where:
N = equivalent single yarn number of plied yarn or number of single

yarn.
N1 = true single yarn number, i.e., single yarn number prior to plying.
L = length of single or ply yarn in yards.
L1 = length of single or ply yarn in meters.
W = weight of skein in grams.
W1 = weight of skein in grains.
453.6 grams in one pound.

7000 grains in one pound.
P = number of plies in yarn.
C = Twist contraction in plying, percent (see Method 4054).
Y = yards of No. 1 yarn in one pound. The value of Y for indirect
system is:
840 for cotton system (cotton, spun rayon)

300 for linen and wool, “cut” system
560 for worsted
1600 for wool, “run” system
Constant for direct system:
9000 for denier, grams per 9000 meters

9840 for denier, grams per 9840 yards
5.5.1 Yarn number. The yarn number of a specimen shall be based on its
equivalent single yarn number. If the finished yarn is made up of plied components,
the yarn number is expressed as a multiple of the single yarn number for
the component yarns.
Examples:
Cotton, spun rayon and blends - A single yarn with an equivalent yarn
number of 60 would be expressed as 60/1. A plied yarn composed of 3
single yarns of number 60 and whose equivalent single yarn number may be
for example, 19 or 20 shall be expressed as 60/3.
Wool cut or run, worsted and linen - A single yarn with an equivalent
yarn number of 60 would be expressed as 1/60. A plied yarn composed
of 3 single yarns of number 60 and whose equivalent single yarn number
may be, for example, 19 or 20 shall be expressed as 3/60.
Filament yarn - A plied yarn of 4 single yarns of 210 denier, 34
filament shall be expressed as 210/34/4 ply.

METHOD 4021
6. REPORT
6.1 The yarn number of the sample unit shall be the average of the specimens
tested.
6.1.1 The yarn number in the indirect system shall be reported to the
nearest 0.1 number for yarn numbers 0 to 12 inclusive, and to the nearest
whole number for yarn numbers above 12.
6.1.2 Yarn numbers in the direct system shall be reported to the nearest
whole number.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Caution should be used when making plied yarn determinations because
the amount of contraction due to twist will have an effect on the yarn
number.

METHOD 4050
July 20, 1978
DIRECTION OF TWIST: YARN, THREAD, CORDAGE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the direction of twist of
yarn, thread, and cordage.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the specimen shall
be any convenient length.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, three specimens

4. APPARATUS
4.1 No special apparatus is required for this method, but a magnifying

glass and pick needle may be necessary for testing extremely fine yarns.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The specimen shall be held in a vertical position and the direction
of the slope of the twist spirals observed.
6. REPORT
6.1 Direction of twist of specimen. The direction of the twist of

each specimen shall be expressed as “S” twist if the spirals conform in
direction of slope to the central portion of the letter “S”; and “Z”
twist if the spirals conform in direction of slope to the central portion
of the letter “Z” (see Figure 4050).

METHOD 4050
FIGURE 4050

METHOD 4052
July 20, 1978
TWIST IN SINGLE YARNS

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the turns per inch (turns/cm) of
single yarns by use of the untwist/twist method on a twist tester. This method is
suitable for use on spun staple yarns where it is found difficult to deter-
mine zero twist by use of a needle as can be done in the case of wool or
filament fibers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be at least a 12 inch (305 mm) length of the
yarn taken as follows:
2.1.1 From package. Yarn from a tube, bobbin, spool, skein, cone, or
ball shall be drawn from the side of the package and in such a manner that
the twist will not be altered.
2.1.2 From cloth. Yarn shall be raveled from woven or knitted cloth,
care being taken to avoid alteration in twist of the yarn. Where it is
possible, at least three bobbin areas shall be included in the specimens
prepared from the filling direction of the woven cloth.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, 20 specimens shall

be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Twist counter. A twist counter consisting essentially of two clamps

along the same horizontal axis. One clamp non-rotating but movable that can be
held in position by tightening the thumb screw, the other clamp is fixed in
position but capable of being rotated in either direction and provided with a
dial or counter for recording the number of turns. The twist counter shall also
be provided with the following:
4.1.1 Means for adjusting the distance between the clamps within a range
of 0 to 10 inches (0 to 254 mm).
4.1.2 Means for mounting the specimen in the clamps under a known tension
applicable through the non-rotating clamp.

METHOD 4052
4.1.3 When applicable, means for determining the extension produced by

removal of twist to an accuracy of at least 0.1 inch (2.5 mm).
4.1.4 Means of applying a load of 1 g at the center of the specimen and means
of measuring the deflection of the yarn at that point.
5. PROCEDURE

shall be conditioned and tested under standard conditions in accordance with
section 4 of this standard.
5.2 Standard procedure.
5.2.1 The counter of the tester shall be set at the zero mark. One end of
the specimen shall be secured in the free non-rotating clamp, having a tension
device and the other end placed at a distance of approximately 10 inches
(254 mm) in the open rotatable fixed clamp. Tension shall be applied to the
specimen by pulling it under the applicable load specified below until the
distance between the clamps is adjusted to 10 inches (254 mm). The rotatable
clamp shall then be tightened securely and the position of the movable clamp fixed
by tightening the thumb screw.
5.2.2 Tension for mounting specimen. Unless otherwise specified in the
procurement document, the specimen shall be mounted under the following tension
in grams:
Cotton and spun yarn tension, g = 156

Yarn No., cotton system
Wool and worsted yarn tension, g = weight of 100 yards (91.4 m)

of yarn being tested.
Filament yarn tension:
10 g for 75 denier (8.4 tex) of finer;

20 g for 75 denier (8.4 tex) to 150 denier (17 tex);
30 g for coarser than 150 denier (17 tex).
5.2.3 A one g load shall then be applied at the center of the specimen
and its height at this point measured or otherwise indicated. The one g
load shall be removed. Then the rotatable clamp shall be revolved in the
direction which untwists the specimen, continuing the rotation in the same
direction beyond the neutral point, thereby imparting a twist to the specimen
which is opposite to the original direction.

METHOD 4052
5.2.4 When sufficient turns have been inserted to prevent slippage of the
fiber, the one g load shall be reapplied at the center of the specimen and
the twisting continued until the initial height or position of the one g load
is obtained. When this point is reached, it is assumed that the same amount
of twist has been reinserted as was initially in the specimen. The number of
turns shown on the dial shall be recorded.
5.3 Alternate procedure.
5.3.1 The distance between the clamps shall be set at 10 inches (254 mm)
and the counter of the tester set at the zero mark. The specimen shall be
secured in the rotatable clamp and placed in the open fixed clamp while a
tensioning load of one g is applied at the center of the specimen. The
free end shall then be pulled through the open clamp in such manner that a
deflection of 0.125 inch (3 mm) is obtained at the point of application.
The fixed clamp shall be tightened securely and the tensioning load removed.
5.3.2 The rotatable clamp shall be revolved in the direction which untwists
the specimen, continuing the rotation in the same direction beyond the
neutral point, thereby imparting a twist to the specimen opposite to the
original direction.
5.3.3 When sufficient turns have been inserted to prevent slippage of the
fibers, the tensioning load shall be reapplied and twisting continued until
the deflection of 0.125 inch (3 mm) is obtained again. When this point
is reached, it is assumed that the same amount of twist is reinserted as
was initially in the specimen. The number of twists on the dial shall be
recorded.
6. REPORT
6.1 Twist of specimen. The total number of revolutions divided by 20

shall be the twist in turns per inch of the specimen. The turns per inch
multiplied by 0.394 shall be the twist in turns per centimeter.
6.2 Twist per inch (/cm) of sample unit. The twist per inch (/cm) of the
sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens
tested and shall be reported in turns per inch (/cm) to the nearest whole number.
6.3 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also be reported.

METHOD 4054
July 20, 1978
TWIST AND TWIST CONTRACTION; PLY YARNS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the number of turns of twist
per inch (/cm) of ply yarns and the twist contraction by untwisting on a twist
tester.
2. TEST SPECIMENS
2.1 The specimen shall be at least a 12 inch (305 mm) length of yarn
taken as follows:
2.1.1 From package. Yarn from a cop, bobbin, cone, tube, or similar put-up
shall be drawn from the side of the package and in such a manner that the
twist will not be altered.
2.1.2 From cloth. Yarn shall be ravened from woven or knitted cloth, care
being taken to avoid alteration in twist of the yarn. Where it is possible,
at least three bobbin areas shall be included in the specimens prepared
from the filling direction of the woven cloth.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, 10 specimens

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Twist counter. Twist counter consisting essentially of two clamps along
the same horizontal axis. One clamp non-rotating but movable that can be held in
position by tightening the thumb screw, the other clamp is fixed in position but
capable of being rotated In either direction and provided with a dial or
counter for recording the number of turns. The twist counter shall also
be provided with the following:
4.1.1 Means for adjusting the distance between the clamps within a
range of 0 to 10 inches (0 to 254 mm).
4.1.2 Means for mounting the specimen in the clamps under a known tension
applicable through the non-rotating clamp.
4.1.3 When applicable, means for determining the extension produced by

removal of twist to an accuracy of at least 0.1 inch (2.5 mm).

METHOD 4054
4.1.4 Needle.
5. PROCEDURE

tested shall be conditioned and tested under standard conditions in accordance
5.2 Twist. The counter of the tester shall be set at the zero mark. One
end of the specimen shall be secured in the free non-rotating clamp having
the tension device. The other end shall be drawn through the open rotatable
fixed clamp to a distance of 10 inches (254 mm) between the clamps and secured
while the specimen is under the applicable required load (5.2.1). The movable
clamp shall be allowed to remain free. The ply twist shall then be removed by
revolving the clamp until the component strands are parallel and can be
separated along the entire length by means of a needle. The total number of
revolutions shall be recorded. It is the number of turns of ply twist in the
10-inch (254 mm) long specimen.
5.2.1 Tension for mounting specimen. Unless otherwise specified in the

procurement document, the specimen shall be mounted under the following
tension in g:
Cotton and spun yarn tension, g = 156

Yarn No., Cotton system
Wool and worsted yarn, tension, g = weight of 100 yards (91.4 m) of
yarn being tested
Filament yarn tension: 10 g for 75 denier (8.4 tex) or finer
20 g for 75 denier (8.4 tex) to 150 denier (17 tex)
30 g for coarser than 150 denier (17 tex)
5.3 Twist contraction. The untwisted plies, 5.2, shall be maintained under
the tension in the twist tester and their extented length shall be measured.
The increase in length of the specimen due to the removal of twist is the twist
contraction of the yarn. It may be read in inches (cm) or percent on a
calibrated extension of the sliding jaw of the twist tester.
5.4 Calculations.
5.4.1 The twist per inch (/cm) of the specimen shall be the number of turns
divided by 10. The turns per inch multiplied by 0.394 shall be the twist in
turns per centimeter.
5.4.2 Twist contraction, percent = extended length of untwisted specimen-10 x 100

extended length of untwisted specimen

METHOD 4054
6. REPORT
6.1 The twist of the yarn from the sample unit shall be the average of
nearest 0.5 turn per inch (0.1 turn/cm).
6.2 The contraction of the yarn from a sample unit shall be the average
reported.

METHOD 4100
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH AND ELONGATION, BREAKING; AND TENACITY;
OF THREAD AND YARN; SINGLE STRAND

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the breaking strength, elon-
gation, and tenacity of sewing thread and yarns. Single or ply threads
and yarns may be tested by this method.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be of sufficient length to mount in the jaws
of the apparatus. This distance between the pair of jaws of the apparatus
(gage length) shall be 10 inches (254 mm) at the beginning of the test.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 The machine shall consist of three main parts:
(a) straining mechanism;

(b) clamps for holding specimen;
(c) load and elongation recording mechanism.
4.1.1 Straining mechanism. A machine wherein the specimen is held between

two clamps and strained by a uniform movement of the pulling clamp shall be
used. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the machine shall
be adjusted so that the pulling clamp shall have a uniform speed of 12 ± 0.5
inches (305 ± 13 mm) per minute.
4.1.2 Clamps for holding specimen.

4.1.2.1 Natural fiber specimen. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, the machine shall have two clamps with two flat-grip type jaws on
each clamp. The design of the two clamps shall be such that one gripping surface
or jaw may be an integral part of the rigid frame of the clamp or be fastened
to allow a slight vertical movement, while the other gripping surface or jaw
shall be completely movable. Unless otherwise specified, the dimensions of the

METHOD 4100
immovable rear jaw of each clamp shall measure one inch parallel to the applica-
tion of the load, and the dimension of the jaw perpendicular to this direction
shall measure one inch (25 mm) or more. The face of the movable front jaw of
each clamp shall measure one inch by one inch (25 by 25 mm). Each jaw face shall
have a flat smooth gripping surface. All edges which might cause cutting action shall
be rounded to a radius of not over 1/64 inch (0.4 mm). In cases where the
specimen tends to slip when being tested, the jaws may be faced with rubber or
other material to prevent slippage. Unless otherwise specified, the distance
between the jaws (gage length) shall be 10 inches (254 mm) at the start of the test.
4.1.2.2 Synthetic fiber specimen. Thread clamps embodying the flat anvil and
drum principle with side closing cam, known as Callaway or U. S. Rubber Clamps,
shall be used. The gage length shall be 10 inches, (254 mm) measured from the
bite between the drum and flat jaw of the upper clamp around the periphery of
each drum, and to the bite between the drum and flat jaw in the bottom clamp.
4.1.3 Load and elongation mechanism(s). Calibrated dial, scale or chart to in-
dicate applied load and elongation. Unless otherwise specified for load determin-
ation, the machine shall be adjusted or set so that the maximum load required to
break the specimen will remain indicated on the calibrated dial, scale or chart
of the autographic recording mechanism.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, testing shall

be performed on conditioned specimens and under standard conditions in accordance
with Section 4 of this Standard. When wet breaking strength is required, it
shall be specified in the applicable procurement document and the method of
wetting the specimen shall also be specified.
5.2.1 Specimens taken from cop, bobbin, cone, tube, or similar put-up shall be
drawn from the side of the package and in such a reamer that the twist will not
be altered.
5.2.2 If the sample has been previously wound In skein form, the skein shall
be mounted on an umbrella reel from which a single end may be drawn.
5.2.3 When the yarn is taken from a woven or knitted cloth, the yarns
shall be raveled from cut strips in such a manner that the yarn is not
stretched and the twist is not altered.
5.3 Preliminary adjustments.
5.3.1 Prior to testing the operator shall verify that the apparatus has
been calibrated in accordance with the procedure required for the make and
model being used.

METHOD 4100
5.3.2 If an autographic mechanism is to be used, it shall be determined

by a trial run of the apparatus that it is operating properly. Be sure
that the recording pen has an ample supply of ink to avoid depletion of the
supply during test.
5.3.3 Check distance between jaws (gage length) and speed of machine to
insure they are as required.
5.3.4 Check alignment of jaws in each clamp and also the alignment of
clamps with respect to each other.
5.4 Testing.
5.4.1 Initial load. When it is required to determine the elongation of

a specimen, an initial load shall be applied to the specimen prior to tighten-
ing-the second clamp. Unless otherwise specified, in the procurement document,
the initial load in g shall be 0.25 g per tex unit (see 7.1).
5.4.2 Breaking strength. The specimen shall be placed in the jaws of the
clamps, exercising care to insure that the twist of the specimen is not altered.
Force is applied to break the specimen and this force read from the chart,
dial or scale shall be recorded.
5.4.3 Elongation. The elongation of the specimen at any given load shall
be determined when the breaking strength is measured for the same specimen.
The Initial length and, therefore, the measured elongation depend upon
the load applied when placing the specimen in the clamps. Place one end of
the specimen in a clamp and tighten sufficiently to prevent slipping. Apply
the required initial load (see 5.4.1) to the other end of the specimen in such a
manner that it does not interfere with tightening of the second clamp
sufficiently to prevent slipping. The elongation shall be determined from
the scale or chart of the autographic recording mechanism.
5.5 Tenacity. The tenacity of the specimen shall be calculated using

the breaking strength and equivalent denier size.
5.6 If a specimen slips between the jaws, breaks in a clamp, or if for
any reason attributable to faulty technique, an individual measurement
falls markedly below the average test result for the sample unit, such
Individual measurement shall be disregarded and another specimen shall be
tested.
5.7 Calculation. The tenacity of a specimen tested shall be calculated

as follows:

METHOD 4100
Where: T = Tenacity in g/denier
S = Strength in g
D = Yarn size in denier
or:
Where: T = Tenacity in g/denier
S = Strength in pounds
D = Yarn size in denier
or:
Where: Tm = Tenacity in mN/tex
T = Tenacity in g/den
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the breaking

strength of a sample unit shall be the average of the specimens tested. In-
dividual values used to calculate the average shall also be reported. All
values shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 pound (to the nearest 0.1N).
6.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the elongation
shall be determined and reported at the point of rupture of the specimen.
It shall be reported as the percent elongation of the specimen tested and
shall be calculated from the curve drawn on the autographic recording mecha-
nism. The elongation of a sample unit shall be the average of specimens
6.3 Tenacity. The tenacity of a sample unit shall be the average of the
specimens tested.

METHOD 4100
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The Tex system for measuring the linear density of yarns is a direct
system based on mass per unit length and employs metric units of length and
weight. The Tex unit, g/kilometer (1000 meters) may be calculated from other
numbering systems as follows:
Yarn number in tex units

= 310.034
wool run number
= 590.541
cotton hank number
= 885.812
worsted hank number
= 1653.52
linen lea number
= 1653.52
wool cut number
= denier
9.0
Example: Cotton hank number = 60’s
Yarn number in tex units = 590.541 = 9.842 (size)

60

METHOD 4104
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH, BREAKING OF THREAD AND YARN; SKEIN METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the breaking strength of single
or plied thread and yarns in skein form.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a skein containing 120 yards (110 m).

4. APPARATUS
(a) straining mechanism;

(b) spools for holding specimen (skein);
(c) load and elongation recording mechanism(s).
4.1.1 Straining mechanism. A machine wherein the specimen is held by two

spools and strained by a uniform movement of the pulling clamp shall be used.
Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the machine shall
be adjusted so that pulling clamp shall have a uniform speed of 12 ± 0.5 inches
(305 + 13mm) per minute.
4.1.2 Spools for holding the specimen. The spools for holding the specimen
shall be cylindrical, with a diameter not less than one inch (25 mm), a length
of not less than one-inch (25 mm) and shall be so supported that at least one
spool can turn freely on its axis. The distance between the spools at the start
of the test shall be just sufficient to allow the skein to be placed on the spools
in a wide flat band.
4.1.3 Load recording mechanism. Calibrated dial, scale or chart to in-

dicate applied load and elongation. Unless otherwise specified for load
determination, the machine shall be adjusted or set so that the maximum
load required to break the specimen will remain indicated on the calibrated
dial, scale or chart of the autographic recording mechanism.

METHOD 4104
4.2 Yarn reel. A reel having a perimeter of 1.5 yards (1.37 m), accurate
to ± 0.1 percent equipped with means to record length, apply tension and spread
yarn evenly on the reel.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, this test shall
be performed on thread and yarn conditioned in accordance with Section 4 of this
Standard. Conditioning can be performed either before or after reeling, but it
will be accomplished quicker if the specimens are conditioned in skein form.
5.2.1 Thread and yarn wound on cones, bobbins, cops, small flanged spools or
tubes. For thread and yarn wound on cones, bobbins, cops, small flanged spools
or tubes, the specimen shall be drawn from the top of the package at a speed of
100 to 300 revolutions per minute of the reel. The thread or yarn shall be passed
through the guides in such a way that the tension in the running thread or yarn
is sufficient to straighten it, but not high enough to cause serious stretching
If the reel has only one pigtail guide per skein, tension shall be applied by
taking one full wrap around the guide. If the reel has two or more guides, the
thread or yarn shall pass straight through the guides onto the reel, the angle
of the guides supplying the necessary tension.
5.2.2 Thread and yarn wound on large flanged spools, large tubes, bobbins or
similar put-up. For packages such as large flanged spools, large tubes, certain
warp-wound bobbins or similar put-up, the yarn shall be drawn from the side
at a speed of 20 to 30 revolutions per minute of the reel. If the reel has
two or more guides, the yarn shall pass straight through to the reel.
Judgement must be used in applying tension on yarns having a small or large
amount of twist.
5.2.3 If the sample has been previously wound in skein form, the skein
shall be mounted on an umbrella reel from which a single end may be drawn,
and passed through the guides onto the reel used to prepare the specimen
for test, the angle of the guides supplying the necessary tension.
5.2.4 The finishing end of the skein shall be tied to the starting end
of the skein using a square knot and in such a manner that will not add
length to the skein.
5.3 Preliminary adjustments.
5.3.1 Prior to testing the operator shall verify that the apparatus has
been calibrated in accordance with the procedure required for the make and
model being used.

METHOD 4104
5.3.2 If an autographic mechanism is used, it shall be determined by a

trial run of the apparatus that it is operating properly. Be sure that the
pen has an ample supply of ink to avoid depletion of the supply during test.
5.3.3 Check the speed of the machine to insure that it is as required and
check alignment of spools with respect to each other.
5.4 Testing.
5.4.1 Transfer the skein from the reel to the test apparatus (spools of
machine) handling carefully. Keep the thread or yarn of the specimen parallel
and the skein flat with no bunching or twisting. Do not stretch or jerk the
thread or yarn and do not allow to kink.
5.4.2 When mounting a specimen that has a tendency to curl, the specimen
may be held taut and in place by hand until the machine is started and the
pulling spool removes the slack from the skein.
5.4.3 Force is applied to break the specimen and this force read from the
chart, dial or scale shall be recorded.
6. REPORT
6.1 The breaking strength of the sample unit shall be the average of the
specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.5 pound (to the nearest
1N).
reported.

METHOD 4108
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH AND ELONGATION, BREAKING; TEXTILE
WEBBING, TAPE AND BRAIDED ITEMS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the breaking strength and
elongation of textile webbing, tape and braided items.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a single length of 54 inches (1372 mm) and the full
width of the material as received.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, five specimens

4. APPARATUS
(a) Straining mechanism

(b) Clamps
(c) Load and elongation recording mechanism(s)
4.1.1 Straining mechanism. A machine wherein the specimen is held by two

clamps and subjected to strain by a uniform movement of the pulling clamp.
4.1.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the machine

shall be adjusted so that the pulling clamp shall have a uniform speed of 3.0 ±
1.0 inches (76 ± 25 mm) per minute.
4.1.2 Clamps.
4.1.2.1 Split drum. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

the machine shall have two clamps, split drum type as shown in Figure 4108 and
the distance between the clamps (gage length) shall be 10 ± 1/2 inches (254 mm ±
13 mm) center to center.

METHOD 4108
4.1.2.2 Flat surface clamps. When clamps are specified other than split
drum type the machine shall have two clamps with two jaws on each clamp.
Each jaw face shall have a flat, smooth gripping surface. The design shall
be such that one gripping surface or jaw may be an integral part of the
rigid frame of the clamp or be fastened to allow a slight vertical movement
while the other gripping surface or jaw shall be completely movable. Unless
otherwise specified the dimension of the jaws parallel to the application of
the load shall measure one inch (25 mm) and the dimension of the jaws perpendicular
to this direction shall be greater than the width of the specimen being tested.
All edges which might cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a radius not
greater than 1/64 inch (0.4 mm). The test specimen shall be a minimum of 6
inches (152 mm). The pulling clamp shall have a uniform speed 12 ± 0.5 inches
(305 ± 13 mm) per minute. Unless otherwise specified, the distance between the
jaws (gage length) shall be 3 inches (76 mm) at the start of the test.
4.1.3 Load recording mechanism(s). Calibrated chart, dial or scale to

indicate applied load. Unless otherwise specified for load determination,
the machine shall be adjusted or set so that the maximum load required to
break the specimen shall remain indicated on the calibrated chart, dial
or scale after the specimen has ruptured.
4.104 Capacity. The machine shall be of such capacity that the maximum
load required to break the specimen shall be not greater than 85 percent or
less than 15 percent of the rated capacity.
4.1.5 Machine efficiency. The error of the machine shall not exceed 2
percent for loads up to and including 50 pounds (223 N) and shall not exceed
1 percent for loads greater than 50 pounds (223 N).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Reparation of specimen.
5.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the specimens

5.1.2 When it is required that the elongation of the specimen shall be deter-
mined, two fine ink marks shall be placed on the specimens spaced five inches
(127 mm) apart. The marks shall be placed in such a manner that neither mark
is closer than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) to each clamp when the specimen is mounted
in the clamps.
5.2 The specimen shall be placed in the clamps of the machine with the
long dimension parallel to the application of the load. When measurement
of elongation is required a slight tension or a specific load required by
the applicable procurement document shall be applied to the specimen as it is
placed in the clamps and the two, fine ink marks shall not be closer than
1-1/2 inches (38 mm) to either clamp.

METHOD 4108
5.3 Breaking strength. Force shall be applied to the specimen at such a

rate that the clamp through which the force is applied will move at a rate of
3.0 ± 1.0 inches (76 ± 25 mm) per minute until the specimen is ruptured. After
rupture of the specimen, the breaking load shall be read from the dial, scale
or chart and the value recorded.
5.4 Elongation. Elongation shall be determined on the same specimen being

tested for breaking strength. The equipment will be stopped and the distance
between the two fine ink marks measured with calipers at the load level
specified in the applicable procurement document and recorded.
5.5 If a specimen slips between the clamps, breaks in or at the edges of

the clamps, or if for any reason attributable to faulty technique, an individual
measurement falls markedly below the average test result for the sample unit,
such result shall be discarded and another specimen shall be tested.
6. REPORT
6.1 The breaking strength of the sample unit shall be the average of
the results obtained from the five specimens tested and shall be reported
separately as follows:
Breaking strength Reported to nearest
0-500 lbs (0-2220 N) 1 lb (1 N)

501 and up (2221 N and up) 5 lbs (10 N)
6.2 The elongation of the sample unit shall be the average of the specimens
tested and shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent. The report shall
state that elongation was measured at break or at the load specified.
reported.

METHOD 4108

METHOD 4110
July 20, 1978
CRIMP IN YARNS FROM CLOTH; DEAD-LOAD METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the crimp in yarns after
they have been removed from cloth. This method is considered adequate
for normal inspection work, requiring less time to perform than Method
4112.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a yarn removed from a 14-inch (356 mm) length of
cloth.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, 10 specimens in

each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Twist tester. Twist tester equipped with a yarn-loading or similar

device, which can apply a load within an approximate range of 0 to 300 g.
4.2 Ruler. Fifteen inch (381 mm) (minimum) ruler graduated in 1/16 inch
(1 mm) divisions.
4.3 Marking device. Pen or other suitable device for marking the cloth.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified In the procurement document, the specimens

tested shall be conditioned. and tested under standard conditions in accordance
5.2.1 A length of 14 Inches (356 mm) shall be cut from the cloth parallel
to the yarn to be tested. Tearing of the cloth to obtain a straight edge shall
not be permitted. Several yarns shall be raveled from the cloth along the cut
edge to remove any severed or damaged yarns. Two parallel lines 10 inches (254 mm)
apart (original length) shall be marked on the cloth. A yarn passing through
these marks shall be raveled for a distance of about 2 inches (51 mm) beyond each
mark, care being taken to avoid untwisting or stretching the yarn. At least three
bobbin areas shall be included in the specimens prepared from the filling
direction of the cloth. Generally specimens taken from the ends and center of a
yard of cloth will include three bobbin areas.
METHOD 4110
5.2.2 The specimen shall be mounted in the twist tester with the jaws set
10 inches (254 mm) apart. The marked points shall be placed at the edges
of the two jaws. A load shall be applied to the yarn just sufficient to
remove the crimp when the yarn is examined visually or with the aid of a
lens. The tension shall be applied slowly to avoid an impact loading. The
total distance between the marks (jaws) shall be measured.
5.3 An indication of the necessary load in g may be obtained by dividing a

constant (K) by the single equivalent yarn number. In the cotton system
K = 156. In the Tex system, 0.25 g per tex unit load shall be applied to the
specimen being tested.
Crimp, percent = L - LO x 100

LO
Where:
L = Distance in inches (mm) between the marks on the straightened

yarn
Lo = Original length in inches (mm) between the marks
6. REPORT
6.1 The crimp of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling directions respectively
and shall be reported separately to the nearest 0.1 percent.
reported.

METHOD 4112
July 20, 1978
CRIMP IN YARNS FROM CLOTH; LOAD-ELONGATION METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the crimp in yarns that have
been removed from cloth. It is considered preferable for use where a higher
degree of accuracy is desired than that obtained by using Method 4110, but
is more time consuming.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a yarn removed from a 14-inch (356 mm) length
of cloth.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, 10 specimens in

each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Thread strength tester. Single-thread strength tester equipped with

flat-type jaws, suitable for determining the breaking strength of the yarns.
Drum clamps or similar type clamps shall not be used.
4.1.2 Recording device and charts. Suitable autographic recording device

and charts.
5. PROCEDURE

5.2.1 A length of 14 inches (356 mm) shall be cut from the cloth parallel to
the yarn to be tested. Tearing of the cloth to obtain a straight edge shall
not be permitted. Several yarns shall be raveled from the cloth along the cut
edge to remove any severed or damaged yarns. Two parallel lines 10 inches (254
mm) apart (original length) shall be marked on the cloth. A yarn passing
through these marks shall be raveled for a distance of about 2 inches (51 mm)
beyond each mark, care being taken to avoid untwisting or stretching the yarn.

METHOD 4112
At least three bobbin areas shall be included in the specimens prepared from
the filling direction of the cloth. Generally, specimens taken from the ends
and center of a yard of cloth will include three bobbin areas.
5.2.2 The specimen shall be placed in the clamps of the machine which are
10 inches (254 mm) apart at the start of the test. The marked spots on the
specimen shall coincide with nips at the clamps, care being taken to avoid untwist-
ing of the yarn. Sufficient tension shall be applied to the specimen to stretch
or, if desired, break the specimen.
5.3 When an inclined plane type machine is used, impact loading caused
by sudden movement of the carriage shall be minimized by removing the slack
from the specimen prior to application of the load. This may be accomplished
by manually controlling the descent of the carriage as the angle of the inclined
plane increases until the instant the slack is removed from the specimen.
5.4 A load-elongation diagram shall be obtained on the autographic recording

device for the specimen, and the extension due to crimp measured from the
diagram as follows:
5.4.1 In the load-elongation diagram of a cotton yarn, Figure 4112, the

region of the curve (AD) represents the removal of the crimp and the initial
stretch of the yarn; and the straight region (DE) represents the elastic
(stretch) region of the specimen. A line (DC) shall be drawn through the
lower portion representing the elastic portion of the curve intersecting the
line AX at C. The distance AC is the crimp in the specimen.
5.4.2 If required, the tension necessary to straighten the yarn to its

length before weaving shall be determined as follows:
A line perpendicular to AX shall be passed through point C to inter-

sect AD at B. The distance CB (AL) shall represent the required tension.
(Figure 4112).

5.5.1 The crimp shall be calculated as follows:
Crimp Percent = distance AC, inches x 100
10
OR
Crimp Percent = distance AC, mm x1000

254 mm

METHOD 4112
6. REPORT
6.1 The crimp of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained
reported.

METHOD 4112

METHOD 4308
July 20, 1978
ABRASION RESISTANCE OF YARN, THREAD, AND LIGHT CORDAGE
UNIFORM-ABRASION (SCHIEFER) METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to abrasion

of dry and wet yarns, threads, and light cordage. It is applicable to
products which vary in fiber content, construction, finishing or coating
treatment, and kind or amount of auxiliary substances.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a continuous length of the product threaded
in the clamp described in 4.1.4 to form a series of short loops on the
circumference of the four concentric circles.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, six specimens

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Abrasion testing machine. An abrasion machine, figure 4308A, consisting

of abrading mechanism, specimen supporting mechanism, and driving mechanism.
Essentially, the surface of the abradant lies in a plane parallel to the plane
surface supporting the specimen and presses upon the specimen. The abradant and
specimen rotate in the same direction at very nearly but not quite the same
angular velocity, 250 r.p.m., on noncoaxial axis which are parallel to
0.001 inch (0.0254 mm). The small difference in speed is to permit each part
of the specimen to come in contact with a different part of the abradant at
each rotation.
4.1.1 Abrading mechanism. The abrading mechanism included the abradant (letter
A, in figure 4308A) mounted at the lower end of a shaft; weights placed upon the
upper end of the shaft to produce constant pressure between abradant and specimen
throughout the test; lever and cam for raising and lowering the abradant;
shaft; and weights (letter B, in figure 4308A). A counter-weight for balancing
the abradant shaft is used when tests are to be carried out at low pressure.

METHOD 4308
4.1.2 Driving mechanism. The driving mechanism consists of a motor-driven

auxiliary drive shaft connected to the abradant-shaft and specimen-shaft by
spur gears.
4.1.3 Resettable counter. The machine is equipped with a resettable counter,

(letter G, in figure 4308A) to indicate the number of rotations in a test.
4.1.4 Clamp. The clamp shall consist of a circular plastic plate 2-10/16
inches (67 mm) in diameter and 9/16 inch (14 mm) high with holes arranged in
four concentric circles for supporting the yarn, thread or cordage during
abrasion, as shown in figure 4308B. It shall permit simultaneous exposure
to abrasion of 54 portions of the specimen. Pins on the periphery of the
plate shall be provided for fastening the ends of the specimen after thread-
ing. An aluminum disk shall be screwed to the bottom of the plate to hold
the individual lengths of the specimen in position. For wet abrasion tests
a soft rubber gasket shall be inserted between this aluminum disk and the
bottom of the plate to prevent leakage of water from the holes at the bottom
of the plate.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the load of

the abradant of the specimen shall be one pound (454 g).
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the spring steel
blade abradant shall be used.
5.2.1 The abradant shall be wiped off with carbon tetrachloride or

other suitable solvent after each test to prevent the accumulation of
finishing material on the blades.
5.3 Preparation of specimen. The yarn, thread, or cord shall be threaded

through the holes of the plastic plate, going around the plate in a counter-
clockwise direction, starting at all times at the same hole of the outer circle.
Moderate tension during threading shall be applied by hand.
5.3.1 The loops shall be oriented with respect to each other at angles
differing by equal increments in the range from 0° to 360°.
5.3.2 Wet abrasion test. In wet abrasion tests the specimen mounted in
the plate is thoroughly wet by immersion in water prior to inserting the plate
in the machine. The plate is then mounted in the machine and the surface
is flooded with an excess of water. After each 1000 rotations of abrasion,
or as specified, the machine is stopped and the surface of the plate flooded
with an excess of water.

METHOD 4308
5.4 A test shall be carried out as follows: mount the specimen in the
clamp taking care that it is clamped evenly and securely without distortion;
place the specimen assembly in position in the machine, and lower the
abradant on the specimen by rotating the upper cam; set the counter at
zero and start the machine.
5.5 The test shall be continued for the required number of rotations
of abrasion or until the specimen is to be inspected. The machine shall
be stopped, the abradant raised by the upper cam, and the clamp and speci-
men removed from the machine.
5.6 The specimen shall be inspected or measured as required in the

procurement document without removing it from the clamp. Replace the
assembly in the machine and continue the test, repeating the inspection
at intervals as required.
5.7 Evaluation.
5.7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the end point
of abrasion shall be the number of rotations of the abradant relative to the
specimen necessary to wear through 27 of the 54 exposed portions of the specimen.
5.7.1.1 The machine shall be stopped periodically for inspection of

the abraded portions of the specimen. The number of loops completely
worn through shall be noted at each stop. The cumulative frequency of
worn loops shall be plotted against the number of rotations and the
number of rotations corresponding to 27 worn loops shall be obtained from
the plotted graph.
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the abrasion

resistance of the sample unit shall be the average of the number of rotations
obtained from the specimens tested and shall be averaged to the nearest 10
rotations.
6.1.1 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 An abrasion machine and clamp of the type described in this method
are manufactured by Frazier Precision Instrument Company, Inc., Silver Spring,
MD 2907.

METHOD 4308
FIGURE 4308A - Schiefer abrasion testing machine.

Abradant
Weights on abradant shaft
Cam and lever system for raising the abradant
shaft, abradant, and weights
Counterweight for balancing abradant and abradant
shaft when tests are to be made at low pressures
Specimen in place ready for test
Cam for raising and lowering the speciman clamp
seat
Counter
Microswitch
Thickness gage

METHOD 4308
FIGURE 4308B

METHOD 4500
July 20, 1978
WATER ABSORPTION, DYNAMIC; TUMBLE JAR METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the amount of water ab-
sorbed by thread, yarns, tapes, cords, braids, webbings, and narrow
cloths when subjected to dynamic conditions.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be 5 pieces of the material 6 to 36 inches (152 to 915 mm) in length,
for cord, braid, tape, webbing, and similar materials as specified in
Table I, and 1 cabled skein for thread, yarns, light cords, and light
braids, prepared as specified in 5.1.
TABLE I
Specimen Weight Specimen Length
0 thru 4 g/m 36 inches (915 mm)

101 g/m and over 6 inches (152 mm)
3.1 Unless otherwise specified In the procurement document, two speci-
mens (10 pieces) shall be tested from each sample unit for cords, braids,
tapes, webbings, and similar materials, and three specimens shall be tested
from each sample unit for thread, light cords, and light braids.
4. APPARATUS
4.2 Tumble jar. A tumble jar (see figure 4500A), cylindrical in shape,
with approximate dimensions of 12 inches (305 mm) in height and 6 inches
(152 mm) in diameter or between opposite flat faces, and with a capacity of
approximately 6 L. The jar shall be of glass, corrosion-resistant metal,
or chemical stoneware. The jar shall be mounted in a vertical position, in
such a manner that it can be rotated around the horizontal axis passing through
the center of the jar. Means shall be provided for rotating the jar around
the axis at a rate of 55 ± 2 revolutions per minute. The jar shall be clean and
thoroughly rinsed so that it is free from soap, detergent, and wetting agents
(see 7.1).

METHOD 4500
4.2 Wringer. A wringer (see figure 4500B), of the household type, equipped
with smooth rubber squeeze rolls 2-1/8 to 2-1/2 inches (54 to 64 mm) in
diameter and not less than 11 inches (279 mm) or more than 16 inches (406 mm)
in length. The rubber rolls shall have a Shore durometer hardness of 70 to 80
(A scale). The load exerted on the specimen shall be applied uniformly by
means of a dead weight attached to the top roller. The total load of the
roller, means of attaching the weight, and the weight itself shall be 60 pounds
(27 kg). The rolls shall be power driven at such a speed that the specimen
shall pass through the rolls at a rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per second.
4.3 Balance. Laboratory balance accurate to 0.01 g.
4.4 Blotting paper. The blotting paper dimensions shall be approximately

1 inch greater than the length and width of the specimens (see 7.3).
4.5 Yarn reel. A 54-inch (1.37 m) periphery skein reel or other suitable
device for preparing a skein.
4.6 Twist tester. A twist tester or other suitable device for twisting
skeins.
4.7 Container. Tared glass or plastic containers.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of thread, yarns, light cord and light— braid

- specimens.
The test specimens shall consist of 5.0 —
+ 1.0 g skeins made on a 54-inch
(1.37 m) periphery skein reel. The skein shall be folded flat, then twisted
around its long axis for a total of 25 turns using a twist tester (see
figure 4500C). The twist must be inserted In the skein in the same
direction as the final twist of the specimen. The two ends shall be brought
together and the folded skein allowed to back twist on itself. The ends shall
be tied off to prevent untwisting (see figure 4500D).
5.2 Time of rotation. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

the time of rotation of the jar (test time) shall be a minimum of 10 minutes for
threads, yarns, light cords and light braids; and a minimum of 20 minutes for
webbings, tapes, heavy cords and braids, and narrow cloths.
5.3 Weight of original specimen. The specimen, 5 pieces of cord, braid,

tapes, webbing, or narrow cloths, or 1 cable skein for lighter materials, shall
be conditioned and weighed to the nearest 0.1 g. This is the “Weight of the
original conditioned specimen”, and in the calculation of results is designated
as 0 l Each individual piece of the specimen for cord, braids, tapes, and
webbings shall be marked to maintain its identity.

METHOD 4500
One L of distilled water for threads, yarns, light cords and light braids, and
2 L of water for webbings, tapes, or narrow cloths-at a temperature of 80° ±
2°F (27°C ± 1°C) shall be placed in the tumble jar (see 4.1) and the specimen
added.
5.3.1 Cords, braids, webbings, tapes, or narrow cloths. Two specimens

(10 pieces) may be tested at the same time, provided each specimen is taken
from a different sample unit. If less than 2 specimens are tested, a clean
specimen of comparable weight, finish, size, and type of cloth shall be run
as ballast with the specimen undergoing test. Care shall be taken that the
material in the jar during any run shall be the equivalent weight of the
2 specimens.
5.3.1.1 The jar and contents shall be rotated at the rate of 55 ± 2

revolutions per minute for the time specified.
5.3.1.2 At the end of the required running time, one piece of the
specimen shall be run through the wringer smoothly with the lengthwise
direction of the specimen perpendicular to the length of the rollers.
5.3.1.3 The same piece of the specimen shall immediately be placed

smoothly between 2 sheets of blotting paper. The specimen and blotters
shall be passed through the rollers of the wringer by the procedure
described in 5.3.1.2.
5.3.1.4 The piece of material shall be left between the 2 blotters

until all 5 pieces (between sheets of blotting paper) have been passed
between the rollers as described in 5.3.1.2 and 5.3.1.3.
5.3.1.5 Final weight of specimen. The 5 pieces constituting the specimen
shall then be removed from the blotting paper and weighed immediately in a tared
closed container to the nearest 0.1 g. This is the “Final weight of the
specimen”, and in the calculation of results is designated as “F”.
5.3.2 Thread yarns, light cords and light braids. No more than 1
cabled skein shall be tested In the jar at one time.
5.3.2.1 The jar and contents shall be rotated at the speed of
55 ± 2 revolutions per minute for the time specified.
5.3.2.2 At the end of the required running time, the specimen shall
be run through the wringer smoothly with the lengthwise direction of the
specimen perpendicular to the length of the rollers.

METHOD 4500
5.3.2.3 The same specimen shall immediately be placed smoothly
between 2 sheets of blotting paper. The specimen and blotters shall
be passed through the rollers of the wringer by the procedure described
in 5.3.2.2.
5.3.2.4 Final weight of specimen. The specimen shall then be removed from
the blotting paper and weighed immediately in a tared closed container to the
nearest 0.1 g. This is the “Final weight of the specimen”, and in the
calculation of results shall be designated as “F”.
5.4 Care shall be taken at all times to keep evaporation of moisture
from the specimen to a minimum.
5.5 Calculation of results. The dynamic absorption shall be cal-
culated as follows:
Dynamic absorption, percent =
Where: O = Original weight of the specimen.

F = Final weight of the specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 The dynamic absorption of the sample unit shall be the average
of the results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported
7. NOTES
7.1 A tumble jar suitable for conducting this test may be purchased from Atlas
Electric Devices Co., 4114 N. Ravenwood Ave., Chicago 13, Illinois, and Illinois
and Mico Instrument Co., 80 Trowbridge St., Cambridge, MA 02138.
7.2 If the material for test is subject to excessive raveling, a drop of

liquid latex or rubber cement should be spread on the yarns at each corner to
prevent raveling. Care should be exercised in the selection of the latex or
rubber cement to insure impurities are not present which would affect results.
7.3 The blotting paper is available from: James River Paper Company, P.O.
Box 2218, Richmond, VA 23217.

METHOD 4500
DYNAMIC ABSORPTION TEST
FIGURE 4500A - TUMBLE JAR
FIGURE 4500B- WRINGER

METHOD 4500

METHOD 4500

METHOD 4502
July 20, 1978
WATER ABSORPTION: THREAD, CORD, BRAID, TAPE,
WEBBING: IMMERSION METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the amount of water ab-
sorbed by cord, braid, thread, tape, webbing and related materials
when subjected to static conditions.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

shall be a piece of the material 6 to 24 inches (152 to 610 mm) in length for
cord, braid, tape webbing, and similar materials, and a cabled skein
for thread, prepared as specified in 5.1.
2.1.1 Departure from the required length of cord, braid, tape,

webbing, and similar materials shall be permitted when necessary so
that those which are appreciably light shall weigh not less than 4 g.
2.1.2 Materials such as light cord, thread, and light braid shall be
prepared in the form of a cabled skein as specified in 5.1. Webbing,
tape, heavy cord, and heavy braid, when applicable, shall be folded to
approximate 6-inch (152 mm) folds.

4.1 Apparatus (as shown in fig.

— 5502).
4.1.1 Blotting paper. The blotting paper dimensions shall be approxi-
mately 1 inch (25 mm) greater than the length and width of the specimen (see
7.1).
4.1.2 Wringer. Wringer as described in Method 5502.
4.1.3 Sinker and tank. Sinker and tank varying in size with the size of the
specimen, and balance as described in Method 5502.

METHOD 4502
4.1.4 Yarn reel. A 54-inch (1.37 m) periphery skein reel or other suitable
device for preparing the specimen.
4.1.5 Twist tester. A twist tester or other suitable device for

twisting skeins.
4.2 Method cited.

Method 5502, Water Resistance of Cloth; Immersion Absorption
Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, this test shall be
performed on material conditioned in accordance with Section 4 of this standard.
5.2 Preparation of thread, light cord, and light braid specimens. The test
specimen shall consist of a 5 ± 1.0 g skein made on a 54-inch (1.37 m) periphery
skein reel. The skein shall be folded flat, then twisted around its long axis
for a total of 25 turns by use of a twist tester (see fig. 4502A). The twist
must be inserted in the skein in the same direction as the final twist of the
thread (see fig. 4502B). The two ends shall be brought together and the folded
skein allowed to back twist on itself. The ends shall be tied off to prevent
untwisting (see fig. 4502C).
5.3 Weight of the original specimen. Three specimens shall be conditioned

and weighed as a unit to the nearest 0.05 g. This is the “Original conditioned
weight of the specimen” and is designated as “O”.
5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the time of

immersion shall be 20 ± 1 minutes.
5.5 The specimen shall be attached to the sinker and immersed for
the required time in a tank of distilled water at a temperature of 81° ±
0.5°F (27° ± 1.0°C). The depth of the water shall be so regulated that,
with the sinker resting on the bottom of the tank, the top of the specimen
when held in a vertical position shall be immersed under a 2-inch (51 mm)
head of water.
5.6 At the end of the immersion period, the specimen shall be removed
from the bath and the sinker detached. The specimen shall be spread out
and immediately placed as flat as possible between two blotters and
passed through the wringer at the rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per second.

METHOD 4502
5.6.1 When the specimen is being passed through the wringer, the
longitudinal direction of the material shall be perpendicular to the
axis of the rolls.
5.7 Final weight of the specimen. After squeezing through the wringer,
the specimen shall be weighed as a unit immediately in a tared closed container
to the nearest 0.05 g. This is the “Final weight of the specimen” and is
designated as “F”. Care shall be taken to keep evaporation of moisture from
the specimen to a minimum.
5.8 Calculation of results. The immersion absorption of the speci-

men shall be calculated as follows:
Immersion absorption, percent =
Where: O = Original conditioned weight of the specimen.

F = Final weight of the specimen
6. REPORT
6.1 The water absorption of the sample unit shall be the average of
the results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The blotting paper is available from: James River Paper Company,
P.O. Box 2218, Richmond, VA 23217.

METHOD 4502

METHOD 4502

METHOD 4502

METHOD 4504
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE, VERTICAL RISE WICKING, THREAD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of thread to

wicking of water under static conditions.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a twenty strand skein of thread prepared as

specified in 5.1.

shall be tested from each sample unit; one specimen shall be from the beginning
and the other from the end of the sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Water tank. Vessel capable of holding a minimum 6 inch (152 mm) depth
of water.
4.2 Laboratory stand. Laboratory stand with movable crossbar rising 28

inches (711 mm) or more above the base.
4.3 Weight. Weight, nonferrous, 3/4 to 7/8 ounce (21 g to 25 g).
4.4 Dye. Dye-Basic Blue 9, color index 52015, salt and wetting agent free.
4.5 Blotting paper. The blotting paper shall be approximately 1 inch (25
mm) square (see 7.1).
4.6 Yarn reel. A 54-inch (1.37 m) periphery skein reel or other suitable
device for preparing the specimen.
4.7 Distilled water.
4.8 Paper clip or similar clamp.

METHOD 4504
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The test specimen shall consist of a twenty
strand skein of thread in one continuous 30 yard (27.4 m) length made on a
54-inch (1.37 m) periphery skein reel. The skein shall be reeled under enough
tension to cause the strands in the skein to lie uniformly, side by side, on
the reel. The finishing end of the skein shall be tied to the starting end of
the skein in such a manner that the knot will not add additional length to the
reel skein.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, all tests shall
be performed on material conditioned as specified in Section 4 of this Standard.
5.3 The skein shall be hung over the crossbar of the laboratory stand with
the other end hanging over the vessel. The weight shall be placed in the
lower catenary of the skein to keep it taut and straight. The skein shall be
arranged so that the strands are touching each other in flat ribbon form. The
vessel shall be filled to a depth of at least 5 inches (127 mm) with distilled
water at room temperature which has been mixed with 0.05 percent dye.
5.4 A piece of blotting paper shall be attached by means of a paper clip
or similar clamp to one strand of the skein, 3 inches (76 mm) above the lower
catenary of the skein.
5.5 The position of the crossbar shall be so adjusted that when the skein
is hung freely in the liquid, two inches of the skein will be immersed in the
liquid and the lower edge of the blotter is 1 inch (25 mm) above the liquid
surface.
5.6 The skein shall then be slowly lowered into the dyebath (see 5.5) and
the time of entry shall be noted (see figure 4504).
5.6.1 Depending on the dimensions of the vessel and the length of the
crossbar, several specimens can be tested at the same time in the same
dyebath, by hanging the skeins sufficiently apart on the crossbar.
5.7 The skein shall be exposed for 6 hours. The blotter shall be examined
for wetting or staining at least once every hour.
5.8 The test shall be terminated whenever staining or wetting of the blotter
is observed, within the 6 hour test duration (see figure 4504).
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the resistance
of thread to wicking of water shall be reported as “Satisfactory” (no staining
or wetting of the blotter in the 6 hour exposure for all specimens), or “Un-
satisfactory” (staining or wetting of the blotter within the 6 hour exposure
for one or more specimens).

METHOD 4504
7. NOTES
Box 2218. Richmond, VA 23217.

METHOD 4504
FIGURE 4504 Wicking of Water

METHOD 4800
July 20, 1978
WEATHERING RESISTANCE; YARN, CORDAGE;

NATURAL WEATHERING METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to deterioration

of cordage when subjected to a prolonged outdoor exposure. It is applicable
to yarn, thread, and all other cordage of any kind. This method is not suitable
for use in measuring the color fastness to natural weathering (see Method 5672).
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be of such form and dimension to provide the material
required in the specified evaluation tests.
2.1.1 Yarns and small cordage may be prepared In skein form.
3.1 The number of specimens tested from each sample unit shall be as required
in the procurement document.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The apparatus shall be as described in Method 5800.

4.2 Method cited.
Method 5672, Colorfastness to Weather of Textile Materials; Natural

Weathering Method
Method 5800, Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Natural Weathering Method
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The procedure shall be as described in Method 5800 except for the
following:
5.101 Heavy cordage or rope specimens. Heavy cordage or rope specimens shall
be laid on the rack with the lengthwise direction parallel to the inclined position
(from top to bottom direction). The specimen shall be held in place at the ends
by any suitable means. If the specimen is spliced for test before exposure, the
splice shall be protected from radiation and weather.

METHOD 4800
5.1.2 Yarn and light cordage specimens. Yarn and other cordage specimens
may be mounted in the form of skeins, each skein containing sufficient material
for conducting the required evaluation tests.
6. REPORT
6.1 The location of the exposure, town and state, and whether or not the
area is nonindustrial shall be reported.
6.2 The specific dates and duration

2
of the exposure period or the total
radiation in langleys (g cal/cm ) shall be reported.
6.3 Standard sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

when a standard sample has been established, resistance to weathering shall be
reported as “Satisfactory” or “Unsatisfactory”.
6.4 No standard sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement

document, when a standard sample has not been established, change in breaking
strength or other characteristic shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent.

METHOD 4804
July 20, 1978
WEATHERING RESISTANCE; YARN, THREAD, CORDAGE;

ACCELERATED WEATHERING METHOD
1. SCOPE

of cordage when subjected to an accelerated weathering exposure. It is applicable
to yarn, thread, and other cordage of all kinds.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be of sufficient yardage to meet the requirements of

the specified evaluation tests. Yarns and threads shall be wound open and with
only slight tension on plastic panels or other suitable means for holding the
strands side by side.
3.1 The number of specimens tested from each sample unit shall be as required
4. APPARATUS AND METHODS CITED
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The apparatus shall be as described in Method 5804 except that for heavy
cordage and rope it has been found convenient to have a rack built above the
weathering unit for attaching the specimen during exposure.
4.2 Methods cited.

Method 4100, Strength and Elongation, Breaking; and Tenacity; of Thread
and Yarn; Single Strand
Method 6016, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Non-Spliced
Specimen Method
Method 6015, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Spliced
Specimen Method
Method 5804, Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Accelerated Weathering Method
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The procedure shall be as described in Method 5804 except for the following:
FED. TEST MEIHOD STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 4804
5.1.1 Lightcordage. Light cordage specimens shall be tied or otherwise

fastened loosely and suspended in the clamp. Care shall be taken that the
specimen is not damaged in mounting and that there is no overlapping during
the exposure.
5.1.2 Heavy cordage and rope. If breaking strength is used to measure the
deterioration, approximately 24 Inches (610 mm) of the middle portion only of
the specimen shall be exposed to radiation from the arc. This may be done by
attaching the ends of the specimen to a rack above the arc in such a manner
that they are protected from the light and that the middle two front portions of
the specimen in the form of a loop are exposed to the radiation. If a spliced
specimen (Method 6015) is exposed, the end of the splice shall be protected
from the light.
5.1.3 Breaking strength, if required, shall be determined as described in

Method 4100 for yarn and thread, as in Method 6016 for light cordage, and as
in Method 6015 for heavy cordage and rope.
5.1.4 Calculation of results. The results shall be calculated as described

in Method 5804.
6. REPORT
6.1 The number of hours of exposure or the required end point of exposure
shall be reported.
6.2 Exposure unprotected by filters shall be reported.
6.4 The specific dates and duration of the exposure period or the total
2
radiation in langleys (g cal/cm ) shall be reported.

6.6 No standard sample. When required, and if not specified in the procurement
document, when a standard sample has not been established, change in breaking
strength shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent.

METHOD 4830
July 20, 1978
LEACHING RESISTANCE; CORDAGE; STANDARD METHOD
1. SCOPE.
1.1 This method is intended for leaching cordage at room temperature. This
method is applicable to yarn, thread, cordage, and webbing which are to be
subjected to the mildew resistant methods, group 5700.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall have the dimensions required for the subsequent
evaluation test specified in the procurement document.
3.1 The number of test specimens required from each sample unit shall be as
specified in the subsequent evaluation test.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.2 Method cited.

Method 5830, Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Standard Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The procedure shall be that described in Method 5830.
6. REPORT
6.1 The report shall be as provided for in the procurement document.

METHOD 4832
July 20, 1978
LEACHING RESISTANCE; CORDAGE; PREWET SPECIMEN METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for leaching cordage which is difficult to

wet-out at room temperature. This method is applicable to impregnated fire,
water, weather, and mildew resistant yarn, thread, cordage, webbing, etc.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
3.1 The number of test specimens required from each sample unit shall be
as specified in the subsequent evaluation test.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Apparatus as described in Method 5832, except that the water container
shall allow a ratio of specimen to water of not less than 1 to 33 by weight.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 5830, Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Standard Method

Method 5832, Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Prewet Specimen Method
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The procedure shall be that described in Method 5832.
6. REPORT

METHOD 5010
July 20, 1978
LENGTH OF TEXTILE MATERIALS; DETERMINATION OF
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the length of a cut, roll, or
bolt of material. The 6 procedures described herein are as follows:
Hand method Folding method

Drum method Paper tape method
Clock method Weight method
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be a cut, roll, or bolt of material, except for
the weight method, where the specimen shall be approximately 1 linear yard taken
from the cut, roll, or bolt.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Hand method.
4.1.1 Measurement stick or metal tape. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape,

or other suitable measuring device graduated in increments of 1/8 inch (1 mm).
4.2 Drum method.
4.2.1 Motor-driven material measuring drum with a dial or counter

geared to the drum and its calibration. The arc of contact between
the drum and the material being measured shall be sufficient to prevent
slippage, and be controlled by 1 or 2 free-running jockey rollers or
other means set close to, but not touching the drum.
4.3 Clock method.
4.3.1 A clocking device attached to a machine equipped to measure

continuous lengths of material, and so mounted that the movement of
the material through the machine turns the 2 wheels of the clocking
device. The wheels shall be identical and mounted 3 to 4 inches (76 to
102 mm) apart on a free-running common axle connected to the counting

METHOD 5010
mechanism. The surface of the wheels shall be approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm)
wide and covered with cork or other suitable friction material, ground to a
known circumference with a precision of ± 0.1 percent. The counting mechanism
scale shall be calibrated to this circumference and graduated in yards (m) and
eighths of yards (0.1 m).
4.4 Folding method.
4.4.1 Mechanical material folding device, equipped with a counter, which folds
a known length of material at each stroke.
4.5 Paper tape method.
4.5.1 Thin paper measuring tape 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 to 13 mm) in width and
graduated in yards (m) and eighths of yards (0.1 m) and, when specified for
lightweight materials, a device for transversing the paper tape once along the
length of the roll of the material.
4.6 Weight method.
4.6.1 Weighing scales accurate to ± 0.25 percent.

4.6.2 Measurement stick or metal tape. Yardstick (meterstick), metal tape
or other suitable measuring device graduated in increments of 1/16 inch (1 mm).
5. PROCEDURE
be performed on material conditioned as specified in Section 4.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the length of

material shall be determined by any one of the following procedures, except that
the hand method shall be used in cases of dispute.
5.3 Hand method. This method measures material length under zero tension. It
is applicable to all types of materials, and is the primary method to which all
others are compared for establishing their accuracy and precision.
5.3.1 The material shall be placed flat, without tension, on a smooth

horizontal surface at least 3 yards (2.7 m) in length. Using a suitable
measuring device, and pins as markers, successive portions, each at least 3
yards (2.7 m) in length, shall be measured to the nearest 1/8 inch (1 mm), and
the results totaled to give the length of the material.
5.4 Drum method. This method may be used for measuring the length of all
types of materials, providing its accuracy is in agreement with the hand method.

METHOD 5010
5.4.1 The material shall be run over the measuring drum with just enough
tension to keep it moving flat and true and to prevent any slippage. The total
length shall be read from the dial or counter and recorded to the nearest 1/8
yard (0.1 m).
5.5 Clock method. This method may be used for measuring the length of all
types of material, providing its accuracy is in agreement with the hand method.
The tension on the material must be kept at a minimum, since material length
measured by this method represents the total material length under whatever
tension prevailed while the material was running through the machine.
5.5.1 The entire material length or lengths shall be run through the clocking
device on the material measuring machine. The total material length shall be
directly read from the counter, and recorded to the nearest 1/8 yard (0.1 m).
5.6 Folding method. This method may be used for measuring the length
2
of
soft uncoated materials weighing 6 ounces per square yard (203 g/m ) or less.
It may be used for heavier materials, providing its accuracy is in agreement
with the hand method.
5.6.1 The material shall be run through the folding device while checking
the length of individual folds at frequent intervals with a yardstick or other
measuring device. The total length of the material shall be determined as the
product of the length of each fold and the number of strokes required to fold
the entire piece and recorded to the nearest 1/8 yard (0.1 m).
5.7 Paper tape method. This method may be used for woolen and worsted
materials, but is applicable to most heavy materials. When specified for
lightweight materials, use the device for traversing the paper tape once along
the length of the roll of material.
5.7.1 When the roll of material is shipped with the measuring tape incorporated
in it, the starting end of the tape shall be checked to see that it was folded
so that the first graduation protrudes slightly from the end of the roll for
easy reference. When so received, the length of the material shall be calculated
between the starting and finishing graduations of the tape, and shall be recorded
to the nearest 1/8 yard (0.1 m).
5.7.2 When the tape must be inserted in the roll, it shall be wound with a
minimum of tension. The graduations on the starting end of the tape shall be
considered to correspond with the zero or any other convenient mark on the tape.
The excess tape shall be torn off after winding. The length of the material
shall be recorded as the difference between the starting and finishing graduations
on the tape to the nearest 1/8 yard (0.1 m).

METHOD 5010
5.8 Weight method. This method may be used for all materials, and requires
that the weight of the cut, roll, or bolt and that of the 1-linear yard specimen
be determined on a conditioned basis.
5.8.1 Calculation of results. The cut, roll, or bolt and the 1-linear yard
specimen shall be weighed to the nearest 0.01 percent of the weight of each.
The length of the cut, roll, or bolt shall be calculated to the nearest 1/8 yard
(0.1 m), as follows:
Length of cut, roll, or bolt in yards =
Weight of cut, roll, or bolt in pounds x length of specimen in yards

Weight of specimen in pounds
Length of cut, roll or bolt in m = Length of cut, roll or bolt in

yards x 0.91
6. REPORT
6.1 The method used in the determination of length shall be reported, and,
when required, its agreement in accuracy with that of the hand method.
6.2 The length of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested, and shall be reported to the nearest 1/8 yard (0.1 m).
reported.

METHOD 5020
July 20, 1978
WIDTH OF TEXTILE MATERIALS; DETERMINATION OF
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the width of textile materials.
Three procedures are described:
a. short specimen method
b. full roll method
c. piece method
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Short-specimen method. The test specimen shall be a full width piece of
material at least 1 yard (1 m) in length cut no less than 1 yard (1 m) from the
ends of the bulk material.
2.2 Full roll method. The test specimen shall be the full length of the roll.
2.3 Piece method. The test specimen shall be the number of pieces of material
constituting a roll.
3.1 Short-specimen method. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement

document, five specimens shall be tested from each sample unit.
3.2 Full roll method. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement

document, one specimen (5 measurements) shall be tested from each sample unit.
3.3 Piece method. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

one specimen (5 measurements per piece) shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Measuring stick or metal tape. Yardstick, meterstick or metal tape

graduated in increments of 1/32 inch (1 mm).
5. PROCEDURE
be performed on material conditioned as specified in section 4.

METHOD 5020
5.2 The material shall be placed flat, without tension, on a smooth horizontal
surf ace. The distance from edge to edge including selvage shall be measured in
a line perpendicular to the lengthwise direction of the material. Care shall be
taken that the measurement does not deviate from the perpendicular.
5.2.1 Wide materials. The measurement shall be made to the nearest 1/16 inch
(1 mm) l
5.2.2 Narrow materials, tapes, and ribbons. The measurement shall be made to
the nearest 1/32 inch (1 mm).
5.3 Short-specimen method. One measurement shall be made no nearer the ends
of the material than 6 inches (152 mm).
5.4 Full roll method. Five measurements shall be made no nearer the ends
of the material than 1 yard (1 m).
5.5 Piece method. Five measurements shall be made on the piece no nearer
the ends of the material than 6 inches (152 mm).
6. REPORT
6.1 The width of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm)
for wide materials and the nearest 1/32 inch (1 mm) for narrow materials, tapes,
and ribbons.
6.2 Each individual measurement used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.

METHOD 5030
July 20, 1978
THICKNESS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS; DETERMINATION OF
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the thickness of woven and
knitted cloths, nonwovens, felt, blankets, pile and napped cloths, narrow
cloths, webbings, ribbons, braids, coated cloths, films, glass cloths and
tapes.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of material at least as large as the

presser foot of the thickness gage, and shall be free of folds, creases, knots,
or other distortions which are not representative of the material surface. When
possible, no selvage shall be included in the sample tested. If the specimen
is much larger than the anvil, the specimen shall be supported around the anvil
and at the same height as the anvil to avoid distortion of the specimen, thereby
raising the presser foot above its proper plane.
2.1.1 Narrow cloths and webbings. The specimen for narrow cloths and webbings
shall be the full width of the material.
2.1.2 Ribbons and tapes. The specimen for ribbons and tapes, when one width
of the material does not present a specimen as large as the presser foot, shall
be several lengths of the material placed adjacent and parallel.
2.1.3 Films, glass cloths, and tapes. The specimen for films, glass cloths,
and tapes shall be of sufficient size to insure that all points on the periphery
of the presser foot shall be at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the edge of the
specimen.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the apparatus
shall be as applicable.

METHOD 5030
4.1.1 Woven and knitted materials, felts, nonwovens. Gage of the dead-weight
type equipped with a dial graduated to read directly to 0.001 inch (0.0254 mm).
The presser foot shall be circular, with a diameter of 1.129 ± 0.001 inch
(28.6 mm ± 0.0254 mm) and with the moving parts connected therewith weighted
to apply a total load of 0.60 ± 0.03 pound per square inch (4.1 ± 0.2 kPa) to
the specimen. The anvil shall be not less than 1.129 inches (28.6 mm) in
diameter. The presser foot and anvil surface shall be plane to within 0.0001
inch (0.00254 mm) and shall be parallel to each other to within 0.0001 inch
(0.00254 mm).
4.1.2 Coated cloths, narrow cloths, webbings, ribbons and braids. Gage of
the dead-weight type equipped with a dial graduated to read directly to 0.001
inch (0.0254 mm). The presser foot shall be circular with a diameter of 0.375
inch ± 0.001 inch (9.525 mm ± 0.0254 mm) and with the moving parts connected
therewith weighted to apply a total load of 3.4 ± 0.1 pounds per square inch
(23.4 ± 0.7 kPa) to the specimen. The anvil shall be not less than 1.129 inches
(28.6 mm) in diameter. The presser foot and anvil surface shall be plane to
within 0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm) and shall be parallel to each other to within
0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm).
4.1.3 Films, glass cloths, and tapes. Gage of the dead-weight type equipped
with a dial graduated to read directly to 0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm). The presser
foot shall be circular with a diameter of 0.250 inch ± 0.001 inch (6.350 mm ±
0.0254 mm), and with the moving parts weighted to apply a total load of 25 ±
2 pounds square inch (172 ± 14 kpa) to the specimen. The anvil shall be not
less than 0.250 inch (6.350 mm) in diameter. The presser foot and anvil surface
shall be plane to within 0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm) and shall be parallel to each
other to within 0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm). The micrometer shall be capable of
repeating its readings to 0.00005 inch (0.00127 mm) at zero setting or on a steel
gage block.
4.1.4 Blankets, pile, or napped cloths. Gage of dead-weight type equipped

with a dial graduated to read directly to 0.001 inch (0.0254 mm). The presser
foot shall be circular with a diameter of 1.129 ± 0.001 inches (28.6 ± 0.0254 mm),
and with the moving parts connected therewith weighted to apply separate total
loads of 0.1 ± 0.01 pounds per square inch (0.7 ± 0.07 kPa) and 1.1 ± 0.03 pounds
per square inch (7.6 ± 0.2 kPa) to the specimen. The anvil shall be not less
than 1.129 inches (28.6 mm) in diameter. The presser foot and anvil surface shall
be plane to within 0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm) and shall be parallel to each other
to within 0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm).
5. PROCEDURE

METHOD 5030
5.2 All materials except films. The specimen shall be placed face up on the
anvil of the gage, smoothly, but without tension. The presser foot shall be
lowered onto the specimen gradually and without impact, and allowed to rest
there for 10 seconds. The dial reading shall then be taken to the nearest
0.001 inch (0.0254 mm).
5.2.1 Narrow cloths and webbings. The readings for narrow cloths and webbings
shall be taken along the centerline of the specimen.
5.3 Films, glass cloths and tapes. The specimen shall be placed between the
micrometer surfaces, and the presser foot lowered onto the specimen at a location
outside the area to be measured. The presser foot shall be raised a distance of
0.0003 to 0.0004 inches (0.0076 to 0.0102 mm), the specimen roved to the measurement
position, and the presser foot then dropped onto the specimen. The presser foot
shall then be allowed to rest there for a minimum of 5 seconds. The dial reading
shall then be taken to the nearest 0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm).
6. REPORT
6.1 All materials except film, glass cloth and tapes. The thickness of the
tested, and shall be reported to the nearest 0.001 inch (0.0254 mm).
6.2 Films, glass cloth, tapes. The thickness of the sample unit shall be
the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be
reported to the nearest 0.0001 inch (0.00254 mm).
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Apparatus of the type described in this method may be obtained from:
(a) B. C. Ames Co., Lexington Street, Waltham, MA 02154
(b) Custom Scientific Instruments, Inc., 13 Wing Drive, Whippany, NJ
07981.
(c) Federal Products Corp., 1144 Eddy Street, Providence, RI 02901.
(d) Frank E. Randall Co., 248 Ash Street, Waltham, MA 02154.
(e) Testing Machines, Inc., 400 Bayview Avenue, Amityille, Long Island,
NY 11701.
(f) Frazier Precision Instrument Co., Inc., Silver Spring, MD 20907.
(g) American Instrument Co., 8030 Georgia Avenue, Silver Spring, MD
20910.

METHOD 5040
July 20, 1978
WEIGHT OF CLOTH; CUT, ROLL, OR BOLT METHOD; DETERMINATION OF
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the unit weight of cloth
from the weight and area of the whole unit. Three procedures are des-
cribed:
a. The piece, cut, roll, or bolt method

b. The full width short specimen method
c. The narrow cloth method
Since selvages are included, it iS representative Of the bulk cloth. Weight

may be expressed in ounces per square yard (g/m ), ounces per linear yard
2
(g/m) or linear yards per pound (m/kg).

2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Piece, cut, roll, or bolt method. The test specimen shall be a full-
piece cut, roll, or bolt of cloth.
2.2 Full width short-specimen method. The test specimen shall be a full
width piece of cloth at least 1/4 yard (230 mm) in length, cut, not torn,
from the bulk cloth. To insure the length of the specimen is the same across
the width of the specimen, the trimming shall be guided by following a single
filling thread.
2.3 Narrow cloth method. The test specimen shall be three full width l-yard
(1 m) lengths of narrow cloth accurately cut from the bulk cloth at right angles
to the selvages, taken from evenly spaced places along the length of the bulk
cloth.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Measurement stick or metal tape. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape or

other suitable measuring device graduated in increments of 1/16 inch (1 mm).

METHOD 5040
4.1.2 Balance. Balance or scale capable of weighing the specimen, to an

accuracy of ± 0.01 g.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 5010, Length of Textile Materials; Determination of

Method 5020, Width of Textile Materials; Determination of
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the weight of

the cloth shall be determined by the applicable procedure. Unless otherwise
specified, all tests shall be performed on material conditioned as specified
in Section 4 of this Standard.
5.2 Piece, cut, roll, or bolt method. The full piece, cut, roll, or bolt
shall be measured for length and width at zero tension by applicable procedure
described in Methods 5010 and 5020. The specimen shall then be weighed to the
nearest ± 0.01 g of its weight. The weight shall be obtained on a non-
conditioned basis, as there is no practical way of obtaining equilibrium of this
volume of cloth under standard conditions.
5.3 Full width short-specimen method. The specimen shall be measured for
length and width at zero tension by the applicable procedure described in
Methods 5010 and 5020. The specimen shall then be weighed to the nearest 0.01
percent of its weight.
5.4 Narrow cloth method. Each of the three lengths of the specimen shall
remeasured at zero tension to the nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm). The specimen
shall then be weighed to the nearest 0.01 percent of its weight.
5.5.1 Piece, cut, roll, or bolt method. The weight shall be calculated by
one of the following methods:
Ounces per = Weight (lb.) x 576

square yard Length (yd.) x width (in.)
2
g/m = Weight (kg) x 1 000 000
Length (m) x width (mm)
Ounces per = Weight (lb.) x 16

linear yard Length (yd.)

METHOD 5040
g/m = Weight (kg) x 1000

Length (m)
Linear yards = Length (yd)

per pound Weight (lb.)
m/kg = Length (m)

Weight (kg)
5.5.2 Full width short-specimen method. The weight shall be calculated

by one of the following methods:
Ounces per = Weight (g) x 45.72
square yard Length (in.) x width (in.)
g/m
2
= Weight (g) x 1 000 000
Length (mm) x width (mm)

linear yard Length (in.)
g/m = Weight (g) x 1000

Length (mm)
Linear yards = Length (in.) x 12.60

per pound Weight (g)
m/kg = Length (mm)

Weight (g)
5.5.3 Narrow cloth method. The weight shall be calculated by one of the
following methods:
Linear yards = Total length of specimen (in.) x 12.60

per pound Total weight of specimen (g)
m/kg = Total length (mm)

Total weight (g)
Ounces per = Total weight (g) x 1.27

linear yard Total length (in.)
g/m = Total weight (g) x 1000

Total length (mm)

METHOD 5040
6. REPORT
6.1 The weight of the sample unit shall be reported in the units specified
2
in the procurement document, to the nearest 0.1 ounce per square yard (1 g/m ),
0.1 ounce per linear yard (1 g/m), 0.1 linear yard per pound (m/kg).
6.2 Each individual value used in expressing the final result shall also be
reported.

METHOD 5041
July 20, 1978
WEIGHT OF TEXTILE MATERIALS, SMALL SPECIMEN METHOD;
DETERMINATION OF
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the weight of a textile

material by using a small specimen.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

2
shall be a piece of material not less than 4 square inches (2580 mm ) in
area, cleanly cut from the bulk material. Unless otherwise specified in the
procurement document, no two specimens shall be taken from the areas con-
taining the same wales and courses in knitted cloth or the same warp and
filling yarns in woven cloth. No selvage shall be included in the sample
tested.
2.1.1 Webbings, tapes, braids, and narrow cloths. When material is

1 inch (25 mm) or less in width, a full width sample 4 feet (1.2 m) in
length shall be used. For materials 1 inch (25 mm) to 2 inches (51 mm)
in width, a full width sample 2 feet (610 mm) in length shall be used.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, five

specimens shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Analytical balance. Analytical balance capable of weighing the specimen

to an accuracy of 0.01 g (see 7.1).
4.2 Symmetrical metal die for cutting the specimen from the material.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified, all tests shall be performed on material

conditioned as specified in section 4 of this Standard.

METHOD 5041
5.2 The material shall be placed flat, without tension, on a smooth

horizontal surface and the specimen cut cleanly from the material. The
specimen shall be weighed to the nearest 0.01 g on an analytical balance
or directly on a calibrated balance.
5.3 Calculation of results. The weight shall be calculated by one of

the following methods, which shall be specified in the procurement document:

2
square yard Area of specimen (in. )
g/m
2
= Weight (g) x 1 000 000
2
Area of specimen (mm )
Ounces per = Weight (g) x width of material (in.) x 1.27

2
linear yard Area of specimen (in. )
g/m = Weight (g) x width of2 material (mm ) x 1000

Area of specimen (mm )
Linear yards = Area of specimen (in. ) x 12.60

2
per pound Weight (g) x width of material (in.)

2
m/kg = Area of specimen (mm )
Weight (g) x width of material (mm)
6. REPORT
6.1 The weight of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported in the units
specified i2 the procurement document to the nearest 0.1 ounce per square
yard (1 g/m ), 0.1 ounce per linear yard (1 g/m), 0.1 linear yard per pound
(m/kg).
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Direct reading balance. As an alternate, a direct reading balance

2
calibrated to give the weight in ounces per square yard (g/m ) or ounces
per linear yard (g/m) may be used. The balance shall be capable of reading
to the nearest 0.05 ounce (1 g).

Method 5050
July 20, 1978
YARNS PER UNIT LENGTH (INCH OR CENTIMETER)
IN WOVEN CLOTH
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the number of warp and
filling yarns per unit length (inch or centimeter) in woven cloths,
narrow cloths, tapes, and webbings.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of cloth of sufficient size to

permit the counting of yarns per unit length in the applicable procedure.
Unless otherwise specified, no selvage shall be included in the sample
tested nor shall the same yarns be included in any two determinations.

specimens shall be tested in each of the warp and filling directions
from each sample unit when procedures specified in 5.3.1 and 5.3.2
are required, and one specimen in the warp and five specimens in the
filling from each sample unit when procedures in 5.3.3 and 5.3.4 are
required.
3.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, when

tape or webbing is tested, one specimen for warp ends, binder warp ends,
and stuffer warp ends, and five specimens for filling ends shall be
tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Counting devices. Pick glass, ruler and pointer, projection equipment,
or other suitable form of counting device.
5. PROCEDURE

conditioned as specified in section 4.
5.2 The following procedures involve the counting of the number of yarns
constituting the cloth construction. This is accomplished by determining
the number of yarns while under magnification to facilitate counting. There

METHOD 5050
is a range of apparatus available, but all basically constitute a degree of

magnification of the cloth and some type of marked and measured distance
to within the field of view to measure the yarns found in a specific
distance as the measure of the cloth texture. Especially in dark colored
and finely woven cloth, the placing of the cloth specimen over a light
source to highlight the cloth construction facilitates counting.
5.3 Yarns per unit length, warp. The cloth shall be placed as flat
as possible, without tension, on a smooth horizontal surface. The actual
number of warp yarns shall be counted as specified by the applicable pro-
cedure.
5.3.1 Cloths having 25 yarns per inch (10 yarns/cm) or more. The number
of warp yarns in 1 inch (25 mm) of cloth width shall be counted.
5.3.2 Cloths having less than 25 yarns per inch (10 yarns/cm). The
number of warp yarns in a 3-inch (76 mm) cloth width shall be counted
and the number of yarns per inch (yarns/cm) determined to the nearest
whole yarn.
5.3.3 Cloths less than 3 inches (76 mm) in width. All warp yarns including
selvage shall be counted. The number of yarns per inch (yarns/cm) shall be
determined to the nearest whole yarn by dividing the total number of warp
yarns by the actual width of the cloth.
5.3.4 Closely woven cloths and those hating a fancy weave. The yarns
in a l-inch (25 mm) or larger, as specified, strip specimen shall be
raveled to facilitate counting. For closely woven cloths, the number of
warp yarns raveled from a 1-inch (25 mm) strip of cloth shall be counted.
For fancy weaves, where the number of yarns in either direction may be
irregular, the yarns shall be counted over one full-pattern repeat. For
tapes and webbings, warp ends, binder warp ends, and stuffer warp ends shall
be counted and reported separately per inch (/cm), or as specified in the
procurement document. The size of the pattern repeat, size of the design
component, and the total yarns in each component shall be recorded.
5.4 Yarns per unit length, filling. The number of yarns per inch (yarns/cm)
in the filling direction shall be determined as specified in 5.3.
5.4.1 When the cloth size is insufficient for determinations as specified

above, the areas for counting yarns per inch (yarns/cm) shall be selected tO
include as many shuttle changes as possible.

METHOD 5050
6. REPORT
6.1 The number of yarns per unit length of the sample unit shall be the
average of the results obtained from the specimens tested in each of the
warp and filling directions, and shall be reported separately to the nearest
whole number of yarns.
6.1.1 When fancy-weave cloths are tested, unless otherwise specified

in the procurement document, the following shall be reported:
a. Size of pattern repeat
b. Size of design component
c. Total number of yarns in each component
reported.

METHOD 5052
July 20, 1978
STITCHES PER UNIT LENGTH IN SEAMS AND STITCHINGS; DETERMINATION OF
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the number of stitches in

a specified length for either straight line or zig-zag stitches.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

shall be a row of stitches measuring 3 inches or 10 centimeters in length.
2.2 When a row of stitches is longer than 3 inches or 10 cm, the number of
stitches (or perforations in zig-zag-stitches), shall be counted along a
3-inch or 10 cm length and the count divided by 3 or 10 to represent the
average stitches per inch or stitches per cm in the specimen.
2.3 When a row of stitches is less than 3 inches or 10 cm in length, the

entire row of stitches (or perforations in zig-zag stitches), shall be the
specimen.
2.4 Stitches along a curved length. When the specimen row of stitches
follows a curve, the tune shall not be straightened out, but the stitches
shall be counted around the curve. The distance counted shall be measured
around the curve as specified in 2.2 and 2.3, by means of a flexible tape
or other accurate means.

shall be tested from each row of stitches designated to be tested.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Ruler. A ruler or flexible steel tape graduated in increments of 1/16

inch (1 mm).
4.2 Magnifying glass. A magnifying glass or similar device.
4.3 Pointer. A fine needle, or similar device used to count stitches.

METHOD 5052
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified, testing shall be performed under pre-

vailing atmospheric conditions.
5.2 The row of stitches to be counted shall be laid as flat as possible

on a horizontal surface, without tension, and the specimen marked and
measured by beginning at the center of a sewing needle perforation.
5.3 Using the magnifying glass and pointer, count the total number of
stitches (see 7.1.1) by using the following criteria:
5.3.1 Straight line stitches. The number of stitches in a row of

straight line stitches shall be counted as follows: Mark off the
specimen length, placing the first mark on the center of a needle per-
foration. Beginning at the needle perforation following the first mark,
count all the needle perforations in the specimen. If any portion of the
stitch unit (see 7.1.2) following the last perforation, falls within the
specimen length, that float (see 7.1.3), shall be counted as an additional
perforation.
5.3.2 Zig-zag stitches. The number of stitches in a row of zig-zag

stitching shall be counted as follows: Mark off the specimen length
placing the first mark on the center of a needle perforation. Beginning
at the needle perforation following the first mark, count all the needle
perforations along the zig-zag pattern in the specimen. If any portion of
the stitch unit (see 7.1.2) following the last perforation, falls within
the specimen length, that float (see 7.1.3) shall be counted as an additional
perforation.
5.3.3 Multiple needle machine sewing. When the stitches of multiple

needle sewing around a curve are counted, the row made by the outside needle
shall be counted.
5.4 Calculation.
5.4.1 For straight line stitching and zig-zag stitching.

Stitches per unit length = Total No. of needle perforations
Specimen length

METHOD 5052
6. REPORT
6.1 The average stitches per unit length shall be reported to the nearest
whole number.
7. NOTES
7.1 Definitions.
7.1.1 Stitch. A stitch is the unit of linkage formed by the intra-

looping a thread with itself or interlooping with one or more other
threads.
7.1.2 Stitch unit. A stitch unit is one complete repeat of a float

and stitch.
7.1.3 Float. A float is that section of thread laying between two

needle perforations, on the top side of the cloth as observed during the
sewing operation.

METHOD 5060
July 20, 1978
BOW OF YARNS IN WOVEN CLOTH
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the bow of yarns in woven cloth,
that is, the extent to which the filling yarns do not lie in a straight line
from selvage to selvage. It is also applicable to dyed, finished, and coated
cloth.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a full width piece of cloth at least one yard (1 m)
in length, cut, not torn, from a cut, roll, or bolt, a minimum of one yard (1 m)
from either end, or the full length of a roll or piece of cloth.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Measurement stick or metal tape. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape, or

other suitable measuring device graduated in increments of 1/16 inch (1 mm) for
measuring the width of the cloth.
4.2 Rigid straightedge.
5. PROCEDURE
5.2 The cloth shall be placed flat, without tension, on a smooth horizontal
surface. The position of a filling yarn in a cloth shall be marked across the
full width of the cloth, or a colored filling yarn may be selected when these
are distinctive and woven at intervals into the cloth.
5.3 A rigid straightedge shall be placed across the cloth between the points
at which the marked or colored filling yarn meets the two selvages, and a straight
line drawn connecting the two. This width shall be measured to the nearest 1/16
inch (1 mm).

METHOD 5060
5.4 The greatest distance parallel to the selvages between the drawn line and
the marked or colored filling yarn shall be measured to the nearest 1/16 inch
(1 mm). This measurement shall be designated the bow.
5.5 Calculation of results. The bow shall be calculated as follows:
Bow, percent =
Where: D = greatest
— distance measured to the nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm) between
the marked filling yarn and the drawn line.
W = width of the cloth in inches (mm).
6. REPORT
6.1 The bow of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested, and shall be reported to the nearest 0.5 percent.
reported.

METHOD 5060
FIGURE 5060 Example - Bow measurement.

METHOD 5070
July 20, 1978
WALES AND COURSES IN KNIT CLOTH
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the number of wales and
courses per inch (wales and courses per cm) in knit cloth.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of cloth measuring at least two

inches by two inches (51 by 51 mm), with the sides parallel to the wales
and courses. The specimen may or may not be cut from the sample unit. No
two specimens shall include the same wales and courses.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Counting devices. Pick glass, ruler and pointer, projection equipment,
or other suitable form of counting device.
5. PROCEDURE
5.2 The cloth shall be placed flat, without tension, on a smooth

horizontal surface. The number of wales and courses in the specimen
shall then be counted, and the number of each per inch (/cm) calculated.
6. REPORT
6.1 The wales and courses of the sample unit shall be the average of
the results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported
to the nearest whole wale or course per inch (to the nearest whole wale
or course/cm).
reported.

Method 5100
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH AND ELONGATION, BREAKING OF WOVEN CLOTH; GRAB METHOD
1. SCOPE
elongation of woven, non-woven, and coated cloths.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth measuring 4 inches (102 mm)
by at least 6 inches (152 mm). The long dimension shall be parallel to the
direction being evaluated. No two warp specimens shall contain the same
warp yarns and no two filling specimens shall contain the same filling yarns.
Specimens shall not be taken nearer to the selvage than one tenth of the
width of the cloth.

specimens from each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested
from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Tensioning clamp. A tensioning clamp weighing six ounces (170 g)

(see 7.3 and Figure 5100B) so designed that the weight of the clamp is
evenly distributed across the complete width of the specimen.
4.2 The procedure for testing is applicable to both constant-rate-of-

traverse (CRT) and constant-rate-of-extension (CRE) testers (see 7.1 and
7.2). These testers shall consist of three main parts:
a. Straining mechanism
b. Clamping mechanism
c. Load and elongation recording mechanism
4.2.1 Straining mechanism. A mechanism by which the specimen is strained

by a uniform movement of the pulling clamp.
4.2.2 Clamping mechanism. The tester shall have two clamps with two
jaws on each clamp. The design of the two clamps shall be such that one
jaw may be an integral part of the rigid frame of the clamp and the other
jaw shall be fastened to allow a slight vertical movement.

METHOD 5100
4.2.2.1 The dimensions of the back jaw in each clamp shall be 1 inch
(25 mm) parallel to the application of load by 1 inch (25 mm) or more
perpendicular to the application of load. The dimensions of the front
jaw of each clamp shall be 1 inch by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm). Each jaw
face shall have a flat, smooth gripping surface. All edges which might
cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a radius of not over 1/64
inch (0.4 mm). In cases where the specimen tends to slip when being
tested, the jaws may be faced with rubber or other material to prevent
slippage.
4.2.3 Load and elongation recording mechanism. The tester shall have a
calibrated recording mechanism to indicate the applied load and elongation.
4.2.4 Capacity. The tester shall be of such capacity that the maximum
load required to break the specimen shall not be greater than 85 percent or
less than 15 percent of the rated capacity.
4.2.5 Tester efficiency. The error of the tester shall not exceed
2 percent up to and including a 50 pound (222 N) load and 1 percent over
a 50 pound (222 N) load at any reading within its load range.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of the test specimen.
5.1.1 Woven cloth. One edge of the long dimension of the specimen shall
be raveled until a continuous yarn, the length of the specimen, is obtained.
Measure 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in from this edge and draw a thin line the full
length of the specimen. This must be accurately parallel to the lengthwise
yarns.
5.1.2 Non-woven and coated cloths. On specimens where raveling is not

practical, measure and draw a thin line 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from the edge
of the specimen. This must be, as accurately as possible, parallel to the
lengthwise direction of the specimen.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified, the specimens shall be conditioned and

tested under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in accordance with section 4
of this Standard.
5.2.1 When the wet breaking strength is required, it shall be specified
in the applicable procurement document, and the method of wetting out the
specimen shall be specified.

METHOD 5100
5.3 Before use, the tester shall be set at the zero point in accordance
with the procedure required for the make and model tester being used, and
the autographic recording mechanism shall be checked for proper operation.
Insure that the recording pen has sufficient ink to avoid depletion of
supply during test.
5.4 The gage length shall be 3 inches (76 mm).
5.5 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the tester

shall be operated at a uniform pulling speed of 12 ± 0.5 in/min (305 ± 13
mm/min).
5.6 Each jaw face shall be in line both with respect to its mate in
the same clamp and to the corresponding jaw in the other clamp.
5.7 Place the specimen between the opened jaws. Align the vertical
outside edge of the front 1 inch by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm) top jaw with
the vertical line drawn on the specimen and securely tighten the top
clamp. Attach the tensioning clamp specified in 4.1 to the bottom edge of
the specimen. Align the vertical outside edge of the 1 inch by 1 inch
(25 by 25 mm) bottom jaw with the line drawn on the specimen and securely
tighten the bottom clamp (see Figure 5100A). Remove the tensioning clamp
and run the test.
5.7.1 If due to the design of the bottom clamp the tensioning clamp
cannot be used, appropriate means shall be taken to insure a uniform
application of the 6 ounce (170 g) tension to the specimen before
tightening the bottom clamp.
5.8 Observe the specimen during the test to determine if the specimen
breaks in or at the edge of the jaws (jaw breaks), all yarns in the test
area do not break, the specimen slips in the jaws, or the rupture of the
specimen follows a random pattern. If any of the above or any other
anomaly occurs which is due to faulty testing techniques and the result
falls markedly below the average for the sample unit, discard the result
and take another specimen. Continue this procedure until the required
number of acceptable breaks have been obtained.
5.8.1 It shall be noted that certain cloths because of their inherent

characteristics will not yield breaks other than jaw breaks.
5.9 When testing for elongation it shall be obtained simultaneously

with the breaking strength. The elongation at the breaking point or other
required load shall be expressed as the percent increase in length of the
tensioned specimen held between the jaws. Elongation shall be determined

METHOD 5100
from the graph of the autographic recording mechanism in accordance

with the procedure required for the make and model tester being
utilized.
5.9.1 That initial portion of the load-elongation curve (initial

vertical traverse of the pen) which indicates elongation without load
(other than the tensioning load) shall not be included in the calcula-
tion of elongation.
6. REPORT
results obtained from the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling
directions and shall be reported separately as follows:
Breaking strength Reported to nearest_
0-500 lbs. (0-2220 N) 1 lb. (1 N)

501 lbs. and up (2221 N and up) 5 lbs. (10 N)
6.2 The elongation of the sample unit shall be the average of the
directions and shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent.
6.3 Each individual value obtained for each specimen tested shall also
be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, a constant-

rate-of-load (CRL) tester will not be used.
7.2 The results obtained on a CRT tester may not be reproducible on a

CRE tester and vice versa. Generally, for acceptance testing, it is not
recommended to compare the results obtained on a CRT tester to those ob-
tained on a CRE tester. In case of dispute it is recommended that a constant-
time-to-break (20 ± 3 sec) be used.
7.3 The tensioning clamp weighing six ounces (170 g) described in this
method may be obtained from Custom Scientific Instruments, Inc., 13 Wing
Drive, Whippany, NJ 07981.

METHOD 5100
Example. - Gage length (distance between jaws)
FIGURE 5100A

METHOD 5100

METHOD 5102
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH AND ELONGATION, BREAKING OF WOVEN CLOTH; CUT STRIP METHOD

1. SCOPE
elongation of heavily sized, coated, and other cloths for which it is
impractical to prepare a ravel strip specimen.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth measuring 1 inch (25 mm) by
at least 6 inches (152 mm). The specimen shall be cut with a die. The long
dimension shall be parallel to the direction being evaluated. No two warp
specimens shall contain the same warp yarns and no two filling specimens shall
contain the same filling yarns. Specimens shall not be taken nearer to the
selvage than one tenth of the width of the cloth.
2.2 In critical cases, the procurement document shall state where in the
pattern the repeat is to begin.

from each of the warp and-filling directions shall be tested from each sample
unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Tensioning clamp. A tensioning clamp weighing six ounces (170 g) (see
7.3 and Figure 5102) so designed that the weight of the clamp is evenly
distributed across the complete width of the specimen.

traverse (CRT) and constant-rate-of-extension (CRE) testers (see 7.1 and 7.2).
These testers shall consist of three main parts:
a. Straining mechanism.
b. Clamping mechanism.
c. Load and elongation recording mechanism.


MBTHOD 5102
4.2.2 Clamping mechanism. The tester shall have two clamps with two jaws
on each clamp. The design of the two clamps shall be such that one jaw may
be an integral part of the rigid frame of the clamp and the other jaw shall
be fastened to allow a slight vertical movement.
4.2.2.1 The dimensions of the front and back jaws in each clamp shall be
at least 1 inch by 1-1/2 inches (25 by 38 mm) with the longer dimension
perpendicular to the application of load. Each jaw face shall have a flat,
smooth gripping surface. All edges which might cause a cutting action shall
be rounded to a radius of not over 1/64 inch (0.4 mm). In cases where the
specimen tends to slip when being tested, the jaws may be faced with rubber
or other material to prevent slippage.
4.2.4 Capacity. The tester shall be of such capacity that the maximum
load required to break the specimen shall not be greater than 85 percent
or less than 15 percent of the rated capacity.
4.2.5 Tester efficiency. The error of the tester shall not exceed 2
percent up to and including a 50 pound (222 N) load and 1 percent over
a 50 pound (222 N) load at any reading within its load range.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the specimens shall
be conditioned and tested under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in accordance
5.1.1 When the wet breaking strength is required, it shall be specified

in the applicable procurement document and the method of wetting out the
specimen shall be specified.
5.2 Before use, the tester shall be zeroed in accordance with the pro-
cedure required for the make and model tester being used and the auto-
graphic recording mechanism shall be checked for proper operation. Insure
that the recording pen has sufficient ink to avoid depletion of supply during
test.
5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the tester shall
be operated at a uniform pulling speed of 12 ± 0.5 in/min (305 ± 13 mm/min).
5.5 Each jaw face shall be in line both with respect to its mate in the
same clamp and to the corresponding jaw in the other clamp.

METHOD 5102
5.6 Place the specimen between the opened jaws. Center the specimen
between the top jaws and securely tighten the top jaws so that the speci-
men is parallel to the application of load. Attach the tensioning clamp
to the bottom edge of the specimen. Center and align the specimen in the
bottom jaws and securely tighten these jaws. Remove the tensioning clamp
and run the test.
5.6.1 If due to the design of the bottom clamp the tensioning clamp cannot
be used, appropriate means shall be taken to insure a uniform application
of the 6 ounce (170 g) tension before tightening the bottom clamp.
5.7 Observe the specimen during the test to determine if the specimen
breaks in or at the edge of the jaws (jaw breaks), all yarns in the test
area do not break, the specimen slips in the jaws, or the rupture of the
specimen follows a random pattern. If any of the above or any other
anomaly occurs, which is due to faulty testing technique, and the result
falls markedly below the average for the sample unit, discard the result
and take another specimen. Continue this procedure until the required
number of acceptable breaks have been obtained.
5.7.1 It is to be noted that certain cloths because of their inherent

5.8 When testing for elongation it shall be obtained simultaneously

with the breaking strength. The elongation at the breaking point or other
required load shall be expressed as the percent increase in length of the
tensioned specimen held between the jaws. Elongation shall be determined
from the graph of the autographic recording mechanism in accordance with
the procedure required for the make and model tester being utilized.
5.8.1 That initial portion of the load-elongation curve (initial ver-
tical traverse of the pen) which indicates elongation without load (other
than the tensioning load) shall not be included in the calculation of
elongation.
60 REPORT
0-500 lbs (0-2220 N) 1 lb (1 N)

501 lbs and up (2221 N and up) 5 lbs (10 N)
FED. TEST METHOD. STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 5102
6.2 The elongation of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling directions
and shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent.
6.3 Each individual value obtained for each specimen tested shall also be
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, a constant-rate-

of-load (CRL) tester will not be used.
7.2 The results obtained on a CRT tester may not be reproducible on a CRE
tester and vice versa. Generally, for acceptance testing, it is not recommended
to compare the results obtained on a CRT tester to those obtained on a CRE
tester. In case of dispute it is recommended that a constant-time-to-break
(20 —+ 3 see) be used.
7.3 The tensioning clamp weighing six ounces (170 g) described in this method
may be obtained from Custom Scientific Instruments, Inc., 13 Wing Drive, Whippany,
NJ 07981.

METHOD 5102

METHOD 5104
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH AND ELONGATION, BREAKING OF WOVEN CLOTH; RAVEL STRIP METHOD
1. SCOPE
elongation of a specific width of woven cloth. It is not recommended
for cloths having less than twenty yarns across the width of the speci-
men.
1.2 The breaking strength as determined by this method is particularly

useful for comparing the effective strength of yarns in a woven cloth
with their strength before weaving.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth measuring 1-1/2 inches

(38 mm), by at least 6 inches (152 mm). The long dimension shall be
parallel to the direction being evaluated. No two warp specimens shall
contain the same warp yarns and no two filling specimens shall contain
the same filling yarns. Specimens shall not be taken nearer to the sel-
vage than one tenth of the width of the cloth.
2.1.1 When a specimen containing a specific number of yarns is speci-

fied, the specimen shall be cut 1/2 inch (13 mm), or twenty yarns, wider
than the number of yarns specified.
2.1.2 The specimen shall be raveled to a 1 inch (25 mm) width or other
specified number of yarns by removing an approximately equal number of yarns
from each side of the specimen.
2.2 When this test is specified for cloths having less than twenty yarns
per inch (yarns/cm), the specimen shall be cut 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) wide, or
2 inches (51 mm) plus twenty yarns, whichever is wider, by at least 6 inches
(152 mm).
2.2.1 The specimen shall be raveled to a 2-inch (51 mm) width by removing
ten or an approximately equal number of yarns from each side of the specimen.
2.3 In critical cases, the procurement document shall state where in the
pattern the repeat is to begin.
from each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested from each sample
unit.

METHOD 5104
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Tensioning clamp. A tensioning clamp weighing six ounces (170 g) (see
7.3 and Figure 5104) so designed that the weight is evenly distributed across the
complete width of the specimen.

traverse (CRT) and constant-rate-of-extension (CRE) testers (see 7.1
and 7.2). These testers shall consist of three main parts:
a. Straining mechanism.
b. Clamping mechanism.
c. Load and elongation recording mechanism.

4.2.2 Clamping mechanism. The tester shall have two clamps with two jaws on
each clamp. The design of the two clamps shall be such that one jaw may be an
integral part of the rigid frame of the clamp and the other jaw shall be fastened
to allow a slight vertical movement.
4.2.2.1 The dimensions of the front and back jaws in each clamp shall
be at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) wider than the specimen being tested. The jaws
shall be at least 1 inch (25 mm) parallel to the application of load. Each
jaw face shall have a flat, smooth gripping surface. All edges which might
cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a radius of not over 1/16 inch (0.4
mm). In cases where the specimen tends to slip when being tested, the jaws may
be faced with rubber or other material to prevent slippage.
4.2.4 Capacity. The tester shall be of such capacity that the maximum load
required to break the specimen shall not be greater than 85 percent or less than
15 percent of the rated capacity.
4.2.5 Tester efficiency. The error of the tester shall not exceed 2 percent
up to and including a 50 pound (222 N) load and 1 percent over a 50 pound (222 N)
load at any reading within its load range.
5. PROCEDURE

shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in accordance
FED-STD-191A
METHOD 5104
5.1.1 When the wet breaking strength is required, it shall be specified in

the applicable procurement document and the method of wetting out the specimen
shall be specified.
5.2 Before use, the tester shall be zeroed in accordance with the procedure
required for the make and model tester being utilized and the autographic
recording mechanism shall be checked for proper operation. Insure that the
recording pen has sufficient ink to avoid depletion of supply during test.
5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the tester shall
be operated at a uniform pulling speed of 12 ± 0.5 in/min (305 ± 13 mm/min).
5.5 Each jaw face shall be in line both with respect to its mate in the same
clamp and to the corresponding jaw in the other clamp.
5.6 Place the specimen between the opened jaws. Center the specimen between
the top jaws and securely tighten the top jaws so that the specimen is parallel
to the application of load. Attach the tensioning clamp to the bottom edge of
the specimen. Center and align the specimen in the bottom jaws and securely
tighten these jaws. Remove the tensioning clamp and run the test.
5.6.1 If due to the design of the bottom clamp the tensioning clamp cannot
be used, appropriate means shall be taken to insure a uniform application of
the 6 ounce (170 g) tension before tightening the bottom clamp.
5.7 Observe the specimen during the test to determine if the specimen breaks
in or at the edge of the jaws (jaw breaks), all yarns in the test area do not
break, the specimen slips in the jaws, or the rupture of the specimen follows
a random pattern. If any of the above or any other anomaly occurs, which is
due to faulty testing technique, and the result falls markedly below the average
for the sample unit, discard the result and take another specimen. Continue this
procedure until the required number of acceptable breaks have been obtained.
5.7.1 It is to be noted that certain cloths because of their inherent

5.8 When testing for elongation it shall be obtained simultaneously with the
breaking strength. The elongation at the breaking point or other required load
shall be expressed as the percent increase in length of the tensioned specimen
held between the jaws. Elongation shall be determined from the graph of the
autographic recording mechanism in accordance with the procedure required for
the make and model tester being utilized.

METHOD 5104
5.8.1 That initial portion of the load-elongation curve (initial vertical

traverse of the pen) which indicates elongation without load (other than the
tensioning load) shall not be included in the calculation of elongation.
6. REPORT
results obtained from the specimens tested In each of the warp and filling
0-500 lbs (0-2220 N) 1 lb (1 N)

501 lbs and up (2221 N and up) 5 lbs (10 N)
6.2 The elongation of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
6.3 Each individual value obtained for each specimen tested shall also be
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, a constant-rate-
of-load (CRL) tester will not be used.
7.2 The results obtained on a CRT tester may not be reproducible on a CRE
tester and vice versa. Generally, for acceptance testing, it is not recommended
to compare the results obtained on a CRT tester to those obtained on a CRE
tester. In case of dispute it is recommended that a constant-time-to-break
(20 ± 3 sec) be used.
7.3 The tensioning clamp weighing six ounces (170 g) described in this
method may be obtained from Custom Scientific Instrments, Inc., 13 Wing Drive,
Whippany, NJ 07981.

METHOD 5104

METHOD 5106
July 20, 1978
TENSION OF ELASTIC TEXTILE MATERIALS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the amount of load to produce
specified elongation (tension) in woven or knitted elastic or stretch cloths,
tapes, and webbings when subjected to specified loads on a constant-rate-of-
load tensile testing machine.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Materials 3 inches (76 mm) or less in width. Unless otherwise specified
in the procurement document, the test specimen shall be a full width piece of
the material 14 inches (356 mm) in length. The specimen shall be prepared as
specified in 5.1.
2.2 Materials over 3 inches (76 mm) in width. Unless otherwise specified
in the procurement document, the long dimension of the specimen shall be parallel
to the lengthwise direction of the material.
2.2.1 Material that will ravel. The specimen shall be 14 inches (356 mm)
in length, and yarns shall be removed from each side, along the length of the
specimen, to obtain a width of approximately 3 inches (76 mm). The specimen
shall then be prepared as specified in 5.1.
2.2.2 Material that will not ravel. The specimen shall be 14 inches (356 mm)
in length and cut 3.00 ± 0.05 inches (76 mm ± 1 mm) wide. The specimen shall
then be prepared as specified in 5.1.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Tensile testing machine. A tensile testing machine, constant-rate-of-load
type equipped with suitable pins or rods for holding a looped specimen. The
total distance encompassing the pins (see Figure 5106) shall be 10.00 ± 0.06
inches (254 mm ± 1 mm) at the start of the test. The machine shall have a full
loading and unloading cycle of 40 ± 2 seconds (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Recording mechanism. Autographic mechanism.

METHOD 5106
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, all tests on

specimens shall be performed under standard conditions in accordance with Section
4 of this standard. All test specimens shall be allowed to relax free from
tension for a minimum of 16 hours.
5.1.2 All wrinkles shall be removed from the specimen by hand. When the
specimen is laying flat without tension, bench marks shall be placed 10.00 ±
0.06 inches (254 mm ± 1 mm) apart on the specimen. The specimen shall then be
sewn together on the coincided bench marks to form a loop with an inside
periphery of 10.00 ± 0.06 inches (254 mm ± 1 mm).
5.1.2.1 The thread and stitch type for sewing the specimen to form the
loop shall be such that the seam will not break during the test.
5.2 Before the beginning of any testing, the machine shall be zeroed in
accordance with the procedure required for the make and model of the machine
being used.
5.2.1 Prior to mounting the test specimen, the calibrated graph paper shall
be placed in the holder of the autographic recording mechanism, and the
machine shall be run to insure that the mechanism is operating properly (care
should be taken to insure that the ink supply is sufficient to avoid depletion
during the testing).
5.3 The loop specimen shall be dropped around the pins of the tester so that
a figure “O” is formed, with a pin at each end of the “O”. The seam shall be
centered between the pins or rods (see Figure 5106). The load as specified in
the procurement document shall be applied to the specimen for the full cycle of the
plane of the testing machine. The full cycle shall be repeated for a total of
5 cycles. The loading curve of the fifth cycle shall be used to determine the
tension of the specimen.
5.4 Calculation of results. The tension in pounds of the specimen shall be

the load on the specimen, at the specified elongation, divided by 2. The load
at the specified elongation shall be determined on the loading curve recorded
by the autographic recording mechanism of the test apparatus.
6. REPORT
6.1 The tension of the sample unit shall be reported as the average of the
results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported to the nearest
0.1 pound (to the nearest 0.1 N) for materials 3 inches (76 mm) or less in
width, and to the nearest 0.1 pound (to the nearest 0.1 N) per 3 inches (76 mm)
of width for materials over 3 inches (76 mm) in width.

METHOD 5106
7. NOTE
7.1 A machine of the type described in this method is Scott IP4 Tester and
may be purchased from Scott Testers Inc., Division of Bendix Corporation,
101 Blackstone St., Providence, RI 02901.

METHOD 5106

METHOD 5110
July 20, 1978
SEWABILITY OF WOVEN CLOTH; SEAM EFFICIENCY METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended to determine the sewability of woven cloth. The
result represents the ratio of strength retained along the line of stitching,
and is based on the relationship between the breaking strength of the cloth at
the seam and the breaking strength of the cloth with no stitching.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimens shall be prepared from a piece of cloth 20 inches
(508 mm) wide and 48 inches (1219 mm) long with the long dimension parallel to
the warp direction as specified in 5.1.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, seven specimens

4. APPARATUS, METHOD CITED AND STANDARD CITED
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Sewing machine. A double-tandem needle, 1/4 inch (6 mm) gauge sewing
machine, making stitch type 401 of FED-STD-751 and operating at 4300 ± 100
stitches (revolutions) per minute shall be used. The machine shall be fitted
with a folder capable of properly forming seam type LSc-2 of FED-STD-751.
4.1.2 Needles and thread. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement

document, chrome-plated, regular set, round cloth point needles shall be used.
Needles with ball points or cutting points shall not be used. Ball eye needles
may be used provided the measurement across the eye meets the requirement
specified in the end item procurement document. The thread type and size and
the needle size shall be as specified in the procurement document.
4.1.3 Since the test is designed to evaluate the damage of cloth yarns and
the resultant effect on the cloth strength at the seam, the kind, type of thread,
and the size, along with the number of stitches per inch (stitches/cm), should
be selected to insure that the stitching does not fail in the testing.
4.1.4 Tensile tester. A tensile tester of the type described in Method 5100.

METHOD 5110
4.2 Method cited.
Method 5100, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Grab

Method
4.3 Standard cited.

FED-STD-751 - Stitches, Seams, and Stitchings
5* PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The specimen shall be prepared as follows:
5.1.1 The test specimen shall be cut parallel to the warp direction into
2 strips, one 12 inches by 48 inches (305 mm by 1219 mm), and the other 8 inches
by 48 inches (203 mm by 1219 mm), as shown on figure 5110A. The strips shall
then be seamed together with the cloth face up along their lengths with seam
type LSc-2 and stitch type 401 of FED-STD-751, 1/4-inch (6 mm) gauge or distance
between the rows of stitches. The seam shall then be sewn straight and care-
fully to insure the 2 pieces retain as closely as possible the same relationship
filling-wise in the seam as in the uncut 20 by 48 inch (508 mm by 1219 mm) piece.
5.1.2 Twelve ± 1 stitches per inch (5 ± 1/2 stitches/cm) shall be used on the
seam. The tension on the sewing thread shall be adjusted to properly form stitch
type 401 of FED-STD-751 without puckering. The distribution of the thread in
the stitch by length shall be 40 ± 5 percent needle thread and 60 ± 5 percent
looper thread.
5.1.3 The seam shall be inspected for proper folding and stitching. Tests
shall not be made of any specimen improperly formed, or with more or less than
the specified number of stitches per inch (stitches/cm) or with improper length
of sewing thread in needle or bobbin.
5.1.4 The individual specimens shall be marked on the seamed strip (5.1.1)
with lines 4 inches (102 mm) apart and parallel to the filling yarns
(perpendicular to the seam) extending across the full width of the seamed
strip (see figure 5110A). The first line shall be 6 inches (152 mm) from the
end of the strip where sewing of the seam was started. As an aid in aligning
the specimen symmetrically in the clamps of the testing machine, a line shall
be marked parallel to the filling direction of the cloth a distance of 1.5
inches (38 mm) from 1 edge of the individual specimens.
5.3 The 7 specimens for the breaking strength tests shall be cut from the
seamed strip along the marks spaced 4 inches (102 mm) apart (see figure 5110B).
Three extra specimens are provided in the event of bad breaks, skipped stitches,
etc.

METHOD 5110
5.4 Testing. Two determinations of the breaking strength of the same 1-inch
(25 mm) center section of filling yarns in each specimen shall be made. The
first, cloth strength, is the breaking strength of the filling yarns in the
unseamed portion of the 12-inch (305 mm) strip. The second, seam strength, is
the breaking strength of the same 1-inch (25 mm) center section of filling yarns
in the 12-inch (305 mm) strip and the corresponding filling yarns in the
8-inch (203 mm) strip.
5.4.1 Cloth strength. The 12-inch (305 mm) strip of the specimen shall be
placed in the clamps of the testing machine with the filling yarns parallel to
the direction of application of load. The specimen shall be aligned symmetrically
in the clamps of the testing machine with the 1-inch (25 mm) center section
securely fastened in the jaws and 1.5 inches (38 mm) of cloth width extending
beyond each side of the clamps of the machine. The drawn line shall be placed
adjacent to the nearest edge of the upper and lower jaw to Insure gripping the
same yarns in the clamps. Insure that the cloth is clamped a sufficient distance
from the seam so that its rupture will not influence the determination of seam
strength. The specimen shall be tested and breaking strength recorded.
5.4.2 Seam strength. The clamps of the machine shall be loosened. The
specimen shall be repositioned in the clamps by roving it parallel to the
direction of application of the load, following the same filling yarns broken
in 5.4.1, until the seam is midway between the 2 clamps and perpendicular to
the direction of application of the force. The specimen shall then be realigned
in the clamps as specified in 5.4.1, so that the same filling yarns as those in
5.4.1 will be broken. Care shall be taken to exclude that portion of the cloth
ruptured in obtaining the cloth strength. The specimen shall be tested and the
breaking strength of the seam recorded.
5.5 If a specimen slips between the jaws, or if, for any reason attributable
to faulty technique, an individual measurement falls markedly below the average
for the sample unit, such result shall be discarded and another specimen shall
be tested.
5.6 Calculation of results. The seam efficiency of the cloth shall be

Seam efficiency, percent = Cloth breaking strength at stitching x 100

Original cloth breaking strength
6. REPORT
6.1 The seam efficiency of the sample unit shall be the average of the
0.1 percent.

METHOD 5110
FIGURE 5110A
DIAGRAM FOR PREPARATION OF TEST SPECIMENS

METHOD 5110

METHOD 5120
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH OF CLOTH; BALL BURSTING METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the bursting strength of cloths
which exhibit a high degree of ultimate elongation. It is not recommended for
use on woven cloths.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of cloth of sufficient size to extend

beyond the outside diameter of the ring clamp mechanism of the testing
machine. No two specimens shall be taken from areas containing the same wales
or courses in knitted cloth or the same warp or filling yarns in woven cloth.
No selvage shall be included in the sample tested.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Testing machine as described in Method 5100, except that a ball burst
apparatus as shown in figure 5120 shall replace the clamp assembly.
4.1.2 The ball burst apparatus shall consist of a ring clamp mechanism of
internal diameter of 1.750 ± 0.001 inch (44.4 ± 0.025 mm). The ring clamp
mechanism shall replace 1 clamp of the testing machine. The other clamp shall
be replaced by an attachment that shall hold a polished steel ball. This ball
shall have a diameter of 1.0000 ± 0.0002 inch (25.4 ± 0.005 mm), shall be spherical
to within 0.0002 inch (0.005 mm), and shall be finished to 4 micro-inches or
less when visually compared to General Electric roughness standards. This ball
shall be periodically cleaned with a suitable solvent to remove any accumulated
film of oil or foreign particles. During the test, the relative motion
of the steel ball shall be perpendicular to the plane of the ring clamp
and through the center of the ring.
4.2 Method cited.

Method 5100, Strength and Elongation, Breaking, of Woven Cloth;
Grab Method.

METHOD 5120
5. PROCEDURE
5.2 The specimen shall be placed without tension in the ring clamp and
fastened securely by means of a screw or lever device. The machine shall
be started and the maximum resistance of the cloth to the passage of the
ball shall be recorded. The speed of the pulling clamp shall be 12 ± 0.5
inches (305 ± 13 mm) per minute.
6. REPORT
6.1 The ball-bursting strength of the sample unit shall be the average of
the results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported to the
nearest 1 pound (to the nearest 1 N).
reported.
NOTES: A ball-bursting apparatus of the type described in this method may

be obtained from the Scott Tester Co., Inc., Providence, RI and
the Thwing-Albert Instrument Co., 10960 Dutton Road, Philadelphia,
PA, 19154.
General Electric roughness standards may be obtained from the

General Electric Company, local branch office, Catalogue No.
8651831G1.
Suitable solvents for use in cleaning the ball are carbon tetra-
chloride, trichloroethylene, or perchloroethylene.

METHOD 5120
FIGURE 5120
METHOD 5122
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH OF CLOTH; DIAPHRAGM BURSTING METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the bursting strength of cloth.
It is not recommended for general use on uncoated woven cloths.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a circular or square piece of cloth at least 1/2
inch (13 mm) greater than the outside diameter of the ring-clamp mechanism of
the testing machine. No two specimens shall be taken from areas containing the
same wales or courses in knitted cloths, or the same warp or filling yarns in
woven cloths. No selvage shall be included in the sample tested.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 The standard testing machine shall be a hand or motor-driven tester, ex-
cept in cases of dispute wherein a motor-driven tester shall be used.
4.1.1 The testing machine shall permit the cloth to be clamped between two
circular clamps not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter and having coaxial
apertures of 1.22 ± 0.03 inches (31 ± 0.76 mm) in diameter.
4.1.2 The surfaces of the clamps between which the specimen is placed shall
have concentric grooves. The grooves shall be spaced not less than 1/32 inch
(0.80 mm) apart and shall be of a depth not less than 0.006 inch (0.15 mm). The
grooves shall not start closer than 0.125 inch (3 mm) from the edge of the
aperture. The surfaces of the clamps shall be metallic and any edge which might
cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a radius of not more than 1/64 inch
(0.4 mm). The lower clamp shall be integral with the chamber in which a screw
shall operate to force a liquid pressure medium at a uniform rate of 95 ± 5 ml
per minute against a rubber diaphragm. The rubber diaphragm is fitted to expand
through the concentric clamp apertures exerting its force against the specimen
set between the two clamps. (In the hand operated machine, this shall correspond
to approximately 120 revolutions per minute of a handwheel turning the dis-
placement screw).

METHOD 5122
4.1.3 A diaphragm of molded rubber shall be clamped between the lower clamp-
ing plate and the liquid chamber of the apparatus so that, before the diaphragm
is stretched by pressure beneath it, the center of its upper surface is below
the plane of the clamping surface. The pressure required to raise the free sur-
face of the diaphragm 3/8 inch (10 mm) above the surface of the diaphragm plate
shall be 4.3 ± 0.8 pounds per square inch (29.6 kPa ± 5.5 kPa). This may be
tested by removing the clamping ring and using a bridge gage. The diaphragm shall
be inspected before testing for evidence of permanent distortion.
4.1.4 Means shall be provided for stopping, at the instant of rupture of the
specimen, any further application of the loading pressure and for holding un-
changed the contents of the pressure chamber until the gross bursting pressure
and tare diaphragm pressure indicated on the gage have been recorded.
4.1.5 The machine shall be fitted with a pressure gage of the Bourdon tube,
maximum reading type, graduated in pounds per square inch (kPa) and accurate
throughout the entire range of its scale to within a value equal to 1.0 percent
of its maximum capacity. The gage shall be such that the individual readings will
be not less than 25 percent, nor more than 75 percent of the total capacity of
the gage.
4.2 Any machine that operates on the same principle as the machine described
in 4.1 and has coaxial apertures of 1.22 ± 0.03 inches (31 ± 0.76 mm) in diameter
in the clamping surfaces may be used.
5. PROCEDURE
be performed on material conditioned as specified in Section 4 of this Standard.
5.2 The specimen shall be fastened securely between the clamps and the pressure
applied until rupture occurs. Care shall be taken not to stretch or distort the
cloth when fastening in the clamps. At the instant of rupture, the gross pressure
to the nearest scale division shall be recorded. Without relaxing the pressure,
the upper clamp shall be completely released. Upon relaxation, the tare pressure
of the diaphragm shall be recorded.
5.3 If slippage of the specimen is noted, the result shall be discarded, the
clamping pressure increased and another specimen tested.
5.4 Calculation of results. The difference in pounds per square inch (kPa)
between the gross bursting pressure and the tare pressure of the diaphragm shall
be the bursting strength of the specimen.

METHOD 5122
6. REPORT
6.1 The diaphragm bursting strength of the sample unit shall be the average
of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported separately
in pounds per square inch (kPa) to the nearest scale division on the pressure gage.
NOTE: A diaphragm bursting machine of the type described in this method

may be obtained from B. F. Perkins & Son, Inc., Holyokes, MA 01040
and the E. J. Cady Company, 654 N. Harlem Avenue, River Forest, IL 60305.
FED. TEST STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 5132
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH OF CLOTH, TEARING;

FALLING-PENDULUM METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the average force required
to propagate a tear starting from a cut, in treated or untreated cloths
including those heavily sized, coated or resin-treated.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

shall be of sufficient size to provide a basic rectangular test specimen
4 inches (101.6 mm) long by 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) wide along with addi-
tional fabric at the top edge of the specimen to insure that the last
yarns being torn during the test are prevented from ravening. The
critical dimension is the 43.0 ± 0.15 mm which is to be torn during the
test. Use of a cutting die or a template having the shape and dimensions
shown in Figure 5132A is recommended. The long dimension of the specimen
shall be parallel to the warp yarns for warp tests and parallel to the
filling yarns for filling tests. No two specimens for warp test shall
contain the same warp yarns nor shall any two specimens for filling test
contain the same filling yarns. No selvage shall be included in the
specimen.

unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Falling pendulum (see Fig. 5132B). The falling pendulum apparatus
commonly known as Elmendorf Tear Tester provides for holding the specimen
with two clamps, one stationary and the other moveable, and for tearing it
by the fall of the pendulum due to the force of gravity. The basic tester
has a capacity of 0 to 1600 g (0 to 16 N) and is provided with two augmenting
weights, the NBS Augmenting Weight which increases the capacity from 1600 g
to 3200 g (16 N to 32 N), and the Textile Augmenting Weight which further
increases it to 6400 g (64 N). Heavy duty instruments with higher capacities
are also available. The instrument includes the following parts.
4.1.1 Stationary clamp.

METHOD 5132
4.1.2 Moveable clamp. Moveable clamp, carried on a pendulum formed by

a sector of a circle free to swing on a ball-bearing.
4.1.3 Sector shaped pendulum. Sector shaped pendulum, carrying a cir-

cumferential scale graduated to directly read the tearing force. The
pendulum section has a cut out in the region adjacent to the clamp so
that the specimen does not rub against the sector during test.
4.1.4 Sector release. A sector release for holding the pendulum in a

raised position during the mounting of the specimen and to permit it to fall
through the force of gravity.
4.1.5 Pointer and pointer-stop. Pointer and pointer-stop for registering

the maximum arc through which the pendulum swings when released. The pointer
is mounted on the same axis as the pendulum with constant friction just suffi-
cient to stop the pointer at the highest point reached by the swing of the
sector. The adjustable pointer-stop provides means for setting the zero of
the instrument.
4.1.6 Knife. Knife, mounted on a stationary post for initial slitting

of the specimen. It is centered between the clamps and adjusted in height
so the tearing distance is 43.0 ± 0.15 mm.
4.2 Cutting die or template. Any cutting die or template having essentially
the shape and dimensions shown in Fig 5132A can be used.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified, the specimens tested shall be conditioned

under standard conditions described in section 4 of this Standard.
5.2 The pendulum shall be raised to the starting position and the pointer-set
against its stop. The specimen shall be placed securely in the clamp so that it
is well centered with the bottom edge carefully set against the stops and so
that the upper edge is parallel to the top of the clamps and the widthwise
yarns are exactly perpendicular to them. A slit shall be made with the knife
blade extending from the bottom edge of the specimen in such a way that it
leaves 43.0 ± 0.15 mm of the fabric to be torn. Since the reliability of the
results depends greatly on the accuracy of the 43 mm distance, it shall be
periodically checked using a paper specimen cut from coordinate paper and
measuring the distance under magnification.
5.3 The sector release shall be depressed as far as it will go thus releasing
the pendulum. The release shall be held down until after the tear is completed
and the pendulum shall be caught by hand on the return swing without disturbing
the position of the pointer. The force required to tear the specimen shall be
read from the scale to the nearest division.

METHOD 5132
5.4 Readings obtained where the specimen slips in the jaw or where the tear
deviates more than 10 mm away from the projection of the initial slit shall be
rejected.
5.5 The machine when used for a given specimen shall be of such capacity
that the force required to tear the specimen is between 15 and 85 percent of
the rated capacity.
5.6 Calculation of results. The average of the 5 specimens in grams or

newtons shall be calculated in each direction. When the requirements are
specified in customary pound units the average tearing force shall be con-
verted to pounds by using an appropriate factor in each direction.
6. REPORT
6.1 The tearing strength shall be the average tearing force obtained from
the 5 specimens tested in each of the warp and the filling directions, and
shall be reported separately in grams, newtons or pounds as required in the
procurement document to the nearest 1 g, 0.1 N or 0.1 pound.
be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A pendulum apparatus of the type described in this method is manufactured

by Thwing-Albert Instrument Co., 10960 Dutton Road, Philadelphia, PA 19154.

METHOD 5132
FIGURE 5132A

METHOD 5132
FIGURE 5132B

METHOD 5134
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH OF CLOTH, TEARING; TONGUE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the tearing strength of woven
cloth which has approximately the same tearing strength in both the warp and
filling directions.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
be a rectangle of cloth 3 by 8 inches (76 by 203 mm). No selvage shall be
included in the sample tested.

unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Testing machine as described in Method 5100, except for the following:
4.1.1.1 The face of the jaws shall measure 1 inch (25 mm) by 2 inches (51 mm)
or more with the long dimension perpendicular to the direction of application of
the load.
4.1.1.2 All machine attachments for determining maximum loads shall be

disengaged during “this test.
4.2 Method cited.

Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The short distance of the specimen shall be

parallel to the warp yarns for the warp tests and parallel to the filling yarns
for the filling tests. No two specimens for warp tests shall contain the same
warp yarns, nor shall any two specimens for the filling tests contain the same
filling yarns. A 3-inch (76 mm) cut shall be made at the center of and perpendicular
to a short side of the specimen forming tongues or cut strips.

METHOD 5134
5.2 The machine, when used for a given specimen, shall be of such capacity
that the maximum force required to tear the specimen is not greater than 85
percent or less than 15 percent of the rated capacity.
5.3 The specimen shall be centered in the machine with 1 tongue or cut strip
specimen in each clamp. The machine shall tear a distance of 3 to 4 inches (76
mm to 102 mm). The machine shall be started, and the force necessary to tear
the cloth shall be observed by means of an autographic recording device.
5.4 If a specimen slips between the jaws, breaks, or tears in a direction other
than that of the original cut, or if, for any reason attributable to faulty
technique, an individual measurement falls markedly below the average test result
for the sample unit, such a result shall be discarded and another specimen shall
be tested.
6. REPORT
6.1 The tearing strength of the test specimen shall be the average of the
5 highest peak loads of resistance (not including the original peak) registered
during the separation of the tear. The tearing strength of the sample unit
shall be the average of the results obtained from the 5 specimens tested in
each of the warp and filling directions, and shall be reported to the nearest
1 pound (to the nearest 1 N).
6.2 Each individual tear strength value used to calculate the average shall
also be reported.

METHOD 5200
July 20, 1978
STIFFNESS OF CLOTH , DIRECTIONAL; HANGING HEART LOOP METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the direction flex-stiff-
ness of cloth and is especially applicable where fabrics are to be tested
at extreme temperatures as well as at normal temperatures. It is also
applicable to extremely pliable fabrics.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 10 inches (254 mm) by 1 inch
(25 mm) with the long dimension parallel to the yarns to be tested. The specimens
shall be cut from the smoothest area possible which has not been previously
folded or in any manner deformed.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, ten specimens

from each of the warp and filling direction shall be tested from each sample
unit l
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Flat bar. Flat bar, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, about 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide,
and 12-1/2 inches (318 mm) long, mounted horizontally 12 inches (305 mm) above
the platform base (see Figure 5200).
4.2 Scale graduated in 1/32 inch (1 mm).
4.3 Cellulose tape, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide.
4.4 Suitable timing device.
5. PROCEDURE

shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Atmospheric Conditions as specified
5.2 A strip of cellulose tape shall be cut 3 inches (76 mm) in length
and placed crosswise on one end of the specimen as shown in Figure 5200.
Care shall be taken that the end of the specimen is even with the edge of
the tape and that it is not unduly deformed in handling. The inner edge
of the tape shall be mounted on one side of the bar even with the upper

METHOD 5200
edge of the bar and with the surface of the cloth flush against the bar.
The other end of the specimen shall then be brought under the bar and
fastened as above to the opposite side of the bar. In this manner a loop
shall be formed, whose plane is perpendicular to the length of the sus-
pension bar.
5.3 The distance from the top of the bar to the lowest point of the
heart-shaped loop shall be measured 1 minute after the specimen has been
placed in this position. The measurements shall be made to the nearest
1/32 inch (1 mm).
5.4 One-half of the required number of specimens from each of the warp
and filling directions from each sample unit shall be tested with the same
surface of the cloth on the inside of the loop. The other half of the
specimens from each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested
with the opposite side of the cloth inside the loop.
5.5 The distance from the top of the bar to the lowest point of the
heart-shaped loop is an inverse measure of the stiffness of the specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 The stiffness of the sample unit shall be the average of the re-
sults obtained from the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling
directions and shall be reported separately to the nearest 1/32 inch
(1 mm) l
reported.

METHOD 5200
FIGURE 5200

METHOD 5202
July 20, 1978
STIFFNESS OF CLOTH, DIRECTIONAL; CANTILEVER BENDING METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the directional flex-

stiffness of cloth by employing the principle of cantilever bending of
the cloth. Small differences in stiffness may be determined by this method,
but it is not well suited for testing extremely pliable fabrics.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

shall be a rectangle of cloth 2 inches by 1 inch (51 mm by 25 mm) with the
long dimension parallel to the yarns to be tested. The specimen shall be cut
from the smoothest area possible which has not been previously folded or in
any manner deformed.
3. NUMBER OF DETERMINAIONS
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, ten specimens

in each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS (see Figure 5202)
4.1 Specimen vise. Specimen vise, “V”, at least 1 inch (25 mm) wide, to which
the pointer indicator “I2 ” is attached, and which can be rotated in a clock-
wise direction alternately by means of a hand crank or motor about the
point 0, at a rate of 60 degrees per minute.
4.2 Pendulum weighing system. Pendulum weighing system, including an

angular deflection scale pointer indicator “I1”, adjustable bending plate
“Q” for contacting the free end of the specimen, and a series of detachable
weights “M” calibrated to the pendulum system. This system shall be pivoted
for nearly frictionless rotation about the point 0.
4.3 Angular deflection scale. Angular deflection scale calibrated in degrees

of arc which will indicate the difference in the angles through which the vise
has been turned and the load of the pendulum has been deflected.
4.4 Fixed load scale. Fixed load scale which measures the deflection 0 of
the pendulum system, calibrated to read directly 100 L sin θ, where L is the
distance between the center of rotation 0, and the center of the applied load
M. Thus, M times the load scale reading divided by 100 gives the bending
moment directly.

METHOD 5202
5. PROCEDURE

shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Atmospheric Conditions as
specified in Section 4 of this Standard.
5.2 The machine shall be placed in test position and leveled. A

suitable moment weight shall be placed on the pendulum and then, if
necessary, the load scale adjusted to indicate zero. The moment
weight applicable to a given cloth may be determined by trial. The
bending plate shall be set to a 1/2 inch (13 mm) span between the edge
of the vise and the nearest edge of the bending plate. The motor shall
be started and kept running throughout the test since its vibration minimizes
friction effects in the weighing system. However, during the initial portion
of the test, it shall be disengaged.
5.3 The specimen shall be clamped firmly in the vise and the long
edge parallel to the face of the dial plate. Care shall be taken that
the specimen is not unduly deformed in handling. The face surface of
the specimen (weave face, finished side, coated side, etc.) shall be
placed upward in the vise.
5.4 Sufficient load shall be applied to the specimen by turning the

hand crank to show a l-percent load reading. The angle pointer shall
then be set to zero and subsequent load readings reduced by one division.
5.5 The motor engaging lever shall be held down and the load scale
readings taken at 10 degree intervals up to 90 degree deflection or until
the angle of bend specified for the test is reached.
5.6.1 The stiffness shall be calculated in one or more of the following

ways as specified in the procurement document:
5.6.1.1 Bending moment in.-lb (N·m) - The bending moment shall be that
applied with the specimen is bent to a 60 degree angular deflection and
Bending moment, inch-pounds = load scale reading X moment weight
100
Bending moment, N·m = Bending moment, in.-lb. X 0.113

METHOD 5210
5.2 Immediately after removing the weight, the creased specimen shall
be hung over the mounted wire and allowed to recover for 3 minutes. The
crease measurement shall be the length of the vertical projection of the
fabric ends on the graduated scale.
5.3.1 The crease recovery shall be calculated as follows:

Crease recovery, percent =
Where:
O = Original measurement.
C = Measurement after crease.
6. REPORT
6.1 The crease resistance of the sample unit shall be the average of
the results obtained from the specimens tested in each of the warp and
filling directions and shall be reported separately to the nearest 1.0
percent.

METHOD 5202
FIGURE 5202

METHOD 5204
July 20, 1978
STIFFNESS OF CLOTH, DIRECTIONAL; SELF-WEIGHTED CANTILEVER METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the directional flex-stiffness

of cloth. It is applicable where cloth is to be tested at extreme temperatures
as well as under standard conditions.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) by 6 to
12 inches (152 to 305 mm) with the longer dimension parallel to the direction
of the yarns being tested. The specimen shall be cut with clean straight edges.
The specimen shall be selected from material which has not been creased or
folded in any manner.

unit.
4. APPARATUS (Figure 5204)
4.1 Two rolls, each one inch in diameter and approximately 4.25 inches (108
mm) in length held together by spring pressure, one of which shall be turned
slowly be means of a worm drive. The line of contact of the rolls shall coincide
with the axis of rotation of the supporting framework.
4.2 Pointer attached to the framework to indicate the relative angular position
of the framework with respect to a rotating circular scale calibrated in degrees.
4.3 Slow gear adjustment for convenient rotating of the framework and rolls
clockwise and counter-clockwise. The instrument shall be adjusted to operate
at a uniform rate of one revolution per minute + 5 seconds.
4.4 Scale, graduated to 0.1 mm and attached to a metal base, suitable for
measuring the extended length of the mounted specimen, i.e., the distance from
the nip of the rolls to the end of the specimen above the rolls.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Testing will be performed under standard conditions in accordance with

Section 4 of this standard and other conditions as may be specified in the
applicable procurement document.

METHOD 5204
5.2 The measure of directional flex-stiffness shall be the length of the

specimen remaining above the nip of the rolls which, when the test instrument
is rotated clockwise and counter-clockwise through 90 degrees ± 2 degrees, just
falls to the left and right of the line perpendicular to the nip of the rolls.
It is this length of specimen which yields the flexibility criteria being
measured. The specimen shall be considered to have fallen to the right or
left when the specimen, during the course of clockwise and counter-clockwise
rotation, passes across the line perpendicular to the nip of the rolls as
indicated by the pointer fastened to the rotating framework.
5.3 This length of the specimen shall be determined as follows:
5.3.1 Initial adjustment of test instrument.
5.3.1.1 The apparatus shall be placed in the test position and leveled
with the axis of the clamping surface (nip of the rolls) horizontal and
the pointer, fastened to the rotating framework, in the vertical position.
5.3.1.2 One end of the specimen shall be inserted between the rolls with
the lengthwise edges of the specimen perpendicular to the nip of the rolls.
5.3.1.3 The specimen shall be positioned and shall be of sufficient length

to allow it to bend to the left of the line perpendicular to the nip of the
rolls, which when the apparatus is rotated, with continuous uniform motion
in the clockwise direction it will fall to the right of the perpendicular line.
5.3.1.4 At the point the specimen falls to the right, the instrument shall
be stopped and the adjustable circular scale moved to make the zero position
on the scale coincide with the pointer fastened to the rotating framework.
The instrument shall then be rotated with continuous uniform motion ± 2 degrees
from this point in the counter-clockwise direction. The specimen should not
fall to the left of the perpendicular line at this point.
5.3.1.5 If the specimen falls to the left then the instrument shall be
rotated in the clockwise direction until the pointer is vertical. The specimen
shall be shortened and reset with a bend to the left and the above procedure
in 5.3.1.4, repeated.
5.3.2 Determination of flex-stiffness.
5.3.2.1 After initial adjustment the instrument is rotated until the pointer
is vertical. The length of the specimen is shortened by a small increment, set
with a bend to the left and the instrument is rotated with continuous uniform
motion clockwise until the specimen falls to the right of the perpendicular line.
The instrument is stopped and the zero position of the adjustable scale is made to
coincide with the pointer. The instrument is rotated, with continuous uniform
motion, in the counter-clockwise direction 90 ± 2 degrees when the instrument
is immediately reversed in the clockwise direction and rotated, with continuous

METHOD 5204
uniform motion, to return the point to zero. The specimen shall have fallen
immediately to the left of perpendicular at 90 ± 2 degrees and shall fall
immediately to the right of the perpendicular as the pointer reaches zero.
5.3.2.2 If the specimen does not fall to the left when it is rotated the
required 90 ± 2 degrees in the counter-clockwise direction the pointer is
rotated to the vertical position, the specimen is shortened another small
increment and the procedure in 5.3.2.1 repeated.
5.3.2.3 When the specimen has reached the length such that it falls to the
left and right of the line perpendicular to the nip of the rolls the instrument
is stopped with the pointer in a vertical position.
5.3.2.4 Without tension the specimen above the rolls shall be extended and
the length measured from the nip of the rolls to the end of the extended specimen,
to the nearest mm.
5.3.3 The length of the extended specimen is recorded as the directional

flex-stiffness of the specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 The directional flex-stiffness of the sample unit tested shall be reported
as the average of the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling directions.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A self-weighted cantilever machine of the type described in this method
is manufactured by Thwing-Albert Instrument Company, 10960 Dutton Road,
Philadelphia, PA 19154. It is identified as the Clark Paper Softness-Stiffness
Tester .

METHOD 5204
FIGURE 5204

METHOD 5206
July 20, 1978
STIFFNESS OF CLOTH, DRAPE AND FLEX;

CANTILEVER BENDING METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the drape stiffness (bending
length) and flex (flexural rigidity) of cloth by employing the principle of
cantilever bending of the cloth under its own weight. It is especially
applicable where cloths are to be tested at extreme temperatures as well as
at standard conditions. This method is not considered suitable for testing
knitted cloths or very soft lightweight woven cloths. The method is not
recommended for cloths when the specimen twists more than 45 degrees.
Method 5200 is preferred for cloths in which the specimen twists for more
than 45 degrees.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be a rectangular strip of cloth 6 ± 1/2 inches
(152 ± 13 mm) long and 1 inch (25 mm) wide, prepared as described in 5.2.

unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 The apparatus shall consist essentially of a horizontal platform,

an indicator, a weight or specimen clamp, scale, and pointer, as shown
in figure 5206.
4.1.1 Horizontal platform. The horizontal platform shall be not less than
1-1/2 by 6 inches (38 by 152 mm) in area and has a smooth, low-friction, flat
surface such as polished metal or plastic. A leveling bulb or other means for
determining that the platform is horizontal before conducting a test shall be
incorporated in the platform.
4.1.2 Indicator. The indicator is inclined at an angle of 41-1/2 degrees

below the plane of the surface of the platform. This should consist of 2
guidelines not less that 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) apart, so that the tip of the
specimen can pass between them. It may be formed by the end of a hollow stand

METHOD 5206
on which the horizontal platform is mounted. A rectangular opening in the

sloped end of the hollow stand makes it possible to measure cloths which
twist when cut into strips. The length depends on the range of stiffness to
be measured. The apparatus may be designed with a longer indicator than is
necessary for a 6-inch (152 mm) specimen, or an extension may be used.
4.1.3 Weight. The weight consists of a metal bar not less than 1 by 6
inches (25 by 152 mm) in area and about 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. In conducting
the test, the weight is placed on the specimen so that the leading edges of the
specimen and bar coincide and slide out with the specimen.
4.1.4 Specimen clamp. A specimen clamp consists of a flat metal base plate
1 inch (25 mm) wide and approximately 8 inches (203 mm) long with a reference
line or pointer located 6 inches (152 mm) from the leading edge and at right
angles to the long dimension, and a flat metal spring for holding the specimen
against the base plate. A hand grip for moving the specimen and clamp along the
top surface of the horizontal platform may be used (see figure 5206).
4.1.5 Measurement scale and pointer. The scale and pointer are provided for
measuring the overhang of the specimen. The scale may be attached to the platform
and the pointer to the weight or specimen holder. The scale should be a 6 inch
(152 mm) scale with 0.1 inch (2.54 mm) graduation coincident with the leading
edge or edge of the indicator when attached to the platform.
4.2 Analytical or calibrated balance. Analytical or calibrated balance capable

of weighing the specimen to an accuracy of 0.01 g.
5. PROCEDURE
be performed under standard conditions in accordance with Section 4 of this
Standard.
5.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the face

side of the cloth shall be on the outside of the curvature when tested.
5.2 Preparation of specimen. The long dimension of the cloth shall be

parallel to the warp direction for warp tests and parallel to the filling
direction for filling tests. For some material, a longer specimen may be
required to obtain a satisfactory reading on the apparatus (see 5.6). The
specimen shall be accurately cut from a smooth area of the cloth which has
not previously been folded or deformed in any manner. The specimen should
be handled as little as possible both before and during the test.

METHOD 5206
5.3 The apparatus shall be on a table in such a reamer that the platform
and inclined reference lines are level and at eye height.
5.4 When a specimen clamp is used, the specimen shall be placed length-
wise in the clamp with the side up that is to tested, so that the clamped
end of the specimen is exactly even with the reference line on the base of
the clamp. With the normal 6 inch (152 mm) specimen, the alignment may
alternately be made by adjusting the specimen so that the free end of the
specimen and the front end of the clamp coincide. The specimen clamp and
specimen shall be placed on the platform so that the reference line on the
clamp coincides with the zero point on the scale.
5.5 When the weight is used, the specimen shall be placed on the platform
with the weight on top of it so that the leading edges coincide.
5.6 The clamp or weight together with the specimen shall be moved slowly
and steadily against the ruler or pointer until the bottom of the free edge
of the specimen drops to the 41-1/2 degree indicator when viewed parallel
to the surface of the slope or guide lines. A reading shall be taken from
the scale to the nearest 0.05 inch (1.27 mm). For a 6-inch (152 mm) specimen
this is the overhang of the specimen. For a longer specimen, the length in
excess of 6 inches (152 mm) is added to the scale reading to obtain the length
of overhang.
5.6.1 If the specimen has a slight tendency to twist, the reading shall
be taken when the midpoint of the leading edge is at the 41-1/2 degree angle.
5.7 When the 6-inch (152 mm) specimen does not bend sufficiently to permit
a reading, a longer specimen (see 5.2) shall be used. When the longer specimen
is used, it is necessary to increase the length of the indicator sufficiently
to accommodate the longer specimen.
5.8 Determination of weight of cloth (ounces per square yard) (g/m2). The
specimen shall be weighed to the nearest 0.01 g on an analytical balance or
directly on a calibrated balance.

5.9.1 Ounces per square yard = Weight (g) x 45.72
Length (in) x width (in)
2
g/m = Weight (g) x 1 000 000
Length (mm) x width (mm)

METHOD 5206
5.9.2 The drape stiffness (bending length), c, inches shall be one-half
of the length of the overhang of the specimen when it reaches the 41-1/2
degree slope.
Drape stiffness, c, centimeters = Drape stiffness, inches x 2.54
5.9.3 Flex stiffness (flexural rigidity), G, in inch-pounds shall be

3 -4
G = c x W x 0.482 x 10
Where: c = Drape stiffness, inches, (see 5.9.2)

W = Weight of cloth in ounces per sq. yd., (see 5.8 and 5.9)
Flex stiffness, G, milligram-centimeters = G, inch-pounds x 1.152 x 10 6
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the drape
or flex stiffness of the sample unit shall be the arithmetic average of the
directions, and shall be reported separately.
6.1.1 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also be reported.
6.1.2 When a single drape or flex stiffness value for combined warp and
filling directions is specified in the procurement document, it shall be
reported as the geometric mean of the two arithmetic averages for the warp
and filling directions as follows:
GO =
GO = Overall drape or flex stiffness.
Gw = Average warp drape or flex stiffness.

Gf = Average filling drape or flex stiffness.
6.2 Drape stiffness of the sample unit shall be reported to the nearest
0.01 inch (0.25 mm).
6.3 Flex stiffness of the sample unit shall be reported to the nearest
-4
0.1 x 10 inch-pound.
7. NOTES
7.1 A Drape-Flex Stiffness Tester of the type shown in Figure 5206

may be purchased from J. J. Press, 5788 Eldergardens Street. San Diego,
CA 92120.

METHOD 5206
FIGURE 5206 - Stiffness tester.

METHOD 5210
July 20, 1978
CREASE RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; COLD PRESS RECOVERY METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of fabrics

to creasing which might occur during normal wear.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be rectangle of cloth cut accurately 40 mm in length

and 10 mm in width. The yarns to be tested shall be parallel to the long
dimension of the specimen. The specimen shall not have been previously folded
or in any manner deformed.

in each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS (see Figure 5210)
4.1 Scale. Scale graduated in increments of 1 mm and mounted on a horizontal

surface.
4.2 Fine wire of No. 24 gage American or Brown & Sharp, over 1 inch (25 mm)
in length, mounted in a horizontal plane approximately 1 inch (25 mm) above the
plane of the scale. The wire shall be parallel to the scale graduations and
when viewed from directly above shall cover the zero scale graduation.
4.3 Laboratory tweezers.
4.4 Weight. A 500 g weight with a flat surface of such dimensions that the
total weight of 500 g can be applied to the folded specimen.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The center of the specimen shall be placed over the wire and allowed to
relax for 3 minutes undisturbed by wind, currents or drafts. A center mark prior
to mounting may aid in arranging the specimen in a balanced and horizontal specimen
on the wire. The original measurement shall be the length of the vertical
projection of the cloth ends of the graduated scale. The specimen shall then
be folded exactly in half, using tweezers, so as to form a rectangle 20 mm by
10 mm and placed under the flat surface of a 500 g weight for 5 minutes.

METHOD 5202
5.6.1.2 Load scale reading, percent (percentage of the maximum bending
moment). The load scale reading, when the specimen is bent to a 60 degree
angular deflection, shall be recorded.
5.6.1.3 A plot of the data shall be made on coordinate paper with the
“load scale readings” at every 10 degrees up to 90 degrees and the calculated
corresponding “bending moment” as the ordinate, and the “angular deflection” as
the abscissa.
5.6.1.4 Load, lb (mg) - The pounds (mg) load shall be that applied
when the specimen is bent to a 60 degree angular deflection and shall be
Load, lb. (mg) = Load scale reading X moment weight

100 X 0.5 in. (12.7 mm)
6. REPORT
6.1 The stiffness of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling directions,
respectively, and shall be reported to the nearest 0.001 lb. (1 mg) for
pounds (mg) load, and to the nearest scale division for the load scale
reading.
6.2 The report shall include the moment weight, length of span, and
specimen dimensions.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A cantilever bending machine of the type described in this method

Is manufactured by the Tinius Olsen Testing Machine Co., 2100 Easton
Road, Willow Grove, PA 19090.

METHOD 5210
FIGURE 5210

METHOD 5212
July 20, 1978
CREASE RESISTANCE OF CLOTH, ANGLE OF RECOVERY METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the recovery of cloth from
creasing which might occur during normal wear.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in length,
and 1/2 inch (13 mm) in width. The long dimension shall be parallel to the
filling direction for filling tests, and parallel to the warp direction for warp
tests. The specimen shall not have been previously folded or in any manner
deformed.
3.1 Cloths having a definite face side. Unless otherwise specified in

the procurement document, three specimens from each of the warp and filling
directions shall be tested from each sample unit.
3.2 Cloths having no definite face side. Unless otherwise specified in

the procurement document, six specimens, three on each side of the cloth from
each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested from each sample
unit.
4. APPARATUS (see fig. 5212)
4.1 Disk and protractor. A disk and a protractor mounted coaxially on a

vertical support and free to rotate about a horizontal axis.
4.1.1 The center of the disk and the protractor shall be marked and a
vertical guide line shall be drawn on the support from the center mark to
the base.
4.1.2 The disk shall be provided with a zero point which will indicate
on the protractor the angle formed by the creased specimen when it is
mounted on the clamp.
4.2 Clamp. A clamp shall be attached to the face of the disk to support the
specimen holder with an adjustment to provide for cloths of different thicknesses.

METHOD 5212
4.3 Specimen holder. A specimen holder consisting of 2 superimposed metal

leaves of different lengths. The shorter top leaf shall not be greater than
0.007 inch (0.18 mm) in thickness. There shall be a line drawn on it parallel
to and exactly 18 mm from the free end.
4.4 Plastic press. A plastic press similar in construction to the specimen

holder, except that leaves shall be equal in length but slightly wider.
4.4.1 Plastic platform. A plastic platform constructed of similar plastic

7/8 inch (23 mm) in length and the same width as the press, and permanently
attached to the end of the upper jaw of the press.
4.5 Weight. A 1-1/2 pound (0.68 kg) weight of such dimension that its total
weight can be applied to the platform.
4.6 Laboratory tweezers.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Using the tweezers, one end of the specimen shall be placed between
the leaves of the specimen holder directly under the 18 mm mark, and the
second end shall be folded over the shorter metal leaf and brought up even
with the first end.
5.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, using the tweezers, specimens from

cloths with a definite face side shall be placed in the holder so that the
face of the cloth is on the outside of the fold. When the cloth has no
definite face, duplicate measurements shall be made with each side of the
cloth on the outside of the fold.
5.2 The center of the specimen, at which point the crease shall be formed,
shall lie 20 mm beyond the end of the shorter metal leaf.
5.2.1 Care shall be taken that the fingers do not touch this region of
the cloth.
5.3 The specimen and holder shall then be placed between the jaws of the
plastic press with the shorter leaf uppermost and with the jaw to which the
platform is attached above and parallel to the longer strip of the holder.
5.3.1 The specimen and holder shall be so positioned that the fold of
the specimen shall be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the inner edge of
the platform.
5.4 The press shall then be placed on a flat surface, and a 1-1/2 pound
(0.68 kg) weight placed on the platform and allowed to remain for 5 minutes
to form a crease in the specimen.

METHOD 5212
5.5 The weight shall then be lifted from the press and the specimen
older and specimen transferred from the jaws of the press to the clamp
on the tester disk.
5.6 The crease shall be located exactly at the spot marking the center
of the disk, and the free end of the specimen aligned with the guide line
on the vertical support.
5.6.1 The alignment shall be readjusted as the specimen relaxes.
5.7 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the crease

angle between the ends of the specimen shall be read from the protractor
at the end of 5 minutes.
5.8.1 The crease recovery of the specimen shall be calculated as follows:

Crease recovery, percent = crease angle (degrees) x 100
180 degrees
6. REPORT
6.1 Cloths having a definite face side. The crease recovery of the sample
unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested in
each of the warp and filling directions, and shall be reported separately to
6.2 Cloths having no definite face side. The crease recovery of the sample
unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested on
each side of the warp and filling directions, and shall be reported separately
reported.

METHOD 5212
FIGURE 5212

METHOD 5214
July 20, 1978
WRINKLE RECOVERY OF FABRICS; APPEARANCE METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for evaluating the appearance of textile

fabrics after induced wrinkling. This method is useful in evaluating
fabrics with wrinkle resistant finishes.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 11 inches by 6 inches

(279 mm by 152 mm) with the long dimension in the warp direction for woven
fabrics or wale direction for knitted fabrics. The face of the fabric, if
any, shall be identified.
2.2 When a standard sample has been established, one specimen from the
standard sample shall be tested along with the specimens from the sample
unit.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Wrinkle Tester (see figures 5214A and B).

4.1.1 The Wrinkle Tester (see 7.1) consists of two metal flanges with
one of the flanges fixed to a heavy metal base with a vertical shaft at
its center. The second flange with a hole at its center is attached to a
hollow cylinder, and can be slid down the vertical shaft on the first
flange. A pin is attached to the vertical shaft so that the top flange
can be locked in a raised position. The pin passes through a slot in the
hollow cylinder. The slot is in the shape of a helix around the hollow
cylinder so that as the top flange is lowered it makes a half turn from the
raised to the lowered position. The top flange assembly is machined to
weigh 0.5 ± 0.005 kg (see 7.2). Two steel springs and clamps are provided to
enable the specimen to be secured around the flanges.
4.2 Three weights. 1.1 pound (0.5 kg); 2.2 pounds (1.0 kg); 4.4 pounds
(2.0 kg).

METHOD 5214
4.3 Lighting equipment for viewing specimens (see figure 5214C)
4.3.1 Lighting equipment shall consist of the following:
4.3.1.1 Two 8-foot (2.44 m) type F96 CW (Cool White) Preheat Rapid Start
Fluorescent Lamps (without baffle or glass).
4.3.1.2 One white enamel reflector (without baffle or glass).
4.3.1.3 One general-type swatch mount, spring-loaded, fabricated from

light sheet metal (22 ga.).
4.3.1.4 Plywood mounting board 1/4 inch (6 mm), outside dimensions 6 feet by
4 feet (1.8 m by 1.2 m), painted gray to match No. 2 rating on International Gray
Scale for Staining.
4.3.1.5 The lighting equipment shall be arranged as shown in Figure

5214C. The overhead fluorescent light shall be the only light source for
the viewing board. In addition, to prevent reflected light from the side
walls near the viewing board interfering with the evaluation, the side
walls shall be painted black or black-out curtains shall be mounted on
either side of the viewing board.
4.4 Three Dimensional Durable Press Replicas (see 7.1).
4.5 Stop-Clock.
4.6 Clothes hanger with clips.
5. PROCEDURE

tested shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in
accordance with Section 4 of this Standard.
5.2 The top flange of the wrinkle tester shall be raised and held in
position with the locking pin.
5.3 One long edge of the specimen shall be wrapped around the top flange
with face side of the specimen on the outside and shall be secured in
position using the steel spring and clamp. The ends of the specimen shall
be so arranged that they are opposite the opening in the spring clamp.
5.4 The opposite long edge of the specimen shall be wrapped around the
bottom flange and secured as described in 5.3.

METHOD 5214
5.5 The specimen shall be adjusted so that it lies smooth without sagging
between the top and bottom flanges. Stretching shall be avoided when mounting
the specimen.
5.6 The locking pin shall then be withdrawn and the top flange gently
lowered until it comes to rest.
5.7 A total of 7.7 pounds (3.5 kg) weight shall be immediately placed on the
top flange and the stop-clock set for 20 minutes shall be started.
5.8 After 20 minutes, the weights and the spring clamps shall be removed.
The top clamp shall then be raised and locked. The specimen shall be gently
removed from the tester so as not to distort any induced wrinkles.
5.9 The shorter edge of the specimen shall be placed under the clips on
a clothes hanger with a minimum of handling and shall be allowed to hang
vertically in the long direction for 24 hours. The specimens shall then
be evaluated.
5.10 Evaluation.
5.10.1 The specimen shall be mounted on the viewing board with the warp
or wale in the vertical direction. To facilitate comparative rating, the
durable press replicas shall be placed on each side of the specimen as shown
in Figure 5214C.
5.10.2 The observer shall stand directly in front of the specimen, 4

feet (1.2 m) away from the viewing board.
5.10.3 The appearance of the specimen shall be compared with the replicas
and given the numerical rating of the replica which most nearly matches the
appearance of the specimen. The ratings shall be as follows:
5 - Appearance equivalent to the DP-5 Replica

3.5 - Appearance equivalent to the DP-3.5 Replica
1 - Appearance equivalent to or inferior to the DP-1 Replica
Replica 5 represents the smoothest appearance, whereas replica 1 represents the

poorest appearance.
5.10.4 Three trained observers shall rate each specimen independently.

The average of the three ratings shall be taken as the numerical rating
of the specimen.

METHOD 5214
5.10.5 When a specimen from the standard sample was also tested, it shall
be rated as described in 5.10.1, 5.10.2, 5.10.3 and 5.10.4.
6. REPORT
6.1 The numerical rating of the sample unit shall be the average of the
specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 of a rating.
6.1.1 The individual values used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.
6.2 When a standard sample was tested, the numerical rating of the
standard sample shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 of a rating.
6.3 Unless otherwise specified, the wrinkle recovery of the sample unit
shall be reported as “pass” or “fail” based on the following criteria.
Pass: The average numerical rating of the sample unit is equal

to or higher than that of the standard sample.
Fail: The average numerical rating of the sample unit is less

than that of the standard sample.
Pass: The average numerical rating of the sample unit is equal

to or higher than the specified limit.
Fail: The average numerical rating of the sample unit is less than
the specified limit.
7. NOTES
7.1 The AATCC wrinkle tester described in this method and the AATCC
3-Dimensional Durable Press Replicas may be obtained from:
AATCC
P.O. BOX 12215
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709
7.2 If the top flange does not weigh 1.1 pound (0.5 kg), sufficient weights
in addition to the weight specified in the method shall be added so that
the total weight of the specimen is 8.8 pounds (4 kg).

METHOD 5214
FIGURE 5214A - AATCC Wrinkle Tester

METHOD 5214

METHOD 5214
FIGURE 5214C - Lighting equipment for viewing test specimens

METHOD 5216
July 20, 1978
DURABLE PRESS ON FABRICS, SHIRTS AND TROUSERS;
EVALUATION OF: CLOTH APPEARANCE, SEAM APPEARANCE,

FLY APPEARANCE, CREASE APPEARANCE AND SOIL RELEASE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for evaluating the cloth, seam, fly (applicable
to trousers) and crease appearance and soil release criteria in fabric, shirts
and trousers after laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
in the sample unit shall consist of a 4 pound (1.8 kg) load comprised of
fabric, shirts, trousers (as applicable) and ballast pieces. Fabric specimens
shall consist of three 15 inch by 15 inch (381 mm by 381 mm) samples
pressed and cured (as applicable) with a warpwise crease through the
center of the specimens.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, all fabric,

shirts or trousers (as applicable) that make up the 4 pound (1.8 kg) load
shall be rated.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Laundering apparatus.

4.1.1 Automatic washing machine (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Automatic tumble dryer (see 7.1).
4.1.3 Detergent. AATCC standard detergent 124 or equivalent (see 7.2).
4.1.4 Mineral oil (see 7.3).
4.1.5 Blotting paper. Standard blotting paper (see 7.4).

METHOD 5216
4.1.6 Weight. 5 pound (2.3 kg) weight, 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) in diameter.
4.1.7 Polyethylene film. 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm) piece of poly-

ethylene film.
4.1.8 Eye dropper. Straight dropper with 0.2 ml capacity per 5 drops.
4.1.9 Ballast pieces. 3 by 3 feet (914 by 914 mm) hemmed pieces of type 128
cotton or polyester/cotton sheeting to be added to applicable test specimens,
to make a 4 pound (1.8 kg) load.
4.2 Evaluation area and apparatus for viewing and evaluation of test specimens.
4.2.1 Evaluation shall be conducted in a room where the only source of light
will be that specified in 4.2.2. To prevent unwanted reflection of light that
will interfere with the observation, the walls of the room may be painted a
flat non-reflective black, or blackout curtains may be hung on each side of
the viewing areas.
4.2.2 Overhead lighting equipment (see Figure 5216A).
4.2.2.1 Lighting equipment shall consist of the following:

4.2.2.1.1 Two 8-foot type F96 (Cool white) Preheat Rapid Start Fluorescent
lamps (without baffle or glass).
4.2.2.1.2 One white enamel reflector (without baffle or glass).
4.2.3 One swatch mount.
4.2.4 Mounting board having outside dimensions of 6 feet by 4 feet (1.8 m

by 1.2 m) and painted gray to match No. 2 rating on International Gray Scale
for Staining.
4.2.5 A non-reflecting black topped table 35 ± 1 inches (889 ± 25 mm) high.

The table shall be at least 30 by 24 inches (762 by 610 mm) with the long
dimension parallel and adjacent to the viewing board.
4.2.6 AATCC three dimensional Durable Press Replicas (see 7.5).
4.2.7 AATCC photographic standards for evaluating single and double needle
stitching (see 7.5).
4.2.8 AATCC photograph standards for evaluating creases (see 7.5).

METHOD 5216
4.2.9 Deering Milliken photographic standards for evaluating stain or soil
release (see 7.5).
4.2.10 NARADCOM photographic standards for trouser flys (see 7.6).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Laundering of specimens. A 4 pound (1.8 kg) load comprised of fabric,

shirts or trousers (as applicable) and, when necessary, ballast pieces, shall be
placed in the washer. Unless otherwise specified, the washer shall be set
at the high water level, and a 10 minute wash on the wash and wear or permanent
press cycle. The water used shall have a hardness not greater than 50 parts
per million (PPM), and the wash water shall be at a temperature of 115° ± 5°F
(46° ± 3°C) with a cold rinse. When the washer has filled, add 140 grams of
detergent. Allow the washer to proceed automatically through the final spin
cycle. Remove the fabric, shirts or trousers (as applicable) immediately at the
completion of the final spin and separate the test specimens and ballast pieces,
when required, if tangled. Place the complete washed load in the dryer and dry at
the normal cycle and at a setting which generates an exhaust temperature range of
140° to 160°F (60 to 71°C). Operate the dryer until the load is dry and continue
tumbling 10 minutes with the heat turned off (cool-down cycle). Remove the load
immediately after the machine stops. Repeat the wash and dry cycle until the
load has completed the required number of cycles. At the completion of the
next to the last cycle, the test specimens shall be stained with mineral oil in
3 different spots. For fabric, the spots shall be placed in the center of the
sample: for shirts, the spots shall be placed on the tail; and for trousers they
shall be placed on the inside of one leg. Place the area to be stained on
blotting paper specified in 4.1.5. Using an eyedropper, place 5 drops of
mineral oil for each spot. Place a piece of polyethylene film over the oil, then
place a 5 pound (2.3 kg) weight on the film directly over the oil. Keep the
weight in place for 60 seconds. Remove the weight and the polyethylene film,
and wipe off the excess oil with clean tissue. Allow the test specimens to stand
undisturbed for at least 15 minutes, but not longer than 2 hours. Return the
stained test specimens and ballast pieces, when required, to the washing machine
and wash for the last complete washing and drying cycle. During conditioning and
during interruption of the wash and dry cycles the test specimens shall be hung
on a garment rack as follows:
Fabrics shall be folded at the crease, and shirts shall be placed on
hangers with all buttons fastened. Trousers shall be buttoned or the
slide fastener closed, and the legs shall be folded along the crease,
and suspended by the leg bottoms in a pants holder or similar device.
5.2 Evaluation. Three trained observers shall evaluate each fabric,

shirt or pair of trousers in the sample unit for appearance criteria
independent of each other.
METHOD 5216
Fabric. Fabric samples shall be mounted on the viewing board 5 feet

(1.5 m) from the floor with the crease in a vertical position. The crease
shall be rated in the open position.
Shirts. The shirt shall be placed on a clothes hanger with all buttons
fastened and mounted on the viewing board with the center of the garment
approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) from the floor and in such a manner that it
lies flat on the board.
Trousers. The trousers shall be buttoned or the slide fastener closed and
placed on a clothes hanger, similar to that used to hang women’s skirts, by
spring clips at the waistband. The trousers shall hang with the waistband
extended so that the front lays against the back and leg creases fall in
the center of the leg as they face the observer. The trousers shall be
suspended on the viewing board in such a manner that the trousers lay flat
on the surface with the point midway between the top of the waistband and
the lower hem of the leg 5 feet (1.5 m) from the floor.
For proper evaluation, the observers shall stand in front of the viewing
board at a distance of 4 feet (1.2 m).
5.2.1 Evaluation of cloth appearance. The overhead lighting equipment

specified in 4.2.2, and the cloth appearance standards specified in 4.2.6
shall be used. To facilitate comparative testing, the three dimensional
plastic replicas that most nearly match the cloth appearance of the fabric,
shirt or trousers shall be mounted on the board on each side of the fabric,
shirt or trousers. The cloth appearance of the fabric or garment being ob-
served shall be compared with the standards. The overall cloth appearance
of the shirt or trousers, front and back combined, shall be rated and assigned
the numerical value of the replica that most nearly matches the appearance of
the specimen.
The ratings shall be as follows:

3.5 - Appearance equivalent to the DP-3.5 Replica
1 - Appearance equivalent to or inferior to the DP-1 Replica
Standard 5 represents the best level of appearance while Standard 1 represents

the poorest level of appearance.
5.2.2 Evaluation of seam appearance. The overhead lighting equipment

specified in 4.2.2 and the photographic standards for evaluating single or
double needle stitching, as applicable, specified in 4.2.7 shall be used.
FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO 191A

METHOD 5216
To facilitate comparative testing, the seam standard shall be mounted on the
viewing board on the right side of the shirt or trousers, as applicable. AS
seen by the observer the seam standard will be on the left side of the shirt
or trousers, as applicable. Seams specified in the procurement document shall
be observed and compared with the standard. The appearance of each seam
specified in the procurement document shall be assigned the numerical value of
the standard that most nearly matches the seam in the specimen.
5 - Seam appearance equivalent to Standard 5

Standard 5 represents the best level of appearance while Standard 1
represents the poorest level of appearance.
5.2.3 Evaluation of fly-appearance (applicable to trousers only). The over-

head lighting equipment specified in 4.2.2, and the NARADCOM fly appearance
standards specified in 4.2.10 shall be used. To facilitate comparative testing,
the fly standard shall be mounted on the viewing board on the right side of the
trousers. As seen by the observer the fly standard will be on the left side
of the trousers. The fly appearance as specified in the procurement document shall
be observed and compared with the standard. The appearance of each fly shall be
assigned the numerical value of the standard that most nearly matches it.
5- Fly appearance equivalent to Standard 5

Standard 5 represents the best level of appearance while Standard 1 represents

the poorest level of appearance.
5.2.4 Evaluation of crease appearance. The overhead lighting equipment specified
in 4.2.2, and the crease appearance standards specified in 4.2.8 shall be used.
The fabric or garment being observed shall then be evaluated for pressed in creases
to facilitate comparative testing, the crease appearance standard shall be mounted
on the viewing board to the right center of the fabric, shirt or trousers, as
applicable. As seen by the observer the crease appearance standard will be on the
left side of the fabric, shirt or trousers, as applicable. The applicable fabric
or garment shall be adjusted as necessary in order that each crease area being
evaluated lies in a relaxed vertical position to allow for proper comparison to the
METHOD 5216
standard. Each crease area specified in the procurement document shall be compared
with the standard and assigned the numerical value of the standard that most nearly
matches it. Each garment crease area specified in the procurement document
shall be rated on an overall appearance basis and assigned a value accordingly,
i.e., creases on the back shall be rated in accordance with the overall
appearance of all other creases as a unit and not on an individual crease basis.
5.2.4.1 The appearance of the creases on the sample unit (fabric, shirt
or trousers) shall be compared with the numerical ratings specified in the
Photographic Standard for crease retention.
5 - Crease appearance equivalent to Standard 5

Standard 5 represents the best level of appearance of crease retention,

while Standard 1 represents the poorest appearance.
5.2.5 Evaluation of soil release. The overhead lighting

equipment specified in 4.2.2 and the soil release standards specified
in 4.2.9 shall be used. To facilitate comparative testing, the soil
release standard shall be mounted on the viewing board with the center
of the standard 45 inches (1.14 m) from the floor. The fabric, shirt or
trousers, as applicable, with the stained area visible, shall be placed
upon the black topped table and in front of the standard.
5.2.5.1 The stains on the sample unit shall be compared with the soil
release standard specified in 4.2.8, and shall be assigned the numerical
value of the standard that they most nearly match.
5 - Stain or soil equivalent to Standard Stain 5

Standard 5 represents the best stain removal, and Standard 1 the poorest
stain removal.
6. REPORT
6.1 No estimation of ratings falling between standards is allowed and

the full numerical rating of the nearest rating must be assigned.

METHOD 5216
6.2 Cloth, seam, fly (applicable to trousers) and crease appearance ratings. The
individual rating values assigned by each of the three observers for each applicable
characteristic on the sample unit (fabric, shirt or pair of trousers) shall also be
reported.
6.3 Soil release rating. One rating shall be assigned for all three
stains by each observer. The rating values assigned by each of the three
observers for each sample unit (fabric, shirt or pair of trousers) shall
also be reported.
6.4 If the test specimen does not meet the minimum requirements specified
in the procurement document for that characteristic tested for, it shall be
classified as “failing”.
7. NOTES
7.1 Recommended apparatus as specified in 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 is as follows:
For 4.1.1: Kenmore Automatic Washing Machine Model 600 available from
Sears, Roebuck and Company or similar washer.
For 4.1.2: Kenmore Automatic Dryer Model 600 available from Sears,
Roebuck and Company or similar dryer.
7.2 The AATCC standard detergent 124 is available from:
AATCC Technical Center, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.
7.3 An approved mineral oil is “Nujol” available from:
Plough Inc., Memphis, TN
7.4 The blotting paper is available from:
James River Paper Company
P.O. BOX 2218
Richmond, VA 23217
7.5 Replicas and Standards referenced in 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.8 and 4.2.9 are
available from:
The American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists, P.O. Box
12215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.
7.6 The NARADCOM photographic Standards for trouser flys are available from:
Defense Personnel Support Center
ATTN: DPSC-TTC
2800 South 20th Street
Philadelphia, PA 19101
FED. TEST METTHOD STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 5216
FIGURE 5216A - Overhead lighting equipment for viewing test specimens.
. .
METHOD 5220
July 20, 1978
FLEXIBILITY OF CLOTH AFTER LEACHING
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the change in flexibility

of cloth after leaching. It is applicable to untreated, treated, or coated
fabrics.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall have the dimensions required for the specified
stiffness evaluation test.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the number of

specimens tested from each sample unit shall be as required in the method of
test used for determining flexibility.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Water container. A water container or tank of such a shape and size
that the specimen can be submerged therein with all surfaces of the specimen
having free access to the water, and a ratio of the specimen to water shall be
not less than 1 to 100 by weight.
4.1.2 Means of supplying a continuous flow of water to the bottom of

the container at a temperature of 80° to 85°F (27° to 29°C) and at a rate
of about 1,000 ml per minute. Means shall also be provided at the container
top for disposing of the overflow.
4.1.3 Means of suspending the specimens in such a reamer that they do

not contact the container or each other during leaching.
4.1.4 Means for completely submerging the specimen.
4.1.5 Blotting paper. The blotting paper dimensions shall be 10 inches (254 mm)
square (see 7.1).
METHOD 5220
4.2 Methods Cited -
Method 5200, Stiffness of Cloth, Directional; Hanging Heart Loop

Method.
Method 5202, Stiffness of Cloth, Directional; Cantilever Bending

Method.
Method 5204, Stiffness of Cloth, Directional; Self-Weighted Canti-

lever Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The flexibility of the specimen shall be determined as described

in Methods 5200, 5202, or 5204, as specified in the procurement document.

shall be submerged in the immersion tank containing water at a temperature of
80° to 85°F (27° to 29°C) and allowed to remain immersed for a period of 24 hours.
5.3 At the end of the leaching period the specimen shall be mangled
flat between blotters, air-dried under standard atmospheric conditions,
and the flexibility again determined by the same method as used for de-
termining flexibility before leaching.
5.4 Care shall be taken in mounting the specimen for the initial and
after leaching flexibility tests that the specimen is positioned exactly
the same in regard to the bending direction (inside or outside, warp or
filling) of the fabric. When necessary for identification, one side of
the specimen shall be marked.
5.5.1 The change in flexibility shall be calculated as follows:

Change in flexibility, percent = O-E x 100 or E-O x 100
O O
Where:
O = Value before leaching.

E = Value after leaching.
6. REPORT
6.1 Change in flexibility of the sample unit shall be the average of

the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to

METHOD 5220
6.2 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also
be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Blotting paper may be obtained from the following:
Rochester Paper Co.

P. O. Box 185
Rochester, MN 48063
Sorg Paper Co.

901 Manchester Avenue
Middletown, OH 45042
Standard Paper Manufacturing Co.

First and Hull Street
Richmond, VA 23212
Hyman Viener & Sons
P. 0. BOX 36
Woodbine, MD 21797

METHOD 5230
July 20, 1978
FLEXING RESISTANCE OF COATED CLOTH
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of coated

cloth to flexing. The effects of the flexing are measured by the change
in water resistance of the cloth when subjected to hydrostatic pressure.
The method is recommended for testing coated cloth weighing up to 35
2
ounces per square yard (1186 g/m ).
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of coated cloth 7 by 7 inches (178

by 178 mm) formed into a cylinder 7 inches (178 mm) long and 2 inches
(51 mm) in diameter with approximately 5/8 inch (16 mm) overlap as shown
in Figure 5230. The height of the cylinder shall be formed to correspond
with the direction of the cloth to be tested.

of the sample unit shall be tested from each direction of the cloth.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Flexing machine. A flexing machine with one or more pairs of cylindrical
specimen mounts having the dimensions and relative positions shown in Figure
5230; ring clamps for holding the ends of the specimen in the mounts; motor
drive for changing the relative positions of the mounts from 5 inches (127 mm)
apart to 1/2 inch (13 mm) apart and back repeatedly at a rate of 150 to 175
cycles per minute.
4.1.2 The machine should be provided with a clutch to permit the motor
and speed reduction gear to run continuously while the specimens are being
conditioned, especially for low temperature testing when lubricants may
solidify.
4.2 Facilities for maintaining the air around the specimen at the
required temperature for conditioning and testing.

METHOD 5230
4.3 Method cited.
Method 5512, Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; High Range,

Hydrostatic Pressure Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The water resistance of the coated cloth specimens undergoing test shall
be measured as described in Method 5512. The surface of coated cloth to be
exposed to the water shall be as specified in the procurement document.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the specimens,

from 2.1 (other than specimens tested in 5.1), shall be subjected to 1500 flexes.

shall be conditioned and flexed at a temperature of 73° ± 2°F (23° ± 1°C).
5.4 The surface of the coated cloth to be on the outside of the cylinder
during the flexing test shall be as specified in the procurement document.
5.5 The cylindrical specimen shall be mounted on the machine by means of

the cylindrical specimen mounts and ring clamps and placed in the required
test atmosphere for a period of one hour before testing. At the end of the
conditioning period, the machine shall be started and the specimen flexed the
required number of flexes.
5.6 The specimen, after being subjected to the required number of

flexes, shall be examined visually for the presence of breaks or cracks in
the coating of the cloth.
5.7 The specimen shall then be removed from the machine and the hydrostatic
resistance shall be determined as required in 5.1 except that a reading shall
be made on each of two alternating quadrants of the flexed specimen. All of the
values obtained on the flexed specimens shall be averaged to obtain the water
resistance of the cloth (see para. 3.1 and 5.8).
5.8 Calculation. The loss in water resistance of the sample unit shall be
Loss in water resistance, percent =
Where: W = Initial water resistance of unflexed cloth (see 5.1).

F = Water resistance of cloth after flexing (see 5.7).

METHOD 5230
6. REPORT
6.1 Any breaks or cracks (see 5.6) shall be recorded for each specimen
tested.
6.2 The flex resistance of the sample unit shall be the loss in water
resistance due to flexing and shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent.
reported.

METHOD 5230

METHOD 5300
July 20, 1978
ABRASION RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; FLEXING, FOLDING BAR (STOLL) METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of woven fabrics
to flexing and abrasion when the specimen is subjected to unidirectional
reciprocal folding and rubbing over a given bar under controlled conditions
of pressure and tension.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be as described in Method 5104 except that the
specimen shall be 8 inches to 10 inches (203 mm to 254 mm) in length.

unit.
4.1 Apparatus. (See

. figure 5300)
4.1.1 Plate assembly consisting of two plane, parallel, smooth plates, one
of which makes a reciprocating motion of 125 ± 5 double strokes per minute of
1 inch (25 mm) stroke length. The other plate shall be rigidly supported by
a double-lever assembly so as to provide free movement in a direction perpendicular
to the plane of the reciprocating plate. It shall be stationary during the test
and be well-balanced so that a vertical pressure of from 0 to 10 pounds (0 to
5 kg) can be maintained by means of dead weights.
4.1.1.1 The plates shall be equipped with clamps or jaws to permit the
folded specimen to be aligned with its long dimensions parallel to the axis
of the reciprocal motion and the fold to be positioned at the center line of
the plates perpendicular to the axis of motion. They shall have gripping
surfaces to prevent slipping of the specimen during test.
4.1.2 A bar or blade as described below shall be provided. Before a new

bar or blade is used for testing, it shall be placed in the tester and
subjected to at least 20,000 cycles of abrasion by a 2-1/2 inch (64 mm)
fabric strip under a tension of 5 pounds (2.27 kg) (a plied-yarn, grey, cotton
2
duck, weighing from 12 to 15 ounces per square yard (407 to 509 g/m ) is a
suitable fabric for this purpose). It shall then be calibrated by use of
a standard fabric of high uniformity.
METHOD 5300
4.1.2.1 The folding bar shall be 1/16 ± 1/64 inch by 3/8 ± 1/64 inch
(1.588 ± 0.397 mm by 9.525 ± 0.397 mm) in cross section. It shall be made
of tool–steel tipped with an edge of cemented carbide or other highly
resistant material. The three sides of the bar, which are in contact with
the specimen shall be given a fine finish by grinding and polishing, which
will level off the microscopical projections without breaking the edges of
the bar.
4.1.2.2 The folding blade shall be made of tool steel 0.01 ± 0.001 inch
by 1.0 ± 0.031 inch (0.254 ± 0.0254 mm by 25.4 ± 0.794 mm) in cross-section,
having rounded edges and being case hardened and well polished.
4.1.3 A device which will apply a tension to the folded specimen by
applying a force from 0 to 7 pounds (0 to 3.17 kg) to the folding bar or
blade parallel to the surface of the two plates and perpendicular to the
fold of the specimen. The tension must be evenly distributed across the
fold of the specimen, and provision shall be made to prevent the bar or
blade from tilting.
4.1.4 Revisions shall be made for the automatic stopping of the machine
when the specimen is ruptured and for the recording of the number of
cycles to reach this end point (see 7.1).
4.2 Method cited.
Method 5104, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth;
Ravel Strip Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the following
applicable load shall be applied to the pressure plate and the folding bar
or blade:
Weight of Fabric, Ounces Flexing Bar or Blade Pressure Plate,

2
Per Square Yard g/m ) Load, Pounds (kg) Pounds (kg)
Less than 2.5 (84.8) 2 (0.907) 1 (0.453)

2.5 (84.8) but less than 5 (170) 3 (1.361) 1-1/2 (00680)
5 (170) but has than 7.5 (254 .3) 4 (1.814) 2 (0.907)
7.5 (254.3) but less than 10 (339) 5 (2.268) 2-1/2 (1.134)
10 (339) but less than 15 (509) 6 (2.722) 3 (1. 361)
15 (509) and over 7 (3.175) 3-1/2 (1.588)

METHOD 5300
5.2 The end point of the abrasion shall be the number of cycles or state of
destruction as specified in the procurement document.
5.3 The specimen shall be folded widthwise and placed symmetrically between
the pressure (upper) and the reciprocation (lower) plates of the apparatus.
with the specified folding bar or folding blade inserted so that after being
clamped and loaded, the tension exerted by the bar or blade is uniformly
distributed over the width of the specimen and the long dimension is aligned
parallel to the direction of the reciprocal motion. The fold of the specimen
shall be at the center of the plates when the reciprocating plate is at midstroke.
5.3.1 When wet abrasion is required by the procurement document, the center
portion of the specimen shall be immersed in water at a temperature of 70° ±
2°F (21° ± 1°C) for at least 10 minutes. After being clamped, and additional
one ml of water shall be placed around the fold of the specimen. Additional
water must be added during the test if the surplus of water is absorbed by
the specimen.
5.4 Pills or matted fiber debris interfering with proper contact between
specimen and folding bar or folding blade shall be removed at regular intervals
(5 min. or 600 cycles) during the test if they cause a marked vibration of
pressure plate.
5.5 When the end point is a specified number of cycles, the specimen shall
be subjected to the specified number of cycles of abrasion and evaluated by
(a) determining the change in breaking strength or (b) visually for the effect
on luster, color, structure, nap, or pilling as specified in the procurement
document.
5.5.1 When the change in breaking strength is specified, the breaking
strength in each of the warp and filling directions of the original and
abraded material shall be determined as described in Method 5104 except
that (1) the distance between the jaws of the machine at the start of the
test shall be 1 inch (25 mm) and (2) the abraded portion of the specimen
shall be placed midway between the jaws of the machine.
5.6 When the end point is the state of destruction, the specimen shall
be abraded to rupture and the number of cycles recorded.
5.7 When the specimen slips in the clamps, tension and pressure upon
the folded specimen do not remain constant during the test, or an anomalous
wear pattern is obtained, such individual measurements shall be disregarded
and the determination repeated on an additional specimen.

METHOD 5300
6. REPORT
6.1 When the end point is a specified number of cycles and change in
breaking strength is required, the abrasion resistance of the sample unit
shall be the average change obtained from the specimens tested in each of
the warp and filling directions respectively and shall be reported separately
6.1.1 The change in breaking strength shall be calculated as follows:
Change in breaking strength, percent = B - A x 100

B
Where: B = Breaking strength before abrasion

A = Breaking strength after abrasion
6.2 When the end point is a specified number of cycles and visual
estimation is required, the effect of abrasion on luster, color, structure,
napping or pilling, etc. as specified in the procurement document, shall be
reported for each specimen.
6.3 When the end point is the state of destruction, the abrasion resistance
of the sample unit shall be the average of the number of cycles obtained from
the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling directions respectively
and shall be reported to the nearest 10 cycles.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 An abrasion machine of the type described is manufactured by Custom

Scientific Instruments, Inc., 13 Wing Drive, Whippany, NJ 07981.

METHOD 5300

METHOD 5302
July 20, 1978
ABRASION RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; INFLATED DIAPHRAGM
(STOLL) METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the abrasion resistance of

woven and knitted fabrics when the specimen is inflated over a rubber
diaphragm under controlled air pressure and subjected to either uni-
directional or multidirectional rubbing action.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 A circle of fabric 4-1/4 inches (108 mm) in diameter. No two
specimens shall be taken from areas containing the same warp and filling
yarns or the same wales or courses.

4. APPARATUS (See figure 5302)
4.1 Circular clamp for mounting specimen. Circular clamp provided with a
clamping ring and tightening collar for mounting specimens over a rubber
diaphragm. The circular opening of the clamping ring shall be 3.60 inches ±
0.005 inch (91.4 mm ± 0.1 mm) in diameter (approximately 10 square inches)
(6452 sq. mm) and that of the collar 3.60 inches (91.4 mm) or more.
4.1.1 The height from the surface of the clamped-in specimen to the upper
edge of the tightening collar shall not exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm).
4.1.2 The clamping area of the body of the clamp and the ring shall be
approximately 4-1/4 inches (108 mm) in diameter, having gripping surfaces to
prevent slipping of the specimen and leakage of air pressure during the test.
4.2 Air pressure. Means shall be provided for supplying air pressure to the
body of the clamp so that the pressure under the diaphragm can be controlled
between 0 and 6 pounds per square inch (0 and 41 kPa) with an accuracy of ± 0.05
pound per square inch (± 0.34 kPa).
4.3 Rubber diaphragm. A rubber diaphragm 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) in diameter,
not less than 0.02 and not more than 0.04 inch (0.5 and not more than 1.0 mm)
in thickness.
METHOD 5302
4.3.1 When the 10 square-inch (6452 sq. mm) clamped area is inflated by
a pressure of 1 pound per square inch (6.9 kPa), the elevation shall be from
0.5 to 1.0 inch (13 to 25 mm).
4.3.2 A metallic contact pin of 1/8-inch (3 mm) in diameter shall be

sealed into the center of the diaphgram so that it is flush with the diaphragm
surface. Provision shall be made for flexible electrical connection from this
contact pin to the ground of the machine.
4.3.3 The strain distribution in the diaphragm must be uniform so that when
inflated without the specimen, it assumes the shape of a section of a sphere.
4.4 Driving mechanism. A driving mechanism so designed that the circular

clamp makes a reciprocal motion of 125 ± 5 double strokes per minute of 1-inch
(25 mm) length. Provisions shall also be made for rotation of the clamp so
that one revolution can be completed in not less than 50 and not more than
100 double strokes.
4.5 Abradant-plate assembly. The abradant-plate assembly shall be composed

of a specified abradant mounted on a plate rigidly supported by a double-level
parallelogram so as to provide for free movement in a direction perpendicular
to the plane of the reciprocating specimen clamp. The abradant-plate assembly
shall be well-balanced so that a vertical pressure from 0 to 5 pounds (0 to 2.3
kg) can be maintained by means of dead weights.
4.5.1 Provision shall be made for mounting different abradants such as

abrasive paper, fabrics, etc., on this plate and to stretch them into an
even position.
4.5.2 An electrically insulated contact pin adjustable to the thickness

of the abradant shall be mounted into this plate on the length axis at one
of the turning points of the center of the clamp.
4.6 Relay for closing low voltage circuit, to stop machine. A relay for
closing a low-voltage circuit and stopping the machine when the pin on the
lower side of the abradant plate and the pin inserted in the center of the
diaphragm come in contact.
4.7 Pressure gauge. Means for indicating the diaphragm pressure, the
inflation height of the specimen, and the number of abrasion cycles (1 cycle =
1 double stroke).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The abradant shall be as specified in the procurement document.

METHOD 5302
5.2 Unless otherwise specified, an air pressure of 4 pounds per square inch
(28 kpa) shall be applied to the diaphragm and a load of 1 pound (0.45 kg)
shall be applied to the abradant.
5.3 The direction of abrasion shall be unidirectional or multidirectional

as specified in the procurement document.
5.4 The end point of the abrasion shall be the number of cycles or state
of destruction as specified in the procurement document.
5.5 The specimen shall be placed over the rubber diaphragm in a smooth
condition and shall not be distorted by the clamping. If wet abrasion is
specified in the procurement document, the dry clamped-in specimen shall
be covered with 10 ml of distilled water at a temperature of 70° ± 2°F
(21° ± 1°C).
5.6 The abradant shall be placed on the abradant plate under just sufficient
tension to be held smooth and in such a position that the contact pin, reaching
through a hole in the abradant, shall be even with the surface of the abradant.
5.7 When unidirectional abrasion is required, the rotation of the specimen

clamp shall be eliminated and the specimen shall be brought into the specified
direction by turning and setting the clamp after the specimen has been inflated.
5.8 When multidirectional abrasion is required or if no specific indication
s to the abrasion direction is given in the procurement document, the rotation
mechanism of the specimen clamp shall be engaged.
5.9 Air-pressure control and contact between inflated specimen and loaded
abradant shall be in a state of equilibrium before abrasion is started.
5.10 Pills of matted fibers interfering with proper contact between specimen
and abradant shall be removed as specified during the test if they cause a
marked vibration of the abradant plate.
5.11 When the end point is a specified number of cycles, the specimen shall
be abraded the required number of cycles and then evaluated visually for the
effect of the abrasion on luster, color, fabric structure, or other characteristics
as specified.
5.12 When the end point is the state of destruction, the specimen shall
be abraded until all fibers in the center of the abrasion area are worn off
and the contact pins in the abradant plate and diaphragm come in contact
actuating the electrical relay and stopping the machine.
METHOD 5302
5.13 When the specimen slips in the clamp or the air pressure does not
remain constant during the test or an anomalous wear pattern is obtained,
such a specimen shall be disregarded and the determination repeated on an
additional specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 When the end point is a specified number of cycles, the abrasion
resistance of the sample unit shall be the effect on color, luster, fabric
structure, or other characteristics, as specified in the procurement document.
The abrasion resistance of each specimen shall be reported.
6.2 When the end point is the state of destruction, the abrasion
resistance of the sample unit shall be the average of the number of cycles
obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 10 cycles.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 An abrasion machine of the type described may be obtained from:
Custom Scientific Instrument, Inc.

13 Wing Drive
Whippany, NJ 07981

METHOD 5302

METHOD 5303
July 20, 1978
COLOR CHANGE OF CLOTH DUE TO FLAT ABRASION (FROSTING);

WIRE SCREEN METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for evaluating the resistance of colored cloths
to change in shade caused by multidirectional flat abrasion. Frosting is a
change of cloth color caused by localized abrasive wear. It can be used for
all dyed cloths, but is especially sensitive to the color change of durable
press cross-dyed blend cloths, in which one fiber is abraded away faster than
another. It is also sensitive to the abrasion of constructions in which there
is a variation in, or incomplete penetration of dyestuff.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square piece of cloth 5 inches (127 mm) by
5 inches (127 mm). No two specimens shall contain the same warp and filling
yarns. Do not cut specimens nearer the selvage than one tenth the width of
the cloth.

4.1 Surface abrader. A surface abrader equipped with attachment to produce

frosting (see Figure 5303).
4.2 Frosting attachments. Frosting attachments shall consist of:
a. Rubber “O” ring.

b. Conical mounting piece.
c. 16 x 16 mesh, 0.009 ± 0.0003 inch (0.229 ± 0.008 mm) wire, stainless
steel screening abradant.
d. Side clamps.
e. Circular specimen holder.
4.3 Gray Scale for Color Change.
4.4 Method cited.

Method 9010, Shade Matching of Textile Materials; Visual Method.
METHOD 5303
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 All specimens shall be conditioned in accordance with Section 4 of this

Standard and testing shall be conducted in the standard atmosphere for testing
textiles.
5.2 Remove the circular surface abrasion head from the reciprocating table
of the abrasion tester by removing the circular locking stud in the center.
Use the special two-pronged wrench supplied with the specimen holder kit.
Insert the circular frosting specimen holder in the surface abrasion head, place
the metal O-ring over the specimen holder, and lock it into place with the screw
collar (see 7.3).
5.3 Place the specimen face up and center it over the specimen holder,
and then place the conical mounting piece over the specimen. Insert the
rubber O-ring over the specimen and into the groove. Remove the mounting
piece.
5.4 Replace the surface abrasion head holding the test specimen into
the reciprocating table. Attach the stainless steel screen (see 7.4) to
the abradant plate and clamp the screen ends in the abradant plate clamps.
The warp of the abradant “fabric” shall be parallel to the reciprocating
motion of the upper head. Apply sufficient tension by means of the front
tension clamp to keep the screen flat. Secure the sides with the side clamps.
5.5 Apply head weights of 2.5 pounds (1.13 kg) to the balanced abradant
head.
5.6 Adjust the rotary motion pawl so as to rotate the surface abrasion
head approximately one revolution per 100 cycles.
5.7 Gently lower the head until it contacts the test specimen.
5.8 Start machine and abrade the specimen for 1200 cycles and stop the
machine.
5.9 Remove the abraded specimen from the surface abrasion head.
5.10 Remove any disintegrated or worn away cloth by hand rinsing the test
specimen in clear lukewarm water at 100°F (38°C). Blot between towels to remove
excess water. Place the specimen face down between two pieces of clean white
cotton cloth and press with a hand iron at approximately 300°F (149°C) until
the specimen is dry.
5.11 Evaluation.

METHOD 5303
5.11.1 Evaluate the abraded specimen under artificial daylight or equivalent

(see Method 9010).
5.11.2 Classify the color change by comparing the specimen with the Gray
Scale for Color Change and record the lowest rating observed for each specimen
in accordance with the following scale:
Frosting Rating Gray Scale
5 - None or Negligible 5.0

4 - Slight 4.5
3 - Noticeable 4.0
2 - Considerable 3.5
1 - Severe 3.0
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the average

rating for the sample unit shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 scale rating.
6.1.1 Each individual rating for each specimen used to calculate the average
shall also be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A surface abrader and specimen holder kit satisfactory for performing
this test may be obtained from Custom Scientific Instruments, Inc., 13 Wing
Drive, Whippany, NJ 07981.
7.2 The Gray Scale for Color Change may be obtained from AATCC, P.O. Box
12215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.
7.3 When the specimen holder with the foam rubber cushion is first received
or after extensive use, the surface plane of the rubber head may not be in
perfect alignment with the abradant plate resulting in a poor or uneven wear
pattern. If such is the case, the condition can be rectified by abrading the
rubber surface (without specimen) of the tester with “O” emery cloth under 2.5
pounds (1.13 kg) head weight.
7.4 The screen should be washed initially to remove oil. It is recommended
that after each test the stainless steel abradant be cleaned of detritus with a
compressed air gun with a safety nozzle or a suitable vacuum cleaner. It is
also recommended that the screen be washed periodically in a mild detergent to
remove possible build-up of matter which cannot be blown off with an air gun or
a vacuum cleaner. Worn or defective wire screen abradant should be replaced
immediately.
METHOD 5303
Figure 5303 - Schematic Drawing of Frosting Unit

(Courtesy of AATCC)

METHOD 5304
July 20, 1978
ABRASION RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; OSCILLATORY METHOD

(WYZENBEEK) METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the abrasion resistance of woven
fabrics when subjected to unidirectional rubbing action under controlled conditions
of pressure, tension, and abrasive action.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 A rectangle of cloth 9 by 1-7/8 inches (229 by 48 mm). The long dimension
shall be cut parallel to the warp yarns for warpwise abrasion and parallel to
the filling yarns for filling-wise abrasion.

unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Oscillatory cylinder. Oscillating cylinder section with edge clamps to
permit mounting of a sheet of abrasive material over its curved surface. Three
or four specimen-holding arms shall be provided to permit testing of several
specimens simultaneously.
4.1.1.1 Each arm shall consist of a set of controlled tension clamps and a
controlled pressure pad. Tension on the specimen shall be adjusted by use of
a calibrated sliding weight on a bar attached to the forward specimen clamp.
The rear clamp shall butt against a thumb screw to provide for taking up the
slack of the specimen. The pressure pad, made of sponge rubber, shall be
fitted to a pressure bar at the top of the specimen holding arm. A second
calibrated sliding weight shall furnish the desired pressure between the pad
and the cylinder section.
4.1.1.2 The cylinder section shall have a diameter of 6 inches (152 mm)
and the rubber pad, 2 by 2 inches (51 by 51 mm) in dimension, shall be shaped
to the curve of the cylinder surface. The section shall oscillate through an
arc of 3 inches (76 mm) long at the rate of 90 cycles (double rubs) per minute.

METHOD 5304
4.1.1.3 Suspended over the drum shall be two slotted vacuum pipes which
shall serve to remove lint and dust particles.
4.1.2 An automatic counter shall be provided for recording the number of

oscillations.
4.1.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the abradant

shall be No. 0 emery paper.
4.2 Method cited.

Cut Strip Method.
5. PROCEDURE

shall be subjected to 250 continuous cycles under a tension of 2 pounds (8.9 N)
and under a load of 2 pounds (8.9 N).
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the abradant

shall be changed for each set of specimens.
5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the face surface
(weave face, finished side, coated side, etc.) of the specimen shall be subjected
to abrasion.
5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the effects of

the abrasion shall be measured by determining the change in breaking strength
or the residual breaking strength as specified.
5.5 The specimen shall be placed in the clamps of the apparatus with the
long dimension parallel to the direction of the abrasion. The specimen shall be
drawn just tight enough to bring the weighted tension scale bar into a
horizontal postion. If the specimen stretches during the test, the scale
bar shall be brought back into a horizontal position by adjusting the screw
behind the rear clamp. The weight of the pressure bar shall be set at the
required load. Depending on the thickness of the specimen being tested,
the knurled screw on the top of the overarm shall be so adjusted as to
cause the pressure bar to rest in a horizontal position. The specimen shall
be abraded under the required tension and load for the required number of
cycles.

METHOD 5304
5.6 When the change in breaking strength due to abrasion is required, the
breaking strength of the material before and after abrasion shall be determined
as described in Method 5102, except that (1) the width of the specimen shall be
as required in 2.1, (2) the strength shall be determined by a single operator
on a single tester, and (3) the abraded portion of the specimen after abrasion
shall be midway between the jaws of the machine.
5.7 When the residual breaking strength of the abraded material is required,
the breaking strength shall be determined as described in Method 5102, with the
exceptions listed in 5.6.
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the abrasion

resistance of the sample unit shall be expressed as a residual breaking strength
or change in breaking strength.
6.1.1 The change in breaking strength shall be calculated as follows:

Change in breaking strength, percent = B - A x 100
B
Where: B = breaking strength before abrasion.
A = breaking strength after abrasion.
6.1.2 Change in breaking strength shall be the average of the results obtained
6.2 Residual breaking strength shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling directions and they
shall be reported separately to the nearest 1 pound (to the nearest 1 N).
7. NOTES
7.1 An abrasion machine of the type described in this method is manufactured

by Wyco Tool Co., 4601 W. Addison, Chicago, IL 60641.

METHOD 5306
July 20, 1978
ABRASION RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; ROTARY PLATFORM,
DOUBLE-HEAD (TABER) METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the abrasion resistance of

cloths in terms of percent change in breaking strength, or breaking strength
after a given period of abrasion, or the number of abrasion cycles required
to produce a specified state of destruction. It is used to evaluate cloth
durability when the specimen is subjected to rotary rubbing action under con-
trolled conditions of pressure and abrasive action.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a 5-inch (127 mm) square or circle of fabric, and
not greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in thickness. The specimens shall be taken
from areas of the fabric not represented by the same warp or filling yarns.
A 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter hole shall be punched in the center of the speci-
men.

unit.
4.1 Apparatus. (Figure 5306)
4.1.1 Rotary platform, double head abraser. An abrasion machine comprising

in general of a housing of compact design, a removable flat circular specimen-
holder, a pair of pivoted arms to which are attached the abrasive wheels, a motor
for rotating the platform and specimen, a fan for cooling the motor, and a
counter for indicating the revolutions of the specimen-holder is so mounted as
to produce a circular surface travel of an essentially flat specimen in the plane
of its surface. The abrasive wheels, which are attached to the free end of the
pivoted arms, rotate and have, when resting on the specimen, a peripheral en-
gagement with the surface of the specimen, the direction of travel of the
periphery of the wheels and of the specimen at the contacting portions being
at acute angles and the angle of travel of one wheel periphery being opposite
to that of the other. Motion of the abraser wheels, in opposite directions,
is provided by rotation of the specimen and the associated friction therefrom.

METHOD 5306
4.1.1.1 Specimen holder. The specimen-holder is supported by an adapter

which is motor-driven and provides motion for the circular travel of the
specimen-holder.
4.1.1.2 Load adjustment weights. A load adjustment for varying the load
of the abraser wheels on the specimen. The pivoted abraser arms without auxiliary
weights or counterweights apply a load against the specimen of 500 grams (1.1 lbs)
per wheel. Addition of weights by the manufacturer increases the load to 1,000
grams (2.2 lbs). A counterweight attachment permits reduction of load against
the specimen to 250 grams (0.55 lb) and 125 grams (0.27 lb) per wheel.
4.1.1.3 Clamping rings. Clamping rings for securing the specimen to the
specimen-holder, one for use with lighter weight fabrics, and a larger one for
use with heavier fabrics.
4.1.1.4 Wheels.
4.1.1.4.1 Types. Abraser wheels of the rubber-base or vitrified-base

types. Both types of wheels are manufactured in different grades of abrasive
quality l The wheels shall be leadbushed, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick and approx-
imately 2 inches (51 mm) in diameter. The wheels customarily used for test-
ing textiles are the rubber-base resilient type composed of abrasive grains
encushioned in rubber. Consequently, they are distorted during operation of
the abraser. Accordingly, the wheels are mounted so as to compensate for this
distortion and it is important that they be set as prescribed in 4.1.1.5.1.
Vitrified-base wheels are the hard abrasive type. They may be cut with a
diamond point to alter the roughness of the wheel, the stroke of cut deter-
mining the degree of grit. The position of these wheels is not critical but
it is recommended that they be set as prescribed in 4.1.1.5.1.
4.1.1.4.2 Selection for test. Since there exists variation in abrasive

quality between and within rubber-base wheels of the same grade, a method
shall be followed in the selection of wheels for a particular test that will
reduce this variation. All rubber-base wheels shall be tested individually
on a selected reference fabric. They shall be grouped in sets of three pairs
such that the average abrasiveness of the three falls within a specified tol-
erance. The wheels shall then be used in sets as established. The specimens
of fabric shall be grouped in three sets, the members of the-set being selected
at random from the whole area of the sample. Each set shall be abraded with
one of the three pairs of wheels, and the report shall be based on the average
for the three sets.

METHOD 5306
In the use of vitrified-base wheels, both wheels of the pair to be used shall
be similar in abrasion characteristics. This shall be checked on a selected
reference fabric. Once a satisfactory pair is obtained, it may be used for an
indefinite period of time without changing its abrasive quality. Experience
has shown that a single pair can be used for at least 1 year in constant use
without changing in abrasive quality.
4.1.1.4.3 Resurfacing and cleaning. Due to uneven wear and clogging of

the surface crevices with fiber particles, sizing, finishing materials, and
the like, the abrading wheels shall be resurfaced or cleaned at established
intervals during tests, the frequency of which depends on the type of material
being tested and the type of wheel used. Rubber-base wheels wear unevenly
during use and clog up as abrading progresses, thus requiring resurfacing and
cleaning at appropriate intervals. Resurfacing disks (Carborundum-coated paper)
of various degrees of coarseness are available for this purpose. These are
mounted on the resurfacing platform which replaces the specimen-holder on the
center shaft. A stiff brush may be used for removing loose particles from the
surface of the wheels. A resurfacing and cleaning schedule shall be adopted
for tests on various materials. The specimen shall be abraded for 2 specified
number of revolutions of the table, such as 300 (or some other number, depend-
ing on the surface being abraded), after which the wheels shall be resurfaced
for a specified number of revolutions of the table, such as 30, with the abra-
sive paper and then brushed clean. The specimen shall again be replaced and
the sequence of abrading and resurfacing shall be continued to completion of
the test. The resurfacing disks should be used for a definite number of revo-
lutions of the table and discarded. On rubber-base wheels of medium coarseness,
it has been found that 6 or 7 resurfacing of 30 revolutions of the table each
were the limit of utility of the disks.
Vitrified-base wheels do not wear unevenly and consequently require no resur-

facing unless the surface is accidently chipped or otherwise marred. The crev-
ices of the surface clog during use and, during the test, should be cleaned of
loose particles at specified intervals, such as every 300 revolutions of the
table. Compressed air has been found to be most suitable for this purpose and
is recommended. Vitrified-base wheels are not recommended for use on fabrics
with surface coatings which clog the wheels too rapidly and cannot be removed
with ease. If such material requires special solvents for removal or neces-
sitates resurfacing of the wheels, such practice would not be recommended and
the wheels should not be used.
4.1.1.5 Machine adjustments.
4.1.1.5.1 Wheels. In mounting rubber-base wheels, their position with re-

spect to the center of the specimen-holder is critical. The lateral distance
from the left-hand wheel-mounting flange to the center of the specimen-holder
shall be 1-1/64 inches (25.8 mm) and from the same point to the right-hand
wheel-mounting flange the distance shall be 1-5/64 inches (27.4 mm).

METHOD 5306
The position of vitrified-base abrasive wheels with respect to the center of

the specimen-holder shall be equally spaced on both sides 1-3/64 inches (26.6
mm) from the wheel-mounting flange to the center of the specimen-holder.
4.1.1.5.2 Platform. The vertical distance from the center of the pivot
point of the abraser arms to the top of the specimen-holder shall be approxi-
mately 1 inch (25 mm). This measurement is specified to prevent the possibility
of errors incurred by installing a thrust bearing or the like to support the
specimen-platform. Such adaptations shall be made so that the platform will
remain at the above specified level. The specimen-platform shall rotate in the
plane of its surface.
If it fails to do so and exhibits a tendency to wobble, the holder and adapter

shall be replaced or a thrust bearing installed to support the specimen-holder.
4.1.1.5.3 Load. In order to reduce the load of the abraser wheels on the
specimen, a counterweight attachment is provided. The use of this counter-
weight is not recommended, since studies in this regard have indicated vari-
ability in results due to the unequal counter-weighting of the individual
arms.
4.1.1.5.4 Abraser wheel bearings. The abraser wheel bearings, that is,
the two pair of bearings installed in the free end of the pivoting arms
to support the abraser wheels, should not stick when caused to spin rapidly
by a quick driving motion of the forefinger. The degree of freedom of ro-
tation of these bearings, however, is not critical.
4.1.2 A means of removing dust, lint, and any disintegrated or worn away
cloth from the test specimen by brushing or by vacuum, shall be specified in
the procurement document.
4.1.3 A counter for recording the number of rotations of the specimen-

platform.
4.2 Method Cited.

Grab Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the speed of the
specimen-platform shall be 70 revolutions per minute.
5.2 The number and type of abrasive wheel and the magnitude of the counter-
weights shall be as specified in the procurement document.

METHOD 5306
5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the face surface
of the specimen (weave face, finished side, coated side, etc.), shall be the
surface to abrade.
5.4 The end point of the abrasion shall be (1) the number of rotations
of the specimen-platform or (2) the state of destruction, as specified
5.5 The test specimen shall be placed over the rubber mat on the specimen-
holder. The ring clamp shall be placed over the specimen with the screw of the
clamp at one end of the warp diameter and then pressed halfway down on the
specimen-holder, the screw partly tightened, the clamp then pressed down as
far as possible, and the screw tightened firmly. The washer and knurled nut
shall then be secured in place to hold the center of the specimen.
5.6 The specimen-platform shall be rotated at the required speed and the
specimen abraded to the required end point.
5.6.1 The specimen shall be cleaned of lint and abrasive particles on a

scheduled basis as with the resurfacing and cleaning of the abraser wheels.
The specimen shall not be removed from the specimen-holder until the entire
test is completed. The rubber mat shall be wiped clean after each test.
5.7 When the number of rotations is specified as the end point, the
abrasion resistance in each of the warp and filling direction shall be deter-
mined by the residual breaking strength or the change in breaking strength
5.8 When the residual breaking strength is required, the breaking strength
of the abraded specimen shall be determined and when the change in breaking
strength due to abrasion is required, the breaking strength of the original
and abraded materials shall be determined in each of the warp and filling direc-
tions. The breaking strength shall be determined by Method 5100 except that
the gage length shall be 1 inch (25 mm) and the abrasion path shall be placed
midway between the jaws.
5.9 When the state of destruction is required, the number of rotations

required to produce specified destructions shall be read from the counter.
6. REPORT
6.1 When the end point is a specified number of cycles, the abrasion
resistance of the sample unit shall be expressed as residual breaking strength
or change in breaking strength.
6.1,1 Residual breaking strength shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested in each of the warp and filling directions and shall be
reported separately to the nearest 1 pound (to the nearest 1 N).

METHOD 5306
6.1.2 Change in breaking strength shall be the average of the results

respectively and shall be reported separately to the nearest 1.0 percent.
Change in breaking strength, percent = O - A x 100

O
where:
O = breaking strength before abrasion.

A = breaking strength after abrasion.
6.2 When the end point is a required state of destruction, the abrasion
resistance of the sample unit shall be the average of the number of cycles
respectively and shall be reported to the nearest 10 cycles.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 An abrasion machine of the type described may be obtained from Taber
Instrument Co., 455 Bryant Street, North Tonawanda, NY 14120.

METHOD 5306
FIGURE 5306
METHOD 5308
July 20, 1978
ABRASION RESISTANCE OF CLOTH;

UNIFORM ABRASION (SCHIEFER) METHOD
1. SCOPE

of cloths of all kinds. The abrasive action is applied uniformly in all
directions in the plane of the surface of the cloth about every point in
it. The settings of the machine; method of mounting specimens; conditions
of test as dry or wet; and criteria to be used in evaluating abrasive wear
in the test depend upon the nature of the cloth to be tested and use to be
made of the results. These details as well as requirements for abrasion
resistance should be specified in all documents calling for the use of the
method. Only a general description of the equipment and procedures is given
here (see 7.1).
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 A circle of cloth 2.41 inches (61.2 mm), 3.41 inches (86.6 mm), or
3.81 inches (96.8 mm) in diameter or a cross cut from the cloth with arms
2 inches (51 mm) wide and 4.5 inches (114.3 mm) long, as specified in the
procurement document.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Abrasion machine. An abrasion machine, (figures 5308A and 5308B),

consisting of abrading mechanism, specimen supporting mechanism, and driving
mechanism (see 7.2). Essentially, the surface of the abradant lies in a plane
parallel to the plane surface supporting the specimen and presses upon the
specimen. The abradant and specimen rotate in the same direction at very nearly
but not quite the same angular velocity, 250 r.p.m., on noncoaxial axes which
are parallel to 0.001 inch (0.0254 mm). The small difference in speed is to
permit each part of the specimen to come in contact with a different part of
the abradant at each rotation.

METHOD 5308
4.1.1.1 Abrading mechanism. The abrading mechanism includes the abradant
mounted at the lower end of a shaft; weights placed upon the upper end of the
shaft to produce constant pressure between abradant and specimen throughout the
test; lever and cam for raising and lowering the abradant; shaft; and
weights. A counterweight for balancing the abradant and abradant shaft
is used when tests are to be carried out at low pressures.
4.1.1.2 Specimen supporting mechanism. The specimen supporting mechanism

provides for tension mounting of thinner, more flexible cloths and rigid mounting
of thick, stiff cloths. For the first, a plastic presser foot 1/2, 1, 1-1/4,
1-1/2, or 2 inches (13, 25, 32, 38, 50 mm) in diameter, as called for, is mounted
at the upper end of the specimen shaft to fix the area of the specimen to be
abraded; a conical clamp seat fitted to the shaft rotates with it, but is free
to move vertically on the shaft; a cam is provided for raising and lowering the
clamp seat. The specimen clamp shown unassembled in figure 5308C fits
on the seat, “C” in figure 5308C, and can be fastened to it by merely rotating
it slightly to engage the two pins in the slots. The clamp and specimen assembly
can be removed quickly for examination of the specimen and measurement of wear
and returned to the machine without unclamping the specimen. When the clamp
seat is lowered by turning the cam, the combined weight of the clamp seat and
specimen clamp is suspended by the specimen over the presser foot. This places
the specimen under constant tension throughout the test with take-up of any
stretch in the specimen. Different tensions are applied to the specimen by
changing the weight of the clamp seat, for example, by adding auxiliary weights.
For rigid mounting of thick, stiff cloths such as carpeting and felts the
specimen clamp and mounting aids shown in figure 5308D are used and the assembly
screws onto the specimen shaft in place of the presser foot and specimen clamp
seat.
4.1.1.3 Driving mechanism. The driving mechanism consists of a motor-driven
auxiliary drive shaft connected to the abradant shaft and specimen shaft by spur
gears.
4.1.1.4 Resettable counter, machine stop microswitch and thickness gauge. The
machine is equipped with a resettable counter, “G” in figure 5308B, to indicate
the number of rotations in a test; sensitive microswitch, “H” in figure 5308B,
to stop the machine automatically when a tension-suspended specimen is worn
through; thickness gauge, “I” in figure 5308B, when specified, for indicating
changes in thickness of the specimen during a test.
4.1.2 Abradant. The working surface of the abradant disk shall be suffi-
ciently greater in diameter than the specimen supporting the surface that
the latter lies entirely inside the periphery of the abradant during a test.
A spring steel blade abradant, “B” in figure 5308C, which is essentially constant
in its action for a long period of use, shall be used for woven, felted, pile,
and knitted fabrics, and a cross-cut tungsten tool steel blade abradant, “A” in
figure 5308C, shall be used for coated cloths, unless otherwise specified in the
procurement document. Emery cloth, sand paper, duck, canvas, or other cloth in
a suitable holder may be specified.

METHOD 5308
4.1.3 Specimen clamp and mounting aids. Specimen clamp and mounting aids
illustrated in figure 5308C and 5308D.
4.1.4 Capacitor and capacitance test set. Capacitor and capacitance test
set when specified for evaluating the wear quantitatively.
4.1.4.1 The capacitor, figure 5308E, is of the guard-ring type. The guard
electrode “B” is 1.2 inches (30.5 mm) outside diameter. The island electrode
“C” is 0.4 inch (10.2 mm) in diameter. The electrodes are so arranged that
the specimen clamp “D” can be readily inserted with the worn area of the specimen
in it over the island and guard electrodes and the clamp suspended by the specimen,
as it was in the abrasion testing machine. A third electrode “E” mounted in a
heavy hinged lid “F” can be swung down to a fixed stop after the specimen and
clamp are in place. The distance between the third electrode and the island
electrode can be adjusted to precise known values with the micrometer head, “I”,
of which the third electrode is a part. The capacitance test set is the commercial
instrument which operates at a frequency of 465, 000 cycles per second and is
usually used to measure the capacitance between the electrodes of vacuum tubes.
4.2 Method cited.

Ravel Strip Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The cross-cut tungsten tool steel blade abradant shall be used for coated
cloths, the spring steel blade abradant for all others, unless otherwise
specified in the procurement document.
5.2 The load on the abradant, the tensioning load on tension-suspended

specimens, and the size of the presser foot shall be as specified in the
procurement document. If not specified, these elements shall be chosen
to be such that the duration of the test to the end point for the least
resistant material in a series to be compared is not less than 1000 rotations
and/or the duration of the test for the most resistant is of the order of
20,000 rotations.
5.3 The end point of the test shall be as specified in the procurement
document. It may be a stated change in some characteristic as electrical
capacitance, thickness, breaking strength, color, luster, cloth structure,
napping or pilling after a stated number of rotations of abrasion, or the
number of rotations required to produce the stated change, or the number
required to completely wear through the cloth. When this last criterion is
specified, the number of revolutions at which the cloth no longer supports
the clamp assembly and the clamp drops, actuates the microswitch and stops
the machine is the end point.

METHOD 5308
5.4 The face of the cloth (weave face, finished face, coated side, etc.)
shall be the surface subjected to abrasion, unless otherwise specified in
5.5 When wet abrasion resistance is to be tested, the specimen shall be
immersed in water prior to mounting in the clamp. The area to be abraded
is then flooded with water and the machine is started. After each 1000
rotations of the abradant, the machine is stopped and the area being abraded
again flooded with water. Alternatively, water shall be supplied conti-
nuously during the test to the center of the abraded area through a small
hole in the presser foot and specimen shaft.
5.6 A test shall be carried out as follows: Mount the specimen in the
appropriate clamp as illustrated in figure 5308C, taking care that it is
clamped evenly and securely without distortion. Place the specimen assembly
in position in the machine, and If it is to be tension-suspended rotate the
lower cam to stretch the specimen uniformly over the presser foot. Lower
the abradant on the specimen by rotating the upper cam. Set the
counter at zero and start the machine.
5.7 If changes in thickness are required, the thickness shall be read

on the gage immediately after starting the machine and at regular inter-
vals during the test.
5.8 The test shall be continued for the required number of rotations
of abrasion or until the specimen is to be inspected. The machine shall
be stopped, the abradant raised by the upper cam, the clamp assembly
raised by the lower cam to release the tension on the specimen, and the
clamp and specimen removed from the machine.
5.9 The specimen shall be inspected or measured as required in the

procurement document without removing it from the clamp. Replace the
assembly in the machine and continue the test, repeating the inspection
at intervals as required. If the test is to be carried to complete
destruction of the test area, continue until the specimen no longer supports
the clamp assembly and the latter drops, actuates the microswitch, and
stops the machine.
5.10 Evaluation.
5.10.1 The resistance to abrasion shall be evaluated as specified in
5.10.2 When the test is to run to complete destruction of the cloth,

the resistance to abrasion of the specimen shall be the number of rotations
of abradant required to terminate the test automatically, that is, the number
of rotations at which the cloth no longer supports the clamp assembly and
the clamp drops, throws the microswitch, and stops the test.
FED. TEST METHOD STD. No. 191A

METHOD 5308
5.10.3 When change in electrical capacitance is taken as the measure

of abrasion resistance, the following measurements shall be made:
Where: Ca = Capacitance of the air in the capacitor without the

specimen;
C O = Capacitance of the unabraded specimen prior to
insertion in the abrasion machine;
Cr = Capacitance of the abraded specimen after a specified
number of rotations or at a predetermined end point.
The value of degree of destruction, “Q”, in percent, shall be calculated as

follows:
5.10.4 When change in thickness is required, the thickness of the specimen

at the beginning of and at regular internals during abrasion shall be read from
the thickness gage.
5.10.5 When the change in breaking strength or residual breaking strength

is specified, the breaking strength in each of the warp and filling directions
of the original and abraded material shall be determined as described in
Method 5104 except that (1) the distance between the jaws of the machine
at the start of the test shall be 1 inch (25 mm) and (2) the abraded portion
of the specimen shall be placed midway between the jaws of the machine.
5.10.6 When the effect of visual change in luster, color, cloth structure,
napping, pilling, or other characteristic is required, the specimen shall be
evaluated as described in the required method.
5.10.7 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, change

in thickness, breaking strength, or other characteristic shall be calcula-
ted as follows:
Change in characteristic, percent =
Where: O = value before abrasion.
E = value after abrasion.
6. REPORT
6.1 When a state of destruction is specified as the end point, unless

otherwise specified in the procurement document, the abrasion resistance
of the sample unit shall be the average of the number of rotations obtained
from the specimens tested, and shall be reported to the nearest 10 rotations.

METHOD 5308
reported.
6.2 When the number of rotations is specified as the end point, the resistance
to abrasion of the sample unit shall be reported as the change in electrical
capacitance, thickness, or breaking strength, the residual breaking strength, or
the effect of visual change in luster, color, fabric structure, napping, pilling,
or other characteristic, as specified in the procurement document.
6.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, change in

electrical capacitance, thickness, breaking strength, or other characteristic
shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall
be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent. When applicable, the values obtained
for the warp and filling directions shall be reported separately.
6.2.1.1 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.
6.2.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, residual

breaking strength shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens
tested, and shall be reported to the nearest 1 pound (nearest 5 N). When applicable,
the value obtained for the warp and filling directions shall be reported separately.
6.2.2.1 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.
6.2.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the effect of

visual change in luster, color, cloth structure, napping, pilling, or other
characteristic, as specified in the procurement document, shall be reported for
each specimen tested.
7. NOTES
7.1 The mathematical basis for this method is given in the Journal
of Research of the National Bureau of Standards 39, 1 (1947), Research
Paper RP 1807. The machine and its uses are described in the Journal
of Research of the National Bureau of Standards 42, 481 (1949), Research
Paper RP 1988.
7.2 An abrasion machine of the type described in this method is manu-
factured by Frazier Precision Instrument Company, Silver Spring, MD 20907.

METHOD 5308
FIGURE 5308A Schematic

drawing of Schiefer
abrasion testing machine
METHOD 5308
A. Abradant
B. Weights on abradant shaft
C. Cam and lever system for raising
the abradant shaft, abradant,
and weights
D. Counterweight for balancing
abradant and abradant shaft
when tests are to be made at
low pressures
E. Specimen in place ready for test
F. Cam for raising and lowering the
specimen clamp seat
G. Counter
H. Microswitch
I. Thickness gage
FIGURE 5308B - SCHIEFER ABRASION TESTING MACHINE

METHOD 5308
FIGURE 5308C - Abradants; specimen clamp seat;

template and clamp for thinner flexible cloths
which are to be held in the machine under tension.
A Cross-cut tungsten tool steel blade abradant

B Spring steel blade abradant
C Specimen clamp seat
D Template, which is placed under E to bulge the
specimen when mounting it
E Base of specimen clamp, over which specimen is
placed
F Pressure ring, which is placed on specimen
G Outer ring which is screwed down over F to hold
the assembly together

METHOD 5308
FIGURE 5308D - Specimen clamp and mounting aids for thick,

stiff cloth such as carpeting and felts, which are to be
mounted rigidly.
A Specimen
B Base of clamp
C Clamping plate
D Outer ring
E Pressure disk
F Assembly in screw press for forcing C down over
specimen in order to tighten D and hold specimen
firmly on the base

METHOD 5308
FIGURE 5308E - Schematic drawing of capacitor.

A. Specimen E. Third electrode
B. Guard electrode F. Heavy hinged lid
C. Island electrode I. Micrometer head
D. Specimen clamp

METHOD 5309
July 20, 1978
ABRASION RESISTANCE OF TEXTILE WEBBING
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to abrasion of

textile webbing.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be the full width of the material being tested and
shall have a minimum length of 54 inches (1372 mm).

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Webbing abrasion tester. The webbing abrasion tester (principle illustrated
in Figure 5309) consists of a power driven oscillating drum. One end of each
specimen is attached to the drum and the other end passing over a hexagonal steel
rod is attached to a weight. The hexagonal rod is so fixed as to subject the
webbing specimen to abrasion on two adjacent edges as the drum moves the
specimen across the rod.
4.1.1 Weight “B”, unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

shall be 2 pounds ± 2 ounces (0.91 kg + 0.06 kg) for specified breaking strengths
up to 1000 pounds ± 4450 N), 4 pounds ± 2 ounces (1.81 ± 0.06 kg) for breaking
strengths of 1000 to 3000 pounds (4450 to 13350 N), and 5.2 pounds ± 2 ounces
(2.4 +0.06 kg) for breaking strengths over 3000 pounds (13350 N).
4.1.2 Steel hexagonal rods “C” shall be 0.250 ± 0.001 inch (6.35 ± 0.03 mm)
when measured across opposite flat sides and the radius of the edges shall be
0.020 ± 0.004 inch (0.5 ± 0.1 mm). The steel shall have a cold drawn finish and
a Rockwell Hardness of B-97 to B-101 (see 6.1). The edges of the hexagonal rods
shall not have any burrs, nicks or scale.
4.1.3 Drum “D” shall have an outside diameter of 16 inches (406 mm) with a
suitable means for attaching the specimen to be tested without damage to specimen.
4.1.4 The crank “E” and crank-arm “F” shall be attached to the drum in such
a manner that when the specimen is attached to the drum, the specimen during
the test will oscillate over the hexagonal rod the required distance during
each stroke and at the required rate.

METHOD 5309
4.1.5 The hexagonal rod shall be so placed that specimen “A” with the
weight attached to one end and the other end passing over the hexagonal
rod and attached to the drum will form an angle of 85 ± 2 degrees “H”.
5. PROCEDURE

5.2 Attach the required weight to one end of the specimen, pass the other
end over the hexagonal rod and attach to the drum. The length of the specimen
shall be adjusted, without altering the original length, so that the specimen
shall oscillate across the hexagonal rod and that each end of the abraded area
is equidistant from the ends of the specimen.
5.3 The edges of each new hexagonal rod shall be identified as 1 through 6,
and only alternate edges (e.g., 1, 3, and 5) shall be used for abrading. No
abrading edge shall be used more than once.
5.4 Oscillate the drum so that the specimen is given a 12 ± 1 inch (305 ±
25 mm) traverse over the rod at the rate of 60 ± 2 strokes (30 ± 1 cycles)
per minute for 5000 strokes (2500 cycles). One single stroke is 12 ± 1 inches
(305 ± 25 mm) in one direction only.
5.5 The characteristics and methods for determining the degree of resistance
to abrasion shall be specified in the procurement document.
5.6.1 Percent change in the characteristic being evaluated to determine

resistance to abrasion shall be calculated as follows:
Percent change in characteristic =
Where: A = Value before abrasion

E = Value after abrasion
6. REPORT
6.1 The resistance to abrasion shall be reported as the change in character-

istics as specified in the applicable test method or procurement document.

METHOD 5309
7. NOTES
7.1 To reduce variability, and in case of disagreement of results the

hexagonal rods described in this method which have been cold drawn from
the same die should be used and may be purchased from Narrow Fabrics
Institute, Inc., 271 North Avenue, New Rochelle, NY 10801.

METHOD 5309
A. Specimen
B. Weight
C. Steel hexagonal rods
D. Drum
E. Crank
F. Crank arm
H. 85° angle
FIGURE 5309 - WEBBING ABRASION TESTER

METHOD 5310
July 20, 1978
APPEARANCE-RETENTION OF CLOTH; PILLING AND SURFACE WEAR
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of woven and
knitted fabrics to a pilling and combined wear-pill. Pilling is defined
as the formation of bunches or balls of fibers on the surface of a fabric.
In a combined wear-pill test, pilling characteristics and surface wear are
evaluated after a given period of wear. Surface wear resistance of cloth
is defined as resistance to wear of felt cover, nap, flock, or coating.
Pilling is evaluated by direct comparison of inked specimens with visual
standards. The combined wear-pill test is evaluated in terms of change in
appearance.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a circle of cloth 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) in
diameter. No two specimens shall contain the same warp or filling yarns in
woven cloths, and the same wales or courses in knitted cloths.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Appearance retention tester and accessories. An appearance retention

tester (figure 5310A and 7.2) and accessories, consisting, in general, of
removable circular magnetic specimen holders (A), a non-rotating specimen
holder support (B), which is free to move up and down having a rest pin for
disengaging the specimen holder and support assembly. Removable 2.0 lb (0.9 kg)
weight (C), and abradant holder (D), a motor drive mechanism for imparting
motion to the abradant holder, and a timer (E) for controlling the duration of
the test.
4.1.1 The magnetized specimen holder (A) slips onto the bottom of the
specimen holder support (B), and is held there magnetically. The foam
support material on the specimen holders shall have contact test areas of
2
1, 2, or 5 square inches (6.4, 12.9, or 32.3 cm ). The specimen holder shall
have a groove around the side into which a rubber ring (F) fits snugly for
securing the specimen to the specimen holder. Unless otherwise specified in
the procurement document, the size of the contact
2
area on the specimen holder
for this test shall be 2 square inches (12.9 cm ).

METHOD 5310
4.1.2 A mounting cone (G), for use in uniformly mounting specimens on the
specimen holder.
4.1.3 The weights of the holder (A) and support (B), together with the
removable weight (if necessary) shall be such as to give the required contact
pressure (see 5.2) for the size of specimen holder being used.
4.1.4 An abradant holder (D), for retaining either a rigid or flexible
abradant, such as woven plastic, having a speed of 86 ± 3 revolutions per
minutes, with a displacement of 1.5 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
4.1.5 The motor drive imparts a uniform circular motion to the abradant
holder without rotation about its center.
4.1.6 The discs used for each test shall be as follows:

a. Pilling disc - Shall be made of a polyurethane foam.
b. Wear disc - Shall be a silicone carbide with a designation
of 7K for woven cloth, and 5T for knit cloth.
4.1.7 Black or white inking papers for preferentially inking pills on the
test specimen.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Conditions of specimens for test.

5.1.1 Dry. When the specimen to be tested is in a dry state, it shall
be brought to moisture equilibrium under standard conditions in accordance
5.1.2 Wet. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, when the
specimen is to be tested in a wet state, the moisture pick up of the cloth shall
be 60 ± 5 percent.
5.2 Contact pressure. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

the contact pressure applied to the test specimens by abradant, and the
duration of the test shall be as follows:
a. Pilling test. The contact pressure shall be 0.50 pounds per square
inch (3.4 kPa), and the pilling disc shall be used for 5 minutes.
b. Combined wear-pill test:

METHOD 5310
Woven cloth. The contact pressure shall be 0.50 pounds per square
inch (3.4 kPa), using the 7K wear disc for 10 cycles, followed by 0.50 pounds
per square inch (3.4 kPa) pressure with the pilling disc for 5 minutes.
Knit cloth. The contact pressure shall be 0.50 pounds per square
inch (3.4 kPa) using the 5T wear disc for 10 cycles, followed by 0.50 pounds
per square inch (3.4 kPa) pressure with the pilling disc for 5 minutes.
5.3 Calibrate and periodically check the operation, using a standard
fabric of known pilling and wear propensity. The abradants for the pilling
and wear tests should be changed when they fail to pill or abrade a standard
fabric (see 7.1) with uniform results.
5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the face

of the cloth (weave face, finished face, coated face, etc.) shall be the
surface subjected to the abradant and pilling discs.
5.5 The specimen shall be placed over the specimen holder. The mounting
cone shall be set upright over the specimen, and the rubber ring rolled down
over the cone until it slips off the bottom of the cone and seats over the
specimen in the side groove running around the specimen holder. The mounting
cone shall then be removed, and the specimen and holder assembly slipped up onto
the adapter at the bottom of the specimen holder support. When in this position,
the surface to be tested shall be facing down. The abradant shall be placed
face up over the surface of the abradant holder, the washer placed over the
abradant, and the cap screwed down. The specimen shall be lowered onto the
surface of the abradant by disengaging the support from the rest pin and allowing
the rest pin to fall through the slot or hole in the support cap. The timer
shall be set and the machine run for the required time.
5.6 Pill rating. At the end of the test period, the specimen holder
with the specimen shall be removed from the support adapter with the con-
tact surface of the specimen down. The specimen holder shall be moved
slowly back and forth by hand over the surface of the inking paper 10
times, without applying any downward pressure, until the projecting pills
have been inked (see 6.1). Black inking paper shall be used for light
colored materials and white inking paper for dark colored materials.
5.7 Evaluation.
5.7.1.1 Pilling. When a standard sample has been established for pilling
the inked specimen shall be compared to the inked standard and rated as follows:

METHOD 5310
Pass: When pill count is equal to or less than is shown by the standard.
Fail: When pill count is more than is shown by the standard.
5.7.1.2 Combined wear-pill. When a standard sample has been established

for the combined wear-pill test, the test specimen shall be compared to the
standard and rated as follows:
Pass: When pill count or degree of surface wear is equal to or less

than the standard.
Fail: When pill count or degree of surface wear is more than the standard.
5.7.2.1 Pilling. When a standard sample has not been established, the
inked specimen shall be compared with the standard pill rating chart (see
figure 5310B) and assigned a value corresponding to the nearest standard
rating.
5.7.2.2 Combined wear-pill. When a standard sample has not been established
for the combined wear-pill test the test specimen shall be compared with the
original material and evaluated visually for changes of luster, color, fuzzing,
removal of nap, cover, flock, or coating, etc., and shall be evaluated in
accordance with the following adjective ratings:
Good: Not more than a slight degree of pilling or wear on the surface of
the cloth.
Fair: Appreciable but not excessive pilling or wear on the surface of
the cloth.
Poor: Excessive pilling or wear on the surface of the cloth.
“Appreciable pilling or wear to the surface of the cloth” means a change that
is immediately noticeable in comparing the tested specimen with the original
comparison specimen. If closer inspection or a change of angle of light
is required to make apparent slight wear to the cloth, the change is not
considered appreciable.
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, each specimen

for the pilling test and combined wear-pill test shall be evaluated separately
and reported separately for each of the 5 specimens in the sample unit.
6.2 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, the
pilling and combined wear-pill tests shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”.
If one specimen is reported “fail” the sample unit is considered to have
failed.

METHOD 5310
6.3 No standard sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

when a standard sample has not been established, the results shall be reported
as follows:
6.3.1 Pilling test. The 5 inked test specimens in the sample unit shall
be compared with the standard pill rating chart, and the nearest standard rating
reported.
6.3.2 Combined wear-pill test. The 5 test specimens shall be reported as
“pass” or “fail” in accordance with the adjective rating requirement of the
procurement document. When failure is reported the severest departure, i.e.
the actual rating “fair” or “poor” of the change of test specimen, shall also
be distinguished and reported. When one specimen is reported as “fail”,
the sample unit is considered to have failed.
7. NOTES
7.1 The standard fabric to be used in calibrating test apparatus is

obtainable from the Countersurveillance and Process Technology Branch, US
Army Natick Research and Development Command, Natick, MA 01760.
7.2 An Appearance-Retention Tester and accessories of the type described in

this method are manufactured by the:
Custom Scientific Instruments, Inc.,

13 Wing Drive
Whippany, NJ 07981

METHOD 5310
LEGEND
A. Circular Specimen Holder

B. Specimen Holder Support
C. Removable Weight
D. Abradant Holder
E. Timer
F. Rubber Ring
G. Mounting Cone
FIGURE 5310A

METHOD 5310
FIGURE 5310 B

METHOD 5320
July 20, 1978
PILLING RESISTANCE OF TEXTILE FABRICS;

BRUSH AND SPONGE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of textile

fabrics to pilling and fuzzing.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
when a standard sample has been established, three specimens shall be cut from
the sample unit, and one specimen shall be cut from the standard sample. The
specimens shall be 9 by 10 inches (229 by 254 mm), with the longer dimension
in the direction of the filling.

document, when a standard sample has not been established, four specimens
shall be cut from the sample unit, one specimen being retained, untested, for
comparison. The specimens shall be 9 by 10 inches (229 by 254 mm), with the
longer dimension in the direction of the filling.
2.3 The specimens shall be taken from the center and sides of the sample
unit, with those taken from the sides, care shall be taken so that no selvage
is included as part of the specimen. No two specimens shall be taken from
areas containing the same warp or filling yarns.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Brush and sponge pilling tester (see 7.2).
4.1.1 Eight nylon brushes, 10 mil (0.25 mm) black nylon bristles 15/16
inches (24 mm) long, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) over-all height including backing
(see 7.3).
4.1.2 Brush holders, two strip channel, 31 inches (787 mm) long.
4.1.3 Brush holder mountings, 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) center hole to center hole.

METHOD 5320
4.1.4 Sponges 2 x 4 x 6 inches (51 x 102 x 152 mm) (see 7.4).
4.1.5 Sandpaper.
4.1.5.1 No. 4/0 sandpaper for backing material of specimen holder and sanding
sponges.
4.1.5.2 No. 1-1/2 flint paper for sanding brushes.
4.1.6 Six specimen holders, 1.37 ± .01 lb (625 ± 5 g), covered with 4/0
sandpaper.
5. PROCEDURE
be performed under standard conditions in accordance with Section 4 of this
Standard.
5.2 Calibration. Calibrate and periodically check the pilling tester against
a standard fabric (see 7.1) of known pilling resistance. The machine can be
brought back into calibration by resurfacing the sponges and cleaning the brushes.
5.2.1 Sponges should be resurfaced by sanding or sawing off a thin layer,

followed by sanding. If this fails, new sponges will have to be installed,
and sanded for at least 24 hours after mounting on the brush board. Flint
paper shall be mounted on the specimen holders for sanding brushes. Sponges
should then be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner to remove lint and sponge part-
icles which tend to reduce sponge effectiveness.
5.2.2 Brushes should be cleaned with solvent, lint removed with a hand card,
and protruding bristles clipped periodically.
5.3 Mount the test specimens on the holders with the warp direction of the
fabric parallel to the long dimension of the holder and with the face exposed,
and with sufficient tension to prevent wrinkling during testing.
5.3.1 Place the brush board on the machine with the bristles pointing
upward. Set the specimen holders over the positioning pins so that the
face of the test specimens makes contact with the bristles.
5.3.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the specimens

shall be brushed for 5 minutes. Remove the specimen holders and replace the
brush board with the sponge-board. Reset the specimen holders in their
respective positions and sponge the brushed specimens for 5 minutes.

METHOD 5320
5.4 Evaluation.
5.4.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, the
test specimens shall be compared with the specimen of the standard sample and
rated as follows:
Pass: Equal to or better than the standard sample.

Fail: Inferior to the standard sample.
5.4.2 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established,
the test specimens shall be compared to the untested specimen and rated as
follows:
Good: No pilling or fuzzing.

Fair: Moderate pilling or fuzzing (not objectionable).
Poor: Heavy pilling or fuzzing (objectionable).
6. REPORT
results of testing each of the three specimens shall be reported as “pass”
or “fail”. If one specimen is reported as “fail”, the sample unit is con-
sidered to have failed.
6.2 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established,
the results of testing each of the three specimens in the sample unit shall
be reported as “pass” or “fail” in accordance with the adjective rating
requirement of the procurement document. When failure is reported the severest
departure, i.e. the actual rating “fair” or “poor” of the change of test specimen,
shall also be distinguished and reported. When one specimen is reported as
“fail”, the sample unit is considered to have failed.
7. NOTES
7.1 The standard fabric to be used in calibrating test apparatus is obtainable

from the Countersurveillance and Process Technology Branch, US Army Natick
Research and Development Command, Natick, MA 01760.
7.2 The brush and sponge pilling tester may be purchased from Custom
Scientific Instruments, Inc., 13 Wing Drive, Whippany, NJ 07981.
7.3 The brushes No. 8B9041-13 and brush holders Series 9C7200 may be
purchased from Fuller Brush Company, Hartford, CT 06115.
7.4 The sponges are DuPont No. 8A (with softener removed).

METHOD 5400
July 20, 1978
SEWABILITY OF WOVEN CLOTH; YARN SEVERANCE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the sewability of woven cloth
by using the number of percent of yarns completely severed in sewing as the
criterion.
1.2 Since the majority of the principal seams in clothing are parallel to
the warp direction of the cloth, and filling yarn severance usually pre-
dominates, the described procedure is for filling yarn severance. When
warp yarn severance is specified in the procurement document, the word
“warp” for “filling” and the word “filling” for “warp” shall be substituted
in the applicable paragraphs.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be a 3 inch (76 mm) portion of the seam prepared
as specified in 5.1.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The apparatus shall be as described in Method 5110, except that the
tensile tester is not required.
4.1.2 Pick needle or similar device.
4.2 Method cited.

Method 5110, Sewability of Woven Cloth; Seam Efficiency Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The specimens shall be prepared as follows:
FED.TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 5400
5.1.1 Standard seam. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

the test specimens shall be cut from a seamed strip prepared as described in
Method 5110, except that the panel of cloth shall be 8 by 48 inches (203 by
1220 mm) and shall be cut before seaming into 2 strips 4 inches wide (102 mm),
with the long dimension perpendicular to the filling yarns. The seam shall be
inspected for proper folding and stitching.
5.1.1.1 The specimens shall be cut 3 inches (76 mm) wide at random intervals
along the length of the seam. No specimen shall be taken within 6 inches
(152 mm) of either end of the seam where sewing started or finished, nor from
any section that was improperly formed.
5.1.1.2 The 2 rows of sewing thread shall be removed from the 3-inch (76 mm)
specimen and the bottom layer of the cloth reserved.

conditioned as specified in Section 4 of this Standard.
5.3 The edge of the cloth turned in to the seam and the adjacent row of
needle holes on the specimen shall be cut away to within 1/8 inch (3 mm) of
the inside test row of needle holes. The middle 1 inch (25 mm) of the specimen
shall then be cut out and the warp yarns removed, using a pick needle or similar
device, to a point slightly beyond the stitching line.
5.4 The number of completely severed warp yarns parallel to the direction
of the seam shall be counted.
5.5 The total number of filling yarns and the number of filling yarns
which have been severed shall be counted.
5.6 Calculation of results. The percent filling yarn severance shall

Filling yarn severance, percent = No. of filling yarns severed per inch (/cm) x 100
Total filling yarns per inch (/cm)
6. REPORT
6.1 The filling yarn severance of the sample unit shall be the average of the
results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported to the nearest
0.1 percent.
6.2 The average number of completely severed warp yarns per inch (yarns/cm)
shall be reported to the nearest whole number.
reported.

METHOD 5404
July 20, 1978
SEWABILITY OF CLOTHS CONTAINING THERMOPLASTIC
SYNTHETIC FIBERS OR YARNS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining whether cloths containing
thermoplastic synthetic fibers or yarns can be sewn at high production speeds
without the generation of needle heat which will cause the fibers or filament
to melt and encrust the needle.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be 4 pieces of cloth, each 6 inches wide (152 mm) and 2 yards (1.8 m) long,
cut with the long dimension parallel to the warp direction. No selvage
shall be included in the sample tested.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Sewing machine. A high-speed double needle, 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) gauge
sewing machine, making stitch type 401 of FED-STD-751. The machine shall be
fitted with a well polished flat surface presser foot. An appropriate
plastic or plastic coated presser foot may also be used to reduce drag on
the cloth being tested. The sewing machine shall be set to operate at
4500 ± 100 stitches per minute and to sew 12 ± 1 stitches per inch (5 ± 1/2
stitches/cm).
4.2 Needles and thread. Two needles shall be used in the test. The needles
shall chrome-plated, regular set, round cloth point standard eye size.
Needles with ball points or cutting points shall not be used. Ball eye
needles may be used provided that the measurement across the eye meets the
requirement specified in the end procurement document. The size of the
needle and of the thread shall be specified in the procurement document,
based upon the size of the needle and sewing thread which will be used in
the production of sewn items from the material under test.

METHOD 5404
5. PROCEDURE
5.2 The tension of the sewing thread in both needles and both loopers
shall be adjusted to properly form stitch type 401 of FED-STD-751 without
puckering. The distribution of thread in the stitch by length shall be
40 ± 5 percent needle thread and 60 ± 5 percent looper thread.
5.3 The pressure on the presser foot shall be adjusted to provide proper
feed ratio of cloth to needle speed, so that 12 ± 1 stitches per inch (5 ±
1/2 stitches/cm) are maintained throughout the stitching cycle, and so that
puckering, pleating, and shifting or creeping of material is avoided.
5.4 The adjustments and settings of the sewing machine shall be tested
on a trial specimen by the procedure described in 5.5. This specimen shall
be prepared from cloth similar to the one being tested and which is known
not to cause encrustation. This preliminary test will prevent thread
breaks or skip stitching attributable to improper adjustments or settings,
and the use of thread of inferior sewing quality when sewing the test speci-
men.
5.5 The 4 strips of cloth comprising the test specimen shall be super-
imposed one on the other, face up, with the ends falling 2 inches (51 mm)
behind each other. The strips shall be stitched together along the left side
approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm) from the edge, beginning 2 inches (51 mm) from
the end of the top strip (see figure 5404, step 1). The strips shall be brought
under the table board of the sewing machine and the corresponding ends shall be
butted to form a continuous 4-layer band (see figure 5404, step 2). The
sawing over the butted ends shall be continued in helical form, progressing
toward the other edge of the specimen, with each double row of stitching at
least, 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the preceding row. Do not sew over previously sewn
areas.
5.5.1 Stitching shall be continued until skip stitching or thread rupture

occurs because of needle encrustation, or until 20 or other specified number
of yarns have been sewn.
5.5.2 When skip stitching or thread breakage occurs because of needle

encrustation, the failing needle or needles shall be removed and the length
of satisfactory stitching and behavior of the right- and left-hand needles
shall be reported separately. A new needle or needles shall be inserted
and stitching shall be resumed. This procedure shall be continued for the
20 or other specified yards of stitching.

METHOD 5404
5.6 Thread breaks or skip stitching caused by other than needle encrustation
shall be disregarded.
5.7 Specimens having a significant amount of puckering, pleating, or creeping

attributable to faulty technique shall be discarded and another specimen taken.
5.8 Evaluation. The specimen shall be examined visually and unless otherwise
specified in the procurement document, the sewability shall be evaluated
qualitatively. When specified in the procurement document, the quantitative
determination shall be made.
5.8.1 Qualitative. The specimen shall be examined for presence or absence

of skip stitching and thread breakage after the full 20 or other specified
number of yards have been sewn. The degree of needle encrustation shall be
ranked as “slight”, “moderate”, or “heavy”.
5.8.2 Quantitative. When the needles on one side of the sewing machine
give more trouble than those on the other, the sewing ability of this side
shall be evaluated. The evaluation shall be based upon either of the
following:
5.8.2.1 The average number of needles (or pairs of needles) required to

sew the 20 or other specified number of yards (m).
5.8.2.2 The average distance in yards (m) sewn per needle (or pairs of
needles), obtained by dividing the total distance sewn by the number of
needles (or pairs of needles) required to sew that distance.
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the sewability

of the sample unit shall be reported qualitatively. The presence or absence
of skip stitching and thread breakage and the degree of needle encrustation
shall be reported.
6.2 When specified in the procurement document, the sewability of the

sample unit shall be reported quantitatively. The average number of needles
required to sew the specified distance or the average distance sewn per
needle (or pair of needles) shall be reported.

METHOD 5404

METHOD 5410
July 20, 1978
SLIPPAGE RESISTANCE OF YARNS IN CLOTH;
YARN DISTORTION METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to slipping

or shifting of one system of yarns over the other in cloth. Surface fric-
tion is applied under a specified load and the resultant yarn distortion
is measured to obtain the resistance to yarn slippage of the warp or fill-
ing yarns. This method is especially applicable to nettings, marquisettes,
gauzes, and other open-weave cloths.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

shall be a rectangle of cloth 4 by 8 inches (102 by 203 mm), cut from the
unhandled portion of the cloth, with the long dimension parallel to the
filling for warp tests and parallel to the warp for filling tests. No
2 specimens for warp tests shall contain the warp yarns, nor shall any
2 specimens for the filling tests contain the same filling yarns. No
selvage shall be included in the sample tested.

shall be tested in each of the warp and filling directions for each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS (figure 5410A)
4.1 Yarn slippage resistance apparatus. A pair of cylindrical rubber friction

drums, or grippers, mounted vertically on the tester in such a way that the
specimen may be inserted between their two rounded contacting surfaces. Each
drum shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter and have a Shore durometer hardness of
55 to 60 (A scale). The lower drum shall be 2 inches (51 mm) in length, fastened
to the platform of the apparatus, and capable of being rotated in the mounting
frame between tests. The upper drum shall be 1 inch (25 mm) in length, have the
same provisions for rotation as the lower one, and shall be so mounted that a
total weight of 1 to 5 pounds (.45 to 2.27 kg) can be applied to the specimen
by means of a lever arm and a movable weight (see 7.1).
4.2 A mounting frame, or bracket, capable of holding the specimen under

uniform tension. The frame consists of a rectangle whose inside dimensions
are 4 by 6 inches (102 by 152 mm). The 4-inch (102 mm) sides are rectangular
screw clamps 3/8 inch (10 mm) in width, with the gripping surfaces suitably

METHOD 5410
grooved, taped, or otherwise designed to minimize slipping of the specimen in the

clamps during the test. The frame, when placed in test position on the rails,
shall be free to slide as a carriage in a plane perpendicular to the plane of
the axes of the friction drums.
4.3 Hand-crank arrangement for a 1-inch (25 mm) reciprocating motion of the
carriage. This device, or reciprocating arm, shall have a cam attachment
which lifts the upper drum in the return motion.
4.4 Two sets of rails, fixed and spaced on the platform of the tester,
for supporting the carriage.
4.5 Means for mounting the specimen in the frame under the tension of
a 5-pound (2.27 kg) load. A suitable device consisting of a clamp and weight
(figure 5410A) totalling 5 pounds (2.27 kg).
4.6 Scale graduated in 0.01 inch (.25 mm), dividers, and suitable magnifying
device or optical comparator and measuring device or traveling micro-
scope.
5. PROCEDURE
5.2 A yarn shall be pulled from the edge of the specimen in each of the
warp and filling directions to aid in aligning the specimen in the brackets,
or frame, of the tester.
5.3 The specimen shall be placed in the frame so that the warp and fill-
ing yarns are parallel to the sides of the frame. One 4-inch (102 mm) end of
the specimen shall be clamped in one end of the frame. The 5-pound (2.27 kg)
load shall then be applied across the opposite 4-inch (102 mm) width of the
specimen and the second clamp securely tightened.
5.4 The upper friction drum shall be raised on its weighted lever and the
frame placed between the drums, positioning it at the extreme end of its
travel on the rails.
5.5 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the weight

of the upper friction drum shall be adjusted to provide a total force of
3 pounds (13.4 N) during the test.
5.6 Two rotations of the hand crank shall be made at a speed of approxi-
mately 30 rpm to slide the carriage back and forth over a distance of 1 inch
(25 mm), causing the cloth to slip back and forth between the friction drums.
The area of friction on the specimen shall be centrally located between the
clamps, approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm) from one long edge of the specimen.

METHOD 5410
5.7 The carriage shall be transferred to the second pair of rails and
the test repeated to cause another area of friction 1/2 inch (13 mm) from the
other long edge of the specimen.
5.7.1 The rubbing surfaces of the friction drums shall be turned in their
clamps, presenting a new surface after every 40 rubbing cycles. The jaws
shall be replaced after 1 revolution in their clamps.
5.8 The carriage shall be removed from the rails, and the specimen care-
fully removed from the frame and taped without tension on a flat surface.
A transparent film shall be placed over the specimen, care being taken not
to distort the yarns.
5.9 The specimen shall be allowed to relax for 15 minutes after removal
from the frame. The widest opening of each shift mark, or distorted yarn
group, as illustrated by figure 5410A, shall be measured to the nearest
0.01 inch (0.25 mm) under magnification, using a pair of dividers and graduated
scale, traveling microscope, or optical comparator.
5.10 Test results which show unshifted or nonaligned yarns, as illustrated

by figure 5410B, shall be considered unmeasurable.
5.11 The average of the 2 strokes on each specimen shall be the slippage
of the specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 The yarn slippage resistance of the sample unit shall be the average
of the results obtained from the specimens tested in each of the warp and
filling directions and shall be reported to the nearest 0.01 inch (0.1 mm).
6.2 When a test result is considered unmeasurable, the nature of such

resistance (distortion), and the direction in which it occurred shall be
reported.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A yarn slippage resistance apparatus of the type described in this

method may be purchased from the United States Testing Company, 1415 Park
Avenue, Hoboken, NJ 07030.

METHOD 5410
FIGURE 5410A

METHOD 5410
(a) Unshifted - Nonmeasurable

(May contain friction marks)
(b) - Unaligned - Nonmeasurable
FIGURE 5410B - Unmeasurable shift openings.

METHOD 5420
July 20, 1978
SLIPPAGE RESISTANCE OF YARNS IN CLOTH; SEAM METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to slippage of

one system of yarn over the other at and parallel to the seams in woven cloth,
caused by stress resulting from the application of load perpendicular to the
seam direction. The resistance to slippage is the pounds pull (across a seam)
per inch (25 mm) of width necessary to produce a specified elongation, in inches
(mm), in excess of the normal stretch of the cloth under the same load. This
method is more severe, and suitable for testing closely woven cloths, than
Method 5410. It does not apply to slippage resulting from yarn distortion, or
to slippage caused by fraying or ravening.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a rectangle of cloth, 4 by 14 inches (102 by 356 mm), cut from the
long dimension parallel to the filling for the warp tests and parallel to the
warp for filling tests. No selvage shall be included in the specimen tested.
No two specimens for warp tests shall contain the same warp yarns, nor shall
any two specimens for filling tests contain the same filling yarns.

unit.
3.2 When tests in the direction of least resistance only are specified, five
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Tensile testing machine. A tensile testing machine and autographic
recording device-as described in Method 5100. The machine shall be of such
capacity that the maximum load required to break the specimen shall be not
greater than 85 percent or less than 15 percent of the rated capacity.
4.1.2 Needles and thread. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, the needle shall be 0.030 ± 0.001 inch (0.762 ± 0.025 mm) across
the blade of the eye and the thread shall be cotton, type IC1, ticket No. 00,
3-ply of V-T-276; Thread, Cotton.

METHOD 5420
4.1.3 Sewing machine. A sewing machine capable of producing a 301 stitch

type of FED-STD-751.
4.1.4 Dividers.
4.2 Method cited.

Method 5100, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Grab Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The specimen shall be prepared as follows:

5.1.1 Standard seam. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
the specimen shall be folded back upon itself, 4 inches (102 mm) from one end,
care being taken to have the fold parallel to the crosswise yarns. A seam shall
be machine sewn, 1/2 inch (13 mm) from the fold and parallel to the crosswise
yarns, using uniform tension. 14 ± 1 stitches per inch (5-1/2 ± 1/2 stitches/cm)
shall be used in the seam. The tension on the sewing thread shall be adjusted to
properly form stitch type 301 of FED-STD-751 without puckering.
5.1.2 Previously prepared seam. When specified in the procurement document,

specimens may be taken from existing seams in a garment or sewn article. The
specimens may be a seam assembly cut 4 inches (102 mm) wide and 13 inches (330
mm) long and having the seam located 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) from one end. The
specimen shall be selected with the short dimension parallel (or as parallel
as possible) to the seam, and the long dimension perpendicular to the seam and
in the direction of least resistance as determined by preliminary tests. The
direction of yarns perpendicular to the seam shall be recorded.
5.1.3 Determination of direction of least resistance. A preliminary test

performed by following the procedures of 5.3 to 5.5 on one specimen with the
seam in the direction of the warp and another with the seam in the direction
of the filling will indicate the direction of least resistance.
5.3 The distance between the clamps shall be set at 3 inches (76 mm). One
cloth load-elongation determination and one load-elongation curve for cloth-
plus-seam shall be made on each specimen. The two curves shall be made on the
same chart to provide means for determining one test result as described below.
In all tests, the specimen shall be aligned squarely in the clamps with the
crosswise yarns at right angles, and the lengthwise yarns parallel to the
direction of application of load. Care shall be taken to grip the same length-
wise yarns of the same specimen in both clamps in both tests.

METHOD 5420
5.4 Load-elongation curve for cloth. The end of the specimen farthest from the
seam shall be placed in the jaws of the machine with the long dimension parallel
to the direction of application of load. The specimen shall be placed in the jaws
under the 6-ounce (170 g) load. The recording pen shall be set at the zero-point
on the chart and the load-elongation curve autographically recorded up to the
point of failure of the cloth or up to 50 pounds (23 kg).
5.5 Load-elongation curve for cloth-plus-seam. The specimen shall be cut along
the fold adjacent to the seam. The untested portion of the specimen shall be
clamped with the seam midway between the upper and lower clamps. The recording
pen shall be set on the same zero-point used for the load-elongation curve for
the cloth. The load-elongation curve shall be recorded autographically to the
point of failure of the cloth or up to 50 pounds (23 kg).
5.6 Slippage charts obtained will resemble Figure 5420.
5.7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, resistance

to slippage shall be the pounds per inch (g/mm) of cloth width required to
produce an elongation of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in excess of the normal stretch of the
cloth.
5.7.2 If the load-elongation curve is serrated, it shall be smoothed out
by drawing a line through the tops of the serrations. A pair of dividers
shall be set at points B and C of Figure 5420, where the two curves cross
the 1-pound (453 g) ordinate. This distance between the curves is called
the “compensation”. The dividers shall then be placed on a scale and opened
an additioned distance corresponding to the specified 1/4 inch (6 mm) or other
specified slippage, correcting this distance for the ratio of magnification
of the chart.
5.7.3 With the dividers set as in 5.7.2 and with one point on the cloth
curve, proceed up this curve until the other point rests on the load-elongation
tune for the “cloth-plus-seam”, with both points resting on the same ordinate.
The total load in pounds at this position shall be recorded. The 1-pound (453 g)
“compensation” shall be subtracted from this total load. The remainder shall
be the resistance to slippage, or the force required to produce a 1/4 inch
(6 mm) slippage per 1 inch (25 mm) of cloth when jaws measuring 1 inch (25 mm)
perpendicular to the direction of the application of load are used. When this
jaw measurement is 2 inches (51 mm), 2 pounds (907 g) shall be used for
“compensation” and the final result divided by two.
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the yarn slippage
of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens
tested in each of the warp and filling directions, and shall be reported separately
to the nearest 0.5 pound (to the nearest 1 N).

METHOD 5420
6.1.1 When the direction of least resistance is specified, the average of

the results obtained from the specimens tested in that direction shall be
reported to the nearest 0.5 pound (to the nearest 1 N).

METHOD 5420
SLIPPAGE CHART
A to B = Distance equivalent to 1/2 inch slip (ratio of chart distance to slip distance
is 2:1; 1/4 inch when ratio of chart distance to slip distance is 1:1;
B to C = “Compensation” at 1 lb.
Slippage of cloth was at 14 lb. reading, or 14 - 1 = 13 lb. per inch, corrected
FIGURE 5420

METHOD 5450
July 20, 1978
PERMEABILITY TO AIR; CLOTH; CALIBRATED ORIFICE METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the air permeability of

cloth. It is recommended for cloths as thin and light as parachute
cloth to those as thick and heavy as blanket material. It may be used
for cloth having an air permeability from 0.1 to 5502.0 cubic feet of
3 2
air per minute per square foot (0.05 to 2795 cm /sec/cm ) of cloth. The
pressure drop across the cloth may also be varied within wide limits.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of cloth a minimum of 7 inches by

7 inches (178 mm by 178 mm) (see 7.2).

4. APPARATUS (See figs. 5450A and 5450B)

4.1 Air permeability testing machine. Any air permeability instrument
which has two oil or oil water manometers (see 7.1), one partly inclined, for
measuring the pressure drop across the cloth under test; the other for measuring
the pressure drop across the orifice. The partly inclined manometer shall be
graduated to read pressure in inches (mm) of water.
4.1.1 The partly inclined manometer shall have one end left open to
the atmosphere and the other end attached to the cylinder between the
air orifice and the specimen. The vertical manometer shall have one end
attached to the cylinder between the orifice and the fan, and the other
end to the cylinder between the orifice and the cloth.
4.2 Leveling screws and a micrometer plunger for setting the meniscus of
the inclined manometer to “zero” when no air is being drawn through the cloth.
4.3 An oil reservoir for each manometer. The reservoir for the vertical
manometer shall have a large area in comparison to the cross sectional
area of the manometer.
4.4 Nine air orifices having the following nominal diameters in millimeters:
1.0, 1.4, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 11.0 and 16.0.

METHOD 5450
4.5 Cylindrical chamber approximately 16 ± 1/2 inches (406 mm ± 13 mm) long

and 6 inches (152 mm) in diameter containing a partition near the middle
equipped to hold the air orifice. A cloth orifice over which the specimen is
placed shall be at one end of the cylinder, and a motor-driven suction fan shall
be at the other end of the cylinder.
4.6 A 3 pound (1.36 kg) beveled ring and clamp, attached if desired, so as
to hold the specimen under tension and in a smooth condition against the
cloth orifice.
4.7 Rheostat(s) used for varying the speed of the motor which drives the
suction fan.
4.8 A removable attachment to vary the cloth orifice to allow readings

from
3
0.12 to 5502.0 cubic feet of air per minute per square foot (0.05 to 2795
cm /m/cm ) of cloth.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the pressure

drop across the cloth shall be 0.5 inch (13 mm) of water.
5.2 The specimen, which shall not have been previously folded, creased,
or in any manner deformed, shall be placed across the cloth orifice and
the beveled 3 pound (1.36 kg) ring and clamp shall be placed over the cloth
to hold the specimen under a slight tension and in a smooth condition. Air
shall be drawn through the cloth and through the calibrated orifice by means
of the suction fan.
5.2.1 The appropriate size of orifice to use for a cloth, whose approx-
imate air permeability is not known, is determined by a trial run.
5.3 The pressure drop across the cloth, measured on the inclined mano-
meter, shall be adjusted to the required pressure drop by adjusting the
speed of the suction fan motor. The pressure drop across the orifice shall
then be noted on the vertical manometer. The volume of air passing through
the cloth shall be calculated from this value and the calibration of orifice.
Due to variations in machines available, calculation of air volumes shall
be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
5.3.1 The pressure drop indicated by the vertical manometer shall not
be less than 3 inches (76 mm) nor more than 26 inches (660 mm).
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the air

permeability of the specimen
3
shall2 be expressed in cubic feet of air per
minute per square foot (cm /sec/cm ) of cloth at a pressure drop of 0.5 inch
(13 mm) of water across the specimen.

METHOD 5450
6.2 The air permeability of the sample unit shall be the average of the
results obtained from the five specimens tested and shall be reported to
3
the nearest 0.1 cubic foot (to the nearest 0.001 m ).
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The oil used is "Meriam red oil” and can be obtained from the Meriam
Instrument Coo, 10978 Madison Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44102. An air permeability
apparatus of the type described may be purchased from the Frazier Precision
Instrument Company, 210 Oakmont Avenue, Gaithersburg, MD 20760.
2
7.2 A 0.0412 square foot (0.0038 m ) area of 3cloth through which the air
passes for approximately 900 cubic feet (25.5 m ) when using a 2-3/4 inch
2
(70 mm) diameter 3opening and a 0.0077 square foot (0.0007 m ) area for 5502
cubic feet (156 m ) when using a 1-3/16 inch (30 mm) diameter opening have been
found satisfactory for the described uses.

METHOD 5450
FIGURE 5450A - Schematic diagram of air-permeability

instrument.
METHOD 5450
FIGURE 5450B

METHOD 5452
July 20, 1978
PERMEABILITY TO AIR; CLOTH; FALLING CYLINDER METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the air permeability of

cloth. It is recommended for testing closely woven, light weight, and
thin fabrics which offer a great deal of resistance to the flow of air.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of cloth 4 inches by 4 inches

(102 mm by 102 mm). The actual area of the specimen through which the
air is forced shall be 0.10 square inch (64.5 mm2).

4.1 Air permeability testing machine. The air permeability test machine
shall consist of two cylinders, the outer one of which shall be 9-1/2 inches
(241 mm) high and 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter, and the inner cylinder
9-5/8 inches (244 mm) high and 2-7/8 inches (73 mm) in diameter (see 7.1).
4.1.1 The inner cylinder furnishes the air pressure which shall have
an airtight top and shall weigh 5 ounces (142 g). The upper of its
cylindrical surface shall have six division marks, each division repre-
senting a volume of 50 cm 3.
4.2 The two orifice plates shall be coaxially clamped together by means
of the capstan clamp. The clamp plates shall be self-aligning so as to
prevent the leakage of air along the surface of the specimen. The upper
orifice shall be the end of a tube which extends upward through the closed
bottom of the outer cylinder which contains oil. The upper end of the
orifice tube shall be open and extend above the oil in the outer cylinder.
The lower plate shall be fastened to a supporting stand in such a manner
as to permit free flow of air through the orifice. The inner cylinder which
furnishes the pressure shall move freely, and the lower end shall extend into
the oil in the outer cylinder in such a manner as to furnish an airtight seal
for all positions of the inner cylinder.

METHOD 5452
4.3 Clamping device. Clamping device for holding the Inner cylinder in a
raised position.
4.4 Capstan screw clamping device.
4.5 Oil. Oil, for use in the outer cylinder, having a Saybolt viscosity
of 60 to 70 seconds at a temperature of 100°F (38°C).
4.6 Stopwatch or other timing device which will indicate the time
to one-fifth of a second.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The inner cylinder shall be raised to its highest position and
the specimen clamped securely between the orifice plates. The inner
cylinder shall be released from its highest position. The downward
movement of the cylinder increases the pressure of the trapped air in
the upper part of the cylinder which in turn is transmitted through the
open end tube to the specimen between the orifice plates, thus causing
air to pass through the specimen.
5.2 The rate at which air passes through the specimen is the air
permeability of the specimen and shall be obtained by determining the
time necessary for the division marks on the inner cylinder to pass the
upper edge of the outer cylinder.
5.3 Unless otherwise specified, the air permeability

3
of the specimen
shall be expressed as the time in seconds for 300 cm of air to pass through
the cloth.
6. REPORT
6.1 The air permeability of the sample unit shall be the average of the
nearest second.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 An air permeability apparatus of the type described in this method

may be obtained from W. and L. E. Gurley, 514 Fulton Street, Troy, NY 12181.

METHOD 5452
FIGURE 5452

METHOD 5500
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; DYNAMIC ABSORPTION METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the amount of water absorbed
by cloth when subjected to dynamic conditions.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be composed of five square pieces of the finished
cloth, each 8 by 8 inches (203 by 203 mm), cut on a 45-degree bias with the
loose corner yarns removed (see 7.2).

(10 pieces) shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Tumble jar. A tumble jar (see figure 5500A), cylindrical in shape with
approximate dimensions being 12 inches (305 mm) in height and 6 inches (152 mm) in
diameter (or between opposite flat faces) with a capacity of approximately 1.6
gallons (6 L). The jar shall be of glass, corrosion-resistant metal or chemical
stoneware. The jar shall be mounted in a vertical position in such a manner that
it can be rotated around the horizontal axis passing through the center of the
jar. Means shall be provided for rotating the jar around the axis at a speed
of 55 ± 2 revolutions per minute. The jar shall be clean and thoroughly rinsed
so that it is free from soap, detergent, and wetting agents (see 7.1).
4.2 Wringer. A wringer (see figure 5500B), of the household type equipped with
smooth rubber squeeze rolls 2-1/8 to 2-1/2 inches (54 to 64 mm) in diameter and
not less than 11 inches (279 mm) nor more than 16 inches (406 mm) in length. The
rubber rolls shall have a Shore durometer hardness of 70 to 80 (A scale). The
load exerted on the specimen shall be applied uniformly by means of a dead weight,
attached to the top roller. The total load of the roller, means of attaching the
weight and the weight itself shall be 60 pounds (27.2 kg). The rolls shall be
power driven at such a speed that the specimen shall pass through the rolls at
the rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per second.
4.3 Balance. A laboratory balance capable of weighing accurately to 0.01 g.
4.4 Blotting paper. The blotting paper dimensions shall be 10 inches (254 mm)
square (see 7.3).

METHOD 5500
4.5 Container. Tared glass or plastic container.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the rotation

of the jar shall be a minimum of 20 minutes.
5.2 Original weight of the specimen. The five pieces constituting one
specimen shall be conditioned, then rolled together and weighed to the nearest
0.01 g. This is the “Weight of the original conditioned specimen” and in the
calculation of results is designated as “O”. Each individual piece of the
specimens shall be marked to maintain the individual identities. Two liters of
distilled water at a temperature of 80° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) shall be placed in the
tumble jar, and the specimen shall be added, one piece at a time. Two specimens
(10 pieces) may be tested at the same time providing each specimen is taken from
a different sample unit. If only one specimen is tested, a specimen of similar
material with respect to weight shall be run as ballast with the specimen under-
going test. The cloth in the jar during any run shall be the equivalent of two
specimens.
5.3 The jar and contents shall be rotated at the rate of 55 ± 2 revolutions
per minute for the time specified in the procurement document.
5.4 At the end of the required running time, one piece shall be run through
the wringer with one edge parallel to the length of the rollers.
5.5 The same piece shall immediately be placed smoothly between two sheets
of blotting paper. The piece of cloth and blotters shall be passed through
the rollers of the wringer by the procedure described in 5.4. The piece of
cloth shall be left between the two blotters until all five pieces of the
specimen (between sheets of blotting paper) have been passed between the
rollers.
5.6 Final weight of the specimen. Each of the remaining pieces shall be
treated as described in 5.4 and 5.5. The five pieces shall then be removed from
the blotting paper, rolled together and weighed in a tared closed
. container to
the nearest 0.01 g. This is the “Final weight of the specimen” and in the
calculation of results is designated as “F”
5.6.1 Care shall be taken at all times to keep evaporation of moisture

from specimen to a minimum.
— The dynamic absorption shall be calculated
as follows:

METHOD 5500
Dynamic absorption percent = F - O x 100
O
Where: O = Original weight of the specimen.

6. REPORT
6.1 The dynamic absorption of the sample unit shall be the average of the
results obtained from the two specimens (10 pieces) tested and shall be
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A tumble jar suitable for conducting this test may be obtained from
Andrew Technical Supply Co., 2540 Eastwood Ave., Evanston, IL 60204.
7.2 If the material of test is subject to excessive raveling, a drop of
liquid latex or rubber cement shall be spread on the yarns at each corner
to prevent raveling. Care shall be exercised in the selection of the latex
or rubber cement to insure impurities are not present which will affect
results.

P.O. BOX 2218
Richmond, VA 23217

METHOD 5500
DYNAMIC ABSORPTION TEST
FIGURE 5500A - TUMBLE JAR
FIGURE 5500B - WRINGER

METHOD 5502
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; IMMERSION ABSORPTION METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the amount of water absorbed by
cloth when subjected to static conditions. This method is not as severe as
Method 5500.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Standard. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the

specimen shall be a square of cloth 3 inches by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm).
Departure from the required specimen size shall be permitted when necessary so
that appreciably heavy or light cloths shall fall within the weight range of
not less than 1 g nor more than 4 g. Changes in size shall be permitted only
in multiples of 6 inches (152 mm).
2.2 Lightweight cloths. The size of the specimen for lightweight cloth
shall be larger than for heavyweight cloth (6 inches by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm)
for mosquito netting) and should be specified in the procurement document.
2.3 Narrow cloths. The dimensions of narrow cloth specimens shall be as

follows:
Specimen width, inches (mm) Length required

Type of Material (measured to nearest 1/8 inch (1 mm)) (inches) (mm)
Narrow cloth 1/4 to 3/8 (6 to 10 mm) 24 (610 mm)
Narrow cloth 1/2 to 7/8 (13 to 22 mm) 18 (457 mm)
Narrow cloth 1 to 1-3/8 (25 to 35 mm) 12 (305 mm)
Narrow cloth 1-1/2 to 3 (38 to 76 mm) 6 (152 mm)

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Blotting paper. The standard blotting paper dimensions shall be a

minimum of 4 inches by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm) (see 7.1). For lightweight
cloths and narrow cloths, the blotting paper shall be approximately one inch
(25 mm) greater than the length and width of the specimen.

METHOD 5502
4.2 Wringer. A wringer (see figure 5502) of a household type equipped with
smooth rubber squeeze rolls 2-1/8 to 2-1/2 inches (54 to 64 mm) in diameter
and not less than 11 inches (279 mm) nor more than 16 inches (406 mm) in length.
The rubber rolls shall have a Shore durometer hardness of 70 to 80 (A scale).
The load exerted on the specimen shall be uniformly applied by means of a dead
weight, attached to the top roller. The total load of the roller, means of
attaching the weight, and the weight itself shall be 60 pounds (27.2 kg). The
rolls shall be power driven at such a speed that the specimen shall pass through
the rolls at the rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per second.
4.3 Sinker. A sinker for keeping the specimen submerged, shall consist of
a rigid inverted L-shaped metal hook of noncorrosive metal fastened to a weight.
The sinker shall be sufficiently heavy to sink to the bottom of the tank when
attached to the specimen. (normally a weight of 3.5 to 5.5 ounces (100 to 150 g)
is adequate.) In testing narrow cloth, the horizontal end of the sinker hook
shall be of sufficient length so that the portions of the specimens attached
thereon may spread out to permit full contact with the water.
4.4 Tank. A tank of such size as to permit a 2-inch (51 mm) hydrostatic
head of water above the top of the specimens undergoing test.
4.5 Balance. A laboratory balance capable of weighing accurately to 0.05 g.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the time of

immersion shall be 20 ± 1 minutes.
5.2 Original conditioned weight of the specimen. The specimen shall be

conditioned and weighed to the nearest 0.05 g. This is the “Original conditioned
weight of the specimen” and is designated as “O”. Each specimen shall be
marked prior to weighing to maintain the individual identities.
5.3 When a narrow cloth is under test, the specimen shall be folded fanwise
to a 6 inch (152 mm) length.
5.4 The specimen shall be attached to the sinker and immersed for the required
time in a tank of distilled water at a temperature of 27° ± 1.0°C (80° ± 2°F).
The depth of the water shall be so regulated that, with the sinker resting on
the bottom of the tank, the top of the specimen held in a vertical position shall
be immersed under a 2-inch (51 mm) head of water.
5.5 At the end of the immersion period, the specimen shall be removed from the
bath and sinker detached. The specimen shall be spread out and immediately placed
between two blotters and passed once through the wringer at the rate of 1 inch
(25 mm) per second. One edge of the specimen shall be parallel to the length of
the rollers.

METHOD 5502
5.5.1 When narrow cloth is being passed through the wringer, the longitudinal
direction of the material shall be perpendicular to the axis of the rolls.
5.5.2 In the case of napped cloths of all fibers and in the case of all
cloth of 100 percent wool (napped or unnapped) the specimen shall be squeezed
once through a wringer without blotters and then once with blotters.
5.6 Final weight of the specimen. After squeezing through the wringer, the
specimens shall be weighed immediately in a tared container to the nearest
0.05 g. This is the “Final weight of the specimen” and is designated as “F”.
Care shall be taken to keep evaporation of moisture from the specimen to a
minimum.
5.7 Calculation of results. The immersion absorption shall be calculated as

follows:
Immersion absorption, percent = F - O x 100

O
Where:
O = Original conditioned weight of the specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 The immersion absorption of the sample unit shall be the average of the
results obtained from the five specimens tested and shall be reported to the
7. NOTES

P.O. BOX 2218
Richmond, VA 23217

METHOD 5502
FIGURE 5502

METHOD 5504
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF COATED CLOTH; SPRAY ABSORPTION METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to water

absorption of the uncoated or lightly coated side of cloth with a water-
proof coating.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of finished cloth 8 inches by 8 inches

(203 by 203 mm).

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Apparatus as described in Method 5526 except that the distance from
the bottom of the nozzle to the center of the mounted specimen shall be 24
inches (610 mm).
4.1.2 Blotting paper. The blotting paper dimensions shall be 10 inches by

10 inches (254 by 254 mm) (see 7.1).
4.1.3 Balance. A laboratory balance capable of weighing the specimen to an

accuracy of 0.05 g.
4.1.4 Metal roller. Metal roller approximately 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) long and
weighing 2-1/4 pounds (1 kg).
4.3 Method cited.

Method 5526, Water Resistance of Cloth with Hydrophobic Finish;
Spray Method.

METHOD 5504
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the conditioned

specimen shall be securely mounted, with the lightly coated or uncoated side
up, in metal embroidery hoops with sufficient tension to insure a uniformly smooth
surface.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the direction
of the flow of water down the specimen shall coincide with the warpwise direction
of the specimen as placed on the stand.
5.3 The mounted specimen shall be placed on the block with the center of the
specimen directly beneath the center of the nozzle and the plane of the surface
of the specimen at a 45° angle with the horizontal.
5.4 A 500 ml. volume of distilled water at a temperature of 27° ± 1.0°C

(80° ± 2°F) shall be poured quickly into the funnel and allowed to spray
onto the specimen.
5.5 The following operations shall then be executed as rapidly as possible:
5.5.1 The specimen shall be removed from the hoops and placed between sheets
of blotting paper on a flat horizontal surface. The metal roller shall be
rolled quickly forward and back one time over the paper without application
of any pressure other than the weight of the roller.
5.5.2 Weight of wet specimen. A square 4 inches by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm)
shall be cut out of the center of the wet portion of the specimen and weighed
to the nearest 0.05 g. This is the “Weight of the wet 4-inch (102 mm) square
specimen” and is designated as “W”. Not more than 30 seconds shall elapse between
the time the water has ceased flowing through the spray nozzle and the start of
the weighing.
5.5.3 Weighing of conditioned specimen. The same 4-inch (102 mm) square
shall be left in the conditioning room until it has dried and reached moisture
equilibrium with the surrounding standard atmosphere for textiles and again
weighed. This is the “Weight of the conditioned 4-inch (102 mm) square specimen”
lmd is designated as “O”.
5.6 Calculation of results. The water absorbed shall be calculated as

follows:
Water absorption, percent = W - O x 100
O

METHOD 5504
Where: W = Weight of the wet 4-inch (102 mm) square specimen.
O = Weight of the conditioned 4-inch (102 mm) square specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 Water absorption of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 percent.
7. NOTES

P.O. BOX 2218
Richmond, VA 23217

METHOD 5506
July 20, 1978
DRY CLEANING TEST, ACCELERATED; FOR LABELS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the fastness of the markings
of labels to dry cleaning.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Labels 2 inches by 4 inches (51 by 102 mm) and larger. The test specimen
shall be a number of rectangles, each measuring approximately 2 inches by 4 inches
(51 by 102 mm) weighing a total of 4.5 ± 0.5 g.
2.2 Labels smaller than 2 inches by 4 inches (51 by 102 mm). Labels shall be
lapped and stitched together with all printing in the same plane to give a total
area of approximately 2 inches by 4 Inches (51 by 102 mm).
2.3 Each test specimen shall be pinked along each edge (see 7.1).

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Launder-Ometer. Launder-Ometer or similar machine having a metal

adapter in which tightly capped stainless steel cylindrical containers 8 inches
(203 mm) in length by 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) in diameter are held lying along
the direction of motion of the rotating shaft, with the shaft rotating at a
speed of 40 to 45 rpm. Each container shall be equipped with a sealing device
having solvent resistant rings. An equal number of stainless steel containers
shall be fastened on opposite sides of the rotating shaft in order to maintain
balanced and smooth rotation during the test. The Launder-Ometer shall be
maintained at a temperature of 80° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) (see 7.2).
4.1.2 Stainless steel balls. One hundred stainless steel balls, 1/4-inch
(6 mm) in diameter, per container.
4.1.3 Pressing equipment.

METHOD 5506
4.1.3.1 Steam pressing. Flat bed press at a temperature of 275° to 300°F
(135° to 149°C) having hot head or polished metal top for flat cloths or cloth
covered press for rough crepes.
4.1.3.2 Hand iron. A hand iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg)
capable of maintaining temperatures between 275° to 300°F (135° to 149°C).
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Dry cleaning solvent. Dry cleaning solvent (Stoddard Solvent) conforming
to the requirements of P-D-680, Dry Cleaning Solvent.
4.2.2 Perchloroethylene. Dry cleaning solvent, perchloroethylene
(tetrachloroethylene) conforming to the requirements of O-T-236, Tetrachloroethylene
(Perchloroethylene); Technical-Grade (see 7.3).
4.2.3 Dry cleaning soap. The dry cleaning soap shall be made by dissolving
56 g of caustic potash (KOH) in 100 ml of water. This solution shall then be
poured slowly with constant stirring into a mixture of 240 g of oleic acid, 400
ml of Stoddard solvent, and 100 ml of tertiary butyl alcohol or an equal quantity
of butyl cellosolve.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 When a standard sample has been established for fastness to dry clean-
ing, Method A shall be used for evaluating the fastness of the labels. When
no standard sample has been established, Method B shall be used for evaluating
the fastness of the labels.
5.2 When a standard or comparison sample has been established, the standard
or comparison sample shall be tested under the same conditions as the specimen
undergoing the test.
5.3 The specimen shall be placed in the stainless steel container with
150 ml of perchloroethylene, 1 ml of dry cleaning soap and 100 stainless
steel balls. The jar shall be sealed, clamped in the Launder-Ometer and run
at 80° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) for ten minutes at which time the solvent shall be
drained.
5.4 One hundred and fifty ml of Stoddard solvent and 1 ml of dry cleaning
soap shall then be placed in the jar with the specimen and the 100 stain-
less steel balls. The Launder-Ometer shall then be run at 80° ± 2°F (27° ±
1°C) for 10 minutes at which time the solvent shall be drained.
5.5 One hundred and fifty ml of perchloroethylene without dry cleaning
soap shall then be placed in the jar with the specimen and the 100 stainless
steel balls. The Launder-ometer shall then be run at 80° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) for
10 minutes at which time the solvent shall be drained. The specimen shall then
be removed and blotted thoroughly between paper towels or blotters or
extracted to remove excess solvent and then air dried.

METHOD 5506
5.6 Pressing. When dry, the specimen shall be pressed in one of the
following ways:
5.6.1 Hand pressing. The specimen shall be covered with a clean white2
muslin cloth weighing 4 to 4-1/2 ounces per square yard (135 to 153 g/m ),
previously saturated with water and wrung out to retain approximately 75
percent moisture by weight. The damp muslin cloth shall be ironed until dry.
5.6.2 Steam pressing. The head of the machine shall be lowered and held
in contact with the specimen. Steam shall be admitted from the back of the
press during lowering for a period of 5 to 10 seconds. The head of the press
shall then be maintained in a lowered position until the specimen is dry.
5.7 Evaluation. Change in definition of print shall be considered in

rating fastness of labels to dry cleaning. The evaluation shall be performed
under artificial daylight having a color temperature of 7500 kelvin.
5.7.1 Method A, standard sample. When a standard or comparison sample

has been established, the test specimen shall be compared with the standard
or comparison sample and rated as follows:
Pass: Equal to or superior to the standard sample.

Fail: Inferior to the standard sample.
5.7.2 Method B, no standard sample. When no standard sample for comparison

has been established, the test specimen shall be rated as to definition of
print and legibility of print at a distance of 18 inches (457 mm) as follows:
Excellent: Practically no change in legibility or definition or
print.
Good: Readily legible without difficulty.
Fair: Legible without need for deciphering.
Poor: Not readily legible, requiring deciphering.
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, fastness
to dry cleaning shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”.
6.2 No standard sample. When no standard sample has been established,
fastness to dry cleaning shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure
is reported, the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating “fair” or “poor”),
of the change of the test specimen, shall be distinguished and reported.

METHOD 5506
7. NOTES
7.1 If the material for test is subject to excessive raveling, a thin ribbon
of a latex acrylic adhesive shall be applied to each pinked edge. The following
adhesive has been found satisfactory for the described use:
Vulcanol AL-1005-S
Alto Chemical Corporation
Trenton Avenue and William Street
7.2 A Launder-Ometer of the type described in this method may be obtained

from Atlas Electric Devices Company, 4114 North Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL
60613.
7.3 Perchloroethylene is toxic by inhalation by prolonged or repeated contact

with the skin or mucous membrane, or when ingested by mouth. The liquid can
cause injuries to the eyes. However, with proper precautions it can be handled
safely.

METHOD 5508
July 20, 1978
DRY CLEANING SOLVENT RESISTANCE OF CLOTH WITH
WATER-RESISTANT FINISH; TUMBLE JAR METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance, of cloth with a
water-resistant finish, to dry cleaning solvent (Stoddard) using a tumble jar.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

(203 mm by 203 mm).

4. APPARATUS, REAGENT, AND METHOD CITED
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Tumble jar. A tumble jar (as shown in figure 5500A), cylindrical in
shape with approximate dimensions being 12 inches (305 mm) in height and 6 inches
(152 mm) in diameter (or between opposite flat faces) and with a capacity of
approximately 1.6 gallons (6 L). The jar shall be of glass, corrosion-resistant
metal or chemical stoneware. The jar shall be mounted in a vertical position
in such a manner that it can be rotated around the horizontal axis passing
through the center of the jar. Means shall be provided for rotating the jar
around this axis at a speed of 55 ± 2 revolutions per minute. The jar shall
be clean and thoroughly rinsed so that it is free from soap, detergent, and
wetting agents (see 7.1)
4.1.2 Extractor. A centrifugal extractor of the laundry-type with a

perforated basket, approximately 11 inches (279 mm) deep by 17 inches
(432 mm) in diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1500
revolutions per minute.
4.1.3 Circulating-air oven. A Circulating-air oven, thermostatically

controlled and capable of maintaining the required temperature within a
tolerance of ± 5°F (± 3°C).
4.1.4 Weights. Weight of approximately 50 pounds (23 kg) for cold pressing
the specimen.

METHOD 5508
4.1.5 Ballast. Ballast composed of pieces of materials of the same size

and similar to the specimen in weight.
4.2 Reagent.
4.2.1 Dry cleaning solvent. Dry cleaning solvent (Stoddard solvent) conforming
4.3 Methods cited.

Spray Method.
Method 5528, Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; Spray Method.

5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the tumble jar
shall be rotated for 60 minutes.
5.2 The specimen and about fourteen pieces of ballast shall be placed in the
tumble jar with 0.5 gallons (2 L) of new Stoddard solvent at a temperature of
80° ± 5°F (27° ± 3°C) and the jar rotated for the required period.
5.3 The specimen shall then be removed, placed in a clean, dry laundry
net (or equivalent) and centrifugally extracted for 5 to 7 minutes. After
extraction, the specimen shall be dried at a temperature of 160° ± 5°F
(71° ± 3°C) for 60 minutes In the circulating-air oven. Clean, dry
cloth shall be used to protect the specimen from dirt or screening marks
during drying.
5.4 The above operation shall be repeated on each specimen taken from
each sample unit. However, specimens taken from other sample units of
similar weight may be tested simultaneously by substituting specimens for
a like number of ballast pieces. The total number of pieces including
specimens and ballast pieces shall not exceed 15.
5.5 The dry specimen shall be cold pressed by placing a large flat weight
of approximately 50 lbs. (23 kg) on a maximum of 15 cloth thicknesses, for a
minimum of 1 hour prior to conditioning for the water resistance tests.
5.6 The water resistance of the dry-cleaned specimen shall be determined
by Method 5526 or 5528 or by any other method as specified in the procurement
document. The same tests shall be conducted on the dry-cleaned specimen
and on a specimen which has not been dry-cleaned for the purpose of comparison
in determining the degree of water resistance of the dry-cleaned cloth.
METHOD 5508
5.7 Calculation of results. The results shall be calculated as described

in the method of test used for determining water resistance.
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the results shall
be reported as described in the method of test used for determining water
resistance.
7. NOTES
7.1 A tumble jar suitable for conducting this test may be obtained from
Andrew Technical Supply Co., 2540 Eastwood Avenue, Evanston, IL 60204.

METHOD 5509
July 20, 1978
DRY CLEANING SOLVENT RESISTANCE OF CLOTH WITH WATER-RESISTANT
FINISH; LAUNDER-OMETER METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance, of cloth with a
water resistant finish, to dry cleaning solvent using a Launder-Ometer.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

(203 mm by 203 mm).

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Launder-Ometer. Launder-Ometer or similar machine having a metal adapter

in which tightly capped stainless steel cylindrical containers 5 inches (127 mm)
in length by 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter are held lying along the direction of
motion of the rotating shaft, with the shaft rotating at a speed of 40 to 45 rpm.
Each container shall be equipped with a sealing device having solvent resistant
rings. An equal number of stainless steel containers shall be fastened on
opposite sides of the rotating shaft in order to maintain balanced and smooth
rotation during the test. The Launder-Ometer shall be maintained at a temperature
of 80° ± 5°F (27° ± 3°C) (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Pressing equipment. A flat-bed press measuring 24 inches (610 mm) by

50 inches (1270 mm) or larger. Any flat-bed press capable of pressing a specimen
22 inches (559 mm) square or a hand-iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg)
may be used as an alternative. The flat press or iron shall be equipped with a
temperature control to maintain the temperature between 275° and 300°F (135°
and 149°C).
4.2 Reagents.

METHOD 5509
4.2.2 Perchloroethylene. Dry cleaning solvent, perchloroethylene

(tetrachloroethylene) conforming to the requirements of O-T-236, Tetrachloroethylene
(Perchloroethylene); Technical-Grade (see 7.2).
4.2.3 Detergent. Soap conforming to the requirements of P-S-1792, Soap,

Laundry (Neutral and Built), Type I, Class 1. A stock solution of the soap
may be prepared by dissolving 1 pound of chip soap in 1 gallon of hot
water (0.45 kg in 4 L). When cooled, this forms a thick homogeneous jelly
which may be used as required.
4.3 Methods cited.

Spray Method.
Method 5528, Water Resistance of Coated Cloth, Spray Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified, the Launder-Ometer shall be rotated

for a period of 25 minutes for each operation at a temperature of 80° ± 5°F
(27° ± 3°C).
5.2 The specimen shall be placed in the jar with 200 ml of fresh Stoddard
solvent to which has been added 1 ml of the dry cleaning soap, 4.2.3. The
jar shall be placed in the Launder-Ometer which shall be started and operated
for the required period of time at the required temperature.
5.3 At the end of this period, the liquid in the jar shall be replaced with
200 ml of fresh, clean Stoddard solvent (no soap added), and the jar returned
to the Launder-Ometer which shall be run for the required period of time.
5.4 At the end of the second period of operation, the Stoddard solvent shall
be replaced with 300 ml of fresh, clean perchloroethylene (no soap added) and
the jar returned to the Launder-Ometer which shall again be operated for the
required period of time.
5.5 At the end of the third period of exposure, the specimen shall be removed
from the jar, the surplus solvent removed by any convenient means which will not
distort the cloth, and allowed to dry at room temperature.
5.6 The specimen shall be rinsed twice in the Launder-Ometer for a period
of 5 minutes in distilled water at a temperature of 80° ± 5°F (27° ± 3°C).
using the same volume as used for the preceding treatments. The excess moisture
shall be removed from the specimen by any convenient means which will not distort
the cloth. The specimen shall then be dried at room temperature.

METHOD 5509
5.7 The dried specimen shall be conditioned in the standard atmosphere

for 4 hours and then shall be pressed either with a flat-bed press or hand-
iron. The head of the press or the hand-iron shall be maintained at a temper-
ature of 275° to 300°F (135° to 149°C) during the pressing operation. When a
hand-iron is used, the iron shall not be slid back and forth on the specimen,
but simply pressed down upon it in a manner simulating the action of the flat-
bed press.
5.7.1 The water resistance of the specimen shall be determined by Method

5526 or 5528 or any other method as specified in the procurement document.
The same tests shall be conducted on the dry-cleaned specimen and on a

specimen which has not been dry cleaned for the purpose of comparison in
determining the degree of water resistance of the dry-cleaned cloth.

in the method of test used for determining the water resistance.
6. REPORT
6.1 The results shall be reported as described in the method of test used
for determining water resistance.
7. NOTES
7.1 A Launder-Ometer of the type described in this method may be obtained

from Atlas Electric Devices Company, 4114 North Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL
60613.
7.2 Perchloroethylene is toxic by inhalation, by prolonged or repeated

contact with the skin or mucous membrane, or when ingested by mouth. The
liquid can cause injuries to the eyes. However, with proper precautions it
can be handled safely.
..-
METHOD 5510
July 20, 1978
DRY CLEANING RESISTANCE OF CLOTH WITH WATER-RESISTANT
FINISH; ROTATING WHEEL METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of cloth with a
water resistant finish to dry-cleaning solvent (Stoddard) using a rotating wash
wheel. This is an alternate to Method 5508 and is applicable where a larger
production is required. This method is of about the same order of severity as
Method 5508.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall consist of 3/4 yard (0.69 m) to 1-1/2 yard (1.37 m)
length of the material, depending on the width of the cloth and the specimen size
requirements of the subsequent water resistance tests.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Wash wheel (see 7.1). A cylindrical wash wheel of the reversing type
shall be used. The wheel (cage) shall be 20 to 24 inches (508 to 610 mm) inside
diameter and 20 to 24 inches (508 to 610 mm) inside length. There shall be
3 fins each approximately 3 inches (76 mm) wide extending the full length of
the inside of the wheel. One fin shall be located every 120° around the inside
diameter of the wheel. The wash wheel shall rotate at a speed of 30 ± 4 revolutions
per minute making 5 to 10 revolutions before reversing. The water inlets shall
be large enough to permit filling the wheel to an 8 inch (203 mm) level in less
than 2 minutes, and the outlet shall be large enough to permit discharge of
this same amount of water in less than 2 minutes. The machine shall be equipped
with a pipe for injecting live steam that shall be capable of raising the
temperature of water at an 8 inch (203 mm) level from 100° to 140°F (38° to
60°C) in less than 2 minutes.

(432 mm) in diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1500
revolutions per minute.

METHOD 5510
4.1.3 Circulating-air oven. Circulating-air oven, thermostatically controlled

and capable of maintaining the required temperature within a tolerance of ± 5°F
(±3°C).
4.1.4 Ballast. Ballast composed of pieces of material of the same size and
similar to the specimen in weight.
4.2. Reagent.
to the requirements of P-D-680, Dry Cleaning Solvent, Type I.
4.3 Methods cited.

Spray Method.
Method 5528, Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; Spray Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the wheel

shall be rotated for 60 minutes.
5.2 Stoddard solvent at a temperature of 80° ± 5°F (27° ± 3°C) shall be poured
into the wheel to a level of 4 inches (102 mm). The specimen and approximately
a total of 12 yards (11 m) of ballast (pieces cut to size of specimen) shall then
be placed in the wheel and the wheel rotated for the required period.
5.3 The specimen shall then be removed, placed In a clean, dry laundry net
(or equivalent) and centrifugally extracted for 5 to 7 minutes. After extraction,
the specimen shall be dried at 160° ± 5°F (71° ± 3°C) for 60 minutes in the
circulating-air oven. Clean, dry cloth shall be used to protect the specimen
from dirt or screening marks during drying.
5.4 The above operation shall be repeated for each specimen taken from each
sample unit. However, specimens taken from other sample units of similar weight
may be tested simultaneously by substituting specimens for a like number of
ballast pieces including specimens and ballast pieces shall not exceed approximately
12 yards (11 m).
5.5 The water resistance of the dry-cleaned specimen shall be determined

by Method 5526 or 5528 or by any other method as specified in the procurement
document. The same tests shall be conducted on the dry-cleaned specimen
and on a specimen which has not been dry cleaned for the purpose of comparison
in determining the degree of water resistance of the dry-cleaned cloth.

METHOD 5510

6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the results

shall be reported as described in the method of test used for determining
water resistance.
7. NOTES
7.1 A wash wheel of the type described in this method is available from:
Robert Ewing & Sons, Co.

P.O. Box 454
Troy, NY 12181
American Laundry Company

5050 Section Avenue
Cincinnati, OH 45212

METHOD 5512
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF COATED CLOTH; HIGH RANGE,
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of coated cloth
to the passage of water under high pressure.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
be a square of cloth 4 inches by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm).
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, five specimens shall
4. APPARATUS
4.1 The standard testing machine shall be a hand or motor-driven hydrostatic
tester, except in cases of dispute wherein the motor-driven hydrostatic tester
shall be used. The specimen shall be held between the 2 annular plane clamping
surfaces of the machine. Hydraulic pressure is applied to the underside of the
clamped specimen.
4.1.1 The clamping surfaces may be concentric grooves not over 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm) deep to prevent the specimen from slipping during the test.
4.1.2 The upper clamping surface shall have a circular opening 1.240 ±
0.010 inch (31.5 ± 0.25 mm) in diameter. The edge of the circular opening
shall be rounded to a radius of not over 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) to avoid cutting
the specimen.
4.1.3 The lower clamping surface shall have an opening 1.240 ± 0.010 inch
(31.5 ± 0.25 mm) in diameter. Concentric to it shall be a recession 0.094 ±
0.002 inch (2.4 ± 0.05 mm) in depth, with an inside diameter of 2.000 ±0.010
inch (51 ± 0.25 mm), and an outside diameter of 2.375 ± 0.010 inch (60 ± 0.25 mm).
A rubber gasket having a cross-sectional diameter of 0.187 ± 0.004 inch (4.75
+— 0.1 mm) shall be fitted tightly into the recession.
4.1.4 Means shall be provided for applying hydraulic pressure to the underside
of the clamped specimen until leakage of the specimen occurs. This pressure
shall be generated by means of a piston forcing water into the pressure chamber
of the apparatus at the rate of 85 ± 5 ml per minute. The drive wheel shall
rotate at approximately 60 revolutions per minute.

METHOD 5512
4.1.4.1 A pressure gage shall be of the Bourdon-Tube, maximum reading type,

graduated in pounds per square inch (kPa) and accurate throughout the
entire range of its scale to within a value equal to 1.0 percent of its
maximum capacity. The capacity of this gage shall be such that the
individual reading will not be less than 25 percent nor more than 75 per-
cent of the total capacity of the gage.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The surface of the specimen to be exposed to water shall be as

specified in the procurement document.
5.2 Prior to each determination, the piston shall be backed up to the normal
starting position and the water level in the pressure chamber brought flush
with the top of the rubber gasket so that no air pocket exists between the
water surface and the specimens being tested. The specimen shall then be clamped
tightly between the ring clamps to prevent horizontal leakage. The pressure shall
then be applied at the specified rate.
5.3 The pressure in pounds per square inch (kPa) at the first appearance of
water through the specimen shall be recorded.
6. REPORT
6.1 The hydrostatic resistance of the sample unit shall be the average
of the results obtained from the specimens tested, and shall be reported
to the nearest 1 pound per square inch (or nearest 10 kPa).

METHOD 5514
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; LOW RANGE,
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of treated
and untreated cloths to the passage of water under pressure. It is also
applicable to the sealed seam area of fabricated coated cloth items as a
measure of the efficiency of the seaming and related workmanship in the
area of sealed seams.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a square of cloth 8 inches by 8 inches (203 by 203 mm).

4. APPARATUS (See figure 5514 for a typical test apparatus)
4.1 Hydrostatic testing apparatus. The apparatus shall consist of an inverted

conical well equipped with a coaxial ring clamp to fasten the cloth specimen over
the well bottom. The apparatus shall introduce water at a temperature of 80° ±
5°F (27° ± 3°C) from above the specimen over a circular area 4.50 ± 0.05 inches
(114 ± 1.3 mm) in diameter at the rate of 1.0 ± 0.1 cm of hydrostatic head per
second, and the rubber tubing connecting the constant level device and the conical
well shall have an inside diameter of 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm). A mirror
may be affixed below the specimen to enable the operator to ascertain penetration
of the specimen by drops of water. A vent shall be provided for the air in the
well to escape (see 7.1).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The surface of the specimen to be exposed to water shall be as speci-

fied in the procurement document.
5.2 The specimen shall be clamped over the orifice of the inverted
conical well. Water shall be introduced into the well and the air above
the cloth vented.

METHOD 5514
5.3 The hydrostatic head measured at the appearance of a drop or drops

of water at three different places of the test area shall be recorded to
the nearest 0.5 inch (13 mm). Drops of water penetrating the specimen at
the clamped edge of the specimen or within 1/8 inch (3 mm) of this edge
shall not be counted.
6. REPORT
6.1 The hydrostatic pressure resistance of the sample unit shall be

the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall
be reported to the nearest 0.5 inch (13 mm) as required.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A hydrostatic testing apparatus of the type described in this method

may be obtained from the Richmond Machine Company, 3375 Richmond Street,
Philadelphia, PA 19134, modified to include a constant level device as
shown in figure 5514; and the Alfred Suter Company, 200 Fifth Avenue, New
York, NY 10010.

METHOD 5514
FIGURE 5514

METHOD 5516
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; WATER PERMEABILITY,
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the water permeability of

cloth under low hydrostatic pressure. It is especially applicable for the
testing of medium and heavy weight cloths for tentage, tarpaulins, and
water bags which are designed for contact with water without leakage. It
is also applicable to the sealed seam area of fabricated coated cloth items
as a measure of the efficiency of the seaming and related workmanship in
the area of the sealed seams.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The cloth or fabricated coated cloth item may be tested without
cutting. If cut, the test specimen shall be a square of cloth at least
8 inches by 8 inches (203 by 203 mm).

4.1 Hydrostatic testing apparatus. The apparatus shall consist of an inverted

conical well equipped with a coaxial ring clamp to fasten the cloth specimen over
the well bottom. The apparatus shall introduce water at a temperature of 80° ±
5°F (27° ± 3°C) from above the specimen over a circular area 4.50 ± 0.05 inches
(114 ± 1.3 mm) in diameter and the rubber tubing connecting the constant level
device and the conical well shall have an inside diameter of 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6
to 10 mm). A cut-off valve or other suitable device shall be provided at the
water inlet of the upper orifice plate for keeping the water from the specimen
until the desired head is reached. Means shall be provided for the air in
the well to escape.
4.2 Funnel. A funnel shall be positioned below the exposed specimen area to
collect water passing through the specimen when amount of water penetration
is desired.
4.3 Mirror. A mirror may be affixed below the specimen to enable the operator
to ascertain penetration of the specimen by drops of water when measure of
appearance of drops is desired.

METHOD 5516
4.4 Timing device.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, and as applicable,

the heavier coated surface of the cloth shall be placed in contact with the
water. The time of exposure in minutes, and hydrostatic head in inches or cm
and criteria shall be as specified in the procurement document.
5.2 Measure of amount of water penetration. With the cut-off valve

closed, the specimen shall be clamped on the inverted conical orifice and
the water level adjusted to give the hydrostatic head required. The valve
shall then be opened and the water passing through the specimen during the
required period of time collected and the volume measured.
5.3 Measure of appearance of water drops in sealed seam areas of coated

cloths. With the cut-off valve closed, the specimen shall be clamped on
the inverted conical orifice and the water level adjusted to give the hydro-
static head required. Unless otherwise specified the valve shall then be
opened and the appearance of a drop or drops of water at different places
of the test area shall be observed and timed. Unless otherwise specified
in the procurement document, failure to the test shall be evidenced by
the appearance of water at three different places within the 4-1/2 inch
(114 mm) diameter test area.
6. REPORT
6.1 Measure of the amount of water penetration. The water permeability

of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the
specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest ml.
6.2 Measure of the appearance of water drops. The water permeability

of the sample unit determinations shall be reported separately as “Pass”
or “Fail”.
7. NOTES
7.1 A hydrostatic testing apparatus of the type described in this method may
be obtained from:
The Alfred Suter Company, 200 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10010; or from
the Richmond Machine Company, 3375 Richmond Street, Philadelphia, PA 19134.

METHOD 5516
FIGURE 5516
FED.TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 5518
July 20, 1978
LAUNDERING RESISTANCE OF CLOTH WITH WATER-RESISTANT

FINISH; WASH WHEEL (WET MECHANICAL ACTION) METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of water

resistant finishes on cloth to laundering and wet mechanical action.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall consist of 3/4 yard (0.69 m) to 1-1/2 yard (1.37 m)
length of the cloth, depending on the width of the cloth and the specimen size
requirements of the subsequent water resistance tests.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Wash wheel (see 7.1). A cylindrical wash wheel of the reversing type
3 fins each approximately 3 inches (76 mm) extending the full length of the
inside of the wheel. One fin shall be located every 120” around the inside
diameter of the wheel. The wash wheel shall rotate at a speed of 30 ± 4
revolutions per minute making 5 to 10 revolutions before reversing. The water
inlets shall be large enough to permit filling the wheel to an 8 inch (203 mm)
level in less than 2 minutes, and the outlet shall be large enough to permit
discharge of this same amount of water in less than 2 minutes. The machine
shall be equipped with a pipe for injecting live steam that shall be capable of
raising the temperature of water at an 8 inch (203 mm) level from 100° to 140°F
(38° to 60°C) in less than 2 minutes.

perforated basket, approximately 11 inches (279 mm) deep by 17 inches (432 mm)
in diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1500 revolutions per
minute.

METHOD 5518
4.1.3 Circulating-air oven. A circulating-air oven, thermostatically

controlled and capable of maintaining the required temperature within a
tolerance of ± 5°F (± 3°C).
4.1.4 Weight. Weight of approximately 50 pounds (23 kg) for cold pressing
the specimen.
4.1.5 Ballast. Ballast composed of pieces of material of the same size and
similar to the specimen in weight.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Water. Water suitable for laundering (not over 50 ppm in hardness
calculated as CaCO3).
4.2.2 Detergent. Soap conforming to the requirements of P-S-1792, Soap,

Laundry (Neutral and Built) Type I, Classes 1 or 2, which shall be added
directly to the wash wheel or made into a suitable stock solution.
4.2.3 Sour. Sour conforming to the requirements of P-S-683, Sour, Laundry

(Fluoridated) Type I or Type II.
4.3 Methods cited.

Method 5526, Water Resistance of Cloth with Hydrophobic Finish:
Spray Method.
Method 5528, Water Resistance of Coated Cloth: Spray Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Laundering. Water at the designated temperature found in table I,

± 5°F (± 3°C) shall be poured into the wash wheel to the required level
specified in table I. The specimen and approximately a total of 6 linear
yards (5.5 linear m) of fabric 30 to 42 inches (762 to 1067 mm) wide or equal
ballast (pieces cut to approximately the size of specimen) shall then be
placed in the wash wheel and subjected to the treatment specified in table I.
The last minute of each operation specified shall be used for draining the
machine. During this draining time the machine shall be in motion. At the
end of each operation the machine shall be stopped and water at the designated
temperature added to the proper level before starting the machine again.

METHOD 5518
TABLE I
Opera- Composition of Water level Tempera- Running

tion washing bath in wheel ture time
(Treatment) Inches (mm) °F (°C) Minutes
1 Soap, 2 oz. (57 gm) 4 (102) 160 (71) 10
2 4 (102) 160 (71) 10
3 Water 6 (152) 160 (71) 10
4 6 (152) 160 (71) 10
5 6 (152) 160 (71) 10
6 4 (102) 160 (71) 15
7 4 (102) 160 (71) 15
8 4 (102) 160 (71) 15
9 Sour, 1 oz. (28.3

g) per 10 gal.
(37.9 L)
Water 4 (102) 120 (49) 15
10 Water 4 (102) 90 (32) 10
5.2 After laundering, the specimen shall be extracted for 5 to 7 minutes

and dried at 160° ± 5°F (71° ± 3°C) for 60 minutes in a circulating-air
oven. Clean dry cloth shall be used to protect the specimen from dirt or
screen marks during drying.
5.3 The above operation shall be repeated for each specimen taken from
each sample unit. However, specimens taken from another sample unit may be
tested simultaneously by substituting the specimens for a like number of
ballast pieces. The total number of pieces including specimens and ballast
pieces shall not exceed approximately 6 linear yards (5.5 linear m) of fabric
30 to 42 inches (762 to 1067 mm) wide or the equivalent.
5.4 The dry specimen shall be cold pressed by placing a large flat weight
of approximately 50 lbs. (23 kg) on a maximum of 15 cloth thicknesses, for
a minimum of 1 hour prior to conditioning for the water resistance tests.

METHOD 5518
5.5 The water resistance of the specimen shall be determined by Method

5526 or 5528, or any other method as specified in the procurement document.
The same tests shall be conducted on the cleaned specimen and on a specimen
which has not been cleaned for the purpose of comparison in determining the
degree of water resistance of the cleaned cloth.

6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the results

shall be reported as described in the method of test used for determining
water resistance.
7. NOTES
Ewing Division of Power Com

P.O. Box 454
Troy, NY 12181

METHOD 5519
July 20, 1978
LAUNDERING TEST, ACCELERATED; FOR LABELS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the fastness of the markings
of labels to an accelerated laundering procedure.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Labels 2 inches by 3 inches (51 by 76 mm) and larger. The test specimen
shall be a number of rectangles, each measuring approximately 2 inches by 3 inches
(51 by 76 mm) weighings total of 3.5 ± 0.3 g.
2.2 Labels smaller than 2 inches by 3 inches (51 by 76 mm). Labels shall be
lap stitched together with all printing in the same plane to give a total area
of approximately 2 inches by 3 inches (51 by 76 mm).
2.3 Each test specimen unit shall be pinked along each edge (see 7.1).

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Accelerator. A machine capable of varying the speed of the rotor

from 0 to 4000 revolutions per minute with a 4-1/2 inch (114 mm) ‘S’ rotor.
The liner for the test chamber shall be rubber ribbed, having 2 ribs per inch
(25 mm), with the ribs approximately 1/16 inch (2 mm) in height (see 7.2).
4.1.2 Soaking chamber. Any convenient vessel with 100 ml per g of specimen
capacity.
4.1.3.1 Steam pressing. Flat bed press at a temperature of 275° to 300°F

(135° to 149°C) having hot head or polished metal top for flat cloths or cloth
covered press for rough crepes.
4.1.3.2 Hand iron. A hand iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg),
capable of maintaining temperatures between 275° to 300°F (135° to 149°C).

METHOD 5519
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Soap and alkali solution. A soap and alkali solution dissolved in
water of not over 50 parts per million hardness and containing:
4.2.1.1 Detergent. 0.2 percent soap conforming to the requirements of

P-S-1792, Soap, Laundry (Neutral and Built), Type I, Class 1.
4.2.1.2 Sodium metasilicate. 0.2 percent sodium metasilicate, conforming

to the requirements of 0-S-604, Sodium Metasilicate, Technical, Type I.
4.2.1.3 Sodium carbonate. 0.07 percent sodium carbonate, conforming to

the requirements of 0-S-571, Sodium Carbonate, Anhydrous, Technical, Type I.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 When a standard sample has been established for fastness to laundering,
Method A shall be used for evaluating the fastness of the labels. When no
standard sample has been established, Method B shall be used for evaluating
the fastness of the labels.
5.2 When a standard or comparison sample has been established, the standard
or comparison sample shall be tested under the same conditions as the specimen
undergoing the test.
5.3 The specimens shall be crumpled by hand to prevent one specimen from
adhering to another. The specimens shall be immersed in the soap and alkali
solution for 30 ± 2 minutes at 150° ± 5°F (66° ± 3°C) at a ratio of 100 ml of
solution per g of material.
5.4 The specimens shall then be placed in the Accelerator with 150 ml of
the soap and alkali solution at 80° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C). The speed control shall
be set to approximately 50. The motor shall then be started and quickly adjusted
to 2000 revolutions per minute. Average speed shall be used since the tachometer
pointer will fluctuate.
5.5 The machine shall be run for 6 minutes ± 10 seconds (including that time
to adjust the initial speed) without further adjustment of speed.
5.6 At the end of the 6 minute running time, the machine shall be shut
off and the liquid allowed to drain out. The specimens shall be removed,
squeezed by hand, and then rinsed free of soap with water of not over 50
parts per million hardness and having a temperature of approximately 105°F
(41°C). The specimens shall then be extracted or passed between wringer rolls
to remove excess water and then dried with a hand iron or flat bed press between
clean white cloths.

METHOD 5519
5.7 Evaluation. Change in definition of print shall be considered in
rating fastness of labels to laundering. The evaluation shall be performed
under artificial daylight, having a color temperature of 7500 kelvin.
5.7.1 Method A - Standard sample. When a standard or comparison sample
has been established, the test specimen shall be compared with the standard
or comparison sample and rated as follows:
Pass - Equal or superior to the standard sample.
Fail - Inferior to the standard sample.
5.7.2 Method B - No standard sample. When no standard sample for compari-

son has been established, the test specimen shall be rated as to definition
of print and legibility of print at a distance of eighteen inches (457 mm)
as follows:
Excellent - Practically no change in legibility or definition of

print.
Good - Readily legible without difficulty.
Fair - Legible without need for deciphering.
Poor - Not readily legible, requiring deciphering.
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, fastness
to laundering shall be reported as “Pass” or “Fail”.
6.2 No standard sample. When no standard sample has been established,
fastness to laundering shall be reported as “Pass” or “Fail”. When failure
is noted, legibility shall be reported by the adjective rating, i.e. “Good”,
“Fair” or “Poor”.
7. NOTES
7.1 If the material for test is subject to excessive raveling, a thin ribbon
of a latex acrylic adhesive shall be applied to each pinked edge. The following
adhesive has been found satisfactory for the described use:
Vulcanol A1 - 100 - 58
This adhesive may be obtained from:

Alto Oil and Chemical Corporation
Trenton Avenue and William Street

METHOD 5519
7.2 An Accelerator of the type described in this method may be obtained from
the Atlas Electric Devices Company, 4114 North Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL
60613.

METHOD 5520
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; DROP PENETRATION METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to penetration of

water through cloth by use of water drop impact. It is especially applicable
to cloth treated with water repellents.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall consist of a square of cloth 8 inches by 10 inches

(203 by 254 mm) with the long dimension in the warp direction.

4.1 Drop penetration apparatus. Drop-forming device composed of 31 capillary

tubes cemented into a plate which in turn shall be cemented into a cylindrical
holder having an inside diameter of 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) and a height of 8 inches
(203 mm).
4.1.1 Capillaries. The outside diameter of the capillaries shall be 5.5 ±

.5 mm (0.2165 ± 0.0157 inch) and the inside diameter approximately 0.4 mm
(0.0157 inch). These dimensions are intended to give a rate of dropping of
approximately 1 drop per second with an appropriate constant hydrostatic head.
The variation in dropping time between the fastest and slowest drops shall not
exceed 15 percent.
4.1.2 The drop forming device shall be mounted rigidly and shall be protected
from air currents by a cylindrical or square shield extending at least 1 inch
(25 mm) above the lower surface of the capillaries.
4.2 Specimen holder. A specimen holder consisting of a flat bakelite plate
10 inches (254 mm) square with a 6-inch (152 mm) clamp mounted along the upper
edge. An arc-shaped section 3/4 inch (19 mm) in width with an outside radius
of 3 inches (76 mm) shall be cut from the plate.
4.2.1 The holder shall be mounted at a 45° angle within a rectangular box so
that the vertical distance from the lower tips of the capillary tubes to the
center of the specimen holder is 5 feet 8 inches (1.73 m).

METHOD 5520
4.2.2 The holder shall be placed over a 10-inch (254 mm) square metal plate
mounted at 45° to the horizontal. It shall be so positioned on the plate that
the cut-out section coincides with the lower lip of the container. In the
center of this plate is a 6-inch (152 mm) hole to which is soldered a hemispherical
or cylindrical container. A spout 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter shall lead from
the bottom of the container to a graduated cylinder outside the test box.
4.2.3 The position of the holder shall be such that the drops of water
impinge only on that portion of the specimen above the cut-out section in the
holder, and drops falling from the respective capillaries shall impinge on the
same point during the test.
4.3 Graduated cylinder, 10 ml.
4.4 Stop watch. A stop watch or other timing device which will indicate the
time in seconds and minutes.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the temperature

of the water shall be maintained at 80° ± 5°F (27° ± 3°C) during the test.
5.2 Previous to the start of the test 5 to 10 ml of water shall be used to

flush out the cylinder.
5.3 The specimen shall be placed in the holder with the warp end held by the
clamp at the upper edge of the specimen holder and shall be kept under tension
by means of a total weight of 1 pound (0.45 kg) attached to the lower warp end
of the specimen by means of a 6-inch (152 mm) clamp hanging freely over the
lower edge of the bakelite plate.
5.4 The specimen holder and cloth shall be placed on the 45° angle specimen
support in the path of the drops, and the timing device shall be started
concurrently.
5.5 The water which passes through the specimen and drains through the cut-
out section in the bakelite plate shall be drawn off the holder into the bottom
of the container and measured in the graduated cylinder.
5.6 The time necessary to collect 10 ml of water shall be recorded.
6. REPORT
6.1 The drop penetration of the sample unit shall be the average of the
1.0 second.

METHOD 5520

METHOD 5522
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF CLOTH;
WATER IMPACT PENETRATION METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of closely woven
cloth to the penetration of water. This procedure may be used for either
treated or untreated cloths.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 7 inches by 13 inches (178 by

330 mm) with the long dimension in the warp direction of the finished cloth.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The apparatus shall be as described in Method 5526, figure 5526A,
with the following exceptions or additions:
4.1.1.1 Spring clamp. A 6-inch (152 mm) spring clamp shall be fastened at
the top of the inclined stand to hold the specimen.
4.1.1.2 Free 6-inch (152 mm) spring clamp and weight totaling 1 pound (0.45 kg).
4.1.1.3 The end of the nozzle shall be 24 inches (610 mm) above the center
of the specimen.
4.1.1.4 Balance. A laboratory balance capable of weighing the specimen to

an accuracy of 0.1 g.
4.1.1.5 Blotting paper. The blotting paper dimensions shall be 6 inches

by 9 inches (152 by 229 mm) (see 7.1).

METHOD 5522
4.3 Method cited.
Method 5526, Water Resistance of Cloth with Hydrophobic Finish; Spray
Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The test shall be performed under standard atmospheric conditions for
textiles in accordance with Section 4 of this Standard. The blotting paper and
specimen shall be in equilibrium with the above conditions. The specimen, with
the finished side up, shall be clamped on the warp end by the 6 inch (152 mm)
spring clamp (see 4.1.1.1), and on the other end by the free 6 inch (152 mm)
clamp (see 4.1.1.2). The blotting paper shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g.
This is the “Original weight of the blotter” and is designated as “O”.
5.2 The blotter shall be inserted beneath the specimen. A 500 ml volume
of distilled water at a temperature of 80° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) shall be poured
into the funnel and allowed to spray onto the test specimen. The water shall
be poured into the funnel without imparting any swirling motion to the water
in the funnel. (A small blade fixed to the inside of the funnel and extending
down its side will prevent such a swirling motion).
5.3 Upon completion of the spraying period, the specimen shall be carefully
lifted from the blotter. The blotter shall be removed and quickly reweighed
to the nearest 0.1 g. This is the “Final weight of the blotter” and shall
be designated as “F”.
5.4 Calculation of results. The weight of water penetrated shall be

Water penetration = F - 0
Where: O = Original weight of the blotter.

F = Final weight of the blotter.
6. REPORT
6.1 The water penetration of the sample unit shall be the average of the
results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the near-
est 0.1 g.
7. NOTES
Box 2218, Richmond, VA 23217.

METHOD 5524
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF CLOTH;
RAIN PENETRATION METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to penetration
by water of cloth made from all types of fibers whether or not they have been
given a water-resistant finish. In the interest of standardization of test-
ing requirements, it is recommended that this method not be used in procure-
ment documents.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of cloth 8 inches by 8 inches (203 mm

by 203 mm). When more than one layer of the cloth is required to be subjected
to a single spraying operation, the total number of squares shall be considered
as a specimen.
2.2 As specified in the procurement document, the specimen shall comprise of:
(a) A single layer of cloth.
(b) Multiple layers of the cloth.
(c) A combination of two different cloths, as a raincoat and the
lining cloth.

(at each required intensity) shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Spray assembly. A spray assembly such that a horizontal water spray
from a nozzle is directed against the specimen which is placed at right angles
to the spray and 12 inches (305 mm) from the nozzle. The different intensities
of spray shall be produced by means of a column of water, adjustable to heights
of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 feet (.61, .91, 1.22, 1.52, 1.83, 2.13 and 2.44 meters)
above the nozzle.
4.1.1 Spray nozzle. Nozzle with 13 holes, each 0.0390 ± 0.0005 inch (1 ±
.01 mm) in diameter (No. 61 drill), and equipped with a removable shield.
METHOD 5524
4.1.2 Specimen holder. The specimen holder shall be equipped with clamps
suitable for holding the specimen and blotter in a vertical and rigid position
during the spray period.
4.2 Blotting paper. The blotting paper dimensions shall be 6 inches by

6 inches (152 by 152 mm) (see 7.1).
4.3 Balance. A laboratory balance capable of weighing the specimen to an

accuracy of 0.1 g.
4.4 Temperature controller. Means of maintaining the temperature of the

water at 80° ± 5°F (27° ± 3°C) and introducing it at the bottom of the glass
pressure column.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The number of layers of cloth required for one spray operation and the
spray intensity or intensities of the pressure column shall be as specified
5.2 In order to obtain a complete over-all picture of the penetration re-

sistance of a cloth or cloth combination, the average penetration with different
pressure heads on the nozzle may be obtained. The pressure head should be
varied by 1-foot (305 mm) increments in order to determine:
(a) The maximum head at which no penetration occurs.

(b) The change in penetration with increasing head.
(c) The minimum head required to cause “breakdown” or the pene-
tration of more than 10 g of water.
5.3 The shield shall be placed over the spray nozzle and the overflow re-
gulated to give the desired hydrostatic pressure. The flow of water shall
be adjusted so that a steady overflow at a temperature Of 80° ± 5°F (27° ±
3°C) is maintained during the test.
5.4 The specimen and the blotting paper shall be conditioned before testing
and the blotting paper weighed to the nearest 0.1 g. This is the “Original
weight of the blotter” and shall be designated as “O”. The weighed blotter
shall be placed on the specimen holder between but not touching the clamps and
the specimen clamped over it. The specimen shall be free from wrinkles and
clamped tightly enough to hold the blotter in place when the specimen holder
is in a vertical position.
5.5 The specimen holder with the specimen and blotter in test position, shall
be placed so that it is in a vertical position, with the center of the
specimen directly opposite and 12 inches (305 mm) from the face of the spray

METHOD 5524
nozzle. The shield shall be removed from the spray nozzle and the water allowed
to spray horizontally onto the cloth for 300 ± 1 seconds. The nozzle shield
shall then be replaced, the specimen holder removed from its support, and
the specimen removed from the specimen holder; care should be taken not to
allow any water to run from it onto the blotter beneath. The blotter shall
be reweighed to the nearest 0.1 g; care shall be taken to minimize any
loss of weight by evaporation of water from the blotter. This is the “Final
weight of the blotter” and shall be designated as “F”.
5.6 Calculation of results. The weight of water penetrated shall be cal-

culated as follows:
Water penetration = F - O
Where: O = original weight of the blotter.
F = Final weight of the blotter.
6. REPORT
6.1 The water penetration of the sample unit shall be the average of the
nearest 0.1 g.
7. NOTES

P.O. BOX 2218
Richmond, VA 23217

METHOD 5524
FIGURE 5524

METHOD 5526
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF CLOTH WITH HYDROPHOBIC FINISH;
SPRAY METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the hydrophobic effectiveness

of water-repellent finishes applied to cloth by measuring the amount of water
absorbed.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of cloth 8 inches by 8 inches (203 by

203 mm).

4. APPARATUS (See figure 5526A)
4.1 Funnel. A six-inch (152 mm) glass laboratory funnel held by a laboratory
ring support.
4.2 Spray nozzle. A spray nozzle of 1-7/16 inch (36.5 mm) outside diameter
having a convex face with a 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) radius and connected to the
funnel with a piece of 3/8 inch (10 mm) rubber tubing.
4.2.1 Nozzle. The nozzle shall be provided with 19 holes, 0.035 inch (0.89 mm)
in diameter (No. 65 drill), having 1 hole in the center, 6 evenly spaced holes
on a 25/64 inch (9.9 mm) diameter circle concentric with the outside circumference
of the nozzle.
4.2.2 The distance from the top of the funnel to the bottom of the nozzle
shall be 7-1/2 inches (190 mm).
4.3 Embroidery hoops. Metal embroidery hoops 6 to 7 inches (152 to 178 mm)
in diameter for mounting the specimen.
4.4 Block of wood for supporting the mounted specimen so that the plane of
the specimen makes an angle of 45° with the horizontal.

METHOD 5526
4.5 The distance from the bottom of the nozzle to the center of the hoop-
mounted specimen shall be 6 inches (152 mm).
5. PROCEDURE

shall be securely mounted, finished side up, in the embroidery hoops with
sufficient tension to insure a uniformly smooth surface.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the direction

of the flow of water down the specimen shall coincide with the warpwise
direction of the specimen as placed on the stand.
5.3 The mounted specimen shall be placed on the block with the center of
the specimen directly beneath the center of the nozzle and the plane of the
surface of the specimen at a 45° angle with the horizontal.
5.4 A 250 ml volume of distilled water at a temperature of 80° ± 2.0°F

(27° ± 1°C) shall be poured quickly into the funnel and allowed to spray
onto the specimen which should take approximately 25 to 30 seconds.
5.5 Upon completion of the spraying period, the hoop shall be grasped at
one edge and the opposite edge tapped downward against a solid object, the
wet side of the specimen being face down during tapping. The hoop shall
then be turned 180°, grasped at the opposite edge, and similarly tapped at
the point previously held.
5.6 After tapping, the finished side of the cloth shall be compared with
the standard figure 5526B and the wetted and/or spotted pattern on the specimen
assigned a rating corresponding to the nearest standard rating.
5.6.1 No attempt shall be made to assign to the cloth an intermediate

rating, i.e., 60, 75, etc.
5.6.2 In rating light porous cloth, passage of water through the open
construction of the cloth shall be disregarded.
6. REPORT
6.1 A spray rating corresponding to the nearest standard in the rating chart
shall be reported for each specimen tested.
6.2 No estimates of ratings falling between standards is allowed.

METHOD 5526

METHOD 5526
FIGURE 5526B

METHOD 5528
July 20, 1978
WATER RESISTANCE OF COATED CLOTH; SPRAY METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the effectiveness of waterproof

coatings when applied to fabrics for use in the manufacture of such items as
flotation bladders, raincoats, food wrappers, clothing and sleeping bags.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of the finished cloth 8 inches (203 mm)
if cut, or an equivalent square section if not cut.

shall be tested from each sample unit. Leakage shall be determined on 2
specimens, adhesion on 2 specimens, and softening on each of the 4 specimens.
4.1 Apparatus.
—
4.1.1 The apparatus shall be as described in Method 5526 except that a wood
backing shall be provided for the specimen instead of the hoop, and provisions
shall be made for maintaining a constant volume of 250 ml of water in the funnel
during the test.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 5512, Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; High Range, Hydrostatic

Pressure Method.
Method 5526, Water Resistance of Cloth with Hydrophobic Finish; Spray
Method.
Method 5970, Adhesion of Coating; Adhesive Method.
5. PROCEDURE
shall be securely mounted on the wood backing and its coated side subjected
to a 2-hour spray of water. The temperature of the water shall be 80° ± 2.0°F
(27° ± 1°C). A constant volume of 250 ml of water shall be maintained in the
funnel during the test. Upon completion of the spraying period, the specimen
shall be removed from the wood backing and examined as follows:

METHOD 5528
5.2 Leakage determination. Leakage through the coating shall be determined

by Method 5512.
5.3 Coating adhesion determination. Coating adhesion shall be determined by

Method 5970 after the excess water has been removed but while specimen is still
wet.
5.4 Softening determination. Softening of the coating shall be determined

by applying the thumbnail against the surface of the coating in a skiving motion.
Plasticity of the coating shall be stated as no softening, slight softening, or
extreme softening when compared to the original unsprayed specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 Leakage of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 1 pound per
square inch (6.89 kPa).
6.2 The adhesion of the coating of the sample unit shall be the average of
nearest 0.1 pound per 2-inch width (to the nearest 10 N/m).
6.3 For the reports in 6.1 and 6.2 above, each individual value used to
calculate the average shall also be reported.
6.4 Each specimen shall be reported separately for no softening, slight

softening, or extreme softening.

METHOD 5530
July 20, 1978
PENETRATION RESISTANCE OF CLOTH TO PASSAGE OF
FEATHERS AND DOWN; TUMBLING METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of cloth to the
passage of feathers and down. The cloth is tested once as received and again
after one wool mobile laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall consist of one piece of the cloth 25 by 13 inches
(635 by 330 mm).
2.1.1 The specimen shall be made into a bag approximately 12 by 13 inches

(305 by 330 mm) by folding it on itself and stitching on two sides. The bag
shall be turned inside out and the two sides stitched again. The bag shall
be stitched midway between and parallel to the two side seams to form two
pockets, each 6 by 12 inches (152 by 305 mm).
2.2 Seven-tenths of an ounce (19.8 g) of a mixture of 60 percent waterfowl

feathers and 40 percent waterfowl down shall be placed in each pocket of the
bag. The open end of the bag shall be folded forming a lap approximately 3/4
inch (19 mm) wide and double-stitched to insure good resistance to penetration
by the feathers and down through the seam. The mixture of feathers and down
shall meet the requirements of C-F-160 - Feather, Waterfowl; and Down, Waterfowl.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Rubber stoppers. Sixteen No. 7 solid rubber stoppers weighing 1.00
± 0.05 pound (0.45 kg ± 0.02 kg).
4.1.2 Box. A box 18 by 18 inches (457 by 457 mm) inside dimensions with smooth
inside walls. Plastic or sheet metal walls are suitable. The box is supported
on bearings by means of the two shafts fastened to the outside of the box at the
center of two opposite sides. A motor is connected to one shaft through a speed
reduction drive to rotate the box at a measured speed of 48 ± 2 revolutions per
minute. Suitable apparatus is shown in figure 5530A.

METHOD 5530
4.2 Method cited.
Method 5556, Mobile Laundry Evaluation for Textile Materials.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The bag containing the feathers and down mixture shall be conditioned
under standard atmospheric conditions as specified in Section 4 of this Standard
for at least 24 hours before testing, and shall be tested in the same atmosphere.
5.2 The box, as specified in 4.1.2, shall be cleaned of feathers, down, and
dust from previous tests. The bag containing the feathers and down mixture shall
be closed and inserted into the box with the rubber stoppers. The box shall be
rotated at 48 ± 2 revolutions per minute for 45 ± 1 minute.
5.3 At the end of the period of rotation of the box, the bag shall be removed
from the box and the outer surface examined visually for down and feather
penetration and rated in accordance with 5.6. Only one specimen (bag) shall
be rotated in the box at one time.
5.4 The specimen (bag and contents) shall then be laundered as described in
Method 5556, dried, cleaned of surface debris by gently brushing, conditioned,
and the bag and contents again rotated in the box as described in 5.1 and 5.2.
At the end of the period of rotation, the bag shall be removed from the box
and the outer surface examined visually for down and feather penetration and
rated in accordance with 5.6.
5.5 The feather and down mixture shall be discarded after the completion
of the test of one specimen.
5.6 Evaluation. The specimen both before and after laundering shall be
rated as follows:
Satisfactory - Feather or down penetration not exceeding that

illustrated by figure 5530B.
Unsatisfactory - Feather or down penetration in excess of that

illustrated by figure 5530B.
6. REPORT
6.1 The feather and down retention of the specimen (cloth) both before and
after laundering shall be reported as “Satisfactory”, or “Unsatisfactory”.
6.2 The feather and down retention of the sample unit shall be the lowest
retention rating given to any specimen either original or laundered.

METHOD 5530

METHOD 5530
FIGURE 5530B

METHOD 5550
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING; COTTON, LINEN, AND

BLENDED COTTON AND LINEN CLOTH
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the dimensional stability

of woven cotton, linen and blended cotton and linen cloth when subjected
to a normal laundering procedure. It may be used for some knitted cloths
or other items as specified. The dimensional stability is determined by
a change in a measured distance of the material after subjection to test.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Woven and warp knitted (single layer) cloth. Unless otherwise specified,
in the procurement document, the specimen shall be a square of cloth 22 by
22 inches (559 by 559 mm), except for cloth narrower than 22 Inches (559 mm),
then the specimen shall be 22 inches (559 mm) long and the entire width of
the cloth.
2.2 Cloth 18 inches (457 mm) and less in width. Unless otherwise specified
in the procurement document, the specimen shall be at least 22 inches (559 mm)
in length and measurements in the width direction shall be the full width of
the cloth.
2.3 Circular and tubular knit cloths. Unless otherwise specified in the
procurement document, the specimen shall be at least 22 inches (559 mm) in
length and the width of the cloth as received.

from each sample unit shall be tested in each of the warp (wale) and filling
(course) directions.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Wash wheel (see 7.1). The wash wheel shall be cylindrical and of the
reversing type. The wheel (cage) shall be 20 to 24 inches (508 mm)
to 610 mm) inside diameter and 20 to 24 inches (508 mm to 610 mm) inside length.
There shall be three fins each approximately 3 inches (76 mm) wide extending the
full length of the inside of the wheel. One fin shall be located every 120 degrees
around the inside diameter of the wheel. The wash wheel shall rotate at a speed

METHOD 5550
of 30 ± 4 revolutions per minute making 5 to 10 revolutions before reversing. The

water inlets shall be large enough to permit filling the wheel to an 8 inch
(203 mm) level in less than 2 minutes, and the outlet shall be large enough
to permit discharge of this same amount of water in less than 2 minutes. The
wash wheel shall be equipped with a pipe for injecting live steam that shall be
capable of raising the temperature of water at an 8 inch (203 mm) level from
100” to 140°F (38° to 60°C) in less than 2 minutes.
4.1.1.1 The wash wheel shall be equipped with a thermometer or other

equivalent equipment for determining the temperature of the water during
the washing and rinsing procedures and with an outside water gage that
will indicate the level of the water in the wheel.
4.1.2 Pressing equipment. A flat-bed press measuring 24 inches by 50

inches (610 mm by 1270 mm) or larger. Any flat-bed press capable of pressing
a specimen 22 inches (559 mm) square or a hand-iron weighing approximmately
6 pounds (2.7 kg) may be used as an alternative. The flat-bed press or iron
shall be equipped with a temperature control to maintain the temperature
between 275° and 300°F (135° and 149°C).
4.1.3 Measuring scale. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape, or other

suitable measuring device graduated in increments of 1/16 inch (1 mm).
4.1.4 Drying equipment.
—
4.1.4.1 Rack and drying trays. A rack and tray of any convenient size
over 22 by 22 inches (559 by 559 mm). The bottoms of the trays shall be
a wire mesh, and the size of the mesh shall be a minimum of 1/2 by 1/2
inch (13 mm by 13 mm). When the trays are in the rack, they shall be
separated by a distance of not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and openings
shall be provided in the rack for circulation of the air.
4.1.4.2 Extractor. A centrifugal extractor of the laundry-type with a

(432 mm) in diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1500 revolu-
tions per minute.
4.1.4.3 Drying oven. A circulating air oven thermostatically controlled

and capable of maintaining the temperature at 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C).
4.2 Reagent.
4.2.1 Detergent. Soap solution conforming to P-S-1792, Soap, Laundry

(Neutral and Built), type I, class 1. A stock solution of the soap may
be prepared by dissolving 1 pound (500 g) of chip soap in 1 gallon (3.8
liters) of hot water. When cooled, this forms a thick homogeneous jelly
which may be used as required.

METHOD 5550
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 Woven and warp knitted (single layer) cloth. Three specimens
shall be selected from the cloth (sample unit) as follows: 1 specimen
from each side of the cloth to within 3 inches (76 mm) of the selvage
and 1 specimen from the center of the cloth. No two specimens shall
contain the same filling yarns or courses. The specimen shall be laid
without tension on a flat surface, care being taken that the cloth is free
from wrinkles or creases. Three distances, each a minimum of 18 inches
(457 mm) shall be measured and marked off parallel to each of the warp and
filling or wale and course directions of the specimen. The distances
shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) apart and at least 1 inch (25 mm)
from any edge of the specimen. The distance may be marked with indelible
ink and a fine pointed pen, or by sewing fine threads into the cloth, or
by a stamping machine. The measured distance shall be parallel to the
respective yarns.
5.1.2 Circular and tubular knit cloths. Three distances, each a minimum
of 18 inches (457 mm) shall be measured and marked off parallel to the wale
directions of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches
(152 mm) apart. Three width measurements shall be made and marked off
parallel to the course direction of the specimen. The distances shall be
a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) apart.
5.1.3 Cloth 18 inches (457 mm) and less in width. Three distances, each
a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm), shall be measured and marked off parallel
to the warp or wale direction. Three width measurements shall be made and
marked off along the full width of the cloth parallel to the filling or
course direction. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm)
apart.
5.2 Washing. The specimen shall be placed in the wash wheel with suffi-
cient other similar cloth to make up a dry load of 3 ± 1/4 pounds (1360 ±
113 g). Start the wash wheel to rotate, and note the time. Immediately add
water at a temperature of 100° ± 9°F (38° ± 5°C) of not over 50 parts per
million hardness to the wash wheel to a level of 7 ± 1/2 inches (178 ±
13 mm); this level will be increased by condensed steam. When the water
level has been reached, inject steam into the wash wheel until the tempera-
ture is between 203° and 212°F (95° and 100°C), and then shut off all steam.
Add sufficient soap to furnish a good running suds.
5.2.1 The soap solution shall be drained off 37 minutes after the wash
wheel begins to rotate, substantially emptying the wheel of soap and water
at the end of 40 minutes from the time the wash wheel was started.

METHOD 5550
5.2.2 The wash wheel shall be immediately refilled to a level of 8-1/2 ±

1/2 inch (216 ± 13 mm) with water at a temperature of 100° ± 9°F (38° ± 5°C).
Inject steam until the temperature is 140° to 149°F (60° to 65°C). The
water shall be drained off at such a time so that the wheel has become sub-
stantially empty of water at the end of 45 minutes from the time the wash
wheel was started.
5.2.3 For a third time, the wash wheel shall be immediately refilled to
a level of 8-1/2 + 1/2 inch (216 ± 13 mm) with water at a temperature Of
0
100° ± 9°F (38° ± 5 C). Inject steam until the temperature is 140° to 149°F
(60° to 65°C). The water shall be drained off at such a time so that the
wheel has become substantially empty of water at the end of 55 minutes
from the time the wash wheel was started. The wash wheel shall then be run
without further addition of water and shall be stopped at 60 minutes from the
time the wheel was started.
5.3 Extraction. The specimen shall be removed from the wash wheel and the
excess water removed by extraction for a period of 5 minutes.
5.4 Drying.
5.4.1 Knit cloth. After extraction, the specimen of knit cloth shall be
spread out on the drying tray to remove wrinkles, but not distorted, and
permitted to dry overnight at room temperature. A current of air from an
electric fan may be directed onto the specimen, or the specimen on the drying
tray may be placed in the drying oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to
110°C) to facilitate drying.
5.4.2 Woven cloth. After extraction, the specimen shall be dried as

described in 5.4.1. The dry specimen shall be allowed to cool for 5 minutes,
sprinkled with water to permit damp pressing, and allowed to stand in this
condition for 5 minutes.
5.4.2.1 When specified in the procurement document, the cloth shall be

pressed without drying.
5.5 Pressing.
5.5.1 Knit cloth. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

knit cloth shall not be pressed before measuring the shrinkage. When pressing
of knit cloth is specified, the specimen shall be pressed as described in
5.5.2.
5.5.2 Woven cloth. The extracted specimen, 5.3, or the dried and dampened
specimen, 5.4.2, shall be smoothed to remove wrinkles, but not distorted and
shall then be pressed either with a flat-bed press or hand–iron. The head

METHOD 5550
of the press or the hand-iron shall be at a temperature of 275° to 300°F

(135° to 149°C) during the pressing operation. When a hand-iron is used,
the iron shall not be slid back and forth on the specimen, but simply
pressed down upon it in a manner simulating the action of the flat-bed press.
5.6 Evaluation. The specimen shall be laid out without tension on a flat
surface in the standard atmosphere until moisture equilibrium is reached.
Care shall be taken that the specimen is smooth and free from wrinkles or
creases. The previously measured distance marked on the specimen shall again
be measured in both the warp and filling or wale and course directions.
5.7.1 The dimensional stability of the specimen shall be calculated as

follows:
Shrinkage, percent = A - B x 100

A
Where: A = Average of initial measurements (3 specimens).

B = Average measurements after laundering (3 specimens).
6. REPORT
6.1 The shrinkage of the sample unit in the warp (wale) direction and
in the filling (course) direction shall be the average of the specimens
tested from each direction, respectively, and shall be reported separately
6.1.1 When a test result registers elongation rather than shrinkage,

each elongation result shall be prefixed with a minus sign with both
the. minus sign and the value inclosed in parenthesis.
7. NOTES
Ewing Division of Powercom

P.O. Box 454
Troy, NY 12181

SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING; CLOTH OTH
COTTON AND LINEN

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the

woven cloth containing fibers other than cotton or
of mixtures of either cotton or linen and other fib
normal laundering procedure. It may be used for so
other items as specified. The dimensional stabilit
change in a measured distance of the material after
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Woven and warp knitted (single layer) cloth

fied in the procurement document, the specimen shal
least 22 by 22 inches (559 by 559 mm), except for c
(559 mm), when the specimen shall be 22 inches (559
width of the cloth.
2.2 Cloth 18 inches (457 mm) and less in width.

in the procurement document, the specimen shall be
in length and measurements in the width direction s
the cloth.
2.3 Circular and tubular knit cloths. Unless ot

procurement document, the specimen shall be at leas
length and the width of the cloth as received.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procuremen

from each sample unit shall be tested in each of th
4.1 Apparatus. The apparatus shall conform to t

Method 5550.
4.2 Reagent.
METHOD 5552
4.2.1 Detergent. Soap conforming to the requi
Laundry (Neutral and Built), Type II, Class 1. A
may be prepared by dissolving 1 pound of chip soa
(0.45 kg in 4 L). When cooled, this forms a thick
be used as required.
4.3 Method cited.
Method 5550, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cott

and Linen Cloth.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 Woven and warp knitted (single layer) cl

specified in the procurement document, 3 specimen
the cloth (sample unit) as follows: One specimen
cloth within 3 inches (76 mm) of the selvage and
of the cloth. No two specimens shall contain the
The specimen shall be laid without tension on a f
taken that the cloth is free from wrinkles or crea
each a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm), shall be me
to each of the warp and filling or wale and cours
The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152
(25 mm) from any edge of the specimen. The distan
indelible ink and a fine-pointed pen or by sewing
or by stamping. The measured distance shall be p
yarns.
5.1.2 Circular and tubular knit cloths. Three

of 18 inches (457 mm) shall be measured and marked
direction of the specimen. The distances shall be
apart. Three width measurements shall be made and
course direction of the specimen. The distances
(152 mm) apart.
5.1.3 Cloth 18 inches (457 mm) and less in wid

minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) shall be measured an
warp or wale direction. Three width measurements
along the full width of the cloth parallel to the
The distance shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152 m
5.2 Washing. Water at a temperature of 100 ±

50 parts per million hardness shall be added to t
7 ± 1/2 inches (178 ± 13 mm) inside the wheel (c
added to furnish a good running suds. The specim
wash wheel with other similar cloth to make up a d
(1360 ± 113 g).

METHOD 5552
5.2.1 The wash wheel shall then be started and run for 15 minutes. At the
end of the 15 minute period, the machine shall be stopped and the soap solution
drained off.
5.2.2 Water at a temperature of 100 ± 4°F (38° ± 2°C) shall be again added
to the wash wheel to give a depth of 7 ± 1/2 inches (178 ± 13 mm) inside the
wheel (cage). The wash wheel shall be started and run for a period of
5 minutes, again stopped, and the water drained off.
5.2.3 For a third time, the wash wheel shall be filled with water at a
temperature of 100 ± 4°F (38° ± 2°C) to give a depth of 7 ± 1/2 inches (178 ±
13 mm), and run for an additional 10 minutes. At the end of the 10-minute
period, the wash wheel shall be stopped and the water drained off.
5.3 Extraction. The specimen shall be removed from the wash wheel and
the excess water removed by extraction for a period of 5 minutes.
5.4 Drying.
5.4.1 Knit cloths. After extraction, specimens of knit cloth shall be

electric fan may be directed onto the specimen, or the specimen on the
drying tray may be placed in the drying oven at a temperature of 221° to
230°F (105° to 110°C) to facilitate drying.
5.4.2 Woven cloths. After extraction, the specimen shall be dried as

described in 5.4.1. The dry specimen shall be allowed to cool for 5 minutes,
sprinkled with water to permit damp pressing, and allowed to stand in this
condition for 5 minutes.
5.4.2.1 When specified by the procurement document, the cloth shall be

5.5 Pressing.
5.5.1 Knit cloths. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
knit cloth shall not be pressed before measuring the shrinkage. When pressing
of knit cloth is specified in the procurement document, the specimen shall be
pressed as described in 5.5.2.
5.5.2 Woven cloth. The extracted specimen (5.3) or the dried and
dampened specimen (5.4.2) shall be smoothed to remove wrinkles, but not
distorted and then pressed either with a flat-bed press or hand-iron. The
head of the press or the hand-iron shall be at a temperature of 275° to 300°F
(135° to 149°C) during the pressing operation. When a hand-iron is used, the
iron shall not be slid back and forth on the specimen, but simply pressed down
upon it in a manner simulating the action of the flatbed press.

METHOD 5552
5.6 Evaluation. The specimen shall be laid out without tension on a

flat surface in standard atmosphere until moisture equilibrium is reached.
creases. The previously measured distance marked on the specimen shall
again be measured in both the warp and filling or wale and course direc-
tions.
5.7 Calculation of results. The dimensional stability of the specimen shall

Shrinkage, percent = A - B X 100
A
B = Average measurement after laundering (3 specimens).
6. REPORT
6.1 The shrinkage of the sample unit in the warp (wale) direction and in
the filling (course) direction shall be the average of the specimens tested
from each direction, respectively, and shall be reported separately to the
6.1.1 When a test result registers elongation rather than shrinkage, each
elongation result shall be prefixed with a minus sign, with both the minus
sign and the value in parenthesis.
reported.

METHOD 5554
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING: WOOL CLOTH; ACCELERATED METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the dimensional stability in

the laundering of shrink-resistant wool cloth by means of an accelerated
procedure. This method is more severe than Method 5552 and 5556, and is
especially useful in determining, by one test, the dimensional stability
equivalent to a number of normal launderings. The material may or may not
be relaxed prior to this test as required by the procurement document (see
relaxation standard Method 5558). The dimensional stability is determined
by a change in a measured distance, or the material after subjection to test.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Cloths 24 inches (610 mm) or more in width. Unless otherwise specified
in the procurement document, the specimen shall be a square of cloth at least
24 inches by 24 inches (610 mm by 610 mm).
2.2 Cloths 18 to 24 inches (457 to 610 mm) in width. Unless otherwise

specified in the procurement document, the specimen shall be 24 inches (610
mm) in length and the width of the cloth as received.
2.3 Cloths 18 inches (457 mm) and less in width. Unless otherwise specified
in the procurement document, the specimen shall be at least 24 inches (610 mm)
in length, and the width of the cloth as received.

from each sample unit shall be tested in each of the warp and filling direc-
tions.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The apparatus shall conform to the requirements as specified in

Method 5550. The tumble drier shall be as specified in Method 5556.
4.2 Reagent.
4.2.1 A suitable buffering reagent for buffering the water to a pH of

approximately 6.5 to 7.5.

METHOD 5554
4.3 Methods cited.
Method 5550, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cotton, Linen, and Blended Cotton

and Linen Cloth.
Method 5552, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cloth Other Than Cotton and
Linen.
Method 5556, Mobile Laundry Evaluation for Textile Materials.
Method 5558, Shrinkage, Relaxation; Wool Cloth.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 Conditioning. All test specimens shall be conditioned under

standard atmospheric conditions in accordance with Section 4 of this Standard
prior to marking and testing.
5.1.2 Cloths 24 inches (610 mm) or more in width. The 3 specimens shall
be selected from the cloth (sample unit) as follows: 1 specimen from each
side of the cloth within 3 inches (76 mm) of the selvage, and 1 specimen
from the center of the cloth. No two specimens shall contain the same
filling yarns. The specimen shall be laid without tension on a flat surface,
care being taken that the cloth is free from wrinkles or creases. The
edges of the specimen square shall be slit by l-inch (25 mm) diagonal cuts at
intervals of about 6 inches (152 mm). Three distances, each about 18 inches
(457 mm), shall be measured and marked off parallel to each of the warp and
filling directions of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of
6 inches (152 mm) apart and 1 inch (25 mm) from any edge of the specimen. The
distances may be marked with indelible ink and a fine-pointed pen, or by sewing
fine threads into the cloth, or by stamping machines. The measured distance
shall be parallel to the respective yarns.
5.1.3 Cloths 18 to 24 inches (457 to 610 mm) in width. Three distances,

each a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm), shall be measured and marked off
parallel to the warp and filling directions.
5.1.4 Cloths 18 inches (457 mm) and less in width. Three width measurements
shall be made and marked off along the full width of the cloth parallel to the
warp and filling direction. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152
mm) apart.
5.2 Water at a temperature of 140° ± 0.5°F (60° ± 1°C) and not over 50
parts per million hardness shall be added to the wash wheel to a level of
4 inches (102 mm), or water shall be introduced into the wash wheel to a level of
minimum temperature of 91°F (33°C), with steam injected, until a temperature
of 140° ± 0.5°F (60° ± 1°C) is reached. The water shall be brought to a pH of

METHOD 5554
approximately 6.5 to 7.5 using any suitable buffering reagent. The temperature
of the water in the washer will be maintained at 140° ± 0.5°F (60° ± 1°C)
during the entire test. The specimen and sufficient wool ballast, of approximately
the same weight, cut to specimen size to make a 6-pound (2.7 kg) load, shall
be placed in the wash wheel and the wash wheel started. The wash wheel shall
be run for a minimum of 1 hour.
5.3 At the end of the laundering period, the specimen shall be extracted
for 5 minutes and dried in the tumble dryer at a stack temperature of 129° ±
0.5°F (54° ± 1°C) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
5.4 After drying, the specimen shall be smoothed to remove wrinkles, but
not distorted, and shall then be pressed with either a flat-bed press or
hand-iron. The head of the press or the hand-iron shall be at a temperature
of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C) during the pressing operation. When a
hand-iron is used, the iron shall not be slid back and forth on the specimen,
but simply pressed down upon it in a manner simulating the action of the flat-
bed press.

flat surface under standard atmospheric conditions in accordance with Section 4
of this Standard until moisture equilibrium is reached. Care should be taken
than the specimen is smooth and free from wrinkles or creases. The previously
measured distance marked on the specimen shall again be measured in both
warp and filling directions.


A
B = Average of measurements after laundering (3 specimens).
6. REPORT
6.1 The shrinkage of the sample unit in the warp direction and in the
filling direction shall be the average of the specimens tested from each
direction, respectively, and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 percent.

each elongation result shall be prefixed with a minus sign with both the
minus sign and the value enclosed in parenthesis.

METHOD 5554
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Machines of the type described in this method may be purchased from:
(a) Ewing Division of Powercom, P.O. Box 454, Troy, NY 12181
(b) Eastern Equipment Company, 158 Green Street, Boston, MA.

METHOD 5556
July 20, 1978
MOBILE LAUNDRY EVALUATION FOR TEXTILE MATERIALS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for use where it is desired to reproduce,

by means of a laboratory procedure, changes in dimensions of woven or knitted
cloth (wool, cotton, synthetics, and blends) and measure the durability or
efficiency of functional finishes by two different laundering procedures which
simulate field conditions. The title of the procedures, i.e., “wool” and
“cotton” are so designated to allow for easy reference in procurement docu-
ments. This test method allows for two general temperature ranges of launder-
ing and the end use application and procurement document will determine the
laundering procedure to be followed in evaluating the wide range of textile
materials to which it is applicable. It also allows for determining the
launderability of battings and feathers.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Specimens for determining dimensional stability. Unless otherwise

specified in the procurement document, the following shall apply:
2.1.1 Woven or warp knitted (single layer) cloth. The specimen shall be
a square of cloth 22 inches by 22 inches (559 mm by 559 mm) except for wool cloth,
then the specimen shall be 24 inches by 24 inches (610 mm by 610 mm).
2.1.2 Circular and tubular knit cloths. The specimen shall be 22 inches
(559 mm) in length and the width of the cloth as received.
2.1.3 Cloths 22 inches (559 mm) and less in width. The specimen shall be
at least 22 inches (559 mm) in length and the width of the cloth as received.
2.2 Specimens for evaluating durability and stability of functional finishes.

Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the following shall apply:
2.2.1 Specimens for evaluating flame resistant finishes. The specimen

shall be an 18 inch (457 mm) square of cloth.
2.2.2 Specimens for evaluating water resistant and other functional finishes
as specified in the procurement document. The specimen shall be 1 linear yard
(0.91 m) full width of the cloth.
2.3 Specimens for determining the launderability of battings. The specimen

shall be a 26 inch (660 mm) square of batting prepared as specified in 5.1.

METHOD 5556
2.4 Specimens for determining the launderability of feathers. The specimen
shall be 1 ounce (28.4 g) of feathers prepared as specified in 5.1.
3.1 Dimensional stability. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement

document, three specimens from each sample unit shall be tested in each
of the warp or wale and filling or course directions.
3.2 Evaluating functional finishes and determining launderability of battings
and feathers. The number of cycles of laundering (see 5.2.4) and the specific
evaluation criteria shall be as specified in the procurement document. The
material encompassed in the sample unit for testing and the number of determinations
for each criteria shall be as specified in the procurement document.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Wash Wheel (see 7.1). A cylindrical wash wheel of the reversing type
three fins each approximately 3 inches (76 mm) wide extending the full length
of the inside of the wheel. One fin shall be located every 120 degrees around
the inside diameter of the wheel. The wash wheel shall rotate at a speed of
30 ± 4 revolutions per minute making 5 to 10 revolutions before reversing. The
water inlets shall be large enough to permit filling the wheel to an 8 inch
(203 mm) level in less than 2 minutes, and the outlet shall be large enough to
permit discharge of this same amount of water in less than 2 minutes. The wash
wheel shall be equipped with a pipe for injecting live steam that shall be
capable of raising the temperature of water at an 8 inch (203 mm) level from
100° to 140°F (38° to 60°C) in less than 2 minutes.
4.1.1.1 The wash wheel shall be equipped with a thermometer or other
equivalent equipment for determining the temperature of the water during the
washing and rinsing procedures, and with an outside water gage that will
indicate the level of the water in the wheel.
4.1.2 Preheating tank or other device. A preheating device to supply
water in quantity within ± 4°F (± 2°C).
4.1.3 Extractor (see 7.2). A centrifugal extractor of the laundry type with
a perforated basket, approximately 11 inches (279 mm) deep by 17 inches (432 mm)
in diameter with an operating speed of approximately 1500 revolutions per minute.

METHOD 5556
4.1.4 Drier (see 7.1). A drier of the rotary, tumble type having a cylindrical
basket approximately 36 inches (914 mm) in diameter and 24 inches (610 mm)
in length and rotating at 35 ± 2 revolutions per minute. The drier shall be
capable of maintaining a minimum stack temperature of 120°F (49°C) during
the entire drying cycle of the standard load. The stack temperature shall
be measured 20 ± 2 inches (508 ± 51 mm) from the exhaust opening of the drier.
4.1.5 Pressing equipment. Any flat-bed press capable of pressing a specimen

24 inches (610 mm) square or a hand iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg)
may be used as an alternative. The flat-bed press or iron shall be equipped with
a temperature control to maintain the temperature between 248° to 305°F (120°
to 152°C) (see 7.2).
4.1.6 Measuring scale. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape or other suitable

measuring device graduated in increments of 1/16 inch (1 mm).
4.1.7 Balance. Balance or scale capable of weighing the specimen to an

accuracy of ± 0.5 g.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Synthetic detergent. Synthetic detergent meeting the requirements of

MIL-D-43362, Detergent, Laundry (Anionic: A Standard for Testing) (see 7.3).
4.2.2 Sour. Sour conforming to the requirements of P-S-683, Sour, Laundry

(Fluoridated) Type I.
4.2.3 Water of not over 50 parts per million hardness.

5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. Prior to initial markings for determining

dimensional stability and prior to determining the change after laundering,
the cloth shall be brought to equilibrium under standard atmospheric condi-
tions as defined in Section 4 of this Standard. When evaluating woolen cloth,
the edge shall be slit by diagonal cuts at intervals of about 6 inches (152 mm).
5.1.1 Preparation of specimen for dimensional stability.

5.1.1.1 Woven or warp knitted (single layer) cloth. The three specimens
shall be selected from the cloth (sample unit) as follows: One specimen from
each side of the cloth to within 3 inches (76 mm) of the selvage and one
specimen from the center of the cloth. No two specimens shall contain the
same filling yarns or courses. The specimens shall be laid without tension
on a flat surface, care being taken that the cloth is free from wrinkles or

METHOD 5556
creases. Three distances, each a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) shall be measured
and marked off parallel to each of the warp and filling or wale and course
directions of the specimen. The distance shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152
mm) apart and 1 inch (25 mm) from any edge of the specimen. The distance may be
marked with indelible ink and a fine pointed pen, or by sewing fine threads
into the cloth, or by a stamping machine. The measured distance shall be parallel
to the respective yarns.
5.1.1.2 Circular and tubular knit cloths. Three distances, each a minimum
directions of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152
mm) apart.
5.1.1.3 Cloths 22 inches (559 mm) and less in width. Three distances, each a
minimum of 18 inches (457 mm), shall be measured and marked off parallel to the
warp or wale direction. Three width measurements shall be made and marked off
along the full width of the cloth parallel to the filling or course direction.
The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) apart.
5.1.2 Preparation of specimen for laundering of batting. The 26 inch (660 mm)
square of batting shall be sewn between two pieces of cotton balloon cloth
conforming to MIL-C-332, type I, class 2. The bonded batting shall be placed
between the two pieces of balloon cloth with the warp direction of the cloth
coinciding with the length direction of the batting. The assembly shall be
completely stitched on all four sides approximately 1 inch (25 mm) in from
the outer edges. In addition, the assembly shall be stitched at 6 inch (152 mm)
intervals in the warp direction yielding 4 channels in the test specimen.
5.1.3 Preparation of specimen for laundering of feathers. The one ounce

(28.4 g) specimen of feathers shall be sewn in a 17 by 6 inch (432 by 152 mm)
cotton balloon cloth bag conforming to MIL-C-332, type I, class 2. Care shall
be taken in constructing the bag to insure that seams are tight and strong to
prevent loss of feather material.
5.2 The procedure to be followed, i.e., cotton or wool, shall be specified

in the end item specification or procurement document.
5.2.1 Standard loads. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,

the following standard loads comprising the specimen under test and clean ballast
of comparable size, weight and type of cloth shall be utilized.
5.2.1.1 Cotton laundering procedure. A total weight of 20 pounds (9.1 kg)

consisting of specimen and ballast.
5.2.1.1.1 Cotton laundering procedure when evaluating flame resistant finishes.
Twenty-four 18 inch (457 mm) squares of cloth consisting of specimen and ballast.

METHOD 5556
5.2.1.2 Wool laundering procedure. A total weight of 20 pounds (9.1 kg)
consisting of specimen and ballast.
5.2.2 Cotton laundering procedure. Water of not over 50 parts per million
hardness at the required temperature ± 4°F (± 2°C) shall be introduced into
the wash wheel to the designated level. The-schedule of table I shall be
followed. At the end of each time interval, the machine shall be stopped,
drained without removing the load and refilled to the proper level before starting
again. The wheel shall be in motion a total of 22 minutes during the period
of testing. After laundering, the standard load shall be extracted in two equiv-
alent portions, a minimum of 3 minutes each. The specimens shall be separated,
opened to full width and dried together with the ballast at 180° to 210°F
(82° to 99°C) for 45 to 60 minutes in a rotating tumble drier.
TABLE I. Cotton laundering schedule (see 7.4)
Water Level Temperature Time
Operation Composition inches (mm) °F (°C) (Minutes)
1. Suds Synthetic detergent 6 (152 mm) 100 (38) 5
(25 g)
(15 g)
3. Rinse 8 (203 mm) 140 (60) 3
4. Rinse 8 (203 mm) 120 (49) 3
5. Rinse Sour (24 g) 8 (203 mm) 100 (38) 3
6. Rinse 8 (203 mm) 100 (38) 3
22
5.2.3 Wool laundering procedure. Water of not over 50 parts per million
hardness at the required temperature ± 4°F (± 2°C) shall be introduced
into the wash wheel to the designated level. The schedule of Table II shall
be followed. At the end of each operation, the machine shall be stopped,
drained without removing the load, and refilled to the required level before
starting again. At the beginning of the fifth operation, water-shall be
admitted into the wash wheel to a level of 8 inches (203 mm), the laundry sour
added in the quantity required, and the machine run 4 minutes before stopping
and draining. After laundering, the standard load shall be extracted in two
equivalent portions for five minutes each. The specimens shall be separated,
opened to full width and dried together with the ballast at a stack temperature of
130° to 180°F (54° to 82°C) for 30 to 45 minutes.

METHOD 5556
TABLE 11. Wool laundering schedule (see 7.4)
Water Level Temperature Time
Operation Compostion inches (mm) °F (°C) (Minutes)
(25 g)
(15 g)
3. Rinse 8 (203 mm) 100 (38) 3
4. Rinse 8 (203 mm) 100 (38) 3
5. Rinse Sour (24 g) 8 (203 mm) 100 (38) 4
20
5.2.4 Laundering cycles. When the requirement in the end item specification
or procurement document requires more than one laundering, the complete cycle of
washing, extraction, and drying shall be performed the number of times specified.
Pressing need only be performed once.
5.3 Pressing.
5.3.1 Pressing of cloths for dimensional stability. The dry specimen shall
be allowed to cool a minimum of 5 minutes and shall then be sufficiently
moistened with water to allow good pressing. This wetting of the specimen
shall be accomplished by a spray nozzle set for fine mist or by applying wet
cotton cloths weighing 6 to 8 ounces per square yard (203 to 271 g/m ) and having
wet pickup of 90 to 100 percent applied to the face and back of the cloth and
allowed to stand in contact approximately 2 hours. If necessary, a platen weighing
not more than two times the weight of the cloth area covered, may be used to apply
a moderate pressure against the cloth to permit transfer of the moisture from
the applied cloths to the specimen. The specimen shall be permitted to remain
in this condition for 5 minutes, smoothed to remove wrinkles but not distorted,
and then pressed either with a flat-bed press or hand-iron. The head of
the press or the hand-iron shall be set at a temperature of 248° to 302°F
(120° to 150°C).
5.3.2 When a hand-iron is used, the iron shall not be slid back and forth
on the specimen, but simply pressed down upon it in a manner simulating the
action of a flat-bed press.
5.3.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, knitted
cloths and functionally finished cloths other than those for shrink-resistant
testing, battings, and feathers, shall not be moistened or pressed.

METHOD 5556
5.4 Evaluation.
5.4.1 Evaluation of cloth for dimensional stability. The specimen shall

be laid out without tension on a flat surface in the standard atmosphere
until moisture equilibrium is reached. Care shall be taken that the specimen
is smooth and free from wrinkles or creases. The previously measured
distance marked on the specimen shall again be measured in both the warp or
wale and filling or course direction.
5.4.2 Evaluation of functional finishes, battings, and feathers. The criteria

employed in evaluating functional finishes shall be as specified in the applicable
end item specification or procurement document.


A
Where: A = average of initial measurements (3 specimens).
B = average of measurements after laundering (3 specimens).

6. REPORT
6.1 Dimensional stability.
6.1.1 The shrinkage of the sample unit in the warp or wale direction and
in the filling or course direction shall be the average of the specimens tested
6.1.1.1 When a test result registers elongation rather than shrinkage,

minus sign and the value inclosed in parenthesis.
6.2 Durability or stability of functional finishes.

6.2.1 Reporting the results in the evaluation of functional finishes
shall be as specified in the applicable end item specification or procurement
document.
6.3 Launderability of battings and feathers. The reporting of results

in the evaluation of launderability of battings and feathers shall be as
specified in the applicable end item specification or procurement document.
reported.

METHOD 5556
7. NOTES
7.1 The wash wheel and drier as described may be obtained from Ewing Division
of Powercom, P.O. Box 454, Troy, NY 12181.
7.2 The pressing equipment and extractor may be obtained from Ewing Division
of Powercom, P.O. Box 454, Troy, NY 12181; American Laundry Machinery Company
5050 Section Avenue, Cincinnati, OH 45212 and Troy Laundry Machinery, East
Moline, IL 61244.
7.3 Synthetic Laundering Detergent (under the name of Igepon T-73) may be
obtained from GAF Corporation, Dyestuff & Chemical Division, 140 West 51st
Street, New York, NY 10020.
7.4 The water levels shown in the tables are based on a wash wheel
with 24 inch (610 mm) inside diameter and 24 inch (610 mm) inside length.
The following table shows the volumes of liquids corresponding to these
water levels:
TABLE III
Water Level in
the Wash Wheel Volume
Inches (mm) Gallons (L)
4 (102) 903 (35)

6 (152) 14.3 (54)
7 (178) 17.5 (66)
8 (203) 20.5 (77.6)
10 (254) 26.2 (99)

METHOD 5558
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE, RELAXATION; WOOL CLOTH
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the relaxation dimensional

stability of woven and knitted woolen cloths. The dimensional stability
is determined by a change in a measured distance of the material after
subjection to test.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Woven woolen cloths. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement

document, the specimen shall be a square of cloth 24 by 24 inches (610 mm by
610 mm) and the edges shall be slit by l-inch (25 mm) diagonal cuts at intervals
of 6 inches (152 mm). For cloth narrower than 24 inches (610 mm), the specimen
shall be 24 inches (610 mm) long and the entire width of the cloth.
2.2 Knitted woolen cloth (other than circular knit). Unless otherwise
specified in the procurement document, the specimen shall be as described above,
except that the square of cloth shall be 22 by 22 inches (559 by 559 mm) and
without any diagonal cuts.
2.3 Circular and tubular knit cloths. Unless otherwise specified in the
procurement document, the specimen shall be 22 inches (559 mm) in length and
the width of the tubular cloth as received.
2.4 Cloth 18 inches (457 mm) and less in width. Unless otherwise specified
in the procurement document, the specimen shall be 22 inches (559 mm) in length
and the full width of the cloth as received.

4. APPARATUS
4.1 Sink or similar apparatus. The sink must be of such shape and size
as to allow the specimens to be laid without folding.
4.2 Extractor. A centrifugal extractor of the laundry type with a perfora-

ted basket, approximately 11 inches (279 mm) deep by 17 inches (432 mm) in
diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1,500 revolutions per minute
(see 7.1)0

METHOD 5558
4.3 Drier. A drier of the rotary, tumble type having a cylindrical basket
approximately 36 inches (914 mm) in diameter and 24 inches (610 mm) in length
and rotating at 35 ± 2 revolutions per minute. The drier shall be
provided with means of maintaining a minimum stack temperature of 130° ± 2°F
(54° ± 1°C). The stack temperature shall be measured 20 ± 2 inches (508 ±
51 mm) from the exhaust opening of the drier (see 7.1).
4.4 Pressing equipment. A flat-bed press measuring 24 inches (610 mm) by
50 inches (1270 mm) or larger. Any flat-bed press capable of pressing a specimen
24 inches (610 mm) square or a hand-iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg)
may be used as an alternative. The flat-bed press or iron shall be equipped with
a temperature control to maintain the temperature between 248° and 302°F (120°
to 152°C) (see 7.1).
4.5 Measuring scale. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape or other suitable
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 Woven and knitted woolen cloths (other than circular knits). The
3 specimens shall be selected from the cloth (sample unit) as follows. 1
specimen from each side of the cloth to within 3 inches (76 mm) of the selvage
and 1 specimen from the center of the cloth. No 2 specimens shall contain the
same filling yarns or courses. The specimen shall be laid without tension on a
flat surface, care being taken that the cloth is free from wrinkles or creases.
Three distances, each a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm), shall be measured and
marked off parallel to each of the warp and filling or wale and course directions
of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) apart and
1 inch (25 mm) from any edge of the specimen. The distance may be marked with
indelible ink and a fine pointed pen, or by sewing fine threads into the cloth
or by a stamping machine. The measured distance shall be parallel to the
respective yarns.
direction of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152
mm) apart. Three width measurements shall be made and marked off parallel to
the course direction of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of
6 inches (152 mm) apart.
5.1.3 Cloths 18 inches (457 mm) and less in width. Three distances, each
a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm), shall be measured and marked off parallel to
the warp or wale direction. Three width measurements shall be made and marked
off along the full width of the cloth parallel to the filling or course direction.

METHOD 5558
5.2 Water at a temperature of 80° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) and not over 50 parts
per million hardness shall be added to the sink in sufficient quantity to allow
the specimen to be submerged. The specimen shall be placed in the water and
kept submerged for a minimum of 2 hours without agitation. Each specimen shall
be placed in the water separately and care taken that each specimen is wet-out
when submerged.
5.3 At the end of the 2-hour period, the specimen shall be placed in the
extractor for 5 minutes and then dried in the tumble drier at a stack
temperature of 130° ± 2°F (54° ± 1°C) for 30 minutes.
5.4 Pressing.
5.4.1 Woven and knitted woolen fabrics. After drying, the specimen shall
be smoothed to remove wrinkles, but not distorted and shall then be pressed
either with a flat-bed press or hand-iron. The head of the press or hand-
iron shall be at a temperature of 248° to 302°F (120° to 150°C) during
the pressing operation. When a hand-iron is used, the iron shall not be
slid back and forth on the specimen, but simply pressed down upon it in a
manner simulating the action of the flat-bed press.

flat surface in the standard atmosphere until moisture equilibrium is
reached. Care shall be taken that the specimen is smooth and free from
. wrinkles or creases. The previously measured distance marked on the speci-
men shall again be measured in both the warp and filling or wale and course
directions.
5.6 Calculation of results. The dimensional stability of the specimen

A
B = Average of measurements after laundering (3 specimens).
6. REPORT
6.1 The shrinkage of the sample unit in the warp (wale) and filling
(course) directions shall be the average of the specimens tested from each
direction, respectively and shall be reported separately to the nearest
0.1 percent.

METHOD 5558

minus sign and the value inclosed in parenthesis.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The extractor drier and pressing equipment described in this method may
be purchased from: The American Laundry Machinery Company, 5050 Section Avenue,
Cincinnati, OH 45212; Ewing Division of Powercom, P.O. BOX 454, Troy, NY 12181;
Eastern Equipment Company, 158 Green Street, Boston, MA 02130.

METHOD 5580
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN DRY CLEANING; CLOTH
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the dimensional stability of

woven cloth when dry cleaned. It may be used for some knitted cloths or other
items as specified in the procurement document. The dimensional stability is
determined by a change in a measured distance of the material after subjection
to test.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of cloth 12 inches by 12 inches (305 mm

by 305 mm).

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Tumble jar. A tumble jar, (as shown in figure 5500A) cylindrical in
shape with approximate dimensions being 12 inches (305 mm) in height and 6 inches
(152 mm) in diameter (or between opposite flat faces) with a capacity of
approximately 1.6 gallons (6 L) for use in dry cleaning processes. The jar
shall be of glass, corrosion-resistant metal or chemical stoneware. The jar
shall be mounted in a vertical position in such a manner that it can be rotated
around the horizontal axis passing through the center of the jar. Means shall
be provided for rotating the jar around the axis at a speed of 55 ± 2 revolutions
per minute. The jar shall be clean and thoroughly rinsed so that it is free
from soap, detergent, and wetting agents (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Extractor. A centrifugal extractor of the laundry type with a per-
forated basket, approximately 11 inches (279 mm) deep by 17 inches (432 mm)
minute (see 7.1).


METHOD 5580
4.1.4 Pressing Equipment. A flat-bed press capable of pressing a specimen

10 inches (254 mm) square or a hand-iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7
kg) may be used as an alternative. The flat-bed press or iron shall be equipped
with a temperature control apparatus to maintain the temperature between 275°
and 300°F (135° and 149°C) (see 7.1).
4.1.5 Drying equipment (see 7.1).
4.1.5.1 Rack and drying trays. The rack and trays shall be of any convenient
size over 12 inches by 12 inches (305 mm by 305 mm). The bottoms of the trays
shall be a wire mesh, and the size of the mesh shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch by
1/2 inch (13 by 13 mm). When the trays are in the rack, they shall be separated
by a distance of not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Openings shall be provided
in the rack for the circulation of the air.
4.1.6 Steam board or table (for pile fabrics only). The steam board or
table top shall be metal, well-padded with cotton or other absorbent material.
The metal board or table top shall contain perforations of such a size and so
spaced as to permit an even dispersion of steam through the padding.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Dry cleaning agent. The dry cleaning agent shall be Stoddard Solvent
meeting the requirements of P-D-680, Dry Cleaning Solvent, Type I.
4.2.2 Dry cleaning soap. Dry cleaning soap is prepared by dissolving 35 g

of potassium hydroxide in 89 ml of distilled water. The potassium hydroxide
solution shall be poured slowly with constant stirring into a mixture of 250
ml of oleic acid, 724 ml of Stoddard Solvent and 105 ml of cyclohexanol.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. The specimen shall be laid without tension on

a flat surface, care being taken that the cloth is free from wrinkles or creases.
A square of cloth 10 inches by 10 inches (254 by 254 mm), whose sides are parallel
with the warp and filling directions of the cloth, respectively, shall be
measured and marked off on the specimen. The corners and midpoints of each side
of the square may be marked with indelible ink and a fine-pointed pen or by
sewing fine threads into the cloth. The specimen shall not be taken nearer the
selvage than one-tenth the width of the material.

METHOD 5580
5.2 Dry cleaning. The test specimen and a sufficient quantity of other cloth
similar in weight to make a dry load of 240 g shall be placed in the jar and
unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, 2 L of the dry cleaning
agent containing 145 ml of dry cleaning soap specified-in 4.2.2, shall be
added. The tumble jar shall be operated for a period of 25 to 27 minutes. The
tumble jar shall be stopped and the cleaning solution poured out. The jar
shall be filled one-third full with fresh dry cleaning agent (without dry cleaning
soap) and the tumble jar shall be run for an additional 5 minute period,
stopped, and the cleaning solution poured out. The procedure described in the
preceding sentence shall be repeated 3 times (the total time for operating the
tumble jar is 45 minutes).
5.3 Drying. At the end of the dry cleaning period, the specimen shall be
removed from the jar. The excess cleaning agent shall be removed from the
specimen by a convenient means (which will not distort the sample), such as
passing through squeeze rolls, rolling between two layers of turkish toweling,
or gently pressing between 2 layers of blotting paper. The specimen shall
then be laid on the drying tray and dried at room temperature or the specimen
on the drying tray may be placed in hot circulating air at a temperature of
221° to 230°F (1050 to 110°C) to facilitate drying.
5.4 Pressing.
5.4.1 Pile cloth. When all of the solvent has evaporated, the specimen
shall be laid, pile side down, on the steam board or table and pressed as
described in 5.4.2. After the specimen has been pressed, steam shall be
turned on and allowed to pass through the specimen for 2 minutes.
5.4.2 Cloth other than pile cloth. When all of the solvent has evaporated,
the specimen shall be laid on a padded ironing board, care being taken to
avoid any strain or distortion in handling. The specimen shall be covered
with a damp press cloth which has been saturated with water and wrung out so
as to retain a moisture content equal to or approximately 75 percent of its
dry weight. The weight of the press cloth2 when dry should be between 4 and
5 ounces per square yard (136 and 170 g/m ). The head of the press or the
hand-iron shall be at a temperature of 275° to 300°F (135° to 149°C) during
the pressing operation. When a hand-iron is used, the iron shall not be slid
back and forth on the specimen, but simply pressed down upon it, in a manner
simulating the action of the flat-bed press. After pressing, the specimen shall
be allowed to lie on a smooth surface for one hour at room temperature and then
conditioned overnight.
5.5 Evaluation. Care shall be taken that the specimen is smooth and free
from wrinkles or creases. The previously measured distance marked on the
specimen shall again be measured in both the warp and filling or wale and
course directions.

METHOD 5580

A
Where: A = average of initial measurements (3 specimens)
B = average measurement after dry cleaning (3 specimens).
6. REPORT
6.1 The shrinkage of the sample unit in the warp (wale) directions and the
filling (course) direction shall be the average of the specimens tested from
each direction, respectively, and shall be reported separately to the nearest
0.1 percent.
6.1.1 When the test result registers elongation rather than shrinkage, each
elongation result shall be prefixed with a minus sign with both the minus sign
and the value enclosed in parenthesis.
7. NOTES
7.1 The extractor, pressing and drying equirement of the type described in
this method may be purchased from the American Laundry Machinery Company,
5050 Section Avenue, Cincinnati, OH 45212; Ewing Division of Powercom, P. O.
Box 454, Troy, NY 12181; the tumble jar and the tumbler are available from the
Andrews Technical Supply Co., 2540 Eastwood Ave., Eastwood Ave., Evanston, IL
60204.

METHOD 5590
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN SPONGING; WOOL CLOTH
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the shrinkage in sponging of

wool and wool-blend fabrics. It is less severe than laundering methods.
Shrinkage in sponging is the change in measured distances due to sponging.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Woven and warp knitted (single layer) cloth. Unless otherwise specified,
the specimen shall be a square of cloth 22 by 22 inches (559 by 559 mm), except
for cloth narrower than 22 inches (559 mm), then the specimen shall be 22 inches
(559 mm) long and the entire width of the cloth.
2.2 Circular and tubular knit goods. Unless otherwise specified, the
specimen shall be at least 22 inches (559 mm) in length and the width of
the cloth as received.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Sink, washwheel, or similar apparatus of such shape and size as to

allow the specimen to be laid flat and soaked without folding.

minute. In the absence of an extractor the excess water may be removed by
wrapping the cloth in a clean white towel or similar cloth and squeezing
between the hands. Wringing by hand or the use of a squeeze roll is not
permitted (see 7.1).
4.1.3 Drying equipment (see 7.1).
4.1.3.1 Rack and drying trays. The rack and trays shall be of any
convenient size over 22 by 22 inches (559 by 559 mm). The bottoms of the
trays shall be a wire mesh, and the size of the mesh shall be a minimum of 1/2
by 1/2 inch (13 by 13 mm). When the trays are in the rack, they shall be
separated by a distance of not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Openings shall
be provided in the rack for circulation of the air.

METHOD 5590
4.1.3.2 Drying oven. A circulating air oven thermostatically controlled and

capable of maintaining the temperature at 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C).
4.1.4 Pressing equipment (see 7.1).
4.1.4.1 Flatbed press. A flatbed press with steam pressure of 60 to 80

pounds per square inch (413 to 551 kPa) capable of pressing a specimen 22
inches (559 mm) square.
equipped with a temperature control to maintain the temperature between 248°
and 302°F (120° and 150°C).

4.2 Reagent.
4.2.1 Wetting agent. A wetting agent such as the dioctyl ester of sodium
sulfosuccinic acid (Deceresol OT, Aerosol OT) or equivalent.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 Woven and warp knitted (single layer) cloth. The three specimens shall
be selected from the cloth (sample unit) as follows: one specimen from each
side of the cloth to within 3 inches (76 mm) of the selvage and 1 specimen
from the center of the cloth. No two specimens shall contain the same filling
yarns or courses. The specimen shall be laid without tension on a flat surface,
care being taken that the cloth is free from wrinkles or creases. Three
distances, each a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) shall be measured and marked
off parallel to each of the warp and filling or wale and course directions of
the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) apart and
at least 1 inch (25 mm) from any edge of the specimen. The distance may be
marked with indelible ink and a fine pointed pen, or by sewing fine threads into
the cloth, or by a stamping machine. The measuring distance shall be parallel
to the respective yarns.
5.1.2 Circular and tubular knit cloths. Three distances each a minimum of
18 inches (457 mm) shall be measured and marked off parallel to the wale
direction of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152
mm) apart. Three width measurements shall be made and marked off parallel to
the course direction of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of 6
inches (152 mm) apart.

METHOD 5590
5.1.3 Cloth 18 inches (457 mm) and less in width. Three distances, each a
minimum of 18 inches (457 mm), shall be measured and marked off parallel to
the warp or wale direction. Three width measurements shall be made and marked
off along the full width of the cloth parallel to the filling or course direction.
5.2 Wetting-out. Water containing 0.03 percent by volume of active ingredient

of the wetting agent shall be added to the container in sufficient quantity
to completely cover the specimen. A solution composed of 22 gallons (83.3 L)
of water plus 100 ml of 25 percent concentrated “Deceresol OT” has been found
suitable for wetting-out 6 pounds (2.7 kg) of material. The water shall be
at a temperature of 75° to 85°F (24° to 29°C) and shall have not over 50 parts-
per-million hardness. The specimen shall be placed in the water and kept
submerged without agitation for a period of 60 minutes ± 1 minute. Each specimen
shall be separately laid flat in the water without folding. Care shall be taken
to see that each specimen is wet-out.
5.3 Extraction. The specimen shall be removed from the container and the
excess water removed by extraction for a period of 5 minutes.
5.4 Drying. After extraction, the specimen shall be spread out on the
drying tray to remove wrinkles, but not distorted, and permitted to dry
overnight at room temperature. A current of air from an electric fan
may be directed onto the specimen, or the specimen on the drying tray may
be placed in the drying oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to
110°C) to facilitate drying.
5.4.1 When specified by the procurement document, the cloth shall be

5.5 Pressing. The specimen shall be pressed with either a flatbed press
or a hand iron specified in 4.1.4.
5.5.1 Flatbed press. The specimen shall be spread out on the bed of the
press and the steam valve opened until the steam first appears over the surface
of the bed. The head shall then be lowered and vacuum applied for 5 seconds.
Drying of the specimen shall be completed by raising the head and applying
vacuum until the cloth is cool and dry (about 5 seconds). When the material
undergoing test contains more than 20 percent man made fibers, flatbed pressing
is preferred to iron pressing.
5.5.2 Hand iron. The dried specimen shall be allowed to cool at least
5 minutes and then moistened sufficiently with water to allow good pressing.
The specimen shall be permitted to remain in this condition for 5 minutes.
The specimen shall be smoothed to remove wrinkles but not distorted, and
then pressed with a hand iron. The head of the hand iron shall be at a
temperature of 248° to 302°F (120° to 150°C). The iron shall not be slid
back and forth on the specimen, but simply pressed down upon it in a manner
simulating the action of a flatbed press.

METHOD 5590
5.6 Evaluation. The specimen shall be laid out without tension on a flat
surface in the standard atmosphere until moisture equilibrium is reached.
creases. The previously measured distance marked on the specimen shall again
be measured in both the warp and filling or wale and course directions.
5.7 Calculation of results. Shrinkage of the specimen shall be calculated
as follows:

A

B = Average measurements after laundering (3 specimens).
6. REPORT
6.1 The shrinkage of the sample unit in the warp (wale) direction and in
the filling (course) direction shall be the average of the specimens tested
6.1.1 When a test result registers elongation rather than shrinkage, each
elongation result shall be prefixed with a minus sign with both the minus
sign and the value inclosed in parenthesis.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The extractor, drying and pressing equipment of the type described in
this method may be purchased from the American Laundry Machinery Company, 5050
Section Ave., Cincinnati, OH 45212; Ewing Division of Powercom, P.O. Box 454,
Troy, NY 12181.

METHOD 5600
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS TO CHLORINE BLEACHING
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the colorfastness of textile

materials to chlorine bleaching.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Standard sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement

document, when a standard sample has been established, the required
specimens from the sample unit of the material to be tested and one
specimen from the standard sample shall be as follows:
2.1.1 Cloth. Two to six grams of cloth.
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing and braid. Two to
six grams of the applicable material, so held together to form a unit for
testing.
document, when a standard sample has not been established, the required
specimens from the sample unit of the material to be tested, shall be as
specified in 2.1.1 or 2.1.2. One additional specimen shall be taken from
each sample unit of the material to be tested and shall be retained, un-
tested, for comparison. All specimens shall be taken from adjacent areas
of the sample unit.

4.1 Apparatus.
adapter in which tightly capped stainless steel cylindrical containers 5
inches (127 mm) in length by 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter are held with
their bases toward a horizontal shaft 2 inches (51 mm) from the center of
rotation. The shaft shall rotate at a speed of 40 to 45 rpm. Each con-
tainer shall be equipped with a sealing device having solvent resistant rings.

METHOD 5600
An equal number of stainless steel containers shall be fastened on opposite

sides of the rotating shaft in order to maintain balanced and smooth rotation
during the test. The Launder-Ometer or similar machine shall be maintained at
a temperature of 90° ± 4°F (32° ± 2°C) (see 7.1).
4.1.2.1 Steam press. Flat-bed press maintained at a temperature of 275° to

302°F (135° to 150°C).
4.1.2.2 Hand-iron. A hand-iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg) and

maintained at a temperature of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C).
4.1.3 Extractor. A centrifugal extractor of the laundry type with a

perforated basket approximately 11 inches (280 mm) deep by 17 inches (432 mm)
in diameter with an operating speed of approximately 1500 rpm.
4.1.4 Oven. A circulating-air oven capable of maintaining the required

temperature within ± 4°F (± 2°C).
4.1.5 Bleached, desized, cotton cloth (see 7.2).
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.2 Sodium hypochlorite solution (bleach). Any commercial preparation

of sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl - bleach solution - 4 percent to 6 Percent
available chlorine) diluted with distilled water to an available chlorine
content of 0.3 percent and adjusted to a hydrogen ion cOntent (pH) of 11.0 ±
0.2, with a buffer solution specified in 4.2.3.
4.2.3. Buffer solution. The buffer solution needed to adjust the pH to

the required level shall be as follows:
4.2.3.1 Five parts of 1 percent solution of sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) and

95 parts of 5 percent solution of sodium carbonate (Na2CO3). Both solutions
shall be prepared with distilled water.
4.2.3.2 Ten percent solution of sodium hydroxide (NaOH).

4.2.4 Soap solution. Soap solution containing 0.5 percent soap, P-S-1792,
Soap, Laundry (Neutral and Built), type I, classes 1 or 2 for use when the
specimen has a water repellent finish.

METHOD 5600
4.2.5 Antichlor. Sodium bisulfite solution (antichlor) prepared by

dissolving 5 grams of sodium bisulfite (NaHSO3) anhydrous, C.P. in 1000 ml
of distilled water.
4.2.6 Acetic acid solution. 0.14 g of glacial acetic acid, C.P. diluted
to 1000 ml.
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, one specimen
of the standard sample shall be bleached at the same time and under the same
conditions as the specimen of the material being tested.
5.2 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established
one specimen from the sample unit being tested shall be retained, untested,
for comparison.
5.3 The specimen shall be wet thoroughly with distilled water at a temperature
of 90 ± 4°F (32° ± 2°C).
5.3.1 If the specimen has been treated with a water-repellent finish, it

shall be wet-out in a 0.5 percent soap solution at a temperature of 90° ± 4°F
(32° ± 2°C) and then rinsed with distilled water.
5.4 The excess water shall then be removed by squeezing or extraction. The
specimen shall be placed in a stainless steel container with approximately 50
times its dry weight of the sodium hypochlorite solution at a temperature of 90°
± 4°F (32° ± 2°C).
5.5 The container with the specimen and the sodium hypochlorite solution
shall be placed in the Launder-Ometer or similar machine immediately and
agitated for 1 hour at a temperature of 90° ± 4°F (32° ± 2°C). The period of
agitation shall be measured from the time of placing the specimen in the container
to the time of its removal.
5.6 The specimen shall be removed from the container and rinsed thoroughly
in running water at a temperature of 100 ± 4°F (38° ± 2°C) for 5 minutes, with
squeezing at intervals.
5.7 After rinsing, the excess water shall be removed by squeezing or any
other convenient means, and the specimen placed in a container together with a
solution of sodium bisulfite (antichlor) equal to approximately 50 times the dry
weight of the specimen for 10 minutes at a temperature of 90° ± 4°F (32° ± 2°C)
with occasional stirring.

METHOD 5600
5.8 At the end of the antichlor treatment the specimen shall be rinsed
thoroughly in running water at 90° ± 4°F (32° ± 2°C) for a period of 5 minutes
with occasional squeezing. If at the end of this period the specimen does not
appear to be free of bisulfite, it may be acidified with an acetic acid solution
at a temperature of 81° ± 6°F (27° ± 3°C) with light agitation for 5 minutes.
The specimen is then rinsed thoroughly for an additional 5 minute period.
5.9 After rinsing, the excess water shall be removed by extraction and
the specimen air-dried at room temperature or oven-dried at a temperature of
221° ± 9°F (105° ± 5°C).
5.10 The specimen shall then be lightly sprayed with water and pressed between
clean white cotton cloths using a flat-bed steam press or hand-iron at a
temperature of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C).
5.11 Evaluation.
5.11.1 Evaluation shall be conducted in accordance with Method 9010.

5.11.2 The color change of the test specimen shall be evaluated to
determine the colorfastness to chlorine bleaching.
5.11.3 Standard sample. The color change exhibited by the tested specimen
when compared to the untested specimen retained shall be evaluated against the
color change exhibited by the tested standard when compared to the untested
standard retained.
5.11.3.1 Specimen.
Pass: Color change equal to or less than that of the standard sample.
Fail: Color change greater than that of the standard sample.
5.11.4 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been estab-
lished, evaluation of the test specimen for change in color shall be rated
as follows:
5.11.4.1 Test specimen when compared to the specimen retained untested

for comparison.
Excellent: No perceptible color change.
Good: Perceptible but not an appreciable change in color.
Fair: Appreciable but not an objectionable change in color.
Poor: Objectionable change in color.
“Appreciable change in color” means a change that is immediately noticeable
in comparing the test specimen with the original sample for comparison. If
closer inspection or a change of angle of light is required to make apparent
a slight change of color, the change is not considered appreciable.

METHOD 5600
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to chlorine bleaching shall be

reported as “pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample. If
the test specimen shows failure when compared to comparable material of
the standard sample, the specimen shall be reported as failing. When
failure is reported, the severest departure (i.e., actual rating “fair”
or “poor”) of the change of the test specimen shall be distinguished and
reported.
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to chlorine bleaching shall be

reported as “pass” or “fail” when the test specimen is evaluated and rated
in accordance with the adjective ratings of 5.11.4. Failure of the test
specimen to meet the adjective rating specified in the applicable procurement
document shall be reported as failure. When failure is reported, the severest
departure (i.e., actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of the test
specimen shall be distinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A machine and accessories of the type described may be purchased from
Atlas Electric Devices Co., 4114 No. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 60613.
7.2 Cotton cloth may be obtained from Testfabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200
Blackford Ave., Middlesex, NJ 08846.

METHOD 5605
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO COMBINED LAUNDERING AND BLEACHING
OF TEXTILE MATERIALS; LAUNDER-OMETER METHOD
1. SCOPE

materials to combined laundering and bleaching.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

specimen from the standard sample, shall be as follows:
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing and braid. Two to
six grams of the applicable material, so held together to form a unit for
testing.
2.2 No standard sample.- Unless otherwise specified in the procurement

specimens from the same unit of the material to be tested shall be as speci-
fied in 2.1.1 or 2.1.2. One additional specimen shall be taken from each
sample unit of the material to be tested and shall be retained, untested,
for comparison. All specimens shall be taken from adjacent areas of the
sample unit.

4.1 Apparatus.
inches (203 mm) in length by 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) in diameter are held with

METHOD 5605
rotation. The shaft shall rotate at a speed of 40 to 45 rpm. Each container
shall be equipped with a sealing device having solvent resistant rings. An
equal number of stainless steel containers shall be fastened on opposite
sides of the rotating shaft in order to maintain balanced and smooth rotation
during the test. The Launder-Ometer or similar machine shall be maintained at
a temperature of 158° ± 4°F (70° ± 2°C) (see 7.1).

302°F (135° to 150°C).
4.1.2.2 Hand-iron. A hand-iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg)

and maintained at a temperature of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C).

perforated basket approximately 11 inches (280 mm) deep by 17 inches
(432 mm) in diameter with an operating speed of approximately 1500 rpm.
4.1.4 Oven. Circulating-air oven capable of maintaining the required

4.1.5 Color transfer cloth (see 7.2).
4.1.5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the

color transfer cloth shall be desized, bleached, starch-free2 96 x 100
combed cotton lawn cloth, 4 ounces per square yard (136 g/m ).
4.1.5.2 When specified in the procurement document, the color transfer

cloth may be replaced by one of the following multifiber test cloths:
4.1.5.2.1 Color transfer cloth. A test cloth with a 6-fiber repeat made
up of equal bars of acetate, cotton, nylon 66, polyester (polyethylene
terephthalate) acrylic and wool. Each 6-fiber repeat shall measure approxi-
mately 2 inches (51 mm) and shall be separated by a waste filling stripe
(see 7.2).
4.1.5.2.2 Three fiber cloth containing acetate, wool, and bleached cotton,
so woven as to show 1 inch (25 mm) square each of acetate and wool and 2 inch
(51 mm) square of cotton.
4.1.6 White thread.

4.1.7 Bleached, desized, cotton cloth.

METHOD 5605
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Water. The water used in the preparation of the soap solution shall
have a hardness of not more than 50 parts per million.
4.2.2 Sodium hypochlorite solution (bleach). Any commercial preparation

of sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl-bleach solution) diluted with distilled water to
an available chlorine content of 1.0 percent and adjusted to a hydrogen ion
content (pH) of 11.0 ± 0.2 with a buffer solution specified in 4.2.3.
4.2.3 Buffer solution. The buffer solution needed to adjust the pH to the
required level shall be as follows:
4.2.3.1 Five parts of 1 percent solution of sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3), and

95 parts of 5 percent solution of sodium carbonate (Na2CO3). Both solutions
shall be prepared with distilled water.
4.2.3.2 Ten percent solution of sodium hydroxide (NaOH).
4.2.4 Soap solution. Soap solution containing 0.5 percent soap, P-S-1792,
Soap, Laundry (Neutral and Built), Type I, classes 1 or 2; and 0.2 percent
sodium metasilicate, O-S-604, Sodium Metasilicate, Technical, Type I.
4.2.5 Antichlor. Sodium bisulfite solution (antichlor) prepared by dis-

solving 5 grams of sodium bisulfite (NaHSO3) anhydrous, C.P. In 1000 ml of
distilled water.
4.2.6 Acetic acid solution. 0.14 g of glacial acetic acid, C.P.

diluted to 1000 ml.
4.3 Method cited.

5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, one
specimen from the standard sample shall be tested at the same time and under
the same conditions as the specimen of the material being tested.
one specimen from each sample unit to be tested shall be retained, untested,
for comparison.

METHOD 5605
5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, a 2-inch

(51 mm) square of 6-fiber color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white
thread to one corner of the test specimen or may be attached by some
other suitable means. A 2-inch (51 mm) square of the color transfer
cloth shall also be attached to one corner of the specimen from the
standard sample when it is used for comparison. When the specimen has
been printed, the color transfer cloth shall be attached to the printed
side.
5.4 Laundering cycle and temperature. Unless otherwise specified in the

procurement document, the laundering cycle of the Launder-Ometer or similar
machine shall be 45 minutes and the temperature of the cylinders and con-
tents maintained at 158° ± 4°F (70° ± 2°C).
5.5 The specimen assembly shall be placed in the stainless steel containers
together with 45 ml. of the soap and sodium metasilicate solution, 5 ml
of the sodium hypchlorite solution at a temperature of 158° ± 4°F (70° ± 2°C).
5.5.1 The containers are placed in the Launder-Ometer or similar machine

and agitated for the period of time and at the required temperature.
5.6 At the end of the laundering cycle the specimen assembly shall be
removed from the container and rinsed thoroughly in running water at a
5.6.1 After rinsing, the excess water shall be removed by squeezing or

any other convenient means and the specimen assembly placed in a container
together with a solution of sodium bisulfite (antichlor) equal to approxi-
mately 50 times the dry weight of the specimen assembly at a temperature of
90° ± 4°F (32° ± 2°C) for 10 minutes with occasional stirring.
5.6.2 At the end of the antichlor treatment the specimen assembly shall
be rinsed thoroughly in running water at a temperature of 81° ± 4°F (27° ±
2°C) for a period of 5 minutes with occasional squeezing. If at the end of
this period the specimen does not appear to be free of bisulfite, it may be
acidified with an acetic acid solution at a temperature of 81° ± 4°F (27° ±
2°C), with light agitation for 5 minutes. The specimen is then–rinsed thoroughly
for an additional 5 minute period.
5.7 After rinsing, the excess water shall be removed by extraction and the
specimen air-dried at room temperature or oven-dried at a temperature of
221° ± 9°F (105° ± 5°C).
5.7.1 The specimen assembly shall then be lightly sprayed with water
and pressed between clean white cotton cloths using a flat-bed steam
press or hand-iron at a temperature of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C) with
the color transfer cloth uppermost and in full contact with the specimen.

METHOD 5605
5.8 Evaluation.

5.8.2 The color change of the test specimen and the staining of the
color transfer cloth shall be evaluated separately to determine the color-
fastness to combined laundering and bleaching.
5.8.3 After testing evaluate only that stain evident on the stripe of the
multi-fiber test cloth that is the same fiber or similar chemical nature as
that of the dyed fabric (i.e., wool stripe for dyed wool; acetate stripe for
dyed acetate; cotton stripe for either dyed cotton or viscose, and nylon
stripe for both nylon and polyester). When dyed fabric or systems of unknown
fiber combinations are involved, evaluate the total staining on all bars of the
transfer cloth. The degree of stain shall be recorded for each individual stripe.
5.8.4 Standard sample. The color change exhibited by the tested speci-
men when compared to the untested specimen retained shall be evaluated
against the color change exhibited by the tested standard when compared
to the untested standard retained. Unless otherwise specified, the staining
of the color transfer cloth of the specimen shall be evaluated against the
staining of the color transfer cloth of the standard.
5.8.4.1 Specimen.
5.8.4.2 Color transfer cloth.

Pass: Staining equal to or less than that attached to the standard
sample.
Fail: Staining greater than that attached to the standard sample.
evaluation of the test specimen for change in color and staining by its
attached color transfer cloth shall be rated as follows:
5.8.5.1 Test specimen when compared to the specimen retained untested for
comparison and color transfer cloth evaluated accordingly to the degree of
staining shall be rated as:
Excellent: No perceptible color change and staining.

Good: Perceptible but not an appreciable change in color and staining.
Fair: Appreciable but not an objectionable change in color and staining.
Poor: Objectionable change in color and staining.

METHOD 5605

6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to combined laundering and bleaching

shall be reported as “pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample.
If either the test specimen or the transfer cloth of the test specimen shows
failure when compared to comparable material of the standard sample, the
specimen shall be reported as failing. When failure is reported, the severest
departure (i.e., the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of the
test specimen or staining of specific fibers of the color transfer cloth
shall be distinguished and reported.
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to combined laundering and bleaching

shall be reported as “pass” or “fail” when the test specimen and color transfer
cloth are evaluated and rated in accordance with the adjective ratings of 5.8.5.
Failure of either the test specimen or the color transfer cloth to meet the
adjective rating specified in the applicable procurement document, shall be
reported as failure. When failure is reported, the severest departure (i.e.,
the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of test specimen or staining
of specific fibers of the color transfer cloth, shall be distinguished and
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A machine and accessories of the type described in this method may
be purchased from Atlas Electric Devices Co., 4114 No. Ravenswood Ave.,
Chicago, IL 60613.
7.2 Multifiber test cloth (color transfer cloth) and cotton cloth may be
obtained from Testfabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave., Middlesex,
NJ 08846.

METHOD 5610
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO LAUNDERING OF COTTON AND

LINEN TEXTILE MATERIALS; LAUNDER-OMETER METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the colorfastness of cotton
and linen or blends of cotton and linen with other fibers to laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
specimen from the sample unit of the material to be tested, and one
specimen from the standard sample, shall be as follows:
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing and braid. Two to six
grams of the applicable material, so held together to form a unit for
testing.
specimens from the sample unit of the material to be tested shall be as
specified in 2.1.1 or 2.1.2, except that the specimen shall weigh four
grams. One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of
the material to be tested and shall be retained, untested, for comparison.
All specimens shall be taken from adjacent areas of the sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Launder-Ometer. A Launder-Ometer or similar machine having a metal
(127 mm) in length by 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter are held with their bases
toward a horizontal shaft 2 inches (51 mm) from the center of rotation. The
shaft shall rotate at 40 to 45 rpm. Each container shall be equipped with a
sealing device having solvent resistant rings. An equal number of stainless

METHOD 5610
steel containers shall be fastened on opposite sides of the rotating shaft
in order to maintain balanced and smooth rotation during the test. The Launder-
Ometer or similar machine shall be maintained at a temperature of 158° ± 4°F
(70° ± 2°C) (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Ten stainless steel balls, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter per con-
tainer (see 7.1).
302°F (135° to 150°C).
(432 mm) in diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1500 rpm.
4.1.5 Oven. Circulating-air oven capable of maintaining the required
4.1.6 Color transfer cloth. A test cloth with a 6-fiber repeat made up
of equal bars of acetate, cotton, nylon 66, polyester (polyethylene tereph-
thalate) acrylic and wool. Each 6-fiber repeat shall measure approximately
2 inches (51 mm) and shall be separated by a waste filling stripe (see 7.2).
4.1.7 White thread.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Soap solution. Soap and soda solution containing 0.5 percent soap,
P-S-1792, Soap, Laundry (Neutral and Built), type I, classes 1 or 2, and 0.2
percent sodium carbonate anhydrous in water of a hardness not over 50 parts
per million.
4.2.2 Acetic acid. A 0.05 percent solution of acetic acid, C.P., 28
percent.
4.3 Method cited.

METHOD 5610
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established one
specimen of the standard sample shall be laundered at the same time and
under the same conditions as the specimen of the material being tested.
for comparison.
(51 mm) square of the 6-fiber color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white
thread to one corner of the test specimen or may be attached by some other
suitable means. A 2-inch (51 mm) square of the color transfer cloth shall
also be attached to one corner of the specimen from the standard sample
when it is used for comparison.
machine shall be 30 minutes and the temperature of the container and its
contents shall be maintained at 158° ± 4°F (70° ± 2°C).
5.5 The specimen assembly shall be placed in the stainless steel con-
tainers together with 100 ml of the soap and soda solution at 158° ± 4°F
(70° ± 2°C) and ten stainless steel balls.
5.6 The containers are placed in the Launder-Ometer or similar machine
and agitated for the required time and at the required temperature.
5.7.1 After rinsing the specimen assembly the excess water shall be removed
by squeezing or extraction. The specimen assembly shall then be placed in a
container of 0.05 percent solution of acetic acid and agitated for 5 minutes
at a temperature of 77° ± 4°F (25° ± 2°C).
5.7.2 At the end of the acetic acid rinse the specimen assembly shall be
thoroughly rinsed with running water at a temperature of 77° ± 4°F (25° ± 2°C)
for 5 minutes.
5.8 When rinsing of the specimen assembly is completed the excess water
shall be removed by extraction and then the specimen assembly air-dried
at room temperature or dried in a circulating air oven at 221° ± 4°F (105° ±
2°C).
METHOD 5610
5.9 The specimen assembly shall then be lightly sprayed with water and
pressed between clean white cotton cloths using a flat-bed steam press or
hand-iron at a temperature of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C) with the color
transfer cloth uppermost and in full contact with the specimen.
5.10 Evaluation.
fastness to laundering.
multi-fiber test cloth that is the same fiber or similar chemical nature as
that of the dyed fabric (i.e., wool stripe for dyed wool; acetate stripe
for dyed acetate; cotton stripe for either dyed cotton or viscose, and nylon
stripe for both nylon and polyester). When dyed fabric or systems of unknown
fiber combinations are involved, evaluate the total staining on all bars of
the transfer cloth. The degree of stain shall be recorded for each individual
stripe.
5.10.4 Standard sample. The color change exhibited by the tested
specimen when compared to the untested specimen retained shall be
evaluated against the color change exhibited by the tested standard
when compared to the untested standard retained. Unless otherwise speci-
fied, the staining of the color transfer cloth of the specimen shall be
evaluated against the staining of the color transfer cloth of the standard.
5.10.4.1 Specimen.
sample.
for comparison and color transfer cloth evaluated according to the degree
of staining shall be rated as:

METHOD 5610
Good: Perceptible but not an appreciable change in color and
staining.
Fair: Appreciable but not an objectionable change in color and
staining.
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to laundering shall be reported as
“pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample. If either the
test specimen or the transfer cloth of the test specimen shows failure when
compared to comparable material of the standard sample the specimen shall
be reported as failing. When failure is reported, the severest departure
(i.e., the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of the test speci-
men or staining of specific fibers of the color transfer cloth, shall be
distinguished and reported.
6.2 No standard sample.
~
Colorfastness to laundering shall be reported
as “pass” or “fail’ when the test specimen and color transfer cloth are
evaluated and rated in accordance with the adjective ratings of 5.10.5.
adjective rating specified in the applicable procurement document shall be
the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of the test specimen or
staining of specific fibers of the color transfer cloth, shall be dis-
tinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
Atlas Electric Devices CO., 4114 No. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 60613.
NJ 08846.

METHOD 5612
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO LAUNDERING OF COTTON AND LINEN

CLOTH; WASH WHEEL METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the colorfastness of cotton
and linen fabrics (woven and knitted) when subjected to a normal laundering
procedure.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
document, when a standard sample has been established, the required speci-
mens from the sample unit of the material to be tested and one specimen
from the standard sample, shall be as follows:
2.1.1 Cloth. The specimen shall be a square of cloth not less than
specified in 2.1.1. One additional specimen shall be taken from each
sample unit of the material to be tested, and shall be retained, untested,
sample unit.
4. APPARATUS, REAGENT AND METHOD CITED
4.1 Apparatus.
reversing type. The wheel (cage) shall be 20 to 24 inches (508 mm to 610 mm)
inside diameter and 20 to 24 inches (508 mm to 610 mm) inside length. There
shall be three fins each approximately 3 inches (76 mm) wide extending the full
length of the inside of the wheel. One fin shall be located every 120° around
the inside diameter of the wheel. The wash wheel shall rotate at a speed of
30 revolutions per minute making 5 to 10 revolutions before reversing. The water

METHOD 5612
inlets shall be large enough to permit filling the wheel to an 8-inch
to permit discharge of this same amount of water in less than 2 minutes.
The machine shall be equipped with a pipe for injecting live steam that
shall be capable of raising the temperature of water at an 8-inch (203 mm)
level from 100° to 140°F (38° to 60°C) in less than 2 minutes.
4.1.1.1 The water wheel shall be equipped with a thermometer or other
inches (610 mm by 1270 mm) or larger. Any flat-bed press capable of
pressing a specimen 22 inches (559 mm) square or a hand-iron weighing
approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg) may be used as an alternative. The flat
press or iron shall be equipped with a temperature control to maintain the
temperature between 275° and 300°F (135° and 149°C).
4.1.3 Measuring scale. Yardstick, meterstick or metal tape graduated in
1/8 inch (1 mm) increments.
4.1.4.1 Rack and drying trays. A rack and tray of any convenient size over
22 by 22 inches (559 mm by 559 mm). The bottoms of the trays shall be a wire
mesh, and the size of the-mesh shall be a minimum of 1/2 by 1/2 inch (13 mm by
13 mm). When the trays are in the rack, they shall be separated by a distance
of not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and openings shall be provided in the
rack for circulation of the air.
(432 mm) in diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1500 revolutions
per minute.
of equal bars of acetate, cotton, nylon 66, polyester (polyethylene tere-
phthalate) acrylic and wool. Each 6-fiber repeat shall measure approximately
4.1.6 White thread.

METHOD 5612
4.2 Reagent.
(Neutral and Built), type I, classes 1 or 2. A stock solution of the soap
may be prepared by dissolving 1 pound (454 g) of chip soap in 1 gallon
(3.8 liters) of hot water. When cooled, this forms a thick homogeneous
jelly which may be used as required.
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
for comparison.
5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the purchase document, a 2-inch (51 mm)
square of 6-fiber color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white thread to one
corner of the test specimen or may be attached by some other suitable means.
A 2-inch (51 mm) square of the color transfer cloth shall also be attached to
one corner of the specimen from the standard sample when it is used for com-
parison.
5.4.1 Woven and warp knitted (single layer) cloth. Three specimens shall
be selected from the cloth (sample unit) as follows: one specimen from each
side of the cloth to within 3 inches (76 mm) of the selvage and one specimen
from the center of the cloth. No two specimens shall contain the same filling
yarns or courses. The specimen shall be laid without tension on a flat sur-
face, care being taken that the cloth is free from wrinkles or creases. Three
distances, each a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) shall be measured and marked
off parallel to each of the warp and filling or wale and course directions
of the specimen. The distances shall be a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) apart
and at least 1 inch (25 mm) from any edge of the specimen. The distance may
be marked with indelible ink and a fine pinted pen, or by sewing fine threads
into the cloth, or by stamping. The measured distance shall be parallel to the
respective yarns.

METHOD 5612
apart.
5.5 Washing. The specimen shall be placed in the wash wheel with sufficient
other similar cloth to make up a dry load of 3 ± 1/4 pounds (1361 ± 113 g).
Start the wash wheel to rotate, and note the time. Immediately add water at
a temperature of (100° ± 9°F (38° ± 5°C) of not over 50 parts per million
hardness to the wheel to a level of 7 ± 1/2 inches (178 ± 13 mm); this level
will be increased by condensed steam. Inject steam into the wheel until the
temperature is between 203° and 212°F (95° and 100°C), and then shut off all
steam. The steam shall be added as soon as the opening of the steam pipe into
the wheel is completely covered with water. Then add sufficient soap-to furnish
a good running suds.
5.5.1 The soap solution shall be drained off 37 minutes after the wash wheel
begins to rotate, substantially emptying the wheel of soap and water at the end
of 40 minutes from the time the wash wheel was started.
5.5.2 The wash wheel shall be immediately refilled to a level of 8-1/2 ±
1/2 Inch (216 ± 13 mm) with water at a temperature of 100 ± 9°F (38° ± 5°C).
Inject steam until the temperature is 60 to 65°C (140 to 149°F). The water
shall be drained off at such a time so that the wheel has become substantially
empty of water at the end of 45 minutes from the time the wash wheel was started.
5.5.3 For a third time, the wash wheel shall be immediately refilled
to a level of 8-1/2 ± 01/2 inch (216 ± 13 mm) with water at a temperature
of 100° ± 9°F (38° ±5 C). Inject steam until the temperature is 140° to
149°F (67 to 65°C). The water shall be drained off at such a time so
that the wheel has become substantially empty of water at the end of 55
minutes from the time the wash wheel was started. The wash wheel shall
then be run without further addition of water and shall be stopped at 60
minutes from the time the wheel was started.

METHOD 5612
5.7 Drying.
5.7.1 Knit cloths. After extraction, the specimen of knit cloth shall
be spread out on the drying tray to remove wrinkles, but not distorted,
and permitted to dry overnight at room temperature. A current of air from
an electric fan may be directed onto the specimen, or the specimen on the
drying tray may be placed in the drying oven at a temperature of 221° to
230°F (105° to 110°C) to facilitate drying.
described in 5.4.1. The dry specimen shall be allowed to cool for 5
minutes, sprinkled with water to permit damp pressing, and allowed to
stand in this condition for 5 minutes.
5.8 Pressing.
5.8.1 Knit cloths. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
the knit cloth shall not be pressed before measuring the shrinkage. When
pressing of the knit cloth is specified, the specimen shall be pressed as
described in 5.8.2.
5.8.2 Woven cloth. The extracted specimen, 5.6, or the dried and dampened
specimen, 5.4.2, shall be smoothed to remove wrinkles, but not distorted and
shall then be pressed either with a flat-bed press or hand-iron. The head of
the press or the hand-iron shall be at a temperature of 275° to 300°F (135° to
149°C) during the pressing operation. When a hand-iron is used, the iron
shall not be slid back and forth on the specimen, but simply pressed down upon
it in a manner simulating the action of the flat-bed press.
5.9 Evaluation.
multi-fiber test cloth that is the same fiber or similar chemical nature as that
of the dyed fabric (i.e., wool stripe for dyed wool; acetate stripe for dyed
acetate; cotton stripe for either dyed cotton or viscose, and nylon stripe for
both nylon and polyester). When dyed fabric or systems of unknown fiber
combinations are involved, evaluate the total staining on all bars of the transfer
cloth . The degree of stain shall be recorded for each individual stripe.

METHOD 5612
when compared to the untested specimen retained shall be evaluated against
the color change exhibited by the tested standard when compared to the un-
tested standard retained. Unless otherwise specified, the staining of the
color transfer cloth of the specimen shall be evaluated against the staining
of the color transfer cloth of the standard.
5.9.4.1 Specimen.
Pass: Color change equal to or less than that of the standard
sample.
sample.
5.9.5.1 Test specimen when compared to the specimen retained, untested,
for comparison and color transfer cloth evaluated according to the degree of
staining shall be rated as:
Good: Perceptible but not an appreciable change in color
and staining.
Fair: Appreciable but not an objectionable change in color
and staining.
6. REPORT
“pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample. If either the test
specimen or the transfer cloth of the test specimen shows failure when com-
pared to comparable material of the standard sample, the specimen shall be
reported as failing. When failure is reported, the severest departure (i.e.,

METHOD 5612
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to laundering shall be reported
as “pass” or “fail” when the test specimen and color transfer cloth are
Failure of either the test specimen or the color transfer cloth, to
meet the adjective rating specified in the applicable procurement document,
shall be reported as failure. When failure is reported, the severest de-
parture (i.e., the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of the
test specimen or staining of specific fibers of the color transfer cloth,
shall be distinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A machine and accessories of the type described may be purchased from:
P.O. Box 454
Troy, NY 12181
7.2 Multifiber test cloth (color transfer cloth) and cotton cloth may
be obtained from Testfabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave., Middlesex,
NJ 08846.
FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO 191A

METHOD 5614
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO LAUNDERING OF WOOL, SILK, RAYON AND
OTHER TEXTILE MATERIALS; LAUNDER-OMETER METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the colorfastness to
laundering of wool, silk, rayon, and other textile materials.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
specimen from the standard sample shall be as follows:
201.2 Yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing and braid. Two to six
grams of the applicable material, so held together to form a unit for
testing.
each sample unit of the material to be tested, and shall be retained, un-
tested, for comparison. All specimens shall be taken from adjacent areas
of the sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
inches (127 mm) in length by 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter are held with

METHOD 5614
tainer shall be equipped with a sealing device having solvent resistant
rings. An equal number of stainless steel containers shall be fastened
on opposite sides of the rotating shaft in order to maintain balanced
and smooth rotation during the test. The Launder-Ometer or similar machine
shall be maintained at a temperature of 100° ± 4°F (38° ± 2°C) (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Ten stainless steel balls, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter, per
container.
302°F (135° to 150°C).
perforated basket approximately 11 inches (280 mm) deep by 17 inches (432 mm)
in diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1500 rpm.
of equal bars of acetate, cottons nylon 66, polyester (polyethylene tere-
phathalate) acrylic and wool. Each 6-fiber repeat shall measure approxi-
mately 2 inches (51 mm) and shall be separated by a waste filling stripe
(see 7.2).
4.1.6 When specified in the material specification, the color transfer
cloth may be replaced by a cloth of undyed wool, silk, rayon or other type
of fiber.
4.1.7 White thread.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Soap solution. Soap solution containing 0.5 percent soap, P-S-1792
Soap, Laundry (Neutral and Built), type I, classes 1 or 2, and 0.2 percent
sodium carbonate anhydrous in water of hardness of not over 50 parts per
million.

METHOD 5614
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
specimen of the standard sample shall be laundered at the same time and under
the same conditions as the specimen of the material being tested.
for comparison.
5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, a 2-inch (51 mm)
square of 6-fiber color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white thread to one
corner of the test specimen or may be attached by some other suitable means.
A 2-inch (51 mm) square of the color transfer cloth shall also be attached to
one corner of the specimen from the standard sample when it is used for
comparison.
machine shall be 30 minutes and the temperature of the container and its
contents shall be maintained at 100° ± 4°F (38° ± 2°C).
5.5 The specimen assembly shall be placed in a stainless steel container
containing 100 ml of soap solution and ten stainless steel balls.
5.6 The container is placed in the Launder-Ometer or similar machine and
agitated for the required time and at the required temperature.
temperature of 100° ± 4°F (38° ± 2°C) for 5 minutes. The rinsing shall be
repeated three times with squeezing out of the excess water between each rinsing.
5.8 When rinsing of the specimen assembly is completed the assembly shall
be wrapped in a clean white cloth and the excess water removed by squeezing
or extraction, and air-dried.
5.9 The specimen assembly shall then be lightly sprayed with water and
pressed between clean white cotton cloths using a flat-bed steam press or
hand-iron at a temperature of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C) with the color
transfer cloth uppermost and in full contact with the specimen.

METHOD 5614
5.10 Evaluation.
cloth. The degree of stain shall be recorded for each individual stripe.
specimen when compared to the untested specimen retained shall be
when compared to the untested standard retained. Unless otherwise speci-
fied, the staining of the color transfer cloth of the specimen shall be
evaluated against the staining of the color transfer cloth of the standard.
5.10.4.1 Specimen.
sample.
sample.
5.10.5 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been
established, evaluation of the test specimen for change in color and
staining by its attached color transfer cloth shall be rated as follows:
staining.
and staining.

METHOD 5614
closer inspection or a change of angle of light is required to make
apparent a slight change of color, the change is not considered
appreciable.
6. REPORT
“pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample. If either the
compared to comparable material of the standard sample, the specimen shall
(i.e., the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of the test speci-
men or staining of specific fibers of the color transfer cloth, shall be
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to laundering shall be reported as
“pass” or “fail” when the test specimen and color transfer cloth are
Failure of either the test specimen or the color transfer cloth to meet
the adjective rating specified in the applicable procurement document shall
(i.e., the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of test specimen or
7. NOTES
Atlas Electric Devices Company, 4114 No. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL
60613.
NJ 08846.

METHOD 5616
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO LAUNDERING OF WOOL, SILK AND RAYON
CLOTH: WASH WHEEL METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the colorfastness of wool,
silk, and rayon fabrics when subjected to a normal laundering procedure.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
mens from the sample unit of the material to be tested and one specimen
from the standard sample shall be as follows:
2.1.1 Cloth. The specimen shall be a square of cloth not less than
specified in 2.1.1. One additional specimen shall be taken from each
sample unit of the material to be tested, and shall be retained, untested,
sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
reversing type. The wheel (cage) shall be 20 to 24 inches (508 mm to 610 mm)
inside diameter and 20 to 24 inches (508 mm to 610 mm) inside length. There
shall be three fins each approximately 3 inches (76 mm) wide extending the full
length of the inside of the wheel. One fin shall be located every 120° around
the inside diameter of the wheel. The wash wheel shall rotate at a speed of 30
revolutions per minute making 5 to 10 revolutions before reversing. The
water inlets shall be large enough to permit filling the wheel to an 8-inch

METHOD 5616
to permit discharge of this same amount of water in less than 2 minutes. The
machine shall be equipped with a pipe for injecting live steam that shall
b. capable of raising the temperature of water at an 8-inch (203 mm) level
from 100° to 140°F (38° to 60°C) in less than 2 minutes.
4.1.1.1 The water wheel shall be equipped with a thermometer or other
inches (610 mm by 1270 mm) or larger. Any flat-bed press capable of
pressing a specimen 22 inches (559 mm) square or a hand-iron weighing
lpproximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg) may be used as an alternative. The flat
press or iron shall be equipped with a temperature control to maintain the
temperature between 275° and 300°F (135° and 149°C).
4.1.3 Measuring scale. Yardstick, meterstick or metal tape graduated in
1/8 inch (1 mm) increment.
4.1.4.1 Rack and drying trays. A rack and tray of any convenient size
over 22 by 22 inches (559 mm by 559 mm). The bottoms of the trays shall
be a wire mesh, and the size of the mesh shall be a minimum of 1/2 by 1/2
inch (13 mm by 13 mm). When the trays are in the rack, they shall be
separated by l distance of not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and openings
shall be provided in the rack for circulation of the air.
minute.
and capable of maintaining the temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 110°C).
4.1.6 White thread.

METHOD 5616
4.2 Reagent.
(Neutral and Built), type I, classes 1 or 2. A stock solution of the
soap may be prepared by dissolving 1 pound (454 g) of chip soap in 1
gallon (3.8 liters) of hot water. When cooled, this forms a thick homo-
genous jelly which may be used as required.
4.3 Method cited.
Method 9010, Shade Matching of Textile Materials; Visual Method
5. PROCEDURE
for comparison.
(51 mm) square of 6-fiber color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white
thread to one corner of the test specimen or may be attached by some other
suitable means. A 2-inch (51 mm) square of the color transfer cloth shall
also be attached to one corner of the specimen from the standard sample when
it is used for comparison.
5.4.1 Woven and warp knitted (single layer) cloth. Three specimens
shall be selected from the cloth (sample unit) as follows: one specimen
from each side of the cloth to within 3 inches (76 mm) of the selvage and
one specimen from the center of the cloth. No two specimens shall contain
the same filling yarns or courses. The specimen shall be laid without
tension on a flat surface, care being taken that the cloth is free from
wrinkles or creases. Three distances, each a minimum of 18 inches (457 m),
shall be measured and marked off parallel to each of the warp and filling
or wale and course directions of the specimen. The distances shall be a
minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) apart and at least 1 inch (25 mm) from any
edge of the specimen. The distance may be marked with indelible ink and
a fine pointed pen, or by sewing fine threads into the cloth, or by stamp-
ing , The measured distance shall be parallel to the respective yarns.

METHOD 5616
apart.
5.5 Washing. Water at a temperature of 100° ± 4°F (38 ± 2°C) and
not over 50 parts per million hardness shall be added to the wash wheel to
a depth of 7 ± 1/2 inches (178 ± 13 mm) inside the wheel (cage). Sufficient
soap shall be added to furnish a good running suds. The specimen shall be
placed in the wash wheel with other similar cloth to make up a dry load of
3 ± 1/4 pounds (1.36 ± 0.11 kg).
5.5.1 The wheel shall then be started and run for 15 minutes. At the end
of the 15 minute period, the machine shall be stopped and the soap solution
drained off.
5.5.2 Water at a temperature of 100° ± 4°F (28° ± 2°C) shall be
again added to the wash wheel to give a depth of 7 ± 1/2 inches (178 ±
13 mm) inside the wheel (cage). The wash wheel shall be started and run
for a period of 5 minutes, again stopped, and the water drained off.
5.5.3 For a third time, the wash wheel shall be filled with water at a
temperature of 100° ± 4°F (38° ± 2°C) to give a depth of 7 ± 1/2 inches
(178 ± 13 mm) and run for an additional 10 minutes. At the end of the 10
minute period, the wash wheel shall be stopped and the water drained off.
5.7 Drying.
50701 Knit cloths. After extraction, specimens of knit cloth shall be
electric fan may be directed onto the specimen, or the specimen on the dry-
tray may be placed in the drying oven at a temperature of 221° to 230°F
(105° to 110°C) to facilitate drying.

METHOD 5616
described in 5.4.1. The dry specimen shall be allowed to cool for 5
minutes, sprinkled with water to permit damp pressing, and allowed to
stand in this condition for 5 minutes.
5.8 Pressing.
5.8.1 Knit cloths. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement docu-
ment, knit cloth shall not be pressed before measuring the shrinkage.
When pressing of knit cloth is specified, the specimen shall be pressed as
described in 5.8.2.
5.8.2 Woven cloth. The extracted specimen (5.6) or the dried and dampened
specimen (5.4.2) shall be smoothed to remove wrinkles, but not distorted and
then pressed either with a flat-bed press or hand-iron. The head of the press
or the hand-iron shall be at a temperature of 275° to 300°F (135° to 149°C)
during the pressing operation. When a hand-iron la used, the iron shall not
be slid back and forth on the specimen, but simply pressed down upon it in a
manner simulating the action of the flat-bed press.
5.9 Evaluation.
5.9.2 The color change of the test specimen and the staining of the color
transfer cloth shall be evaluated separately to determine the colorfastness
to laundering.
standard retained. The staining of the color transfer cloth of the specimen
shall be evaluated against the staining of the color transfer cloth of the
standard.

METHOD 5616
5.9.4.1 Specimen.
sample.
sample.
and staining.
and staining.
6. REPORT
“pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample. If either the test
specimen or the transfer cloth of the test specimen shows failure when com-
pared to comparable material of the standard sample the specimen shall be
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to laundering shall be reported

METHOD 5616

7. NOTES
7.1 A machine and accessories of the type described may be purchased
from:
P.O. Box 454
Troy, NY 12181
7.2 Multifiber test cloth (color transfer cloth) and cotton cloth
may be obtained from Testfabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave.,
Middlesex, NJ 08846.

METHOD 5620
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO DRY CLEANING OF TEXTILE
MATERIALS ; PETROLEUM SOLVENT
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method Is intended for determining the colorfastness of
textile materials to dry cleaning with a petroleum solvent.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
men of the material to be tested and one specimen from the standard sample
shall be as follows:
2.1.1 Cloth. A rectangle of cloth 2 inches by 4 inches (51 mm by 102 mm).
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, and light cordage. A sufficient amount of the
applicable material, so held together to form a unit weighing not less
than 1 gram nor more than 3 grams.
each sample unit of the material to be tested and shall be retained, untested,
sample unite
4.1 Apparatus.
adapter in which tightly capped stainless steel cylindrical containers
5 inches (127 mm) in length by 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter are held with
tainer shall be equipped with a sealing device having solvent resistant
rings. An equal number of stainless steel containers shall be fastened
on opposite sides of the rotating shaft in order to maintain balanced and
smooth rotation during the test. The Launder-Ometer or similar machine shall
be maintained at a temperature of 81° ± 4°F (27° ± 2°C) (see 7.1).

METHOD 5620
4.1.2.1 Steam press. Flat-bed press maintained at a teamerature
. of
275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C).
perforated basket approximately 11 inches (280 m) deep by 17 inches
(432 mm) in diameter, with an operating speed of approximately 1500 rpm.
4.1.4 Muslin covered frame or screen suitable for drying specimen at
room temperature.
4.1.5 Cheesecloth.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Dry cleaning solvent shall conform to requirements of P-D-680,
Dry Cleaning Solvent.
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Conditioning. All specimens shall be conditioned and tested under
standard atmospheric conditions in accordance with section 4 of this standard.
specimen of the standard sample shall be dry cleaned at the same time and
under the same conditions as the specimen of the material being used.
for comparison.
5.4 The specimen shall be placed in a stainless steel container together
with 150 ml of the dry cleaning solvent and agitated for 20 minutes in the
Launder-Ometer or similar machine at a temperature of 81° to 84°F (27° to 29°C).

METHOD 5620
5.5 The specimen shall be removed from the container, extracted and
then laid out on a horizontal surface such as a muslin covered frame ox
screen and allowed to dry at room temperature.
5.6 When dry, the specimen shall be pressed as follows:
5.6.1 Standard method. The specimen shall be laid out on the bed of
a flat-bed steam press. The head of the press shall be lowered and held
in contact with the specimen and steam shall be admitted from the back of
the press for 5 to 10 seconds.
5.6.2 Alternate method. The specimen shall be laid on a padded ironing
board. Cover with two layers of cheesecloth on which is placed a damp
press cloth which has been saturated in water and wrung out so as to retain
a moisture content equal to approximately 75 percent of the dry weight,
followed by two more thicknesses of cheesecloth and pressed with a hand-
iron.
5.6.3 The temperature of either pressing equipment shall be 275° to 302°F
(135° to 150°C).
5.7 After pressing by either of the above methods, the specimen shall be
allowed to cool on a smooth horizontal surface for 4 hours at room
temperature before evaluating.
5.8 Evaluation.
5.8.2 The color change of the test specimen shall be evaluated to deter-
mine the colorfastness to dry cleaning.
the color change exhibited by the tested standard when compared to the un-
tested standard retained.
5.8.3.1 Specimen.
sample.
evaluation of the test specimen shall be rated as follows:

METhOD 5620
for comparison.
a slight change in color, the change is not considered appreciable.
60 REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to dry cleaning shall be reported as
“pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample. If the test speci-
men shows failure when compared to comparable material of the standard sample,
the specimen shall be reported as failing. When failure is reported, the
severest departure (i.e., the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of
the test specimen shall be distinguished and reported.
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to dry cleaning shall be reported as
“pass” or “fail” when the test specimen is evaluated and rated in accordance
with the adjective ratings of 5.8.4. Failure of the test specimen to meet the
adjective rating specified in the applicable procurement document, shall be
the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of the test specimen shall be
7. NOTES
Atlas Electric Devices Company, 4114 No. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL
60613.

METHOD 5621
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO WET CLEANING OF TEXTILE MATERIALS;
PERCHLOROETHYLENE SOLVENT (ASSOCIATED WITH DRY CLEANING)
1. SCOPE
materials to wet dry cleaning with perchloroethylene solvent.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
mens from the sample unit of the material to be tested and one specimen from
the standard sample shall be as follows:
If one specimen of printed cloth does not include all of the colors in the
design, additional specimens shall be taken so that all colors are included.
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, and light cordage. Sufficient amount of the applicable
material so held together to form a unit weighing not less than 1 gram nor
more than 3 grams.
document, when a standard sample has not been established the required speci-
mens from the sample unit of the material to be tested shall be as specified
in 2.1.1 or 2.1.20 One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample
unit of the material to be tested, and shall be retained, untested, for
comparison. All specimens shall be taken from adjacent areas of the sample
unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
(127 mm) in length by 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter with their bases toward

METHOD 5621
a horizontal shaft 2 inches (51 mm) away from the center of rotation. The
shaft shall rotate at a speed of 40 to 45 rpm. Each container shall be
equipped with a sealing device hating solvent resistant rings. An equal
number of stainless steel containers shall be fastened on opposite tides
of the rotating shaft in order to maintain balanced and smooth rotation
during the test. The Launder-Ometer or similar machine shall be maintained
at a temperature of 82° ± 4°F (28° ± 2°C) (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Ten stainless steel balls, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter, per con-
tainer.
302°F (135° to 150°C).
(432 mm) in diameter with an operating speed of approximately 1500 rpm.
4.1.5 Muslin covered frame or screen suitable for drying specimen at
room temperature.
4.1.7 White thread.
4.1.8 Cheesecloth.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Drycleaning solvent. Dry cleaning grade perchloroethylene (tetra-
chloroethylene) conforming to requirements of O-T-236, Tetrachloroethylene
(Perchloroethylene) Technical Grade (see 7.3).
solution shall be poured slowly with constant stirring into a mixture of 250 ml
of oleic acid, 724 ml of Stoddard solvent and 105 ml of cyclohexanol.

METHOD 5621
4.2.3 Cleaning solution. The cleaning solution is prepared by mixing
together 995 parts by volume of dry cleaning grade perchloroethylene and
five parts by volume of dry cleaning soap.
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 All specimens shall be conditioned and tested under standard
atmospheric conditions in accordance with section 4 of the standard.
specimen of the standard sample shall be wet dry cleaned at the same time
and under the same conditions as the specimen of the material being tested.
for comparison.
5.4 Unless otherwise specified, a 2-inch (51 mm) square of the 6-fiber
color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white thread to one corner of the
test specimen or may be attached by some other suitable means. A 2-inch
(51 mm) square of the color transfer cloth shall also be attached to one
corner of the specimen from the standard sample when it is used for comparison.
5.5 The conditioned specimen assembly shall be placed in a stainless
steel container together with ten stainless steel balls and 50 ml of
cleaning solution for each gram of total weight of the specimen assembly.
The containers shall then be agitated for 25 minutes in the Launder-Ometer
or similar machine at a temperature of 82° ± 4°F (28° ± 2°C).
5.5.1 The solution shall be poured out and replaced by an equal volume
of fresh perchloroethylene without the added soap and the container
returned to the machine and agitated for five minutes.
5.5.2 The procedure of 5.5.1 shall be repeated three more times. The
total running time of the containers shall be 45 minutes.
5.6 The specimen assembly shall be removed from the container, extracted
to remove excess solvent and then laid on a horizontal surface such as a
muslin covered frame or a screen and allowed to air-dry at room temperature.

METHOD 5621
5.7 The specimen assembly from 5.6 shall be returned to the container
together with an equal amount of distilled water equal to the volume of
solvent used in 5.5.
5.7.1 The container shall then be agitated for 5 minutes in the
Launder-Ometer or similar machine at a temperature of 82° ± 4°F (28° ±
2°C).
5.8 The water shall then be poured out and the procedures of 5.7
repeated.
5.9 The specimen assembly shall be removed from the container, extracted,
and laid on a horizontal surface such as a muslin covered frame or screen
and allowed to dry at room temperature.
5.10 When dry, the specimen assembly shall be pressed as follows:
5.10.1 Standard method. The specimen assembly shall be laid out on the
bed of a flat-bed steam press with the color transfer cloth in full contact
with the specimen. The head of the press shall be lowered and held in
contact with the specimen assembly and steam shall be admitted from the back
of the press for 5 to 10 seconds.
5.10.2 Alternate method. The specimen assembly shall be laid on a padded
ironing board with the color transfer cloth in full contact with the specimen.
Cover with two layers of cheesecloth on which Is placed damp press cloth which
has been saturated with water and wrung so as to retain a moisture content
equal to approximately 75 percent of its dry weight, followed by two more
thicknesses of cheesecloth and pressed with a hand-iron.
(135° to 150°C).
5.11 After pressing by either one of the above methods, the specimen shall
be allowed to cool on a smooth horizontal surface for 4 hours at room
temperature before evaluating.
5.12 Evaluation.
fastness to wet dry cleaning.

METHOD 5621
specimen when compared to the untested specimen retained, shall be
when compared to the untested standard retained. Unless otherwise
specified, the staining of the color transfer cloth of the specimen shall
be evaluated against the staining of the color transfer cloth of the
standard.
5.12.4.1 Specimen.
Pass: Color change equal or less than that of the standard
sample.
Pass: Staining equal to or less than that attached to the
standard sample.
Fail: Staining greater than that attached to the standard
sample.
5.12.5 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been
established, evaluation of the test specimen for change in color and
staining by its attached color transfer cloth, shall be rated as follows:
and staining.
and staining.

METHOD 5621
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to wet dry cleaning shall be reported
as “pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample. If either the
compared to comparable material of the standard sample, the specimen shall
be reported as failing. When a failure is reported, the severest departure
(i.e., the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of the test specimen
or staining of specific fibers of the color transfer cloth, shall be dis-
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to wet dry cleaning shall be reported
the actual rating “fair” or “poor”) of the change of test specimen or staining
of specific fibers of the color transfer cloth, shall be distinguished and
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A machine and accessories of the type described may be purchased
from Atlas Electric Devices Co., 4114 No. Ravenswood Ave., Chicago, IL
60613.
7.2 A multifiber test cloth (color transfer cloth) may be obtained from
Testfabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave., Middlesex, N.J 08846.
7.3 Perchloroethylene is toxic by inhalation, by prolonged or repeated
contact with the skin or mucous membrane, or when ingested by mouth. The
liquid can cause injuries to the eyes. However, with proper precautions it
can be handled safely.
FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191.A

METHOD 5622
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO WET DRY CLEANING OF TEXTILE
MATERIALS; PETROLEUM SOLVENT
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the colorfastness of textile materials
to wet dry cleaning with petroleum solvent.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
when a standard sample has been established, the required specimens from the
sample unit of the material to be tested and one specimen from the standard
sample shall be as follows:
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing and braid. Sufficient amount
of material so held together to form a unit weighing not less than 1 g nor
more than 3 g.
when a standard sample has not been established the required specimens from the
sample unit of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.1.1 or
2.1.2. One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of the
material to be tested, and shall be retained, untested, for comparison. All
specimens shall be taken from adjacent areas of the sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Launder-Ometer. A Launder-Ometer or similar machine having a metal
(127 mm) in length by 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter with their bases toward a
horizontal shaft 2 inches (51 mm) away from the center of rotation. The shaft
shall rotate at a speed of 40 to 45 rpm. Each container shall be equipped with
a sealing device having solvent resistant rings. An equal number of stainless
steel containers shall be fastened on opposite sides of the rotation shaft in
order to maintain balanced and smooth rotation during the test. The Launder-
Ometer or similar machine shall be maintained at a temperature of 81° ± 4°F
(27° ±2°C) (see 7.1).

METHOD 5622
302°F (135° to 150°C).
4.1.3 Extractor. A centrifugal extractor of the laundry type with a per-
forated basket approximately 11 inches (280 mm) deep by 17 inches (432 mm) in
diameter with an operating speed of approximately 1500 rpm.
4.1.4 Muslin covered frame or screen suitable for drying specimen at room
temperature.
4.1.5 Cheesecloth.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Dry cleaning solvent. The dry cleaning solvent shall conform to the
requirements of type I of P-D-680, Dry Cleaning Solvent.
solution shall be pouted slowly with constant stirring into a mixture of 250 ml
of oleic acid, 724 ml of dry cleaning solvent and 105 ml of cyclohexanol.
4.2.3 Cleaning solution. The cleaning solution is prepared by mixing together
950 parts by volume of dry cleaning solvent and 50 parts of dry cleaning soap.
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 All specimens shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Atmospheric
Conditions in accordance with Section 4 of this Standard.
specimen of the standard sample shall be wet dry cleaned at the same time and
5.3 No standard sample. When a standard smaple has not been established, one
specimen from each sample unit to be tested shall be retained, untested, for
comparison.
FED. TEST METHOD STED. NO. 191A

METHOD 5622
5.4 The conditioned specimen shall be placed in a stainless steel container
together with an amount of cleaning solution equal to fifty times the total con-
ditioned weight of the specimen and agitated for 20 minutes in the Launder-Ometer
or similar machine at a temperature of 81 ± 4° (27° ± 2°C).
5.4.1 The solution shall be poured out and replaced by an equal volume of fresh
dry cleaning solvent without soap and alcohol added and agitated again for 20
minutes in the Launder-Ometer or similar machine at 81° ± 4°F (27° ± 2°C).
5.4.2 The solution shall be poured out and replaced by fresh dry cleaning solvent
and agitated for another period of 20 minutes at 81° ± 4°F (27° ± 2°C).
5.5 The specimen shall be removed from the continer, extracted to remove excess
solvent, then laid on a horizontal surface such as a muslin covered frame Or a screen
and allowed to air dry at room temperature.
5.6 When dry, the specimen shall be pressed as follows:
5.6.1 Standard method. The specimen shall be laid out on the bed of a flat-bed
steam press. The head of the press shall be lowered and held in contact with the
specimen and steam shall be admitted from the back of the press for 5 to 10 seconds.
5.6.2 Alternate method. The specimen shall be laid on a padded ironing board.
Cover with two layers of cheesecloth on which is placed a damp press cloth which has
been saturated with water and wrung out so as to retain a moisture content equal
to approximately 75 percent of its dry weight, followed by two more thicknesses
of cheesecloth and pressed with a hand iron.
(135° to 150°C).
5.7 After pressing by either one of the above methods, the specimen shall be
allowed to cool on a smooth horizontal surface for 4 hours at room temperature
before evaluating.
5.8 Evaluation.
5.8.1 Evaluation shall be conducted in accordaace with Method 9010.
5.8.2 The color change of the test specimen shall be evaluated to determine the
colorfastness to wet dry cleaning.
5.8.3 Standard sample. The color change exhibited by the tested specimen when
compared to the untested specimen retained shall be evaluated against the color
change exhibited by the tested standard when compared to the untested standard
retained.

METHOD 5622
5.8.3.1 Specimen.
evaluation of the test specimen shall be rated as follows:
comparison shall be rated as:
“Appreciable change in color” means a change that is immediately noticeable in
comparing the test specimen with the original sample for comparison. If closer
inspection or a change in angle of light is required to make apparent a slight
change in color, the change is not considered appreciable.
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to wet dry cleaning shall be reported as
“pass” or “fail” compared with the standard sample. If the test specimen
shows failure when compared to comparable material of the standard sample, the
specimen shall be reported as failing. When failure is reported, the severest
departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change of the test
specimen shall be distinguished and reported.
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to wet dry cleaning shall be reported
as “pass” or “fall” when the test specimen is evaluated and rated in accordance
with the adjective ratings of 5.8.4. Failure of the test specimen to meet the
reported as failure. When failure is reported, the severest departure (i.e.
the actual rating “fair” or “poor”), of the change of the test specimen shall be
7. NOTES
7.1 A machine and accessories of the type described may be purchased from Atlas
Electric Devices Company, 4114 N. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 60613.

METHOD 5630
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS TO WATER
1. SCOPE
materials to cold water. It is applicable to dyed, printed or otherwise
colored textiles of all kinds.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
when a standard sample has been established, the required specimens from each
sample unit of the material to be tested and one specimen from the standard sample
2.1.1 Cloth. A square of cloth 2-1/2 inches by 2-1/2 inches (64 mm by 64 mm).
2.1.2 Fibers, yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing and braid. Sufficient
amount of the applicable material that can be arranged to form a square 2-1/2 inches
by 2-1/2 inches (64 mm by 64 mm). When evaluating narrow width material such as
ribbon, tape, or webbing sufficient material shall be used so that the complete
area of the transfer cloth will be in full contact with the test specimen.
when a standard sample has not been established, the required specimens from each
sample unit of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.1.1 or 2.1.2.
One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of the material to be
tested, and shall be retained, untested, for comparison. All specimens shall
be taken from adjacent areas of the sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Perspirometer or equivalent apparatus.
4.1.1.1 The perspirometer is a testing device capable of maintaining uniform
pressure on the test specimen located between two glass plates or acrylic plates,
3 inches by 2-1/2 inches by 1/4 inch (76 mm by 64 mm by 6 mm) (see 7.1).

METHOD 5630
4.1.1.2 Either of the following two perspirometer models is permissible.
4.1.1.2.1 The pressure is obtained in one model by adding weights, with the
plates being stacked vertically until the pressure is adjusted. When the
required pressure is reached, the pressure plate is locked, the weights removed
and the unit placed in the oven so that the plates and specimens are vertical.
4.1.1.2.2 The pressure in the second model is obtained by means of adjusting
screw, the movable plate being made to exert increasing pressure against the
test specimens until the required force is reached as indicated on the scale.
The specimen unit is locked at this point, the assembly removed from the section
applying the pressure and placed in the oven so that the plates and specimens
are vertical.
4.1.2 Wringer. A wringer of the household type equipped with smooth rubber
rolls 2-1/8 inches to 2-1/2 inches (54 mm to 64 mm) in diameter and not less
than 11 inches (280 mm) nor more than 16 inches (406 mm) in length. The rubber
rolls shall have a Shore durometer hardness of 70 to 80 (A Scale). The load
exerted on the specimen shall be applied uniformly by means of attaching the
weight, and the weight itself shall be such that the specimen wet weight shall
be approximately 2-1/2 times its dry weight.
4.1.3 Oven. A circulating-air oven capable of maintaining the required
4.1.4 Hand-iron. A hand-iron weighing approximately
0
6 pounds (2.7 kg) and
4.1.5 Color transfer cloth. A test cloth with a 6-fiber repeat made up of
equal bars of acetate, cotton, nylon 66, polyester (polyethylene terephthalate)
acrylic, and wool. Each 6-fiber repeat shall measure approximately 2 inches
(51 mm) and shall be separated by a waste filling stripe (see 7.2).
4.1.6 White thread.
4.1.7 Bleached, desized, cotton cloth. (see 7.2)
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Distilled water. Distilled water shall be boiled for 30 minutes and cooled
to room temperature before testing.
4.3 Method cited.

METHOD 5630
5. PROCEDURE
of the standard sample shall be tested at the same time and under the same con-
ditions as the specimen of the material being tested.
5.2 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established, one
comparison.
5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document a 2-inch (51 mm) square
of the 6-fiber color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white thread to one corner
of the test specimen or may be attached by some other suitable means. A 2-inch
(51 mm) square of the color transfer cloth shall also be attached to one corner
of the specimen from the standard sample when it is used for comparison.
5.4 One specimen assembly (see 5.3) shall be immersed in the distilled water
at 82° ± 9°F (28° ± 5°C) and allowed to soak 30 minutes with occasional stirring.
Care shall be taken to insure that the assembly is thoroughly wetted.
5.5 The test assembly shall be removed from the distilled water and passed flat
through the wringer to remove excess water so that the wet weight of the assembly
shall be approximately 2-1/2 times its dry weight.
5.6 The test assembly shall then be placed between glass plates or acrylic
plates, the color transfer cloth in full contact with the specimen and inserted in
the perspirometer. The perspirometer shall be adjusted to produce a pressure of
10 pounds (44.5 N) on the specimen assembly.
5.7 The loaded test plate assembly shall be placed in the oven for a minimum of
2 hours and the temperature of the oven maintained at 100° ± 4°F (38° ± 2°C).
5.8 The specimen assemblies shall be removed from the test plates at the end of
the 2 hour period. The specimen and transfer cloth shall be separated and dried out
of contact with each other by pressing between clean white cotton cloths with a
hand-iron at a temperature of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C).
5.9 Evaluation.
5.9.2 The color change of the test specimen and the staining of the color transfer
cloth shall be evaluated separately to determine the colorfastness to water.
both nylon and polyester). When dyed fabric or systems of unknown fiber combinations
are involved, evaluate the total staining on all bars of the transfer cloth. The
degree of stain shall be recorded for each individual stripe.

METHOD 5630
retained. Unless otherwise specified, the staining of the color transfer cloth
of the specimen shall be evaluated against the staining of the color transfer
cloth of the standard.
5.9.4.1 Specimen.

sample.
evaluation of the test specimen for change in color and staining by its attached
color transfer cloth shall be rated as follows:
5.9.5.1 Test specimen when compared to the specimen retained, untested, for
comparison and color transfer cloth evaluated according to the degree of staining
shall be rated as:

staining.
staining.

comparing the test specimen with the original sample for comparison. If closer
inspection or a change of angle of light is required to make apparent a slight
change of color, the change is not considered appreciable.
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to water shall be reported as “pass”

or “fall” when compared with the standard sample. If either test specimen or
the transfer cloth of the test specimen shows failure when compared to comparable
material of the standard sample the specimen shall be reported as failing. When
failure is reported the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating “fair” or
“poor”), of the change of the test specimen or staining of specific fibers of the
color transfer cloth, shall be distinguished and reported.

METHOD 5630
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to water shall be reported as “pass”
or “fall” when the test specimen and color transfer cloth are evaluated and
rated in accordance with the adjective ratings of 5.9.5. Failure of either the
test specimen or the color transfer cloth to meet the adjective ratings specified
in the applicable procurement document shall be reported as failure. When failure
is reported the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating “fair” or “poor”), of
the change of test specimen or staining of specific fibers of the color transfer
cloth, shall be distinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The perspirometers described may be purchased from Orange Machine and
Manufacturing Company, 1503 Bay Avenue, Point Pleasant, NJ 08742, or Atlas
Electric Devices Company, 4114 N. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 60613.
7.2 Multifiber test cloths (color transfer cloth) and cotton cloth may be
NJ 08846.

METHOD 5632
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS TO SALT WATER AND SOAP
1. SCOPE
materials to salt water and soap.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
sample unit of material being tested and one specimen from the standard sample
shall be as follows.
2.1.1 Cloth. A rectangle approximately 2 inches by 4 tithes (51 mm by 102 mm).
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing and braid. Sufficient
amount of the applicable material that can be arranged to form a rectangle
when a standard sample has not been established, the required specimens from the
sample unit of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.1.1 and 2.1.2.
One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of the material to be
tested and shall be retained, untested, for comparison. All specimens shall be
taken from adjacent areas of the sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Beaker. Approximately 100 ml capacity.
4.1.2 Hand-iron. A hand-iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg) and
acrylic and wool. Each 6-fiber repeat shall measure approximately 2 inches (51 mm)
and shall be separated by a waste filling stripe (see 7.1).

METHOD 5632
4.1.4 White thread.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Sodium chloride (NaCl).
4.2.2 Magnesium chloride, anhydrous (Mg Cl2).
4.2.3 Soap. The soap shall conform to P-S-617, Soap, Toilet (For Soft and Hard
Water Use).
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
of the standard sample shall be tested at the same time and under the same con-
ditions as the specimen of the material being tested.
comparison.
5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, a 2 inch (51 mm)
square of the 6-fiber color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white thread to
one corner of the test specimen or may be attached by some other suitable means.
A 2-inch (51 mm) square of the color transfer cloth shall also be attached to one
corner of the specimen from the standard sample when it is used for comparison.
5.4 The specimen assembly shall then be immersed for one hour at room
temperature in a solution containing 3 percent sodium chloride, 0.5 percent
magnesium chloride and 1 percent soap with occasional agitation.
5.5 The specimen assembly shall then be removed from the solution and the
specimen separated from the color transfer cloth and dried out of contact with
each other by pressing between clean white cotton cloths with a hand-iron at
a temperature of 275° to 302°F (135° to 150°C).
5.6 Evaluation.

METHOD 5632
transfer cloth shall be evaluated separately to determine the colorfastness to
salt water and soap.
cloth l The degree of stain shall be recorded for each individual stripe.
retained. Unless otherwise specified, the staining of the color transfer cloth of
the specimen shall be evaluated against the staining of the color transfer cloth
of the standard.
5.6.4.1 Specimen.
Pass : Color change equal to or less than that of the standard
sample.
Pass: Staining equal to or less than that attached to the
standard sample.
Fail: Staining greater than that attached to the standard
sample.
evaluation of the test specimen for change in color and staining by its attached
color transfer cloth shall be rated as follows:
shall be rated as:
staining.

METHOD 5632
staining.
in comparing the test specimen with the original sample for comparison. If closer
change of color, the change is not considered appreciable.
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to salt water and soap shall be reported
as “pass” or “fail” when compared with the standard sample. If either the test
specimen or the transfer cloth of the test specimen shows failure when compared
to comparable material of the standard sample, the specimen shall be reported as
failing. When failure is reported the severest departure (I.e. the actual rating
“fair” or “poor”), of the change of the test specimen or staining of specific
fibers of the color transfer cloth, shall be distinguished and reported.
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to salt water and soap shall be reported
as “pass” or “fail” when the test specimen and color transfer cloth are evaluated
and rated in accordance with the adjective ratings of 5.6.5. Failure of either
the test specimen or the color transfer cloth to meet the adjective rating specified
in the applicable procurement document shall be reported as failure. When failure
is reported, the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating “fair” or “poor”), of
the change of test specimen or staining of specific fibers of the color transfer
7. NOTES
obtained from Test Fabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave., Middlesex,
NJ 08846.

METHOD 5640
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS TO DRY AND
WET HEAT (HOT PRESSING)
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the colorfastness of textiles when
subjected to a normal dry or wet pressing procedure.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Standard sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, when
a standard sample has been established, the required specimens from the sample unit
of the material to be tested and one specimen from the standard sample shall be as
follows:
2.1.2 Yarn. A suitable amount of yarn so held together to form a unit for
testing.
sample unit of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.1.1 or 2.1.2.
One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of material to be tested
and retained, untested, for comparison. All specimens shall be taken from adjacent
areas of the sample unit.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document one specimen (separate
specimen) shall be tested for each required characteristic from each sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Hand-iron. A hand-iron weighing approximately 6 pounds (2.7 kg) and capable
of maintaining a temperature from 221° to 455°F (105° to 235°C) (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Pressing pad. Pad for pressing, permeable to steam.
4.1.3 Extractor. A centrifugal extractor of the laundry type with a perforated
basket approximately 11 inches (280 mm) deep by 17 inches (432 mm) in diameter, with
an operating speed of approximately 1500 rpm.

METHOD 5640
4.1.4 Color transfer cloth.
2
White cotton color transfer cloth 4 to 5 ounces per
square yard (136 to 170 g/m ). The transfer cloth shall be of the same dimension
or slightly larger than the specimen being tested.
4.1.5 A.A.T.C.C. Chromatic Transference Scale. This scale is to be used for
evaluation in accordance with method B when specified. (see 7.2).
4.1.6 Time indicator. Stop watch or other timing device which will indicate the
time in seconds.
4.2 Reagent.
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established a specimen
from the standard sample shall be pressed at the same time and under the same
comparison.
5.3 Pressing temperatures. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document the pressing temperatures shall be as follows:
248° to 275°F (120° to 135°C) - Acetate, Modacrylic, Vinyl.
302° to 329°F (150° to 165°C) - Acrylic, Polyamide, Olefin.
347° to 344°F (175° to 190°C) - Polyester, Wool.
362° to 389°F (200° to 215°C) - Aromatic Polyamide, Cotton, Linen.
5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, all specimens to
be tested shall be conditioned in accordance with Section 4 of this standard.
When required all specimens shall be cooled to room temperature at Standard
Atmospheric Conditions.
5.5 Color change (dry pressing).
5.5.1 The specimen shall be placed on a pressing pad, then the hand-iron set at
the required temperature (see 5.3), shall be placed on the specimen and allowed
to remain for 10 seconds.

METHOD 5640
5.5.2 The specimen shall be allowed to cool to room temperature for 2 hours
before evaluating.
5.6 Color transfer (dry pressing).
5.6.1 The specimen shall be placed on the pressing pad and covered with a
dry white color transfer cloth then the hand-iron set at the required temperature
(see 5.3), shall be placed on both and allowed to remain for 10 seconds.
5.6.2 The specimen and the white color transfer cloth shall be allowed to cool
to room temperature for 2 hours before evaluating.
5.7 Color transfer (wet pressing)o
5.7.1 The specimen and the white color transfer cloth shall be throughly wet
out in distilled water at room temperature and the excess water removed by
centrifuge extraction.
5.7.2 Immediately after removing the excess water the specimen shall be placed
on the pressing pad and covered with the moistened white color transfer cloth, then
the hand-iron set at the required temperature (see 5.3), shall be placed on both and
allowed to remain for 10 seconds.
5.7.3 The specimen and the white color transfer cloth shall be allowed to cool
to room temperature for 2 hours before evaluating.
5.8 Evaluation.
transfer cloth shall be evaluated separately to determine the colorfastness to hot
pressing (dry and wet).
5.8.3 Color change (dry and wet pressing).
5.8.3.1 Standard sample. The color change exhibited by the tested specimen when
retained. Unless otherwise specified, the staining of the color transfer cloth
of the specimen shall be evaluated against the staining of the color transfer
5.8.3.1.1. Specimen.
sample.
Fail: Color change. greater than that of the standard sample.

METHOD 5640
5.8.3.1.2 Color transfer cloth.
Pass: Staining equal to or less than that of the standard
sample.
Fail: Staining greater than that of the standard sample.
5.8.3.2 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established,
the test specimen shall be compared to the untested specimen retained for
comparison and shall be rated as follows:
Excellent: No perceptible change in color.
the staining of the white color transfer cloth shall be rated in accordance with
Method A or Method B, whichever is specified in the procurement document.
5.8.3.3.1 Method A, direct comparison. Any staining of the white color
transfer cloth shall be compared to clean, unstained, white color transfer cloth
and rated as follows:
Excellent: No perceptible staining.
Good: Perceptible but no appreciable staining.
Fair: Appreciable but no objectionable staining.
Poor: Considerable and objectionable staining.
“Appreciable change in color or staining” means a change in color or staining
that is immediately noticeable in comparing the test specimen or white color
transfer cloth with a sample of the original material. If closer inspection or
a change of angle of light is required to make more apparent a slight change
in color or staining, the change of color or staining is not considered appreciable.
5.8.3.3.2 Method B, A.A.T.C.C. Chromatic Transference Scale. Any staining of
the white color transfer cloth shall be compared with the A.A.T.C.C. chromatic
Transference Scale and rated as follows:
Excellent: Staining rated numerically greater than 3.5.
Good : Staining rated numerically greater than 2.5.
Fair: Staining rated numerically greater than 1.5.
Poor: Staining rated numerically less than 1.5.
During the evaluation, the white color transfer cloth shall be backed by 3
layers of clean unstained white color transfer cloth.

METHOD 5640
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample.
6.1.1 Colorfastness (color change) to dry pressing shall be reported as “pass”
or “fail” when the test specimen is compared to the standard sample. If the test
specimen shows failure when compared to comparable material of the standard sample,
the specimen shall be reported as failing.
6.1.2 Colorfastness (color transfer) to dry and wet pressing shall be reported
as “pass” or “fail” when the white color transfer cloth from the test specimen
is compared with the white color transfer cloth from the standard sample. If
the white color transfer cloth shows failure when compared to comparable material
of the standard sample, the white color transfer cloth shall be reported as
failing.
6.1.3 When failure is reported, the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating,
“fair” or “poor”), of the test specimens or staining of the white color transfer
6.2.1 Colorfastness (color change) to dry pressing shall be reported as “pass”
or “fail” when the test specimen is compared with the untested specimen and rated
in accordance with the adjective ratings of 5.8.3.2 Failure of the test specimen
to meet the adjective rating specified in the applicable procurement document
shall be reported as failing.
6.2.2 Colorfastness (color transfer) to dry and wet pressing shall be reported
as “pass” when the color transfer cloth is evaluated and rated in accordance with
Methods A or B (5.8.3.3) whichever is required in the procurement document. Failure
of the white color transfer cloth to meet the adjective rating specified in the
applicable procurement document shall be reported as failing.
“fair” or “poor”), of the test specimen or staining of the white color transfer
7. NOTES
7.1 Weights should be added if the weight of the hand iron is less than
6 pounds (2.7 kg).
7.2 A.A.T.C.C. Chromatic Transference Scale may be purchased from: American
Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists, P.O. Box 12215, Research
Triangle Park, NC 27709.

METHOD 5642
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS TO

DRY HEAT (SUBLIMATION)
1. SCOPE
materials to dry heat.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1.1 Cloth. A rectangle of cloth 2 by 4 inches (51 by 102 mm).
2.1.2 Yarn and thread. Not less than 1 g and not more than 3 g of yarn so
held together as to form a unit for testing.
2.1.3 Tapes, braids and narrow fabrics. A rectangle of the specimen 2 by 4
inches (51 by 102 mm). When the full width of the specimen is not 2 inches (51 mm)
several lengths of the material shall be placed adjacent and parallel.
when a standard sample has not been established, the required specimens from
the sample unit of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.1.1, 2.1.2
or 2.1.3. One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of material
to be tested and shall be retained, untested, for comparison. All specimens shall
be taken from adjacent areas of the sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Heating arrangement providing even heat transfer by close contact to both
sides of the specimen. This device shall be capable of maintaining selected
temperatures within a tolerance of ± 6°F (± 3°C) in the range of 300° through
426°F (149° through 219°C) and of maintaining sufficient pressure on the
composite specimen to assure intimate contact between the test specimen and
the heating medium (see 7.1).

METHOD 5642
4.2 Color transfer cloth. Two pieces of Multifiber Test Fabric No. 10 consisting
of acetate, cotton, nylon 66, polyester (polyethylene terephthalate), acrylic and
wool (see 7.2).
4.3 Time indicator. Stop watch or other timing device which will indicate the
time in seconds.
4.4 Gray Scale for Staining (see 7.3).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established a specimen
from the standard shall be subjected to the same conditions of testing as the
specimen of the material being tested.
comparison.
5.3 Preparation of specimen. Place the specimen between the two pieces of
the Multifiber Test Fabric No. 10 measuring 2 by 4 inches (51 by 102 mm), so
that the specimen will be in contact with all the bands of the test cloth, to
form a composite specimen.
5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, place the composite
specimen in the heating device for thirty seconds at the specified temperature.
5.4.1 One or more of the following temperatures shall be used to perform the
test. The applicable procurement document shall specify the proper temperature
or temperatures for that material.
1. 300° ± 6°F (149° ± 3°C)
2. 325° ± 6°F (163° ± 3°C)
3. 351° ± 6°F (177° ± 3°c)
4. 376° ± 6°F (191° ± 3°C)
5. 401° ± 6°F (205° ± 3°C)
6. 426° ± 6°F (219° ± 3°C)
5.5 Remove the composite specimen from the heating device and separate components
for evaluation.
5.6 Evaluation.
transfer cloth shall be evaluated separately to determine the colorfastness to
dry heat.

METHOD 5642
5.6.2 Color change.
5.6.2.1 Standard sample. The color change exhibited by the tested specimen
when compared to the untested specimen retained shall be evaluated against the
standard retained. Unless otherwise specified, the staining of the color transfer
cloth of the specimen shall be evaluated against the staining of the color transfer
sample.
the test specimen shall be compared to the untested specimen retained for
comparison and shall be rated as follows:
5.6.3 Color transfer.
5.6.3.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, the
color transfer cloth from the specimen shall be compared with the color transfer
cloth from the standard sample and rated as follows:
Pass: Staining equal to or less than that of the standard sample.
Fail: Staining greater than that of the standard sample.
5.6.3.2 When a standard sample has not been established the test color transfer
cloth shall be compared with the Gray Scale for Staining and rated as follows:
Excellent: Staining rated numerically greater than 4.5.
Good: Staining rated numerically greater than 3.5.
Fair: Staining rated numerically greater than 2.5.
Poor: Staining rated numerically less than 2.5.
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample.
6.1.1 Colorfastness (color change) to dry heat shall be reported as “pass” or
“fail” when the test specimen is compared to the standard sample.

METHOD 5642
6.1.2 Colorfastness (staining) to dry heat shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”
when the color transfer cloth from the test specimen is compared with the color
transfer cloth from the standard sample.
6.1.3 When failure is reported, the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating
“fair” or “poor”), of the change of the test specimen or staining of specific fibers
of the color transfer cloth, shall be distinguished and reported.
6.2.1 Colorfastness (color change) to dry heat shall be reported as “pass” or
“fail” when the test specimen is compared with the untested specimen and rated in
accordance with the adjective ratings of 5.6.2.2.
6.2.2 Colorfastness (staining) to dry heat shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”
when the color transfer cloth is rated in accordance with the adjective ratings of
5.6.3.2.
“fair” or “poor”), of the change of test specimen or staining of specific fibers
of the color transfer cloth, shall be distinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The apparatus described (Scorch Tester) may be obtained from the Atlas
Electric Devices Co., 4114 N. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 60613.
7.2 The Multifiber Test Fabric No. 10 (color transfer cloth) may be obtained
from Testfabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave., Middlesex, NJ 08846.
7.3 Gray Scale for Staining may be obtained from the American Association of
Textile Chemists and Colorists, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.

METHOD 5651
July 20, 1978
CROCKING OF WOVEN AND KNITTED CLOTH; STANDARD SAMPLE;

MUNSELL SCALE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of woven or knitted
cloth to crocking. Crocking in this case refers to the transfer of coloring
matter from one cloth to another cloth with which it may come in contact. This
method is applicable to cloth of all fibers whether dyed, printed, impregnated, or
otherwise colored. The method is particularly applicable to cloth of solid color,
although variegated cloth may be tested if the colored area is of sufficient
size. The method also includes provisions for testing the crocking of white or
light functionally finished cloths against dark colored cloth when required by
the cloth specification. Wet and dry crocking may be determined by this method.
Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, both wet and dry
crocking are considered in rating the resistance to crocking as determined by
this method.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1.1 Cloth. Unless otherwise specified, the specimen shall be a rectangle of
cloth 8 inches by 4 inches (203 mm by 102 mm). The long dimension shall be
parallel to the warp.
2.1.2 Tapes and laces. For narrow tapes and laces, the specimen shall be held
in the test position by any suitable means. For example, lace may be attached
firmly to a piece of white cotton cloth. When the individual item is too
narrow for the size of the crocking finger, specimens of the material shall
be laid adjacent and closely packed so that the full crocking area of the
finger is covered.
when a standard sample has not been established, the required specimen from the
One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of material to be
tested and retained, untested, for comparison. All specimens shall be taken from
adjacent areas of the sample unit.

METHOD 5651
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Crockmeter. A crockmeter consisting of a wooden base or equivalent, upon
which a sliding arm operated by a crank shall be fixed in such a manner as to
slide back and forth in a straight line with a stroke of 4 inches (102 mm).
The arm shall have a flat-ended-cylindrical finger, 5/8 inch (16 mm) in diameter.
which shall exert a total force of 2 pounds (9 N) on the cloth clamped to
the base (see 7.1).
4.2 Color transfer cloth.
4.2.1 White. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document the
color transfer cloth shall be a bleached, desized, 80 by 84 (32 by 33 yarns/cm)
combed yarn cotton lawn cloth, and cut into 2-inch (51 mm) squares. The cloth
shall contain no bluing or optical bleach (see 7.4).
4.2.2 Blue. When specified, the color transfer cloth shall be vat dyed,
80 by 84 (32 by 33 yarns/cm) combed yarn cotton lawn cloth, Blue 186, and cut
into 2-inch (51 mm) squares (see 7.5).
4.3 Evaluation scales.
4.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, one of the
following evaluation scales shall be provided.
4.3.1.1 Munsell Neutral Value Scale. Munsell Neutral Value Scale (1 to 9),
for use in evaluating fire, weather, and water resistant cloths or similarly
impregnated cloth (see 7.3).
4.3.1.2 Munsell Color Chips. Munsell Color Chips of hues red, yellow, green,
blue and purple, in values 6 to 9 with 2 steps of chroma, for use in evaluating
dyed cloths (see 7.3).
4.3.1.3 A.A.T.C.C. Color Transference Chart. (See 7.6)
4.4 Wringer. A household type wringer equipped with smooth rubber squeeze
rolls 2-1/8 to 2-1/2 inches (54 mm to 64 mm) in diameter and not less than
11 inches (279 mm) or more than 16 inches (406 mm) long. The rubber rolls shall
have a Shore durometer hardness of 70 to 80 (A scale). The load exerted on the
specimen shall be applied uniformly by means of a dead weight attached to the
top roller. The total load of the roller, means of attaching the weight,
and the weight itself shall be 60 pounds (27 kg). The rolls shall be power
driven at such a speed that the specimen shall pass through the rolls at
the rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per second.
4.5 A spiral clip or other device for holding the crock cloth tight over
the flat end of the cylindrical finger.

METHOD 5651
4.6 Distilled water. Distilled water for wetting the crock cloth for wet
crocking.
4.7 Blotting paper. The blotting paper dimensions shall be 4 inches by
8 inches (102 mm by 203 mm) (see 7.2).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established for color-
fastness to crocking, Method A shall be used for evaluating the resistance
to crocking (see 5.5).
Method B shall be used for evaluating the resistance to crocking.
5.2 When a standard or comparison sample has been established, a specimen
from the standard or comparison sample shall be tested under the same conditions
as the specimen undergoing the test.
5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the face of the
cloth shall be against the finger of the crockmeter. In the case of coated
cloths, the coated side shall be against the finger of the crockmeter.
5.4 Dry crocking.
5.4.1 The specimen and the “dry” crock cloth shall be brought to moisture
equilibrium under standard conditions, in accordance with Section 4 of this
standard.
5.4.2 The specimen shall be placed on the abrasive cloth-covered base of
the crockmeter so that the finger contacts the specimen about 1 inch (25 mm)
from the 8-inch (203 mm) warp edge of the specimen.
5.4.3 The finger with the cloth attached shall be placed on the surface
of the specimen and moved back and forth on the specimen at the approximate
rate of 1 cycle per second. Ten cycles (20 strokes) shall constitute the
test.
5.5 Wet crocking.
5.5.1 The test shall be repeated on an area adjacent to the previous test
using a new crock cloth “wet” with distilled water. For wetting, the crock
cloth shall be completely saturated and squeezed to remove excess water, placed
between 2 sheets of blotting paper and passed through the wringer. The moisture
pickup shall be 65 ± 5 percent based on the conditioned weight of the crock
cloth. The crock test shall be performed immediately after wringing.

METHOD 5651
5.6 Evaluation. Staining of the dry and wet crock cloths shall be
considered in rating the resistance to crocking.
5.6.1 Method A, standard sample. The “crock” obtained from the test
specimen shall be compared with the “crock” obtained in testing the specimen
from the standard sample and rated as follows:
Pass: Equal or superior to the standard sample in resistance
to crocking.
Fail: Inferior to the standard sample in resistance to crocking.
5.6.2 Method B, no standard sample. The coloration imparted to the test
crock cloth as a result of contact with the test specimen shall be compared
with the Munsell Neutral Value Chips or Munsell Color Chips as required, or
A.A.T.C.C. Color Transference Chart, and unless otherwise specified (see 6.4)
evaluated as follows:
5.6.2.1 When white crock cloth is required.
Excellent: No perceptible staining of the white crock cloth.
Good: Slight staining of the white crock cloth. Not to be
numerically lower than Munsell Value 8.5.
Fair: Appreciable, but not objectionable, staining of the
white crock cloth. Not to be numerically lower than
Munsell Value 6.5.
Poor: Objectionable staining of white crock cloth, numeri-
cally lower than Munsell Value 6.5.
5.6.2.2 When blue crock cloth is required.
Excellent: No perceptible staining of the blue crock cloth.
Good : Slight staining of the blue crock cloth. Not to be
numerically higher than Munsell Value 4.5.
Fair: Appreciable, but not objectionable, staining of the
blue crock cloth. Not to be numerically higher
than Munsell Value 6.5.
Poor: Objectionable staining of the blue crock cloth. During
evaluation, the crock cloth of the test specimen (dried
in atmospheric conditions in the case of the wet test)
should be backed by 3 layers of the crock cloth.
“Appreciable change in color” means a change which is immediately noticeable
in comparing the tested specimen with the original comparison specimen. If
closer inspection or a change of angle of light la required to make apparent
METHOD 5651
6. REPORT
resistance to crocking shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”.
the resistance to crocking shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”, unless
otherwise specified in the procurement document. When failure is reported,
the adjective rating, “good”, “fair”, or “poor”, shall also be reported.
6.3 When specified in the procurement document, the resistance to crock-
ing shall be reported as the value nearest to one of the Munsell Values
(4.3.1.1 and 4.3.1.2).
6.4 The dry and wet crocking resistance of each sample unit shall be
reported separately.
7. NOTES
7.1 The crockmeter may be purchased from the Executive Secretary,
A.A.T.C.C. National Headquarters, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park,
NC 27709, and Atlas Electric Devices Co, 4114 North Ravenswood Ave.,
Chicago, IL 60613.
P.O. Box 2218
Richmond, VA 23217
7.3 The Munsell Neutral Value Scale and the Munsell Color Chips may be
purchased from the Munsell Color Co., 2441 North Calvert St., Baltimore, MD 21218.
7.4 The white crock cloth which meets the requirements of this method may
be purchased from TestFabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave.,
Middlesex, NJ 08846.
7.5 The blue crock cloth may be obtained from the Defense Personnel Support
Center, 2800 South 20th Street, Philadelphia, PA 19191.
7.6 The Color Transference Chart may also be purchased from A.A.T.C.C.
National Headquarters.

METHOD 5660
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO LIGHT OF TEXTILE MATERIALS;

ACCELERATED METHOD
1. SCOPE
materials to light in a Carbon-Arc Fading apparatus.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
when a standard sample has been established and the length of time of exposure
has been specified, one specimen from each sample unit of the material to be
tested, and one specimen from the standard sample shall be as specified in
2.2.1 through 2.2.3.
2.1.1 When a standard sample has been established and length of time of
exposure has not been specified, two specimens from each sample unit and two
specimens from the standard sample shall be taken for testing.
2.2 The specimens for testing shall be as follows:
2.2.1 Cloth. A rectangle of cloth measuring 2-1/2 inches by 3 inches
(64 mm by 76 mm) with the long dimension parallel to the warp direction.
2.2.2 Textile fibers. Fibers will be made into pads forming a rectangle
measuring 2-1/2 inches by 3 inches (64 mm by 76 mm).
2.2.3 Yarns, threads, light cordage, tapes and webbing. Yarns, threads,
light cordage, tapes and webbing shall be wound on white cards forming a
rectangle 2-1/2 inches by 3 inches (64 mm by 76 mm) with the long dimension
lengthwise of the materials being tested.
2.3 No standard sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document
when a standard sample has not been established, one specimen from each sample
unit of the material to be tested shall be selected as in 2.1.
2.4 When more than one specimen is taken from a sample unit for testing, the
specimens will be taken from adjacent material in the sample unit.
be tested from each sample unit (see 5.2.4.3 for an exception).

METHOD 5660
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Carbon-arc lamp fading apparatus (see 7.4). The carbon-arc lamp fading
apparatus shall conform to the following:
4.1.1.1 Vertical carbon-arc assembly mounted at the center of a vertical
cylindrical framework.
4.1.1.2 The electrodes shall be carbon, one solid, 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter
and one cored 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter, placed in the machine in the manner
described in the operating instructions. If the carbons, as obtained from
the supplier, tend to bind they should be ground with garnet paper so that
they move freely in the machine and do not bind.
4.1.1.3 The arc shall be operated at 15 to 17 amperes 60-cycle alternating
current with an arc voltage of 135 to 145 volts and a line voltage of 208 to
250 volts.
4.1.2 Clear glass globe of No. 9200 Pyrex, or equal, for enclosing the arc.
4.1.3 Cylindrical framework provided with specimen holders in which the
specimen is suspended vertically and normally to radiation from the arc with
the specimen at a radial distance of 10 inches (254 mm) from the center of
the arc with no part over 5 inches (127 mm) above or below the arc.
4.1.3.1 The framework shall revolve 1 to 4 revolutions per minute about
the arc.
4.1.4 The black panel thermometer unit shall consist of 20 gage stainless
steel panel, 2-3/4 by 5-7/8 inches (70 to 150 mm) to which is fastened a stain-
less steel bimetallic did-type thermometer. The face of the panel with the
thermometer is at the same distance from the arc as the surface of the specimen.
4.1.5 Chamber temperature shall be controlled by regulating the temperature of
a constant volume of air flowing across the specimens. An atomizing unit shall
control the addition of moisture to the air prior to its entry into the test
chamber in such manner that the relative humidity within the test chamber may be
controlled within + 5 percent in the range of 30 percent to 50 percent. Black
panel temperature shall be maintained at 145° ± 6°F (63° ± 3°C).
4.2 Determination of Standard Fading Hours. Standard Light-Sensitive Paper
for determining the fading rate of the fading apparatus. The Standard Light-
Sensitive Paper shall be the latest lot obtainable from the National Bureau of
Standards. It is blue colored paper 2-5/8 by 3-1/8 inches (67 by 79 mm) in size
which is used in conjunction with a booklet containing the identical paper which

METHOD 5660
has been exposed in the Bureau’s Master Fading Lamp. A comparison of the faded
paper against samples in the booklet establishes the Standard Fading Hours of
Exposure of the specimen. The NBS standard paper is suitable for calibrating
fading hours during the period permitted by one trim of carbons.
4.3 National Bureau of Standards booklet of standard exposure of identical
Standard Light-Sensitive Paper. The booklet contains a large number of standard
exposures for varying times produced in the Bureau’s Master Fading Lamp which
has been adjusted to give twenty Standard Fading Hours of Exposures in a twenty
hour running period (see 7.2).
4.4 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 For specimens containing other than wool fiber. The specimens shall be
conditioned a minimum of four hours at standard conditions in accordance with
Section 4 of this Standard prior to being exposed in the machine.
5.1.2 For wool specimens and specimens containing blends of wool fiber. The
specimens (test specimen and specimen of standard sample when applicable) shall
be prepared as follows prior to exposure: The specimen shall be laid flat, without
folding, in a sink or similar apparatus, and water at a temperature of 75° to 86°F
(24° to 30°C) applied in a fine spray against it until it is thoroughly wet. No
wetting agent shall be used. The specimen shall be turned over and the reverse
side sprayed until it is saturated. The specimen shall then be extracted and
then spread out without distortion on a drying tray to remove wrinkles and permitted
to air dry. The drying time may be decreased by placing the specimen on the
tray in moving air from a fan or it may be placed in a drying oven at a temperature
not to exceed 180°F (82°C). Pressing of the specimens is prohibited. After drying
the specimen shall be conditioned for a minimum of four hours under standard
conditions prior to being exposed in the machine.
5.2 Preparation prior to Installing specimens.
5.2.1 The globe inclosing the carbon-arc shall be checked and cleaned at
least once in every 24 hours of operating time. The globe shall be discarded
after 2000 hours of operation or when pronounced discoloration, cracking, or
chipping develops, whichever occurs first.
5.2.2 Clean humidifier wicks and air filter.

METHOD 5660
5.2.3 Install a new trim of wicks in accordance with operating instructions.
5.2.4 Mount specimen on specimen holders using no backing material of any
kind, taking care to insure that the front and back covers make good contact
with the specimen. The specimen holder cover and back clip should be fastened
reasonably tight to yield a sharp line of demarcation between exposed and un-
exposed areas, but should not compress the specimens unnecessarily. Specimens
shall be mounted for testing as follows:
5.2.4.1 No standard sample. When no standard sample is available one holder
containing the test specimen and one holder containing the calibration paper shall
be prepared. Additional holders may be prepared with other test specimens of
filler materials for use in completely filling all available spaces on the sample
holder rack in the machine.
5.2.4.2 Standard sample. When a standard sample is available for comparison
purposes and the number of standard hours of exposure is specified one holder
containing the test specimen, one holder containing the standard sample and one
holder containing calibration paper shall be prepared. When several specimens
of the same material and shade are being exposed at the same time and for the
same exposure time, one specimen of the standard and one calibration paper
shall suffice for all specimens. Additional holders may be prepared with other
test specimens of filler materials for use in completely filling all available
spaces on the sample holder rack in the machine. Standard sample test specimen
and calibration paper shall be mounted in adjacent holders in the same level
to insure uniform radiation for all specimens.
5.2.4.3 When a standard sample is available for comparison purposes and
the number of standard hours is nott specified; two holders containing test
specimens, two holders containing standard samples and one holder containing the
calibration paper shall be prepared. Remaining holders shall be prepared with
other test specimens or filler materials to insure that all specimen holders are
filled.
5.3 Installation of specimen holders in machine. Place the filled specimen
holders in the specimen rack with the holders supported both top and bottom
in proper vertical alignment. A small displacement of the specimen toward
or away from the lamp may lead to too much or too little fading. Insure that
the rack is completely filled with specimen holders. When utilizing a standard
sample, place the standard and the test specimen adjacent to one another on
the rack.
5.4 Close the door and set the timer for 20 clock hours or for that number
of clock hours which are known to be equivalent to 20 standard fading hours,
and start the machine. Check controls to insure that the machine is functioning
properly. Unless otherwise required by the exposure time specified in the
procurement document, the machine shall be operated in 20 hour increments with
new calibration paper and a new trim of the carbons inserted at the end of each
20 hour period (see 7.5).

METHOD 5660
5.5 Length of exposure.
5.5.1 No standard sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, when a standard sample has not been established or is not available
for comparison, the test specimen shall be exposed for 40 standard fading
hours. At the end of each 20 hour exposure period a new piece of calibration
paper shall be placed in the machine. The exposed calibration paper shall
be retained and evaluated in accordance with instructions contained in 5.6.
5.5.2 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established and iS
available for comparison purposes and the number of standard fading hours
of exposure is specified, the test specimen and the specimen from the standard
sample shall be exposed for the specified number of standard fading hours.
At the end of each 20 hour exposure period a new piece of calibration paper
shall be placed in the machine. The exposed calibration paper shall be re-
tained and evaluated in accordance with instructions contained in 5.6.
5.5.3 When a standard sample has been established and is available for
comparison purposes and the number of standard fading hours of exposure is
not specified, one test specimen from the material undergoing test, one
specimen from the standard sample, and one specimen of the calibration paper
shall be exposed. At the end of 20 standard fading hours of exposure, the
specimens shall be removed from the fading lamp and the test specimens and
specimens of the standard sample compared with the unexposed specimen for
an appreciable change in color as described in 5.7.2.
5.5.4 The calibration paper shall be replaced with another unexposed paper
(the exposed paper being retained) and all the specimens replaced in the
machine. This procedure shall be repeated every 20 standard fading hours
of exposure.
5.5.5 When an appreciable change in color is evident in either sample being
evaluated or the standard sample, the specimens shall be again placed in the
fading lamp. Exposure shall be continued for an additional number of hours equal
to the number of hours at which the “appreciable change in color” was apparent,
and the test is terminated at the end of that period.
5.5.6 Specimens which do not show en “appreciable change in color” until 80
or more standard fading hours of exposure shall be returned to the fading lamp
for a total exposure period not exceeding 140 standard fading hours, at which time
the test shall be terminated.
5.5.7 At the end of the total exposure period, the test specimen and the
specimen of the standard sample shall be removed from the lamp and allowed to be
in the dark at room temperature for a minimum of four hours before evaluation.

METHOD 5660
5.6 Evaluation of calibration paper.
5.6.1 The exposed specimens of calibration paper after removal from the lamp
shall be placed in the dark at room temperature for a minimum of one hour.
5.6.2 The exposed specimen is then compared with the standard exposure papers
in the National Bureau of Standards Booklet. The comparisons shall be made
with the paper grain of the Standards and control faded strips placed on the
same plane, preferably in a horizontal position. The exposed parts of both
the standard and the exposed control specimens should not be touched by the
fingers because of the paper’s sensitivity to moisture and danger of soiling
(see 7.3).
5.6.3 The standard faded strip most closely approximating the exposed control
paper in degree of fading should be selected, and the material shall be credited
for having been exposed for the corresponding number of standard fading hours
regardless of the number of hours recorded by the timing clock.
5.6.3.1 Any fading lamp may change its rate of fading from day to day. There-
fore, the NBS, Standard Light-Sensitive Paper shall be used as a control in
all testing, that is, the paper shall be exposed at the same time as the specimen
undergoing test. In comparing the exposed control with the Standards of Fading
produced in the NBS Master Lamp, it is possible to interpolate immediate
differences midway between any two standards contained in the booklet.
5.6.4 The fading hours recorded for the individual control papers shall be
totaled and this figure used as the total number of standard fading hours to which
the material has been exposed.
5.7 Evaluation. The evaluation of the test specimen with the standard or
comparison sample shall be in conformance with Method 9010.
5.7.1.1 When a standard sample is available and the number of hours of exposure
has not been established, the test specimen and the specimen of the standard sample
which have been exposed for the total exposure shall be compared and the test
specimen rated as follows:
Fall : Color change greater than that of the standard sample.
In the event that the standard sample and the test specimen reverse their
relative rating from the first appreciable change in color at the end of the
exposure cycle, the results at the end of the total exposure cycle shall
nevertheless constitute the basis for the rating.

METHOD 5660
5.7.1.2 When a standard sample is available and the number of hours of ex-
posure has been established, the test specimen and the specimen of the standard
sample shall be compared and the test specimen rated as follows:
sample.
the exposed test specimen shall be compared with the unexposed specimen from
the sample unit and rated as follows:
Good: Perceptible, but not appreciable change in color.
Fair: Appreciable, but not objectionable change in color.
in comparing the test specimen with the original unexposed specimen. If
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, color-
fastness to light shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure is reported,
the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change
of the test specimen, shall be distinguished and reported.
6.2 No standard sample. When no standard sample has been established, color-
fastness to light shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure is reported,
the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change
of the test specimen, shall be distinguished and reported.
6.3 The lot number of the National Bureau of Standard Paper for determination
of the Standard Fading Hours shall be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Standard Light Sensitive Paper and booklet of Standard Fading Strips
are prepared by and available from the National Bureau of Standards,
Washington, DC 20234. Precautions must be taken to assure that the light-
sensitive paper and the book fading standards are from the same lot of
paper, as some variation does occur from one lot of paper to another. The
book of Standard Fading Strips and the paper are appropriately marked with
the lot number. To obtain the specific number of Standard Fading Hours during
each 20 hour exposure period, a factor may have to be developed to convert

METHOD 5660
clock hours to Standard Fading Hours which will be different for each machine.
This is accomplished by establishing the ratio of clock hours to fading hours
in the evaluation of the calibration paper. As an example, if the paper exposed
for 20 clock hours faded to a degree such that it was interpolated to be
18 Standard Fading Hours, the factor used to arrive at the specified number
of Standard Fading Hours would be 0.9. This figure is arrived at by a ratio
of 18/20 = 0.9; Example: Assuming that a period of 100 Standard Fading Hours
is specified in the procurement document, using the factor, the clock hours
or running time would be arrived at as follows:
Clock hours required = Specified Fading hours = 100 = 111
Factor 0.9
7.2 The A.A.T.C.C. Blue Lightfastness Standard L-4 may be used to calibrate the
equipment used for exposure by fading the blue standard to produce 1.5 NBS units
or 4.5 MacAdam units of color difference. The calculations to determine the number
of machine hours for 20 Standard Fading Hours shall be as follows:
Clock hours to produce the Std. fade on Blue L-4 x 20
11
7.3 As an alternative, photometric measurements may be used to evaluate the
fading of the light-sensitive paper and Standard Exposure Paper.
7.4 An apparatus of the type described in this method may be obtained from
the Atlas Electric Devices Co., 4114 N. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 60613.
7.5 The total exposure time in terms of Standard Fading Hours can also be
established by the use of the standard 1/8 inch (3 mm) yellow methacrylate plates
dyed with Solvent Yellow #33, C.I. 47000 available from the National Bureau
of Standards. The degree of change measured at 420 mm by transmission
on a spectrophotometer or on a filter calorimeter equipped with a narrow band
pass filter can be converted to standard fading hours by reference to the
calibration curve furnished by the NBS. The plate is permitted to stay in the
equipment during a full exposure period and measurements made at the end of the
exposure cycle or at any intermediate point at the discretion of the individual
performing the test. CAUTION: The yellow plates are only useful on carbon-arc
fading equipments. They are not suitable for outdoor exposure use or in equipments
with other types of light sources.
7.6 With wool-like materials in particular, the finish of the unexposed area
may be altered during the exposure period due to pressure of the holding plates in
the specimen holders on the fabric. Also, there is the possibility of changes due
to thermal effects. When such situations are noted two courses of action are
possible. One is to evaluate the exposed area against a retained but sponged
portion of the fabric. The other is to re-sponge the exposed specimen and evaluate
after the specimen has dried and has been conditioned. Where calorimetric methods
of measurement are used in evaluation, the exposed specimen shall, in every case,
be compared to the retained sponged original specimen.

METHOD 5662
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO LIGHT OF TEXTILE MATERIALS;

NATURAL LIGHT METHOD
1. SCOPE
materials to the fading action of natural sunlight.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
when a standard sample has been established, one specimen from each sample unit
of the material to be tested and one specimen from the standard sample shall be
as follows:
2.1.1 Cloth. A rectangle of cloth measuring 2-1/2 inches by 3 inches (64 mm by
76 mm) with the long dimension parallel to the warp direction.
2.1.2 Textile fibers. Fibers made into pads forming a rectangle measuring
2-1/2 inches by 3 inches (64 mm by 76 mm).
2.1.3 Yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing, and braid. Yarn, thread,
light cordage, tape, webbing, and braid shall be wound on cards having a
rectangle 2-1/2 inches by 3 inches (64 mm by 76 m) with the long dimension
lengthwise of the material being tested.
when a standard sample has not been established, one specimen from the sample unit
of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.1.1, 2.1.2 or 2.1.3. One
additional specimen shall be taken from the sample unit of material to be tested
and shall be retained, unexposed, for comparison. Both specimens shall be cut
from adjacent areas of the sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.

METHOD 5662
4.1.1 Sunlight exposure cabinet. A suitable light exposure cabinet is one
of wood, metal or other satisfactory material of any convenient size, constructed
so as to allow free access of air to all test specimens and covered with window
glass to protect the specimens from rain and other elements of the weather. The
window glass employed must be a good grade of clear flat-drawn sheet glass, single
strength, 1/16 to 3/32 inch (2 to 2.5 mm) thick, free from bubbles or other
imperfections with a lower cutoff at approximately 310 mm with an increase in
transmission to approximately 90 percent at 370 to 380 mm (see 7.2). The glass
cover must be cleaned at least once each day. The cabinet shall be equipped with
a mounting rack which supports the specimens 3 inches ± 1/4 inches (76 mm ± 6 mm)
behind the inner surface of the glass. In order to minimize shadows due to the
varying angle of the sun, the usable exposure area under the glass is limited to
that of the glass cover reduced on each side by twice the distance from the glass
cover to the specimen.
4.1.2 Exposure area. The cabinet shall be placed in a location unprotected
from the sun and in such a position that the specimen, when in place, shall
be at an angle of 45° from the horizontal and facing the equator. In the
Northern Hemisphere, the surface exposed shall face the south and in the
Southern Hemisphere, it shall face the north. The lowest end of the cabinet
shall be at least 3 feet (1 m) above the ground level. The area under the
cabinet should preferably be planted in close cut grass. Non-grassed areas
shall be sloped so as to prevent excessive water retention.
4.1.3 Eppley Pyranometer or equivalent device. This instrument shall be
as described in Method 5800. It is for measuring radiant energy, and shall be
located at the same distance from the glass as the specimen undergoing test.
4.1.4 Means of recording the prevailing weather conditions.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 5800, Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Natural Weathering Method.
5. PROCEDURE
of the standard sample shall be exposed at the same time and under the same
specimen from each sample unit shall be exposed and the remaining specimen retained
unexposed for comparison.
be exposed in a nonindustrial area.

METHOD 5662
5.4 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the test
specimen shall be placed in the sun exposure cabinet for a period sufficient
2
to
provide a quantum of radiant energy equal to 7,500 langleys (315 MJ/m ).
The specimen shall remain in the exposure cabinet for 24 hours a day and not
be removed until the test is completed. When the colorfastness of the standard
sample is known in terms of the number of Standard Fading Hours to produce an
appreciable change in color, the exposure under this method shall be 120 langleys
2
(5 MJ/m ) for each Standard Fading Hour. For example, 2 for 40 Standard Fading
Hours, the exposure should be 4,800 langleys (200 MJ/m ).
5.5 The specimen shall be exposed in the cabinet facing due south (or north
if exposed in the Southern Hemisphere) at an angle of 45° from the horizontal.
5.6 The specimen shall be exposed for the required period or for a time
sufficient to provide
2
a quantum of radiant energy equal to the required number
of langleys (MJ/m ) (see 5.4).
5.7 During the exposure period, the radiant energy shall be measured by means
of the Eppley Pyranometer or equivalent instrument, and the weather conditions
recorded. The pyranometer shall be placed in a cabinet similar to the one in
which the samples are exposed.
5.8 At the end of the exposure period, the specimen shall be removed from the
cabinet and allowed to lie in the dark at room temperature for a minimum of
4 hours before evaluation.
5.9 Evaluation. The evaluation of the test specimen with the standard or
comparison sample shall be in conformance with Method 9010.
5.9.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established and used
in the test, the test specimen shall be compared with the standard sample and
rated as follows:
unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the test specimen shall
be compared to the unexposed specimen, and rated as follows:
comparing the tested specimen with the original sample for comparison. If closer
inspection or a change of angle of light is necessary to make apparent a slight

METHOD 5662
6. REPORT
6.1 The location of the exposure, town and state, and whether or not the area
is nonindustrial shall be reported.
2
6.2 The total radiation in langleys (MJ/m ) to which the specimen was exposed
shall be reported.
6.3 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, colorfastness
to light shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure i S reported, the
severest departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change of the
test specimen shall be distinguished and reported.
6.4 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established, unless
otherwise specified in the procurement document, colorfastness to light shall be
reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure is reported, the severest departure
(i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change of the test specimen shall
be distinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A test cabinet constructed to meet these specifications is available from:
Atlas Electric Devices Co., 4114 N, Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 60613, or
William Harrison & Co., 4595 East 10th Court, Hialeah, FL 33013.
7.2 Window glass of the desired qualities is available from the following
dealers: Libbey-Owens-Ford Glass Co., Flat-Drawn Sheet Glass, Single strength,
Quality B, and Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., Pennvernon Sheet Glass, Single
Strength, Quality B, are considered suitable. The glass is described in the
manufacturers’ catalogs as transmitting a minimum of 77 percent ultraviolet,
90 percent Illuminant C (average daylight) and 85 percent total radiation.
Transmittance curves of two panels secured from dealer stock showed no
transmittance below 310 nm, close to a straight line rise to 90 percent at
370-380 nm and 90 percent transmittance in the visible regions to 700 nm.

METHOD 5671
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS TO WEATHER;
1. SCOPE
materials when subjected to accelerated weathering conditions.
2. TEST SPECIMENS
when a standard sample has been established and the length of time of exposure
has been specified, one specimen from each sample unit of the material to be
tested and one specimen from the standard sample shall be as specified in
2.2.1 through 2.2.3.
2.1.1 When a standard sample has been established and the length of time of
exposure has not been specified, three specimens from each sample unit and three
specimens from the standard sample shall be taken for testing. The three specimens
shall be cut from adjacent material in the sample unit.
2.2 The specimens for testing shall be as follows:
2.2.1 Cloth. The specimen shall measure 2-1/2 inches by 10 inches (64 mm by
254 mm) with the long dimension parallel to either the warp or filling.
2.2.2 Yarn, thread, light cordage. The specimen shall be of sufficient length
so that it may be close-wound on a plastic or wood panel to form a rectangle
2.2.3 Narrow fabrics (tape, webbing, braid). The specimen shall be of
sufficient length so that it may be close-wound on a plastic or wood panel to
form a rectangle 2-1/2 inches by 10 inches (64 mm by 254 mm) except when the
width of the sample unit is greater than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). When the width
of the sample unit is greater than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) the specimen will be
cut so that the longest dimension will be parallel to the length of the sample
unit and equidistant from the sides of the sample unit.
when a standard sample has not been established, one specimen from the sample unit
of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.2.1 through 2.2.3. One
additional specimen shall be taken from the sample unit of the material to be tested
and shall be retained unexposed for comparison. Both specimens shall be cut from
adjacent areas of the sample unit.

METHOD 5671
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, one determination
shall be made from each sample unit.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The apparatus shall be as described for Method 5804.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 5804, Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Accelerated Weathering Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 All temperatures, water pressures and other conditions required for
testing colorfastness to weathering shall be as described in Method 5804.
5.2 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established and the
number of hours of exposure is specified, one holder containing a specimen of the
material being tested, and one holder containing a specimen of the standard sample
shall be prepared.
holder containing one specimen of the material to be tested shall be prepared, and
the remaining specimens shall be retained unexposed, for comparison purposes.
5.4 When several specimens of the same material are being exposed at the same
time and under the same conditions, one specimen of the standard sample shall suffice
for comparison with all specimens (see 5.2). When two specimens of the standard
sample are to be used, they will suffice for comparison with all specimens of the
same material being tested.
5.5 When all specimens are placed in the test chamber and there are unfilled
spaces, they shall be filled with specimen holders containing either filler material
or other test specimens.
5.6 Length of exposure.
5.6.1 No standard sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
when a standard sample has not been established, the test specimen shall be exposed
for 40 hours.
5.6.2 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established and the number
of hours of exposure is specified, the test specimen and the specimen from the
standard sample shall be exposed for the specified number of hours of exposure.

METHOD 5671
5.6.2.1 When a standard sample has been established and the number of hours of
exposure is not specified, two test specimens from the material undergoing test
and two specimens from the standard sample shall be exposed. At the end of 20 hours
of exposure, the specimens shall be removed from the test chamber and the test
specimens and specimens of this standard sample compared with the unexposed
specimens for an “appreciable change in color” as described in 5.7.2.3.
5.6.2.1.1 All the specimens shall be replaced in the machine. This procedure
shall be repeated every 20 hours of exposure.
5.6.2.1.2 When an “appreciable change in color” is evident in either test specimen
when compared with a specimen of the standard sample, the length of time of
exposure shall be recorded and the two specimens (one test specimen showing the
“appreciable change in color” and the one specimen of the standard sample) shall
be placed in the dark at room temperature for a minimum of 4 hours before evaluation.
5.6.2.1.3 The remaining test specimen and specimen of the standard sample shall
again be placed in the test chamber and the exposure continued for an additional
number of hours of exposure equal to the number of hours at which the “appreciable
change in color” was apparent and the test terminated at the end of that period.
5.6.2.1.4 Specimens which do not show an “appreciable change in color” until
80 hours or more of exposure shall be returned to the test chamber for a total
exposure period not exceeding 140 hours of exposure, at which time the test shall
be terminated.
5.6.3 At the end of a period of exposure, when the specimens are removed from
the test chamber, the specimens will be dried by any convenient method at a
temperature not exceeding 176° ± 4°F (80° ± 2°C) and placed in the dark for a
minimum of 4 hours before evaluation.
5.7 Evaluation.
5.7.1 The evaluation tests shall be made only on that part of the specimen which
was fully exposed and not protected by the frame or damaged when secured to the rack.
5.7.2 The evaluation of the test specimen with the standard or comparison
sample shall be in conformance with Method 9010.
5.7.2.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established and the
number of hours of exposure has been established, the test specimen and the specimen
of the standard sample shall be compared and the test specimen rated as follows:
sample.

METHOD 5671
5.7.2.2 When a standard sample has been established and the number of hours
of exposure has not been established, the test specimen and the specimen of the
standard sample which have been exposed for the total exposure shall be compared
and the test specimen rated as follows:
sample.
In the event that the standard sample and the test specimen reverse their relative
rating from the first appreciable change in color to the end of the exposure cycle,
the results at the end of the total exposure cycle shall nevertheless constitute
the basis for the rating.
the exposed test specimen shall be compared with the unexposed specimen from the
sample unit and rated as follows:
comparing the tested specimen with the original specimen for comparison. If closer
6. REPORT
to weather shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure is reported, the
severest departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change of
the test specimen, shall be distinguished and reported. When specimens are
tested as in 5.6.2.1 and evaluated as in 5.7.2.2 they shall be reported as
one determination.
6.2 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established, color-
fastness to weather shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure is reported,
the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change of
the test specimen, shall be distinguished and reported.
6.3 The lot number of the National Bureau of Standard Paper for determination
of the Standard Fading Hours shall be reported.

METHOD 5671
7. NOTES
7.1 Standard light-sensitive paper and booklet of standard fading strips are
prepared by and available from the National Bureau of Standards, Washington, DC
20234. Precautions must be taken to assure that the light-sensitive paper and the
book of fading standards are from the same lot of paper, as some variation does
occur from one lot of paper to another. The book of Standard Fading Strips
and the paper are appropriately marked with the lot number.
To obtain the specific number of Standard Fading Hours during each 20-hour exposure
period, a factor may have to be developed to convert clock hours to Standard Fading
Hours which will be different for each machine. This is accomplished by
establishing the ratio of clock hours to fading hours in the evaluation of the
calibration paper. As an example, if the paper exposed for 20 clock hours faded
to a degree such that it was interpolated to be 18 Standard Fading Hours, the
factor used to arrive at the specified number of Standard Fading Hours would be
0.9. This figure is arrived at by a ratio of 18 = 0.9
20
Example: Assuming that a period of 100 Standard Fading Hours is specified in
the procurement document, using the factor, the clock hours of running time would
be arrived at as follows:
Clock hours required = Specified fading hours = 100 = 111
Factor 0.9
7.2 A 20 Standard Fading Hour exposure in the machine as calibrated by the NBS
blue papers should produce a 1.5 NBS units or 4.5 McAdams units of color difference
in the A.A.T.C.C. blue wool light-fastness Standard L-4.
7.3 As an alternative, photometric measurements may be used to evaluate the
fading of the light-sensitive paper and Standard Exposure Paper.
the Atlas Electric Devices Co, 4114 North Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 61613.
7.5 The total exposure time in terms of standard fading hours can also be
established by the use of the standard 1/8 inch (3 mm) yellow methacrylate plates
dyed with Solvent Yellow #33, C.I. 47000 available from the National Bureau of
Standards. The degree of change measured at 420 nm by transmission on
a spectrophotometer or on a filter calorimeter equipped with a narrow band pass
filter can be converted to standard fading hours by reference to the calibration
curve furnished by the NBS. The plate is permitted to stay in the equipment
during a full exposure period and measurements made at the end of the exposure
cycle or at any intermediate point at the discretion of the individual performing
the test. CAUTION: The yellow plates are only useful on carbon arc fading
equipment. They are not suitable for outdoor exposure use or in equipments with
other types of light sources.

METHOD 5671
7.6 With wool and wool-like materials in particular, the finish of the un-
exposed area may be altered during the exposure period due to pressure of the
holding plates in the specimen holders on the fabric. Also, there is the
possiblity of changes due to thermal effects. When such situations are noted,
two courses of action are possible. One is to evaluate the exposed area against
a retained but sponged portion of the fabric. The other is to responge the
exposed specimen and evaluate after the specimen has dried and has been
conditioned. Where calorimetric methods of measurement are used in evaluation,
the exposed specimen shall, in every case, be compared to the retained sponged
original specimen.
7.7 For colorfastness evaluation, the apparatus shall never be operated without
the filter inclosing the arc.

METHOD 5672
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS TO WEATHER OF TEXTILE MATERIALS;
1. SCOPE
materials to natural weathering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
when a standard sample has been established, one specimen from the sample unit
of the material to be tested and one specimen from the standard sample shall
be as follows:
2.1.1 Cloth. A rectangle of cloth measuring at least 2-1/2 inches by 3 inches
(64 mm by 76 mm) with the long dimension parallel to the warp direction.
2.1.2 Textile fibers. Fibers made into pads forming a rectangle measuring
2.1.3 Yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing, and braid. Yarn, thread,
light cordage, tape, webbing, and braid shall be wound on cards forming a
rectangle 2-1/2 inches by 3 inches (64 mm by 76 mm) with the long dimension
lengthwise of the material being tested.
when a standard sample has not been established, two specimens from the sample
unit of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.1.1, 2.1.2 or 2.1.3.
Both specimens shall be cut from adjacent material in the sample unit and one
untested specimen shall be retained for comparison purposes.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Specimen rack. The rack shall be a wooden frame open at the back to
allow free access of air to the specimen and providing means of fastening the
top and bottom edges of the specimens to it. The fasteners used must not be made
of corrodible materials.

METHOD 5672
4.1.2 Exposure area. A place unprotected from the sun and in the town and
state specified in the procurement document. Unless otherwise specified in the
procurement document, the cloth shall be exposed in a nonindustrial area.
4.1.3 Eppley Pyranometer or equivalent device. A detector used in the measure-
ment of the radiant energy of the sun at the exposure area. The Epply Pyranometer
is a differential thermopile with the hot - junction blackened and the cold -
junction whitened, it measures the radiation for a complete hemisphere of the sky.
The thermopile is covered by a precision ground, optical glass envelope which
is usefully transparent from about 280 to 2800 nm and is replaceable. The EMF
generated by the thermopile is recorded by a suitably integrated potentiometer
(see 7.1).
4.2 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, a
specimen of the standard sample shall be exposed at the same time and under
the same conditions as the specimen being tested.
one specimen from each sample unit to be tested shall be exposed and the
remaining specimen retained untested for comparison.
shall be exposed in a nonindustrial area.
shall be placed on the rack for a period sufficient
2
to provide a quantum of
radiant energy equal to 7,500 langleys (315 MJ/m ). The specimen shall remain
in the specimen rack for 24 hours a day and not be removed until the test IS
completed. When the colorfastness of the standard sample is known in terms of
the number of Standard Fading Hours to produce an appreciable2 change in colors
the exposure under this method shall be 120 langleys (5 MJ/m ) for each
Standard Fading Hour. For example 2 for 40 Standard Fading Hours, the exposure
should be 4,800 langleys (200 MJ/m ).
5.5 This specimen shall be exposed on the rack facing due south (or north
if exposed in the Southern Hemisphere) at an angle of 45° from the horizontal.

METHOD 5672
sufficient to provide
2
a quantum of radiant energy equal to the required number
of langleys MJ/m ) (see 5.4).
5.7 During the exposure period, the radiant energy shall be measured by
means of the Eppley Pyranometer or equivalent instrument and the weather
condition recorded. The pyranometer shall be exposed at the same angle and
under the same conditions as the specimen.
5.8 At the end of the exposure period, the specimen shall be removed from
the rack and allowed to lie in the dark at room temperature for a minimum of
4 hours before evaluation.
5.9 Evaluation. The evaluation of the test specimen with the standard
or comparison sample shall be in conformance with Method 9010.
5.9.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established and
utilized in the test, the test specimen shall be compared with the standard
sample and rated as follows:
unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the test specimen
shall be compared to the unexposed specimen and rated as follows:
comparing the tested specimen with the original sample for comparison. If
closer inspection or a change in angle of light is required to make apparent
6. REPORT
6.2 The total radiation in langleys (MJ/m2) to which the specimen was exposed
shall be reported.

METHOD 5672
to weathering shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure is reported,
the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change of
the test specimen, shall be distinguished and reported.
6.4 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established, color-
fastness to weathering shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure is
reported, the severest departure (i.e. the actual ratings “fair” or “poor”), of the
change of the test specimen, shall be distinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 A machine of the type described may be purchased from the Eppley Laboratory
Inc., Newport, RI 20840.

METHOD 5675
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS OF CLOTH TO OXIDES OF NITROGEN IN
THE ATMOSPHERE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to color change of
dyed textile cloths when exposed to oxides of nitrogen in the atmosphere.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
sample unit of the material to be tested and one specimen from the standard sample
2.1.1 Cloth. The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 2 by 5 inches (51 mm by
127 mm), and shall be cut from a wrinkle free portion of the sample unit.
sample unit of the material to be tested shall be as specified in 2.1.1. One
additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of the material to be
tested and shall be retained, untested, for comparison. All specimens shall be
taken from adjacent areas in the sample unit.
4.1 Gas Fading Test Chamber. A Gas Fading Test Chamber or similar equipment
in which test specimens can be exposed to air which has passed through the flame of
a lighted gas burner (see 7.1). In order to assure uniform fading of the specimens,
the arms on which they are hung shall be revolved at a rate of 2 RPM.
4.2 Gas Fading Control Sample No. 1 (see 7.2).
4.3 Standard of Fading (See 7.2).
4.4 Gray Scale for Color Change (see 7.3).

METHOD 5675
4.5 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The specimens shall be folded one inch (25 mm) from the top and an office
stapling device used to form a loop. The loop permits the specimen to be placed
on the specimen rack so that the flat surface of the cloth moves in direct con-
tact with gases.
5.2 The test specimens shall be suspended in the Gas Fading Test Chamber
together with a specimen of Control Sample No. 1 (see 7.2). The specimens shall
be mounted no nearer the outside edge of the specimen rack than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)
and no nearer the hub of the specimen rack than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). The test
specimens shall not be brought into direct contact with hot metallic surfaces.
5.3 The gas burner shall be ignited and the flame adjusted so that the
temperature in the chamber does not exceed 140°F (60°C).
5.4 The specimens (test and control) shall remain in the chamber until Control
Sample No. 1 shows a change of shade corresponding with that of the Standard of
Fading (see 7.2). The test specimens shall then be removed from the chamber and
immediately compared to the specimen retained untested, for comparison. This
constitutes one exposure cycle.
5.5 Test specimens which show no fading shall be suspended again in the
chamber along with a fresh Control Sample, and the test shall be continued
until the Control Sample shows a change of shade corresponding with that of the
Standard of Fading. The procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary to
produce an appreciable alteration of shade in the test specimens.
5.6 Evaluation.
5.6.2 The resistance to color change of the test specimens shall be evaluated
after each exposure period.
5.6.3 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, the test
specimen will be compared to the specimen from the standard sample and rated as
follows:

METHOD 5675
Specimen. Pass: Color change equal to or less than that of the
standard sample.
Fail: Color change greater than that of the standard
sample.
5.6.4 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established, the
test specimen will be compared to the specimen retained untested for comparison
to determine the number of exposure periods required to produce an appreciable
change in color in the test specimens. An “appreciable change in color” means
a change that is immediately noticeable in comparing the test specimen with the
original sample as comparison. If closer inspection or a change of angle of light
is required to make apparent a slight change in color, the change is not considered
appreciable.
5.6.4.1 The effect on the color of the test specimens after the required number
of cycles shall be expressed by reference to the Gray Scale for Color Change as
follows:
Class 5 - Negligible or no change as shown in Gray Scale Step 5.
Class 4 - A change in color equivalent to Gray Scale Step 4.
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, the resistance
to color change of textile cloths when exposed to oxides of nitrogen in the
atmosphere shall be reported as “pass” or “fail”. When failure is reported, the
severest departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair” or “poor”), of the change of the
test specimen, shall be distinguished and reported.
6.2 No standard sample. The resistance to color change of textile cloths exposed
to oxides of nitrogen in the atmosphere shall be reported as “pass” or “fail” when
the test specimen is evaluated and rated in accordance with the adjective ratings
specified in 5.6.4.1. Failure of the test specimen to meet the adjective rating
specified in the applicable procurement document shall be reported as failure.
When failure is reported, the actual Gray Scale classification of the color change
of the test specimen shall also be distinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The Gas Fading Test Chamber may be obtained from the US Testing Co.,
1415 Park Avenue, Hoboken, NJ 07030.

METHOD 5675
7.2 Gas Fading Control Sample No. 1 is sensitive to atmospheric gases and shall
be kept in a closed container and protected from strong light when not in use. A
sealed unit of Control Sample No. 1, comprising 20 yards (183 m) of ribbon 2-1/4
inches (57 mm) wide, and a specimen of the standard of Fading may be obtained from
TestFabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave., Middlesex, NJ 08846.
7.3 Gray Scale for Color Change may be obtained from the American Association of
Textile Chemists and Colorists, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.

METHOD 5680
July 20, 1978
COLORFASTNESS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS TO PERSPIRATION;

PERSPIROMETER METHOD
1. SCOPE
materials to perspiration. It is applicable to dyed, printed or otherwise colored
textiles of all kinds.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
when a standard sample has been established, the required specimens from
each sample unit of the material to be tested and two specimens from the standard
2.1.1 Cloth. A square of cloth 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
2.1.2 Fibers, yarn, thread, light cordage, tape, webbing, and braid. Sufficient
lengths of the applicable specimen shall be arranged to form a square 2-1/2 by 2-1/2
inches (64 mm by 64 mm).
One additional specimen shall be taken from each sample unit of material to be
tested and retained, untested, for comparison. All specimens shall be taken
from adjacent areas of the sample unit.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, one specimen from each
sample unit shall be tested in each of the two perspiration solutions.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Perspirometer or equivalent apparatus.
4.1.1.1 The Perspirometer is a testing device capable of maintaining uniform
pressure on the test specimen located between two glass plates (3 inches by 2-1/2
inches by 1/4 inch) (76 mm by 64 mm by 6 mm).

METHOD 5680
4.1.1.2 Two Perspirometer models are permissible.
4.1.1.2.1 The pressure is obtained in one model by added weights, with plates
being stacked vertically, until the pressure is adjusted. When the required
pressure is reached, the pressure plate is locked, the weights removed, and the
unit placed in the oven so that the plates and specimens are vertical.
4.1.1.2.2 The pressure in the second model is obtained by means of adjusting
screws, the moveable plate being made to exert increasing pressure against the
test specimens until the required force is reached as indicated on the scale.
The specimen unit is locked at this point, removed from the section applying
the pressure, and placed in the oven so that the plates and specimens are
vertical.
4.1.2 Wringer. A wringer of the household type equipped with smooth rubber
rolls 2-1/8 to 2-1/2 inches (54 mm to 64 mm) in diameter and not less than 11
inches (279 mm) or more than 16 inches (406 mm) in length. The rubber rolls shall
have a Shore Durometer Hardness of 70 to 80 (A scale). The load exerted on the
specimen shall be applied uniformly by means of an adjustable weight attached to
the top roll. The total load of the roll, means of attaching the weight, and the
weight itself shall be such that the specimen will retain 100 percent moisture.
The rolls shall be power driven at such a speed that the specimen shall pass
between the rolls at the rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per second.
4.1.3 Oven. A circulating air oven capable of maintaining the required
temperature at ± 2°F (± 1°C).
acrylic and wool. Each 6-fiber repeat shall measure approximately 2 inches
(51 mm) and shall be separated by a waste filling stripe (see 7.2).
4.1.5 White thread.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Acid solution. - 10 g sodium chloride
1 g lactic acid U.S.P., 85 percent
0.25 g histidine monohydrochloride.
1 g disodium orthophosphate, anhydrous.
Dissolve with distilled water and make UP to 1 liter. This solution shall have a
pH of 3.5. If the pH is not 3.5, suitable adjustments shall be made with lactic acid
and disodium orthophosphate or monosodium orthophosphate, or a new solution is
prepared.

METHOD 5680
4.2.2 Alkaline solution - 10 g sodium chloride.
4 g ammnonium carbonate U.S.P.
0.25 g histidine monohydrochloride.
1 g disodium orthophosphate, anhydrous.
Dissolve in distilled water and make up to 1 L. This solution shall have a
pH of 8.0. If the pH is not 8.0, suitable adjustments shall be made with disodium
orthophosphate, monosodium orthophosphate, or ammonium carbonate or a new solution
may be prepared.
4.3 Method cited.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 One 6-fiber repeat of the color transfer cloth shall be sewn with white
thread or otherwise firmly attached to each specimen of the material to be tested
and to each specimen of the standard sample.
5.2 The testing of 2 specimens (i.e., one in the acid solution and one in the
alkaline solution) shall be considered one determination.
5.2.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, two
specimens of the standard sample shall be tested at the same time and under the
same conditions as the specimens undergoing test.
5.2.2 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established the
required specimens of the material undergoing test shall be tested, and one specimen
shall be retained without testing for comparison.
5.3 One test assembly (see 5.2) shall be immersed in the acid solution for
30 minutes with occasional stirring. The other test assembly shall be immersed in
the alkaline solution for 30 minutes with occasional stirring. Care shall be
exercised to insure that the assemblies are adequately wetted by the solutions.
5.3.1 To insure that the test assembly treated with the acid solution has a pH
of 3.5 and that the assembly treated with the alkaline solution has a pH of 8.0,
the assemblies shall be rinsed 3 times with the appropriate test solution, the
rinse solution being discarded each time.
5.4 The test assemblies, when removed from the solutions, shall be passed flat
through the wringer to remove excess liquid, retaining the equivalent of 100
percent pickup by the assembly.

METHOD 5680
5.4.1 Each of the test assemblies shall be placed between glass plates and
inserted in the Perspirometer. The Perspirometer shall be adjusted to produce
a pressure of 10 pounds (70 kPa) on the test assemblies.
5.4.2 The loaded test plate units shall be placed in the oven for a minimum
of 6 hours, the temperature of the oven maintained at 100° ± 2°F (38° ±1°C).
For convenience, the test may be run overnight for as much as 16 hours. Tests
have shown that no appreciable or additional change in shade or staining occurs
after the 6-hour period.
5.4.3 The test assemblies shall be removed from the test plates. If the
assemblies are not completely dry at this time, they may be dried by any convenient
means at a temperature not to exceed 150°F (82°C).
5.5 Evaluation.
transfer cloth shall be evaluated to determine the colorfastness to perspiration.
5.5.3 The color change exhibited by the tested specimen when compared to the
untested specimen retained shall be evaluated against the color change exhibited
by the tested standard when compared to the untested standard retained. Unless
otherwise specified, the staining of the color transfer of the specimen shall
be evaluated against the staining of the color transfer cloth of the standard.
5.5.3.1 Specimen
Pass: Color change less than that of the standard sample.
sample.
evaluation of the test specimen and its attached color transfer cloth shall be
rated as follows:
shall be rated as:

METHOD 5680
staining.
staining.
“Appreciable change in color” means change that is immediately noticeable in

comparing the tested specimen with the original sample for comparison. If
closer inspection or a change of angle of light is required to make apparent a
slight change of color, the change is not considered appreciable.”
6. REPORT
6.1 Standard sample. Colorfastness to perspiration shall be reported as “pass”
or “fail" when compared with the standard sample. If either the test specimen or
the transfer cloth of the test specimen shows failure when compared to comparable
material of the standard sample, the specimen shall be reported as failing.
When failure is reported the nature of the failure shall also be reported.
6.2 No standard sample. Colorfastness to perspiration shall be reported as
“pass” or “fail” when the test specimen and color transfer cloth are evaluated and
rated in accordance with the adjective ratings of 5.5.4. Failure of either
the test specimen or the color transfer cloth to meet the adjective rating
specified in the applicable procurement document shall be reported as failing.
When failure is reported, the severest departure (i.e. the actual rating, “fair”
or “poor”), of the change of test specimen or staining of specific fibers of the
color transfer cloth, shall be distinguished and reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Equipment suitable for conducting this test may be purchased from: The
Orange Machine and Manufacturing Company, 1503 Bay Avenue, Point Pleasant, NJ
08742 and Atlas Electric Devices Company, 4114 No. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL
60613.
7.2 Multifiber test cloths (color transfer cloth) may be obtained from Test
Fabrics, Inc., P.O. Box 53, 200 Blackford Ave., Middlesex, NJ 08846.

METHOD 5750
July 20, 1978
MILDEW RESISTANCE OF TEXTILE MATERIALS; SINGLE CULTURE METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the mildew resistance of
textile materials.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Qualitative.
2.1.1 Cloth. For visual examination, the specimen shall be a square
of cloth 2 inches by 2 inches (51 mm by 51 mm).
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, cordage, tape. For visual examination, the specimen
shall be of approximate size for placing in a 100 mm petri dish. Heavy cordage
specimens, representative of the sample unit to be tested, shall be ravelled to
give a set of yarns 6 inches (152 mm) long, tied together, which can be
conveniently placed in a petri dish.
2.2 Quantitative.
2.2.1 Cloth. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
the cloth specimen shall be described in Method 5104, except that it shall
be approximately 6 inches (152 mm) long with the long direction parallel to
the warp.
2.2.2 Yarn and thread. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, yarn and thread specimens shall be as described in Method 4100.
2.2.3 Cordage. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
cordage specimens shall be prepared as in Method 6016, except for twisted
cordage samples of 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter or larger, when the specimen shall
be ravelled to a diameter and cut to a length appropriate for inoculation and
testing for change in breaking strength as described in Method 6016.
2.3 Number of specimens.
2.3.1 Qualitative testing. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, five specimens shall be taken for qualitative testing.

METHOD 5750
2.3.2 Quantitative testing. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, 40 specimens shall be taken from the sample unit for quantitative
testing. Twenty specimens shall be retained, unexposed and subjected to the
same physical tests as the exposed specimens with the intention of establish-
ing the average tensile strength for the purpose of computing the percent
loss of the exposed strips.
2.4 Viability control. Untreated material, similar in all other
respects to the treated material under test, shall be inoculated and in-
cubated with the test material to verify the viability of the test
organism. When untreated material is not available, material known to
support the growth of the particular organisms, as filter paper Whatman
No. 2, shall be used. If this untreated material fails to show an abund-
ant growth of the test organisms, the test shall be considered in-
conclusive and shall be repeated.
3.1 Qualitative. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
five specimens shall be tested from each sample unit for the “growth” deter-
mination.
3.2 Quantitative. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
20 specimens shall be tested from each sample unit for change in characteristic.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Autoclave. Autoclave capable of being operated at a steam
pressure of 15 pounds per square inch (103 kPa), and an exhaust temperature
of 250°F (121°C) for sterilization of the laboratory prepared culture media
as described in 4.1.4.
4.1.2 Glassware.
4.1.2.1 Culture flask. Erlenmeyer flasks for sterilizing and storing
culture media.
4.1.2.2 Culture dishes. Petri dishes which will permit intimate
contact between the substrate and the specimen.
4.1.2.3 16 ounce (0.5 L) bottles. Square bottom bottles with modified
screw caps for use in the quantitative test. The caps shall be prepared by
cutting a circle 10 to 20 mm in diameter from the center of the cap. A round

METHOD 5750
piece of glass filter cloth (Owens-Corning “Fiberglass” C.S. 30-A-20 or the
equivalent) equal in size to the inside of the cap shall be inserted in the
cap. A retaining ring of rubber or other material shall be placed over the
cloth l The 16 ounce (0.5 L) bottles may be replaced by the 150 mm petri
dishes in the quantitative testing of yarn, thread, and cordage.
4.1.3 Incubator. Incubator room or cabinet maintained at a tempera-
ture of 82° to 86°F (28° to 30°C), and a relative humidity of 85 to 95 percent.
4.1.4 Culture media. Culture media shall have the following com-
position:
Potassium dihydrogen phosphate . . . . . 1.00 g
Ammonium nitrate . . . . . . . . . . . 3.00 g
Magnesium sulfate heptahydrate . . . . . 0.25 g
Agar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.00 g
Distilled water . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000.00 ml
4.1.5 Organism. Chaetomium globosum ATCC 6205, QM459.
4.1.5.1 The culture medium for growing the Chaetomium globosum shall
be as described in 4.1.4.
4.2 Stock culture. Stock culture to be used for the preparation of
the suspension inoculum shall be grown in sterilized 250 ml Erlenmeyer flasks.
4.2.1 The culture medium is melted in an autoclave or in a boiling
water bath, cooled to about 122°F (50°C) and then approximately 50 ml
of the medium is poured into a sterile 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask. The flasks
with cotton stoppers are left undisturbed until the agar has hardened. A
sterile 70 mm disc of Whatman No. 2 filter paper is placed on the hardened
surface of the agar and then inoculated by flooding with a thin suspension
of Chaetomium globosum spores and decanting the excess suspension. The
inoculated culture medium is then incubated at 82° to 86°F (28° to 30°C) for
7 days or until covered with fruiting bodies and refrigerated until used.
Aseptic technique is required, cultures older than 14 days shall not be used.
4.3 Methods cited:
Method 4100 - Strength and Elongation, Breaking; and Tenacity; of
Thread and Yarn; Single Strand.
Method 5104 - Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth;
Ravel Strip Method.
Method 5830 - Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Standard Method.
Method 6016 - Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Non-
Spliced Specimen Method.

METHOD 5750
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Resistance to mildew shall be determined qualitatively or quan-
titatively, as specified in the procurement document.
5.1.1 Quantitative. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, resistance to mildew shall be determined by the change
in breaking strength using Method 5104 for cloth; Method 4100 for yarn and
thread; and Method 6016 for light cordage and the ravened specimens of
heavy cordage (rope) (see 2.2.3).
shall be leached before exposure to mildew, as specified in Method 5830.
5.3 Preparation of container. The culture medium in the flask shall
be melted in an autoclave or a boiling water bath, cooled to about 122°F
(50°C), and then poured into the sterile petri dish or bottle and left un-
disturbed until the agar has hardened. Approximately 25 ml are required for
each petri dish and 50 ml for each 16 ounce (0.5 L) bottle. The bottles are
to be cooled lying on their sides. Aseptic precautions are not required.
5.4 Inoculum. The spores of Chaetomium globosum are borne in dark
gray to black perithecia (fruiting bodies) and do not readily go into
suspension without disruption of the perithecia. This is easily
accomplished by scraping the perithecia from the surface of a mature
(10-14 day) culture and transferring them to a screw-capped flask or
bottle containing about 50 ml of water and an equal volume of 3-6 mm glass
beads. Several minutes vigorous shaking will release the spores from the
perithecia and the resulting suspension can be decanted for use.
5.5 Inoculation. The specimen shall be dipped in a fresh inoculum
suspension and placed in contact with the hardened agar in the culture
vessel. Other equally satisfactory methods of inoculation, such as
pipetting, may be used.
5.6 Incubation. The inoculated specimen shall be incubated for 14
days at a temperature of 82° to 86°F (28° to 30°C).
5.7 Evaluation.
5.7.1 Qualitative. At the end of the incubation period, the specimen
shall be examined for presence of any growth of Chaetomium globosum.

METHOD 5750
5.7.2 Quantitative. At the end of the incubation period, the inoculated
specimen shall be removed from the petri dish or bottle and gently rinsed
in tap water to remove surface mildew. It shall then be air-dried and
conditioned for 24 hours under standard atmospheric conditions in accordance
with Section 4 of this Standard. The uninoculated controls shall be similarly
rinsed, air dried, and conditioned. At the end of the conditioning period
the breaking strength of cloth, yarn, thread, and cordage, if required,
shall be determined according to the methods described in paragraph 5.1.1.
The breaking strength of cloth shall be determined in the warp direction
only, as described in Method 5104. If other physical tests are required,
the specimen shall be tested as described in the required method. The
same physical tests shall be conducted on exposed and on unexposed speci-
mens for the purpose of comparison in determining the degree of mildew
resistance of the infected samples.
5.8.1 Quantitative. The change in breaking strength or other
characteristics of the specimen shall be calculated as follows:
Change in characteristic, percent = O - E x 100
O
Where: O = Average value of unexposed specimens.
E = Average value of exposed specimens.
6. REPORT
6.1 Qualitative.
6.1.1 Each specimen tested shall be reported as showing “growth” or
“no growth” of Chaetomium globosum.
6.2 Quantitative.
6.2.1 The change in breaking strength or other characteristic of the sample
unit, after exposure to mildew, shall be the average of the results obtained from
the specimens tested and shall be reported as “percent change”, to the nearest
1.0 percent.
reported.

METHOD 5750
7. NOTES
7.1 Pure cultures of the organisms required to this and other methods or
tests for mildew resistance may be obtained from one of the following:
(a) American Type Culture Collection (ATCC)
12301 Parklawn Drive
Rockville, MD 20852
(b) (QM cultures)
USDA Northern Regional Research Center
ARS Culture Collection
1815 No. University Street
Peoria, IL 61604

METHOD 5760
July 20, 1978
MILDEW RESISTANCE OF TEXTILE MATERIALS;

MIXED CULTURE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the mildew resistance of
textile materials.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Qualitative.
2.1.1 Cloth. For visual examination, the specimen shall be a square of
cloth 2 inches by 2 inches (51 by 51 mm).
2.1.2 Yarn, thread, cordage, tape. For visual examination, the specimen
shall be of appropriate size for placing in a 100 mm petri dish. Heavy cordage
specimens, representative of the sample unit to be tested, shall be ravelled
to give a set of yarns 6 inches (152 mm) long, tied together, which can be
conveniently placed in a petri dish.
2.2 Quantitative.
2.2.1 Cloth. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the
cloth specimen shall be as described in Method 5104, except that it shall be
approximately 6 inches (152 mm) long, with the long direction parallel to
the warp.
2.2.2 Yarn and thread. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, yarn and thread specimens shall be as described in Method 4100.
2.2.3 Cordage. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
cordage specimens shall be prepared as in Method 6016, except for twisted
cordage samples of 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter or larger, when the speci-
men shall be ravelled to a diameter and cut to a length appropriate for
inoculation and testing for change in breaking strength as described in
Method 6016.
2.3.1 Qualitative testing. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, five specimens shall be taken for qualitative testing.

METHOD 5760
2.3.2 Quantitative testing. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, 40 specimens shall be taken from the sample unit for quantitative
testing. Twenty specimens shall be retained, unexposed and subjected to the
same physical tests as the exposed specimens for the purpose of comparison
to determine the degree of mildew resistance of the affected specimens.
2.3.3 Viability control. Untreated specimens, similar in all other
respects as the treated specimens under test, shall be inoculated and
incubated with the test culture to verify the viability of the test
organisms. When an untreated test specimen is unavailable, untreated
material similar to the test specimen in construction, fiber, and weight
may be substituted. If this control specimen fails to show an abundant
growth of mildew, the test shall be considered inconclusive and shall
be repeated.
3.1 Qualitative. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
five specimens shall be tested from each sample unit for “growth” determination.
3.2 Quantitative. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
20 specimens shall be tested from each sample unit for change in characteristic.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Autoclave. Autoclave capable of being operated at a steam
pressure of 15 pounds per square inch (103 kPa) and an exhaust temperature
of 250°F (121°C) for sterilization of the laboratory prepared culture media
as described in 4.1.4.
4.1.2 Glassware.
4.1.2.1 Culture flask. Erlenmeyer flasks for sterilizing and storing
culture media.
4.1.2.2 Culture dishes. Petri dishes which will permit intimate con-
tact between the substrate and the specimen.
4.1.2.3 16 ounce (0.5 L) bottles. Square bottom bottles with modified screw
caps
. for use in the quantitative
. test. The caps shall be prepared by
cutting a circle 10 to 20 mm in diameter from the center of the cap. A
round piece of glass filter cloth (Owens-Corning ‘Fiberglass” C. S. 30-A-20
or equivalent) equal in size to the inside of the cap shall be inserted in
the cap. A retaining ring of rubber or other material shall be placed over
the cloth. The 16 ounce (0.5 L) bottles may be replaced by the 150 mm petri
dishes in the quantitative testing of yarn, thread and cordage.

METHOD 5760
4.1.3 Incubator. Incubator room or cabinet maintained at a tempera-
ture of 82° to 86°F (28° to 30°C), and a relative humidity of 85 to 95
percent.
4.1.4 Culture media. Culture media shall have the following com-
position:
Potassium dihydrogen phosphate 1.00 g
Ammonium nitrate 3.00 g
Magnesium sulfate heptahydrate 0.25 g
Agar 20.00 g
Distilled water 1000.00 ml
4.1.4.1 Stock culture medium. All stock cultures shall be maintained
on potato dextrose agar slants.
4.1.5 Organisms.
4.1.5.1 Chaetomium globosum. ATCC 6205; QM459.
4.1.5.2 Myrothecium verrucaria. ATCC 9095; QM460.
4.1.5.3 Trichoderma sp. ATCC 9645; QM365.
4.1.5.4 Memnoniella echinata. ATCC 11973; QM1225.
4.1.5.5 Aspergillus niger. ATCC 6275; QM458.
4.1.5.6 Aspergillus clavatus. ATCC 18214; QM862.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 4100 - Strength and Elongation, Breaking; and Tenacity; of
Method 5104 - Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth;
Ravel Strip Method.
Method 5804 - Weathering Resistance of Cloth; Accelerated
Weathering Method.
Method 5830 - Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Standard Method.
Method 6016 - Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage;
Non-Spliced Specimen Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Resistance to mildew shall be determined qualitatively or quan-
titatively, as specified in the procurement document.

METHOD 5760
5.1.1 Quantitative. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
resistance to mildew shall be determined by the change in breaking
strength using Method 5104 for cloth; Method 4100 for yarn and thread; and
Method 6016 for light cordage and the ravened specimens of heavy cordage (rope)
(see 2.2.3).
shall be subjected to accelerated weathering, Method 5804, followed by leaching
Method 5830, before exposure to mildew.
5.3 Stock culture. Stock cultures to be used for the preparation of
the spore-suspension inoculum shall be maintained on potato dextrose agar
slants (see 4.1.4.1). All cultures not used after 21 days shall be dis-
carded.
5.4 Inoculum. The inoculum shall consist of a mixed spore suspension.
Approximately 10 ml of 0.05 percent Sodium lauryl Sulfate (Duponol or other
product) or similar nontoxic wetting agent shall be poured into each stock
culture tube, the spores dispersed with the aid of an inoculating needle, and
the resulting suspensions combined and extended to 200 ml with the wetting agent.
5.4.1 Inoculum. The spores of Chaetomium globosum are borne in dark
gray to black perithecia (fruiting bodies) and do not readily go into
suspension without disruption of the perithecia. This is easily
accomplished by scraping the perithecia from the surface of a mature (10-
14 day) culture and transferring them to a screw-capped flask or bottle
containing about 50 ml of water and an equal volume of 3-6 m glass
beads. Several minutes vigorous shaking will release the spores from the
perithecia and the resulting suspension can be decanted for use.
5.5 Inoculation.
5.5.1 The chemical constituents of the test culture medium shall be
carefully weighed and completely dissolved in the distilled water, after
which the 2 percent agar is added, melted, and 25 ml aliquots of the warm
agar medium poured into sterilized petri dishes. When the medium has
hardened, the specimens shall be placed on the agar surface.
5.5.2 The specimen shall be placed in the dish or bottle. A ravened
strip specimen shall be folded approximately 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from each
end and the central portion placed on the agar surface. Unless otherwise
specified in the procurement document, 20 replica specimens shall be
inoculated. An equal number shall be retained as uninoculated specimens.
5.5.3 The specimen shall be inoculated by pipetting 2 ml of the mixed
spore suspension onto the upper surface of that portion of the specimen lying
on the surface of the agar.

METHOD 5760
5.6 Incubation. The inoculated specimens shall be incubated at a
temperature of 82° to 86°F (28° to 30°C). The duration of the incubation
period for cloth shall be as follow
2
S: If the material weighs 21 ounces or
less per square yard (712 g/m or less), the specimen shall be incubated for 2
14 days; if the material weighs more than 21 ounces per square yard (712 g/m
or more), the specimen shall be incubated for 21 days.
5.7 Evaluation.
5.7.1 Qualitative. At the end of the incubation period, the inoculated
specimen shall be examined for the presence of any growth of mildew.
5.7.2 Quantitative. At the end of the incubation period, the inoculated
specimen shall be removed from the petri dish and gently rinsed in tap
water to remove surface mildew. It shall then be air-dried and conditioned
for 24 hours under standard atmospheric conditions in accordance with Section
4 of this Standard. The uninoculated controls shall be similarly rinsed,
air-dried, and conditioned. At the end of the conditioning period, the breaking
strength of cloth, yarn, thread, and cordage, if required, shall be determined
according to the methods described in paragraph 5.1.1. The breaking strength of
the cloth shall be determined in the warp direction only, as described in
Method 5104. If other physical tests are required, the specimen shall be
tested as described in the required method. The same physical tests shall
be conducted on exposed and on unexposed specimens for the purpose of comparison
in determining the degree of mildew resistance of the infected samples.
5.8.1 Quantitative. The change in breaking strength or other char-
acteristic of the specimen shall be calculated as follows:
O
Where: O = Average value of unexposed specimens.
E = Average value of exposed specimens.
6. REPORT
6.1 Qualitative.
6.1.1 Each specimen tested shall be reported as showing “growth” or
“no growth” of mildew.

MBTHOD 5760
6.2 Quantitative.
6.2.1 The change in breaking strength or other characteristic of the
sample unit after exposure to mildew shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported as percent change,
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Pure cultures of the organisms required in this and other methods or
test for mildew resistance may be obtained upon request from one of the following:
(a) American Type Culture Collection (ATCC)
12301 Parklawn Drive
Rockville, MD 20852
(b) (QM cultures)

USDA Northern Regional Research Center
ARS Culture Collection
1815 No. University Street
Peoria, IL 61604

METHOD 5762
July 20, 1978
MILDEW RESISTANCE OF TEXTILE MATERIALS; SOIL BURIAL METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is considered to be the most severe microbiological test
procedure available. It is intended for use with textile materials which
require high resistance to fungus attack or may be subjected to severe
molding conditions such as prolonged contact with the ground during use of
long exposure in severe climate. It may also be used as a test in evaluating
new fungicides, especially when a known fungicide of established efficiency
is used as a reference standard.
2* TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document the test
specimen shall be as follows.
2.1.1 Cloth. The cloth specimen shall be as specified in Method 5104
except that the long dimension shall be parallel with the warp.
2.1.2 Thread and yarn. The specimen shall be specified in Method 4100.
2.1.3 Webbing. The specimen shall be as specified in Method 6016.
2.1.4 Cordage. The specimen shall be as specified In Method 6016 except
that for cordage of 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter or larger shall be as specified
in Method 6015 except that the length between the inner ends of the splices
shall be 3 to 5 feet (1 to 1.5 m).
2.2 Viability control. Untreated material similar in all other respects
to the treated material except that when a cloth specimen is to be tested,
the control specimens shall 2 be untreated cloth of about 12 to 14 ounces per
square yard (407 to 475 g/m ).
2.3.1 Forty specimens shall be taken from the sample unit. Twenty of the
specimens shall be retained unburied and subjected to the same physical tests
as the twenty buried specimens for the purpose of comparison to determine
the degree of mildew resistance of the affected specimens.
3* NUMBER OF DETERMINATIONS
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, 20 determinations
shall be made on each sample unit for a change of characteristic.

METHOD 5762
4.1 Soil bed. The soil shall be composted of equal parts of:
a. Good topsoil (soils with high clay content should not be used).
b. Well rotted and shredded manure of leaf mold.
c. Course sand (sand of a 10 or 40 mesh is best).
The soil shall be rich with microbial life which decomposes cellulose as
determined in 5.4. The soil shall not tend to pack closely or become sticky
when damp. The soil mixture shall be aged 3 months at 82 to 86°F (27 to 30°C)
before use and mixed after each 2 weeks of aging. If at the end of 3 months
aging the soil fails to degrade untreated cloth when tested as specified in
5.4 the aging should be continued until it does. Aged soil can be stored
and reused indefinitely so long as activity can be demonstrated when tested
as specified in 5.4.
4.1.1 The soil shall be maintained at between 20 and 30 percent moisture,
based on the dry weight of the soil, at a temperature of 82 to 86°F (28° to
30°C). Water lost during use due to evaporation shall be replaced without
deforming the soil bed. If the surrounding atmosphere is maintained at
85 to 95 percent relative humidity this loss is negligible.
4.1.2 The soil shall be adjusted to a pH between 6.5 and 7.5. Periodic
tests and adjustments should be made to maintain the soil within the desired
range by addition of appropriate amounts of calcium carbonate or agricultural
ground limestone to raise pH, or flowers of sulfur to lower the PH.
4.2 Soil container. The container shall be of wood (Cypress or Redwood
recommended) or other suitable material such as plastic or stainless steel
in a size which is convenient to handle and having a depth of at least
5 inches (127 mm).
4.3 Incubator. Incubator room or cabinet maintained at a temperature of
82° to 86°F (28° to 30°C), and a relative humidity of 85 to 95 percent.
4.4 Methods cited.
Method 4100, Strength and Elongation, Breaking; and Tenacity; of
Ravel Strip Method.
Method 5830, Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Standard Method.
Method 6015, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage;
Method 6016, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage, Non-

METHOD 5762
5. PROCEDURE
shall be leached as described in Method 5830, before exposure to mildew.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the
resistance to mildew shall be determined by the change in breaking strength
using Method 5104 for cloth; Method 4100 for yarn and thread; Method 6016
for light cordage and webbing; and Method 6015 for rope.
shall be exposed in the incubator 2, 4, 6, 8 and 12 weeks. The test may
be terminated at any interval if the samples have lost at least 50 percent
of their tensile strength.
5.4 Viability
— . control. Untreated material shall be exposed in the soil
bed every 10 days throughout the periods of test in order to verify the microbial
activity of the soil. The soil shall be considered to be satisfactory if the
untreated controls lose not less than 50 percent of their tensile strength
in 5 days.
5.5 Exposure. The specimen after being wet-out (see 5.1) shall be buried
in the soil.
5.5.1 The specimen shall be placed flat on a 4 inch (102 mm) bed of soil,
spaced at least 1 inch (25 mm) from any other specimen and covered with 1
inch (25 mm) of loose soil.
5.5.2 When a specimen of rope is exposed, 1 foot (305 mm) of the center
portion of the specimen shall be buried to a depth of about 4 inches (102 mm)
and the ends of the spliced specimen from the end of the splice to the end
of the eye, shall be held out of contact with the soil.
5.6 Evaluation. At the end of the exposure period the specimen shall be
removed from the soil bed and, if not extensively degraded, gently washed
to remove soil, air-dried and then conditioned to equilibrium according to
Section 4 of this Standard. At the end of the conditioning period the
breaking strength, if required, shall be determined as described in 5.2.
If other physical tests are required the specimen shall be tested as described
in the required method. The same physical tests shall be conducted on exposed
and unexposed specimens for the purpose of comparison in determining the
degree of mildew resistance of the affected specimens.
5.7 Calculation of results. The change in breaking strength or other
characteristic of the specimen shall be calculated as follows:
O
FED-STD-191A
METHOD 5762
Where: O = Value before exposure to mildew.
E = Value after exposure to mildew.
6. REPORT
6.1 The change in breaking strength or other characteristic of the sample
unit after exposure to mildew shall be the average of the results obtained
from the specimens tested and shall be reported as “percent change” to the
reported.

METHOD 5764
July 20, 1978
INSECT RESISTANCE OF TEXTILE MATERIALS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended to be used to evaluate the effectiveness of
chemical insect deterrents applied to textile materials. This is accomplished
by measuring quantitatively the amount of feeding (extent of damage) by a
specified number and type of insects for a prescribed time under controlled
temperature and humidity.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be free of any solvents or carriers used in the
application of chemical treatments and of any solvents or auxiliary agents
used in subsequent durability tests.
2.2 The required specimens shall be as follows:
2.2.1 Treated specimens.
2.2.1. 2 Cloth. Each specimen shall have an area of two square inches
(1290 mm ) and cut from the sample unit so that no two specimens contain
the same warp and/or filling yarns.
2.2.1.2 Yarn. Each specimen shall be prepared by uniformly winding one
layer of yarn on a square or rectangular piece of glazed
2
cardboard, glass,
or metal with an area of two square inches (1290 mm ). The surface of the
cardboard, glass, or metal shall be covered substantially by the yarn.
2.2.1.32 Carpet. Each specimen shall have an area of two square inches
(1290 mm ) and cut from the sample unit so that no two specimens contain the
same warp and/or filling yarns. The edges of the specimens are secured by
coating the backing yarns with cellulose nitrate dissolved in acetone. For
the cloth weight loss method, specimens are prepared by stapling pieces of
yarn removed from the sample unit to
2
pieces of glazed paper, each having an
area of two square inches (1290 mm ) so that the surface is covered substantially
by the yarn.
2.2.2 Untreated specimens. The specimens shall be as specified in 2.2.1
except that they shall be cut from the same material as in 2.2.1 before it
has been treated with insect deterrent.
2.2.3 Standard control specimens. The specimens shall be as specified in
2.2.1 except that they shall be cut from a standard control cloth.

METHOD 5764
4. APPARATUS, MATERIALS, INSECTS
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Test cages. Each cage may be any glass or metal flat-bottomed
container large enough to permit the test insects to be either in contact
with or off the horizontally placed test specimen. It must be well ven-
tilated and provided with a 60-mesh metal screen cover.
4.1.2 No. 3 Gooch crucibles.
4.1.3 Analytical balance accurate to ± 0.2 mg.
4.1.4 Incubator - capable of maintaining a temperature of 81° ± 2°F (27° ±

1°C) and a relative humidity of 55 ± 5 percent and light excluded.
4.1.5 U.S. Standard Sieve Series Screens Nos. 8, 14, 16, 20, and 40.
4.1.6 Forceps.
4.1.7 Soft hair brush.
4.1.8 Air vacuum apparatus.
4.2 Material.
4.2.1 Standard control cloth. Pure, undyed, scoured wool fabric (see 7.1).
4.3 Insects.
4.3.1 Black Carpet Beetle (Attagenus piceus (Oliv.), (see 7.6)). Larvae are
used from cultures maintained as described in the Appendix. Larvae must be in
the weight range of 6 to 7 mg each, and of such a size that they pass through
a U.S. Standard Sieve Series No. 14 sieve, and are retained on a No. 16 sieve
as described in Appendix.
4.3.2 Furniture Carpet Beetle (Anthrenus flavipes (LeConte), (see 7.6)). Larvae
from cultures maintained as described in the Appendix may be used as alternative
test insects with the black carpet beetle.

METHOD 5764
4.3.3 Webbing Clothes Moth (Tineala bisselliella (Hum) (see 7.6)). Larvae are
used from cultures maintained as described in the Appendix. Larvae must be
25 to 27 days old as measured from the date of egg deposition to the time
they are put on test since older larvae may pupate during the test period.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Control specimens for insect activity.
5.1.1 Control specimens of the standard control cloth shall be exposed
to the same conditions as the test specimens.
5.1.2 Each lot of cloth used for control specimens and lots of cloth
used as rearing medium shall be thoroughly checked to determine suitability
prior to use.
5.2 Excrement weight method for carpet beetles.
5.2.1 Three sets of specimens of four specimens each, one set from the
material to be tested, one set from the untreated material and one set from
the standard control cloth prepared as specified in paragraph 2 shall be
freed of any loosely adhering dirt or dust, (see 7.7), and placed face down in
separate test cages. The four specimens of untreated material tested are
for comparison purposes only.
5.2.2 Ten larvae as specified in 4.3.1 or 4.3.2 are placed on top of
each specimen and the cages covered with 60-mesh screening.
5.2.3 The cages containing the test specimens and larvae are kept for
14 days at 81° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C), and 55 ± 5 percent relative humidity. Light
shall be excluded.
5.2.4 Immediately after the 14 day period, remove and record the number
of living and dead insects. Survival counts shall be made in all cases.
Since they are important in demonstrating the vitality of the test larvae.
5.2.5 Damage to a test specimen is determined by the quantity of excrement
deposited on the test specimen during the time period.
5.2.5.1 Remove the test specimen from the cage and by alternately tapping
and brushing, transfer all loose material, excrement, exuvial, etc., back
into the test cage.
5.2.5.2 Transfer contents of test cage into a No. 3 Gooch crucible and,
by repeated tapping of the crucible, the excrement is sifted through the
perforations into one of a pair of matched watch glasses. For the purpose
of this test all the material that sifts through the perforations of the
Gooch crucible shall be construed as excrement.

METHOD 5764
5.2.5.3 Weigh the excrement on an analytical balance accurately to the
nearest 0.2 mg and record.
5.2.6 Evaluation.
5.2.6.1 The test specimen is considered satisfactorily resistant to carpet
beetles if an average quantity of excrement of not over 5 mg per specimen is
deposited, provided that no single specimen shows more than 6 mg of excrement
and that under the same conditions, the controls show an average quantity of
excrement of not less than 15 mg per specimen.
5.2.6.2 The test is invalid if the quantity of excrement deposited on the
control specimens average less than 15 mg per specimen, or if less than 90
percent of the control larvae survive.
5.3 Cloth weight loss method for carpet beetle and clothes moths.
5.3.1 Three sets of specimens of eight specimens each, one set from the
material to be tested, one set from the untreated material and one set from
the standard control cloth are used for this method. Four specimens from
each set shall be used for feeding tests and the other four shall be used
as humidity checks. The specimens from the untreated material are tested
for comparison only.
5.3.1.2 The four specimens from each set that are used for humidity checks
are exposed to the same conditions as the feeding test specimens except that
larvae are not used. A change in the weight of the humidity check specimens
will be due to change in moisture content only and shall be used to adjust
the weights of the feeding test specimens.
5.3.2 The feeding test specimens and the humidity check specimens from
each set are freed of any loosely adhering dirt or dust and placed in sepa-
rate test cages at 81° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) and 55 ± 5 percent relative humidity
for 48 hours before weighing.
5.3.3 Weigh the specimens on an analytical balance to the nearest 0.2
mg alternating the weighings between the test specimens and the humidity
check specimens and record in the order of the weighings.
5.3.4 Ten larvae of the required insects (see 4.3) are placed on each feeding
test specimen and the test cages covered with 60-mesh screen.
5.3.5 The test specimens and humidity check specimens are kept for 14 days
at 81° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) and 55 ± 5 percent relative humidity. Light shall be
excluded.

METHOD 5764
5.3.6 Immediately after the 14 day period, remove and record the number of
living and dead insects. Survival counts shall be made in all cases. Since
they are important in demonstrating the vitality of the test larvae.
5.3.7 Damage to the test specimens is determined by weight loss of the
specimen due to the feeding of the larvae as follows:
5.3.7.1 Brush the specimens to free them of all loose material such as
excrement, webbing cast skins, loose fibers etc. Forceps are usually
necessary to remove masses of webbing and excrement from clothes moths, test
specimens and containers.
5.3.7.2 The cleaned test specimens and the humidity check specimens shall
be reconditioned at 81 ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) and 55 ± 5 percent relative humidity
for not less than 24 hours.
5.3.7.3 The test specimens, and the humidity check specimens shall be
weighed on an analytical balance to the nearest 0.2 mg and recorded in the
same manner as specified in 5.3.3 and under conditions specified in 5.3.7.2.
5.3.7.4 Humidity check shall show not more than 5 percent variation in
weight before and after the test.
5.3.7.5 The loss of weight, in mg, due to the feeding of the test larvae,
as adjusted for humidity changes, shall be calculated as follows:
Where: L = adjusted loss of weight in mg due to insect feeding;

A = average weight of the four test specimens before testing;
B = average weight of the four humidity control specimens before
testing;
C = average weight of the four humidity control specimens after
testing;
D = average weight of the four test specimens after testing.
This formula is applicable regardless of whether the humidity control
specimens gain or lose weight.
5.3.8 Evaluation.
5.3.8.1 The tested textile is considered satisfactorily resistant to the
insect pests used, if the average loss of weight due to feeding is not more
than 8 mg, provided that under the same conditions the average loss in weight
of the control specimens is not less than 30 mg. No individual test specimen
shall show more than 10 mg loss in weight.

METHOD 5764
5.3.8.2 The test is invalid if the amount of feeding results In less than
30 mg average weight loss per control specimen or less than 75 percent of the
control larvae survive.
6. REPORT
6.1 Excrement weight method (see 5.2). The specimen tested shall be reported
as “pass” or “fail” and the report shall also contain the following infor-
mation.
6.1.1 Weight of excrement in mg of each test specimen and standard control
specimens. The number of larvae alive at the conclusion of the test.
6.2 The cloth weight loss method (see 5.3). The specimens tested shall be
reported as “pass” or “fail” and the-report shall also contain the following
information.
6.2.1 Individual weights of the test specimens and humidity check specimens
before and after the testing.
6.2.2 Loss in weight of each test specimen and standard control specimen.
6.2.3 Number of larvae alive at the conclusion of the test.
6.2.4 Number of larvae pupated.
7. NOTES
7.1 MTCC moth test cloth is a standard pure, undyed, scoured wool fabric
and is available from Test Fabrics, Inc., 55 Van Dam Street, New York, N.Y.
10013.
7.2 Purina Laboratory Chow Meal may be ordered from Ralston Purina Company,
P.O. Box 240, Davenport, IA.
7.3 Gaines Dog Meal is available locally or from General Foods Corporation,
P.O. Box 60, Youngstown, OH 44501.
7.4 Yeasts which have proven satisfactory are (a) Brewer’s Yeast Powder,
Mead Johnson Company, available at most drug stores; (b) Dry Brewer’s Yeast,
U.S.P. from Yeast Products, Inc., 455 Fifth Avenue, Patterson, NJ with a
minimum potency, per gram, of 150 micrograms thiamine, 45 micrograms ribo-
flavin and 400 micrograms niacin.
7.5 Fish meal is available from National Sea Products LTD., 39 Upper Water
Street, Halifax, Nova Scotia, Canada.

METHOD 5764
7.6 Insect larvae are available from Crop Protection Institute, Durham,
NH 03824; and Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation, P.O. Box 2037, Madison,
WI 53701.
7.7 No. 3 Special Filter Cloth from Mechanical Felt and Textiles Company,
50 W. 18th St., Weehawken, NJ and No. 70105 all-Wool Felt color 10 White,
from the American Felt Company, 315 Fourth Avenue, New York, NY Specific
fabrics used for rearing moths must be free from insecticides.
7.8 It is extremely important that contamination, dirt, and dust be re-
moved from the test specimens since it could be included later in the excre-
ment weight. The test specimens, if their construction permits, can be
vacuumed with the open end of a vacuum cleaner hose nozzle to remove dirt
and other particles which might interfere with the subsequent determination
of the excrement weight. It is suggested that each specimen be cleaned
further by alternately tapping and brushing the specimens to rid them of
any loose material such as dust, immediately before the specimens are sub-
jected to testing.

METHOD 5764
July 20, 1978
APPENDIX
PROCEDURE FOR REARING AND HANDLING TEST INSECTS
1. SCOPE
1.1 The standardized procedure for rearing test insects is an essential
part of the standard test procedure for determining resistance of fabrics to
insect pests. The following procedures are to be used for rearing the black
carpet beetle (Attagenus piceus (Oliv.)), webbing clothes moth (Tineala
bisselliella (Hum)), and furniture carpet beetle (Anthrenus flavipes (LeConte)).
2. APPARATUS; MATERIAL
2.1 Rearing containers, wide mouth glass jars of 1 or 2 quart (0.95 or 1.9 L)
capacity or any other suitable type container such as mason jars, battery jars,
or tin cans with lids replaced by coarse filter paper, screens or cloth covers.
2.2 Oviposition cage. A tin can 6-1/2 inches (165 mm) high and 6 inches
(152 mm) in diameter. The bottom is removed and replaced with 16-mesh screen
wire. Wool flannel is placed beneath the screen and supported in place by a
cardboard circle fastened with masking tape to the rim of the can. A closure
for the culture jars is soldered in place in an inverted position in the center
of the lid of the can and an opening 2 inches (51 mm) in diameter is cut in the
can lid within the area inclosed by the closure.
2.3 Rearing medium.
2.3.1 Clean, scoured, undyed wool cloth supplemented with about one
teaspoonful of autoclave (15 p.s.i. (103 kPa) for 15 min.) dry Brewer’s yeast
or fish meal to each 30 g of cloth (see 7.4 and 7.5).
2.3.2 Purina Laboratory Chow Meal (see 7.2) which passes through U.S. Standard
Sieve Series Screen No. 16, with the coarse fraction discarded, or
2.3.3 95 percent by weight Gaines Dog Meal ground to pass through No. 20
screen plus 5 percent dry Brewer’s yeast (see 7.3, 7.4).
2.4 Fumigant carbon disulfide.
2.5 Mold inhibitor propionic acid.
2.6 Soft hair brush.
2.7 Kraft paper.

METHOD 5764
2.8 Entomological forceps.
2.9 1/2 inch (13 mm) glue brush.
3. PROCEDURE
3.1 Black carpet beetle.
3.1.1 Sterilize the rearing medium to kill mites or insects that may be
present. This may be done by an efficient fumigant (1 ml carbon disulfide per
gallon) preferably in sealed glass containers for one week, dry heat (176°F
(80°C) for four hours or 212°F (1OO°C) for one hour) or autoclave at 15 p.s.i.
(103 kPa) for 15 minutes. Fumigated medium must be spread in shallow trays
and cured in a ventilated hood for one or more days. Overheating may destroy
the food value of the medium.
3.1.2 Store the sterile medium in sealed containers. Before using, dry
the medium and adjust to 13 percent moisture by adding distilled water.
3.1.2.1 To dry the medium spread a quantity of medium to a depth of 1/2 to
3/4 inch (13 to 19 mm) in trays and dry to a constant weight (30 to 44 hours)
in a forced draft oven at 151°F (66°C). Cool the medium and temper to 13
percent moisture Immediately.
3.1.2.1.1 Tempering to 13 percent moisture. Determine the total weight of the
medium and for each 100 g, prepare 15 ml distilled water plus 0.38 ml propionic
acid. Sieve the medium through a No. 20 screen. Add the combined water and
propionic acid to the coarse fraction retained on the screen. Finally pour
from tray to tray several times, pass through a No. 16 screen and place in
sealed containers until needed for cultures. The final mixture should contain
13 percent moisture and 0.38 percent propionic acid.
3.1.3 The rearing room or incubator shall have a constant temperature of
81° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) and a relative humidity of 55 ± 5 percent.
3.1.4 Maintenance of cultures. It is possible to maintain cultures of
the black carpet beetle so that larvae of testing size and age are available
at all times. This can be accomplish only when overcrowding is prevented
and cultures are kept well supplied with food.
3.1.5 The black carpet beetle completes its life cycle in 8 to 10 months
when reared and handled under optimum conditions as follows:
3.1.5.1 Once each week, pass maturing stock larvae cultures through a
U.S. Standard Sieve Series Screen No. 16 and collect adults and prepare
separately. The majority of the pupae and the mature larvae can be separated
by spreading them out on Kraft paper. The larvae tend to cling to the paper

METHOD 5764
when it is rolled and tilted to an upright position over a pan. The pupae
fall into the pan and then the clinging larvae can be shaken into another pan.
A No. 8 screen is useful for separating the small number of larvae still remaining
with the pupae. The pupae are kept in a screen covered jar for one week for
emergency. Count out 50 adults at random and measure their volume in a 15 ml
centrifuge tube. The volume of 50 adults should be 1.2 to 1.5 ml if they are
developed normally. Transfer the adults to a pint (0.47 L) jar three-fourths full
of rearing medium (containing 13 percent water). Cover the jar with a filter
paper lid and set aside to age at 81° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C), and 55 ± 5 percent
relative humidity.
3.1.5.2 The majority of eggs are laid during the next ten days, and these
hatch 6 to 12 days after laying. The eggs are too fragile to be handled
without injury and the jar must not be disturbed for at least 11 weeks. At
this time, pass its contents through a No. 20 screen. A gentle stream of
air, such as is produced by a hair dryer, is useful in removing cast skins.
The larvae and coarse material (dead adults, coarse food particles, etc.)
retained on the No. 20 screen are then separated by placing the material on
the high end of a sloping platform or tray. By putting a light over this
end, the larvae, since they are negatively phototrophic, will crawl away
from the coarse material and collect at the other end of the tray. The col-
lected larvae are then allowed to crawl through a nest No. 14, No. 16, and
No. 20 screens under a light. After 5 minutes, the contents of the screens
can be emptied into separate trays. Larvae caught in the mesh are gently
stimulated with a soft brush to crawl through the screen or they can usually
be removed without injury with Ward’s feather-weight entomological forceps.
Mites may be removed from the larvae, pupae, or adults by placing the infested
insects in a jar that is half-filled with sterilized rearing medium and ro-
tating the jar, screening to separate larvae from the medium and destroying
or sterilizing this food which contains mites. It may be necessary to repeat
this procedure several times.
3.1.5.3 Measure the volume of larvae collected in a centrifuge tube and
estimate the percentage represented by each fraction, based on total numbers.
For this purpose, 1 ml contains approximately 45 larvae held on a No. 14 screen,
70 larvae on a No. 16 screen, and 90 larvae held on a No. 20 screen. The
number of larvae passed through the No. 20 screen should be estimated roughly
and made a part of the total. If 10 to 20 percent of the larvae are not of a
size to be held on the No. 14 screen, return all fractions of the larvae and
medium to the same jar and age one or two weeks longer. The above step is
quite important if satisfactory test larvae are to be obtained. When the jar
first produces 10 to 20 percent of larvae held on the No. 14 screen, collect
6 ml of the larvae held on the No. 16 screen (approximately 400), pass them
through sterile medium to remove mites, and transfer to quart (0.95 L) jar
3/4 find with medium. Save the remaining larvae held on the No. 16 screen
for tests and discard the larvae held on the No. 14 and the No. 20 screens. Add
6 ml of larvae held on a No. 16 screen from new cultures on each of the following
three weeks before starting a new jar. These are stock larvae cultures, which

METHOD 5764
will produce pupae 6 to 8 months later. Three months and five months after
starting the stock cultures, remove larvae from medium by a No. 16 screen as
described in 3.1.5.2 and transfer to fresh medium.
3.1.5.4 At the time the stock larvae are collected, test larvae may be
collected by means of the No. 14 and No. 16 screen. Larvae held on the No. 16
screen are test size, and they average 6 to 7 mg in weight. The unused larvae
held on the No. 16 screen can be saved for possible use as test larvae that same
week. All remaining larvae should be discarded at the end of the week.
3.1.5.5 A few weeks experience will determine the age of cultures meeting
the requirements for sizing and use of larvae. A deviation of more than one
week from this age indicates an abnormal rearing condition which may be
caused by food, mites, or various other conditions. Abnormal cultures should
be discarded.
3.2 Webbing clothes moth, (Tineala bisselliela (Hum)).
3.2.1 Adult moths are transferred to the oviposition cage and allowed to
deposit their eggs for 2 to 4 days.
3.2.1.1 The adult moths may be transferred to the pint (0.47 L) jar either by
use of a suitable suction or by introducing into the container with the
adults, a small amount of carbon dioxide (CO2) gas which will facilitate
the transfer of the moths.
3.2.1.2 When the 6-1/2 inch (165 mm) high by 6 inch (152 mm) diameter can is
used, the culture jar with the adult moths is fastened in place in the closure and
a bright light shined on the glass culture jar to drive the adults into the
oviposition cage.
3.2.2 The pieces of cloth on which the eggs have been deposited are re-
moved from the cage, placed in an enamel pan and vigorously brushed with a
1/2 inch (13 mm) glue brush to remove the eggs. The adult moths are removed
from the cage and destroyed. Since the eggs hatch in 4 days, this is the maxi-
mum interval that may be allowed between egg collections.
3.2.3 The eggs are screened through a 40-mesh sieve and retained on a
60-mesh sieve. The eggs are measured in a graduated centrifuge tube, 0.2 ml
representing approximately 4000 eggs.
3.2.4 The eggs are sprinkled on 4 by 10 inch (102 by 254 mm) strips of clean
scoured wool fabric (total 25 to 30 g) treated with about l teaspoonful of dry
yeast. The wool strips are rolled up and placed in a one or two quart (0.95 or
1.9 L) wide-mouthed jar, covered with filter paper lids and kept at 81° ± 2°F
(27° ± 1°C) and a relative humidity of 55 ± 5 percent for 25 to 27 days as
measured from the date of egg deposition to the time used for test (see 7.7).

METHOD 5764
3.2.5 All moths that are older than required for testing shall be des-
troyed or kept for the purpose of maintaining a quantity of insects of
testing age.
3.3 Furniture carpet beetle, (Anthrenus flavipes (LeConte)).
3.3.1 Place approximately 60 pupae in a rearing container with several
3 inch by 3 inch (76 by 76 mm) squares of wool cloth supplemented with dry
Brewer’s yeast or fish meal (see 7.4 and 7.5).
3.3.2 Examine rearing jars at weekly Intervals and provide sufficient
supplemental wool cloth to maintain an adequate food supply.
3.3.3 About eleven weeks after the pupae were placed in the rearing jars,
the larvae are removed from the wool cloth, excrement, pupae cases, etc.
After removing the excrement and excess Brewer’s yeast with a 40-meth sieve,
larvae clinging to the cloth can be removed with a soft brush. If handled
carefully, the larvae may also be transferred with light forceps.
3.3.4 The collected larvae are then allowed to crawl through nested
No. 14, 16, and 20 screens under a light. The larvae held on the No. 20
screen are test size and average 1.0 to 1.5 mg in weight. If more
than half of the larvae pass through the No. 20 screen, return all frac-
tions of the larvae and medium to the same jar and age one week longer.
A few weeks experience will determine the age of larvae meeting the require-
ments for sizing and use.
3.3.5 A portion of the larvae not used for tests can be placed in a
large stock jar which serves as a source supply for pupae for the rearing
jars.

METHOD 5800
July 20,1978
WEATHERING RESISTANCE OF CLOTH;

1. SCOPE
of cloth when subjected to a prolonged period of outdoor exposure. It is
applicable to cloth of all kinds.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be of such form and dimension to provide the material
required in the specified evaluation tests.
test used for determining the characteristic.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Specimen rack. The rack shall be a wooden frame open at the back to
allow free access of air to the specimen and providing means of fastening the
top and bottom edges of the specimens to it. The fasteners used must not be
made of corrodible materials.
4.1.2 Exposure area. A place unprotected from the sun and in the town and
state specified in the procurement document. Unless otherwise specified in
the procurement document, the cloth shall be exposed in a nonindustrial area.
4.1.3 Eppley Pyranometer or equivalent device. A detector used in the
measurement of the radiant energy of the sun at the exposure area. The Epply
Pyranometer is a differential thermopile with the hot - junction blackened and
the cold - junction whitened, it measures the radiation for a complete
hemisphere of the sky. The thermopile is covered by a precision ground, optical
glass envelope which is usefully transparent from about 280 to 2800 nm and
is replaceable. The EMF generated by the thermopile is recorded by a suitably
integrated potentiometer (see 7.1).

METHOD 5800
4.2 Method cited.
Grab Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, a specimen
of the standard sample shall be exposed at the same time and under the same
conditions as the specimen undergoing test.
5.2 No standard sample. When a standard sample has not been established, the
test specimen shall be exposed, and an equal and adjacent area of the original
cloth shall be retained for comparison.
5.3 The specimen shall be mounted on the frame, without tension, by securing
the edges with staples, tacks, or other suitable means. The warp direction
of the specimen shall be in the vertical position and shall be indicated on
the reverse stale of the specimen unless a selvage is present.
5.4 The specimen on the rack shall be exposed facing due south (or north if
exposed in the southern hemisphere) at an angle of 45 degrees from the
horizontal. The rack shall be at least 2 feet (610 mm) from the ground or
vegetation.
sufficient to provide a 2quantum of radiant energy equal to the required
number of langleys (MJ/m ).
5.5.1 During the exposure period, the radiant energy shall be measured by
means of the Eppley Pyranometer or equivalent instrument and the weather
condition recorded. The pyranometer shall be exposed at the same angle and
under the same conditions as the specimen.
5.6 At the end of the required exposure period, the specimen shall be removed
from the exposure area and placed, while dry, in a protected place.
5.7 Within 3 weeks after withdrawal from exposure, the specimen shall be
subjected to the required evaluation tests.
5.8 Calculation of results. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, the resistance to deterioration shall be evaluated as the change in
breaking strength of the weathered specimens when tested by the procedure
described in Method 5100. If other physical properties are required, the
specimen shall be tested as described in the required method. The evaluation
tests shall be made only on that part of the specimen which was fully exposed
and not protected by the frame or damaged when secured to the frame or rack.
The change in breaking strength or other characteristics shall be calculated
as follows:

METHOD 5800
Change in characteristics, percent = O - E x 100 or E - O x 100
O O
Where O = value before weathering deterioration.
E = value after weathering deterioration.
5.8.1 Standard sample. When a standard sample has been established, the
same evaluation tests shall be perfomed on the weathered test specimens and
on the weathered specimens from the standard sample. Unless otherwise specified
in the procurement document, the resistance to weathering shall be expressed as
“Satisfactory” or “Unsatisfactory”.
Satisfactory: When the percent change in characteristic of the sample
unit is equal to, or less than, or more than, as applicable, the percent change
of the standard.
Unsatisfactory: When the percent change in characteristic of the sample
unit is greater than, or less than, as applicable, the percent change of the
standard.
the same evaluation tests shall be performed on the weathered test specimens
and on the unweathered specimens. The resistance to weathering shall be expressed
as the change in breaking strength or other characteristic, calculated to the
6. REPORT
6.1 The locations of the exposure, town and state, and whether or not the
6.2 The specific dates and
2
duration of the exposure period or the total
radiation in langleys (MJ/m ) shall be reported.
when a standard sample has not been established, change in breaking strength
or other characteristic shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent.
7. NOTES
7.1 A machine of the type described may be purchased from the Eppley
Laboratory Inc., Newport, RI 02840.

METHOD 5804
July 20, 1978
WEATHERING RESISTANCE OF CLOTH;
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to deterior-
ation of cloth when subjected to accelerated weathering exposure. It is
applicable to cloth of all kinds.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be of such form and dimension to provide the
material required in the specified evaluation tests.
specimens tested from each sample unit shall be as required In the method of
4. APPARATUS
4.1 The weathering machine shall be the XW type or equivalent (see 7.1).
4.1.1 Vertical carbon arc mounted at the center of a vertical cylinder.
4.1.1.1 The arc shall be designed to accommodate either two or three
pairs of carbons but shall burn only one pair at a time, automatically
transferring from one pair to another as the carbons are consumed.
4.1.1.1.1 The carbons shall be Copper Clad Sunshine Arc Type, No. 22
for the upper pair and No. 13 for the lower pair.
4.1.2 The arc shall be operated on 60 A and 50 V across the arc for
alternating current and on 50 A and 60 V across the arc for direct current.
4.1.3 Removable panels (filters) of Corex D glass, or other enclosure
having equivalent absorbing or transmitting properties, shall surround
the arc.
4.1.4 A rotating rack with holders in which the specimens are sus-
pended vertically and normally to radiation from the arc with the center
of the face of the specimen at a radial distance of approximately 18
inches (457 mm) from the arc.

METHOD 5804
4.1.5 Water-spray nozzles shall be mounted horizontally (the water-
spray assembly vertically) in the test chamber inside the specimen rack
and so placed that the water shall strike the specimens evenly over their
entire length in the form of a fine spray in sufficient volume to cover
specimens Immediately on impact. The apparatus shall be so operated that
the specimens are exposed to successive cycles of 102 minutes of light
without spray and 18 minutes of light with spray.
4.1.6 Means for maintaining the required temperature of water in the
spray.
4.1.7 Means for maintaining the required pressure of water entering
the spray.
4.1.8 Means for delivering the required quantity of water per spray
nozzle to the specimen.
4.1.9 Exhaust fan to ventilate the arc effectively.
4.1.10 Black panel thermometer unit for measuring the temperature
within the machine. This unit shall consist of a metal panel to the
base of which is attached the sensitive portion of a bimetallic dial
type thermometer. The entire base is then coated twice with long lasting
baked enamel paint.
4.1.11 The weathering machine shall be located in an area free from
drafts with ambient temperature between 70 and 95°F (21 and 35°C)
and 40 to 80 percent relative humidity.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The number of hours of exposure shall be as specified in the
procurement document.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
the filters shall not be removed during exposure. When exposure
without filters is specified, only the Corex D glass filters shall
be removed. The stainless steel frames shall remain in place.
5.3 When a standard sample has been established, a specimen of the
standard sample shall be exposed at the same time and under the same
conditions as the specimens undergoing test.
5.4 When no standard sample has been established, the test specimen
shall be exposed and an equal adjacent area of the original material
retained but not exposed.

METHOD 5804
5.5 The rack shall rotate about the arc at a uniform speed of one
revolution per minute.
5.6 The temperature of water in the spray shall be 80° ± 10°F (27°
± 5°C).
5.7 The pressure of the water entering the spray shall be 12-18 psi
(83-124 kPa).
5.8 The quantity of water delivered to the specimens shall be 0.9 to
1.2 gallons; (3.4 to 4.5 L) per hour per spray nozzle.
5.9 The black panel temperature at the exposure plane of the specimen
rack shall be 155° ± 10°F (68° ± 5°C) when the filters are in place
and 175° ± 10°F (79° ± 5°C), when the filters are removed when measured in
the following manner:
5.9.1 Before reading the temperature, the racks in the machine shall be
fully loaded with specimens except for the black-panel and shall be in
operation long enough for thermal equilibrium to be established.
5.9.2 The black panel shall be mounted in the test-panel rack and
readings taken at the point where water spray is not striking the
panel.
5.10 The specimen shall be suspended on the rack without tension
and in such a way that the ends or corners cannot curl.
5.10.1 The warp direction of the specimen shall be in the vertical
position and shall be indicated on the reverse side of the cloth.
5.10.2 No test portion of the specimen shall be more than 7 inches
(178 mm) above or below the horizontal plane of the arc.
5.11 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the
filters shall be in place and the spray shall be operating.
5.12 The specimen shall be exposed to normal radiation from the arc
for the required period of time.
5.13 The filter frames shall be numbered 1 through 8 with permanent
numbers. The filters shall be thoroughly cleaned after each cycle. One
filter shall be removed and discarded after each 250 hours of operation;
that is filter #1 should be removed and replaced with a new filter after
250 hours, filter #2 after 500 hours, filter #3 after 750 hours, filter
#4 after 1,000 hours, until all filters have been changed. The procedure
shall then be repeated. A record shall be maintained showing when filters
were changed.

METHOD 5804
5.14 At the end of the required exposure period, the specimen shall be
removed from the machine and allowed to dry.
5.15 The characteristics and methods for determining the resistance
to deterioration shall be specified in the procurement document. The
evaluation tests shall be made only on that part of the specimen which
was fully exposed and not protected by the frame or damaged when secured
to the rack.
5.15.1 Standard sample. When no standard sample has been established,
the same tests shall be conducted on the weathered material undergoing
test and on the weathered standard.
5.15.2 No standard sample. When no standard sample has been established,
the same tests shall be conducted on the weathered and unweathered specimens
for the purpose of comparison in determining the degree of deterioration of
the exposed cloth.
5.16 Calculation of results. Percent change in the characteristic shall
Change in characteristic, percent =
Where: O = value before weathering deterioration.

E = value after weathering deterioration.
6. REPORT
6.1 The number of hours of exposure shall be reported.
6.2 Exposure unprotected by filters shall be reported.
6.3 Standard
— — sample. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
when a standard has been established, resistance to weathering shall be reported
as “Satisfactory” or “Unsatisfactory”.
Satisfactory: When the percent change in characteristic of the sample
unit is equal to, or less than, or more than, as applicable, the percent change
in characteristic of the standard.
Unsatisfactory: When the percent change in characteristic of the sample
unit is greater than, or less than, as applicable, the percent change in
characteristic of the standard.

METHOD 5804
6.4 No standard sample. When no standard sample has been established the
change in the characteristic shall be reported as specified in the applicable
test method or procurement document.
7* NOTES
7.1 A machine of the type described in this method may be obtained from
Atlas Electric Devices Company, 4114 N. Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, IL 60613.

METHOD 5830
July 20, 1978
LEACHING RESISTANCE OF CLOTH;

STANDARD METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for leaching cloth at room temperature. It is
applicable for leaching materials which are to be subjected to the mildew
resistance methods of group 5700.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
3.1 The number of test specimens required from each sample unit shall be as
specified in the subsequent evaluation test.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Water container or tank of such a shape and size that the specimen can
be submerged therein with all surfaces of the specimen having full access to
the water, and a ratio of the specimen to water shall be not less than 1 to
100 by weight.
4.2 Means of supplying a continuous flow of water to the bottom of the
container at a temperature of 80° to 85°F (27° to 29°C), and at a rate of
about five changes per hour. Means shall also be provided at the container
top for disposing of the overflow.
4.3 Means of suspending the specimens in such a manner that they do not
contact the container or each other during leaching.
4.4 Means for completely submerging the specimen.
5. PROCEDURE
80° to 85°F (27° to 29°C), and allowed to remain immersed for a period of 24
hours. At the end of the leaching period the specimen shall be removed from
the water and air-dried unless otherwise indicated by the procurement document.

METHOD 5830
6. REPORT

METHOD 5831
July 20, 1978
MINIMUM EXPOSURE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for leaching cloth at room temperature. It is
applicable for leaching materials which are to be subjected to the mildew-
resistance methods of group 5700. The leaching is not as severe as that
described in Method 5830.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Water container or tank of such a shape and size that the specimen can
be submerged therein with all surfaces of the specimen having full access to the
water, and a ratio of the specimen to water shall be not less than 1 to 100 by
weight.
4.2 Means of supplying a continuous flow of water to the bottom of the
container at a temperature of 70° to 80°F (21° to 27°C), and at a rate of 6
changes per 24 hours. Means shall also be provided at the container top for
disposing of the overflow.
4.3 Means of suspending the specimens in such a manner that they do not
contact the container or each other during leaching.
4.4 Means for completely submerging the specimen.
5. PROCEDURE
70° to 80°F (21° to 27°C), and allowed to remain immersed for a period of 24
hours. At the end of the leaching period the specimen shall be removed from
the water and air-dried unless otherwise indicated by the procurement document.

METHOD 5831
6. REPORT

METHOD 5832
July 20, 1978
PREWET SPECIMEN METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for leaching materials which are difficult to
wet-out at room temperature. It is applicable to materials such as impregnated
fire, water, weather, and mildew-resistant fabrics.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Prewetting.
4.1.1.1 Container suitable for soaking the specimen.
4.1.1.2 Means of maintaining water at a temperature of 190” to 200°F (88°
to 93°c).
.
4.1.2 Leaching.
4.1.2.1 Water container or tank of such a shape and size that the specimen
can be submerged therein with all surfaces of the specimen having full access
to the water. For cloth specimens the container shall
2
allow not less than 1/2
gallon of water for each square foot (1.8 L/900 cm ) of specimen. The water
shall be changed by a continuous flow or by emptying and refilling so that there
shall be at least six complete changes of water in a 72-hour period.
4.1.2.2 Means of maintaining water at a temperature of 60° to 70°F (15° to
21°C), and a pH of 6.0 to 8.0 during the test.
4.1.2.3 Means for holding the specimen submerged throughout the leaching
period.

METHOD 5832
4.2 Method cited.
Method 5830, Leaching Resistance of Cloth; Standard Method
5. PROCEDURE
shall be thoroughly wet-out by immersion with gentle agitation in water at
a temperature of 190° to 200°F (88° to 93°C) for 30 seconds, then immersed
in water at a temperature of 60° to 70°F (15° to 21°C) and a pH of 6.0 to 8.0
for 72 hours. The specimen shall then be removed and air-dried.
6. REPORT

METHOD 5850
July 20, 1978
ACCELERATED AGEING OF CLOTH;

OVEN METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of treated,
coated, or laminated cloth and elastic cloth containing rubber or syn-
thetic rubber to deterioration from exposure to heat in a circulating
air oven.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a rectangle of cloth 4 by 6 Inches (102 by 152 mm) with the long—
dimension parallel to the direction of the warp.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the number
of specimens tested from each sample unit shall be as required in the
method of test for determining the characteristic.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Circulating air oven. Circulating air oven, thermostatically con-
trolled and capable of maintaining the required temperature within ± 4°F
(± 2°c).
4.2 Method cited.
Grab Method.
5. PROCEDURE
shall be heated in the oven for 48 hours at a temperature of 212° to 221°F
(100° to 105°c).

METHOD 5850
5.2 The specimen shall be placed openly in the circulating air oven by
suspending vertically without touching another specimen or parts of the
oven, and exposed for the required time at the required temperature. At
the end of the exposure period the specimen shall be removed from the oven,
cooled, and conditioned under standard atmospheric conditions as specified
in Section 4 of this Standard, for not less than 16 and not more than 96
hours.
5.3 At the end of the conditioning period the breaking strength of the
aged specimen if required, shall be determined as described in Method 5100.
If other physical properties are required, the specimen shall be tested as
described in the required method. The same physical tests shall be con-
ducted on aged and unaged specimens for the purpose of comparison in deter-
mining the degree of deterioration of the aged material.
5.4 Other exposure conditions and subsequent evaluation tests which may
be specified for a number of cloths are given in table 1.
TABLE I
Fabric Temperature Time period Test after ageing for:
Impregnated fire- 200° - 205°F 5 days Flexibility

water-weather- (93° - 96°C)
resistant duck.
Braided or knitted 158°F (70°C) 7 days Elongation and per-
cloth with elastic manent set.
strands.
Laminated cloth 212°F (100°C) 5 hours Strength and
delamination.
Mildew-treated 212° - 221°F 48 hours Resistance to micro-

cloth (100° - 105°C) organisms.
5.5 Calculation of results. The change in breaking strength or other char-

acteristic shall be calculated as follows:
Change in characteristic, percent = O-E x 100 or E-O x 100
O O
Where: O = value before ageing.
E = value after ageing.

METHOD 5850
6. REPORT
6.1 The change in characteristic of the sample unit shall be the average
reported.

METHOD 5851
July 20, 1978

CLOSED CONTAINER METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of treated,
coated, or laminated cloth and elastic cloth containing rubber or synthetic
rubber to deterioration from exposure to heat in an inclosed container.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a rectangle of cloth 4 by 6 inches (102 by 152 mm) with the long
dimension parallel to the direction of the warp.
test for determining the characteristic.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Circulating air oven. Circulating air oven, thermostatically con-
trolled and capable of maintaining the required temperature within ± 4°F
(±2°c).
4.1.2 Quart (0.94 L) Mason jar.
4.2 Methods cited.
Grab Method.
Method 5850, Accelerated Ageing of Cloth; Oven Method.
50 PROCEDURE
shall be exposed for 5 days at a temperature of 175° ±4°F (79° ± 2°C).

METHOD 5851
5.2 The specimen shall be placed loosely inside a quart (0.94 L) Macon
jar and conditioned in the open jar under standard atmospheric condition
as specified in Section 4 of this Standard, for a minimum of 24 hours. At
the end of the conditioning, the jar shall be closed airtight and placed
in the oven for the required time at the required temperature. At the end
of the exposure period the specimen shall be removed from the oven, cooled,
and again conditioned.
5.3 At the end of the conditioning period, the breaking strength of the
aged specimen if required shall be determined as described in Method 5100.
If other physical properties are required, the specimen shall be tested as
deecribed in the required method. The same physical tests shall be conducted
on aged and unaged specimens for the purpose of comparison in determining
the degree of deterioration of the aged cloth.
5.4 Other exposure condition and subsequent evaluation tests which may
be prescribed for a number of fabrics are given in table I, Method 5850.
5.5.1 The results shall be calculated as described in Method 5850.
6. REPORT
6.1 The report shall be as described in Method 5850.

METHOD 5852
JulY 20, 1978
OXYGEN METHOD
1. SCOPE
of cloth composed in part of rubber or rubber like materials. It is applicable
to coated cloth, rubberized yarn cloth, and cloth made elastic by use of rubber
strands.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
be a rectangle of cloth 4 by 6 inches (102 by 152 E) with the longer dimension
parallel to the direction of the warp.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Oxgen pressure chamber. oxygen pressure ageing chamber consisting
of a metal vessel, inside dimensions of which are at least 5 inches (127 mm)
in diameter (or width) by 10 inches (254 mm) in height. It shall be capable
of maintaining for at least 10 days an internal atmosphere of oxygen gas under
a pressure of 300 pounds ± 10 pounds per square inch (2050 ± 50 kPa) and
thermostatically controlled to maintain a temperature of 158° ±2°F (70° ±
1°C) (see 7.1).
4.1.2 Means of indicating the tamperature.
4.1.3 Means of indicating the pressure.
4.1.4 Temperature recorder.
4.1.5 Means for suspending the specimens vertically without touching each
other or the sides of the chamber.

METHOD 5852
4.1.6 0xy gen under the required pressure.
4.2 Method cited.
Mecthod 51OO, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Grab

Method.
5. PROCEDURE
be exposed for a period of 7 days at a temperature of 158° ±2°F (70° ±1°C).
5.2 The specimen shall be placed in the ageing chamber after it has been
preheated to the operating temperature. The chamber shall be securely closed
and the oxygen introduced into the chamber to a pressure of 300 pounds ±10
pounds per square inch (2050 ± 50 kpa). At least 10 ml of capacity shall be
available in the chamber for each g of rubber compound or other oxidizable
material.
5.3 At the termination of the ageing interval but before the chamber is
opened the oxygen pressure shall be released slowly and uniformly requiring
at least 5 minutes. The chamber shall then be opened and the specimen removed
from the ageing chamber, laid out on a flat surface, and allowed to condition
under standard atmospheric conditions as specified in Section 4 of this Standard,
for not less than 16 hours nor more than 96 hours before physical testing.
5.4 At the end of the rest period, the breaking strength of the aged specimen
if required shall be determined as described in Method 5100. If other physical
properties are required, the specimen shall be tested as described in the
required method. The same physical tests shall be conducted on aged and unaged
specimens for the purpose of comparison in determining the degree of deterioration
of the aged cloth.
5.5 Calculation of results. The change in breaking strength or other
characteristic shall be calculated as follows:
Change in characteristic, percent = O-E x 100 or E-O x 100
O O
Where: O = value before ageing

E = value after ageing
6. REPORT
6.1 The change in characteristic of the sample unit shall be the average of

METHOD 5852
6.2 Each individual valve used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.
7. NOTES
the Emerson Apparatus Co., 171 Tremont street, Melrose, MA 02176.

TEMPERATURE, HIGH; EFFECT ON CLOTH FL

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the ef
on the flexibility of cloth.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall have the dimensions require
stiffness evaluation test.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
specimens tested from each sample unit shall be as r
test for determining stiffness.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Circulating air oven. Circulating air oven
the required temperature within ±5°F (± 3°c).
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 5200, Stiffness of Cloth, Directional;
Method
Method
Cantilever Method
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The stiffness of the specimen shall be determ
or 5204, as specified in the procurement document.
5.2 The specimen shall be placed in the oven at a
(104° ±3°C) for 5 hours. Care shall be taken to pr
the specimen while in the oven.
FE
METHOD 5870
5.3 The specimen shall then be withdrawn, cooled, and brought to standard
atmospheric conditions as specified in Section 4 of this Standard, and the
stiffness again determined by the method used in determining the stiffness
before heating.
5.4 Care shall be taken in mounting the specimen for the initial and after-
heating stiffness tests that the specimen is positioned exactly the same in
regard to the bending direction (inside or outside, warp or filling) of the
cloth . When necessary for identification, one side of the specimen shall be
marked.
5.5 Calculation of result: The change in stiffness shall be calculated as
follows :
Change in stiffness, percent = O- E x 100 or E - 0 x 100
O O
Where O=valve before heating
E= valve after heating
6. REPORT
6.1 The change in stiffness of the sample unit shall be the average of
the results obtained in each of the directions from the specimens tested and
shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent.
reported.

METHOD 5872
July 20, 1978
TEMPERATURE , HIGH; EFFECT ON CLOTH BLOCKING

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of films and
coated cloth to blocking.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of cloth 8 by 8 inches (203 by 203 mm).
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Glass plates. Two glass plates approximately 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 by 1/8
inches (114 by 114 by 3 mm).
4.2 Four-pound weight (1.8 kg).
4.3 Circulating air oven. Circulating air oven capable of maintaining the
required temperature within ± 2°F (± 1°C).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The specimen shall be folded double, face to face, then back to back,
making a 4 by 4 inch (102 by 102 mm) square, and placed between the two glass
plates. The 4-pound (1.8 kg) weight shall be placed on the top plate in a
position to insure even pressure.
shall be placed in the oven for 30 minutes at a temperature of 180° ± 2°F
(82° ±1°C).
5.3 At the end of the exposure period the test assembly shall be removed
from the oven and the specimen immediately taken from between the plates
and allowed to cool (1 hour for films and 5 minutes for coated fabrics). The
specimen shall then be slowly unfolded and, at the same time, carefully exa-
mined for evidence of adhering or peeling of the coating.
FED. TEST.METHOD STD. No. 191A

METHOD 5872
5.4 The resistance of the specimen to blocking shall be evaluated by the
Scale below:
(1) No blocking: Cloth surfaces are free.
(2) No blocking: Cloth surfaces adhere slightly.
(3) Slight blocking: Cloth surfaces must be lightly peeled
to separate.
(4) Blocking: Cloth surfaces separate with difficulty, or
coating is removed during separation.
6. REPORT
6.1 Resistance to blocking shall be reported as rated In 5.4.

METHOD 5874
July 20, 1978
TEMPERATURE , LOW ; EFFECT ON COATED CLOTH

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance of coated cloth
to low temperature.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square of cloth not less than 8 by 8 inches
(203 by 203 mm).
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Cold chamber capable of maintaining the required tem-
perature withing (±2°C) for the required time.
4.1.2 Steel roller, approximately 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) in
diameter, approximately 2 inches (51 mm) wide, with a suitable handle guide.
Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the total weight shall
be 10 pounds (4.5 kg).
4.1.3 Pair of gloves.
4.2 Method cited.
Method 5516, Water Resistance of cloth; Water Permeability, Hydrostatic
Pressure Method.
5. PROCEDURE
shall be exposed at a temperature of 20° ± 2°F (-7° ± 1°C) for 30 minutes.

METEOD 5874
5.2 The specimen shall be exposed in the cold chamber to the required
temperature for the required period of time. Without being removed from
the specified temperature conditions, the specimen shall be creased 180”
in the center in the warp and filling directions respectively by folding
slightly while lying on a flat smooth surface and running the center of
the steel roller over the fold a single time. The specimen shall be opened
between the two creasing operations. The pressure on the specimen shall be
the weight of the roller. The temperature of the roller shall be the same
as that of the specimen. The specimen shall be handled with gloves and care
taken that its temperature remains uniform throughout the test. The cloth
shall be so folded, in both warpwise and fillingwise directions, that the
coating in case of single coated cloth, or the heavier coating in case of
unbalanced double coating, shall be on the outside of the fold. In the
case of a true balance double coating, either side may be toward the out-
side of the fold.
5.3 The specimen shall be visually examined for signs of cracking or
flaking.
5.4 The specimen shall then be brought to standard atmospheric conditions
as specified in Section 4 of this Standard and its hydrostatic resistance
then measured as described in Method 5516.
5.5 A specimen of the unexposed cloth shall be creased as above, visually
examined for signs of cracking and flaking, and then its hydrostatic resis-
tance measured as described in Method 5516.
5.6 Calculation of results. The resistance to low temperatures shall
be expressed as the change in hydrostatic resistance and shall be calculated
as follows:
Change in hydrostatic resistance, percent = O-E
O
x 100 or E-O x 100
O
Where:
O = value of unexposed cloth.
E = value of EXPOSED CLOTH.

6. REPORT
6.1 Any indication of cracking or flaking of the exposed and unexposed
specimens-shall be reported.
FED. FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A
—
METHOD 5874
6.2 The loss in hydrostatic resistance of the sample unit shall be the
average of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported
. 6.3 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also be
reported.

METHOD 5900
July 20, 1978
FLAME RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; HORIZONTAL

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for use in determining the resistance of cloth
to burning. It is applicable to flameproofed and fire-resistant fabrics and
to some untreated fabrics with very open weave, such as coarse netting.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 7 inches by 10 inches (178 mm
by 254 nun), with the long dimension parallel to either the warp or filling
direction.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified In the procurement document, one specimen
unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Hood or cabinet. Hood, cabinet, or other convenient enclosure which
will protect the specimen and ignition flame from drafts.
4.2 Specimen holder. Specimen holder consisting of a metal rectangular
frame with an inside diameter 6 inches by 9 inches (152 mm by 229 mm), and
mounted on four metal legs, one at each corner. The upper side of the metal
frame shall have metal pegs for fastening the specimen in a taut position. The
pegs shall be spaced approximately 1 inch (25 mm) apart except for those in
the center which shall be 2 inches (51 mm) apart.
4.3 Ignition flame. A vertical flame for igniting the specimen shall be
provided by burning 0.3 ml of anhydrous ethyl alcohol (absolute) in a round
flat-bottom brass cup. The cup shall be made from brass 1/32 inch (0.5 mm)
in thickness. The dimension of the cut shall be 11/16 inch (17 mm) outside
diameter and 9/32 Inch (7 mm) in over-all height. The cup shall be mounted
on a material of low heat conductivity such as cork and In such a manner that
the center of the cup shall be directly beneath the center of the specimen with
a distance of 3 inches (76 mm) from the lip of the cup to the specimen.
4.4 Means, such as an electric spark, of igniting alcohol in the brass cup.
METHOD 5900
4.5 Pipette graduated in 0.1 ml.
4.6 Measuring scale. Metal scale graduated in increments of 1/16 inch (1 mm)
for measuring the diameter of the hole burned in the specimen.
4.7 Circulating air oven. A circulating air oven capable of maintaining
the required temperature within ± 2°F (±1°C).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The specimen shall be suspended and heated in a circulating
at a temperature of 140° to 145°F ± 2°F (60 to 63°C ± 1°C) for 4 ± ¼
before testing. Only one specimen shall be removed from the oven at a time
and immediately subjected to the test.
5.2 The test shall be conducted in a hood or enclosed space free from drafts.
The specimen shall be mounted in the holder in a taut position, 0.3 ml of alcohol
shall be placed in the cup, the cup immediately placed in position, and the
alcohol ignited as quickly as possible. The specimen shall remain in the test
position in the draft-free enclosure until all the alcohol has burned, the
afterglow of the specimen has stopped, and the burned hole has been measured.
5.3 The charred area of the specimen shall be removed by running a wooden
pencil or similar object around the inside of the hole. The greatest distance
across the hole shall be measured to the nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm).
5.4 When repeated determinations are conducted, the air in the hood or
enclosure shall be changed and sufficient time permitted for the cup to cool
to room temperature after each determination.
6. REPORT
6.1 The flame resistance of the sample unit shall be the average of the
nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm).

METHOD 5903
July 20, 1978
FLAME RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; VERTICAL

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for use in determining the resistance of cloth
to flame and glow propagation and tendency to char. It is designated primarily
for cellulosic fabrics treated with a flame retardant, but may be utilized in
other applications as specified in applicable procurement documents. In
addition to the vertical position of the sample and flame exposure conditions
conmnon to tests of this type, the method defines gas composition, burner,
cabinet, temperature and humidity test conditions since it is designed
primarily for interlaboratory testing of the same material.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) by 12
inches (305 mm) with the long dimension parallel to either the warp or filling
direction of the cloth. No two warp specimens shall contain the same warp
yarns, and no two filling specimens shall contain the same filling yarns.
unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Cabinet. A cabinet and accessories, fabricated In accordance with the
requirements specified in figures 5903A, B, and C. Galvanized sheet metal or
other suitable metal shall be used. The entire inside back wall of the cabinet
shall be painted black to facilitate the viewing of the test specimen and
pilot flame (see 7.1.2).
4.2 Burner. The burner shall be equipped with a variable orifice to adjust
the flame height, a barrel having a 3/8 inch (10 mm) inside diameter and a
pilot light.
4.2.1 The burner may be constructed by combining a 3/8 inch (10 MM) inside
diameter barrel 3 ± 1/4 inches (76 ± 6 mm) long from a fixed orifice burner
with a base from a variable orifice burner.

METHOD 5903
4.2.2 The pilot light tube shall have a diameter of approximately 1/16
inch (2 mm) and shall be spaced 1/8 inch (3 mm) away from the burner edge with
a pilot flame 1/8 inch (3 mm) long.
4.2.3 The necessary gas connections and the applicable plumbing shall be
as specified in Figure 5903D except that a solenoid valve may be used in lieu
of the stopcock valve to which the burner is attached. The stopcock valve or
solenoid valve, whichever is used, shall be capable of being fully opened or
fully closed in 0.1 second.
4.2.4 On the side of the barrel of the burner, opposite the pilot light there
shall be a metal rod of approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) diameter spaced 1/2 inch
(13 mm) from the barrel and extending above the burner. The rod shall have two
5/16 inch (8 mm) prongs marking the distances of 3/4 inch (19 mm) and 1 1/2 inch-
(38 mm) above the top of the burner,
4.2.5 The burner shall be fixed in a position so that the center of the barrel
of the burner is directly below the center of the specimen.
4.3 Gas regulator valve system. A control valve system with a delivery rate
designed to furnish gas to the burner under a pressure of 2-1/2 ± 1/4 pounds
per square inch (17.2 kPa ± 1.7 kPa) at the burner inlet. The manufacturer’s
recommended delivery rate for the valve system shall include the required
pressure (see 7.1.1).
4.4 Gas mixture. A synthetic gas mixture of the following composition within
the following limits (analyzed at standard conditions): 55 ± 3 percent hydrogen,
24 ± 1 percent methane, 3 ± 1 percent ethane, and 18 ± 1 percent carbon monoxide,
which will give a specific gravity of 0.365 + 0.018 (air = 1) and a B.T.U. content
of 540 ± 20 btu’s per cubic foot (dry basis)–at 70°F (21°C) (see 7.1.1).
4.5 Metal hooks and-weights. Metal hooks and weights to produce a series of
total loads to determine length of char. The metal hooks shall consist of No. 19
gage steel wire or equivalent and shall be made from 3 inch (76 mm) lengths of the
wire and bent 1/2 inch (13 mm) from one end to a 45 degree hook. One end of the
hook shall be fastened around the neck of the weight to be used.
4.6 Stop watch. Stop watch or other device to measure the burning time to 0.2
second.
4.7 Measuring scale. Measuring scale or metal tape graduated in increments of
1/8 inch (1 mm) to measure the length of char.

METHOD 5903
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The material undergoing test shall be evaluated for the characteristics
specified in the applicable procurement document, i.e. after-flame time,
after-glow time and char length on each specimen as applicable.
5.2 All specimens to be tested shall be at moisture equilibrium under standard
atmospheric conditions in accordance with Section 4 of this Standard. Each
specimen to be tested shall be exposed to the test flame within 20 seconds after
removal from the standard atmosphere.
5.2.1 In case of dispute all testing will be conducted under Standard Atmospheric
5.3 The specimen in its holder shall be suspended vertically in the cabinet
in such a reamer that the entire length of the specimen is exposed and the
lower end is 3/4 inch (19 mm) above the top of the gas burner. The apparatus
shall be set up in a draft free area.
5.4 Prior to inserting the specimen, the pilot flame shall be adjusted to
approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height measured from its lowest point to the
tip . The burner flame shall be adjusted by means of the needle valve in the base
of the burner to give a flame height of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) with the stopcock
fully open and the air supply to the burner shut off and taped. The 1-1/2 inch
(38 mm) flame height is obtained by adjusting the valve so that the uppermost
portion (tip) of the flame is level with the tip of the metal prong (see
Figure 5903B) specified for adjustment of flame height. It is an important
aspect of the evaluation that the flame height be adjusted with the tip of
the flame level with the tip of the metal prong. After inserting the specimen,
the stopcock shall be fully opened, and the burner flame applied vertically at
the middle of the lower edge of the specimen for 12 seconds and the burner
turned off. The cabinet door shall remain shut during testing.
5.5 The after-flame time shall be the time the specimen continues to flame
after the burner flame is shut off.
5.6 The after-glow time shall be the time the specimen continues to glow after
it has ceased to flame. If the specimen glows more than 30 seconds, the
specimen holder containing the specimen shall be removed from the test cabinet
without any unnecessary rate of movement of the specimen which will fan the glow,
and suspended In a draft-free area in the same vertical position as in the test
cabinet. When more than one glowing specimen is suspended outside the test
apparatus, the specimens shall be spaced at least 6 inches (152 mm) apart. The
specimens shall remain stationary until all glowing has ceased. The glow
shall not be extinguished even when the after-glow time is not being determined.

METHOD 5903
5.7 After each specimen is removed, the test cabinet shall be cleared of
fumes and smoke prior to testing the next specimen.
5.8 After both flaming and glowing have ceased, the char length shall be
measured. The char length shall be the distance from the end of the specimen,
which was exposed to the flame, to the end of a tear (made lengthwise) of
the specimen through the center of the charred area as follows: The specimen
shall be folded lengthwise and creased by hand along a line through the
highest peak of the charred area. The hook shall be inserted in the specimen
(or a hole, 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter or less, punched out for the hook) at
one side of the charred area 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the adjacent outside edge and
1/4 inch (6 mm) in from the lower end. A weight of sufficient size such that the
weight and hook together shall equal the total tearing load required In 5.9.1
shall be attached to the hook.
5.9 A tearing force shall be applied gently to the specimen by grasping the
corner of the cloth at the opposite edge of the char from the load and
raising the specimen and weight clear of the supporting surface. The end of
the tear shall be marked off on the edge and the char length measurement made
along the undamaged edge.
5.9.1 Loads for determining char length. The specific load applicable to
the weight of the test cloth shall be as follows:
Specified weight per square yard Total tearing weight
of cloth before any fire retardent for determining the
treatment or coating charred length
Ounces per square yard g/m
2
Pounds kg
2.0 to 6.0 68 to 203 0.25 0.1
Over 6.0 to 15.0 Over 203 to 508 0.5 0.2
Over 15.0 to 23.0 Over 508 to 780 0.75 0.3
Over 23.0 Over 780 1.0 0.45
5.10 The after-flame time and after-glow time of the specimen shall be
recorded to the nearest 0.2 second and the char length to the nearest 1/8
inch (1 mm).
6. REPORT
6.1 The after-flame time, after-glow time and char length of the sample unit
shall be the average of the results obtained from the individual specimens
tested. All values obtained from the individual specimens shall be recorded.
6.2 The after-flame time and after-glow time shall be reported to the nearest
0.2 second and the char length to the nearest 1/8 inch (1 mm).

METHOD 5903
7. NOTES
7.1 Suggested sources of materials and equipment.
7.1.1 Gas mixture (4.4) and regulator valve system (4.3) are available from:
(a) Matheson Gas Products
P.O. BOX 85
East Rutherford, NJ 07073
(b) Air Products and Chemicals, Inc.
P.O. BOX 538
Allentown, PA 18105
7.1.2 Test cabinet (4.1) is available from:
(a) U.S. Testing Company
1941 Park Avenue
Hoboken, NJ 07030
(b) The Govmark Organization, Inc.
P.O. BOX 807
Bellmore, NY 11710

METHOD 5903
.
METHOD 5903

METHOD 5903

METHOD 5903

METHOD 5904
July 20, 1978
FLAME RESISTANCE OF CLOTH; VERTICAL, FIELD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for use in the field for determining the resistance
of cloth other than pile fabrics to burning. It gives results which are
comparable to those of the vertical flame resisting test, Method 5902. The
test may be applied to any horizontal edge or split in the cloth (or any edge
which can be placed in a horizontal position for testing) without the necessity-
of cutting out specimens or, in general, without removing the cloth from its
position. The test is considered too severe for cloth that has not been flame-
proofed or is not fire-resistant.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of cloth of any size which contains an
edge which can be placed in a horizontal position for testing.
4. APPARATUS (See fig. 5904)
4.1 Specimen holder. Specimen holder consisting of a clamp made from duplicate
rectangular pieces of sheet metal 1/16 inch (1 mm) in thickness and not less
than 6 inches (152 mm) wide and 7 inches (178 mm) long. An area 2 inches (51 mm)
wide and 5 inches (127 mm) deep shall be cut from the center of one end of the
rectangular pieces of metal leaving two U-shaped plates. The two plates shall be
clamped together at the ends of the U-prongs by means of spring-type paper clips
1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide.
4.2 Candle. Paraffin candle 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter shall be used
as the source of ignition. The candle shall be mounted in a holder hinged
to one side of the clamp in such a manner that the candle can be swung away
from the specimen for adjustment and, when used for ignition, can be swung
against a stop so that the center of the candle shall be directly under the
2-inch (51 mm) wide exposed lower edge of the specimen.
4.3 Timing device. Stop watch or other timing device which will indicate the
burning the to 1/5 second.
4.4 Measuring scale. Metal scale graduated in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm)
for measuring char length of the specimen.

METHOD 5904
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The holder shall be held with the U in an inverted position. The
specimen shall be slipped between the two plates of the clamp until the
horizontal edge of the cloth is even with the ends of the U-prongs, which
are held together by means of paper clips. Thus an area of cloth 2 inches
by 5 inches (51 mm by 127 mm) shall be exposed, held in a vertical position,
and firmly clamped in a metal shield which prevents the flame from extending
beyond the exposed area.
5.2 The tapered portion of the candle shall be allowed to burn until a normal
constant flame is obtained. The candle shall be adjusted so that the center
of the candle is directly under the middle of the 2-inch (51 mm) exposed
lower edge of the specimen and midway between the U-prongs of the holder. At
the completion of the adjustment the top of the wick shall be 1/8 inch (1 mm)
below the edge of the specimen. The flame shall be applied to the edge of
the specimen for 12 seconds and withdrawn. The clamp shall not be removed
from the specimen until all flame and glow have ceased.
5.3 The flaming time shall be the time the material continues to flame
after removal of the candle flame from the specimen.
5.4 Char length shall be the distance from the edge of the specimen to the
end of a tear through the charred area, made by hand with enough force to
tear through the charred or scorched portion but not of sufficient force to
break undamaged yams.
6. REPORT
6.1 The flaming time and char length of the sample unit shall be the average
of the results obtained from the specimens tested.
6.2 The flaming time of the sample unit shall be reported to the nearest
1/5 second and the char length to the nearest 0.1 inch (1 mm).
reported.

METHOD 5904
VERTICAL FIELD TEST
FIGURE 5904

METHOD 5905
July 20, 1978
FLAME RESISTANCE OF MATERIAL; HIGH HEAT
FLUX FLAME CONTACT
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for use in determining the resistance of textiles
and other materials to flame propagation.
1.2 It also provides a means to identify changes that occur in thermoplastic
materials on flame contact such as melting or shrinking from the flame source
and is useful in predicting the flame resistance of materials which are not
ignited by a low heat flux ignition source but from flammable decomposition
products when subjected to a higher heat flux.
1.3 This method is intended to complement Method 5903 and provides a higher
heat flux flame contact and a longer exposure time to flame source. The heat
flux is comparable to that of the ignition source (6 lbs. (2.7 kg) of paper s
set within a 3-foot (914 mm) length) used in a tent burning test.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangle of material 2-3/4 inches by 12 inches
(70 mm by 305 mm) with the long dimension parallel to either the warp or filling
direction of the cloth. For woven materials no two specimens shall contain the
same warp and filling yarns.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Burner. Fisher burner, high temerature, liquefied petroleum
4.2 Crucible tongs.
4.3 Support stand.
4.4 Utility clamp.
4.5 Stop watch. Stop watch’ or other device to measure
second.

METHOD 5905
4.6 Butane gas C.P. (see 7.1.1).
4.7 Gas regulator valve system. A control valve system with a delivery rate de-
signed to furnish gas 2 to the burner under a pressure of 2-1/2 + 1/4 lbs. per square
inch (175 ± 17.5 g/cm ) at the reducing valve. The flame height is adjusted at
the reducing valve
2
producing a pressure at the burner of about 0.1 lbs per square
inch (45 g/cm ) (see 7.1.1).
4.8 Measuring scale. Measuring scale or metal tape graduated in increments of 1/8
inch (1 mm) to measure the length of char.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The material undergoing test shall be evaluated for characteristics specified
In the applicable procurement document, i.e., ignition resistant, self-extinguishing,
after-flame time, non-melting, does not drop flaming pieces from the material, non-
shrinking and percent consumed.
5.2 All specimens tested shall be at moisture equilibrium under Standard
Atmospheric Conditions in accordance with Section 4 of this Standard.
5.3 The ignition source is a high-temperature burner with butane gas fed through
the control valve system. Adjust the air inlet valve of the burner to half open.
Open the burner needle valve approximately 1/2 turn from the closed position.
Turn on the gas. Adjust the total flame height to approximately 3 inches (76 mm)
using a ruler or a metal spur attached to the burner to estimate the flame height.
5.4 Grasp the top edge of the specimen with the crucible tongs and suspend it
vertically in the flame for 12 seconds. The specimen is held with the lower
edge 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) above the center of the burner. If the specimen shrinks
or changes in shape, it shall be moved so that the lowest part of the specimen
is in the required position. At the end of the 12 second period, withdraw the
specimen slowly. Time any after-flaming that occurs (see Figure 5905A). When any
flaming has ceased, reintroduce the specimen into the flame for 12 seconds, with-
draw it slowly and again time any after-flame.
5.5 For specimen which may block the burner flame with melt, the burner, after
adjusting the flame as described in 5.3, is clamped to a stand in a horizontal
position six inches (152 mm) above the stand base. The specimen is introduced into
the flame in a vertical position and the test is carried out as described in 5.4.
5.6 Definitions.
5.6.1 Ignites, propagates frame. The test specimen ignites and is completely
consumed by flame either during flame contact or after withdrawal from the burner;
or, flaming melt from the test specimen propagates flame, I.e., melt flames as it
leaves the test specimen.
METHOD 5905
5.6.2 Ignites self-extinuishing. The test specimen flames during or after
withdrawal from flame exposure but is self-extinguishing before the entire length
of the specimen is consumed.
5.6.3 Ignition resistant. No flaming of the specimen occurs during exposure
or after withdrawal from the flame source (see Figure 5905B).
5.6.4 Melts. The portion of the specimen in contact with the flame turns
to a viscous liquid and flows, separating from the specimen.
5.6.5 Shrinks. The specimen In contact with the flame withdraws from it
by shrinking, or breaking up without forming a liquid melt (see Figure 5905C).
5.6.6 Drops flaming pieces. A part of the specimen breaks away or melts
away from the specimen and is flaming as it leaves the specimen (see Figure
5905D).
5.7 Calculations.
Percent consumed = L - A x 100
L
Where: L = original length of specimen.
A = length of uncharred part of specimen from the top of the specimen
down the side with less charred area to the point at which the
uncharred area first reaches a width of less than one inch (25 mm).
5.7.1 To obtain the length of the uncharred portion, measure the uncharred
length from the top of the specimen down the side of the specimen to the
point at which the uncharred area first reaches a width of less than one inch
(25 mm) from a side of the specimen.
5.7.2 Measure this length of the uncharred portion to the nearest 1/4 inch
(1 mm).
6.REPORT
6.1 Report the test results for each 12 second exposure as follows:
The material: (a) ignites, propagates flame
(b) ignites but is self-extinguishing
(c) is ignition resistant
(d) melts
(e) shrinks away from the flame
(f) drops flaming pieces.

METHOD 5905
6.2 The after-flame of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained of the individual specimens tested and shall be reported to the
nearest 1.0 second.
6.2.1 Report the after-flame for each 12 second exposure.
6.3 For materials which melt or shrink away from the flame, report the
after-flame only.
6.4 The percent consumed of the sample unit shall be the average of the
Individual specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent
(5.7). The percent consumed shall be measured only after the second exposure.
6.5 The individual results utilized in obtaining the average shall also be
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Suggested sources of materials and equipment.
7.1.1 Gas mixture (4.6) and regulator valve system (4.7) are available from:
(a) Matheson Gas Products
P.O. BOX 85
East Rutherford, NJ 07073
(b) Air Products and Chemicals, Inc.
P.O. BOX 538
Allentown, PA 18105
7.1.2 Burner described in 4.1 is available from:
(a) Fisher Scientific Company
711 Forbes Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15219
FED. TEST METHODm. NO. 191A

METHOD 5905
FIGURE 5905 Flame Contact Test

METHOD 5906
July 20, 1978
FLAMMABILITY, BURNING RATE OF CLOTH; HORIZONTAL

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for use in determining the comparative rates
of burning of cloth. This method is satisfactory for cloth that has not
been flameproofed, including pile and napped cloth. The rate of burning is
slower in this method than in Method 5902.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a rectangle of cloth 4-1/2 inches by 12-1/2 inches (114 mm by 317 mm),
with the long dimension parallel to the warp direction of the cloth. It has
been found that the pattern of some cloth may cause the cloth to be more
hazardous in one direction than in the other, in which case the long dimension
of the specimen should be parallel to the more hazardous direction.
4. APPARATUS (see Fig. 5906)
4.1 Cabinet. The cabinet (A) for protecting the specimen from drafts shall
be metal, 8 inches (203 mm) wide, 15 inches (381 mm) long, and 14 inches (356
mm) high, with a glass observation window (B) in the front. It shall have a
removable cover (C) with a 1/2-inch (13 mm) ventilating clearance all around
which contains two pyrex observation windows (D), one near each end of the
cabinet. Each corner of the bottom shall have a support (J) so that the
floor of the cabinet is raised 3/8 inch (10 mm) above the table top or other
surface upon which it is placed. The bottom of the cabinet shall have five
equally spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) ventilating holes (0) along each side of the
cabinet. An immersion thermometer shall be inserted through the center of
the cover for registering the temperature of the cabinet. The cabinet shall
have a slot in one end through which the specimen holder is inserted so as
to slide on a horizontal supporting track (K) into test position (P), in
which position the center of the end of the specimen is 3/4 inch (19 mm)
above the top of the burner.

METHOD 5906
4.2 Electric strip heaters. Two electric strip heater (H) for maintaining
the required temperature in the cabinet, one on each side of the cabinet just
above the ventilating holes in the bottom.
4.3 Specimen holder. Specimen holder consisting of a clamp composed of
two matching rectangular frames, each 15-1/2 inches (394 mm) long and 4 inches
(102 mm) wide over-all. The two sections shall be aligned by means of two
pins (M) at one end of the lower section which fit into corresponding holes
in the upper section. The rectangular frames shall be 1 inch (25 mm) wide
and 1/2 inch (13 mm) in thickness, made from strips of nickel-plated steel,
chromeplated steel, or other material that will not corrode.
4.3.1 Marking wires. Heat-resistant marking wires (N) attached to the
upper section in such a manner that they will not touch the specimen but will
cross it at right angles. One wire shall be 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from the
inside edge of the frame at the ignition end, and one wire shall be located
1 inch (25 mm) from the other end so that there will be a distance of 10 inches
(254 mm)betweenthe two wires. A third wire shall be placed across the upper
section, 1/2 inch (13 mm) from the inside edge of the ignition end to serve a.
a guide for adjusting the position of the specimen in the holder. The open
space framed inside the specimen holder shall be 2 inches (51 mm) wide and
13-1/2 inches (343 mm) long.
4.4 Combing device. Combing device consisting of a flat metal base 6 inches
(152 mm) wide and 24 inches (610 mm) long, carrying a bracket to which a comb
support is hinged in such a manner as to permit raising and lowering the comb.
The comb shall be 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) wide and shall have 7 to 8 smooth
rounded teeth per inch (per 25 mm). When the comb is in the lowered position,
it shall rest on the base plate at an angle of 20 degrees. Means shall be
provided for applying a total load of 250 g to the cloth when the comb is in
contact with the cloth.
4.5 stop. stop (not shown In the figures) for use with double-napped cloth.
The stop shall consist of a cross strip of 26-gage sheet steel, 1/4 inch (6 mm)
wide, removable and fitted on the lower frame of the specimen holder, midway
of its thickness or 1/4 inch (6 mm) below the cloth mounting plane. It shall
cross the under surface of the specimen about 3 inches (76 mm) from the end to
be ignited and far enough below the cloth to have no effect on the burning on
the upper surface while preventing a quick flash over the lower surface.
4.6 Gas burner. Tirrill or Bunsen gas burner (E) with a 3/8 inch (10 mm)
inside diameter tube, so located in the cabinet that the center of the end of
the specimen shall be directly above the tip of the flame when the specimen
is in place.
METHOD 5906
4.7 Gas regulator. Large wheel (F) extending outside the cabinet and
attached to the gas supply valve of the burner so as to permit easy regu-
lation of the height of the flame from outside the cabinet.
4.8 Means for gaging the height of the flame (G).
4.9 Timing device. Stop watch or other timing device which will indicate
the time to 1/5 second.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Conditioning. The specimen shall be suspended vertically and heated
in a circulating-air oven at a temperature of 140° to 145°F (60° to 63°C)
for 4 ± 1/4 hours before testing. Only one specimen shall be removed from
the oven at a time and immediately subjected to the flame test.
5.2 Plain cloth. The specimen shall be slipped into the holder which
clamps each long edge leaving a center strip 2 inches (51 mm) wide and 12-1/2
inches (318 mm) long taut and exposed with 1/2 inch (13 mm) clearance between
the frame and each end of the specimen.
5.2.1 With the burner flame turned as low as possible, the specimen holder
containing the specimen shall be slipped through the slot in the end of the
cabinet until the entire length of the specimen is barely within the cabinet.
The specimen shall be held in this position in the cabinet for a 2-minute
reconditioning period before the test is made. At the end of the reconditioning
period, the specimen holder shall be drawn back to clear the burner and the
burner adjusted to give a flame 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in height with the air
completely shut off.
5.2.2 The specimen holder containing the specimen shall then be slid on
the supporting track (K) into test position (P) so that the end of the speci-
men is 3/4 inch above the top of the burner, and the specimen then ignited.
The temperature of the inside of the cabinet shall be approximately 140°F
(60°c) during the test. A 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) length of the specimen shall be
burned before the timing device is started.
5.2.3 The time required for the flame to travel across a 10-inch (254 mm)
length of the specimen shall be determined.

METHOD 5906
5.3 Napped cloth. If the cloth has a nap or tufting, the specimen shall
be combed twice against the nap by drawing it slowly under the comb, taking
2 to 3 seconds for its passage. The cloth shall be maintained flat-against
the base of the combing device while it is drawn under the comb. The speci-
men shall be placed in the specimen holder so that the flame will travel in
the direction of the lay of the nap.
5.3.1 If the cloth is double-napped a stop shall be used to prevent a flash
from traveling across the underside of the cloth and igniting the other end of
the specimen before the flash has traveled across the upper surface. In other
respects the procedure shall be as described for plain cloth (see 5.2).
6. REPORT
6.1 The flash or rate of burning of the sample unit shall be reported to
the nearest 0.5 inch (13 mm) per minute or per second as applicable.
6.2 If the difference between any two Individual results obtained is less
than 40 percent from the average of the specimens tested, the rate of burning
of the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the
specimens tested.
6.3 If the difference between any two individual results obtained in 6.2
is more than 40 percent from the average, unless otherwise specified in the
procurement document, 10 specimens shall be tested from each sample unit and
the average of the 5 highest values reported as the rate of burning of the
sample unit.
reported.

METHOD 5906

METHOD 5907
July 20, 1978
FLAMMABILITY TEST FOR SLEEPING BAG CLOTHS; TABLET METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is designed to determine whether a low heat flux ignition
source, such as a match flame, will ignite certain cloths, especially cloths
used for sleeping bags, and spread the flame to other component materials
when these cloths are placed over a standard batting.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a 9 inch by 18 inch (229 mm by 457 mm) rectan-
gular piece of cloth with the long dimension parallel to the warp or filling
direction of cloth. No two specimens shall contain the same warp or filling
yarns in the longitudinal direction of the specimen.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,five specimens
from both the warp and filling directions shall be tested from each sample
unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Asbestos plates. Two 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305mm) square
1/4 inch (6 mm) thick asbestos plates (see 7.1).
4.2 Hood. A draft-free inclosure (a hood) with an exhaust to remove fumes
developed during the test.
4.3 Standard batting (see 7.3). A 9 inch by 18 inch (229 mm by 457 mm)
rectangular piece of polyester
2
batting conforming to MIL-B-41826, Type V,
(6 oz./sq. yd (203 g/m ) continuous filament batting without the cheese cloth).
4.4 Angle scale. A scale to measure angles to ± 1 degree.
4.5 Stop watch. A stop watch which will measure to 1.0 second.
4.6 Measuring scale. A measuring scale graduated in increments of 0.1 inch
(1 mm).

METHOD 5907
4.7 Ignition tablet. A No. 1588 methenamine timed burning tablet or equal
(see 7.2 and 7.2.1).
4.8 Drying oven. A circulating air oven thermostatically controlled and
capable of maintaining the temperature at 200° to 230°F (93° to 11O°C).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The test specimens shall be dried in a circulating air oven at a
temperature of 221° ± 3°F (105° ± 5°C) for one hour before testing.
5.1.1 Only one specimen shall be removed from the oven at a time and
tested immediately upon removal.
5.2 Place one of the asbestos plates in the draft-free inclosure (with
exhaust off) with the back of the plate raised so that the front edge forms
a 15° angle with the horizontal (see Figure 5907).
5.3 Preparation of test specimen. Superimpose the test cloth on the batting
and fold in half with the batting on the inside of the folded ensemble. The
specimen shall be handled carefully and not compressed by hand after folding.
5.4 Position and center the folded test ensemble on the inclined asbestos
plate so that the folded edge of the ensemble is aligned with the lower edge
of the plate. Check the alignment by using the second asbestos plate, held
perpendicular to the horizontal, at the bottom edge of the inclined plate.
5.5 Place the ignition tablet at the center of one edge of the second
asbestos plate. With the asbestos plate resting on the table surface, a
few inches (mm) away from the test ensemble, ignite the tablet and slide
the horizontal asbestos plate forward so that the leading edge, with the
ignited tablet, contacts the lower edge of the inclined plate and the flame
of the tablet contacts the test ensemble. The burning time of the tablet
shall be measured, by means of a stopwatch, from the moment its flame
touches the specimen until the moment it no longer touches the specimen. If
the flame-to-specimen contact time is less than 90 seconds the results shall
be rejected and an addtional specimen tested.
5.5.1 The specimen shall remain in the test position until all flaming
of the ignition tablet and the specimen has ceased. Should shouldering or
after-glow of the specimen continue after the end of flaming, allow suffi-
cient time to elapse to insure combustion has ceased.

METHOD 5907
5.6 After-flame time of specimen. Record the length of time the specimen
continues to flame after the tablet flaming has ceased.
5.7 After-glow time of specimen. Record the length of time the specimen
continues to glow after all flaming has ceased.
5.8 Char length of specimen. After both flaming and glowing have ceased,
the specimen shall be removed from the batting, unfolded and placed on a
flat surface to determine the char length. The char length shall be the
length which is the greatest distance between any two points of charred area.
5.9 After each specimen is removed, the test area shall be cleared of
fumes and smoke prior to testing the next specimen.
5.10 A new piece of batting shall be used for each specimen tested.
6. REPORT
6.1 The after-flame time, after-glow time and the char length of sample
unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the individual
specimens tested.
reported.
6.2 The after-flame time and after-glow time shall be reported to the
nearest 1.0 second.
6.3 The char length shall be measured to the nearest 0.1 inch (1 mm)
7. NOTES
7.1 Asbestos base plates used in the Department of Commerce Carpet and
Rug Test; DOC 1-70 are satisfactory for use in this test.
7.2 A “timed burning tablet” may be obtained from Eli Lilly Co., Indian-
apolis, IN 46206. Product Number 1588 in Cat. No. 79, Dec. 1, 1969.
7.2.1 The ignition (burning) tablets shall be stored in a desiccator over
a desiccant for 24 hours prior to use. (Small quantities of sorbed water may
cause the tablets to fracture when first ignited. If a major fracture occurs,
any result from that test shall be ignored and the test shall be repeated.)
7.3 The standard batting may be obtained from Celanese Fiber Company,
P.O. Box 1414, Charlotte, NC 28201.
FED.TEST METHOD STD NO. 191A

METHOD 5907

METHOD 5908
July 20, 1978
FLAMMABILITY, BURNING RATE OF CLOTH; 45° ANGLE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the flammability of cloth by
measuring the rate of burning or flashing and the ease of ignition. It is
satisfactory for use with cloth that has not been flameproofed.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a rectangle of cloth 2 inches by 6 inches (51 mm by 152 mm) with
the long dimension parallel to the warp direction in plain cloth and to the lay
of nap in napped cloth. It has been found that the pattern of some cloth may
cause the cloth to be more hazardous in one direction than in the other, in
which case the long dimension of the specimen should be parallel to the more
hazardous direction.
4.1 Metal hood or cabinet. Metal hood or cabinet (A) to prevent circulation
of air around the specimen rack and the flame, permitting free ventilation for
rapid oxidation. There are twelve 1/2 inch (13 mm) holes equidistant along
the rear of the top closure. A glass door (K, front view shown) which slides up
and down in the grooves at the front of the cabinet shall be provided. The door
shall have a catch mechanism (J) for holding the door in an open condition for
inserting the specimen. A draft ventilating strip (not shown) shall be placed
across the front opening to seal the space between the sliding door, when the
door is in the lowered position, and the base on which the specimen holder is
attached.
4.2 Specimen rack. The specimen rack shall provide support for the frames in
which the specimens are mounted. The angle of inclination shall be 45 degrees (B).
Two guide pins shall project downward from the center of the base of rack, travel
in slots provided in the floor of the chamber so that adjustments can be made for
the thickness of the specimen in relation to the flame front. A stop is provided
In the base of the chamber to assist in adjusting the position of the rack.

METHOD 5908
4.2.1 Specimen holder. The specimen holder shall consist of two 1/16 inch (2 mm)
thick matched metal plates with clamps mounted along the sides, between which the
specimen is fixed (C). The plates shall be slotted and loosely pinned for
alignment. The two plates of the holder shall cover all but 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) of the width of the specimen for its full length. The specimen holder
is supported in the draft-proof chamber on a rack at an angle of 45°.
4.2.2 Specimen rack, held in position by two knobs, which can be reached
under the stage of the cabinet. When the knobs are loosened the holder can
be moved forward and backward.
4.2.3 An indicating finger is provided, the fore part of which touches the
specimen when the rack is correctly adjusted (D).
4.3 Gas jet. Gas jet consisting of a 26-gage hypodermic needle protected by
a copper shield (F).
4.4 Stopcord. Stopcord supplied from a spool of No. 50 mercerized cotton
sewing thread which is fastened to the side of the chamber (P). The cord can be
withdrawn by releasing the thumbscrew holding the spool in position. The cord for
measuring the vertical flame height shall be stretched from the spool down over
the top of the holder, through the loops in the shield, and across through a
pulley or eye on the opposite side of the cabinet (H).
4.4.1 A weight (I) shall be attached to the end of the cord in such a
position that when it drops it actuates the mechanism which stops the timing
device.
4.4.2 Another loop shall be installed on the rear panel of the cabinet behind
“G” (not shown in figure) so that the cord is drawn away from directly over the
flame.
4.5 Fuel supply. Fuel supply consisting of a No. 4 cylinder of c.p. butane
(M), of 2-pound (0.9 kg) capacity.
4.6 Fuel conrol valve. Sensitive control valve (L) for regulating the fuel
supply at the tank. The valve ends in a 1/2 inch (13 mm) female connection for
attachment to the standard butane tank.
4.7 Flow meter. Flow meter (not shown) to bring the fuel supply to test level
by means of the control valve. The flow meter shall consist of a U-shaped glass
tube cut into the gas line as to register the gas pressure delivered to the micro-
burner. A movable metal plate with two parallel horizontal lines 1 inch apart (25 mm)
shall be attached to the case wall behind the flow meter, When the pressure
is off, the plate is so regulated that the water level in both sides of the U-tube
meets the lower line. When the test is made, the pressure shall be so adjusted
that the higher liquid level in the U-shaped tube meets the upper line.
METHOD 5908
4.8 Stopwatch .Stopwatch (N) or other timing device to indicate the time in
seconds, accurate to 1/5 second.
4.9 Driving mechanism. Driving mechanism on the rear of the cabinet (not
shown) to move the gas jet to Its most forward position and to automatically
start the timing device at the moment of flame impact. When the cord (G)
is severed by the flame, the falling weight (I) stops the watch.
4.10 Starting lever. Starting lever (0) which can be operated from left to
right in one stroke and which, when released, shall operate the gas jet.
4.11.1 Brushing device. Brushing device consists of a baseboard over which a
smaller carriage is drawn. This carriage runs on parallel tracks attached to
the upper surface of the baseboard. The brush is hinged with pin hinges at the
rear edge of the baseboard and rests on the carriage vertically with a pressure
of 150 go
4.11.1 The brush shall have two rows of stiff nylon bristles mounted with
the tufts in a staggered position. The bristles are 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) in
diameter and 0.75 inch (19 mm) in length. There are 20 bristles per tuft and
four tufts per inch (25 mm). A clamp is attached to the forward edge of the
movable carriage to permit holding the specimen on the carriage during the
brushing operation.
4.12 Drying oven. A circulating air oven thermostatically controlled and
capable of maintaining the temperature at 200°F to 230°F (93°c to 11O°C).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1.1 Napped or pile cloth. The direction of the lay of the nap or pile
face shall be determined. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document,
a rectangle 2 inches by 6 inches (51 mm by 152 mm) with the long dimension
parallel to the lay of the nap or pile shall be marked on the specimen
back. Before cutting, the specimen shall be marked with a staple in the center
of the end toward which the nap or pile points. As the required number of
specimens are cut, each specimen shall be placed on the brushing device and
drawn under the brush once against the lay of the napped or pile surface as
described in 5.1.1.1. The specimen shall be immediately conditioned as de-
scribed in 5.2.
5.1.1.1 Brushing. After the specimen has been put in place on the carriage
and fastened by means of the clamp, the brush is raised, the carriage pushed to
the rear, and the brush lowered to the face of the specimen. The carriage is
then drawn forward by hand at a uniform rate.
5.1.2 Plain cloth. The specimen shall be the same size and prepared in the
same reamer as that from pile or napped cloth, 5.1.1, except that it shall not
be brushed. The specimen shall be immediately conditioned as described in 5.2.

METHOD 5908
5.2 Condition of specimen. The mounted specimen shall be dried in a
horizontal
0
position in a circulating-air oven at a temperature of 221°±5° F
(105°±3 c)j for 30 minutes. The specimens are removed from the oven and
placed over anhydrous calcium chloride in a desiccator until cool.
5.3 Flammability test.
5.3.1 The control valve from the fuel supply shall be opened and adjusted to
the test level. Approximately 5 minutes is required to drive all the air from
the fuel line. After this interval, normally approximately 5 minutes, the gas
shall be ignited. The flame under conditions of test should be approximately
5/8 inch (16 mm) in length, measured from its tip to the opening in the gas
nozzle.
5.3.2 Individual specimens shall be removed from the desiccator. In the
case of napped or pile surface. Plain cloth shall not be brushed. The
specimen shall be placed on the specimen rack in the chamber. Not more than
45 seconds shall elapse from the time the specimen is removed from the
desiccator until the application of the flame.
5.3.3 The specimen rack with the specimen in position shall be brought
forward to the point where the indicating finger touches the face of the
specimen.
5.3.4 The cord shall be strung through the guides in the upper plate of
the specimen holder across the top of the specimen through the loop on the
rear panel and over the guide ring (H). The weight shall be hooked in place
close to and just below the guide and the slide door closed. The stopwatch
shall be set at zero. The apparatus shall be at room temperature at the start
of the test, and the test conducted in a draft-free room.
5.3.5 The starting lever shall be brought over to the extreme right and
released. This starts the timing mechanism and applies the gas jet to the face
of the specimen for a period of 1 second. The timing shall be automatic,
starting upon the application of the flame and ending when the cord burns
through at the end of the specimen, and the weight i S released. Total time
shall be recorded to the nearest 1/5 second.
6. REPORT
6.1 The flammability of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 1/5 second.
7. NOTES
7.1 The flammability test apparatus described in this METHOD MAY BE ABTAINED
from Custom Scientific Instruments, Inc., 13 Wing Drive, Whippany, NJ 07981.
METHOD 5908

METHOD 5920
July 20, 1978
HEATING (SPONTANEOUS) OF CLOTH

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is applicable to all cloths and it may be used to determine
the tendency of a cloth to undergo self-heating at moderate temperatures below
212°F (1OO°C).
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a strip of cloth approximately two inches (51 mm) wide
and long l nough to make a roll approximately 1-1/2 inches (38 ma) in diameter.
4.1 Double boiler. A double boiler made of corrosion-resistant metal such as
copper or brass. The inside chamber shall be four inches (102 mm) in diameter by
7 inches (178 mm) deep, equipped with a cylindrical wire screen 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) in diameter and 6 inches (152 mm) long to hold the specimen and shall
be surrounded by a water jacket containing water maintained at the boiling
temperature.
4.1.1 The water jacket shall be provided with an opening to permit the
addition of water and a reflux condenser (air-cooled) in order to maintain a
constant water level.
4.1.2 Insulated cover consisting of a double-walled section, 3-15/16 inches
(100 m) in diameter and 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick filled with rock wool, supported
on the cell by a flange fitted with a felt gasket. The cover shall have three
openings, each 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter. The center opening provides l
place to insert the thermometer. The other two openings shall be fitted with 1/2
inch (13 mm) diameter tubes, one of which extends 5 inches (127 mm) above the
lid and the other 5 inches (127 m) down into the cell to provide for air
circulation through the cell.
4.2 A multiple unit of the same cell design may be used.

METHOD 5920
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Conditioning. The specimen shall be suspended and heated in a circulating
air oven at a temperature of 140° to 145°F (60° to 63°C) for 4 ± 1/4 hours before
testing. Only one specimen shall be removed-from the oven at a time and
immediately introduced into the specimen holder.
5.2 Before the specimen is introduced into the chamber, the apparatus is
assembled with lid and thermometer in place, and the water in the outer jacket
boiled until equilibrium is established and the thermometer gives a constant
reading. This initial temperature of the empty specimen chamber is the reference
point above which self-heating is evidenced, and is the initial temperature of
the specimen.
5.3 The specimen shall be wound into a roll approximately 1-1/2 inches (38mm)
in diameter so that a space is left in the center for the thermometer. The roll
shall be slid into the wire screen provided to hold the specimen, and the
assembly put into the air chamber. The lid shall be put on and the thermometer
adjusted so that the bulb is at the center of the roll. The water in the jacket
shall be boiled for four hours, and the temperature in the cloth roll shall be
noted at intervals of sufficient frequency to permit the determination of the
highest temperature reached. The last temperature reading shall be made at the
end of the four hour boiling period.
6. REPORT
6.1 The self-heating of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.5°F
(l.0°C). Individual results used to calculate the average shall also be reported.
6.2 The initial temperatures of the specimen and the highest temperature
reached for each specimen tested shall also be reported in degrees F (degrees C).
7. NOTES
7.1 The apparatus described in this test method Is not commercially available
and therefore must be either fabricated or custom made.

METHOD 5920
SPONTANEOUS HEATING APPARATUS

METHOD 5930
JulY 20, 1978
ELECTRICAL RESISTIVITY OF FABRICS; DETERMINATION OF

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the surface electrical
resistivity of fabrics.
1.2 The electrical resistivity influences the accumulation of electrostatic
charge on a fabric.
1.3 This method is not applicable to fabrics containing stainless steel
or other highly conductive components.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The size of the specimen shall be such that its width does not exceed
the width of the electrodes of the equipment being used.
2.1.1 The specimens shall be such that no two specimens contain the same
set of warp and filling yarns.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, six specimens
from each side of the fabric, three from each of warp and filling directions
(12 specimens) shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Conditioning and testing chamber. A conditioning and testing chamber
capable of providing relative humidity control of ± 2 percent preferably effective
over a range of 25-65 percent, relative humidity and temperature control of
± 0.5°F (± 1°C) with circulating air.
4.2 Electrical resistance meter. An electrical
13
resistance meter capable of
measuring values in the range of 108 to 10 ohms or higher, in conjunction
with the electrode system (see 7.1).
4.2.1 Standard resistors for calibration of the electrical resistance meter
(see 7.2).
4.3 Radioactive bar. A radioactive bar suitable for the removal of
electrostatic charges from the fabrics (see 7.3).

METHOD 5930
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Conditioning of specimens. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document the test specimens shall be conditioned from the dry side for at least
four hours In the conditioning chamber at 40 percent R.H. and 75°F (24°C) until
equilibrium is reached in accordance with the criteria defined in Section 4 of
this Standard.
5.1.1 The test specimens shall be hung in the conditioning test chamber in
such a way as to allow good air circulating around the specimens.
5.1.2 All handling and testing of specimens after conditioning shall be done
in the conditioning test chamber.
5.2 The static charges from the surface of the fabric shall be removed by
passing the radioactive bar over both sides of the fabric.
5.3 The electrical resistance meter shall be operated in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions of the particular instrument being used and
shall be calibrated periodically using standard resistors.
5.4 The specimen shall be placed in firm contact with the electrodes with
the direction of test perpendicular to the adjacent edges of the electrodes.
5.4.1 The electrical current shall be 80 to 100 V at one inch (25 mm)
electrode separation for one minute.
5.4.2 The electrical current shall be allowed to pass through the fabric for
a minimum period of one minute and until a constant reading is obtained. The
criteria for constant electrical resistivity shall be a change in the value of
Log R of leas than 0.1 units per minute.
5.5 The resistivity In ohms per square shall be calculated as follows:
Resistivity in ohms per square =
Measured resistance In ohms x Width . of specimen
Distance between electrodes
60 REPORT
6.1 Fabric hating no definte face side. The electrical resistivity shall be
the average of the calculated values of both sides of frabics in each of the
warp and filling directions.
6.2 Fabric having a definte face side. The electrical resistivity shall be
the average of the calculated values and shall be reported separately for face
and back in eaCh of the warp and filling directions.
FED. TEST-METHOD STD. NO. 191A
METHOD 5930
7. NOTES
7.1 Following is a partial listing of the electrical resistance meters
found suitable for this test.
7.1.1 Cenco Electronic Electrometer, Central Scientific Company, 1700
Irving Park Road, Chicago, IL 60613.
7.1.2 Electronic Instruments Megohmeter, Model 29-A, Herman H. Sticht
Company, Inc., 27 Park Place, New York, NY 10007.
7.1.3 Beckman Ultrohmeter, Beckman Instruments, Inc., 2500 Harbor Blvd.,
Fullerton, CA 92634.
7.1.4 Teraohmeter, Siemens America, Inc., 350 Fifth Avenue, New York,
NY 10001.
7.1.5 Hayek and Chromey Instrument, described in American Dyestuff
Reporter, 40, 164-8 (1951).
7.1.6 Electrical Resistance Tester Model CS-51; Custom Scientific
Instruments, Inc., 13 Wing Drive, Whippany, NJ 07981.
7.2 Standard resistors for calibration of the electrical resistance
meter may be obtained from Victoreen Instrument Company, 10101 Woodland
Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44104.
7.3 The following radioactive bar has been found to be suitable for the
removal of electrostatic charges from fabrics: Staticmaster Ionizing Unit,
Model 2U 500, Nuclear Products Company, 10173 E. Rush St., E1 Monte, CA
91733.
FED. TEST METHODM STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 5950
July 20, 1978
ADHESION OF PLIED (DOUBLE TEXTURE) FABRIC

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the adhesion of the plies of
plied (double texture) fabrics.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangular piece of the fabric 2 inches (51 mm)
tide by not less than 6 inches (152 mm) long, with the long dimension parallel
to the warp or filling yarns of one of the outside plies of the fabric.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 A tester and l utographic recording mechanism as described in Method
5100 shall be used, except that the distance between the clamps shall be 2
inches (51 mm) at the start of the test and the face of each jaw shall be
not less than 1 by 2 inches (25 by 51 mm).
4.2 Method cited.
Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The plies shall be separated at one end of the specimen by hand, for
approximately 2 inches (51 mm), and a ply placed in each clamp of the machine.
If the fabric contains more than two plies, the outside plies shall be placed
in the clamps. The pawls or maximum load attachments of the machine shall be
disengaged during the test. The clamps shall be separated at the rate of 12
Inches ±0.5 inch per minute (305 mm ± 13 mm/min) until the plies are separated
over the remaining portion of the specimen. The resistance to separation shall
be registered by means of the autographic recording device. Care shall be
taken that any cut threads along the edge of the specimen do not interfere with
the reparation, that the specimen separates over the full width, and that no
tearing occurs in the plies at the point of separation.

METHOD 5950
6. REPORT
6.1 Adhesion of specimen. The adhesion of the specimen shall be the average
of the five highest peak loads of resistance per 2 inch (51 mm) width registered
for 3 inches (76 mm) of separation of the plies. If the number of peak loads is
less than five, the average of the loads for the lesser number of peaks shall be
the adhesion of the specimen.
6.2 Adhesion of the sample unit. The adhesion of the plies of the sample
unit shall be the average of the results obtained for the specimens tested
and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 pound per 2 Inch width (to the nearest
10N/m).
reported.

METEOD 5951
JuIy 20, 1978
BOND STRENGTH OF BONDED AND LAMINATED APPAREL CLOTHS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method iS intended to determine the bond strength required to

separate component layers of bonded and laminated cloths under specified
conditions.
2. TEST SPECIMENS
2.1 The specimen shall be a rectangular piece of cloth 3 inches by 6 inches

(76 mm by 152 mm) with the length of the specimen corresponding to the warp
direction of the cloth. Do not take specimens closer to the selvage than a
distance equal to 20 percent of the cloth width. No two specimens shall
contain the same warp and filling yarns.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 A tester and autographic recording mechanism as described in Method

5100 shall be used.
4.2 Method cited.
4.2.1 Method 5100, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth;

Grab Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwiee specified in the procurement document, this test shall
be performed on material conditioned in accordance with Section 4 of this
Standard.
5.2 The upper and lower jaws shall be a minimum of 1 inch by 3 inches (25 mm
by 76 mm), with the longer dimension perpendicular to the application of load.

METHOD 5951
5.3 Gage length, the distance betwen the jaws at the start of the test,
shall be 2 inches (51 mm).
5.4 The tester shall be operated at a uniform pulling speed of 12 Inches ±
0.5 in/rein (305mm ± 13 mm/min).
5.5 If the indicating scale on the tester is equipped with a pawl and
ratchet mechanism, disengage the mechanism to permit readings of variable
force when the tester is placed•in operation.
5.6 The two layers of cloth shall be separated, by hand, along the 3 inch
(76 mm) width of the specimen for a distance of approximately 2 Inches (51 mm),
in the direction of the specimen length.
5.7 Bonded cloths (see 7.2.2). Secure the separated face cloth of the specimen
in the upper clamp of the tester in such away that the longitudinal axle of the
specimen forms a right angle with the closed clamping surface. Secure the separated
backing cloth in the lower clamp of the tester in such away that the longitudinal
axis of the specimen forms a right angle with the closed clamping surface.
5.8 Laminated cloths (see 7.2.3). Separate plies and secure the specimen as in
para. 5.6 and 5.7 for the face and foam of the laminated specimen.
5.8.1 If the foam is laminated to a backing cloth, retain each specimen
from 5.8. Separate the backing cloth from the foam as In para. 5.6 except
that the separation shall be made at the opposite end of the specimen
separated for the face-to-foam test.
5.9 Calculation of bond strength. Determine the bond strength of each
specimen to the nearest 0.5 oz. (0.1 N), as the average of the five highest
and five lowest peak loads of resistance, per 3 inches (76 mm) of specimen
width, recorded for 3 inches (76 mm) of separation of the plies.
6. REPORT
6.1 The bond strength of the sample unit shall be the average of the results
obtained for the specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.5
ounce per 1 inch width (to the nearest 5N/m).
7. NOTES
7.1 When testing laminated cloths, examine both sides of the foam on the test
specimen. Determine whether the foam ruptured during delamination (see 7.2.4)
METHOD 5951
allowing some foam to adhere to either cloth surface. If this occurs,

make the notation “foam tear” for that specimen for the side or sides
where foam tear occurred.
7.2 Definitions.
7.2.1 Bond strength. The tensile force expressed in ounces per 1 inch
(newtons per meter) of width, required to separate the component layers under
specified conditions.
7.2.2 Bonded cloth. A layered cloth structure wherein a face cloth
is joined to a backing cloth, such as tricot, with an adhesive that does
not significantly add to the thickness of the combined cloth.
7.2.3 Laminated cloth. A layered cloth structure wherein a face
cloth is joined to a continuous sheet material, such as polyurethane
foam, in such a way that the identity of the continuous sheet material
is retained, either by the flame method or by an adhesive, and this in
turn usually is joined on the back with a backing cloth such as tricot.
7.2.4 Delamination. Separation of the plies through failure of the
adhesive.

METHOD 5960
July 20, 1978
ADHESION OF CEMENTED SEAMS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the adhesion of cemented lapped
seams which have not been stitched. It is applicable to cemented seams of
such items as raincoats, ponchos, flotation bladders, and coated bags.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a seam approximately 6 inches (152 mm) in length
and the full width of the seam.
4.1 Apparatus.
5100, except that the clamps shall be of sufficient width to grip the full
width of the seam.
4.2 Method cited.
Method
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The cemented seam shall be separated by hand for a distance of 2-1/2
to 3 inches (64 mm to 76 mm) and the separated ends inserted in the clamps of
the machine.
5.2 The jaws shall be separated at a rate of 12 inches ±0.5 inch per
minute (305 mm ± 13 mm/min) until approximately 3 inches (76 mm) of the seam
to separation shall be registered by means of the autographic recording mechanism.
6. REPORT
of the five highest peak loads of resistance registered for 3 inches (76 mm) of
separation of the cemented seam divided by the width of the seam in inches. If
the number of peak loads is less than five, the average of the loads for the lesser
number of peaks divided by the width of the seam in inches shall be the adhesion
of the cemented seam specimen.
.
METHOD 5960
6.2 Adhesion of samle unit. The adhesion of the cemented seam of the
tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 pound (to the nearest 0.1 N).
reported.

METHOD 5962
July 20, 1978
ADHESION OF STRAPPED SEAMS

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the adhesion of strapped seams.
IT is applicable to the strapped seams of such items as rainwear, coated bags
and toxicological agents protective garments.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a piece of the seam approximately 6 inches (152 mm)
in length and the full width of the strap.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 A tester and autographic recording mechanism as described in Method 5100,
except that the clamps shall be of sufficient width to grip the full width of the
seam.
4.2 Method cited.
Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The strapped seam shall be separated by hand for a distance of 2-1/2 to
3 inches (64 mm to 76 mm) and the separated ends inserted in the clamps of the
machine.
5.2 The jaws shall be separated at a rate of 12 inches ± 0.5 inch per minute
(305 mm ± 13 mm/min). The strapping shall be mounted in the movable clamp of the
testing machine and pulled away from the seam from the 3 inch (76 mm) mark to
complete separation of the specimen, and the resistance to such separation
registered by means of the autographic recording mechanism.
METHOD 5962
6. REPORT
of the five highest peak loads of resistance registered for 3 inches (76 mm) of
separation of the strapped seam divided by the width of the seam in inches (mm).
If the number of peak loads is less than five, the average of the loads for the
lesser number of peaks divided by the width of the seam in inches (mm) shall be
the adhesion of the strapped seam specimen.
6.2 Adhesion of sample unit. The adhesion of the strapped seam of the sample
unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested
and shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 pound (to the nearest 0.1 N).

METHOD 5964
July 20, 1978
ADHESION OF WET SEAMS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the loss in adhesion of cemented
lapped seams of coated cloth from wetting.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be two pieces of the seam each 6 inches (152 mm) in
length and the full width of the seam. They should be taken from adjacent parts
of the seam, if possible.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 A tester and autographic recording mechanism as described in Method 5100,
except that the clamps shall be of sufficient width to grip the full width of the
s earn.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method.
Method 5960, Adhesion of Cemented Seams.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 One piece of seam shall be immersed in water at a temperature of 75° ±
5°F (24° ± 3°C) for 2 hours, removed from the water, and while still dripping
wet tested by the procedure specified in Method 5960.
5.2 The other piece of seam without immersion shall be similarly tested.
FED. TEST METHOD STD NO.191A

METHOD 5964
6. REPORT
6.1 Loss in adhesion of specimen-. The loss in seam adhesion of the specimen
difference in adhesion of
Loss in seam adhesion, percent = wet and dry seams x 100
adhesion of the dry seam
6.2 Loss in adhesion of sample unit. The loss in adhesion of the seam of
the sample unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the specimens

METHOD 5970
July 20, 1978
ADHESION OF COATING; ADHESIVE METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the resistance to separation of
continuous film type coatings from cloth.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be 2 rectangular 3 inch by 7 inch strips (76 mm by
178 mm) of the coated cloth prepared as specified in 5.1. Unless otherwise
specified in the procurement document, the long dimension shall be parallel
to the warp of the coated cloth.
4.1 Apparatus.
5100 shall be used, except that the face of each jaw shall be not less than
1 inch by 2 inches (25 mm by 51 mm) with the long dimension perpendicular to
the direction of the application of load.
4.1.2 Adhesive. The adhesive used in preparing the specimen as described in
5.1 shall be one of the following:
a. A solventless cyanoacrylate adhesive (see 7.1.1)
b. Adhesive (solvent type) (see 7.1.2)
Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, adhesive (a) shall be
used to obtain the proper adhesive bond. If a proper bond is not obtained with
adhesive (a), adhesive (b) shall be used.
4.1.3 Glass plates. Two glass plates having dimensions of approximately
4 inches by 6 inches by 1/8 inch (102 mm by 152 mm by 3 mm).
4.1.4 Weight. A 10-pound (4.5 kg) weight.
4.1.5 Circulating air oven. A circulating air oven capable of maintaining a
temperature of 219° ± 6°F (104° ± 3°C).
METHOD 5970
4.2 Method cited.

Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, the coated side of a one-side coated cloth, or the more heavily coated
side of a cloth which is coated on both sides shall be the side of the cloth to
be tested. The surface of the coated cloth may be cleaned by wiping with a
cloth which has been dipped in a mild soap solution, rinsing with distilled
water and air drying prior to application of the adhesive. In order to
facilitate separation of the specimen prior to adhesion testing, use either
method as outlined in 5.1.1 or 5.1.2.
a. Adhesive a. One coat of adhesive.(a) shall be applied to the test
sides of the two strips of coated cloth. The two strips shall then be placed
one on top of the other with the adhesive coated sides together.
b. Adhesive b. Three coats of adhesive (b) shall be applied to the
test sides of the two strips of coated cloth with a 15 minute drying time at
room temperature after the first and second coats of adhesive, and a 5 minute
drying time at room temperature after the third coat of adhesive. The two strips
shall then be placed one on top of the other with the adhesive coated sides together.
5.1.1 Prior to application of the adhesive, a diagonal cut shall be made with
a razor or knife across the end of the two strips of coated cloth through the
coating on the test side of the base cloth.
5.1.2 When joining the two strips of coated cloth, a tab of paper shall be
placed between the two strips at one end of the specimen. The tab shall not
cover more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of the length of the specimen.
5.2 The cemented strips shall be placed in a horizontal position between two
glass plates. A 10-pound (4.5 kg) weight shall be placed on top of the
sandwich assembly. When adhesive (a) is used, the total elapsed time from
application of the adhesive to the placing of the 10-pound (4.5 kg) weight
on the sandwich assembly shall be approximately 90 seconds.
5.3 When adhesive (a) Is used, the specimen shall be left between the two
plates for 20 to 28 hours at standard conditions as specified in Section 4 of
this Standard. The specimen shall be removed from between the two plates and
cut to a 2 by 6 inch (51 by 152 mm) test piece.

METHOD 5970
5.4 When adhesive (b) is used, the specimen shall be left between the two
plates for 2 hours at room temperature; the assembly of specimen, plates and
weights shall then be placed in a circulating air oven at a temperature of
219° ± 6°F (104° ± 3°C) for 1 hour. The specimen shall then be removed from
between the two plates, cut to a 2 by 6 inch (51 by 152 mm) test piece, and
cooled at standard conditions for 20 to 28 hours.
5.5 Adhesion. The specimen shall be separated by hand at one end for a
distance of approximately 2 Inches (51 mm). One strip of the specimen shall
be clamped in the immovable clamp of the testing machine and the other strip in
the movable clamp. The pawls of the maximum load attachment of the testing
machine shall be disengaged during the test. The movable clamp shall have a
speed of 12.0 ± 0.5 inches (305 ± 13 mm) per minute for separating the coating
from the base cloth of the specimen, and shall be recorded on the autographic
mechanism. A minimum length of 3 inches (76 mm) of coating shall be separated
by the testing machine during the adhesion test. Care shall be taken so that the
coating separates completely from the cloth for the entire 2 inch (51 mm) width
of the specimen.
5.6 When dry and wet adhesion tests are specified in the procurement document,
the specimen shall be two rectangular 3 inch by 9 inch strips of the coated
cloth prepared as specified in 5.1. When removed from between the glass plates,
the specimen shall be cut to a 2 by 8 inch (51 by 203 mm) test piece. The dry
adhesion test shall be stopped after a 3-inch (76 mm) separation has been reached.
The specimen shall then be immersed in distilled water at room temperature for
24 hours, blotted dry, and the wet adhesion test determined on the remainder
of the specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 The adhesion of the specimen shall be the average of the 5 highest peak
loads of resistance registered during the separation of the coating. If the
coating is separated from the cloth at an average force greater than or less
than that specified, or if the average force necessary to separate the specimen
at the adhesive line is greater than” that specified, the values obtained are
valid and shall be reported. If the average force necessary to separate the
specimen at the adhesive line is less than that specified, and the separation
occurs at the adhesive line, the test shall be invalid, and another specimen shall
be tested.
6.2 The adhesion of coating of the sample unit shall be the average of
nearest 0.1 pound per 2 inch width (to the nearest 10 N/m).
6.3 The adhesive used in determining the adhesion of coating shall be reported.
. . . . . . --- .
METHOD 5970
6.4 Bach individual value used to calculate the average shall also be reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The following adhesives have been tested and found satisfactory for the
described uses.
7.1.1 Eastman 910 cement may be purchased from the Armstrong Cork Co.,
Lancaster, PA 17603.
7.1.2 Boxer Liquid Plastic No. 700 may be purchased from Union Laboratories,
Inc., Morganville Tennent Road, Morganville, NJ 07751.

METHOD 5972
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH OF COATING; WATER RESISTANCE METHOD

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the adhesion of the coating
of coated cloth by measuring loss in resistance to water penetration after
the coated cloth has been stretched.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a square piece of coated cloth 6 inches by 6 inches
(152 mm by 152 mm), cut in a direction at 45 degrees to the direction of the
warp and filling of the base cloth.
test for determining the water resistance (see 5.1).
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The machine used to stretch the specimen as required shall be that
described in Method 5100, except that the face of each jaw shall be 1 inch
by 2 inches (25 mm by 51 mm), with the long dimension perpendicular to the
direction of pull.
4.1.2 Stop watch or watch with a second hand.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method
Method 5512, Water Resistance of Coated Cloth; High Range, Hydrostatic
Pressure Method
Method 5514, Water Resistance of Cloth; Low Range, Hydrostatic Pressure
Method
Method 5516, Water Resistance of Cloth; Water Permeability, Hydrostatic
Pressure Method
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The water resistance of the coated cloth shall be measured by one of the
following Methods: 5512, 5514, or 5516, as specified in the procurement
document.
METHOD 5972
5.2 A specimen of the coated cloth which has not been previously tested
for water resistance shall be centered in the clamps of the machine (see
4.1.1) with the edges of the specimen parallel to the edges of the clamps.
The pawls or maximum load attachments shall be disengaged during this test.
The clamps shall be separated until a load of 30 pounds (133 N) has been
applied to the specimen. This load shall be retained for 30 seconds after
which the specimen shall be removed from the machine.
5.3 The procedure shall be repeated on the same specimen with the 30 pound
(133 N) load applied at an angle of 90° to the direction of that in the first
test. While still under a load of 30 pounds (133 N) the coating of the specimen
shall be examined for cracks and breaks.
5.4 The specimen shall be removed from the machine and the water resistance
of the stretched coated cloth determined by the method used in 5.1.
5.5 Calculation or results. The loss in water resistance of the sample unit
Loss in water resistance, percent = W-F x 100
W
Where: W = Water resistance of unstretched cloth (see 5.1)
F = Water resistance of cloth after stretching (see 5.4)
6. REPORT
6.1 The adhesion of the coating of the sample unit shall be the loss in
water resistance due to stretching the coated cloth and shall be reported to
6.2 Any breaking or cracking of the coating shall be recorded for each
specimen tested.

METHOD 6000
July 20, 1978
LENGTH OF TEN TURNS; CORDAGE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the length of 10 turns (com-
plete revolutions) of a single strand in twisted and plaited cordage.
2* TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be not less than 10 feet (3 m) (see 5.2).
shall be made on each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The specimen shall be laid out on a surface without tension, so that
it is straight and free from kinks and curls. The surface used shall be a
V - trough formed by two smooth flat planes.
5.2 The measurement shall be made not less than 5 feet (1.5 m) from the end
of the specimen.
5.3 Determine the number of final strands in the finished cordage. Make a
mark on one of the strands. Follow the marked strand for 10 complete revolu-
tions of the strand, and make a second mark on the same side of the cordage.
The distance between the two marks is the length of one twist times 10, the
measurement shall be made to the nearest 1/8 inch (1 mm).
6. REPORT
6.1 The length of 10 turns of a single strand shall be reported to the
nearest 1/8 Inch (1 mm).
70 NOTES
7.1 One turn of a single strand in a rope of twisted or plaited construction
is the distance measured along a rope, parallel to its axis, in which the one
strand makes one revolution around the rope. The measurement of 10 turns is
made for convenience and accuracy of measuring.

METHOD 6000
7.2 It 10 recommended that this test be incorporated into procurement

documents as an in-process procedure or if included as an end item test
in the procurement document, that It be performed as a non-destructive test
on the sample unit prior to other tests.

METHOD 6001
July 20, 1978
PICKS PER INCH (PICKS/CM); BRAIDED CORDAGE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the number of picks per inch
(picks/cm) in braided cordage.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen for test shall be a single length of braided cordage as
follows:
a. Minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) for cordage up to 3/4 inch (19 mm) in
circumference.
b. Minimum of 10 feet (3 m) for cordage 3/4 inch (19 mm) in circumference
and larger.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, three determinations
shall be made on each sample unit for cordage up to 3/4 inch (19 mm) in circumference
and one determination on each sample unit for cordage 3/4 inch (19 mm) in
circumference and larger.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Magnifying glass, 1 inch (25 mm).
4.3 Specimen holder. Clamp or other means for holding the specimen.
5. PROCEDURE
be performed on material conditioned under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in
5.2 One end of the specimen shall be held securely by a clamp or other
means approximately two inches (51 mm) from one end. The other end shall be
twisted in the direction opposite to the helical pattern formed by the carrier
strands during the braiding operation so that the picks are aligned and parallel
with the side of the cord.

METHOD 6001
5.3 While the carrier strands are clamped in a parallel position, the
number of picks per inch (picks/cm) in one line of stitches shall be counted
and recorded. This procedure shall be repeated for a total of three times at
points not less than 6 inches (152 mm) apart from each other for cordage up to
3/4 inch (19 mm) in circumference; and one time for cordage larger than 3/4
inch (19 mm).
6. REPORT
6.1 The number of picks per inch (picks/cm) of the sample unit shall be the
average of the results obtained, or the single value from the specimen tested
dependent upon the size of the cordage and shall be reported to the nearest
whole pick.
reported for braided cordage under 3/4 inch (19 mm).

METHOD 6002
JulY 20, 1978
DIAMETER OF CORDAGE
1. SCOPE
—
1.1 This method is intended for determining the diameter of twisted and
braided cordage 3/16 inch (5 mm) in diameter and under.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen for twisted cordage shall be a minimum of 6 feet (1.8m).
2.2 The specimen for braided cordage shall be a minimum of 10 feet (3 m).
3* NUMBER OF DETERMINATIONS
3.1.1 Three measurements shall be made on each specimen.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Tension apparatus. Any suitable device may be used for applying the
required load.
4.2 Calipers. Calipers suitable for measuring the diameter of the specimen
to the nearest 0.01 inch (0.25 mm).
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 A load equal to 1 percent of the minimum breaking strength shall be
-. applied to the test specimen for 1 minute before taking measurements. The
load shall be maintained until the required measurements are completed.
5.2 While the specimen is under tension, the 3 measurements shall be made
with the calipers.
5.3 Each measurement shall be made at a different point on the specimen, not
less than 2 turns apart on twisted cordage and not less than 3 feet (1 m) apart
on braided cordage.
6. REPORT
6.1 The average of the 3 measurements made on a specimen shall be the
diameter of that specimen and shall be reported to the nearest 0.01 inch (0.25
mm) .
METHOD 6002
6.2 The average of the diameter of the 3 specimens tested shall be reported
as the final diameter of the sample unit to the nearest 0.01 inch (0.25 mm).
reported.
FED. TEST METHOD. STD. 191A

METHOD 6003
July 20, 1978
CIRCUMFERENCE OF CORDAGE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the circumference of twisted,
plaited and braided cordage, 5/8 inch (16 mm) circumference and up. The
measurement shall be made prior to determining breaking strength and elongation.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be as required by Method 6015 or 6016, whichever is applicable for the
determination of the breaking strength and elongation of the cordage being
tested.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, one determina-
tion shall be made on each specimen tested as required by Method 6015 or 6016
whichever is applicable for determining the breaking strength and elongation
of the cordage being tested.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The device for applying the required load shall be the apparatus re-
quired by Method 6015 or 6016 whichever is applicable for determining the
breaking strength and elongation of the cordage being tested.
4.2 Measuring filament. A monofilament yarn or metallic wire with a diam-
eter not greater than 0.012 inch (0.3 mm) and of sufficient length to overlap
when held snugly around the specimen being tested.
4.3 Measurement stick or metal tape. Yardstick, meterstick or metal tape
graduated in-increments of 1/16 inch (1 mm).
4.4 Methods cited.
Method 6015, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Spliced Specimen
Method
Method 6016, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Cordage; Non-Spliced
Specimen Method

METHOD 6003
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 A load equal to 1 percent of the minimum breaking strength of the
cordage being tested shall be applied to the specimen and the machine stopped
until the required measurement is taken. The measurement shall be made immedi-
ately after application of the required load.
5.1.1 While the specimen is under tension a measuring filament shall be
passed around the specimen until it overlaps.
5.1.2 Sufficient tension is applied to the measuring filament to hold it
snugly around the specimen and the filament is cut at the point of overlapping.
The machine is restarted.
5.1.3 The cut length of the measuring filament shall be laid out on a flat
surface, straightened out and measured to the nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm).
5.2 The determination shall be made at the center of the specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 The average of the circumferences of the specimens tested from a sample
unit shall be reported as the circumference of that sample unit and shall be
reported to the nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm).
6.2 Each individual value used to calculate the average shall also be re-
ported.

METHOD 6004
July 20, 1978
LENGTH PER UNIT WEIGHT; CORDAGE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the length-weight relationship
of natural and synthetic fiber cordage.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen size shall be as specified below:
SPECIMEN SIZE
Specimen Length (minimum)
Feet Meters
Cordage - less than 3 inches (76 mm) in
circumference 10 3.0
Cordage - 3 inches (76 mm) to 6 inches (152 mm)
inclusive in circumference 5 1.5
Cordage - over 6 inches (152 mm) in circumference 3 0.91
shall be made on each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
required load.
4.2 Balance. A balance capable of weighing the specimen to an accuracy of
0.25 percent of the specimen weight.
4.3 Measurement stick or metal tape. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape or
5* PROCEDURE
5.1 Care should be exercised in removing the specimen without alteration of
the turns in twisted, braided or plaited construction.

METHOD 6004
5.2 Tension a suitable length of the cordage with a weight equal to 1 percent
of the minimum breaking strength specified for the cordage. The appropriate
length as specified in 2.1 shall be marked to the nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm) on
the cordage within 2 minutes of the application of tension.
5.3 Relax the tension on the cordage, and cut out the specimen as marked.
5.4 The test specimen shall then be weighed to 0.25 percent of its weight,
and the weight “W” recorded.
5.5 Calculation.
5.5.1 Length per unit weight shall be calculated as follows:
_.
L Length per unit weight
W
Where: L = Length of specimen In yards, feet or meters, as applicable.
W = Weight of specimen in pounds or kilograms, as applicable.
6. REPORT
6.1 The length per unit weight shall be reported to the same accuracy as the
specified requirement.

METHOD 6010
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE OF CORDAGE, BOILING WATER METHOD; DETERMINATION OF

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the residual shrinkage of
cordage.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a length of 24 inches (610 mm) cut from the sample
unit.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, three determinations
shall be made from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Container. A container of suitable size so that the required specimens
can be completely immersed in water when being tested.
4.2 Weights. Weights of suitable size that will cause the specimen to be
completely submerged.
4.3 Measurement stick or metal tape. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape or
other suitable measuring device graduated in increments of 1/16 inch (1 urn).
4.4 Marking medium. Pen marker containing water-insoluble ink.
4.5 Whipping twine or tape.
4.6 Oven. Circulating-air oven capable of maintaining the required temperature
+ 4°F (+ 2°C).
within —
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document the specimens
shall be brought to equilibrium under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in accor-
dance with Section 4 of this Standard.
5.2 The rope shall be securely whipped or taped at proper intervals prior
to cutting to permit the removal of 24 inch (610 mm) specimens without ravening
or fraying the ends.

METHOD 6010
5.3 The specimen shall be laid out on a flat surface and straightened out,
so that there are no twists or turns, and an 18-inch (457 mm) length shall be
marked off on the specimen a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) from either end. It
shall be marked with water-insoluble ink or other suitable marking medium.
5.4 The weights shall be attached to the specimen and the whole assembly
immersed in boiling water for 15 minutes.
5.5 At the end of the immersion period, the specimen shall be air-dried
or dried in a circulating air oven at a temperature not to exceed 185°F (85°C).
5.6 After drying, the specimen shall be returned to equilibrium under
Standard Atmospheric Conditions, and the distance between the marks measured
for change in length to the nearest 1/16 inch (1 mm).
5.7 Calculations.
5.7.1 The calculation for percent residual shrinkage shall be made as
follows:
Residual shrinkage, percent = 18 inches (457 mm) - E x 100
18 inches (457 mm)
Where: E = measurement between marks after immersion in boiling
water and return to equilibrium.
6. REPORT
6.1 The residual shrinkage shall be the average of 3 determinations, calcu-
lated to the nearest 0.5 percent.

METHOD 6011
July 20, 1978
WATER ABSORPTION; CORDAGE

1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the water absorption of
cordage.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The test specimen shall be a single length 15 inches (381 mm) long cut
from a sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
required load.
4.2 Container. A suitable container In which the test specimen shall be
immersed as required.
4.3 Wire rack for drying the specimen during testing.
4.4 Marking medium. Pen marker containing water-insoluble ink.
5. PROCEDURE
shall be brought to equilibrium under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in accor-
dance with Section 4 of this Standard.
5.2 Tension a suitable length of the cordage with a weight equal to 1 percent
of the minimum breaking strength specified for the cordage tested, and mark off
the required 15 inch (381 mm) specimen length.
5.3 The load is released on the sample unit and the specimen cut out at
the marks. A mark is placed 3 inches (76 mm) from each end of the specimen
using water-insoluble ink or other suitable marking material.
5.4 The specimen shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g.
5.5 The specimen shall be looped, and the loop immersed in a container of
distilled water at room temperature until the water surface is level with,
but not below or over the marks, so that the cut ends are out of the water.

METHOD 6011
5.6 The specimen shall be allowed to steep for 24 hours.
5.7 The specimen shall be removed and cut at the mark, thus removing the
cut ends that were not immersed in the water.
5.8 The specimen shall be placed in a draft free area of the conditioned
room on a wire rack, care being exercised to prevent shaking or squeezing of
the specimen to remove the excess water. The specimen shall be laid horizontally
and not touched again until the expiration of the required time for draining.
The specimen shall be allowed to drain 1-1/2 hours.
5.9 At the end of the 1-1/2 hour period, the sample shall again be weighed
and the amount of water absorption recorded.
5.10 Calculations.
Water absorbed, percent =
(Weight (g)of steeped sample with ends cut)-9/15 of original sample weight (g) x 100
9/15 of original sample weight (g)
6. REPORT
6.1 The amount of water absorbed shall be the average of the specimens tested,

METHOD 6015
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH AND ELONGATION, BREAKING OF CORDAGE;
SPLICED SPECIMEN METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the breaking strength and elongation
of spliceable cordage.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a single length of the cordage, and shall have an
eye splice at each end. The inside length of each eye shall be not less than
7 inches (178 mm) or more than 24 inches (610 mm) with the eye closed. The
distance of clear rope between the outer ends of the splices shall not be less
than 3 feet (914 mm).
2.1.1 Eye splice on 3-strand twisted cordage (Natural fiber). Eye splices on
natural fiber twisted three strand cordage shall be accomplished with a minimum
of three full tucks. Tapered splices are permitted (see Figure 6015A).
2.1.2 Eye splice on 3-strand twisted cordage (Synthetic fiber). Eye splices on
synthetic fiber twisted three strand cordage shall be accomplished with a minimum
of four full tucks. Tapered splices are permitted (see Figure 6015A).
2.1.3 Eye splice on plaited cordage (Synthetic fiber). Eye splices on synthetic
fiber plaited cordage shall be accomplished with a minimum of two double folds and
two singles (see Figure 6015B).
2.1.4 Eye splice on hollow braided cords,. Eye splices on hollow braided
cordage shall be accomplished with a tapered buried eye splice. The taper shall
consist of cutting out-every fifth pick-in right and left-strands for 16, 24,
and 32 strand round braids and alternately fourth and fifth picks for 20 strand
braid (see Figure 6015C).
determinations shall be as follows:
Rope with a circumference up to and including 5 inches (127 mm):
3 specimens shall be tested from each sample unit.
Rope with a circumference over 5 inches (127 nun):
2 specimens shall be tested from each sample unit.

METHOD 6015
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Testing machine. The testing machine shall consist of three main parts:
(a) Straining mechanism.
(b) Means for holding the specimen.
(c) Load indicating mechanism.
4.1.1 Straining mechanism. The straining mechanism shall be such that the
movement of the pulling clamp shall be uniform at a rate of 6 ± 1 inches
(152 ± 25 mm) per minute under no load. The distance between the clamps is
arbitrary.
4.1.2 Specimen holders. The means for holding the specimen during testing
shall consist of round metal pins or posts. The pins or posts shall be of
sufficient size and held in any manner that will assure breaking of the
specimen in the free length.
4.1.3 Load indicating mechanism.. The load indicating mechanism shall be a
calibrated dial, scale or chart for indicating the applied load. Unless other-
wise specified for load determination, the mechanism shall be adjusted or set
so that the maximum load required to break the specimen will remain on the
dial, scale or chart after the specimen is ruptured.
4.1.4 The test machine shall be of such capacity that the maximum load
required to break the specimens shall not be greater than 85 percent or less
than 15 percent of the rated capacity.
4.1.5 Measuring scale. Yardstick, meterstick, or metal tape graduated in
increments of 1/8 inch (1 mm), for use in applying gage marks to the specimen,
and for measuring between the marks to determine elongation.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, the specimen shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Atmospheric
5.1.1 When elongation of the specimen is to be determined a load equal to
1 percent of the specified minimum breaking strength shall be applied to the
specimen. While under tension, two fine gage marks shall be spaced 30 inches
(762 mm) apart on the specimen in such a manner that neither mark will be
closer than 3 inches (76 mm) to the inner end of either splice.
5.1.2 If soaking of the splices is required, (this requirement applies to
specimens of cordage made from jute, sisal, manila, henequen and other hard
fiber ropes) the eyes and splices up to the inner ends of the splices shall
be immersed in water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Gage marks if required
for determining elongation shall be placed on the specimens before soaking.

METHOD 6015
5.2 Elongation. Elongation shall be determined during the determination
of the breaking strength of the specimen. It shall be measured when the load
applied during the test is 75 percent of the specified minimum breaking
strength of the specimen being tested.
5.2.1 When the specimen is pulled to 75 percent of the specified minimum
breaking strength, the machine may be stopped and the distance “E” between
the gage marks on the specimen measured and recorded. The distance between
the marks shall be measured to the nearest 1/8 inch (1 mm).
5.3 Breaking strength. If the machine has been stopped for determination
of elongation after the distance between the marks has been measured the
machine shall be restarted and the load increased until the specimen breaks.
5.3.1 If the splices are noticed to be slipping and the individual
measurement falls markedly below the apparent average such a measurement
shall be disregarded and another specimen shall be tested from the same
sample unit.
5.4 Calculations. The elongation shall be calculated as follows:
Elongation, percent = E -O x 100
o
Where: E = The distance in inches (mm) between gage marks at 75 percent
of the specified minimun breaking strength.
O = The distance in inches (mm) between the gage marks at 1 per-
cent of the specified minimum breaking strength (see 5.1.1).
6. REPORT
6.1 Breaking strength. The breaking strength of the sample unit shall be
the average of the specimens tested and shall be reported as follows:
Cordage Breaking Strength Reported to Nearest
0 to 150 lbs (0 to 670 N) 1 lb (1 N)
151 to 2000 lbs (671 to 8900 N) 5 lbs (10 N)
2001 to 50,000 lbs (8901 to 222, 500 N) 10 lbs (100 N)
50,000 lbs and up (222,501 and up) 100 lbs (1000 N)
6.2 Elongation. The elongation of the sample unit shall be the average of the
specimens tested and shall be reported to the nearest 0.5 percent.

METHOD 6015

METHOD 6016
July 20, 1978
STRENGTH AND ELONGATION BREAKING OF CORDAGE; NON-SPLICED SPECIMEN METHOD

1. SCOPE
elongation of cordage that does not require eye-splices to be tested.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be a single length of the finished cordage not less
than 24 inches (610 mm) long.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 The apparatus for determining the breaking strength and elongation
shall be as described in Method 5100, except that the flat clamps shall be re-
placed with smooth clamps of the spool or drum type and the speed of the machine
before the application of a load to the specimen shall be 6 ± 1 inches per minute
(152 ± 25 mm/min).
4.1.2 Ink marker. Ink marker for marking specimen to determine elongation.
4.1.3 Scale and dividers. A pair of dividers opening a distance not less than
12 inches (T305 mm) and a scale graduated in divisions of 0.01 inch (0.3 mm).
4.2 Method cited.
Grab Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Preparation of specimen. Unless otherwise specified inthe procurement
document material testing shall be performed under Standard Conditions as specified

METHOD 6016
5.1.1 The distance between the clamps or drums (gage length) at the start of
the test shall be 10 inches (254 mm).
5.1.2 The specimen shall be placed in the clamps or drums of the machine and a
load applied equal to 1 percent of the specified minimum breaking strength of the
specimen being tested. The machine shall be stopped and the strain maintained on
the specimen.
5.1.3 While the strain is being maintained on the specimen two fine ink marks
shall be spaced 5 inches (127 mm) apart and neither mark shall be placed closer
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) to either clamp or drum.
5.1.4 The machine shall be restarted and the testing continued to completion.
5.2 Elongation. Elongation shall be measured during the determination of the
breaking strength of the specimen. It shall be measured when the load applied
during the test is 75 percent of the specified minimum breaking strength of the
cordage being tested.
5.2.1 When the specimen is pulled to 75 percent of the minimum breaking strength
of the cordage being tested, the machine may be stopped and the distance between
the two fine marks on the specimen is measured and recorded. The distance “E”, in
inches (mm), between the marks shall be measured to the nearest 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
5.3 Breaking strength. If the machine is stopped to measure the elongation it
shall be restarted and the load increased until the specimen ruptures.
5.3.1 If a specimen slips between the jaws, breaks in the jaws or for any reason
of machine malfunction an individual measurement falls markedly below the apparent
average test results, such a measurement shall be disregarded and another specimen
shall be tested from the same sample unit.
5.4 Calculation.
5.4.1 The elongation shall be calculated as follows:
Elongation, percent = E - 5 inches (127 mm) x 100
5 inches (127 mm)
Where E = Distance between the marks, in inches (mm), when the load
is 75 percent of the specified minimum breaking strength
of the cordage being tested.
6. REPORT
6.1 The elongation shall be the average of the specimens tested and reported
FED. TEST METHOD. NO. 191A
METHOD 6016
6.2 The breaking strength shall be the average of the specimens tested and shall
be reported to an accuracy of 0.5 percent of the indicated (recorded) breaking
strength.
6.3 Each individual value used to calculate the average (for elongation and
breaking strength) shall also be reported.

METHOD 6020
July 20, 1978
HARDNESS; CORDAGE
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the hardness of twisted and
plaited cordage.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a minimum of 20 feet (6.1 m).
be taken from each sample unit and 3 determinations shall be made on each specimen.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Compression testing machine. The machine shall be capable of maintaining
a loading rate of 6 inches + 1 inch (152 mm ± 25 mm) per minute. The machine
shall be equipped with a suitable autographic recording device or other suitable
means for measuring hardness to a maximum of 100 pounds (445 N).
4.2 Pressure plate. The diameter (inches) (mm) of the orifice in the pressure
plate through which the spike passes after being forced through the specimen being
tested shall be approximately twice the diameter of the specimen being tested but
not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) (see figure 6020B and paragraph 7.1).
4.3 Spike. The spike shall conform to the requirement as shown in figure 6020A.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The spike inserted in the rope shall be placed in the compression testing
machine in such a manner that the force necessary to push the spike through the
rope will be measured with the rope in the relaxed state, without tension and
completely free to absorb the force of the penetrating spike (see figure 6020C
and paragraph 7.1). The spike shall be inserted between the strands of the rope
until visible on the opposite side, and shall be not less than 5 feet (1.5 m) from
a cut end (which will be securely sewed or taped to prevent unlaying), and not
less than 5 feet (1.5 m) from any area subjected to a previous hardness test.
Rate of loading shall be 6 inches ± 1 inch (152 mm ± 25 mm) per minute. The load
necessary to force the spike to 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter shall be measured on
cordage up to and including 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) in circumference. The load
necessary to force the spike to the 1 inch (25 mm) diameter mark shall be measured
on cordage greater than 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) circumference. The 1/2 inch (13 mm)
and 1 inch (25 mm) marks shall be considered to be reached when the mark dis-
appears behind the strand.

METHOD 6020
5.1.1 When a specimen of plaited cordage is tested the spike shall be
inserted through the center of the specimen so that two pairs of strands are
on each side of the spike.
5.2 Readings of the hardness measurements resulting from the spike, together
with the rope specimen being forced through the orifice and/or binding within
the orifice, shall be recorded.
6. REPORT
6.1 The hardness of each specimen shall be the average of 3 determinations,
and shall be reported to the nearest 1 pound (to the nearest 1 N).
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Figures 6020B and 6020C are included as information to the contractor
to illustrate the procedure for conducting the test.

METHOD 6020

METHOD 6020

METHOD 6020

METHOD 7102
July 20, 1978
GRIPPING STRENGTH OF SHOE LACE TIPS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the gripping strength of the shoe
lace tip; i.e., the resistance offeered by the tip to its complete removal from
the shoe lace.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
shall be a one-half length of the shoe lace. Two specimens may be made from one
complete shoe lace.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, 10 specimens shall

be tested from each sample unit,
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 A testing machine as described in Method 5100, except a slotted metal

plate (see Figure 7102) shall be used in conduction with the top jaw-assembly.
The lower jaw-assembly shall be as described in Test Method 5100.
4.1.2 A rigid metal plate 5 inches by 1.5 inches (127 mm by 38 mm), approximately
1/8 Inch (3 mm) thick, having a 4 inch (102 mm) tapered slot, centered width-wise
and running lengthwise from an Inside dimension of 1/32 inch (0.80 mm) in width,
increasing to a width of 1/4 inch (6 mm) at the outside edge. The slot shall be
smoothly finished, The plate shall rest on top of the slightly open top jaw facings
in such a manner that the slot of the plate is directly above the open jaws and
centered so that the plate in a horizontal position is balanced by the top jaw
assembly.
4.2 Method cited.
4.2.1 Mathod 5100, Strength and Elongation, Breaking of Woven Cloth; Grab
Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The distance between the top jaw (slotted metal plate) and the lower jaws
shall be 4 inches (102 mm).

METHOD 7102
5.2 With the slot of the metal plate centered over the slightly open top jaw
facings, slip the lace into the slot as far as it will go, so that the inside
edge of the tip is in contact with the top of the plate.
5.3 Align the plate so that the specimen is approximately in the middle of the
lengthwise direction of the jaws.
5.4 The free end of the specimen shall be fastened in the lower jaws.
5.5 Force shall be applied to the specimen at such a rate that the pulling
clamp will have a uniform speed of 12 ± 0.5 inches per minute (305 ± 13 mm/min).
5.6 Start the tester, with the pawl in contact with the ratchet, and the
maximum resistance in displacing the tip shall be recorded.
5.7 If the lace tip slips through the slot without its being removed from the
lace or if for any reason attributed to faulty technique, an individual measure-
ment falls markedly below the average of the sample unit, such results shall be
discarded and another specimen shall be tested.
5.8 Buckling of the tip material at the base of the tip or peeling back without
the tip being removed from the lace shall not be considered as a failure and the
result shall be discarded and another specimen shall be tested.
6. REPORT
6.1 The gripping strength of the sample unit shall be the average of the
specimens tested from the sample unit and shall be reported to the nearest
1 pound ( to the nearest 1 N).

METHOD 7102
FIGURE 7102 - slotted Metal Plate

METHOD 7308
July 20, 1978
ABRASION RESISTANCE; SOCKS, HOSIERY, AND KNITTED CLOTH:
UNIFORM-ABRASION (SCHIEFER) METHOD
1. SCOPE

of dry and wet specimens of the heel, toe, and sole of socks and hosiery
and of knitted cloth. It is applicable to products which vary in fiber
content, construction, finishing treatment, and kind and mount of
auxiliary substances.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The toe or heel portion of the sock or hosiery, or a circle of

knitted cloth cut with a metal die 2.4126 inches (61.3 mm) in diameter, or

4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Abrasion machine (see 7.1) An abrasion machine and accessories

described in Method 5308), except for the clamp assembly which shall be as
follows:
4.1.1.1 Clamp assembly. A clamp assembly for holding knitted specimen

as shown in figure 7308.
4.1.1.1.1 Tensioning base. A tensioning base, “A” (see figure 7308).
4.1.1.1.2 Clamp base. A clamp base, “B” (see figure 7308), attachable
to tensioning base.
4.1.1.1.3 Pressure ring. A pressure ring, “C” (see figure 7308), mounted
on top of specimen resting on clamp base.

METHOD 7308
4.1.1.1.4 Outer ring. An outer ring, “D” (see figure 7308), screwed on
the clamp base over the pressure ring to hold the specimen securely.
4.1.1.1.5 Tension weights. Two 2-1/2 pounds (1.1 kg) or other tension
weights, as specified, to fit on tensioning base.
4.2 Method cited.
Method 5308, Abrasion Resistance of Cloth; Uniform Abrasion

(Schiefer) Method.
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the proce-

dure shall be as described in Method 5308.
6. REPORT
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the report

shall be as described in Method 5308.
7. NOTES
7.1 An abrasion machine of ‘the type described in this method is manu-

factured by Frazier Precision Instrument Company, Inc., 210 Oakmont Avenue,
Gaithersburg, MD 20760.
FED-STD-191A
METHOD 7308
A. Tensioning base
B. Clamp base
C. Pressure ring
D. Outer ring
FIGURE 7308 - ABRASION TESTER

METHOD 7540
July 20, 1978
STRETCHED WIDTH OF KNIT ITEMS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method iS intended for determining the stretched width of knit
items. It is especially applicable for socks and knit inserts.
2. TEST SPECIMEN

shall be one completed end item.

from each sample unit shall be tested.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Houchin modification of the Schiefer measuring device (see 7.1 and
Figure 7540).
4.1.1 The apparatus consists of a rectangular metal separating form

measuring 2 inches by 4 inches (51 mm x 102 mm) over which the specimen is
drawn, so constructed that the top section slides freely out of the bottom
section. This form shall be fixed in front of an upright arm bearing a
scale graduated in divisions of 0.1 inch (1 mm) and shall have a freely
rotating pulley at the top. An indicator consisting of a pointer pin
(see 7.2), which is inserted through the specimen and the hole in the top
sliding section of the form, shall be provided. This indicator shall be
attached by means of a cord which passes over the specimen under tension
of a specified weight by its position against the graduated scale on the
instrument upright.
4.1.2 Stop watch.
4.1.3 Ruler or measurement stick. Ruler or any other suitable measuring

device graduated to 0.1 inch (1 mm).
5. PROCEDURE

shall be conditioned and tested under Standard Atmospheric Conditions in
FED. TEST METH0D STD. NO. 191A

METHOD 7540
5.2 The specimen shall be pulled over the metal form so that the midpoint
of the area of test is aligned with the hole in the top sliding section of
the form. The specimen shall be parallel to the 2-inch (51 mm) edges of the
separating form.
5.3 The indicator pin shall be inserted through the specimen and the hole
in the top sliding section of the form.
5.4 The weight, as specified in the procurement document, shall be slowly

applied so as to cause separation of the top and bottom sections of the form
with resultant stretch of the specimen. The weight shall be allowed to hang
freely for the length of time specified in the procurement document. This
time shall be measured by means of a stop watch.
5.5 When the specified time has elapsed, immediately record the indicated
reading from the graduated scale (the stretched width of the specimen), and
remove the weight. The specimen shall then be removed from the metal form.
5.6 When the amount of unrecovered stretch is a requirement the following

shall apply:
5.6.1 Original width of specimen. Before the specimen is put on the form
the specimen shall be laid on a flat, horizontal surface in a tensionless
reamer. The item shall be measured with the ruler at its center to the
nearest 0.1 inch (1 mm). This measurement shall be reported as the original
width, “O”.
5.6.2 Width of specimen after stretching. When the specimen is taken off
the form, after having been stretched for the specified time and load, the
specimen-shall immediately be laid on a flat, horizontal surface in a tension-
less manner and measured as described in 5.6.1. This measurement shall be
reported as the width after stretching, “S”.
5.6.3 Calculation of unrecovered stretch:
Unrecovered stretch, inches (mm) = S - O
Where:
O = Original width of specimen, in inches (mm)

S = Width of specimen after stretching, in inches (mm)

METHOD 7540
6. REPORT
6.1 The stretched width of the sample unit shall be the average of the
nearest 0.1 inch (1 mm).
6.2 The unrecovered stretch of the sample unit shall be the average of
nearest 0.1 inch (1 mm).
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 The Houchin modification of the Schiefer measuring device may be

obtained from Frazier Precision Instrument Co., Inc., 210 Oakmont Ave.,
Gaithersburg,MD 20760.
7.2 Under certain circumstances the pointer pin may slip from the hole in
the top sliding section thus creating a safety hazard. Safety glasses should
be worn while performing this test.

METHOD 7540
FIGURE 7540- HOUCHIN MODIFICATION OF SCHIEFER MEASURING DEVICE

METHOD 7550
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING OF COTTON AND LINEN GARMENTS AND
READY-MADE ARTICLES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the shrinkage of woven cotton
and linen garments and ready-made articles when subjected to a normal
laundering procedure. It may be used for some knitted garments. Shrinkage
in laundering is the change in measured distances due to laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall consist of the complete garment or ready-made article
prepared as follows:
2.1.1 The garment or ready-made article shall be laid out without tension
on a flat surface. Care shall be taken that it is free from wrinkles and
creases. When necessary, the dimension shall be marked with indelible ink and
a fine-pointed pen, or by sewing threads into the fabric.
2.1.2 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, the dimensions

applicable to the specimen shall be measured as follows:
2.1.2.1 Neckband or collarband. Distance from outside end of one buttonhole

inside of band to outside end of other buttonhole, or to center of button,
with neckband laid out flat.
2.1.2.2 Chest or bust. Twice the distance across buttoned-up garment

approximately 1 inch (25 mm) below armhole, measured with the garment folded
back to back and front to front with underarm seams together.
2.1.2.3 Front or back length (skirt, blouse, or coat). Distance from the
highest part of the yoke or top of shoulder seam to the bottom of the garment.
2.1.2.4 Armhole, width. Distance from point of shoulder or top of armhole

measured around the armhole to the lowest point under arm, or lower edge
of opening (slips, union suits, or equivalent).
2.1.2.5 Sleeve, length. Distance from point where sleeve is attached to

shoulder to upper outside edge of cuff or to sleeve bottom, except that
measurements on men’s dress shirts shall be made from the center of yoke at
neckband to upper outside edge of cuff.

METHOD 7550
2.1.2.6 Hips (garments with waisteband or equivalent). Twice the distance

across the hips 8 inches (203 mm) below the waist, measured with the garment
folded back to back and front to front with side seams together.
2.1.2.7 Hips (slips or equivalent). Twice the distance across the garment
17-1/2 inches (445 mm) down from top of body of garment for strap type, and
24 inches (610 mm) down from top of-shoulder for built-up type, measured with
the garment folded back to back and front to front with the underarm seams
together.
2.1.2.8 Front rise (pants and shorts). Distance from bottom of crotch,
not including width of seam, up front of buttoned or zippered garment to middle
of front edge of waistband.
2.1.2.9 Back rise (pants and shorts).Distance from bottom of crotch, not
including width of seam, up back of buttoned or zippered garment to middle of
back edge of waistband.
2.1.2.10 Inseam, width (pants, pajamas, shorts). Distance from inside corner
of one leg to other leg, with pants legs spread and inseam stretched in straight
line.
2.1.2.11 Length (pants and shorts), total. Distance from top of outseam or
outside edge of waistband to lower edge of outseam or leg.
2.1.2.12 Length (one-piece dress, slips, union suits, or equivalent) total.

Distance from highest point of shoulder for built-up type or top of body of
garment for strap type to bottom edge of garment.
2.1.2.13 Length (skirts), total. Distance from outside edge of waistband

or waist seam, center front, to lower edge of shirt bottom.

4.1 Apparatus.
4.2 Method cited.
Method 5550, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cotton, Linen and Blended Cotton

and Linen Cloth

METHOD 7550
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The procedure shall be as described in Method 5550, except that the
— results shall be calculated as follows:
Shrinkage, percent = Initial measurement-Measurement after laundering x 100

Initial measurement
6. REPORT
6.1 The shrinkage of the sample unit shall be the average of the specimens
tested, and each dimension shall be reported separately to the nearest 0.1
percent.
reported.

METHOD 7552
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING OF GARMENTS AND READY-MADE

ARTICLES OTHER THAN COTTON AND LINEN
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the shrinkage of woven garments
and ready-made artlcles containing fibers other than cotton or linen or mixtures
of either cotton or linen and other fibers, when sub j acted to a normal laundering
procedure. It may be used for some knitted garments. Shrinkage in laundering
is the change in measured distances due to laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be the complete garment or ready-made article
prepared as described in Method 7550.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.2 Methods cited.
Cloth
Method 5552, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cloth Other than Cotton and Linen
Method 7550, Shrinkage in Laundering of Cotton and Linen Garments and
Ready-Made Articles
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The procedure shall be as described in Method 5552 except for the following:
5.1.1 Pressing. The specimen shall be pressed as described in Method 5550.
5.1.2 Dimensional measurement. The pressed specimen shall be measured as

METHOD 7552
5.1.3 Calculation of results. Shrinkage shall be calculated as follows:
Shrinkage, percent = Initial measurement - Measurement after laundering x 100
Initial measurement
6. REPORT
tested, and each dimension shall be reported separately to the nearest 0.1 percent.
FED. TEST METHOD NO. 191A

METHOD 7554
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING OF WOOL GARMENTS AND READY-MADE ARTICLES;

ACCELERATED METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the shrinkage in laundering of
woven or knitted shrink-resistant wool garments and articles by means of an
accelerated procedure. It is much more severe than Methods 7552, 7556, and 7560,
and is especially useful in determining by one test the shrinkage equivalent of
a number of normal launderings. The article may or may not be relaxed prior to
this test as required by the procurement document. (See relaxation method 7558.)
Shrinkage in laundering is the change in measured distances due to laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be the complete garment or article prepared as described
in Method 7550.
4.1 Appratus
4.1.1 Wash wheel. Wash wheel as described in Method 5550.
4.1.2 Extractor. Extractor as described in Method 5550.
4.1.3 Drier. Drier as described in Method 5556, except that it shall be
provided with means of maintaining a stack temperature of 130° ± 2°F (54° ± 1°C).
4.1.4 Pressing equipment as described in Method 7556, except that it shall be
equipped to maintain the temperature between 248° to 302°F (120° and 150°C).
4.1.5 Measuring scale. Measuring scale as described in Method 5550.
4.1.6 Water. A source of water at a temperature of 60° ± 2°F (16° ±1°C).
and of not over 50 parts per million hardness.
4.1.7 Buffering agent. A buffering agent for buffering the water to a pH of
approximately 7.0.

METHOD 7554
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 5550, Shrinkage In Laundering; Cotton, Linen, and Blended Cotton
and Linen Cloth
Method 5554, Shrinkage in Laundering; Wool Cloth; Accelerated
Method 5556, Mobile Laundry Evaluation for Textile Materials
Method 7550, Shrinkage In Laundering of Cotton and Linen Garments and
Ready-Made Articles
Method 7556, Shrinkage in Laundering of Garments and Ready-Made
Articles; Mobile Laundry Method
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The procedure shall be as described in Method 5554, except for the
following:
5.1.1 Pressing. After drying, the specimen shall be pressed as described in
Method 5550 except that the temperature shall be 248” to 302°F (120° to 150°C).
Shrinkage, percent = Initial measurement- Measurement after laundering x 100
Initial measurement
6. REPORT

METHOD 7556
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING OF GARMENTS AND READY-MADE ARTICLES;

MOBILE LAUNDRY METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for use where it is desired to reproduce by means
of a laboratory procedure changes in dimensions of woven or knitted garments,
felting of wool, etc., induced by laundering under Army field conditions. Shrink-
age in laundering is the change in measured distances due to laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
in Method 7550.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Wash . . A wash wheel as described in Method 5550.
— . wheel.
4.1.2 Preheating tank. A preheating tank or other device as described in
Method 5556.
4.1.3 Extractor. An extractor as described in Method 5550.
4.1.4 Drier. A drier as described in Method 5556.
4.1.5 Hand-iron or conventional tailor’s press equipped to maintain the
temperature between 248° to 302°F (120° and 150°C).
4.1.6 Measuring scale. Measuring scale as described in Method 5550.
4.1.7 Water. A source of water as described in Method 5556.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 The reagents shall be as described in Method 5556.
4.3 Methods cited.
Method 5550, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cotton, Linen, and Blended Cotton
and Linen Cloth
Method 7550, Shrinkage in Laundering of Cotton and Linen Garments
and Ready-Made Articles

METHOD 7556
5. PROCEDURE
following:
5.1.1 Pressing. A conventional tailor’s press shall be used instead of the
flat-bed press.
5.1.3 Calculation
— — of results. Shrinkage shall be calculated as follows:
Shrinkage, percent . Initial measurement- Measurement after laundering x 100
Initial measurement
6. REPORT
6.2 The range in percent shrinkage between the highest and lowest values of
the specimen shall also be reported.
FED. TEST METHOD. No. 191A

METHOD 7558
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE RELAXATION;
WOOL GARMENTS AND READY-MADE ARTICLES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the relaxation of woven and
knitted wool garments and articles.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
in Method 7550.
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Sink. A sink or other container as described in Method 5590.
4.1.2 Drier. A drier described in Method 5556 except that it shall be
provided with means for maintaining a stack temperature of 130° + 2°F (54°
±1°C) for 30 minutes.
4.1.3 Pressing equipment. Pressing equipment as described in Method 7556.
4.1.4 Measuring scale. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape, or other suitable
4.1.5 Water. Source of water at a temperature of 80° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C) and
of not over 50 parts per million hardness.
4.2 Methods cited.
Method 5558, Shrinkage, Relaxation; Wool Cloth
Method 7550, Shrinkage in Laundering of Cotton and Linen Garments and
Ready-Made Articles

METHOD 7558
Method 7556, Shrinkage in Laundering of Garments and Ready-Made Articles;
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 The procedure shall be as described in Method 5558, except for the following:
5.1.1 Pressing. After drying, the specimen shall be pressed as described in
Method 5556.
Shrinkage, Percent = Initial measurement - Measurement after laundering_ x 100
Initial measurement
6. REPORT

METHOD 7560
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING OF SHRINK-RESISTANT WOOL SOCKS
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining shrinkage during the relaxation
process and the laundering of wool socks which have been given a shrink-resistant
treatment. Shrinkage in laundering is the change in measured distances due to
laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be one sock.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, eight specimens
4.1 Apparatus. (See figure 7560)
4.1.1 Sock measuring machine. The apparatus consists of a metal foot form over
which the sock is drawn, so constructed that the toe section slides freely out of
the heel section. This form shall be fixed in front of an upright arm bearing a
scale graduated in divisions of 0.1 inch (1 mm) and shall have a freely rotating
pulley at the top. A pivoting clamp shall be mounted at an angle so that it will
hold the heel of the sock in a predetermined position. An indicator consisting
of a pointer pin which is inserted through the toe of the sock and the hole in
the toe piece of the form shall be provided. This indicator shall be attached
by means of a cord which passes over a pulley on the upright to a weight formed of
two sections, the smaller of which screws into a threaded opening in the base of
the larger. When the short toe section is used, the small section of the weight
shall be removed to compensate for the difference in weight of the toe sections.
The pointed end of the pointer pin indicates the length of the sock under tension
of 5 pounds (2.3 kg) by its position against the graduated scale on the instrument
upright.
4.1.2 Wash wheel. A wash wheel as described in Method 5550.
4.1.3 Extractor. The extracting equipment shall be as described in Method 5550
4.1.4 Preheating tanks. A preheating tank or other device capable of supplying
water in quantity and temperature as required in 5.2.

METHOD 7560
4.1.5 Water. A source of water which will furnish water containing not more
than 50 parts per million of hardness.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 Detergent. Soap meeting the requirements of type I, class 1 of P-S-1792,
Soap, Laundry (Neutral and Built).
4.2.2 Sodium carbonate. Sodium carbonate meeting the requirements of types
I or II of O-S-571, Sodium Carbonate, Anhydrous, Technical.
4.3 Method cited.
Method 5550, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cotton, Linen and Blended Cotton and
Linen Cloth
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Measurement of specimen. The specimen shall be placed over the metal foot
form and the heel gore aligned with the pivoting clamp which has been brought to
the position governed by the limit stop, and the clamp tightened. The toe gore
shall be aligned with the center of the toe form and drawn smoothly through the
sock and small hole in the top of the toe section, and the pull of the 5-pound
(2.3 kg) weight shall be transferred to the sock in about 3 seconds. When socks
are too short to go over the large toe form, the short toe form shall be used, in
which case the lower separable portion of the weight shall be removed to compensate
for the difference in weight of the form. The sock size under a load tension of 5
pounds (2.3 kg) for 1 minute shall be read directly from the scale and is the
“foot-length” when evaluating the relaxation and foot shrinkage.
5.2 Determination of relaxation shrinkage. After the specimen has been
measured according to 5.1, it shall be relaxed by soaking without agitation, in
20 to 30 times its weight of water containing 0.05 percent of neutral soap at a
temperature of 81° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C). The soaking process shall be continued
for 2 hours at a temperature of 81° ± 2°F (27° ± 1°C). After this, the sock
shall be extracted by means of the centrifuge for approximately 5 minutes, arranged
evenly without wrinkles or tension on the drying tray, and allowed to dry at room
temperature of 221° to 230°F (105° to 11O°C). The sock shall then be brought to
standard condition described in Section 4 of this Standard and measured as outlined
in 5.1.
5.3 Determination of shrinkage after laundering. After determining the
relaxation shrinkage, the socks shall be washed as follows:
Water at 140° ± 2°F (60° ± 1°C) shall be added to the machine until it
reaches a level of 2 inches (51 mm) above the bottom of the cylinder.T O this
water a calculated amount of sodium carbonate shall be added to obtain a 0.2
percent solution and a minimum amount of neutral soap added to produce a low-level

METHOD 7560
suds. This condition is considered to have been reached when the suds come
halfway up the cylinder on rotating the cylinder (cage) away from the operator.
The specimen or specimens shall be added to the wash wheel with sufficient shrink
resistant and nonfelted wool or wool not previously laundered for more than 6
hours, to make up a dry load of 5 pounds (2.3 kg) and the machine set in motion.
Socks which contain 80 percent or less of wool shall be laundered for a period of
2 hours. Socks with more than 80 percent wool shall be laundered for 1 hour. The
temperature of the washing solution shall be maintained at 140° ± 2°F (60° ±
lot) l At the end of the washing period, the machine shall be drained and the socks
subjected to two 5-minute rinses with water at a temperature of 120° ± 2°F (49°
± 1°C). The rinse water depth shall be 10 Inches (254 mm) as measured from the
bottom of the cylinder. After the second rinse the socks shall be extracted for
5 minutes, arranged evenly without wrinkles or tension on the drying tray, and
dried as described in 5.2. The socks shall then be brought to standard condition
as described in Section 4 of this Standard, and measured as described in 5.1.
5.4.1 Shrinkage shall be calculated as follows:
Relaxation shrinkage, = Initial measurement - Measurement after relaxation x 100
percent Initial measurement
Felting shrinkage, = Measurement after relaxation- Measurement after laundering x 100
percent Measurement after relaxation
Total shrinkage, = Initial measurement - Measurement after laundering x 100
percent Initial measurement
6. REPORT
6.1 The relaxation, felting, and total shrinkage of the sample unit shall be
the average of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported
separately to the nearest 0.1 percent.

METHOD 7560
SOCK MEASURING DEVICE

METHOD 7561
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN LAUNDERING OF SHRINK-RESISTANT TREATED WOOL

SOCKS ; ACCELERATED METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the relaxation and felting
shrinkage of shrink-resistant treated socks by means of an accelerated pro-
cedure. This method is especially useful in determining, by one test, the
shrinkage equivalent to a number of field mobile launderings. Shrinkage in
laundering is the change in measured distances due to laundering.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be one sock.
3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, eight speci-
mens shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS, REAGENT AND METHODS CITED
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Sock measuring machine. A sock measuring machine as described in
Method 7560.
measuring device graduated in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).
4.1.3 Wash wheel. Awash wheel as described in Method 5550.
4.1.4.1 Extractor. The extracting equipment shall be as described in
Method 5550.
4.1.4.2 Drier. The drier shall be as described in Method 5556.
4.2 Reagent.
4.2.1 Buffering agent. Suitable agent for buffering the water to a pH of 7.0.

METHOD 7561
4.3 Methods cited.
Method 5550, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cotton, Linen and Blended
Cotton and Linen Cloth
Method 5554, Shrinkage in Laundering; Wool Cloth; Accelerated
Method 5558, Shrinkage, Relaxation; Wool Cloth
Method 7560, Shrinkage in Laundering of Shrink-Resistant Wool Socks
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Measurement of specimen.
5.1.1 Foot length. The specimen shall be placed over a metal foot form and
the heel gore aligned with the pivoting clamp which has been brought to the
position governed by the limit stop and the clamp tightened. The toe gore shall
be aligned with the center of the toe form and drawn smoothly back. The pin
on the indicator shall be passed through the sock and small hole in the top of
the toe form and the force of the weight applied slowly and uniformly (approxi-
mately 1 inch (25 mm) per second) to the sock. When socks are too short to go
over the large toe form, the short toe form shall be used, in which case the
lower separable portion of the weight shall be removed to compensate for the
difference in weight of the form. The sock size under a load tension of 5
pounds (2.3 kg) for 1 minute shall be read directly from the scale and is the
“foot length” when evaluating the relaxation and felting shrinkage.
5.1.2 Leg length. The sock shall be laid out without tension on a flat sur-
face, care being taken that the sock is smooth and free from wrinkles or creases.
The distance between the lower edge of the heel and the extreme top edge of the
sock shall be marked with indelible ink or by other suitable means.
5.1.3 Leg width. With the sock in position for the leg measurement, the
width of the leg shall be measured at a point equidistant from the lower edge
of the heel and the extreme top edge of the sock to the nearest 0.1 inch (1 mm).
The two points representing the ends of the measured leg width shall be marked
with indelible ink or by other suitable means.

METHOD 7561
5.1.4 Foot width. With the sock in position for the leg length measurement,
the width of the foot shall be measured at a point equidistant from the extreme
tip of the toe to the back edge of the-heel to the nearest 0.1 inch (1 mm).
The two points representing the ends of the measured foot width shall be marked
with indelible ink or by other suitable means.
5.2 Relaxation shrinkage. The relaxation shrinkage shall be determined as
described in Method 5558, 5.1 and 5.2.
5.2.1 After drying, the sock shall be brought to standard condition as
described in Section 4 of this Standard and measured again as described in
5.10
5.3 Felting shrinkage. The felting shrinkage of the socks which have been
previously relaxed shall be determined as described in Method 5554, 5.1 and 5.2.
5.3.1 After drying the socks shall be brought to standard condition and
measured again as described in 5.1.
5.4.1 Shrinkage shall be calculated as follows:
Relaxation shrinkage, percent =
Initial measurement- Measurement after relaxation x 100
Initial measurement
Felting, shrinkage, percent =
Measurement after relaxation - Measurement after laundering x 100
Measurement after relaxation
6. REPORT
6.1 The relaxation and felting shrinkage of the sample unit shall be the
average of the results obtained from the specimens tested and shall be reported
reported.

METHOD 7580
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN DRY CLEANING; GARMENTS AND READY-MADE

ARTICLES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the shrinkage of woven garments
and ready-made articles when dry cleaned. It may be used for some knitted
articles. Shrinkage in dry cleaning is the change in measured distance due
to dry cleaning.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be the complete garment or article prepared as
4.1 Apparatus.
4.1.1 Tumble jar, steam board and pressing equipment. The tumble jar, steam
board or table, and pressing equipment shall be as described in Method 5580.
4.1.2 Drying equipment. The drying equipment shall be as described in
Method 5550.
4.2 Reagents.
4.2.1 The reagents shall be as described in Method 5580.

METHOD 7580
4.3 Methods cited.
and Linen Cloth
Method 5580, Shrinkage in Dry Cleaning; Cloth
Method 7550,Shrinkage in Laundering of Cotton and Linen Garments and
Ready-Made Articles
50 PROCEDURE
following:
5.1.1 Pressing. After drying, the specimen shall be pressed as described
in Method 5550.
5.1.2 Evaluation. The pressed specimen shall be measured as described in
Method 5550.
Shrinkage, percent = initial measurement - Measurement after laundering x 100
Initial measurement
6. REPORT
tested, and each dimension shall be reported separately to the nearest 0.1
percent.
reported.
FED. TEST METHOD. STD. No. 191A

METHOD 7590
July 20, 1978
SHRINKAGE IN SPONGING; GARMENTS AND READY-MADE ARTICLES
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining the shrinkage in sponging of
wool and wool mixture garments and ready-made articles. It is less severe
than laundering methods. Shrinkage in sponging is the change in measured
distances due to sponging.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 The specimen shall be the complete garment or article prepared as
4. APPARATUS, REAGENT AND METHODS CITED
4.1 Apparatus
4.1.1 Sink or washwheel. A sink, washwheel, or similar apparatus of such
shape and size as to allow the specimen to be laid flat and soaked without
folding.
4.1.2 Measuring scale. Yardstick, meterstick, metal tape, or other suit-
able measuring device graduated in increments of 1/16 inch (1 mm).
4.1.301 Rack and drying trays. A rack and tray of any convenient size
over 22 by 22 inches (559 mm by 559 mm). The bottoms of the trays shall be
a wire mesh, and the size of the mesh shall be a minimum of 1/2 by 1/2 inch
(13 mm by 13 mm). When the trays are in the rack, they shall be separated
by a distance of not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and openings shall be
provided in the rack for circulation of the air.
METHOD 7590
minute.
4.1.3.3 Drying oven. A circulating-air oven thermostatically controlled
and capable of maintaining the temperature at 221° to 230°F (105° to 11O°C).
inches (610 mm x 1270 mm) or larger. Any flat-bed press capable of pressing
a specimen 22 inches (559 mm) square or a hand-iron weighing approximately
6 pounds (2.7 kg) may be used as an alternative. The flat-bed press or
iron shall be equipped with a temperature control to maintain the temperature
between 275° and 300°F (135° and 149°C).
4.2 Reagent.
4.2.1 Wetting agent. A wetting agent such as the dioctyl ester of sodium
sulfosuccinic acid (Deceresol OT, Aerosol OT) or equivalent.
4.3 Methods cited.
Method 5550, Shrinkage in Laundering; Cotton, Linen and Blended
Cotton and Linen Cloth
Method 7550, Shrinkage in Laundering of Cotton and Linen Garments
and Ready-Made Articles
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 Wetting-out. Water containing 0.03 percent by volume of active ingre-
dient of the wetting agent shall be added to the container in sufficient
quantity to completely cover the specimen. A solution composed of 22 gallons
(83.3 L) of water plus 100 ml of 25 percent concentrated “Deceresol OT” has
been found suitable for wetting-out 6 pounds (2.7 kg) of material. The
water shall be at a temperature of 75° to 85°F (24° to 29°C) and shall have
not over 50 parts per million hardness. The specimen shall be placed in the
water and kept submerged without agitation for a period of 60 ± 1 minute.
Each specimen shall be separately laid flat in the water without folding.
Care shall be taken to see that each specimen is wet-out.
5.2 Drying. The specimen shall be dried as described in Method 5550.
—
METHOD 7590
5.3 Evaluation. The pressed specimen shall be measured as described in
Method 5550.
Shrinkage, percent= Initial measurement- Measurement after laundering
Initial measurement x 100
6. REPORT
tested, and each dimension shall be reported separately to-the nearest 0.1
percent.
reported.
7. NOTES
7.1 Machines of the type described in this method may be purchased from
Ewing Division of Powercom, P.O. Box 454, Troy, NY 12181.

METHOD 9010
July 20, 1978
SHADE MATCHING OF TEXTILE MATERIALS;

VISUAL METHOD
1. SCOPE
1.1 This method is intended for determining shade of textile materials
by visual comparison against standard shade references and, when available,
a range of tolerance.
2. TEST SPECIMEN
2.1 Dyed woven or knitted cloths. The test specimen shall be a representa-
tive rectangle of cloth, 5 inches (127 mm) in the warp by 8 inches (203 mm) in
the filling direction taken from the bolt, roll, or piece of cloth. All
surfaces shall be clean and free from stains or soiling of any type. Torn
edges, markings or other marks shall be removed from the matching area. For
woolen cloths, the shear jump area shall not be included.
2.2 Narrow cloths, braids, tapes, webbings. The test specimen shall be a
minimum of 8 inches (203 mm) in length and the full width as received. It may
be or may not be cut from the sample unit.
2.3 Loose fiber. The test specimen shall be carded and made Into a
suitable size lap or pad for visual comparison.
2.4 Threads, yarns. The test specimen shall be in skein form, wound on a
card to form a compact area of parallel yarns or knitted to suitable size.
3.1 Woven or knitted cloths, narrow cloths, braids, tapes, and webbings.
Unless otherwise specified in the procurement document, one specimen per
bolt, roll, or piece of cloth shall be tested. Each bolt, roll, or piece
in a lot shall be tested for shade.
3.2 Threads, yarns, and loose fiber. Unless otherwise specified in the
procurement document, three specimens shall be tested from each sample unit.
4. APPARATUS
4.1 Shade board. The shade board shall be of a material, preferably wood,
providing a planed surface with no distortions or depressions. The board
shall form a platform set at an angle of 37 ± 2 degrees to the horizontal

METHOD 9010
above a table or cabinet placed within an area painted to Munsell Neutral
Color N 8/(see 7.7) having a flat reflectance curve characteristic across the
visible spectrum (see 7.1) so that no spectral distortion of the light possibly
reflected to the shade board can occur. The shade board shall be shielded
from extraneous light. There shall be no apparent reflections on the shade
board from surrounding surfaces.
4.2 Color matching lamp light source) (see 7.2). The color matching lamp
shall be an assembly of individual lamps to match the curve for Abbot-Gibson
daylight at a correlated color temperature of 7500 K ± 200 K (simulated north sky
daylight generally referred to as CIE Source D 75) (see 7.8.11) and a minimum level
of 100 foot-candles. The drop in illumination intensity from the center of the
board to the periphery shall be not more than 25 foot-candles. The shade board
and color matching lamp shall be exactly parallel to each other and shall be so
aligned that the light flux centers at the center of the shade board. An offset,
only to the degree necessary to eliminate shadow of the observer, shall be permitted.
4.2.1 An array of 300-watt incandescent photoflood lamps wired with internal
resistance in the circuit to provide a color temperature between 2200 K (hori-
zon sunlight) and 2854 K (CIE Source A) (see 7.8.11).
4.2.2 An arrangement of six evenly spaced 15-watt backlight ultra violet (UV)
tubes to provide UV content to the daylight source or to be used as such in
checking fluorescence.
4.2.3 The light flux shall be transmitted to the shade board through water
white optical non-color selective diffusing glass with high diffusion efficiency.
For maximum diffusing efficiency, the diffusing glass shall have a waffle pattern
on one side and fluted edges on the other.
4.2.4 A blower of suitable size shall be attached to the lamp for cooling.
Means shall be provided for eliminating the hot air exhaust from the lamps. The
air in the test area shall be clean, filtered if necessary.
4.2.5 The electric light bulbs, Corning filters (see 7.5), and diffusing
glass of the lamp shall be cleaned periodically using a mild soap and water
solution, a 50/50 alcohol-water mixture or other suitable solution which will
not adversely affect the transmission and spectral quality of the glass.
4.2.6 A color temperature meter (see 7.3).
4.2.7 A foot-candle meter (see 7.4).
4.3 Standard (Cool White) fluorescent light.
4.4 Blotting paper
. ..-
METHOD 9010
5. PROCEDURE
5.1 In case of dispute and when obvious finish
—. -differences between the
standard reference and specimen exist. Preparation of specimens containing
wool fiber and those displaying a high degree of finish: The standard shade,
tolerances and test specimen shall be wetted by immersion in the water con-
taining a small amount of alkylaryl polyether alcohol. No mechanical action
shall be used. The specimen shall be removed from the water, blotted free of
excess moisture between sheets of blotting paper and dried without mechanical
action on the specimen at a temperature not to exceed 160°F (71°C).
5.2 The shade board shall be covered with the shade standard. When the
shade standard Is of insufficient size to cover the board, a neutral gray
with a flat spectral response of approximately the same lightness level as
the shade standard or the shade to be evaluated shall be used to cover the
board. The tolerance or shade range specimens shall be placed across the
upper edge of the standard. The tolerance or shade range shall include a
sample of the standard. The test specimen shall be placed on the shade
board overlapping the standard sample and in the same plane and with the
weave design in the same direction. Unless otherwise specified, all samples
shall be placed on the shade board with the warp direction running up and
down the short dimension of the shade board. The observer, whose vision has
been tested and found to be normal by using the ISCC-AO Pseudoisochromatic
Plates (see 7.6) and the Farnsworth Munsell 100 Hue Test (see 7.7) or equally
accepted method, shall stand before the shade board with his eyes at a level
which permits the observer to look into the samples to be matched at an angle
of 90 degrees and insure a minimum blocking of the light upon the standard.
The viewing distance shall be 30 inches ± 6 inches (762 mm ±152 mm) while
performing the test, and the observer shall not move his head or change the
angle of view. Decisions as to whether the test specimen falls within or without
the tolerance limits shall be made as rapidly as possible, as prolonged viewing
tends to cause blending effects.
5.3 The test specimen shall be compared to the standard under the 7500 K
± 200 K daylight source (see 4.2). An evaluation as to its lightness and
chromaticity or hue characteristics relative to the standard shall be made.
The test specimen shall also be compared to the tolerances. An evaluation
as to which tolerance it comes closest to or whether it departs further from
the standard than the tolerances in lightness and chromaticity, shall be made.
5.4 The test specimen shall then be compared to the standard under the
2200 K to 2854 K source (see 4.2.1). An evaluation as to its lightness and
chromaticity characteristics relative to the standard shall be made.
5.4.1 When bleached whites, fluorescent materials or materials con-
taining fibers suspected of being optically brightened are being tested,
they shall be evaluated under a 7500 K ± 200 K source (see 4.2). When specified,
METHOD 9010
an ultra violet source shall be added to the 7500 K + 200 K source. An evaluation
as to its lightness and chromaticity characteristics—relative to the standard shall
be made under the combined source. The test specimen shall then be compared to
the tolerances. An evaluation as to which tolerance it comes closest to or whether
it departs further from the standard than the tolerance in lightness and
chromaticity, shall be made.
5.4.2 When specified, a further evaluation shall be made under a standard cool
white fluorescent light.
5.5 When specified, specimens may be checked for total fluorescence and
chromaticity against the standard of reference using the ultra violet source
only.
5.6 In cases of dispute only, to eliminate any questions as to possible
slight aberrations in color vision that might occur due to human factors, at
least two observers shall perform the evaluation and agree.
5.7 Unless otherwise specified, deviations from the standard procedure,
i.e., tilting of the specimens, changing of the angle of view of the observer
may not be performed in evaluating the specimen.
6. REPORT
6.1 Tolerance range available. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, when a tolerance range is available, shade matching of each individual
specimen tested shall be reported as “pass” or “fail” for lightness and chromaticity
in respect to the standard and related established tolerances. A passing result
which is approaching borderline conditions, i.e. , failure, shall be reported to
serve as a guide for future production.
6.1.1 In the event of failure, the report shall state the specific nature —
of the failure and the applicable direction of failure to enable production
personnel to bring the shade within the acceptable limits.
6.2 No tolerance range available. Unless otherwise specified in the procurement
document, when a tolerance range is not available, shade matching shall be reported
as “pass” or “fail” as compared to the standard sample for lightness and
chromaticity.
6.3 Fluorescent materials. When fluorescent materials are tested, the test
report shall indicate use of the ultra violet source or additional fluorescent
lights .
7. NOTES
7.1 The nominal calorimetric specifications for a suitable neutral gray are
as follows:

METHOD 9010
x = 0.314
y = 0.331
y = 59.1%
Source D65 reference MgO
7.2 A suitable lamp meeting these requirements contains 10 (1000-2000 watt)
tungsten filament lamps with daylight filters; 14 (300 watt) photoflood lamps
and six (15 watt) backlight W tubes may be obtained from the Macbeth
Daylight Corporation, Newburgh, NY 12550, and is called the Macbeth Super
Skylight BX 1014.
7.3 A suitable color temperature meter may be obtained from the Photo
Research Corporation, 837 North Cahuenga Blvd., Hollywood, CA.
7.4 A foot-candle meter may be obtained from the Weston Electrical Instru-
ment Corporation, Newark, NY 07102, and is called the Model 614 Weston
Foot-Candle Meter.
7.5 Corning filters vary in thickness and the color temperature achieved
is dependent to a degree on this factor. The relationship between the color
temperature of the illuminant and the effective color temperature of the
filtered radiation that follows, is to a close approximation:
1 - 0.1 = Kt
T1 T2
where: T1 = color temperature of the illuminant
T2 = effective color temperature of the filtered radiation
t = thickness of the glass filter
K = constant characteristic of the melt
The light source for the level of color matching required under this method
shall be required to have a conformity index of ± 127.3. The conformity index
is calculated as shown in the following table:

METHOD 9010
Computation of Conform= Index for Source Having
Continuous Spectrum Only
Band Wave Test source Adjusted to Standard Standard Source
length equal std. source test
(mu) Col 3 X k*
No. mu rel. energy rel. energy rel. rel.
energy energy
1 400 81.8 92.5 104.7 12.2
2 410 100.3 113.5 125.5 12.0
3 420 109.6 124.0 128.4 4.4
4 430 116.4 131.7 124.2 7.5
5 440 118.1 133.6 128.0 5.6
6 450 119.5 135.2 132.6 2.6
7 460 117.0 132.4 132.1 0.3
8 470 113.9 128.8 130.8 2.0
9 480 109.7 124.1 128.1 4.0
10 490 106.5 120.5 124.0 3.5
11 500 101.6 118.3 120.2 1.9
12 510 101.6 114 l 9 115.9 1.0
13 520 96.9 109.6 111.4 1.8
14 530 90.7 102.6 107.2 4.6
15 540 88.0 99.6 104.1 4.5
16 550 91.8 103.8 102.0 1.8
17 560 100.0 11301 100.0 13.1
18 570 104.8 118.6 98.1 20.5
19 580 99.5 112.6 96.7 15.9
20 590 85.4 96.6 95.5 1.1
21 600 76.8 86.9 93.9 7.0
22 610 76.2 86.2 91.1 4.9
23 620 73.0 82.6 88.4 5.8
24 630 68.2 77.1 85.9 8.8
25 640 59.7 67.5 83.8 16.3
26 650 56.7 64.1 81.6 17.5
27 660 58.7 66.4 79.8 13.4
28 670 67.5 76.4 78.1 1.7
29 680 76.8 86.9 76.6 10.3
30 690 85.1 96.3 74.5 21.8
31 700 87.4 98.9 72.1 26.8
Totals: 2842.2 3215.3 3215.3 127.3 127.3**

.
METHOD 9010
Total of column 5 = 3215.3
- 1.1313
* Constant K = (Total of Column 3) - 2842.2
** Conformity = ± 127.3
7.6 ISCC-AO Pseudoisochromatic Plates may be obtained from the American

Optical Co., Instrument Division, Southbridge, MA 01550.
7.7 A sample of Munsell Neutral Color N8/, or the Farnsworth-Munsell 100 Hue
Test may be obtained from the Munsell Color Company, Inc., 2441 No. Calvert Street,
Baltimore, MD 21218.
7.8 Three forms of language are generally used in the textile industry;
the standard psychophysical terminology, psychological terminology, and the
idiom confined to use by the practical dyer. All three forms are utilized
to define shade and color properties as follows:
7.8.1 Dominant wave length or hue. Terms that psychophysically and psychologi-
cally, respectively, denote the attribute of color by which an object is
judged to be red, blue, yellow, etc. The idiom of the trade is hue.
7.8.2 Lightness. That attribute of color which defines amount of light
reflected from a material or the attribute of color perception by means of
which a surface is judged to reflect more or less light than another surface,
i.e., depth of shade; darker or lighter in the idiom of the trade.
7.8.3 Purity or chroma. The proportion of spectrally pure color in the
shade or perceptually the attribute that expresses the degree of departure
from the gray of the same lightness, i.e., brighter or duller in the idiom
of the trade. The term “flat” may also be used to indicate an extreme
low order of saturation or purity. A comparable term often used is
“chroma”.
7.8.4 Metamerism. The attribute of two colored bodies, matching well under
one light source, to change their shade differently when exposed to light of
different spectral distribution, in the idiom of the trade, the shade change that
occurs in going from daylight to artificial light, usually defined as unfiltered
tungsten light. When a single sample is viewed under two separate light sources
of different spectral distribution, the change in shade is usually defined in the
trade as the “flare”.
7.8.5 Photochromism. That attribute of a colored body to progressively
change shade with time of exposure to a given illuminating source. This
attribute is usually reversible upon placing the specimen in the dark.

METHOD 9010
7.8.6 Specular or glossy. A surface that reflects strongly in a direction
opposite the incident beam, is highly reflective and acts somewhat as a mirror.
Usually derived from severe finishing and processes such as decating, calendering
and schreinering.
7.8.7 Standard sample. A material that defines the specific shade to be
color matched in production. It may also define other properties as speci-
fied, i.e., colorfastness or degree of finish.
7.8.8 Tolerance range. A scientifically spaced group of shades closely
allied to the standard sample but deviating from it in steps of chroma-
ticity or lightness or both, and which define the outer limits of accept-
ability for conformance to the required shade.
7.8.9 Shade range. A visually selected group of shades closely allied
to the standard sample but not scientifically spaced as in the case of the
tolerance range.
7.8.10 Shading. That attribute of a cloth surface wherein the color
varies across the width of cloth or from one end of a roll or bolt to the
other. Side to side and end to end shadings are usually indications of
defects in processing or equipment maintenance.
7.8.11 CIE. Stands for Commission International d'Eclairage, or International
Comission on Illumination.

SECTION 10 - SUPERSESSION DATA, SOURCE INFORMATION, AND

INTERESTED AGENCIES
10.1 Supersession data. This Standard incorporates and supersedes all the
provisions of FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191, Textile Test Methods dated 31
December 1968, and Change Notices 1 through 5 thereto. In addition, testing
procedures were revised as required, and the sectional format in all methods
was standardized to provide for a more technically adequate and updated laboratory
tool.
10.1.1 New methods. The following new methods have been included, and will
take effect on date of issue of this standard.
Method 2016 - Sodium Salt of [(4, 5-Dichloro, 2-Chloromethane Sulfonmido)
3’, 4’, 6’ Trichloro] Diphenyl Ether Content
Method 2535 - Polyester Content of Fiber Mixtures
Method 2820 - Chitin Content of Textiles, as a Measure of Fungal Contamination
Method 5052 - Stitches per Unit Length in Seams and Stitchings; Determination of
Method 5216 - Durable Press on Fabrics, Shirts and Trousers; Evaluation of;
10.2 Source information and interested agencies.
(Activities outside the Federal Government may obtain copies of Federal
Specifications, Standards, and Handbooks as outlined under General Information
in the Index of Federal Specifications and Standards and at the prices indicated
in the Index. The Index, which includes cumulative monthly supplements as
issued, is for sale on a subscription basis by the Superintendent of Documents,
us Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402
(Single copies of this specifiation and other Federal Specifications required

by activities outside the Federal Government for bidding purposes are available
without charge from Business service Caters at the General Services Administra-
tion Regional Offices in Boston, New York, Philadelphia, Washington, DC, Atlanta,
Chicago, Kansas City, MO, Fort Worth, Houston, Denver, San Franciso, Los Angeles,
and Seattle, WA.
(Activities outside activities may obtain copies of Federal Specifiations,
Standards, and Handbooks and the Index of Federal specifications and standards
from establish distribution points in their agenies)

MILITARY CUSTODIANS Preparing activity:
Army - GL Army-GL
Navy - SA
Air Force - 11 Civil Agency Cooordinating Activities:
Review activities: GSA - FSS
VA-MS
Army - AR, EL, MD, ME, MI, TE HEW - NIH
Navy - AS, SH
Air Torte - 03, 45, 99 Project No. 83GP-0342
DLA -“CT
User activity:
Navy - MC

Fed STD 191a

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fed STD 191a

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fed STD 191a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

TEXTILE TEST METHODS

This standard was approved by the

U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1978 - 261-423/1108

FEDERAL TEST METHOD STANDARDS

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

FEDERAL TEST METHOD STANDARD

TEXTILE TEST METHODS

SECTION 1 - SCOPE AND CONTENTS

1.2 Contents. The contents of this standard are as follows:

Section 1. Scope and Contents

Section 3. Sampling and Number of Specimens

Section 5. General Notes

Section 6. Numerical Index of Test Methods

Section 8. Conversion Equivalents

Section 10. Supersession Data, Source Information, and Interested Agencies.

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

2.2 General Definitions.

2.2.1 Acceptance of a lot. The approval of a lot conforming to contract or

2.2.2 Rejection of a lot. The disapproval of a lot as not conforming to the

2.2.3 Standard sample. A standard sample is a sample of material selected

2.2.5 Test result. A test result is the recorded measurement of a required

2.3 Definitions applicable to sampling.

2.3.4 Sample for test. A specified number of sample units (units of a

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

SECTION 3 - SAMPLING AND NUMBER OF SPECIMENS

3.1 Sampling. The material to be tested shall be sampled as required in

3.2 Number of specimens. The number of specimens to be tested for each

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

SECTION 4 - ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS FOR TESTING

4.1 Humidity and temperature conditions for testing. Unless otherwise

4.1.1 Standard atmospheric conditions. Standard atmospheric conditions

4.1.2 Moisture equilibrium. Moisture equilibrium is considered to have

4.2 Preconditioning. In the event of dispute concerning the results of

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

SECTION 5 - GENERAL NOTES

5.1.1.3 Number of determinations. A statement of the number of test specimens

5.1.1.4 Apparatus, reagents and method(s) cited. A description of the apparatus

5.1.1.5 Procedure. Description of the step-by-step directions for carrying

5.1.1.5.1 Calculation of results. Description of the techniques required to

5.1.1.6 Report. Specific instructions for expressing the results to insure

5.1.1.7 Notes. Additional, but not mandatory information (eg. addresses of

5.2 Significance of Dimensional Statements in Methods.

5.2.1.1 Approximately 2 grams”. This form of expression implies that the

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191.A

5.2.1.2 “2 grams”. This form of expression implies that the numerical

5.3 Supplemental Documents.

5.6 Federal Government activities may obtain copies of Federal Specifications,

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

SECTION 6 - NUMERICAL INDEX OF TEST METHODS

1100 Identification of Wool, Mohair, Alpaca and Silk

Numerical Index (cont’d)

FED. TEST METHOD STD. NO. 191A

Numerical Index (cont’d)

5070 Wales and Courses in Knit Cloth